how might a financial analyst interpret the results 558545

Computing and Interpreting the Fixed Asset Turnover Ratio from a Financial Analyst’s Perspective The following data were included in a recent Apple Inc. annual report ($ in millions):

In millions

2006

2007

2008

2009

Net sales

$19,315

$24,006

$32,479

$36,537

Net property, plant, and equipment

1,281

1,832

2,954

2,455

Required:

1. Compute Apple’s fixed asset turnover ratio for 2007, 2008, and 2009.

2. How might a financial analyst interpret the results?

what would be the net book value of the property land and building at the end of yea 558546

Computing and Recording Cost and Depreciation of Assets (Straight Line Depreciation) K Delta Company bought a building for $71,000 cash and the land on which it was located for $107,000 cash. The company paid transfer costs of $9,000 ($3,000 for the building and $6,000 for the land). Renovation costs on the building were $23,000.

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the purchase of the property, including all expenditures. Assume that all transactions were for cash and that all purchases occurred at the start of the year.

2. Compute straight line depreciation at the end of one year, assuming an estimated 10 year useful life and a $15,000 estimated residual value.

3. What would be the net book value of the property (land and building) at the end of year 2?

what would be the net book value of the machine at the end of 2013 558547

Determining Financial Statement Effects of an Asset Acquisition and Depreciation (Straight Line Depreciation) Ashkar Company ordered a machine on January 1, 2012, at an invoice price of $21,000. On the date of delivery, January 2, 2012, the company paid $6,000 on the machine, with the balance on credit at 10 percent interest. On January 3, 2012, it paid $1,000 for freight on the machine. On January 5, Ashkar paid installation costs relating to the machine amounting to $2,500. On July 1, 2012, the company paid the balance due on the machine plus the interest. On December 31, 2012 (the end of the accounting period), Ashkar recorded depreciation on the machine using the straight line method with an estimated useful life of 10 years and an estimated residual value of $4,000.

Required (round all amounts to the nearest dollar):

1. Indicate the effects (accounts, amounts, and + or ) of each transaction (on January 1, 2, 3, and 5 and July 1) on the accounting equation. Use the following schedule:

Date Assets = Liabilities + Stockholders’ Equity

2. Compute the acquisition cost of the machine.

3. Compute the depreciation expense to be reported for 2012.

4. What impact does the interest paid on the 10 percent note have on the cost of the machine? Under what circumstances can interest expense be included in acquisition cost?

5. What would be the net book value of the machine at the end of 2013?

give the journal entries to record the two expenditures during 2011 558548

Recording Depreciation and Repairs (Straight Line Depreciation) – Nasoff Company operates a small manufacturing facility as a supplement to its regular service activities. At the beginning of 2011, an asset account for the company showed the following balances:

Manufacturing equipment

$100,000

Accumulated depreciation through 2010

54,000

During 2011, the following expenditures were incurred for the equipment:

Routine maintenance and repairs on the equipment

$1,000

Major overhaul of the equipment that improved efficiency on January 2, 2011

12,000

The equipment is being depreciated on a straight line basis over an estimated life of 15 years with a $10,000 estimated residual value. The annual accounting period ends on December 31.

Required:

1. Give the adjusting entry that was made at the end of 2010 for depreciation on the manufacturing equipment.

2. Starting at the beginning of 2011, what is the remaining estimated life?

3. Give the journal entries to record the two expenditures during 2011.

assuming that the machine was used directly in the production of one of the products 558551

Computing Depreciation under Alternative Methods Sterling Steel Inc. purchased a new stamping machine at the beginning of the year at a cost of $580,000. The estimated residual value was $60,000. Assume that the estimated useful life was five years, and the estimated productive life of the machine was 260,000 units. Actual annual production was as follows:

Year

Units

1

73,000

2

62,000

3

30,000

4

53,000

5

42,000

Required:

1. Complete a separate depreciation schedule for each of the alternative methods. Round your answers to the nearest dollar.

a. Straight line.

b. Units of production.

c. Double declining balance.

Method:

Year

Computation

Depreciation Expense

Accumulated Depreciation

Net Book Value

At acquisition

1

2

2. Assuming that the machine was used directly in the production of one of the products that the company manufactures and sells, what factors might management consider in selecting a preferable depreciation method in conformity with the matching principle?

which method would result in the highest amount of cash outflows in year 1 why 558552

Computing Depreciation and Book Value for Two Years Using Alternative Depreciation Methods and Interpreting the Impact on Cash Flows – Schrade Company bought a machine for $96,000 cash. The estimated useful life was four years, and the estimated residual value was $6,000. Assume that the estimated useful life in productive units is 120,000. Units actually produced were 43,000 in year 1 and 45,000 in year 2.

Required:

1. Determine the appropriate amounts to complete the following schedule. Show computations, and round to the nearest dollar.

Depreciation Expense for

Net Book Value at the End of

Method of Depreciation

Year 1

Year 2

Year 1

Year 2

Straight line

Units of production

Double declining balance

2. Which method would result in the lowest EPS for year 1? For year 2?

3. Which method would result in the highest amount of cash outflows in year 1? Why?

4. Indicate the effects of ( a ) acquiring the machine and ( b ) recording annual depreciation on the operating and investing activities sections of the statement of cash flows (indirect method) for year 1 (assume the straight line method).

assume that fedex sold a delivery truck that had been used in the business for three 558553

Recording the Disposal of an Asset at Three Different Sale Prices FedEx is the world’s leading express distribution company. In addition to the world’s largest fleet of allcargo aircraft, the company has more than 654 aircraft and 51,000 vehicles and trailers that pick up and deliver packages. Assume that FedEx sold a delivery truck that had been used in the business for three years. The records of the company reflected the following:

Delivery truck cost

$38,000

Accumulated depreciation

23,000

Required:

1. Give the journal entry for the disposal of the truck, assuming that the truck sold for

a. $15,000 cash

b. $15,600 cash

c. $14,600 cash

2. Based on the three preceding situations, explain the effects of the disposal of an asset.

give the journal entry for the disposal of the furniture assuming that it was sold f 558554

Recording the Disposal of an Asset at Three Different Sale Prices – Marriott International is a worldwide operator and franchisor of hotels and related lodging facilities totaling over $1.4 billion in property and equipment. It also develops, operates, and markets time share properties totaling nearly $2 billion. Assume that Marriott replaced furniture that had been used in the business for five years. The records of the company reflected the following regarding the sale of the existing furniture:

Furniture (cost)

$6,000,000

Accumulated depreciation

5,500,000

Required:

1. Give the journal entry for the disposal of the furniture, assuming that it was sold for

a. $500,000 cash

b. $1,600,000 cash

c. $400,000 cash

2. Based on the three preceding situations, explain the effects of the disposal of an asset.

give all journal entries with respect to the truck on december 31 2012 show computat 558555

Inferring Asset Age and Recording Accidental Loss on a Long Lived Asset (Straight Line Depreciation) On January 1, 2012, the records of Seward Corporation showed the following regarding a truck:

Equipment (estimated residual value, $8,000)

$18,000

Accumulated depreciation (straight line, three years)

6,000

On December 31, 2012, the delivery truck was a total loss as the result of an accident.

Required:

1. Based on the data given, compute the estimated useful life of the truck.

2. Give all journal entries with respect to the truck on December 31, 2012. Show computations.

compute the net book value of the deposit after payment of the january 2013 developm 558556

Computing the Acquisition and Depletion of a Natural Resource Freeport McMoRan Copper & Gold Inc., headquartered in Phoenix, Arizona, is one of the world’s largest copper, gold, and molybdenum mining and production companies, with its principal asset in natural resource reserves (approximately 102.0 billion pounds of copper, 40.0 million ounces of gold, 2.48 billion pounds of molybdenum, 266.6 million ounces of silver, and 0.7 billion pounds of cobalt, as of the end of 2008). Its annual revenues exceed $17.7 billion. Assume that in February 2012, Freeport McMoRan paid $700,000 for a mineral deposit in Indonesia.

During March, it spent $74,000 in preparing the deposit for exploitation. It was estimated that 900,000 total cubic yards could be extracted economically. During 2012, 60,000 cubic yards were extracted. During January 2013, the company spent another $6,000 for additional developmental work that increased the estimated productive capacity of the mineral deposit.

Required:

1. Compute the acquisition cost of the deposit in 2012.

2. Compute depletion for 2012.

3. Compute the net book value of the deposit after payment of the January 2013 developmental costs.

show how these assets and any related expenses should be reported on the balance she 558557

Computing and Reporting the Acquisition and Amortization of Three Different Intangible Assets Trotman Company had three intangible assets at the end of 2012 (end of the accounting year):

a. Computer software and Web development technology purchased on January 1, 2011, for $70,000. The technology is expected to have a four year useful life to the company.

b. A patent purchased from Ian Zimmer on January 1, 2012, for a cash cost of $6,000. Zimmer had registered the patent with the U.S. Patent Office five years ago.

c. An internally developed trademark registered with the federal government for $13,000 on November 1, 2012. Management decided the trademark has an indefinite life.

Required:

1. Compute the acquisition cost of each intangible asset.

2. Compute the amortization of each intangible at December 31, 2012. The company does not use contra accounts.

3. Show how these assets and any related expenses should be reported on the balance sheet and income statement for 2012.

show how these assets and any related expenses should be reported on the balance she 558558

Computing and Reporting the Acquisition and Amortization of Three Different Intangible Assets Cheshire Company had three intangible assets at the end of 2011 (end of the accounting year):

a. A copyright purchased on January 1, 2011, for a cash cost of $12,300. The copyright is expected to have a 10 year useful life to Cheshire.

b. Goodwill of $65,000 from the purchase of the Hartford Company on July 1, 2010.

c. A patent purchased on January 1, 2010, for $39,200. The inventor had registered the patent with the U.S. Patent Office on January 1, 2006.

Required:

1. Compute the acquisition cost of each intangible asset.

2. Compute the amortization of each intangible at December 31, 2011. The company does not use contra accounts.

3. Show how these assets and any related expenses should be reported on the balance sheet and income statement for 2011. (Assume there has been no impairment of goodwill.)

give any adjusting entries required at the end of the annual accounting period on de 558559

Recording Leasehold Improvements and Related Amortization – Starbucks Corporation is the leading roaster and retailer of specialty coffee, with nearly 17,000 company operated and licensed stores worldwide. Assume that Starbucks planned to open a new store on Commonwealth Avenue near Boston University and obtained a 10 year lease starting January 1, 2012. The company had to renovate the facility by installing an elevator costing $375,000. Amounts spent to enhance leased property are capitalized as intangible assets called Leasehold Improvements. The elevator will be amortized over the useful life of the lease.

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the installation of the new elevator.

2. Give any adjusting entries required at the end of the annual accounting period on December 31, 2012, related to the new elevator. Show computations.

give the adjusting entry that should be made by nasoff company at the end of 2011 fo 558560

Finding Financial Information as a Potential Investor You are considering investing the cash gifts you received for graduation in various stocks. You have received several annual reports of major companies.

Required:

For each of the following, indicate where you would locate the information in an annual report.

1. Depreciation expense.

2. The detail on major classifications of long lived assets.

3. Prior year’s accumulated depreciation.

4. The accounting method(s) used for financial reporting purposes.

5. Net amount of property, plant, and equipment.

6. Whether the company has had any capital expenditures for the year.

7. Policies on amortizing intangibles.

8. Any significant gains or losses on disposals of fixed assets.

9. The amount of assets written off as impaired during the year.

Recording a Change in Estimate

Required:

Give the adjusting entry that should be made by Nasoff Company at the end of 2011 for depreciation of the manufacturing equipment, assuming no change in the original estimated life or residual value. Show computations.

explain the rationale for your entries in requirements 1 and 3 558561

Recording and Explaining Depreciation, Extraordinary Repairs, and Changes in Estimated Useful Life and Residual Value (Straight Line Depreciation) – At the end of the annual accounting period, December 31, 2012, O’Connor Company’s records reflected the following for Machine A:

Cost when acquired

$30,000

Accumulated depreciation

10,200

During January 2013, the machine was renovated at a cost of $15,500. As a result, the estimated life increased from five years to eight years, and the residual value increased from $4,500 to $6,500. The company uses straight line depreciation.

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the renovation.

2. How old was the machine at the end of 2012?

3. Give the adjusting entry at the end of 2013 to record straight line depreciation for the year.

4. Explain the rationale for your entries in requirements 1 and 3.

explain why ford management chose to use lifo for certain of its inventories 555628

Analyzing Notes to Adjust Inventory from LIFO to FIFO The following note was contained in a recent Ford Motor Company annual report:

NOTE 8. INVENTORIES—AUTOMOTIVE SECTOR
Inventories at December 31 were as follows (dollars in millions)

Current Year

Previous Year

Raw material, work in process, & supplies

$3,016

$4,360

Finished products

6,493

6,861

Total inventories at FIFO

9,509

11,221

Less LIFO Adjustment

891

1,100

Total

$8,618

$10,121

Required:

1. What amount of ending inventory would have been reported in the current year if Ford had used only FIFO?

2. The cost of goods sold reported by Ford for the current year was $127,103 million. Determine the cost of goods sold that would have been reported if Ford had used only FIFO for both years.

3. Explain why Ford management chose to use LIFO for certain of its inventories.

analyzing and interpreting the impact of an inventory error ndash grants corporation 555631

Analyzing and Interpreting the Impact of an Inventory Error – Grants Corporation prepared the following two income statements (simplified for illustrative purposes):

First Quarter 2011

Second Quarter 2011

Sales revenue

$11,000

$18,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$4,000

$3,800

Purchases

3,000

13,000

Goods available for sale

7,000

16,800

Ending inventory

3,800

9,000

Cost of goods sold

3,200

7,800

Gross profit

7,800

10,200

Expenses

5,000

6,000

Pretax income

$2,800

$4,200

During the third quarter, it was discovered that the ending inventory for the first quarter should have been $4,400.

Required:

1. What effect did this error have on the combined pretax income of the two quarters? Explain.

2. Did this error affect the EPS amounts for each quarter? Explain.

3. Prepare corrected income statements for each quarter.

4. Set up a schedule with the following headings to reflect the comparative effects of the correct and incorrect amounts on the income statement:

1st Quarter

2nd Quarter

Income Statement Item

Incorrect

Correct

Error

Incorrect

Correct

Error

give the journal entry assuming instead that the account was paid in full on march 2 555633

Recording Sales and Purchases with Cash Discounts Brett’s Cycles sells merchandise on credit terms of 2/15, n/30. A sale invoiced at $900 (cost of sales $600) was made to Shannon Allen on February 1, 2011. The company uses the gross method of recording sales discounts.

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the credit sale. Assume use of the perpetual inventory system.

2. Give the journal entry, assuming that the account was collected in full on February 9, 2011.

3. Give the journal entry, assuming, instead, that the account was collected in full on March 2, 2011.

On March 4, 2011, the company purchased bicycles and accessories from a supplier on credit, invoiced at $8,400; the terms were 3/10, n/30. The company uses the gross method to record purchases.

Required:

4. Give the journal entry to record the purchase on credit. Assume the use of the perpetual inventory system.

5. Give the journal entry, assuming that the account was paid in full on March 12, 2011.

6. Give the journal entry, assuming, instead, that the account was paid in full on March 28, 2011.

recording purchases and sales using a perpetual and periodic inventory system 555634

Recording Purchases and Sales Using a Perpetual and Periodic Inventory System Misty Company reported beginning inventory of 100 units at a unit cost of $20. It engaged in the following purchase and sale transactions during 2011:

Jan. 14 Sold 20 units at unit sales price of $47.50 on open account.

April 9 Purchased 15 additional units at unit cost of $20 on open account.

Sept. 2 Sold 45 units at sales price of $50 on open account.

At the end of 2011, a physical count showed that Misty Company had 50 units of inventory still on hand.

Required:

Record each transaction, assuming that Misty Company uses ( a ) a perpetual inventory system and ( b ) a periodic inventory system (including any necessary entries at the end of the accounting period on December 31).

portfolio returns and volatilities given the following information calculate the exp 557666

Portfolio Returns and Volatilities Given the following information, calculate the expected return and standard deviation for a portfolio that has 40 percent invested in Stock A, 30 percent in Stock B, and the balance in Stock C.

State of

Probability of

Economy

State of

Returns

Boom

Economy

Stock A

Stock B

Stock C

Bust

0.4

15%

18%

20%

0.6

5

0

5

analyze the relative effects on the cash position for each situation 558501

Evaluating the LIFO and FIFO Choice When Costs Are Rising and Falling Income is to be evaluated under four different situations as follows:

a. Prices are rising:

(1) Situation A: FIFO is used.

(2) Situation B: LIFO is used.

b. Prices are falling:

(1) Situation C: FIFO is used.

(2) Situation D: LIFO is used.

The basic data common to all four situations are: sales, 500 units for $15,000; beginning inventory, 300 units; purchases, 400 units; ending inventory, 200 units; and operating expenses, $4,000. The following tabulated income statements for each situation have been set up for analytical purposes:

PRICES RISING

PRICES FALLING

Situation A
FIFO

Situation B
LIFO

Situation C
FIFO

Situation D
LIFO

Sales revenue

$15,000

$15,000

$15,000

$15,000

Cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

3,300

?

?

?

Purchases

4,800

?

?

?

Goods available for sale

8,100

?

?

?

Ending inventory

2,400

?

?

?

Cost of goods sold

5,700

?

?

?

Gross profit

9,300

?

?

?

Expenses

4,000

4,000

4,000

4,000

Pretax income

5,300

?

?

?

Income tax expense (30%)

1,590

?

?

?

Net income

$3,710

Required:

1. Complete the preceding tabulation for each situation. In Situations A and B (prices rising), assume the following: beginning inventory, 300 units at $11 = $3,300; purchases, 400 units at $12 = $4,800. In Situations C and D (prices falling), assume the opposite; that is, beginning inventory, 300 units at $12 = $3,600; purchases, 400 units at $11 = $4,400. Use periodic inventory procedures.

2. Analyze the relative effects on pretax income and on net income as demonstrated by requirement (1) when prices are rising and when prices are falling.

3. Analyze the relative effects on the cash position for each situation.

4. Would you recommend FIFO or LIFO? Explain.

what is the conceptual basis for applying lcm to merchandise inventories 558502

Evaluating the Income Statement and Cash Flow Effects of Lower of Cost or Market Harvey Company prepared its annual financial statements dated December 31, 2011. The company applies the FIFO inventory costing method; however, the company neglected to apply LCM to the ending inventory. The preliminary 2011 income statement follows:

Sales revenue

$280,000

Cost of goods sold

Beginning inventory

$33,000

Purchases

184,000

Goods available for sale

217,000

Ending inventory (FIFO cost)

46,500

Cost of goods sold

170,500

Gross profit

109,500

Operating expenses

62,000

Pretax income

47,500

Income tax expense (30%)

14,250

Net income

$33,250

Assume that you have been asked to restate the 2011 financial statements to incorporate LCM. You have developed the following data relating to the 2011 ending inventory:

Acquisition Cost

Current Replacement Unit Cost

Item

Quantity

Unit

Total

(Market)

A

3,050

$3

$9,150

$4

B

1,500

5

7,500

3.5

C

7,100

1.5

10,650

3.5

D

3,200

6

19,200

4

$46,500

Required:

1. Restate this income statement to reflect LCM valuation of the 2011 ending inventory. Apply LCM on an item by item basis and show computations.

2. Compare and explain the LCM effect on each amount that was changed on the income statement in requirement (1).

3. What is the conceptual basis for applying LCM to merchandise inventories?

4. Thought question: What effect did LCM have on the 2011 cash flow? What will be the long term effect on cash flow?

compute the effect of the projected change in the balance in inventory on cash flow 558503

Evaluating the Effects of Manufacturing Changes on Inventory Turnover Ratio and Cash Flows from Operating Activities Carter and Company has been operating for five years as an electronics component manufacturer specializing in cellular phone components. During this period, it has experienced rapid growth in sales revenue and in inventory. Mr. Carter and his associates have hired you as its first corporate controller. You have put into place new purchasing and manufacturing procedures that are expected to reduce inventories by approximately one third by year end. You have gathered the following data related to the changes:

(dollars in thousands)

Beginning of Year

End of Year (projected)

Inventory

$595,700

$394,310

Current Year (projected)

Cost of goods sold

$7,008,984

Required:

1. Compute the inventory turnover ratio based on two different assumptions:

a. Those presented in the preceding table (a decrease in the balance in inventory).

b. No change from the beginning of the year inventory balance.

2. Compute the effect of the projected change in the balance in inventory on cash flow from operating activities for the year (the sign and amount of effect).

3. On the basis of the preceding analysis, write a brief memo explaining how an increase in inventory turnover can result in an increase in cash flow from operating activities. Also explain how this increase can benefit the company.

use of the lifo method reduced the amount of taxes that gm had to pay for the year c 558504

Evaluating the Choice between LIFO and FIFO Based on an Inventory Note An annual report for General Motors Corporation included the following note: Inventories are stated generally at cost, which is not in excess of market. The cost of substantially all domestic inventories was determined by the last in, first out (LIFO) method. If the first in, first out (FIFO) method of inventory valuation had been used by the corporation for U.S. inventories, it is estimated that they would be $2,077.1 million higher at the end of this year, compared with $1,784.5 million higher at the end of last year. For the year, GM reported net income (after taxes) of $320.5 million. At year end, the balance of the GM retained earnings account was $15,340 million.

Required:

1. Determine the amount of net income that GM would have reported for the year if it had used the FIFO method (assume a 30 percent tax rate).

2. Determine the amount of retained earnings that GM would have reported at year end if it always had used the FIFO method (assume a 30 percent tax rate).

3. Use of the LIFO method reduced the amount of taxes that GM had to pay for the year compared with the amount that would have been paid if GM had used FIFO. Calculate the amount of this reduction (assume a 30 percent tax rate).

what effect would the error have had on the income tax expense assuming a 30 percent 558505

Analyzing and Interpreting the Effects of Inventory Errors The income statement for Pruitt Company summarized for a four year period show the following:

2011

2012

2013

2014

Sales revenue

$2,025,000

$2,450,000

$2,700,000

$2,975,000

Cost of goods sold

1,505,000

1,627,000

1,782,000

2,113,000

Gross profit

520,000

823,000

918,000

862,000

Expenses

490,000

513,000

538,000

542,000

Pretax income

30,000

310,000

380,000

320,000

Income tax expense (30%)

9,000

93,000

114,000

96,000

Net income

$21,000

$217,000

$266,000

$224,000

An audit revealed that in determining these amounts, the ending inventory for 2012 was overstated by $18,000. The company uses a periodic inventory system.

Required:

1. Recast the income statements to reflect the correct amounts, taking into consideration the inventory error.

2. Compute the gross profit percentage for each year ( a ) before the correction and ( b ) after the correction.

3. What effect would the error have had on the income tax expense assuming a 30 percent average rate?

compute the increase or decrease in pretax operating profit that would have been rep 558506

Analyzing LIFO and FIFO When Inventory Quantities Decline Based on an Actual Note In a recent annual report, General Electric reported the following in its inventory note:

December 31 (dollars in millions)

Current Year

Prior Year

Raw materials and work in progress

$5,603

$5,515

Finished goods

2,863

2,546

Unbilled shipments

246

280

8,712

8,341

Less revaluation to LIFO

2,226

2,076

LIFO value of inventories

$6,486

$6,265

It also reported a $23 million change in cost of goods sold due to “lower inventory levels.”

Required:

1. Compute the increase or decrease in the pretax operating profit (loss) that would have been reported for the current year had GE employed FIFO accounting for all inventory for both years.

2. Compute the increase or decrease in pretax operating profit that would have been reported had GE employed LIFO but not reduced inventory quantities during the current year.

assume that the second sale was selected from the remainder of the beginning invento 558507

Analyzing the Effects of Four Alternative Inventory Methods – Dixon Company uses a periodic inventory system. At the end of the annual accounting period, December 31, 2011, the accounting records for the most popular item in inventory showed the following:

Transactions

Units

Unit Cost

Beginning inventory, January 1, 2011

390

$32

Transactions during 2011:

a. Purchase, February 20

700

34

b. Purchase, June 30

460

37

c. Sale ($50 each)

70

d. Sale ($50 each)

750

Required:

Compute the cost of ( a ) goods available for sale, ( b ) ending inventory, and ( c ) goods sold at December 31, 2011, under each of the following inventory costing methods (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. Average cost (round average cost per unit to the nearest cent).

2. First in, first out.

3. Last in, first out.

4. Specific identification, assuming that the first sale was selected two fifths from the beginning inventory and three fifths from the purchase of February 20, 2011. Assume that the second sale was selected from the remainder of the beginning inventory, with the balance from the purchase of June 30, 2011.

of fifo and lifo which method would produce the more favorable cash flow explain 558508

Evaluating Four Alternative Inventory Methods Based on Income and Cash Flow At the end of January 2012, the records of NewRidge Company showed the following for a particular item that sold at $16 per unit:

Transactions

Units

Amount

Inventory, January 1, 2012

120

$960

Purchase, January 12

380

3,420

Purchase, January 26

200

2,200

Sale

100

Sale

140

Required:

1. Assuming the use of a periodic inventory system, prepare a summarized income statement through gross profit for January 2012 under each method of inventory: ( a ) weighted average cost, ( b ) FIFO, ( c ) LIFO, and ( d ) specific identification. For specific identification, assume that the first sale was selected from the beginning inventory and the second sale was selected from the January 12 purchase. Show the inventory computations (including for ending inventory) in detail.

2. Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would result in the higher pretax income? Which would result in the higher EPS?

3. Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would result in the lower income tax expense? Explain, assuming a 30 percent average tax rate.

4. Of FIFO and LIFO, which method would produce the more favorable cash flow? Explain.

analyze the relative effects on pretax income and on net income as demonstrated by r 558509

Evaluating the LIFO and FIFO Choice When Costs Are Rising and Falling Income is to be evaluated under four different situations as follows:

a. Prices are rising:

(1) Situation A: FIFO is used.

(2) Situation B: LIFO is used.

b. Prices are falling:

(1) Situation C: FIFO is used.

(2) Situation D: LIFO is used.

The basic data common to all four situations are: sales, 510 units for $13,260; beginning inventory, 340 units; purchases, 410 units; ending inventory, 240 units; and operating expenses, $5,000. The following tabulated income statements for each situation have been set up for analytical purposes:

PRICES RISING

PRICES FALLING

Situation A FIFO

Situation B LIFO

Situation C FIFO

Situation D LIFO

Sales revenue

$13,260

$13,260

$13,260

$13,260

Cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory

3,060

?

?

?

Purchases

4,100

?

?

?

Goods available for sale

7,160

?

?

?

Ending inventory

2,400

?

?

?

Cost of goods sold

4,760

?

?

?

Gross profit

8,500

?

?

?

Expenses

5,000

5,000

5,000

5,000

Pretax income

3,500

?

?

?

Income tax expense (30%)

1,050

?

?

?

Net income

$2,450

Required:

1. Complete the preceding tabulation for each situation. In Situations A and B (prices rising), assume the following: beginning inventory, 340 units at $9 = $3,060; purchases, 410 units at $10 = $4,100. In Situations C and D (prices falling), assume the opposite; that is, beginning inventory, 340 units at $10 = $3,400; purchases, 410 units at $9 = $3,690. Use periodic inventory procedures.

2. Analyze the relative effects on pretax income and on net income as demonstrated by requirement (1) when prices are rising and when prices are falling.

3. Analyze the relative effects on the cash position for each situation.

4. Would you recommend FIFO or LIFO? Explain.

what effect would the error have had on the income tax expense assuming a 30 percent 558510

Analyzing and Interpreting the Effects of Inventory Errors The income statements for four consecutive years for Colca Company reflected the following summarized amounts:

2011

2012

2013

2014

Sales revenue

$60,000

$63,000

$65,000

$68,000

Cost of goods sold

39,000

43,000

44,000

46,000

Gross profit

21,000

20,000

21,000

22,000

Expenses

16,000

17,000

17,000

19,000

Pretax income

$5,000

$3,000

$4,000

$3,000

Subsequent to development of these amounts, it has been determined that the physical inventory taken on December 31, 2012, was understated by $2,000.

Required:

1. Recast the income statements to reflect the correct amounts, taking into consideration the inventory error.

2. Compute the gross profit percentage for each year ( a ) before the correction and ( b ) after the correction.

3. What effect would the error have had on the income tax expense, assuming a 30 percent average rate?

explain how including these costs in inventory increased both inventories and net in 558514

Using Financial Reports: Interpreting the Effect of a Change in Accounting for Production Related Costs Dana Holding Corporation designs and manufactures component parts for the vehicular, industrial, and mobile off highway original equipment markets. In a recent annual report, Dana’s inventory note indicated the following:

Dana changed its method of accounting for inventories effective January 1 . . . to include in inventory certain production related costs previously charged to expense. This change in accounting principle resulted in a better matching of costs against related revenues. The effect of this change in accounting increased inventories by $23.0 and net income by $12.9.

Required:

1. Under Dana’s previous accounting method, certain production costs were recognized as expenses on the income statement in the period they were incurred. When will they be recognized under the new accounting method?

2. Explain how including these costs in inventory increased both inventories and net income for the year.

an explanation of the differences in the ratios across the fifo and lifo methods 558515

Using Financial Reports: Interpreting Effects of the LIFO/FIFO Choice on Inventory Turnover In its annual report, Caterpillar, Inc., a major manufacturer of farm and construction equipment, reported the following information concerning its inventories:

Inventories are stated at the lower of cost or market. Cost is principally determined using the last in, first out (LIFO) method. The value of inventories on the LIFO basis represented about 70% of total inventories at December 31, 2008, and about 75% of total inventories at December 31, 2007 and 2006.

If the FIFO (first in, first out) method had been in use, inventories would have been $3,183 million, $2,617 million, and $2,403 million higher than reported at December 31, 2008, 2007, and 2006, respectively. On its balance sheet, Caterpillar reported:

2008

2007

2006

Inventories

$8,781

$7,204

$6,351

2008

2007

2006

Cost of goods sold

$38,415

$32,626

$29,549

Required:

As a recently hired financial analyst, you have been asked to analyze the efficiency with which Caterpillar has been managing its inventory and to write a short report. Specifically, you have been asked to compute inventory turnover for 2008 based on FIFO and LIFO and to compare the two ratios with two standards: (1) Caterpillar for the prior year 2007 and (2) its chief competitor, John Deere.

For 2008, John Deere’s inventory turnover was 4.9 based on FIFO and 7.3 based on LIFO. In your report, include:

1. The appropriate ratios computed based on FIFO and LIFO.

2. An explanation of the differences in the ratios across the FIFO and LIFO methods.

3. An explanation of whether the FIFO or LIFO ratios provide a more accurate representation of the companies’ efficiency in use of inventory.

which of the following is an acceptable explanation for the difference in net book v 558524

Miga Company and Porter Company both bought a new delivery truck on January 1, 2008. Both companies paid exactly the same cost, $30,000, for their respective vehicles. As of December 31, 2011, the net book value of Miga’s truck was less than Porter Company’s net book value for the same vehicle. Which of the following is an acceptable explanation for the difference in net book value?

a. Miga Company estimated a lower residual value, but both estimated the same useful life and both elected straight line depreciation.

b. Both companies elected straight line depreciation, but Miga Company used a longer estimated life.

c. Because GAAP specifies rigid guidelines regarding the calculation of depreciation, this situation is not possible.

d. Miga Company is using the straight line method of depreciation, and Porter Company is using the double declining balance method of depreciation.

classifying long lived assets and related cost allocation concepts ndash for each of 558534

Classifying Long Lived Assets and Related Cost Allocation Concepts – For each of the following long lived assets, indicate its nature and the related cost allocation concept. Use the following symbols:

Nature

Cost Allocation Concept

L

Land

DR

Depreciation

B

Building

DP

Depletion

E

Equipment

A

Amortization

NR

Natural resource

NO

No cost allocation

I

Intangible

O

Other

O

Other

Asset

Nature

Cost Allocation

Asset

Nature

Cost Allocation

(1) Tractors

(6) Operating license

(2) Land in use

(7) Production plant

(3) Timber tract

(8) Trademark

(4) Warehouse

(9) Silver mine

(5) New engine for old

machine

(10) Land held for sale

identifying capital and revenue expenditures 558536

Identifying Capital and Revenue Expenditures For each of the following items, enter the correct letter to the left to show the type of expenditure. Use the following:

Type of Expenditure

Transactions

C Capital expenditure

(1) Purchased a patent, $4,300 cash.

R Revenue expenditure

(2) Paid $10,000 for monthly salaries.

N Neither

(3) Paid cash dividends, $20,000.

(4) Purchased a machine, $7,000; gave a long term note.

(5) Paid three year insurance premium, $900.

(6) Paid for routine maintenance, $200, on credit.

(7) Paid $400 for ordinary repairs.

(8) Paid $6,000 for extraordinary repairs.

(9) Paid $20,000 cash for addition to old building.

indicate whether an asset has been impaired y for yes and n for no and if so the amo 558540

Identifying Asset Impairment For each of the following scenarios, indicate whether an asset has been impaired (Y for yes and N for no) and, if so, the amount of loss that should be recorded.

Book Value

Estimated
Future Cash Flows

Fair
Value

Is Asset
Impaired?

Amount
of Loss

a. Machine

$15,500

$10,000

$9,500

b. Copyright

31,000

41,000

37,900

c. Factory building

58,000

29,000

27,000

d. Building

227,000

227,000

200,000

compute the amount of goodwill that giant bakery should record on the date of the pu 558542

Computing Goodwill and Patents Elizabeth Pie Company has been in business for 50 years and has developed a large group of loyal restaurant customers. Giant Bakery Inc. has made an offer to buy Elizabeth Pie Company for $5,000,000. The book value of Elizabeth Pie”s recorded assets and liabilities on the date of the offer is $4,300,000 with a fair value of $4,500,000. Elizabeth Pie also (1) holds a patent for a pie crust fluting machine that the company invented (the patent with a fair value of $300,000 was never recorded by Elizabeth Pie because it was developed internally) and (2) estimates goodwill from loyal customers to be $310,000 (also never recorded by the company). Should Elizabeth Pie Company management accept Giant Bakery”s offer of $5,000,000? If so, compute the amount of goodwill that Giant Bakery should record on the date of the purchase.

do a detailed benchmarking analysis of the bookstore s income statement 557244

Do a detailed benchmarking analysis of the Bookstore’s income statement, five product lines, and financial and operating performance measures, using the Association of Universities and Colleges of Canada Stores’ (AUCC) benchmarking information. Identify performance gaps between the Bookstore results and the AUCC averages and consider possible corrective actions. (12 Marks ~ no page limit) Q2. As required by Tom, Emma must develop a few key related short term goals and related performance measures that could be used in future performance evaluations. What objectives and related performance measures might she consider? Provide specific answers. (3 Marks ~ one page limit) Q3. Assuming all AUCC bookstores are suffering from the same trends and experiencing the same financial difficulties, should Milton be benchmarked against the 25th percentile, the average, or the 75th percentile? Why? Assuming all AUCC bookstores are experiencing superior financial performance and sales growth and Milton is experiencing financial difficulties, is the 25th percentile, the median, or the 75th percentile the best source for benchmarking? Why? (2 Marks ~ half a page limit) Q4. Due to prior superior performance regarding sales of custom materials, assume that Milton has the objective to maintain excellence for this product line. Against which comparison point should this product line be benchmarked (e.g., median, 25th percentile)? Why? (2 Marks ~ half a page limit) Q5. Assume that there is an independent bookstore located near the campus of Milton University that also sells apparel with the Milton logo as well as new and used textbooks. Against which comparison point should these product lines be benchmarked? Why? (2 Marks ~ half a page limit) Q6. Based upon your benchmarking analysis, make appropriate recommendations and decisions for the Milton Bookstore. (5 Marks ~ two page limit)

Document Preview:

Individual Written Cases Part 2 (50 Marks) th Due Thursday April 10 Instructions: ? A Hard copy of the report should be submitted at the beginning of the class. ? You are required to complete both of the following cases: Quality Treats, Inc. Case (24 Marks) Milton University Bookstore Case (26 Marks) ? Font type should be Arial and the font size should be 12 points. ? Line spacing should be 1.5 lines. ? Follow the required page limits as stated for each requirement. ? Marks for professional presentation are integrated with the marks of each requirement. ? The assignment should be done independently by each student. ? It is the student’s responsibility to ensure that the assignment is completed when due. ? The Business Faculty requires the Harvard style of referencing for academic papers. Please see Quote, Unquote Referencing, and a Speedy Guide to Harvard Referencing at http://www.viu.ca/business/resources.asp. ? Errors happen in the real life every day, so if you see an error in the cases. Note the error in your report and use your best judgment to continue your analysis. Quality Treats, Inc. Case (24 Marks) INTRODUCTION Nicole Molson is the manager of Strategic Marketing Unit Two (SMU2) at Quality Treats, Inc., a provider of branded, high quality food products. Molson is unhappy with what she perceives to be unfair and inappropriate product costing for her unit, especially for what Quality Treats considers to be special orders. Molson’s education, experience, and expertise as a food scientist and process engineer have earned her considerable respect at Quality Treats, but she has limited accounting knowledge, which holds her back from expressing her serious concerns. Therefore, Molson asked you, soon to be an accounting graduate, to develop a memorandum and a glossary of terms to help her make her case more forcefully to top management. QUALITY TREATS, INC. Quality Treats, Inc., rooted in the upper Midwest…

Attachments:

the contribution format income statement for westex inc for its most recent period i 557280

The contribution format income statement for Westex, Inc., for its most recent period is given below:

 

      Total   Unit
  Sales $ 994,000 $ 49.70    
  Variable expenses   596,400   29.82    
 



  Contribution margin   397,600   19.88    
  Fixed expenses   319,600   15.98    
 



  Net operating income   78,000   3.90    
  Income taxes @ 40%   31,200   1.56    
 



  Net income $ 46,800 $ 2.34    
 








 

The company had average operating assets of $508,000 during the period.

 

Required:
1.

Compute the company%u2019s return on investment (ROI) for the period using the ROI formula stated in terms of margin and turnover. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

  ROI %

 

For each of the following questions, indicate whether the margin and turnover will increase, decrease, or remain unchanged as a result of the events described, and then compute the new ROI figure. Consider each question separately, starting in each case from the original ROI computed in (1) above.

 

2.

The company achieves a cost savings of $15,000 per period by using less costly materials. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

    Effect
  Margin %
  Turnover      
  ROI %

 

3.

Using Lean Production, the company is able to reduce the average level of inventory by $100,000. (The released funds are used to pay off bank loans.) (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

    Effect
  Margin %
  Turnover      
  ROI %

 

4.

Sales are increased by $198,800; operating assets remain unchanged. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

    Effect
  Margin %
  Turnover      
  ROI %

 

5.

The company issues bonds and uses the proceeds to purchase $129,000 in machinery and equipment at the beginning of the period. Interest on the bonds is $12,000 per period. Sales remain unchanged. The new, more efficient equipment reduces production costs by $4,000 per period. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

    Effect
  Margin %
  Turnover      
  ROI %

 

6.

The company invests $183,000 of cash (received on accounts receivable) in a plot of land that is to be held for possible future use as a plant site. (Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

    Effect
  Margin %
  Turnover      
  ROI %

 

7.

Obsolete inventory carried on the books at a cost of $20,000 is scrapped and written off as a loss.(Round your intermediate calculations and final answers to 2 decimal places.)

 

    Effect
  Margin %
  Turnover      
  ROI %

 

the following information relates to david pande co 557302

Exercise 1 12 The following information relates to David Pande Co. for the year 2014. Owner’s capital, January 1, 2014 $48,456 Advertising expense $ 1,817 Owner’s drawings during 2014 6,057 Rent expense 10,499 Service revenue 64,204 Utilities expense 3,129 Salaries and wages expense 29,780 After analyzing the data, prepare an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2014. DAVID PANDE CO. Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2014 $ $ $ Show List of Accounts After analyzing the data, prepare an owner’s equity statement for the year ending December 31, 2014. (List items that increase owner’s equity first.) DAVID PANDE CO. Owner’s Equity Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2014 $ : : $ Brief Exercise 2 6 H. Xiao has the following transactions during August of the current year. Aug. 1 Opens an office as a financial advisor, investing $8,236 in cash. 4 Pays insurance in advance for 6 months, $1,590 cash. 16 Receives $3,044 from clients for services performed. 27 Pays secretary $1,334 salary. Journalize the transactions. (Record journal entries in the order presented in the problem. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit Brief Exercise 2 10 An inexperienced bookkeeper prepared the following trial balance. HUEWITT COMPANY Trial Balance December 31, 2014 Debit Credit Cash $12,759 Prepaid Insurance $3,133 Accounts Payable 4,592 Unearned Service Revenue 3,792 Owner’s Capital 10,959 Owner’s Drawings 6,092 Service Revenue 27,559 Salaries and Wages Expense 20,559 Rent Expense 4,359 $37,110 $56,694 Prepare a correct trial balance, assuming all account balances are normal. HUEWITT COMPANY Trial Balance December 31, 2014 Debit Credit $ $ Total $ $ Multiple Choice Question 98 Meat Puppets Company purchased equipment for $7,200 on December 1. It is estimated that annual depreciation on the equipment will be $1,800. If financial statements are to be prepared on December 31, the company should make the following adjusting entry: Debit Equipment, $7,200; Credit Accumulated Depreciation, $7,200. Debit Depreciation Expense, $150; Credit Accumulated Depreciation, $150. Debit Depreciation Expense, $1,800; Credit Accumulated Depreciation, $1,800. Debit Depreciation Expense, $5,400; Credit Accumulated Depreciation, $5,400. Multiple Choice Question 104 At December 31, 2014, before any year end adjustments, Murmur Company’s Insurance Expense account had a balance of $2,450 and its Prepaid Insurance account had a balance of $3,800. It was determined that $2,800 of the Prepaid Insurance had expired. The adjusted balance for Insurance Expense for the year would be $5,250. $2,450. $2,800. $3,450. Multiple Choice Question 142 Stone Roses Candies paid employee wages on and through Friday, January 26, and the next payroll will be paid in February. There are three more working days in January (29–31). Employees work 5 days a week and the company pays $1,500 a day in wages. What will be the adjusting entry to accrue wages expense at the end of January? Salaries and Wages Expense 1,500 Salaries and Wages Payable 1,500 No adjusting entry is required Salaries and Wages Expense 7,500 Salaries and Wages Payable 7,500 Salaries and Wages Expense 4,500 Salaries and Wages Payable 4,500

question a cost volume profit cvp income statement is frequently prepared for intern 557414

Question: A cost Volume Profit (CVP) income statement is frequently prepared for internal use by management. Describe the features of the CVP that influence make it more useful for management decision making than the traditional income statement that is prepared for external users.

Document Preview:

Question: A cost Volume Profit (CVP) income statement is frequently prepared for internal use by management. Describe the features of the CVP that influence make it more useful for management decision making than the traditional income statement that is prepared for external users.

Attachments:

instructions 1 cases will be randomly assigned in class 2 research the problem 557423

Instructions: 1. Cases will be randomly assigned in class. 2. Research the problem using the online Checkpoint tax research database. 3. Prepare the memorandum following the format of the sample memorandum posted on Blackboard. 4. The memorandum should contain sections. a. Facts . b. Issues c. Conclusion 1. 1 ­ 6 sentences. 2. Remember, there is no right or wrong answer. Many of the fact situations may be argued either for or against the taxpayer. d. Discussion Applicable Law 1. Cite Internal Revenue Code sections. 2. Other cites could include Regulations, Revenue Rulings, and court cases. a. Use the PROPER citation forms as shown in Chapter 2. 3. a. Your particular fact situation may or may NOT have applicable Regulations, Revenue Rulings, or court cases. 4. DO try to find all applicable law regarding your fact situation. Analysis 5. In this subsection compare your fact situation to ALL the authorities cited in the “Applicable Law” subsection of this Discussion . 6. IMPORTANT !!! For EVERY authority mentioned in the “Applicable Law” subsection include a COMPLETE analysis of how EACH cited authority relates to the facts of the research problem. 7. Be SPECIFIC and THOROUGH in your comparison. Cite every authority by NAME. COMMON ERRORS ON MEMORANDUM ASSIGNMENTS WHICH WILL RESULT IN POINT DEDUCTIONS 1. Failure to begin “Applicable Law” subsection with cite to a Code section. ALWAYS start with a code section, not the related Regulation. 2. Failure to give a full citation to a Revenue Ruling and, less commonly, a court case. Citation forms are shown in Chapter 2 of the text. 3. Citing to the CCH, RIA, or other tax service. DO NOT cite to these services. Cite to the primary source (i.e., Code, Regulations, Revenue Rulings, etc.). A tax service cannot be cited as an authority when representing your client before the IRS or in court. 4. A weak “Analysis” subsection. Most students do a reasonable job on the “Applicable Law” subsection, but then lose steam when comparing the facts of the particular situation to the “Applicable Law” subsection.

salialailai ltd manufactures water tanks for different sizes for use by industrial c 557434

Job Order Cost Accounting Salialailai Ltd manufactures water tanks for different sizes for use by industrial customers. The company uses a job costing system, in which manufacturing overhead is applied on the basis of direct labour hours. The company’s budget for the current year included the following estimates: Budgeted total manufacturing overhead $504,000 Budgeted total direct labour hours 24,000 During March, the company started two production jobs: • Job number ST81, consisting of 76 water tanks (Standard size) • Job number MI45 consisting of 110 water tanks (midi size) The transactions for March are described below: 1,000 square meters of aluminium sheet material were purchased on account for $6,000. • 400 kilograms of aluminium tubing were purchased on account for $5,200 • The following requisitions were filed on 5 March: ? Requisition number 112: 260 square meters of aluminium sheet metal (for job number ST81) @ $5.50 per square meter. ? Requisition number 113: 1,100 kilograms of aluminium tubing (for job number MI45) @ $9 per kilogram ? Requisition number 114: 10 litres of superb glue @ $14 per liter. All aluminium used in production is treated as direct material. Superb glue is an indirect material. • An analysis of labour time sheets revealed the following labour usage for March: ? Direct labour: job number ST81, 850 hours @ $20 per hour ? Direct labour: job number MI45, 950 hours @ $20 per hour ? Indirect labour: general factory clean up, $4,500 ? Indirect labour: factory supervisory salaries, $9,600 • Depreciation of the factory building and equipment during March amounted to $13,000. • Other manufacturing overhead costs incurred in March totalled $9,010. • Sales and administrative expenses for March totalled $13,150. • Job number ST81 was completed in March. • 75% of the water tanks (Standard size) were sold on account during March for $700 each. 19 The March 1st balances in selected accounts are as follows: Cash $11,000 Accounts receivable 20,000 Raw material inventory 50,000 Manufacturing supplies inventory 600 Work in process inventory 89,600 Finished goods inventory 223,000 Accumulated depreciation 99,000 Accounts payable 14,500 Wages payable 8,500 Required: 1. Calculate the company’s predetermined overhead rate for the current year. 2. .Prepare and complete a job cost sheet for Job Number ST81 3. Prepare journal entries (without narration) for March to record the following (Note: Use summary entries where appropriate by combining individual job data): i) the issue of raw material to production ii) the labour costs incurred iii) the manufacturing overhead costs incurred iv) the application of manufacturing overhead to production v) the completion of job(s) in March vi) the sale of job(s) in March 4. Calculate the overapplied or underapplied overhead for March. 5. Prepare a journal entry to close this balance to Cost of goods sold.

Attachments:

should scorchers limited continue to buy the part from the outside supplier or 557438

Study the information given below and answer the following questions: 4.3.1 Should Scorchers Limited continue to buy the part from the outside supplier or should it produce the part? Motivate your answer with the relevant calculations. (4) 4.3.2 Provide two other factors that are important to this decision. (2)

INFORMATION Scorchers Limited uses a certain part in its manufacturing process that it purchases from an outside supplier at R256 per part including R40 per part for shipping and other purchase related costs. The company estimates that 54 000 of these parts are required next year and is considering making the part Internally. It has sufficient unused capacity to manufacture the 54 000 parts but would need to employ a manager at an annual salary of R432 000 to oversee this production activity. Estimated

production costs (excluding the additional manager’s salary) are as follows: R Direct material 138 Direct labour 60 Variable overheads 30 Fixed overheads (Assumed to be non incremental) 48

Attachments:

research the problem using the online checkpoint tax research database 557486

Instructions: 1. Cases will be randomly assigned in class. 2. Research the problem using the online Checkpoint tax research database. 3. Prepare the memorandum following the format of the sample memorandum posted on Blackboard. 4. The memorandum should contain sections. a. Facts. b. Issues c. Conclusion 1. 1 ­ 6 sentences. 2. Remember, there is no right or wrong answer. Many of the fact situations may be argued either for or against the taxpayer. d. Discussion Applicable Law 1. Cite Internal Revenue Code sections. 2. Other cites could include Regulations, Revenue Rulings, and court cases. a. Use the PROPER citation forms as shown in Chapter 2. 3. a. Your particular fact situation may or may NOT have applicable Regulations, Revenue Rulings, or court cases. 4. DO try to find all applicable law regarding your fact situation. Analysis 5. In this subsection compare your fact situation to ALL the authorities cited in the “Applicable Law” subsection of this Discussion . 6. IMPORTANT !!! For EVERY authority mentioned in the “Applicable Law” subsectioninclude a COMPLETE analysis of how EACH cited authority relates to the facts of the research problem. 7. Be SPECIFIC and THOROUGH in your comparison. Cite every authority by NAME. COMMON ERRORS ON MEMORANDUM ASSIGNMENTS WHICH WILL RESULT IN POINT DEDUCTIONS1. Failure to begin “Applicable Law” subsection with cite to a Code section. ALWAYS start with a codesection, not the related Regulation.2. Failure to give a full citation to a Revenue Ruling and, less commonly, a court case. Citation forms are shown in Chapter 2 of the text.3. Citing to the CCH, RIA, or other tax service. DO NOT cite to these services. Cite to the primary source (i.e., Code, Regulations, Revenue Rulings, etc.). A tax service cannot be cited as anauthority when representing your client before the IRS or in court.4. A weak “Analysis” subsection. Most students do a reasonable job on the “Applicable Law” subsection, but then lose steam when comparing the facts of the particular situation to the “ApplicableLaw” subsection.

acc 30001 acc 30008 accounting theory semester 1 2014 557499

Acc 30001/Acc 30008 Accounting Theory Semester 1 2014 Assignment Information Sheet Aligning the Incentives of Managers and Shareholders through Executive Remuneration Individual or Groups of 2 Assignment Due 8.00pm 1st May, 2014 Deegan 4e Question 7.21 p. 328 (adapted) “Within annual reports, companies frequently disclose information about how their managers are rewarded in terms of the components of their management compensation plans. For example, within IAS 24 (and AASB 124 within Australia) there is a requirement that information about the components of rewards paid to key management personnel be disclosed within a company’s annual report.” Required: a) Select two large companies listed on the Australian Securities Exchange (ASX) that issue share options as part of their remuneration for key managerial personnel. Use the financial year 2013 annual reports for listed companies to select two such companies, but generally companies within the S&P ASX All Ordinaries Index use stock options as a remuneration mechanism. 2 You are required to explain in a report for the Chief Accountant of the Australian Securities & Investments Commission how the respective components of the remuneration could be expected to align the interests of the managers with those of the owners and to minimise the contracting costs of the organisation. In your report you are expected to draw on (not necessarily in the numbered order): 1) the chosen annual reports 2) at least six quality*, scholarly articles from JOURNALS that appear in the Australian Business Deans’ Council (2013) ranking of journals – Business Source Complete (Ebscohost) is a Library database that hosts scholarly journal articles. 3) media reports of the workings in practise of the Corporations Amendment (Improving Accountability on Director and Executive Remuneration) Act 2011.No. 42, which provided shareholders with a ‘say on pay’ and which may result in ‘first strike’ or ‘second strike’ votes by shareholders. Factiva is a Library database that hosts newspapers). Note: Research for and writing of the assignment can be commenced after the first tutorial. Positive accounting theory is covered specifically in Lecture 6. Executive remuneration is covered specifically in Chapter 7 (pages 291 301) of the prescribed text. Some students find reading scholarly journal articles very difficult. YouTube clips that help with this can be found on Blackboard under ‘Assignments’. *The quality of journals can be assessed by reference to the Australian Council of Business Deans (ABDC) 2013 journal rankings (A*, A, B, C in order of declining quality) available http://www.abdc.edu.au/journalreview l Learning outcomes addressed by the assignment. The assignment is designed to provide you with the opportunity to develop the following learning outcomes: 1 with regard to your accounting theory knowledge, the assignment provides you with the opportunity to develop your understanding of positive accounting theory and, in 3 particular, agency or costly contracting theory and its application to executive remuneration. 2. with respect to generic skills, the assignment provides you with the opportunity to develop your ability to research and analyse complex issues, to formulate well reasoned and coherent arguments and to reach well considered conclusions, and to develop your written communication skills, including the conventions of referencing at university. You are to aspire to the highest standard of work with respect to both the content and presentation of the Report. The Harvard referencing system is to be used as applied by the American Accounting Association’s The Accounting Review an A* journal (ABDC rankings). Marks will be deducted where the Harvard system is not used appropriately. Please note that Wikipedia is not an appropriate source to reference for an academic Report such as this. The Library holds sessions on referencing technique and provides guidelines at http://www.swinburne.edu.au/lib/researchhelp/harvard_style l. LODGEMENT: You must submit your assignment via the Turnitin facility available on Blackboard no later than 8.00pm 1st May, 2014. Students must also keep an electronic or photocopied version of their assignment for evidentiary purposes. The file name should be Surname1_Surname2 (in the case of a submission by two students). MAXIMUM MARKS: 20 Marks toward the final assessment. The assignment will be marked out of 100. The rubric for marking is in the Unit Outline. Assignments will be marked to the same standard regardless of whether one or two students are involved in the submission. When working in pairs, students are expected to contribute equally. On this basis each student responsible for a submission is provided the same mark. Where equal contributions are not forthcoming and this cannot be resolved by the students themselves, the Convenor should be informed in writing. WORD COUNT: the body of the Report should not exceed 1500 words (+/ 10 per cent) (excluding title page, references and executive summary but including footnotes, endnotes and appendices). Please provide a word count on the cover sheet. 4 FORMAT A report format is required for this assignment. In a report, the Executive Summary should provide an overview of the whole report, including any recommendations. This is a ‘thinking’ assignment and what is expected is the personal view of individual students’ based on research and the evidence that has been sourced. Further, an assignment which presents more quotes than constructive analysis and argument may be heavily penalised. SUGGESTED REPORT STRUCTURE 1. Title Page 2. Contents Page 3. Executive Summary (which provides an overview of the whole report) 4. Introduction and Purpose 5. Responses to specific task using appropriate headings and sub headings 6. Conclusion 7. References This assignment is an important assessment component of this Unit and as such the assignment must be properly researched and professionally presented. The assignment should also: • Be all your own (individual submissions) or your group’s (pairs) work • Be word processed (printed), and have 1.5 spacing for clarity; a high standard of presentation is expected • Have the cover sheet with all relevant details, including: student name, student number, tutorial time & tutor’s name Unit name and code date of submission • Contain correct referencing, using the Harvard system. • Include a list of references (alphabetical by first author’s surname) adequately referencing your sources (in text references should only refer to the surname of the author/authors and the year of the publication). 5 Students are reminded to review the University policy on plagiarism. The University uses the Turnitin tool. This is an effective tool to reduce plagiarism. Students should self check their assignments prior to final submission. Documentation on the use of this tool will be posted on Blackboard. Please ensure that you use only the Draft option to check your work. This is a matching and not a punitive tool. The default setting allows every student to check draft submissions, but you should be aware that the closer to the deadline you use Turnitin, the longer it may take to receive a report. Upon receiving feedback from Turnitin, you should amend your assignment to ensure that it is “Plagiarism Safe” before

Attachments:

elctro company manufactures an innovative automobile transmission for electric cars 557514

Elctro Company manufactures an innovative automobile transmission for electric cars. Management predicts that ending finished goods inventory for the 1st quarter will be 80,180 units. The following unit sales of the transmissions are expected during the rest of the year: 2nd quarter 211,000 units, 3rd quarter 497,000 units and 4th quarter 239,000 units. Company policy calls for the endinf finished goods inventory of a quarter to equal 38% of the next quarter’s budgeted sales. (Ending inventory for the 1st quarter does not comply with company policy.) Each transmission requires 0.57 pouns of a key raw material. Electro Company aims to end each quarter with an ending inventory of dorect materials equal to 38% of next quarter’s budgeted materials requirements. Direct materials cost $169 per unit.Prepare a direct materials budger for the 2ndquarterwith the following:2nd quarter’s budgeted production units is 391,680 units, materials needed for production pounds is 182,218 lbs. Budgeted beginning inventory is 69,243 lbs. What is Budgeted ending inventory lbs and materials price per lb? $296 per lbs is not correct

a contingency theory has frequently been used to explain variations in the functioni 557518

a)Contingency theory has frequently been used to explain variations in the functioning of organizations.It has been criticized on a number of grounds, including whether sufficient attention has been given to people and culture.

Requirement

Explain and discuss from a management control perspective, the criticism that contingency theory pays insufficient attention to the people in organizations and to organizational culture.

(b)Some organizations have long standing practices of promoting from existing staff, as a consequence of which they rarely recruit outsiders to any senior position.Staff turnover is vey low.Other organizations have frequent management and structural changes, and often recruit senior managers from outside the organization.

Requirement

Explain the differences in control systems and approaches to management control hat could be expected with these alternative practices.

Question 3

Describe the contingency theory of management accounting and

discuss the relationship between various contingent factors and

features of the management accounting system.

assume the equipment costing 125 000 was purchased for cash and equipment costing 85 557569

4. On the basis of the following data for Grant co. for 2010 and the preceding year ended December 31,2009, prepare a statement of cash flows. Use the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities. Assume the equipment costing $125,000 was purchased for cash and equipment costing $85,000 with accumulated depreciation of $65,000 was sold for $15,00: that the stock was issued for cash: and that the only entries in the retained earnings account were net income of $56,000 and cash dividends declared of $18,000

2010 / 2009

Cash$90,000 / $78,000

Accounts Receivable $78,000 / $85,000

Inventories $106,500 / $90,000

Equipment $410,000 / $370,000

Accum. Depreciation $150,000 / $158,000

TOTAL$534,500 / $465,000

Accounts Payable$53,500 / $55,000

Cash Dividends Payable $5,000 / $4,000

Common Stock, $10 par$200,000 / $170,000

Paid in capital excess par $62,000 / 60,000

Retained Earnings $214,000 / $176,000

TOTAL$534,000 / $465,000

use the following table of states of the economy and stock returns to answer the rev 557639

Use the following table of states of the economy and stock returns to answer the review problems:

Security Returns
if State Occurs

State of

Probability of State

Roten

Bradley

Economy

of Economy

Bust

0.4

10%

30%

Boom

0.6

40

10

1

1. Expected Returns Calculate the expected returns for Roten and Bradley.

2. Standard Deviations Calculate the standard deviations for Roten and Bradley.

3. Portfolio Expected Returns Calculate the expected return on a portfolio of 50 percent Roten and 50 percent Bradley.

4. Portfolio Volatility Calculate the volatility of a portfolio of 50 percent Roten and 50 percent Bradley.

we calculate the expected return as follows 557640

We calculate the expected return as follows:

Roten

Bradley

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

State of

Probability of State of

Return if

Product

Return if

Product

Economy

Economy

State

(2) × (3)

State

(2) × (5)

Bust

0.4

Occurs

Occurs

Boom

0.6

10%

0.04

30%

0.12

40%

0.24

10%

0.06

E(R) =

20%

E(R) =

18%

we calculate the standard deviation as follows 557641

We calculate the standard deviation as follows:

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

State

Probability of State of

Return Deviation

Squared

Product

of Economy

Economy

from Expected

Return

(2) × (4)

Return

Deviation

Roten

Bust

0.4

0.3

0.09

0.036

Boom

0.6

0.2

0.04

0.024

a2 =

0.06

Bradley

Bust

0.4

0.12

0.0144

0.00576

Boom

0.6

0.08

0.0064

0.00384

a2 =

0.0096

Taking square roots, the standard deviations are 24.495 percent and 9.798 percent.

given these correlations which of the following portfolios constructed from these st 557654

Minimum Variance Portfolio Stocks A, B, and C each have the same expected return and standard deviation. The following shows the correlations between returns on these stocks.

Stock A

Stock B

Stock C

Stock A

1

Stock B

0.9

1

Stock C

0.1

0.4

1

Given these correlations, which of the following portfolios constructed from these stocks would have the lowest risk? (1994 CFA Exam)

a. equally invested in stocks A and B

b. equally invested in stocks A and C

c. equally invested in stocks B and C

d. totally invested in stock C

why might managers favor this abc system instead of abram rsquo s older system which 556838

Product costing in an ABC system

The Abram Manufacturing Company in Rochester, Minnesota, assembles and tests electronic components used in handheld video phones. Consider the following data regarding component T24:

Direct materials cost

$ 81.00

Direct labor cost

$ 21.00

Activity costs allocated

?

Manufacturing product cost

$ ?

The activities required to build the component follow:

Activity

Allocation Base

Cost Allocated to Each Unit

Start station

Number of raw component chasis

1 x $ 1.20

$ 1.20

Dip insertion

Number of dip insertions

? x $ 0.35

11.20

Manual insertion

Number of manual insertions

11 x $ 0.20

?

Wave solder

Number of components soldered

1 x $ 1.60

1.60

Backload

Number of backload insertions

4 x ?

2.80

Test

Testing hours

0.38 x $ 50.00

?

Defect analysis

Defect analysis hours

0.14 x ?

5.60

Total indirect activity costs

$ ?

Requirements

1. Complete the missing items for the two tables.

2. Why might managers favor this ABC system instead of Abram’s older system, which allocated all conversion costs on the basis of direct labor?

which product costs are reported in the external financial statements 556839

Product costing in an ABC system

McKnight, Inc., manufactures bookcases and uses an activity based costing system. McKnight’s activity areas and related data follow:

Activity

Budgeted Cost of Activity

Number of parts

Cost Allocation Rate

Materials handling

$ 240,000

Direct labor hours

$ 1.00

Assembly

3,300,000

Number of finished units

17.00

Finishing

150,000

Allocation Base

2.50

McKnight produced two styles of bookcases in April: the standard bookcase and an unfinished bookcase, which has fewer parts and requires no finishing. The totals for quantities, direct materials costs, and other data follow:

Product

Total Units Produced

Total Direct Materials Costs

Total Direct Labor Costs

Total Number of Parts

Total Assembling Direct Labor Hours

Standard bookcase

2,000

$ 24,000

$ 30,000

8,000

3,000

Unfinished bookcase

2,600

26,000

26,000

7,800

2,600

Requirements

1. Compute the manufacturing product cost per unit of each type of bookcase.

2. Suppose that pre manufacturing activities, such as product design, were assigned to the standard bookcases at $4 each, and to the unfinished bookcases at $3 each. Similar analyses were conducted of post manufacturing activities such as distribution, marketing, and customer service. The post manufacturing costs were $20 per standard bookcase and $15 per unfinished bookcase. Compute the full product costs per unit.

3. Which product costs are reported in the external financial statements? Which costs are used for management decision making? Explain the difference.

4. What price should McKnight’s managers set for unfinished bookcases to earn $16 per bookcase?

explain why the costs changed as they did 556840

Comparing costs from ABC and single rate systems

Sawyer Pharmaceuticals manufactures an over the counter allergy medication. The company sells both large commercial containers of 1,000 capsules to health care facilities and travel packs of 20 capsules to shops in airports, train stations, and hotels. The following information has been developed to determine if an activity based costing system would be beneficial:

Activity

Estimated Indirect Activity Costs

Allocation Base

Estimated Quantity of Allocation Base

Materials handling

$ 115,000

Kilos

23,000 kilos

Packaging

204,000

Machine hours

4,160 hours

Quality assurance

114,000

Samples

1,900 samples

Total indirect costs

$ 433,000

Other production information includes the following:

Commercial Containers

Travel Packs

Units produced

3,400 containers

55,000 packs

Weight in kilos

17,000

16,500

Machine hours

2,720

550

Number of samples

340

825

Requirements

1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.

2. Use the activity based cost allocation rates to compute the activity costs per unit of the commercial containers and the travel packs. (Hint: First compute the total activity costs allocated to each product line, and then compute the cost per unit.)

3. Sawyer’s original single allocation base costing system allocated indirect costs to products at $150 per machine hour. Compute the total indirect costs allocated to the commercial containers and to the travel packs under the original system. Then compute the indirect cost per unit for each product.

4. Compare the indirect activity based costs per unit to the indirect costs per unit from the single allocation base system. How have the unit costs changed? Explain why the costs changed as they did.

what are the major features of a jit production system such as that of deep freeze 556841

Recording manufacturing costs for a JIT costing system

Deep Freeze produces fleece jackets. The company uses JIT costing for its JIT production system. Deep Freeze has two inventory accounts: Raw and in process inventory and Finished goods inventory. On February 1, 2012, the account balances were Raw and in process inventory, $10,000; Finished goods inventory, $1,600. The standard cost of a jacket is $39, comprised of $16 direct materials plus $23 conversion costs. Data for February’s activities follow:

Number of jackets completed

19,000

Direct materials purchased

$ 301,500

Number of jackets sold

18,600

Conversion costs incurred

$ 538,000

Requirements

1. What are the major features of a JIT production system such as that of Deep Freeze?

2. Prepare summary journal entries for February. Under or overallocated conversion costs are closed to Cost of goods sold monthly.

3. Use a T account to determine the February 29, 2012, balance of Raw and in process inventory.

what major difficulty would roxi rsquo s managers have in implementing this costs of 556842

Analyzing costs of quality

Roxi, Inc., is using a costs of quality approach to evaluate design engineering efforts for a new skateboard. Roxi’s senior managers expect the engineering work to reduce appraisal, internal failure, and external failure activities. The predicted reductions in activities over the 2 year life of the skateboards follow. Also shown are the cost allocation rates for each activity.

Activity

Predicted Reduction in Activity Units

Activity Cost Allocation Rate Per Unit

Inspection of incoming materials

385

$ 39

Inspection of finished goods

385

22

Number of defective units

discovered in house

1,200

55

Number of defective units

discovered by customers

300

73

Lost sales to dissatisfied customers

100

97

Requirements

1. Calculate the predicted quality cost savings from the design engineering work.

2. Roxi spent $109,000 on design engineering for the new skateboard. What is the net benefit of this “preventive” quality activity?

3. What major difficulty would Roxi’s managers have in implementing this costs of quality approach? What alternative approach could they use to measure quality improvement?

if sheldon paid 3 900 for the job what is the profit or loss under abc 556843

Product costing in an ABC system

This exercise continues the Lawlor Lawn Service, Inc., situation from Exercise 17 34 of Chapter 17. Recall that Lawlor completed a special landscaping job for Sheldon’s Ideal Designs. If Lawlor had used activity based costing, Lawlor’s data about the job, including ABC information, would be as follows:

Sheldon Job details:

Direct materials

$700

Direct labor

$1,200

ABC Costing Rates:

$275 per setup

$15 per plant

Requirements

1. Lawlor uses one setup for the Sheldon job and installs 35 plants. What is the total cost of the Sheldon job?

2. If Sheldon paid $3,900 for the job, what is the profit or loss under ABC?

how much what fee should it charge each of these two clients 556844

Comparing costs from ABC and single rate systems

This problem continues the Draper Consulting, Inc., situation from Problem 17 35 of Chapter 17. Recall that Draper allocated indirect costs to jobs based on a predetermined indirect cost allocation rate, computed as a percentage of direct labor costs. Because Draper provides a service, there are no direct materials costs. Draper is now considering using an ABC system. Information about ABC costs follows:

Activity

Budgeted Cost of Activity

Allocation Base

Cost Allocation Rate

Design

$ 350,000

Number of designs

$ 7,000

Programming

550,000

Direct labor hours

110

Testing

288,000

Number of tests

3,500

Records for two clients appear here:

Job

Total Direct Labor Costs

Total Number of Designs

Total Programming
Direct Labor Hours

Number of Tests

Tommy’s Trains

$ 13,600

3

730

6

Marcia’s Cookies

600

5

300

8

Requirements

1. Compute the total cost of each job.

2. Is the job cost greater or less than that computed in Problem 17 35 for each job? Why?

3. If Draper wants to earn gross profit equal to 25% of cost, how much (what fee) should it charge each of these two clients?

which costing system more accurately assigns to jobs the costs of the resources cons 556845

Decision Case 18 1 Harris Systems specializes in servers for workgroup, e commerce, and ERP applications. The company’s original job costing system has two direct cost categories: direct materials and direct labor. Overhead is allocated to jobs at the single rate of $22 per direct labor hour. A task force headed by Harris’s CFO recently designed an ABC system with four activities. The ABC system retains the current system’s two direct cost categories. Overhead costs are reflected in the four activities. Pertinent data follow:

Activity

Number of parts

Cost Allocation Rate

Materials handling

Number of setups

$ 0.85

Machine setup

Assembling hours

500.00

Assembling

Number of shipments

80.00

Shipping

Allocation Base

1,500.00

Harris Systems has been awarded two new contracts, which will be produced as Job A and Job B. Budget data relating to the contracts follow:

Job A

Job B

Number of parts

15,000

2,000

Number of setups

6

4

Number of assembling hours

1,500

200

Number of shipments

1

1

Total direct labor hours

8,000

600

Number of units produced

100

10

Direct materials cost

$220,000

$30,000

Direct labor cost

$160,000

$12,000

Requirements

1. Compute the product cost per unit for each job, using the original costing system (with two direct cost categories and a single overhead allocation rate).

2. Suppose Harris Systems adopts the ABC system. Compute the product cost per unit for each job using ABC.

3. Which costing system more accurately assigns to jobs the costs of the resources consumed to produce them? Explain.

manning has just returned from a packaging industry conference on activity based cos 556847

Cassidy Manning is assistant controller at LeMar Packaging, Inc., a manufacturer of cardboard boxes and other packaging materials. Manning has just returned from a packaging industry conference on activity based costing. She realizes that ABC may help LeMar meet its goal of reducing costs by 5% over each of the next three years.

LeMar Packaging’s Order Department is a likely candidate for ABC. While orders are entered into a computer that updates the accounting records, clerks manually check customers’ credit history and hand deliver orders to shipping. This process occurs whether the sales order is for a dozen specialty boxes worth $80, or 10,000 basic boxes worth $8,000.

Manning believes that identifying the cost of processing a sales order would justify (1) further computerization of the order process and (2) changing the way the company processes small orders. However, the significant cost savings would arise from elimination of two positions in the Order Department. The company’s sales order clerks have been with the company many years. Manning is uncomfortable with the prospect of proposing a change that will likely result in terminating these employees.

Requirement

1. Use the IMA’s ethical standards (see Chapter 16) to consider Manning’s responsibility when cost savings come at the expense of employees’ jobs.

what are some of the other options that anu might have considered 556848

Anu Ghai was a new production analyst at RHI, Inc., a large furniture factory in North Carolina. One of her first jobs was to update the activity rates for factory production costs. This was normally done once a year, by analyzing the previous year’s actual data, factoring in projected changes, and calculating a new rate for the coming year. What Anu found was strange. The activity rate for “maintenance” had more than doubled in one year, and she was puzzled how that could have happened. When she spoke with Larry McAfee, the factory manager, she was told to spread the increases out over the other activity costs to “smooth out” the trends. She was a bit intimidated by Larry, an imposing and aggressive man, but she knew something wasn’t quite right. Then one night she was at a restaurant and overheard a few employees who worked at RHI talking. They were joking about the work they had done fixing up Larry’s home at the lake last year. Suddenly everything made sense. Larry had been using factory labor, tools, and supplies to have his lake house renovated on the weekends. Anu had a distinct feeling that if she went up against Larry on this issue, she would come out the loser. She decided to look for work elsewhere.

Requirements

1. Besides spotting irregularities, like the case above, what are some other ways that ABC cost data are useful for manufacturing companies?

2. What are some of the other options that Anu might have considered?

units of production depreciation on routers used to cut wood enclosures 556861

Variable, fixed, and mixed costs

Philadelphia Acoustics builds innovative speakers for music and home theater systems. Consider the following costs:

1.Units of production depreciation on routers used to cut wood enclosures.

2.Wood for speaker enclosures.

3.Patents on crossover relays.

4.Total compensation to salesperson, who receives a salary plus a commission based on meeting sales goals.

5.Crossover relays.

6.Straight line depreciation on manufacturing plant.

7.Grill cloth.

8.Cell phone costs of salesperson (plan includes 1,200 minutes; overseas calls are charged at an average of $0.15 per minute).

9.Glue.

10.Quality inspector’s salary.

Requirement

1.Identify the costs as variable (V), fixed (F), or mixed (M).

care has been in operation for several years consider the following costs 556862

Variable, fixed, and mixed costs

Holly’s Day Care has been in operation for several years. Consider the following costs:

1. Building rent.

2. Toys.

3. Salary of office manager, who also receives a bonus based on number of students enrolled.

4. Afternoon snacks.

5. Lawn service contract at $200 a month; any extra work needed is billed at an hourly rate based on the time needed to complete the job.

6. Holly’s salary.

7. Wages of afterschool employees.

8. Drawing paper for student art work.

9. Straight line depreciation of tables, chairs, and playground equipment.

10. Fee paid to security company for monthly service (contract includes up to four responses in a month; responses over four in a month incur an additional fee per response).

Requirement

1. Identify the costs as variable (V), fixed (F), or mixed (M).

calculate a the variable rate per machine hour and b martin rsquo s total fixed util 556863

Mixed costs—high low method

Martin owns a machine shop. In reviewing his utility bill for the last 12 months, he found that his highest bill of $2,800 occurred in August when his machines worked 1,400 machine hours. His lowest utility bill of $2,600 occurred in December when his machines worked 900 machine hours.

Requirements

1. Calculate (a) the variable rate per machine hour and (b) Martin’s total fixed utility cost.

2. Show the equation for determining the total utility cost for Martin’s.

3. If Martin’s anticipates using 1,200 machine hours in January, predict his total utility bill using the equation from Requirement 2.

4. Draw a graph illustrating your total cost under this plan. Label the axes, and show your costs at 900, 1,200, and 1,400 machine hours.

compute the missing information 556866

Computing contribution margin, breakeven point, and units to achieve operating income

Consider the following facts:

A

B

C

Number of units

1,300

3,600

7,500

Sale price per unit

$ 100

$ 40

$ 125

Variable costs per unit

40

10

100

Total fixed costs

72,000

60,000

40,000

Target operating income

180,000

75,000

100,000

Calculate:

Contribution margin per unit

Contribution margin ratio

Breakeven points in units

Breakeven point in sales dollars

Units to achieve target operating income

Requirement

1. Compute the missing information.

hellas pty ltd had the following balances on the 1st of july 2013 materials control 556871

Hellas Pty. Ltd had the following balances on the 1st of July 2013:

$

Materials Control (direct and indirect materials) 5000

Work in Process 10 000

Finished Goods 6000

Hellas Pty. Ltd. uses a Factory Ledger and during July the following transactions took place:

$

· Materials purchased: Direct materials $18 000

Indirect materials $ 3 000 21 000

· Materials issued during the month:

Direct Material 21 000

Indirect Material 2 600

· Total payroll for the period was paid in cash and amounted to $54 000. This was distributed as follows:

Assembly workers 42 000

Supervisor’s salary 8 000

Factory cleaner 4 000

· Other overhead incurred during the month was as follows:

Depreciation on machinery 8 000

Factory light and power 2 500

Other overhead incurred 1 500

Other information:

· Overhead is applied to production at 70% of the Direct Labour cost.

· The balance in the WIP account at the end of July was $13 000.

· During July goods costing $90 000 were sold.

· Goods are marked up at 80% on cost.

Required:

  1. Closing balance of Materials Control Account $__________________

(3 marks)

  1. Closing balance of Finished Goods Account $__________________

(3 marks)

  1. The total actual overhead incurred $__________________

(3 marks)

4.Calculate the amount of under applied or

over applied overhead. How should this

Amount be accounted for? Provide specific reasons for your proposals. (4 marks)

Show all relevant calculations and T accounts

Total marks for Question Three: 13

Question 4

The following information relates to the Mick Richards Company.

Beginning fixed manufacturing overhead in inventory $60,000

Ending fixed manufacturing overhead in inventory $45,000

Beginning variable manufacturing overhead in inventory $30,000

Ending variable manufacturing overhead in inventory $14,250

Fixed selling and administrative costs $724,000

Units produced 5,000

Units sold 4,800

Required:

What is the difference between operating profits under absorption costing and Variable costing? (8 marks)

Total marks for Question Four: 8

this is very important assignment the work need to be done in excel and i have submi 557200

this is very important assignment.. the work need to be done in excel and i have submitted a last year sample file of work.. see the last year work because u need to do the work similar type formate.. the details are given in the assignment question.. read it thoroughly because i need this to be perfect and best..

Document Preview:

Corporate Accounting Systems Consolidated Financial Statements with Non Controlling Interests QUESTION Using the information below and on the next two pages, prepare the following as at 30th June 2014: PART A: Adjustment/elimination journal entries for consolidation at that date; and PART B: Detailed calculation of non controlling interest balance and consolidation worksheet; and PART C: Consolidated financial statements and statements of changes in equity for the group and parent. INFORMATION For the year ended 30 June 2012: On 1 July 2011 Harbour Ltd created a group entity when it purchased 80% of the issued capital of Bridge Ltd for $440,000 cash. On acquisition Bridge Ltd’s accounts showed: Share capital $300,000 and Retained earnings $125,000. All assets and liabilities appearing in Bridge Ltd’s financial statements were fairly valued, except: An item of Bridge Ltd’s plant, that had originally cost $157,000 and had a carrying value of $100,480, was undervalued by $30,000. The plant was still on hand at 30 June 2014. Bridge Ltd had an internally developed identifiable intangible asset, a patent, with a fair value of $35,000. During the year Bridge Ltd made sales of inventory to Harbour Ltd of $70,200. Harbour Ltd’s closing inventories on 30 June 2012 included $33,600 bought from Bridge Ltd (which included the intragroup mark up on original cost price). For the year ended 30 June 2013: On 1 January 2013 it was decided that goodwill acquired in Bridge Ltd should be marked down at a rate of 10% per annum from this date forward. Also on 1 January 2013 Harbour Ltd sold plant to Bridge Ltd for $35,000. This was financed by a short term interest free loan from Harbour Ltd. The plant had originally cost $82,000 when purchased on 1 January 2010. Harbour Ltd declared and paid dividends of $50,000 for the year. Bridge Ltd did not declare or pay any dividends for the year. For the year ended 30 June 2014: During the year Bridge Ltd made sales of inventory to…

healthwise medical supplies company 557202

Please complete a 2012 Partnership Income Tax Return. All the information needed is attached.

From what I can tell, forms 1065 Schedule A through Schedule D, Form 1125 A, Form 4562, and Form 1065 Schedule K 1 need to be completed.

Thank you!

Attachments:

the following costing and financial information refers to global plastic inc 557205

The following costing and financial information refers to Global Plastic Inc. for the year of 2010; Sales Revenues 2,105,000 Raw Material Inventory (1 January 2009) 89,000 Raw Material Inventory (31 December 2009) 59,000 Purchases of Raw Material during the year 731,000 Direct Labour Cost 474,000 Selling and Administration Expenses 200,000 Indirect Labour Costs 150,000 Depreciation of Administration building 69,000 Property Tax on Factory 90,000 Depreciation on Factory building 125,000 Income Tax expense 25,000 Indirect Material used 45,000 Depreciation on Factory Equipments 60,000 Insurance on Factory and Equipments 40,000 Utilities for Factory 70,000 Work in Process Inventory (1 January 2009) 0 Work in Process Inventory(31 December 2009) 40,000 Finished Goods Inventory (1 January 2009) 35,000 Finished Goods Inventory (31 December 2009) 40,000 Manufacturing overhead Applied 577,500 21. the Manufacturing overhead cost is Over or under applied by; A. $3,000 under applied. B. $67,500 over applied. C. $2,500 under applied. D. $71,500 under applied. E. None of the Above. 22. the Company PRIME COST is; A. $1,815,000 B. $1,385,000 C. $761,000 D. $1,235,000 E. None of the Above. 23. the Company Conversion Cost is; A. $1,815,000 B. $1,385,000 C. $1,054,000 D. $1,235,000 24. If the Company management policy is to close the over applied or under applied overhead into Cost of Goods sold, which of the following journal entry is correct? A. Dr Manufacturing overhead applied 577,500 Dr Cost of goods sold 3,000 Cr Manufacturing overhead actual 580,000 B. Dr Manufacturing overhead applied 577,500 Dr Cost of goods sold 2,500 Cr Manufacturing overhead actual 580,000 C. Dr Manufacturing overhead Actual 577,500 Dr Cost of goods sold 2,500 Cr Manufacturing overhead actual 580,000 D. None of the Above. 25. What is the Company Net Income for the year 2009? A. $38,500 B. $107,500 C. $$635,00 D. None of the above. 26. What is the Company cost of goods manufactured? A. $1,855,000 B. $1,775,000 C. $1,844,000 D. $1,815,000 E. None of the above. 27. What is the company cost of goods sold? A. $1,775,000 B. $1,810,000 C. $1,772,500 Questions from 28 to 30 are based on the following information: Job G34 was unfinished at the end of the accounting period. The total cost assigned to the job is $48,000 of which $12,000 is direct material. Factory overhead is allocated to goods in process at 125% of direct labour cost. 28. What was the amount of direct labour charged to Job G34? A. $12,000 B. $16,000 C. $36,000 D. Cannot be determined from information given. E. $28,800 29. What was the amount of manufacturing overhead allocated to Job G34? A. $32,000 B. $36,000 C. $19,200 D. None of the above. 30. What was the amount of total cost of goods manufactured for job G34? A. $48,000 B. $64,000 C. Cannot be determined. D. $84,000 31. An equivalent unit of material is equal to: A. The amount of material necessary to complete one unit of production. B. The amount of material necessary to start a unit of production into work in process. C. Half of the material necessary to complete one unit of finished goods. D. An equivalent unit of conversion cost. E. None of the above is correct. 32. Beginning work in process was 1,200 units, 2,800 additional units were put into production, and ending work in process was 500 units. How many units were completed? A. 500 units B. 3,000 units C. 3,300 units D. 3,500 units 33. The appropriate journal entry to transfer the cost of completed units from the Work in Process account would involve a credit to Work in Process and a debit to which of the following accounts? A. Income Summary B. Raw Materials Inventory C. Finished Goods D. Manufacturing Summary 34. Which of the following comments regarding activity based costing is not a correct observation? A. The per unit cost of an end product under ABC will necessarily be less than the per unit cost under traditional costing methods. B. ABC may produce results that are not suitable for external reporting under GAAP. C. Activities are said to be resource drivers because they consume resources necessary for the activities to happen. D. Batch level activities produce costs that may not be in proportion to the number of units produced. 35. Product under costing occurs when the product: A. consumes a high level of resources, but reports a low cost per unit B. consumes a high level of resources, and reports a high cost per unit C. consumes a low level of resources, and reports a low cost per unit D. consumes a low level of resources, but reports a high cost per unit 36. One of the best tools for refining a costing system (allocate cost more objectively) is: A. activity based costing B. job order costing C. process costing D. FIFO costing E. None of the above 37. All of the following are part of the activity based cost system hierarchy except for: A. Manufacturing overhead unit cost. B. direct unit costs C. batch level costs D. product sustaining costs E. facility sustaining costs 38. ABC company has determined that the shipment setup costs should be accounted for at the batch level of activities. ABC believes that the costs assigned to the shipment setup for the current period will be $440,000. ABC is estimating that there will be 400 shipments totalling 8,000 units during the current period. How much cost should be allocated to an order of 70 units that requires three shipments to deliver? A. $165 B. $1,100 C. $3,200 D. $3,850 E. None of the above. 39. Next Generation Information Systems, Inc. pays salaries to a number of computer scientists to design and develop computer operating systems. Into which component of the value chain would this cost be most accurate classified? A. Manufacturing over head. B. Research and development and design. C. Suppliers and production. D. Distribution and marketing. E. Customer service. 40. Big University recently implemented a telephone course registration system. The system eliminated the need for numerous meetings between students and university staff, resulting in an eventual reduction in total administrative costs. This action by Big University illustrates: A. Activity based management. B. Activity based costing. C. Target costing. D. Quality costing.

Attachments:

do a detailed benchmarking analysis of the bookstore s income statement five product 557232

Quality Treats, Inc. Case (24 Marks) INTRODUCTION Nicole Molson is the manager of Strategic Marketing Unit Two (SMU2) at Quality Treats, Inc., a provider of branded, high quality food products. Molson is unhappy with what she perceives to be unfair and inappropriate product costing for her unit, especially for what Quality Treats considers to be special orders. Molson’s education, experience, and expertise as a food scientist and process engineer have earned her considerable respect at Quality Treats, but she has limited accounting knowledge, which holds her back from expressing her serious concerns. Therefore, Molson asked you, soon to be an accounting graduate, to develop a memorandum and a glossary of terms to help her make her case more forcefully to top management.

Milton University Bookstore Case (26 Marks) INTRODUCTION In January 2014, Emma Wu, the Milton University Bookstore manager, was considering the implications of a shocking development. For the first time in her seven years as the Bookstore manager, textbook sales for this past fall had decreased from the prior fall sales. The sales decrease was approximately $180,000, or 3% of annual textbook sales. Emma wanted to address this problem before it got worse. She found that this sales decrease was due to two emerging technology problems, possibly of equal magnitude: 1) the students’ increasing use of online textbook vendors, and 2) the professors’ increasing use of online textbook publishers.

Q1. Do a detailed benchmarking analysis of the Bookstore’s income statement, five product lines, and financial and operating performance measures, using the Association of Universities and Colleges of Canada Stores’ (AUCC) benchmarking information. Identify performance gaps between the Bookstore results and the AUCC averages and consider possible corrective actions. (12 Marks ~ no page limit) Q2. As required by Tom, Emma must develop a few key related short term goals and related performance measures that could be used in future performance evaluations. What objectives and related performance measures might she consider? Provide specific answers. (3 Marks ~ one page limit) Q3. Assuming all AUCC bookstores are suffering from the same trends and experiencing the same financial difficulties, should Milton be benchmarked against the 25th percentile, the average, or the 75th percentile? Why? Assuming all AUCC bookstores are experiencing superior financial performance and sales growth and Milton is experiencing financial difficulties, is the 25th percentile, the median, or the 75th percentile the best source for benchmarking? Why? (2 Marks ~ half a page limit) Q4. Due to prior superior performance regarding sales of custom materials, assume that Milton has the objective to maintain excellence for this product line. Against which comparison point should this product line be benchmarked (e.g., median, 25th percentile)? Why? (2 Marks ~ half a page limit) Q5. Assume that there is an independent bookstore located near the campus of Milton University that also sells apparel with the Milton logo as well as new and used textbooks. Against which comparison point should these product lines be benchmarked? Why? (2 Marks ~ half a page limit) Q6. Based upon your benchmarking analysis, make appropriate recommendations and decisions for the Milton Bookstore. (5 Marks ~ two page limit)

Attachments:

nicolemolsonis the manager of strategic marketing unit two smu2 at quality treats 557243

Page 1of 18Individual Written CasesPart 2(50 Marks)DueThursday April 10thInstructions:?A Hard copy of the report should be submitted at the beginning of the class.?You are required to complete both of the followingcases:Quality Treats, Inc.Case (24Marks)Milton University Bookstore Case(26Marks)?Font type should be Arial and the font size should be12points.?Line spacing should be 1.5lines.?Follow the required page limits as stated for each requirement.?Marks for professional presentation are integrated with the marksof each requirement.?The assignment should be done independently by each student. ?It is the student’s responsibility to ensure that the assignment is completed when due.?The Business Faculty requires the Harvard style of referencing for academic papers.Please see Quote, Unquote Referencing, and a Speedy Guide to Harvard Referencing at http://www.viu.ca/business/resources.asp.?Errors happen in the real life every day, so if you see an errorin the cases. Note the error in your report and use your best judgment to continue your analysis.Quality Treats, Inc.Case (24Marks) INTRODUCTIONNicoleMolsonis the manager of Strategic Marketing Unit Two (SMU2) at Quality Treats, Inc., a provider of branded, high quality food products. Molsonis unhappy with what she perceives to be unfair and inappropriate product costing for her unit, especially for what Quality Treatsconsiders to be special orders. Molson’s education, experience, and expertise as a food scientist and process engineer have earned her considerable respect at Quality Treats, but she has limited accounting knowledge, which holds her back from expressing her serious concerns. Therefore, Molsonasked you, soon to be anaccounting graduate, to develop a memorandumand a glossary of terms to help her make her case more forcefully to top management.QUALITY TREATS, INC.Quality Treats, Inc., rooted in the upper Midwest United States, produces a wide range of food products in a competitiveindustry. Almost all of its products are sold under the Fine ’n’ Fast brand name, which is

Page 2of 18widely recognized for its high quality and has a loyal customer following. Most products are packaged in sizes for end consumption and are sold through supermarkets, convenience shops, and similar outlets. Depending on the nature of the product and consumer preferences, products are sold frozen, refrigerated, canned, boxed, or packaged in other ways. Some items, such as individual packets of ketchup, mayonnaise, and mustard, are sold to fast food restaurants and similar outlets. The company also sells half gallon containers—branded with the company logo—of salad dressings, ketchup, mustard, and similar items with a plastic pump so that restaurant customers can serve themselves at salad bars and similar places. Other products are sold, often in bulk, to institutional users, such as large food service groups, caterers, and the like. These products may or may not be branded. A small portion of sales is made to other food producers, for example, salad dressing packets are sold to producers of packaged fresh salad greens; Quality Treatsdoes not deal with fresh products. Quality Treatsis owned by Jordan Meadows Group, a private equity firm. Jordan Meadows Groupgives Quality Treatsalmost complete freedom and control over management, product selection, performance evaluation, and so forth. Because it is privately owned, external financial reporting is not mandatory, nor is there any obligation to use any set of financial accounting standards for internal reporting. Any external financial reporting is on a group or consolidated basis and performed by Jordan Meadows Group.Jordan Meadows Groupalso owns Quality TreatsCanada, Ltd., which sells products almost exclusively in Canada, with primary operations nearby in the prairie provinces. There is no mutual ownership or management connection between Quality Treatsand Quality TreatsCanada. Because the two companies produce many identical products using the Fine ’n’ Fast brand, they do share recipes and process technology. Quality Treatsalso produces some products for Quality TreatsCanada that do not have sufficient market size in Canada to justify separate production. Jordan Meadows Groupalso owns smaller companies with the Fine ’n’ Fast name that are mostly importers of Fine ’n’ Fast products in countries outside of the U.S. and Canada where high quality, branded North American food products have niche markets. These products are produced by Quality Treats.Quality Treatsis organized into three Strategic Marketing Units (SMUs) based on the markets they serve. SMU1 serves supermarkets and similar outlets. SMU2 serves mostly institutional customers who order in large volumes and often in bulk quantities. SMU2 also sells specialorders from time to time that involve unbranded bulk products that are exported. SMU3 serves affiliated Quality Treatscompanies in other countries, mostly for import into those countries; governmental organizations that sell food and have food service facilities, such as military organizations; and similar customers that have special contracting requirements.Products sold by all three SMUs are manufactured by the same production facilities, including warehouses, food preparation and cooking facilities, and packaging facilities. The SMUs also share most headquarters activities, such as information technology, accounting and other administration, human resources, and similar activities. SMU1 and SMU2 have their own marketing and sales departments, while SMU3 does not have separate departments for these tasks. Figure 1 shows an organizational chart for Quality Treats.

Page 1of 18Individual Written CasesPart 2(50 Marks)DueThursday April 10thInstructions:?A Hard copy of the report should be submitted at the beginning of the class.?You are required to complete both of the followingcases:Quality Treats, Inc.Case (24Marks)Milton University Bookstore Case(26Marks)?Font type should be Arial and the font size should be12points.?Line spacing should be 1.5lines.?Follow the required page limits as stated for each requirement.?Marks for professional presentation are integrated with the marksof each requirement.?The assignment should be done independently by each student. ?It is the student’s responsibility to ensure that the assignment is completed when due.?The Business Faculty requires the Harvard style of referencing for academic papers.Please see Quote, Unquote Referencing, and a Speedy Guide to Harvard Referencing at http://www.viu.ca/business/resources.asp.?Errors happen in the real life every day, so if you see an errorin the cases. Note the error in your report and use your best judgment to continue your analysis.Quality Treats, Inc.Case (24Marks) INTRODUCTIONNicoleMolsonis the manager of Strategic Marketing Unit Two (SMU2) at Quality Treats, Inc., a provider of branded, high quality food products. Molsonis unhappy with what she perceives to be unfair and inappropriate product costing for her unit, especially for what Quality Treatsconsiders to be special orders. Molson’s education, experience, and expertise as a food scientist and process engineer have earned her considerable respect at Quality Treats, but she has limited accounting knowledge, which holds her back from expressing her serious concerns. Therefore, Molsonasked you, soon to be anaccounting graduate, to develop a memorandumand a glossary of terms to help her make her case more forcefully to top management.QUALITY TREATS, INC.Quality Treats, Inc., rooted in the upper Midwest United States, produces a wide range of food products in a competitiveindustry. Almost all of its products are sold under the Fine ’n’ Fast brand name, which is

Page 2of 18widely recognized for its high quality and has a loyal customer following. Most products are packaged in sizes for end consumption and are sold through supermarkets, convenience shops, and similar outlets. Depending on the nature of the product and consumer preferences, products are sold frozen, refrigerated, canned, boxed, or packaged in other ways. Some items, such as individual packets of ketchup, mayonnaise, and mustard, are sold to fast food restaurants and similar outlets. The company also sells half gallon containers—branded with the company logo—of salad dressings, ketchup, mustard, and similar items with a plastic pump so that restaurant customers can serve themselves at salad bars and similar places. Other products are sold, often in bulk, to institutional users, such as large food service groups, caterers, and the like. These products may or may not be branded. A small portion of sales is made to other food producers, for example, salad dressing packets are sold to producers of packaged fresh salad greens; Quality Treatsdoes not deal with fresh products. Quality Treatsis owned by Jordan Meadows Group, a private equity firm. Jordan Meadows Groupgives Quality Treatsalmost complete freedom and control over management, product selection, performance evaluation, and so forth. Because it is privately owned, external financial reporting is not mandatory, nor is there any obligation to use any set of financial accounting standards for internal reporting. Any external financial reporting is on a group or consolidated basis and performed by Jordan Meadows Group.Jordan Meadows Groupalso owns Quality TreatsCanada, Ltd., which sells products almost exclusively in Canada, with primary operations nearby in the prairie provinces. There is no mutual ownership or management connection between Quality Treatsand Quality TreatsCanada. Because the two companies produce many identical products using the Fine ’n’ Fast brand, they do share recipes and process technology. Quality Treatsalso produces some products for Quality TreatsCanada that do not have sufficient market size in Canada to justify separate production. Jordan Meadows Groupalso owns smaller companies with the Fine ’n’ Fast name that are mostly importers of Fine ’n’ Fast products in countries outside of the U.S. and Canada where high quality, branded North American food products have niche markets. These products are produced by Quality Treats.Quality Treatsis organized into three Strategic Marketing Units (SMUs) based on the markets they serve. SMU1 serves supermarkets and similar outlets. SMU2 serves mostly institutional customers who order in large volumes and often in bulk quantities. SMU2 also sells specialorders from time to time that involve unbranded bulk products that are exported. SMU3 serves affiliated Quality Treatscompanies in other countries, mostly for import into those countries; governmental organizations that sell food and have food service facilities, such as military organizations; and similar customers that have special contracting requirements.Products sold by all three SMUs are manufactured by the same production facilities, including warehouses, food preparation and cooking facilities, and packaging facilities. The SMUs also share most headquarters activities, such as information technology, accounting and other administration, human resources, and similar activities. SMU1 and SMU2 have their own marketing and sales departments, while SMU3 does not have separate departments for these tasks. Figure 1 shows an organizational chart for Quality Treats.

Attachments:

calculate the product cost per unit for both products using activity based costing 556815

Using ABC to compute product costs per unit

Jaunkas, Corp., manufactures mid fi and hi fi stereo receivers. The following data have been summarized:

Mid Fi

Hi Fi

Direct materials cost per unit

$ 400

$ 1,300

Direct labor cost per unit

400

300

Indirect manufacturing cost per unit

?

?

Indirect manufacturing cost information includes the following:

Activity

Allocation Rate

Mid–Fi

Hi–Fi

Setup

$1,700/per setup

39 setups

39 setups

Inspections

$ 400/per hour

45 hours

15 hours

Machine maintenance

$ 10/per machine hour

1,900 machine hours

1,200 machine hours

The company plans to manufacture 200 units of the mid fi receivers and 250 units of the hi fi receivers.

Requirement

1. Calculate the product cost per unit for both products using activity based costing.

compute the operating income from the crockett engagement 556816

Allocating indirect costs and computing income

Pacific, Inc., is a technology consulting firm focused on Web site development and integration of Internet business applications. The president of the company expects to incur $775,000 of indirect costs this year, and she expects her firm to work 5,000 direct labor hours. Pacific’s systems consultants provide direct labor at a rate of $310 per hour. Clients are billed at 160% of direct labor cost. Last month Pacific’s consultants spent 150 hours on Crockett’s engagement.

Requirements

1. Compute Pacific’s indirect cost allocation rate per direct labor hour.

2. Compute the total cost assigned to the Crockett engagement.

3. Compute the operating income from the Crockett engagement.

compute the operating income from the crockett engagement using the abc system 556818

Using ABC to allocate costs and compute profit

Refer to Short Exercises 18 7 and 18 8. Suppose Pacific’s direct labor rate was $310 per hour, the documentation cost was $34 per page, the information technology support cost was $200 per application, and training costs were $110 per direct labor hour. The Crockett engagement used the following resources last month:

Cost Driver

Crockett

Direct labor hours

150

Pages

320

Applications used

75

Requirements

1. Compute the cost assigned to the Crockett engagement, using the ABC system.

2. Compute the operating income from the Crockett engagement, using the ABC system.

indicate whether each is characteristic of a jit production system or a traditional 556820

Just in time characteristics

Consider the following characteristics of either a JIT production system or a traditional production system.

a. Products are produced in large batches.

b. Large stocks of finished goods protect against lost sales if customer demand is higher than expected.

c. Suppliers make frequent deliveries of small quantities of raw materials.

d. Employees do a variety of jobs, including maintenance and setups as well as operating machines.

e. Machines are grouped into self contained production cells or production lines.

f. Machines are grouped according to function. For example, all cutting machines are located in one area.

g. The final operation in the production sequence “pulls” parts from the preceding operation.

h. Each employee is responsible for inspecting his or her own work.

i. Management works with suppliers to ensure defect free raw materials.

Requirement

1. Indicate whether each is characteristic of a JIT production system or a traditional production system.

the standard cost per pin is 2 for raw materials and 3 for conversion costs 556821

Recording JIT costing journal entries

Quality Products uses a JIT system to manufacture trading pins for the Hard Rock Café. The standard cost per pin is $2 for raw materials and $3 for conversion costs. Last month Quality recorded the following data:

Number of pins completed

4,000 pins

Raw material purchases

$ 9,500

Number of pins sold

3,300 pins

Conversion costs

$ 14,000

Requirement

1. Use JIT costing to prepare journal entries for the month, including the entry to close the Conversion costs account.

indicate which of the following quality cost categories each example represents 556822

Matching cost of quality examples to categories

Sammy, Inc., manufactures motor scooters. Consider each of the following examples of quality costs.

1. Preventive maintenance on machinery.

2. Direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred to rework a defective scooter that is detected in house through inspection.

3. Lost profits from lost sales if company’s reputation was hurt because customers previously purchased a poor quality scooter.

4. Costs of inspecting raw materials, such as chassis and wheels.

5. Working with suppliers to achieve on time delivery of defect free raw materials.

6. Cost of warranty repairs on a scooter that malfunctions at customer’s location.

7. Costs of testing durability of vinyl.

8. Cost to re inspect reworked scooters.

Requirement

1. Indicate which of the following quality cost categories each example represents.

? P Prevention costs

? A Appraisal costs

? IF Internal failure costs

? EF External failure costs

compute the indirect manufacturing cost of each bumper 556823

Product costing in an activity based costing system

Fortunado, Inc., uses activity based costing to account for its chrome bumper manufacturing process. Company managers have identified four manufacturing activities: materials handling, machine setup, insertion of parts, and finishing. The budgeted activity costs for 2012 and their allocation bases are as follows:

Activity

Total Budgeted Cost

Allocation Base

Materials handling

$ 9,000

Number of parts

Machine setup

3,900

Number of setups

Insertion of parts

42,000

Number of parts

Finishing

82,000

Finishing direct labor hours

Total

$ 136,900

Fortunado expects to produce 500 chrome bumpers during the year. The bumpers are expected to use 4,000 parts, require 10 setups, and consume 1,000 hours of finishing time.

Requirements

1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.

2. Compute the indirect manufacturing cost of each bumper.

compute the indirect manufacturing cost of each motorcycle 556824

Product costing in an activity based costing system

Turbo Champs, Corp., uses activity based costing to account for its motorcycle manufacturing process. Company managers have identified three supporting manufacturing activities: inspection, machine setup, and machine maintenance. The budgeted activity costs for 2012 and their allocation bases are as follows:

Activity

Total Budgeted Cost

Allocation Base

Inspection

$ 6,000

Number of inspections

Machine setup

32,000

Number of setups

Machine maintenance

5,000

Maintenance hours

Total

$ 43,000

Turbo Champs expects to produce 20 custom built motorcycles for the year. The motorcycles are expected to require 100 inspections, 20 setups, and 100 maintenance hours.

Requirements

1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.

2. Compute the indirect manufacturing cost of each motorcycle.

compute the total budgeted indirect manufacturing cost for 2012 556825

Product costing in an activity based costing system

Elton Company manufactures wheel rims. The controller budgeted the following ABC allocation rates for 2012:

Activity

Allocation Base

Cost Allocation Rate

Materials handling

Number of parts

$ 4.00 per part

Machine setup

Number of setups

500.00 per setup

Insertion of parts

Number of parts

23.00 per part

Finishing

Finishing hours

50.00 per hour

The number of parts is now a feasible allocation base because Elton recently purchased bar coding technology. Elton produces two wheel rim models: standard and deluxe. Budgeted data for 2012 are as follows:

Standard

Deluxe

Parts per rim

6.0

9.0

Setups per 500 rims

17.0

17.0

Finishing hours per rim

5.0

6.5

Total direct labor hours per rim

6.0

7.0

The company expects to produce 500 units of each model during the year.

Requirements

1. Compute the total budgeted indirect manufacturing cost for 2012.

2. Compute the ABC indirect manufacturing cost per unit of each model. Carry each cost to the nearest cent.

3. Prior to 2012, Elton used a direct labor hour single allocation base system. Compute the (single) allocation rate based on direct labor hours for 2012. Use this rate to determine the indirect manufacturing cost per wheel rim for each model, to the nearest cent.

what total price will the company bid for the entire animal hut order 556826

Using activity based costing to make decisions

Dino Dog Collars uses activity based costing. Dino’s system has the following features:

Activity

Allocation Base

Cost Allocation Rate

Purchasing

Number of purchase orders

$65.00 per purchase order

Assembling

Number of parts

$ 0.36 per part

Packaging

Number of finished collars

$ 0.25 per collar

Each collar has 4 parts; direct materials cost per collar is $9. Direct labor cost is $4 per collar. Suppose Animal Hut has asked for a bid on 25,000 dog collars. Dino will issue a total of 150 purchase orders if Animal Hut accepts Dino’s bid.

Requirements

1. Compute the total cost Dino will incur to purchase the needed materials and then assemble and package 25,000 dog collars. Also compute the cost per collar.

2. For bidding, Dino adds a 40% markup to total cost. What total price will the company bid for the entire Animal Hut order?

3. Suppose that instead of an ABC system, Dino has a traditional product costing system that allocates indirect costs other than direct materials and direct labor at the rate of $9.60 per direct labor hour. The dog collar order will require 12,000 direct labor hours. What total price will Dino bid using this system’s total cost?

4. Use your answers to Requirements 2 and 3 to explain how ABC can help Dino make a better decision about the bid price it will offer Animal Hut.

which course of action will yield more income for elton 556827

Using activity based costing to make decisions

Refer to Exercise 18 17. For 2013, Elton’s managers have decided to use the same indirect manufacturing costs per wheel rim that they computed in 2012. In addition to the unit indirect manufacturing costs, the following data are budgeted for the company’s standard and deluxe models for 2013:

Standard

Deluxe

Sales price

800.00

940.00

Direct materials

31.00

50.00

Direct labor

45.00

56.00

Because of limited machine hour capacity, Elton can produce either2,000 standard rims or2,000 deluxe rims.

Requirements

1. If Elton’s managers rely on the ABC unit cost data computed in E18 17, which model will they produce? Carry each cost to the nearest cent. (Ignore operating expenses for this calculation.)

2. If the managers rely on the single allocation base cost data, which model will they produce?

3. Which course of action will yield more income for Elton?

would implementing the value engineering recommendation enable elton to achieve its 556828

Activity based management and target cost

Refer to Exercises 18 17 and 18 19. Controller Michael Bender is surprised by the increase in cost of the deluxe model under ABC. Market research shows that for the deluxe rim to provide a reasonable profit, Elton will have to meet a target manufacturing cost of $656 per rim. A value engineering study by Elton’s employees suggests that modifications to the finishing process could cut finishing cost from $50 to $40 per hour and reduce the finishing direct labor hours per deluxe rim from 6.5 hours to 6 hours. Direct materials would remain unchanged at $50 per rim, as would direct labor at $56 per rim. The materials handling, machine setup, and insertion of parts activity costs also would remain the same.

Requirement

1. Would implementing the value engineering recommendation enable Elton to achieve its target cost for the deluxe rim?

determine whether conversion costs are over or underallocated for the month by how m 556829

Recording manufacturing costs in a JIT costing system

Lancer, Inc., produces universal remote controls. Lancer uses a JIT costing system. One of the company’s products has a standard direct materials cost of $9 per unit and a standard conversion cost of $35 per unit. During January 2012, Lancer produced 600 units and sold 595. It purchased $6,300 of direct materials and incurred actual conversion costs totaling $17,500.

Requirements

1. Prepare summary journal entries for January.

2. The January 1, 2012, balance of the Raw and in process inventory account was $50. Use a T account to find the January 31 balance.

3. Use a T account to determine whether conversion costs are over or underallocated for the month. By how much? Prepare the journal entry to close the Conversion costs account.

suppose dubuc rsquo s standard cost per calculator is 27 for materials and 63 for co 556830

Recording manufacturing costs in a JIT costing system

Dubuc produces electronic calculators. Suppose Dubuc’s standard cost per calculator is $27 for materials and $63 for conversion costs. The following data apply to August production:

Materials purchased

$ 6,700

Conversion costs incurred

14,000

Number of calculators produced

200 calculators

Number of calculators sold

195 calculators

Requirements

1. Prepare summary journal entries for August using JIT costing, including the entry to close the Conversion costs account.

2. The beginning balance of Finished goods inventory was $1,700. Use a T account to find the ending balance of Finished goods inventory.

Apollo 11

Apollo 11 was the spaceflight that landed the first humans, Americans Neil Armstrong and Buzz Aldrin, on the Moon on July 20, 1969, at 20:18 UTC. Armstrong became the first to step onto the lunar surface 6 hours later on July 21 at 02:56 UTC.

Armstrong spent about three and a half two and a half hours outside the spacecraft, Aldrin slightly less; and together they collected 47.5 pounds (21.5 kg) of lunar material for return to Earth. A third member of the mission, Michael Collins, piloted the command spacecraft alone in lunar orbit until Armstrong and Aldrin returned to it for the trip back to Earth.

Broadcasting and
quotes

Broadcast on live TV to a world wide audience, Armstrong stepped onto the lunar surface and described the event as:

One small step for [a] man, one giant leap for mankind.

Apollo 11 effectively ended the Space Race and fulfilled a national goal proposed in 1961 by the late U.S. President John F. Kennedy in a speech before the United States Congress:

[…] before this decade is out, of landing a man on the Moon and returning him safely to the Earth.

Technical details
Mission crew

Position Astronaut
Commander Neil A. Armstrong
Command Module Pilot Michael Collins
Lunar Module Pilot Edwin “Buzz” E. Aldrin, Jr.

Launched by a Saturn V rocket from Kennedy Space Center in Merritt Island, Florida on July 16, Apollo 11 was the fifth manned mission of NASA’s Apollo program. The Apollo spacecraft had three parts:

  1. Command Module with a cabin for the three astronauts which was the only part which landed back on Earth
  2. Service Module which supported the Command Module with propulsion, electrical power, oxygen and water
  3. Lunar Module for landing on the Moon.

After being sent to the Moon by the Saturn V’s upper stage, the astronauts separated the spacecraft from it and travelled for three days until they entered into lunar orbit. Armstrong and Aldrin then moved into the Lunar Module and landed in the Sea of Tranquility. They stayed a total of about 21 and a half hours on the lunar surface. After lifting off in the upper part of the Lunar Module and rejoining Collins in the Command Module, they returned to Earth and landed in the Pacific Ocean on July 24.


Source: Wikipedia.org

classify each item as a prevention cost an appraisal cost an internal failure cost o 556831

Classifying quality costs

Delance & Co. makes electronic components. Chris Delance, the president, recently instructed vice president Jim Bruegger to develop a total quality control program. “If we don’t at least match the quality improvements our competitors are making,” he told Bruegger, “we’ll soon be out of business.” Bruegger began by listing various “costs of quality” that Delance incurs. The first six items that came to mind were:

a. Costs incurred by Delance customer representatives traveling to customer sites to repair defective products, $15,000.

b. Lost profits from lost sales due to reputation for less than perfect products, $60,000.

c. Costs of inspecting components in one of Delance’s production processes, $25,000.

d. Salaries of engineers who are redesigning components to withstand electrical overloads, $80,000.

e. Costs of reworking defective components after discovery by company inspectors, $40,000.

f. Costs of electronic components returned by customers, $55,000.

Requirement

1. Classify each item as a prevention cost, an appraisal cost, an internal failure cost, or an external failure cost. Then, determine the total cost of quality by category.

should clarke implement the new quality program give your reason 556832

Classifying quality costs and using these costs to make decisions

Clarke, Inc., manufactures door panels. Suppose Clarke is considering spending the following amounts on a new total quality management (TQM) program:

Strength testing one item from each batch of panels

$ 62,000

Training employees in TQM

25,000

Training suppliers in TQM

38,000

Identifying suppliers who commit to on time delivery of

perfect quality materials

56,000

Clarke expects the new program would save costs through the following:

Avoid lost profits from lost sales due to disappointed customers

$ 94,000

Avoid rework and spoilage

60,000

Avoid inspection of raw materials

55,000

Avoid warranty costs

20,000

Requirements

1. Classify each cost as a prevention cost, an appraisal cost, an internal failure cost, or an external failure cost.

2. Should Clarke implement the new quality program? Give your reason.

should kane implement the quality program give your reasons 556833

Classifying quality costs and using these costs to make decisions

Kane manufactures high quality speakers. Suppose Kane is considering spending the following amounts on a new quality program:

Additional 20 minutes of testing for each speaker

$ 620,000

Negotiating with and training suppliers to obtain higher quality

materials and on time delivery

410,000

Redesigning the speakers to make them easier to manufacture

1,350,000

Kane expects this quality program to save costs, as follows:

Reduce warranty repair costs

$ 225,000

Avoid inspection of raw materials

540,000

Avoid rework because of fewer defective units

800,000

It also expects this program to avoid lost profits from the following:

Lost sales due to disappointed customers

$ 940,000

Lost production time due to rework

278,000

Requirements

1. Classify each of these costs into one of the four categories of quality costs (prevention, appraisal, internal failure, external failure).

2. Should Kane implement the quality program? Give your reasons.

what price should prescott rsquo s managers set for unfinished bookcases to earn 15 556834

Product costing in an ABC system

Prescott, Inc., manufactures bookcases and uses an activity based costing system. Prescott’s activity areas and related data follow:

Activity

Budgeted Cost of Activity

Number of parts

Cost Allocation Rate

Materials handling

$ 230,000

Direct labor hours

$ 0.50

Assembly

3,200,000

Number of finished units

16.00

Finishing

180,000

Allocation Base

4.50

Prescott produced two styles of bookcases in October: the standard bookcase and an unfinished bookcase, which has fewer parts and requires no finishing. The totals for quantities, direct materials costs, and other data follow:

Product

Total Units Produced

Total Direct Materials Costs

Total Direct Labor Costs

Total Number of Parts

Total Assembling Direct Labor Hours

Standard bookcase

3,000

$ 36,000

$ 45,000

9,000

4,500

Unfinished bookcase

3,500

35,000

35,000

7,000

3,500

Requirements

1. Compute the manufacturing product cost per unit of each type of bookcase.

2. Suppose that pre manufacturing activities, such as product design, were assigned to the standard bookcases at $7 each, and to the unfinished bookcases at $2 each. Similar analyses were conducted of post manufacturing activities such as distribution, marketing, and customer service. The post manufacturing costs were $22 per standard bookcase and $14 per unfinished bookcase. Compute the full product costs per unit.

3. Which product costs are reported in the external financial statements? Which costs are used for management decision making? Explain the difference.

4. What price should Prescott’s managers set for unfinished bookcases to earn $15 per bookcase?

how have the unit costs changed explain why the costs changed 556835

Comparing costs from ABC and single rate systems

Corbertt Pharmaceuticals manufactures an over the counter allergy medication. The company sells both large commercial containers of 1,000 capsules to health care facilities and travel packs of 20 capsules to shops in airports, train stations, and hotels. The following information has been developed to determine if an activitybased costing system would be beneficial:

Activity

Estimated Indirect Activity Costs

Allocation Base

Estimated Quantity of Allocation Base

Materials handling

$ 95,000

Kilos

19,000 kilos

Packaging

219,000

Machine hours

5,475 hours

Quality assurance

124,500

Samples

2,075 samples

Total indirect costs

$ 438,500

Other production information includes the following:

Commerical Containers

Travel Packs

Units produced

3,500 containers

57,000 packs

Weight in kilos

14,000

5,700

Machine hours

2,625

570

Number of samples

700

855

Requirements

1. Compute the cost allocation rate for each activity.

2. Use the activity based cost allocation rates to compute the activity costs per unit of the commercial containers and the travel packs. (Hint: First compute the total activity costs allocated to each product line, and then compute the cost per unit.)

3. Corbertt’s original single allocation base costing system allocated indirect costs to products at $157 per machine hour. Compute the total indirect costs allocated to the commercial containers and to the travel packs under the original system. Then compute the indirect cost per unit for each product.

4. Compare the indirect activity based costs per unit to the indirect costs per unit from the single allocation base system. How have the unit costs changed? Explain why the costs changed.

what are the major features of a jit production system such as that of high point 556836

Recording manufacturing costs for a JIT costing system

High Point produces fleece jackets. The company uses JIT costing for its JIT production system. High Point has two inventory accounts: Raw and in process inventory and Finished goods inventory. On February 1, 2012, the account balances were Raw and in process inventory, $7,000; Finished goods inventory, $2,200. The standard cost of a jacket is $37, comprised of $13 direct materials plus $24 conversion costs. Data for February’s activities follow:

Number of jackets completed

20,000

Direct materials purchased

$ 257,500

Number of jackets sold

19,600

Conversion costs incurred

$ 580,000

Requirements

1. What are the major features of a JIT production system such as that of High Point?

2. Prepare summary journal entries for February. Under or overallocated conversion costs are closed to Cost of goods sold monthly.

3. Use a T account to determine the February 29, 2012, balance of Raw and in process inventory.

compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the assem 556790

Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Amy Electronics makes CD players in three processes: assembly, programming, and packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the assembly process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. The Assembly Department had no Work in process inventory on October 31. In mid November, Amy Electronics started production on 125,000 CD players. Of this number, 95,800 CD players were assembled during November and transferred out to the Programming Department. The November 30 Work in process inventory in the Assembly Department was 25% of the way through the assembly process. Direct materials costing $437,500 were placed in production in Assembly during November, and Direct labor of $200,800 and Manufacturing overhead of $134,275 were assigned to that

department.

Requirements

1.Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Assembly Department for November.

2.Assign total costs in the Assembly Department to (a) units completed and transferred to Programming during November and (b) units still in process at November 30.

3.Prepare a T account for Work in process inventory—Assembly to show its activity during November, including the November 30 balance.

journalize all transactions affecting the company rsquo s mixing process during marc 556791

Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Reed Paper, Co., produces the paper used by wallpaper manufacturers. Reed’s fourstage process includes mixing, cooking, rolling, and cutting. During March, the Mixing Department started and completed mixing for 4,520 rolls of paper. The department started but did not finish the mixing for an additional 500 rolls, which were 20% complete with respect to both direct materials and conversion work at the end of March. Direct materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the mixing process. The Mixing Department incurred the following costs during March:

Work in process inventory—Mixing

Bal, Mar 1

0

Direct materials

5,775

Direct labor

620

Manufacturing overhead

6,310

Requirements

1.Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Mixing Department for March.

2.Show that the sum of (a) cost of goods transferred out of the Mixing Department and (b) ending Work in process inventory—Mixing equals the total cost accumulated in the department during March.

3.Journalize all transactions affecting the company’s mixing process during March, including those already posted.

what is the ending balance 556792

Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process inventory; two materials, added at different points; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Smith’s Exteriors produces exterior siding for homes. The Preparation Department begins with wood, which is chopped into small bits. At the end of the process, an adhesive is added. Then the wood/adhesive mixture goes on to the Compression Department, where the wood is compressed into sheets. Conversion costs are added evenly throughout the preparation process. January data for the Preparation Department are as follows:

Sheets

Costs

Beginning work in process inventory

0 sheets

Beginning work in process inventory

$ 0

Started production

3,700 sheets

Costs adding during January:

Completed and transferred out to

Wood

3,108

Compression in January

2,000 sheets

Adhesives

1,240

Ending work in process inventory (30%

Direct labor

558

of the way through preparation process)

1,700 sheets

Manufacturing overhead

1,450

Total costs

$ 6,356

Requirements

1.Draw a timeline for the Preparation Department.

2.Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent. (Hint: Each direct material added at a different point in the production process requires its own equivalentunit computation.)

3.Compute the total costs of the units (sheets)

a.completed and transferred out to the Compression Department.

b.in the Preparation Department’s ending Work in process inventory.

4.Prepare the journal entry to record the cost of the sheets completed and transferred out to the Compression Department.

5.Post the journal entries to the Work in process inventory—Preparation T account. What is the ending balance?

prepare the november production cost report or christine rsquo s dyeing department 556793

Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; preparing a production cost report and recording transactions on the basis of the report’s information; weighted average method

Christine Carpet manufactures broadloom carpet in seven processes: spinning, dyeing, plying, spooling, tufting, latexing, and shearing. In the Dyeing Department, direct materials (dye) are added at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. Christine uses weighted average process costing. Information for November 2012 follows:

Units:

Beginning work in process inventory

90 rolls

Transferred in from Spinning Department during November

540 rolls

Completed during November

510 rolls

Ending work in process (80% complete as to

conversion work)

120 rolls

Costs:

Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $4,900;

materials cost, $1,390; conversion costs, $4,900)

$ 11,190

Transferred in from Spinning Department during November

22,190

Materials cost added during November

11,210

Conversion costs added during November (manufacturing

wages, $8,225; manufacturing overhead, $43,839)

52,064

Requirements

1.Prepare a timeline for Christine’s Dyeing Department.

2.Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent units, cost per equivalent unit, and total costs to account for in Christine’s Dyeing Department for November.

3.Prepare the November production cost report or Christine’s Dyeing Department.

4.Journalize all transactions affecting Christine’s Dyeing Department during November, including the entries that have already been posted.

why would management be interested in this cost 556794

Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; weighted average method

WaterBound uses three processes to manufacture lifts for personal watercraft: forming a lift’s parts from galvanized steel, assembling the lift, and testing the completed lifts. The lifts are transferred to finished goods before shipment to marinas across the country. WaterBound’s Testing Department requires no direct materials. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the testing process. Other information follows:

Units:

Beginning work in process

2,000

units

Transferred in from the Assembling Dept. during the period

7,000

units

Completed during the period

4,000

units

Ending work in process (40% complete as to

conversion work)

5,000

units

Costs:

Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $93,000;

conversion costs, $18,000)

$ 111,000

Transferred in from the Assembling Dept. during the period

672,000

Conversion costs added during the period

54,000

The cost transferred into Finished goods inventory is the cost of the lifts transferred out of the Testing Department. WaterBound uses weighted average process costing.

Requirements

1.Draw a timeline for the Testing Department.

2.Use the timeline to compute the number of equivalent units of work performed by the Testing Department during the period.

3.Compute WaterBound’s transferred in and conversion costs per equivalent unit. Use the unit costs to assign total costs to (a) units completed and transferred out of Testing and (b) units in Testing’s ending Work in process inventory.

4.Compute the cost per unit for lifts completed and transferred out to Finished goods inventory. Why would management be interested in this cost?

compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the assem 556795

Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Beth Electronics makes CD players in three processes: assembly, programming, and packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the assembly process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. The Assembly Department had no work in process inventory on March 31. In mid April, Beth Electronics started production on 115,000 CD players. Of this number, 99,000 CD players were assembled during April and transferred out to the Programming Department. The April 30 work in process inventory in the Assembly Department was 45% of the way through the assembly process. Direct materials costing $345,000 were placed in production in Assembly during April, and direct labor of $150,000 and manufacturing overhead of $62,400 were assigned to that department.

Requirements

1. Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Assembly Department for April.

2. Assign total costs in the Assembly Department to (a) units completed and transferred to Programming during April and (b) units still in process at April 30.

3. Prepare a T account for Work in process inventory—Assembly to show its activity during April, including the April 30 balance.

journalize all transactions affecting the company rsquo s mixing process during sept 556796

Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Smith Paper, Co., produces the paper used by wallpaper manufacturers. Smith’s four stage process includes mixing, cooking, rolling, and cutting. During September, the Mixing Department started and completed mixing for 4,405 rolls of paper. The department started but did not finish the mixing for an additional 600 rolls, which were 20% complete with respect to both direct materials and conversion work at the end of September. Direct materials and conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the mixing process. The Mixing Department incurred the following costs during September:

Work in process inventory–Mixing

Bal, Sep 1

0

Direct materials

5,430

Direct labor

550

Manufacturing overhead

5,785

Requirements

1. Compute the number of equivalent units and the cost per equivalent unit in the Mixing Department for September.

2. Show that the sum of (a) cost of goods transferred out of the Mixing Department and (b) ending Work in process inventory—Mixing equals the total cost accumulated in the department during September.

3. Journalize all transactions affecting the company’s mixing process during September, including those already posted.

what is the ending balance 556797

Computing equivalent units and assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process inventory; two materials, added at different points; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Bert’s Exteriors produces exterior siding for homes. The Preparation Department begins with wood, which is chopped into small bits. At the end of the process, an adhesive is added. Then the wood/adhesive mixture goes on to the Compression Department, where the wood is compressed into sheets. Conversion costs are added evenly throughout the preparation process. January data for the Preparation Department are as follows:

Sheets

Costs

Beginning work in process inventory

0

sheets

Beginning work in process inventory

$ 0

Started production

3,900

sheets

Costs adding during January:

Completed and transferred out to

Wood

3,120

Compression in January

2,700

sheets

Adhesives

1,836

Ending work in process inventory (25%

Direct labor

990

of the way through the preparation process)

1,200

sheets

Manufacturing overhead

2,100

Total costs

$ 8,046

Requirements

1. Draw a timeline for the Preparation Department.

2. Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent units. (Hint: Each direct material added at a different point in the production process requires its own equivalent unit computation.)

3. Compute the total costs of the units (sheets)

a. completed and transferred out to the Compression Department.

b. in the Preparation Department’s ending Work in process inventory.

4. Prepare the journal entry to record the cost of the sheets completed and transferred out to the Compression Department.

5. Post the journal entries to the Work in process inventory—Preparation T account. What is the ending balance?

prepare the july production cost report for carol rsquo s dyeing department 556798

Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; preparing a production cost report and recording transactions on the basis of the report’s information; weighted average method

Carol Carpet manufactures broadloom carpet in seven processes: spinning, dyeing, plying, spooling, tufting, latexing, and shearing. In the Dyeing Department, direct materials (dye) are added at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the process. Carol uses weighted average process costing. Information for July 2012 follows:

Units:

Beginning work in process inventory

65

rolls

Transferred in from Spinning Department during July

570

rolls

Completed during July

520

rolls

Ending work in process (80% complete as to

conversion work)

115

rolls

Costs:

Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $3,900;

materials cost, $1,625; conversion costs, $5,555)

$ 11,080

Transferred in from Spinning Department during July

19,595

Materials cost added during July

9,805

Conversion costs added during July (manufacturing

wages, $9,450; manufacturing overhead, $43,135)

52,585

Requirements

1. Prepare a timeline for Carol’s Dyeing Department.

2. Use the timeline to help you compute the equivalent units, cost per equivalent unit, and total costs to account for in Carol’s Dyeing Department for July.

3. Prepare the July production cost report for Carol’s Dyeing Department.

4. Journalize all transactions affecting Carol’s Dyeing Department during July, including the entries that have already been posted.

why would management be interested in this cost 556799

Computing equivalent units for a second department with beginning work in process inventory; assigning costs to completed units and ending work in process; weighted average method

OceanBound uses three processes to manufacture lifts for personal watercrafts: forming a lift’s parts from galvanized steel, assembling the lift, and testing the completed lifts. The lifts are transferred to finished goods before shipment to marinas across the country. OceanBound’s Testing Department requires no direct materials. Conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the testing process. Other information follows:

Units:

Beginning work in process

2,200

units

Transferred in from the Assembling Dept. during the period

7,100

units

Completed during the period

4,200

units

Ending work in process (40% complete as to

conversion work)

5,100

units

Costs:

Beginning work in process (transferred in cost, $93,800;

conversion costs, $18,200)

$112,000

Transferred in from the Assembling Dept. during the period

706,000

Conversion costs added during the period

44,200

The cost transferred into Finished goods inventory is the cost of the lifts transferred out of the Testing Department. OceanBound uses weighted average process costing.

Requirements

1.Draw a timeline for the Testing Department.

2.Use the timeline to compute the number of equivalent units of work performed by the Testing Department during the period.

3.Compute OceanBound’s transferred in and conversion costs per equivalent unit. Use the unit costs to assign total costs to (a) units completed and transferred out of Testing and (b) units in Testing’s ending Work in process inventory.

4.Compute the cost per unit for lifts completed and transferred out to Finished goods inventory. Why would management be interested in this cost?

calculate the amount each person would pay 556811

Calculating costs using traditional and ABC

Brian and Gary are college friends planning a skiing trip to Killington before the New Year. They estimated the following costs for the trip:

Activity Allocation

Estimated Costs

Cost Driver

Brian

Gary

Food

$ 550

Pounds of food eaten

24

26

Skiing

240

# of lift tickets

3

0

Lodging

320

# of nights

4

4

$ 1,110

Requirements

1. Brian suggests that the costs be shared equally. Calculate the amount each person would pay.

2. Gary does not like the idea because he plans to stay in the room rather than ski. Gary suggests that each type of cost be allocated to each person based on the above listed cost driver. Using the activity allocation for each person, calculate the amount that each person would pay based on his own consumption of the activity.

compute the indirect manufacturing cost per unit using direct labor hours from the s 556813

Computing indirect manufacturing costs per unit

The following information is provided for the Orbit Antenna, Corp., which manufactures two products: Lo Gain antennas, and Hi Gain antennas for use in remote areas.

Activity

Cost

Cost Driver

Setup

$ 57,000

Number of setups

Machine maintenance

27,000

Machine hours

Total indirect manufacturing costs

$ 84,000

Lo Gain

Hi Gain

Total

Direct labor hours

1,400

3,600

5,000

Number of setups

30

30

60

Number of machine hours

1,800

1,200

3,000

Orbit plans to produce 75 Lo Gain antennas and 150 Hi Gain antennas.

Requirements

1. Compute the ABC indirect manufacturing cost per unit for each product.

2. Compute the indirect manufacturing cost per unit using direct labor hours from the single allocation base system.

what are the advantages and disadvantages of ortega rsquo s proposal 556777

Decision Case 17 2 Nature’s Own Garden manufactures organic fruit preserves sold primarily through health food stores and on the Web. The company closes for two weeks each December to enable employees to spend time with their families over the holiday season. Nature’s Own Garden’s manufacturing overhead is mostly straight line depreciation on its plant, and air conditioning costs for keeping the berries cool during the summer months. The company uses direct labor hours as the manufacturing overhead allocation base. President Cynthia Ortega has just approved new accounting software and is telling controller Jack Strong about her decision.

“I think this new software will be great,” Ortega says. “It will save you time in preparing all those reports.”

“Yes, and having so much more information just a click away will help us make better decisions and help control costs,” replies Strong. “We need to consider how we can use the new system to improve our business practices.”

“And I know just where to start,” says Ortega. “You complain each year about having to predict the weather months in advance for estimating air conditioning costs to include in the calculation of the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate, when professional meteorologists can’t even get tomorrow’s forecast right! I think we should calculate the predetermined overhead rate on a monthly basis.”

Controller Strong is not so sure this is a good idea.

Requirements

1. What are the advantages and disadvantages of Ortega’s proposal?

2. Should Nature’s Own Garden compute its predetermined manufacturing overhead rate on an annual basis or monthly basis? Explain.

how did using manufacturing cost only instead of using all costs associated with the 556778

Farley, Inc., is a manufacturer that produces customized computer components for several wellknown computer assembly companies. Farley’s latest contract with CompWest.com calls for Farley to deliver sound cards that simulate surround sound from two speakers. Farley spent several hundred thousand dollars to design the sound card to meet CompWest.com’s specifications.

Farley’s president, Bryon Wilson, has stipulated a pricing policy that requires the bid price for a new job to be based on Farley’s estimated costs to design, manufacture, distribute, and provide customer service for the job, plus a profit margin. Upon reviewing the contract figures, Farley’s controller, Paul York, was startled to find that the cost estimates developed by Farley’s cost accountant, Tony Hayes, for the CompWest.com bid were based on only the manufacturing costs. York is upset with Hayes. He is not sure what to do next

Requirements

1. How did using manufacturing cost only, instead of using all costs associated with the job, affect the amount of Farley’s bid for the job?

2. Identify the parties involved in Paul York’s dilemma. What are his alternatives? How would each party be affected by each alternative? What should York do next?

based on what you have read above what was jerry rsquo s company using as a cost dri 556779

Jerry never imagined he’d be sitting there in Washington being grilled mercilessly by a panel of congressmen. But a young government auditor picked up on his scheme last year. His company produced hi tech navigation devices that were sold to both military and civilian clients. The military contracts were “cost plus,” meaning that payments were calculated based on actual production costs plus a profit markup. The civilian contracts were bid out in a very competitive market, and every dollar counted. Jerry knew that because all the jobs were done in the same factory, he could manipulate the allocation of overhead costs in a way that would shift costs away from the civilian contracts and into the military “cost plus” work. That way, the company would collect more from the government and be able to shave its bids down on civilian work. He never thought anyone would discover the alterations he had made in the factory workers’ time sheets, but one of his accountants had noticed and tipped off the government auditor. Now as the congressman from Michigan rakes him over the coals, Jerry is trying to figure out his chances of dodging jail time.

Requirements

1. Based on what you have read above, what was Jerry’s company using as a cost driver to allocate overhead to the various jobs?

2. Name two ways that reducing costs on the civilian contracts would benefit the company.

major airlines like american delta and continental are struggling to meet the challe 556780

Major airlines like American, Delta, and Continental are struggling to meet the challenges of budget carriers such as Southwest and JetBlue. Suppose the Delta CFO has just returned from a meeting on strategies for responding to competition from budget carriers. The vice president of operations suggested doing nothing: “We just need to wait until these new airlines run out of money. They cannot be making money with their low fares.” In contrast, the vice president of marketing, not wanting to lose market share, suggests cutting Delta’s fares to match the competition.

“If JetBlue charges only $75 for that flight from New York, so must we!” Others, including the CFO, emphasized the potential for cutting costs. Another possibility is starting a new budget airline within Delta. The CEO cut the meeting short, and directed the CFO to “get some hard data.”

As a start, the CFO decides to collect cost and revenue data for a typical Delta flight, and then compare it to the data for a competitor. Assume she prepares the following schedule:

Delta

JetBlue

Route: New York to Tampa

Flight 1247

Flight 53

Distance

1,000 miles

1,000 miles

Seats per plane

142

162

One way ticket price

$80–$621*

$75

Food and beverage

Meal

Snack

Excluding food and beverage, the CFO estimates that the cost per available seat mile is 8.4 cents for Delta, compared to 5.3 cents for JetBlue. (That is, the cost of flying a seat for one mile—whether or not the seat is occupied—is 8.4 cents for Delta, and 5.3 cents for JetBlue.) Assume the average cost of food and beverage is $5 per passenger for snacks and $10 for a meal.

Split your team into two groups. Group 1 should prepare its response to Requirement 1 and group 2 should prepare its response to Requirement 2 before the entire team meets to consider Requirements 3 and 4.

Requirements

1. Use the data to determine the following for Delta:

a. The total cost of Flight 1247, assuming a full plane (100% load factor)

b. The revenue generated by Flight 1247, assuming a 100% load factor and average revenue per one way ticket of $102

c. The profit per Flight 1247, given the responses to a. and b.

2. Use the data to determine the following for JetBlue:

a. The total cost of Flight 53, assuming a full plane (100% load factor)

b. The revenue generated by Flight 53, assuming a 100% load factor

c. The profit per Flight 53, given the responses to a. and b.

3. Based on the responses to Requirements 1 and 2, carefully evaluate each of the four alternative strategies discussed in Delta’s executive meeting.

4. The analysis in this project is based on several simplifying assumptions. As a team, brainstorm factors that your quantitative evaluation does not include, but that may affect a comparison of Delta’s operations to budget carriers.

what was the filtration cost per liter 556782

Calculating conversion costs and unit cost

Spring Fresh produces premium bottled water. Spring Fresh purchases artesian water, stores the water in large tanks, and then runs the water through two processes: filtration and bottling. During February, the filtration process incurred the following costs in processing 150,000 liters:

Wages of workers operating the filtration equipment

$ 25,950

Manufacturing overhead allocated to filtration

20,050

Water

80,000

Spring Fresh had no beginning Work in process inventory in the Filtration Department in February.

Requirements

1.Compute the February conversion costs in the Filtration Department.

2.The Filtration Department completely processed 150,000 liters in February. What was the filtration cost per liter?

compute the equivalent units of direct materials and conversion costs for the filtra 556783

Drawing a timeline, and computing equivalent units

Refer to S17A 1. At Spring Fresh, water is added at the beginning of the filtration process. Conversion costs are added evenly throughout the process. Now assume that in February, 130,000 liters were completed and transferred out of the Filtration Department into the Bottling Department. The 20,000 liters remaining in Filtration’s ending Work in process inventory were 80% of the way through the filtration process. Recall that Spring Fresh has no beginning inventories.

Requirements

1.Draw a timeline for the filtration process.

2.Compute the equivalent units of direct materials and conversion costs for the Filtration Department.

compute the total costs of the units gallons 556787

Drawing a timeline, computing equivalent units, and assigning cost to completed units and ending work in process; no beginning work in process inventory or cost transferred in

Crafty Paint prepares and packages paint products. Crafty Paint has two departments: (1) Blending and (2) Packaging. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the blending process (dyes) and at the end of the packaging process (cans). Conversion costs are added evenly throughout each process. Data from the month of May for the Blending Department are as follows:

Gallons:

Beginning work in process inventory

0

Started production

9,000 allons

Completed and transferred out to Packaging in May

4,000 gallons

Ending work in process inventory (30% of the way through

blending process)

5,000 gallons

Costs:

Beginning work in process inventory

$ 0

Costs added during May:

Direct materials

6,750

Direct labor

1,300

Manufacturing overhead

2,000

Total costs added during May

$10,050

Requirements

1.Fill in the timeline for the Blending Department.

2.Use the timeline to help you compute the Blending Department’s equivalent units for direct materials and for conversion costs.

3.Compute the total costs of the units (gallons)

a.completed and transferred out to the Packaging Department.

b.in the Blending Department ending Work in process inventory.

what is the ending balance 556789

Computing equivalent units, computing cost per equivalent unit; assigning costs; journalizing; second department, weighted average method

Cool Spring Company produces premium bottled water. In the second department, the Bottling Department, conversion costs are incurred evenly throughout the bottling process, but packaging materials are not added until the end of the process. Costs in beginning Work in process inventory include transferred in costs of $1,700, direct labor of $700, and manufacturing overhead of $330. February data for the Bottling Department follow:

COOL SPRING COMPANY Work in process inventory—Bottling Month Ended February 28, 2013

Physical Units

Dollars

Physical Units

Dollars

Beginning inventory, January 31 (40% complete)

12,000

$ 2,730

Transferred out

152,000

$ ?

Production started:

Transferred in

163,000

134,800

Direct materials

30,400

Conversion costs:

Direct labor

33,100

Manufacturing overhead

16,300

Total to account for

175,000

$217,330

Ending inventory, February 28 (70% complete)

23,000

$ ?

Requirements

1.Compute the Bottling Department equivalent units for the month of February. Use the weighted average method.

2.Compute the cost per equivalent unit for February.

3.Assign the costs to units completed and transferred out and to ending Work in process inventory.

4.Prepare the journal entry to record the cost of units completed and transferred out.

5.Post all transactions to the Work in process inventory—Bottling Department T account. What is the ending balance?

operating income 263976

Classic Coolers manufactures portable coolers adorned with college logos. During the first quarter of the year, the company had the following costs:

Direct materials used $55,500
Direct labor 30,500
Factory rent 65,500
Factory equipment depreciation 13,500
Office equipment depreciation 1,300
Marketing expenses 5,100
Administrative expenses 15,500

The company had no beginning or endingwork in process inventoryand no beginning finished-goods inventory. Although 7,000 units were started and finished during the quarter, just 4,300 were sold, for an average price of $33 each.

alexsandra isosev industries has three operating divisions falil 263978

Alexsandra Isosev Industries has three operating divisions—Falilat Mining, Mourning Paperbacks, and Osygus Protection Devices. Each division maintains its own accounting system and method of revenue recognition.

Falilat Mining

Falilat Mining specializes in the extraction of precious metals such as silver, gold, and platinum. During the fiscal year ended November 30, 2008, Falilat entered into contracts worth $2,250,000 and shipped metals worth $2,000,000. A quarter of the shipments were made from inventories on hand at the beginning of the fiscal year, and the remainder were made from metals that were mined during the year. Mining totals for the year, valued at market prices, were: silver at $750,000, gold at $1,300,000, and platinum at $490,000. Falilat uses the completion-of-production method to recognize revenue, because its operations meet the specified criteria (i.e., reasonably assured sales prices, interchangeable units, and insignificant distribution costs).

Mourning Paperbacks

Mourning Paperbacks sells large quantities of novels to a few book distributors that in turn sell to several national chains of bookstores. Mourning allows distributors to return up to 30% of sales, and distributors give the same terms to bookstores. While returns from individual titles fluctuate greatly, the returns from distributors have averaged 20% in each of the past 5 years. A total of $8,000,000 of paperback novel sales were made to distributors during the fiscal year. On November 30, 2008, $3,200,000 of fiscal 2008 sales were still subject to return privileges over the next 6 months. The remaining $4,800,000 of fiscal 2008 sales had actual returns of 21%. Sales from fiscal 2008 totaling $2,500,000 were collected in fiscal 2008, with less than 18% of sales returned. Mourning records revenue according to the method referred to as revenue recognition when the right of return exits, because all applicable criteria for use of this method are met by Mourning’s operations.

Osygus Protection Devices

Osygus Protection Devices works through manufacturers’ agents in various cities. Orders for alarm systems and down payments are forwarded from agents, and Osygus ships the goods f.o.b. shipping point. Customers are billed for the balance due plus actual shipping costs. The firm received orders for $6,000,000 of goods during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2008. Down payments of $600,000 were received, and $5,000,000 of goods were billed and shipped. Actual freight costs of $100,000 were also billed. Commissions of 10% on product price were paid to manufacturers’ agents after the goods were shipped to customers. Such goods are warranted for 90 days after shipment, and warranty returns have been about 1% of sales. Revenue is recognized at the point of sale by Osygus.

Instructions

(a) There are a variety of methods for revenue recognition. Define and describe each of the following methods of revenue recognition, and indicate whether each is in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

(1) Completion-of-production method.

(2) Percentage-of-completion method.

(3) Installment-sales method.

(b) Compute the revenue to be recognized in the fiscal year ended November 30, 2008, for:

(1) Falilat Mining.

(2) Mourning Paperbacks.

(3) Osygus Protection Devices.

(CMA adapted)

analysis of percentage of completion financial statements in 201 263984

Analysis of Percentage-of-Completion Financial Statements In 2010, Stein otter Construction Corp. began construction work under a 3-year contract. The contract price was $1,000,000. Stein otter uses the percentage-of-completion method for financial accounting purposes. The income to be recognized each year is based on the proportion of cost incurred to total estimated costs for completing the contract. The financial statement presentations relating to this contract at December 31, 2010, follow.



(a) How much cash was collected in 2010 on this contract?

(b) What was the initial estimated total income before tax on this contract?

(AICPA adapted)

andre agassi construction company began operations january 1 20 263986

Andre Agassi Construction Company began operations January 1, 2008. During the year, Andre Agassi Construction entered into a contract with Lindsey Davenport Corp. to construct a manufacturing facility. At that time, Agassi estimated that it would take 5 years to complete the facility at a total cost of $4,500,000. The total contract price for construction of the facility is $6,300,000. During the year, Agassi incurred $1,185,800 in construction costs related to the construction project. The estimated cost to complete the contract is $4,204,200. Lindsey Davenport Corp. was billed and paid 30% of the contract price.

Instructions

Prepare schedules to compute the amount of gross profit to be recognized for the year ended December 31, 2008, under each of the following methods.

(a) Completed-contract method.

(b) Percentage-of-completion method. Show supporting computations in good form.

appliance center is an experienced home appliance dealer applia 263987

Appliance Center is an experienced home appliance dealer. Appliance Center also offers a number of services together with the home appliances that it sells. Assume that Appliance Center sells ovens on a standalone basis. Appliance Center also sells installation services and maintenance services for ovens. However, Appliance Center does not offer installation or maintenance services to customers who buy ovens from other vendors. Pricing for ovens is as follows.

Oven only ……………………………………..…… $ 800

Oven with installation service ……………………….. 850

Oven with maintenance services ……………………… 975

Oven with installation and maintenance services …… 1,000

In each instance in which maintenance services are provided, the maintenance service is separately priced within the arrangement at $175. Additionally, the incremental amount charged by Appliance Center for installation approximates the amount charged by independent third parties. Ovens are sold subject to a general right of return. If a customer purchases an oven with installation and/or maintenance services, in the event Appliance Center does not complete the service satisfactorily, the customer is only entitled to a refund of the portion of the fee that exceeds $800.

Instructions

(a) Assume that a customer purchases an oven with both installation and maintenance services for $1,000. Based on its experience, Appliance Center believes that it is probable that the installation of the equipment will be performed satisfactorily to the customer. Assume that the maintenance services are priced separately. Explain whether the conditions for a multiple-deliverable arrangement exist in this situation.

(b) Indicate the amount of revenues that should be allocated to the oven, the installation, and to the maintenance contract.

journal en1 prepare journal entries to record the december 2012 transactions 264017

1. Prepare journal entries to record the December 2012 transactions.

2. Post those entries to t-accounts.

3. Prepare journal entries for the required adjusting entries.

4. Post the adjusting entries to the t-accounts.

5. Calculate balances for each of the t-accounts and then prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2012.

6. Prepare an income statement for the month ended December 31, 2012.

7. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the month ended December 31, 2012.

8. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

9. Prepare closing entries and post them to the t-accounts.

10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance as of December 31, 2012.

Document Preview:

Problem – Part 1 The business transactions for the comprehensive problem appear below the Chart of Accounts. Required: 1. Prepare journal entries to record the December 2012 transactions. 2. Post those entries to t-accounts. 3. Prepare journal entries for the required adjusting entries. 4. Post the adjusting entries to the t-accounts. 5. Calculate balances for each of the t-accounts and then prepare an adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2012. 6. Prepare an income statement for the month ended December 31, 2012. 7. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the month ended December 31, 2012. 8. Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 2012. 9. Prepare closing entries and post them to the t-accounts. 10. Prepare a post-closing trial balance as of December 31, 2012. Chart of Accounts: Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Prepaid Insurance Prepaid Rent Accounts Payable Salaries Payable Unearned Consulting Revenue Common Stock Retained Earnings Dividends Consulting Revenue Advertising Expense Insurance Expense Rent Expense Salary Expense Supplies Expense Utility Expense Transactions: Dec 1. Murray invested $10,000 cash in exchange for all of the common stock in Murray Company. Dec 3. The company paid $3,200 cash for four months’ rent for office space. Dec 3. The company purchased $1,420 of supplies on credit from Harris Office Products, promising to pay the bill in 7 days. Dec 4. The company billed Easy Leasing $3,200 for consulting services performed in installing a web server. Easy Leasing agreed to pay the bill in 15 days. Dec 5. The company paid $2,400 cash for one year’s premium on a property and liability insurance policy effective December 1. Dec 10. The company paid $1,420 cash to Harris Office for the supplies purchased on credit on December 3. Dec 11. The company began consulting work on a project with Faulty Leasing. The work will last 15 working days, from December 11, 2012 through January 3, 2013. (Note that…

Attachments:

completed contract and percentage of completion with interim los 264026

Completed Contract and Percentage of Completion with Interim Loss Reynolds Custom Builders (RCB) was established in 1985 by Avery Conway and initially built high-quality customized homes under contract with specific buyers. In the 1990s, Conway’s two sons joined the company and expanded RCB’s activities into the high-rise apartment and industrial plant markets. Upon the retirement of RCB’s long-time financial manager, Conway’s sons recently hired Ed Borke as controller for RCB. Borke, a former college friend of Conway’s sons, has been associated with a public accounting firm for the last 6 years. Upon reviewing RCB’s accounting practices, Borke observed that RCB followed the completed contract method of revenue recognition, a carryover from the years when individual home building was the majority of RCB’s operations. Several years ago, the predominant portion of RCB’s activities shifted to the high-rise and industrial building areas. From land acquisition to the completion of construction, most building contracts cover several years. Under the circumstances, Borke believes that RCB should follow the percentage-of-completion method of accounting. From a typical building contract, Borke developed the following data.

Instructions

(a) Explain the difference between completed-contract revenue recognition and percentage-of-completion revenue recognition.

(b) Using the data provided for the Bluestem Tractor Plant and assuming the percentage-of-completion method of revenue recognition is used, calculate RCB’s revenue and gross profit for 2010, 2011, and 2012, under each of the following circumstances.

(1) Assume that all costs are incurred, all billings to customers are made, and all collections from customers are received within 30 days of billing, as planned.

(2) Further assume that, as a result of unforeseen local ordinances and the fact that the building site was in a wetlands area, RCB experienced cost overruns of $800,000 in 2010 to bring the site into compliance with the ordinances and to overcome wetlands barriers to construction. (3) Further assume that, in addition to the cost overruns of $800,000 for this contract incurred under part (b)2, inflationary factors over and above those anticipated in the development of the original contract cost have caused an additional cost overrun of $850,000 in 2011. It is not anticipated that any cost overruns will occur in 2012.

(CMAadapted)

comprehensive problem long term contracts you have been engaged 264028

Comprehensive Problem—Long-Term Contracts you have been engaged by Buhl Construction Company to advise it concerning the proper accounting for a series of long-term contracts. Buhl commenced doing business on January 1, 2010. Construction activities for the first year of operations are shown below. All contract costs are with different customers, and any work remaining at December 31, 2010, is expected to be completed in 2011.



Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule to compute gross profit (loss) to be reported, unbilled contract costs and recognized profit, and billings in excess of costs and recognized profit using the percentage-of completion method.

(b) Prepare a partial income statement and balance sheet to indicate how the information would be reported for financial statement purposes.

(c) Repeat the requirements for part (a) assuming Buhl uses the completed-contract method.

(d) Using the responses above for illustrative purposes, prepare a brief report comparing the conceptual merits (both positive and negative) of the two revenue recognitionapproaches.

comprehensive three part revenue recognition van hatten industri 264030

Comprehensive Three-Part Revenue Recognition Van Hatten Industries has three operating divisions—Depp Construction Division, Dement Publishing Division, and Ankiel Securities Division. Each division maintains its own accounting system and method of revenue recognition. Depp Construction Division During the fiscal year ended November 30, 2010. Depp Construction Division had one construction project in process. A $30,000,000 contract for construction of a civic center was granted on June 19, 2010, and construction began on August 1, 2010. Estimated costs of completion at the contract date were $25,000,000 over a 2-year time period from the date of the contract. On November 30, 2010, construction costs of $7,200,000 had been incurred and progress billings of $9,500,000 had been made. The construction costs to complete the remainder of the project were reviewed on November 30, 2010, and were estimated to amount to only $16,800,000 because of an expected decline in raw materials costs. Revenue recognition is based upon a percentage-of-completion method. Dement Publishing Division The Dement Publishing Division sells large volumes of novels to a few book distributors, which in turn sell to several national chains of bookstores. Dement allows distributors to return up to 30% of sales, and distributors give the same terms to bookstores. While returns from individual titles fluctuate greatly, the returns from distributors have averaged 20% in each of the past 5 years. A total of $7,000,000 of paperback novel sales was made to distributors during fiscal 2010. On November 30, 2010 (the end of the fiscal year) $1,500,000 of fiscal 2010 sales was still subject to return privileges over the next 6 months. The remaining $5,500,000 of fiscal 2010 sales had actual returns of 21%. Sales from fiscal 2009 totaling $2,000,000 were collected in fiscal 2010 less 18% returns. This division records revenue according to the method referred to as revenue recognition when the right of return exists. Ankiel Securities Division Ankiel Securities Division works through manufacturers’ agents in various cities. Orders for alarm systems and down payments are forwarded from agents, and the Division ships the goods f.o.b. factory directly to customers (usually police departments and security guard companies). Customers are billed directly for the balance due plus actual shipping costs. The company received orders for $6,000,000 of goods during the fiscal year ended November 30, 2010. Down payments of $600,000 were received, and $5,200,000 of goods were billed and shipped. Actual freight costs of $100,000 were also billed. Commissions of 10% on product price are paid to manufacturing agents after goods are shipped to customers. Such goods are warranted for 90 days after shipment, and warranty returns have been about 1% of sales. Revenue is recognized at the point of sale by this division.

(a) There are a variety of methods of revenue recognition. Define and describe each of the following methods of revenue recognition, and indicate whether each is in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

(1) Point of sale.

(2) Completion-of-production.

(3) Percentage-of-completion.

(4) Installment-sales.

(b) Compute the revenue to be recognized in fiscal year 2010 for each of the three operating divisions of Van Hatten Industries in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles.

employees at your company disagree about the accounting for sale 264046

Employees at your company disagree about the accounting for sales returns. The sales manager believes that granting more generous return provisions can give the company a competitive edge and increase sales revenue. The controller cautions that, depending on the terms granted, loose return provisions might lead to non-GAAP revenue recognition. The company CFO would like you to research the issue to provide an authoritative answer.

Instructions

If your school has a subscription to the FASB Codification, go to http://aaa.hq.org/asclogin.cfm to log in and prepare responses to the following. Provide Codification references for your responses.

(a) What is the authoritative literature addressing revenue recognition when right of return exists?

(b) What is meant by ?oright of return???

(c) When there is a right of return, what conditions must the company meet to recognize the revenue at the time of sale?

(d) What factors may impair the ability to make a reasonable estimate of future returns?

franchise entries pacific cross burgers inc charges an initial 264056

Franchise Entries Pacific Cross burgers Inc. charges an initial franchise fee of $70,000. Upon the signing of the agreement, a payment of $28,000 is due. Thereafter, three annual payments of $14,000 are required. The credit rating of the franchisee is such that it would have to pay interest at 10% to borrow money. Prepare the entries to record the initial franchise fee on the books of the franchisor under the following assumptions.

(a) The down payment is not refundable, no future services are required by the franchisor, and collection of the note is reasonably assured.

(b) The franchisor has substantial services to perform, the down payment is refundable, and the collection of the note is very uncertain.

(c) The down payment is not refundable, collection of the note is reasonably certain, the franchisor has yet to perform a substantial amount of services, and the down payment represents a fair measure of the services already performed.

a consulting firm produces a service that requires the use of labor and materials 264061

A consulting firm produces a service that requires the use of labor and materials. Each unit of service requires a standard labor time of 30 minutes (0.5 hours). The average pay rate for a labor hour is £20. The consulting firm considers all materials that are required for the service as variable overheads (OH), the cost of which is directly associated with the labor hours worked. It has been estimated that variable OH rate is £10 per service hour.

The budgeted and actual costs, revenue and units for the month November are given in the table below:

Original Budget Actual
Units of Service 1,500 1,600
Sales Revenue £120,000 £124,400
Labor hours 750 860
Labor cost £15,000 £20,210
Variable OH costs £7,500 £8,170
Fixed Cost £68,000 £68,000
Total Cost £90,500 £96,380
Operating Profit £29,500 £28,020

1.Calculate the flexed budget and the key variances between budgeted and actual results.
2. Reconcile the original budget and present the relationship between the budgeted and the actual profit for the month November
3. Discuss the calculated variances, and provide suggestions for better cost management (target length 300 words).


The material used is from the book Atrill, P. & McLaney, E. (2012)
Management accounting for decision makers. 7th ed. Harlow, England : Pearson Education Ltd.
Which I have attached for your reference.

Please no plagiarism as the max percentage is 9%

Please use equation and not just computerised solution

gail devers corporation sells farm machinery on the installment 264065

Gail Devers Corporation sells farm machinery on the installment plan. On July 1, 2008, Devers entered into an installment sale contract with Gwen Torrence Inc. for a 10-year period. Equal annual payments under the installment sale are $100,000 and are due on July 1. The first payment was made on July 1, 2008.

Additional Information

1. The amount that would be realized on an outright sale of similar farm machinery is $676,000.

2. The cost of the farm machinery sold to Gwen Torrence Inc. is $500,000.

3. The finance charges relating to the installment period are $324,000 based on a stated interest rate of 10%, which is appropriate.

4. Circumstances are such that the collection of the installments due under the contract is reasonably assured.

Instructions

What income or loss before income taxes should Devers record for the year ended December 31, 2008, as a result of the transaction above?

(AICPA adapted)

gross profit on uncompleted contract on april 1 2010 dougherty 264074

Gross Profit on Uncompleted Contract On April 1, 2010, Dougherty Inc. entered into a cost-plus- fixed-fee contract to construct an electric generator for Altom Corporation. At the contract date, Dougherty estimated that it would take 2 years to complete the project at a cost of $2,000,000. The fixed fee stipulated in the contract is $450,000. Dougherty appropriately accounts for this contract under the percentage-of-completion method. During 2010 Dougherty incurred costs of $800,000 related to the project. The estimated cost at December 31, 2010, to complete the contract is $1,200,000. Altom was billed $600,000 under the contract.

Prepare a schedule to compute the amount of gross profit to be recognized by Dougherty under the contract for the year ended December 31, 2010. Show supporting computations in good form

(AICPA adapted)

hertzel advertising agency handles advertising for clients under 264084

Hertzel Advertising Agency handles advertising for clients under contracts that require the agency to develop advertising copy and layouts and place ads in various media, charging clients a commission of 15% of the media cost as its fee. The agency makes advance billings to its clients of estimated media cost plus its 15% commission. Adjustments to these advances usually are small. Frequently, both the billings and receipt of cash from these billings occur before the period in which the advertising actually appears in the media. A conference meeting is held between officers of the agency and the new firm of CPAs recently engaged to perform annual audits. In this meeting, consideration is given to four possible points for measuring revenue:

(1) At the time the advanced billing is made,

(2) When payment is received from the client,

(3) In the month when the advertising appears in the media, and

(4) When the bill for advertising is received from the media, generally in the month following its appearance. The agency has been following the first method for the past several years on the basis that a definite contract exists and the revenue is earned when billed. When the billing is made, an entry is prepared to record the estimated receivable and liability to the media. Estimated expenses related to the contract are also recorded. Adjusting entries are made later for any differences between the estimated and actual amounts. As a member of the CPA firm attending this meeting, how would you react to the agency’s method of recognizing revenue? Discuss the strengths and weaknesses of each of the four methods of revenue recognition, and indicate which one you would recommend for the agency to follow.

installment repossession entries selected transactions of tv lan 264120

Installment Repossession Entries selected transactions of TV Land Company are presented below.

1. A television set costing $540 is sold to Jack Matre on November 1, 2010, for $900. Matre makes a down payment of $300 and agrees to pay $30 on the first of each month for 20 months thereafter.

2. Matre pays the $30 installment due December 1, 2010.

3. On December 31, 2010, the appropriate entries are made to record profit realized on the installment sales.

4. The first seven 2011 installments of $30 each are paid by Matre. (Make one entry.)

5. In August 2011 the set is repossessed, after Matre fails to pay the August 1 installment and indicates that he will be unable to continue the payments. The estimated fair value of the repossessed set is $100. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions above on the books of TV Land Company. Closing entries should not be made.

installment sales default and repossession crawford imports inc 264125

Installment Sales—Default and Repossession Crawford Imports Inc. was involved in two default and repossession cases during the year:

1. A refrigerator was sold to Cindy McClary for $1,800, including a 30% markup on selling price. McClary made a down payment of 20%, four of the remaining 16 equal payments, and then defaulted on further payments. The refrigerator was repossessed, at which time the fair value was determined to be $800.

2. An oven that cost $1,200 was sold to Travis Longman for $1,500 on the installment basis. Longman made a down payment of $240 and paid $80 a month for six months, after which he defaulted. The oven was repossessed and the estimated fair value at time of repossession was determined to be $750. Prepare journal entries to record each of these repossessions using a fair value approach. (Ignore interest charges.)

what will appear in the income statement and the shareholder equity account under th 556603

Suppose you had invested $1 million in US fixed assets and in Italian fixed assets under

the following conditions:

PUS

PIT

PPUS

PPIT

S($/€)

S1($/€)

2%

4%

5%

4%

1.1500

1.1200

Assume that fixed asset prices in local currency have kept pace with prices in general.

a Which investment yielded higher returns over the year?

b What will appear in the income statement and the shareholder equity account under the FAS 52 procedure?

c What should appear as income?

d Why does your answer to ‘‘b’’ (where income and shareholder equity are aggregated) disagree with your answer to ‘‘c’’?

what sale price per box should ben hiebert set for the second order 556776

Decision Case 17 1 Hiebert Chocolate, Ltd., is located in Memphis. The company prepares gift boxes of chocolates for private parties and corporate promotions. Each order contains a selection of chocolates determined by the customer, and the box is designed to the customer’s specifications. Accordingly, Hiebert uses a job order costing system and allocates manufacturing overhead based on direct labor cost.

One of Hiebert’s largest customers is the Goforth and Leos law firm. This organization sends chocolates to its clients each Christmas and also provides them to employees at the firm’s gatherings. The law firm’s managing partner, Bob Goforth, placed the client gift order in September for 500 boxes of cream filled dark chocolates. But Goforth and Leos did not place its December staff party order until the last week of November. This order was for an additional 100 boxes of chocolates identical to the ones to be distributed to clients. Hiebert budgeted the cost per box for the original 500 box order as follows:

Chocolate, filling, wrappers, box

$14.00

Employee time to fill and wrap the box (10 min.)

2.00

Manufacturing overhead

1.00

Total manufacturing cost

$17.00

Ben Hiebert, president of Hiebert Chocolate, Ltd., priced the order at $20 per box.

In the past few months, Hiebert has experienced price increases for both dark chocolate and direct labor. All other costs have remained the same. Hiebert budgeted the cost per box for the second order as follows:

Chocolate, filling, wrappers, box

$15.00

Employee time to fill and wrap the box (10 min.)

2.20

Manufacturing overhead

1.10

Total manufacturing cost

$18.30

Requirements

1. Do you agree with the cost analysis for the second order? Explain your answer.

2. Should the two orders be accounted for as one job or two in Hiebert’s system?

3. What sale price per box should Ben Hiebert set for the second order? What are the advantages and disadvantages of this price?

computation of prior service cost amortization pension 263694

(Computation of Prior Service Cost Amortization, Pension Expense, Journal Entries, and Net Gain or Loss) Aykroyd Inc. has sponsored a noncontributory-defined benefit pension plan for its employees since 1987. Prior to 2010, cumulative net pension expense recognized equaled cumulative contributions to the plan. Other relevant information about the pension plan on January 1, 2010, is as follows.

1. The company has 200 employees. All these employees are expected to receive benefits under the plan. The average remaining service life per employee is 12 years.

2. The projected benefit obligation amounted to $5,000,000 and the fair value of pension plan assets was $3,000,000. The market-related asset value was also $3,000,000. Unrecognized prior service cost was $2,000,000. On December 31, 2010, the projected benefit obligation and the accumulated benefit obligation were $4,850,000 and $4,025,000, respectively. The fair value of the pension plan assets amounted to $4,100,000 at the end of the year. A 10% settlement rate and a 10% expected asset return rate were used in the actuarial present value computations in the pension plan. The present value of benefits attributed by the pension benefit formula to employee service in 2010 amounted to $200,000. The employer’s contribution to the plan assets amounted to $775,000 in 2010. This problem assumes no payment of pension benefits.

(Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare a schedule, based on the average remaining life per employee, showing the prior service cost that would be amortized as a component of pension expense for 2010, 2011, and 2012.

(b) Compute pension expense for the year 2010.

(c) Prepare the journal entries required to report the accounting for the company’s pension plan for 2010.

(d) Compute the amount of the 2010 increase/decrease in net gains or losses and the amount to be amortized in 2010 and 2011.

direct your attention to the company with perhaps the largest 263706

Direct your attention to the company with perhaps the largest private pension plan in the world—General Motors. GM’s note relating to its pension plan is included in Exhibit 17-11 on pages 1056–1057. Use that information to answer the following questions.

1. Compute GM’s total PBO as of December 31, 2007. How much has GM set aside in its pension fund to offset the PBO?

2. Now consider GM’s postretirement benefits other than pensions. Add to the PBO from question (1) GM’s accumulated postretirement benefit obligation (APBO). What is GM’s estimated obligation related to pensions and other postretirement benefits?

3. Why do you think there is a separation into U.S. and non-U.S. plans?

4. Note that in 2006 GM’s obligation for its other benefit plans was reduced by $15,091 (in millions) because of ?oamendments.?? What happened?

henning company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for 263737

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries, Statement Presentation) Henning Company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. The following data relate to the operation of the plan for the year 2010 in which no benefits were paid.

1. The actuarial present value of future benefits earned by employees for services rendered in 2010 amounted to $56,000.

2. The company’s funding policy requires a contribution to the pension trustee amounting to $145,000 for 2010.

3. As of January 1, 2010, the company had a projected benefit obligation of $900,000, an accumulated benefit obligation of $800,000, and a balance of $400,000 in accumulated OCI (PSC). The fair value of pension plan assets amounted to $600,000 at the beginning of the year. The actual and expected return on plan assets was $54,000. The settlement rate was 9%. No gains or losses occurred in 2010 and no benefits were paid.

4. Amortization of prior service cost was $50,000 in 2010. Amortization of net gain or loss was not required in 2010. Instructions

(a) Determine the amounts of the components of pension expense that should be recognized by the company in 2010.

(b) Prepare the journal entry or entries to record pension expense and the employer’s contribution to the pension trustee in 2010.

(c) Indicate the amounts that would be reported on the income statement and the balance sheet for the year 2010.

implications of gaap rules on pensions jill vogel and 263753

(Implications of GAAP Rules on Pensions) Jill Vogel and Pete Dell have to do a class presentation on GAAP rules for reporting pension information. In developing the class presentation, they decided to provide the class with a series of questions related to pensions and then discuss the answers in class. Given that the class has all read the rules related to pension accounting and reporting, they felt this approach would provide a lively discussion. Here are the questions:

1. In an article in Business Week prior to new rules related to pensions, it was reported that the discount rates used by the largest 200 companies for pension reporting ranged from 5% to 11%. How can such a situation exist, and does GAAP alleviate this problem?

2. An article indicated that when new GAAP rules were issued related to pensions it caused an increase in the liability for pensions for approximately 20% of companies. Why might this situation occur?

3. A recent article noted that while ?osmoothing?? is not necessarily an accounting virtue, pension accounting has long been recognized as an exception—an area of accounting in which at least some dampening of market swings is appropriate. This is because pension funds are managed so that their performance is insulated from the extremes of short-term market swings. A pension expense that reflects the volatility of market swings might, for that reason, convey information of little relevance. Are these statements true?

4. Understanding the impact of the changes required in pension reporting requires detailed information about its pension plan(s) and an analysis of the relationship of many factors, particularly:

(a) The type of plan(s) and any significant amendments.

(b) The plan participants.

(c) The funding status.

(d) The actuarial funding method and assumptions currently used.

What impact does each of these items have on financial statement presentation?

5. An article noted ?oYou also need to decide whether to amortize gains and losses using the corridor method, or to use some other systematic method. Under the corridor approach, only gains and losses in excess of 10% of the greater of the projected benefit obligation or the plan assets would have to be amortized.?? What is the corridor method and what is its purpose what answers do you believe Jill and Pete gave to each of these questions?

isu company adopted a stock option plan on november 30 263762

ISU Company adopted a stock option plan on November 30, 2007, that provided that 70,000 shares of $5 par value stock be designated as available for the granting of options to officers of the corporation at a price of $8 a share. The market value was $12 a share on November 30, 2007.

On January 2, 2008, options to purchase 28,000 shares were granted to president Don Pedro—15,000 for services to be rendered in 2008 and 13,000 for services to be rendered in 2009. Also on that date, options to purchase 14,000 shares were granted to vice president Beatrice Leonato—7,000 for services to be rendered in 2008 and 7,000 for services to be rendered in 2009. The market value of the stock was $14 a share on January 2, 2008.

The options were exercisable for a period of one year following the year in which the services were rendered. The fair value of the options on the grant date was $3 per option.

In 2009 neither the president nor the vice president exercised their options because the market price of the stock was below the exercise price. The market value of the stock was $7 a share on December 31, 2009, when the options for 2008 services lapsed.

On December 31, 2010, both president Pedro and vice president Leonato exercised their options for 13,000 and 7,000 shares, respectively, when the market price was $16 a share.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary journal entries in 2007 when the stock option plan was adopted, in 2008 when options were granted, in 2009 when options lapsed, and in 2010 when options were exercised.

larson corp sponsors a defined benefit pens 263768

(Pension Worksheet) Larson Corp. sponsors a defined-benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2011, the following balances related to this plan.

Plan assets (market-related value) $270,000

Projected benefit obligation 340,000

Pension asset/liability 70,000 Cr.

Prior service cost 90,000

OCI—Loss 39,000

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2011, the actuary provided the following additional data at December 31, 2011.

(a) Compute pension expense for Larson Corp. for the year 2011 by preparing a pension worksheet that shows the journal entry for pension expense.

(b) Indicate the pension amounts reported in the financialstatements.

mantle company sponsors a defined benefit pension plan the foll 263782

Mantle Company sponsors a defined-benefit pension plan. The following information related to the pension plan is available for 2008.

2008

Plan assets (fair value), January 1 ……………………$380,000

Projected benefit obligation, January 1 ………………..600,000

Pension liability, January 1 ……………………………220,000

Prior service cost, January 1 …………………………..180,000

Service cost …………………………………………….60,000

Actual and expected return on plan assets ……………..24,000

Amortization of prior service cost ……………………..10,000

Contributions (funding) ………………………………110,000

Interest/settlement rate …………………………………….9%

Instructions

(a) Compute pension expense for 2008.

(b) Prepare the journal entry (ies) to record the pension expense and the company’s funding of the pension plan for 2008.

non vested employees an ethical dilemma thinken technology 263794

(Non-vested Employees—An Ethical Dilemma) Thinken Technology recently merged with College Electronic (CE), a computer graphics manufacturing firm. In performing a comprehensive audit of CE’s accounting system, Gerald Ott, internal audit manager for Thinken Technology, discovered that the new subsidiary did not record pension assets and liabilities, subject to GAAP. The net present value of CE’s pension assets was $15.5 million, the vested benefit obligation was $12.9 million, and the projected benefit obligation was $17.4 million. Ott reported this audit finding to Julie Habbe, the newly appointed controller of CE. A few days later Habbe called Ott for his advice on what to do. Habbe started her conversation by asking, ?oCan’t we eliminate the negative income effect of our pension dilemma simply by terminating the employment of non-vested employees before the end of our fiscal year??? How should Ott respond to Habbe’s remark about firing non-vested employees?

on november 1 2007 columbo company adopted a stock option 263813

On November 1, 2007, Columbo Company adopted a stock option plan that granted options to key executives to purchase 30,000 shares of the company’s $10 par value common stock. The options were granted on January 2, 2008, and were exercisable 2 years after the date of grant if the grantee was still an employee of the company; the options expired 6 years from date of grant. The option price was set at $40, and the fair value option pricing model determines the total compensation expense to be $450,000.

All of the options were exercised during the year 2010: 20,000 on January 3 when the market price was $67, and 10,000 on May 1 when the market price was $77 a share.

Instructions

Prepare journal entries relating to the stock option plan for the years 2008, 2009, and 2010 under the fair value method. Assume that the employees perform services equally in 2008 and 2009.

pencomp s balance sheet at december 31 2012 is as follows 263816

PENCOMP’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012, is as follows.

?

Additional information concerning PENCOMP’s defined benefit pension plain is as follows.

Projected benefit obligation at 12/31/12 …………………… $ 820.5

Plan assets (fair value) at 12/31/12 …………………………… 476.5

Unamortized past service cost at 12/31/12 …………………… 150.0

Amortization of past service cost during 2013 ………………… 15.0

Service cost for 2013 …………………………………………… 42.0

Discount rate …………………………………………………… 10%

Expected rate of return on plan assets in 2013 …………………. 12%

Actual return on plan assets in 2013 ……………………………. 10.4

Contributions to pension fund in 2013 …………………………. 70.0

Benefits paid during 2013 ……………………………………… 40.0

Unamortized net loss due to changes in actuarial assumptions

and deferred net losses on plan assets at 12/31/12 ……………… 92.0

Expected remaining service life of employees ………………….. 15.0

Average period to vesting of prior service costs ………………… 10.0

Other information about PENCOMP is as follows.

Salary expense, all paid with cash during 2013 ………………. $ 700.0

Sales, all for cash ……………………………………………… 3,000.0

Purchases, all for cash ………………………………………… 2,000.0

Inventory at 12/31/13 …………………………………………. 1,800.0

Property originally cost $2,000 and is depreciated on a straight-line basis over 25 years with no residual value.

Interest on the note payable is 10% annually and is paid in cash on 12/31 of each year.

Dividends declared and paid are $200 in 2013.

Accounting

Prepare an income statement for 2013 and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2013. Also, prepare the pension expense journal entry for the year ended December 31, 2013. Round to the nearest tenth (e.g., round 2.87 to 2.9)

Analysis

Compute return on equity for PENCOMP for 2013 (assume stockholders’ equity is equal to year-end average stockholders’ equity). Do you think an argument can be made for including some or even all of the change in accumulated other comprehensive income (due to pensions) in the numerator of return on equity? Illustrate that calculation.

Principles

Explain a rationale for why the FASB has (so far) decided to exclude from the current period income statement the effects of pension plan amendments and gains and losses due to changes in actuarialassumptions.

pension expense journal entries amortization of loss 263821

(Pension Expense, Journal Entries, Amortization of Loss) Gottschalk Company sponsors a defined benefit plan for its 100 employees. On January 1, 2010, the company’s actuary provided the following information.

Accumulated other comprehensive loss (PSC) $150,000

Pension plan assets (fair value and market-related asset value) 200,000

Accumulated benefit obligation 260,000

Projected benefit obligation 380,000

The average remaining service period for the participating employees is 10 years. All employees are expected to receive benefits under the plan. On December 31, 2010, the actuary calculated that the present value of future benefits earned for employee services rendered in the current year amounted to $52,000; the projected benefit obligation was $490,000; fair value of pension assets was $276,000; the accumulated benefit obligation amounted to $365,000. The expected return on plan assets and the discount rate on the projected benefit obligation were both 10%. The actual return on plan assets is $11,000. The company’s current year’s contribution to the pension plan amounted to $65,000. No benefits were paid during the year.

(a) Determine the components of pension expense that the company would recognize in 2010. (With only one year involved, you need not prepare a worksheet.)

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the pension expense and the company’s funding of the pension plan in 2010.

(c) Compute the amount of the 2010 increase/decrease in gains or losses and the amount to be amortized in 2010 and 2011.

(d) Indicate the pension amounts reported in the financial statement as of December 31, 2010.

pension worksheet missing amounts kramer co has prepared 263827

(Pension Worksheet – Missing Amounts) Kramer Co. has prepared the following pension worksheet. Unfortunately, several entries in the worksheet are not decipherable. The company has asked your assistance in completing the worksheet and completing the accounting tasks related to the pension plan for 2010.

(a) Determine the missing amounts in the 2010 pension worksheet, indicating whether the amounts are debits or credits.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record 2010 pension expense for Kramer Co.

(c) Determine the following for Kramer for 2010: (1) settlement rate used to measure the interest on the liability and (2) expected return on planassets.

pension worksheet the following data relate to the operation of 263830

Pension Worksheet) The following data relate to the operation of Kramer Co.’s pension plan in 2011. The pension worksheet for 2010 is provided in P20-10.

Service cost $59,000

Actual return on plan assets 32,000

Amortization of prior service cost 28,000

Annual contributions 51,000

Benefits paid retirees 27,000

Average service life of all employees 25 years

For 2011, Kramer will use the same assumptions as 2010 for the expected rate of returns on plan assets.

The settlement rate for 2011 is 10%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a pension worksheet for 2011 and accompanying computations and amortization of the loss, if any, in 2011 using the corridor approach.

(b) Prepare the journal entries (from the worksheet) to reflect all pension plan transactions and events at December 31.

(c) Indicate the pension amounts reported in the financial statements.

pension worksheet missing amounts the accounting staff of 263831

(Pension Worksheet—Missing Amounts) The accounting staff of Usher Inc. has prepared the following pension worksheet. Unfortunately, several entries in the worksheet are not decipherable. The company has asked your assistance in completing the worksheet and completing the accounting tasks related to the pension plan for 2010.

(a) Determine the missing amounts in the 2010 pension worksheet, indicating whether the amounts are debits or credits.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record 2010 pension expense for Usher Inc.

(c) The accounting staff has heard of a pension accounting procedure called ?ocorridor amortization.?? Is Usher required to record any amounts for corridor amortization in (1) 2010 In (2) 2011?Explain.

postretirement benefit worksheet 2 years elton co has the 263840

(Postretirement Benefit Worksheet—2 Years) Elton Co. has the following postretirement benefit plan balances on January 1, 2010.

Accumulated postretirement benefit obligation $2,250,000

Fair value of plan assets 2,250,000

The interest (settlement) rate applicable to the plan is 10%. On January 1, 2011, the company amends the plan so that prior service costs of $175,000 are created. Other data related to the plan are:

(a) Prepare a worksheet for the postretirement plan in 2010.

(b) Prepare any journal entries related to the postretirement plan that would be needed at December 31, 2010.

(c) Prepare a worksheet for 2011 and any journal entries related to the postretirement plan as of December 31, 2011.

(d) Indicate the postretirement-benefit–related amounts reported in the 2011 financial statements.

the following defined pension data of doreen corp apply to 263885

The following defined pension data of Doreen Corp. apply to the year 2012.

Defined benefit obligation, 1/1/12 (before amendment) ……. $560,000

Plan assets, 1/1/12 …………………………………………….. 546,200

Pension asset/liability ………………………………………. 13,800 Cr

On January 1, 2012, Doreen Corp., through plan amendment,

grants past service benefits having a present value of ………… 100,000

Discount rate ……………………………………………………….. 9%

Service cost ……………………………………………………… 58,000

Contributions (funding) ………………………………………… 55,000

Actual (expected) return on plan assets …………………………. 52,280

Benefits paid to retirees ………………………………………… 40,000

Past service cost amortization for 2012 ………………………… 17,000

Instructions

For 2012, prepare a pension worksheet for Doreen Corp. that shows the journal entry for pension expense and the year-end balances in the related pension accounts.

the total payroll of rene auber company for september 2008 263902

The total payroll of Rene Auber Company for September 2008 was $480,000, of which $110,000 is exempt from FICA tax because it represented amounts paid in excess of $97,500 to certain employees. The amount paid to employees in excess of $7,000 was $400,000. Income taxes in the amount of $90,000 were withheld, as well as $9,000 in union dues. The state unemployment tax is 3.5%, but Auber Company is allowed a credit of 2.3% by the state for its unemployment experience. Also, assume that the current FICA tax is 7.65% on an employee’s wages to $97,500 and 1.45% in excess of $97,500. No employee for Auber makes more than $125,000. The federal unemployment tax rate is 0.8% after state credit.

Instructions

Prepare the necessary journal entries if the wages and salaries paid and the employer payroll taxes are recorded separately.

identify all the economic entities involved in the development of anacomp s 263933

Week 2: “Anacomp Inc.” [on Blackboard]

1. Identify all the economic entities involved in the development of Anacomp’s CIS

software system.

2. Describe the contractual arrangements between the economic entities involved in the

CIS development. Who bears the majority of the risk of failure of the development

effort? Who stands to gain most if the development effort succeeds? Are Anacomp’s

shareholders better off or worse off with this arrangement, relative to in-house

development of the system?

3. What criteria will Anacomp’s management use in deciding on whether or not to buy

back the CIS system from RTS Associates? Is Anacomp’s management likely to be

unbiased in deciding on the timing and the price of the purchase? If not, what will be

the direction of the bias?

4. Describe how Anacomp accounts for the CIS development effort. How does this type

of accounting compare with the accounting for in-house software development? What

particular accounts will be affected differe

Document Preview:

Week 2: “Anacomp Inc.” [on Blackboard] 1. Identify all the economic entities involved in the development of Anacomp’s CIS software system. 2. Describe the contractual arrangements between the economic entities involved in the CIS development. Who bears the majority of the risk of failure of the development effort? Who stands to gain most if the development effort succeeds? Are Anacomp’s shareholders better off or worse off with this arrangement, relative to in-house development of the system? 3. What criteria will Anacomp’s management use in deciding on whether or not to buy back the CIS system from RTS Associates? Is Anacomp’s management likely to be unbiased in deciding on the timing and the price of the purchase? If not, what will be the direction of the bias? 4. Describe how Anacomp accounts for the CIS development effort. How does this type of accounting compare with the accounting for in-house software development? What particular accounts will be affected differentially by the two development arrangements? 5. In general, do you think Anacomp’s use of R&D partnerships is a sensible approach to new product development? What are the overall costs and benefits of this approach? 6. Anacomp’s earnings dropped from $0.87 per share in 1981 to $0.50 per share in 1982. What are the reasons for this earnings decline? Are there any unusual and one-time items that influenced Anacomp’s 1982 performance? 7. What is the total amount of debt that Anacomp has on its books? Does the company have any off-balance-sheet liabilities? 8. What is your assessment of Anacomp’s financial flexibility at the end of 1982? Can the company withstand any potential difficulties which could arise with the completion of the CIS system? 9. What is your overall assessment of Anacomp’s future? Do you think Anacomp’s investors should be worried about the company’s viability???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

a corporation sold property with an adjusted basis of 300 000 263969

1. A corporation sold property with an adjusted basis of $300,000 in an installment sale in Year 1. The terms of the sale called for a payment of $100,000 at the time of the sale and five annual payments of $100,000 each, plus interest on the outstanding balance.

(a) Compute the corporations gross profit percentage on the sale

(b) How much of the realized gain must Walker recognize in Year 1?

(c) How much of the realized gain must Walker recognized each year in Year 2 through 6?

2. Herold transfers Blackacre to Maude in exchange for Whiteacre and $125,000 in cash. The two parcels of land have the following tax attributes: Blackacre Whiteacre

Fair market value $450,000 $300,000

Basis $200,000 $375,000

Mortgage $100,000 $75,000

Assuming these properties are held as an investment for both Harold and Maude, analyze the tax consequences of the transaction to each party. How much gain or loss does each party recognize? What is the basis of the properties held by each at the end of the transaction?

How much of each partys gain or loss is postponed (deferred)?

accountutor company operates a nationwide online tutorial servic 263975

AccounTutor Company operates a nationwide online tutorial service for college students taking intermediate financial accounting. Subscribers to the service pay an upfront, refundable fee of $200 that allows them access to the company’s services for one year. A subscriber may receive a full refund of this fee at any time during the year. Because the subscribers are accounting students with high ethics, AccounTutor has no concern about unscrupulous students using the service for a year and then brazenly asking for a full refund. The initial setup cost (incurred in cash) associated with each subscriber is $40. The direct cost to service a subscriber’s account for a year is $80; these costs are incurred in cash evenly throughout the year. The company can reliably estimate that 20% of subscribers will ask for a full refund of their subscription fee. On January 1, 2011, the company received payments from 20,000 subscribers. No refunds were requested until the end of the fourth quarter of the year when 3,800 subscribers requested and received full refunds. Costs associated with the subscribers who are expected to request refunds are expensed as incurred. Other direct costs are deferred and matched with the associated revenues. Make all summary journal entries necessary:

1. On January 1, 2011.

2. At the end of the first quarter.

3. At the end of the second quarter.

4. At the end of the third quarter.

5. At the end of the fourth quarter.

the partnership of mortin and oscar is being dissolved and 263334

The partnership of Mortin and Oscar is being dissolved, and the assets and equities at book value and fair value and the profit and loss sharing ratios at January 1, 2011, are as follows:



Mortin and Oscar agree to admit Trent into the partnership for a one-third interest. Trent invests $95,000 cash and a building to be used in the business with a book value to Trent of $100,000 and a fair value of $120,000.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a balance sheet for the Mortin, Oscar, and Trent partnership on January 2, 2011, just after the admission of Trent, assuming that the assets are revalued and goodwill is recognized.

2. Prepare a balance sheet for the Mortin, Oscar, and Trent partnership on January 2, 2011, after the admission of Trent, assuming that the assets are no trevalued.

the partnership of rummel and kang stonecutters showed revenue 263336

The partnership of Rummel and Kang, Stonecutters, showed revenues of $133,000 and expenses of $41,000 on the year-end work sheet. The capital balances as of January 1, 20–, were $41,000 for C. Rummel and $25,000 for V. Kang. No additional investments were made during the year. As stated in their partnership agreement, after withdrawing salary allowances of $43,000 for Rummel and $34,000 for Kang, the partners each withdrew 10% interest on their January 1 capital balances. No additional withdrawals were made. Any remaining net income is to be divided on a 60-40 basis.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the lower portion of the income statement of the partnership for the year ended December 31, 20–, showing the division of the partnership net income for the year.

2. Prepare a statement of partners’ equity for the year ended December 31, 20–, and the partners’ equity section of the balance sheet on that date.

3. Prepare closing entries for the partnership as of December 31, 20–. (For simplicity, use the account titles ?oRevenues?? for all revenues and ?oExpenses?? for all expenses.)

the post closing trial balances of two proprietorships on 263338

The post-closing trial balances of two proprietorships on January 1, 2012, are presented below.

?

Williams and Jones decide to form a partnership, Wijo Company, with the following agreed upon valuations for non-cash assets.

?

All cash will be transferred to the partnership, and the partnership will assume all the liabilities of the two proprietorships. Further, it is agreed that Williams will invest an additional $5,000 in cash, and Jones will invest an additional $19,000 in cash.

Instructions

(a) Prepare separate journal entries to record the transfer of each proprietorship’s assets and liabilities to the partnership.

(b) Journalize the additional cash investment by each partner.

(c) Prepare a classified balance sheet for the partnership on January 1,2012.

this activity requires teamwork to reinforce understanding of ac 263345

This activity requires teamwork to reinforce understanding of accounting for partnerships.

Required

1. Assume that Baker, Warner, and Rice form the BWR Partnership by making capital contributions of $200,000, $300,000, and $500,000, respectively. BWR predicts annual partnership net income of $600,000. The partners are considering various plans for sharing income and loss. Assign a different team member to compute how the projected $600,000 income would be shared under each of the following separate plans:

a. Shared equally.

b. In the ratio of the partners’ initial capital investments.

c. Salary allowances of $50,000 to Baker, $60,000 to Warner, and $70,000 to Rice, with the remaining balance shared equally.

d. Interest allowances of 10% on the partners’ initial capital investments, with the remaining balance shared equally.

2. In sequence, each member is to present his or her income-sharing calculations with the team.

3. As a team, identify and discuss at least one other possible way that income could be shared.

phd in financial accounting 263434

as per requirement mentioned

plagiarism free

A+ Assignment

Document Preview:

101 301 106 302 126 403 128 623 131 655 163 676 167 684 201 699 2 3 5 6 8 10 12 15 17 20 22 28 31 31 2 5 8 13 18 22 24 25 28 30 30 SERIAL PROBLEM – Aurora Systems This comprehensive problem starts in this chapter and continues in Chapters 4, 5, and 6. On October 1, 2011, Aurora Wilson organized a computer service company called Aurora Systems. Aurora is organized as a sole proprietorship and will provide consulting services, computer system installations, and custom program development. Wilson has adopted the calendar year for reporting, and expects to prepare the company’s first set of financial statements as of December 31, 2011. The initial chart of accounts for the accounting system includes these items: Account Number Account Name Cash Aurora Wilson, Capital Accounts Receivable Aurora Wilson, Withdrawals Computer Supplies Computer Services Revenue Prepaid Insurance Wages Expense Prepaid Rent Advertising Expense Office Equipment Mileage Expense Computer Equipment Repairs Expense, Computer Accounts Payable Charitable Donations Expense Part A Required 1. Set up balance column accounts based on the chart of accounts provided. 2. Prepare journal entries to record each of the following October transactions. 3. Post the October entries. 4. Prepare a trial balance at October 31, 2011. 5. Prepare an income statement and a statement of changes in equity for the month ended October 31, 2011, as well as a balance sheet at October 31, 2011. Oct. 1 Aurora Wilson invested $26,500 cash, a $9,000 computer system, and $5,000 of office equipment in the business. Paid six months of rent in advance; $8,250. Purchased computer supplies on credit for $1,475 from Triple-One Supplies. Paid $8,136 cash for one year’s premium on a property and liability insurance policy. Billed Norton Electric $1,300 for installing a new computer system. Paid for the computer supplies purchased from Triple-One…

Attachments:

accounting 263453

Check My Work (3 remaining) Problem 1-45A (Algorithmic)  http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.doApplying the Fundamental Accounting Equation At the beginning of 2011, Huffer Corporation had total assets of $222,700, total liabilities of $84,200, common stock of $75,900, and retained earnings of $62,600. During 2011, Huffer had net income of $42,750, paid dividends of $11,900, and issued additional common stock for $13,200. Huffer’s total assets at the end of 2011 were $222,700.

Document Preview:

? HYPERLINK “http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do” ?Check My Work? (3 remaining) Problem 1-45A (Algorithmic) ?? HYPERLINK “http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do” o “Click to Continue > by I Want This” ?Applying? the Fundamental Accounting Equation At the beginning of 2011, Huffer Corporation had total assets of $222,700, total liabilities of $84,200, common stock of $75,900, and retained earnings of $62,600. During 2011, Huffer had net income of $42,750, paid dividends of $11,900, and issued additional common stock for $13,200. Huffer’s total assets at the end of 2011 were $222,700. Calculate the amount of liabilities that Huffer must have at the end of 2011 in order for the balance sheet equation to balance.?$  ??? HYPERLINK “http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do” ?Check My Work? (3 remaining) Problem 1-48A (Algorithmic) ?Income Statement and Balance Sheet Relationships Each column presents financial information taken from one of four different companies, with one or more items of data missing. Use your understanding of the relationships among financial statements and financial statement items to find the missing values. ? HYPERLINK “http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do” o “Click to Continue > by I Want This” ?Enter? expenses amounts as positive values.  ?Company??Financial Statement Item?Floyd?Slater?Wooderson?O’Bannion??Total revenue?$130? ?$715? ?$  ? ?$2,475? ??Total expense?98? ?$  ? ?54? ?$  ? ??Net income (net loss)?$  ? ?184? ?18? ?(600)? ??Total assets?905? ?1,985? ?$  ? ?8,140? ??Total liabilities?412? ?$  ? ?117? ?2,280? ??Total equity?$  ? ?828? ?80? ?$  ? ????? HYPERLINK “http://east.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do” ?Check My Work? (3 remaining) Problem 1-49A (Algorithmic)??Income Statement and Balance Sheet The following information for Rogers Enterprises is available at December 31, 2011, and…

Attachments:

donald chin works for northwest supplies his rate of pay 263496

Donald Chin works for Northwest Supplies. His rate of pay is $8.50 per hour, and he is paid 1?1 times the regular rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 per week. During the last week of January of the current year, he worked 48 hours. Chin is married and claims three withholding allowances on his W-4 form. His weekly wages are subject to the following deductions:

(a) Employee income tax (use Figure 8-4 on pages 286 and 287)

(b) Social Security tax at 6.2%

(c) Medicare tax at 1.45%

(d) Health insurance premium, $85.00

(e) Credit union, $125.00

(f) United Way contribution, $10.00

REQUIRED

1. Compute Chin’s regular pay, overtime pay, gross pay, and net pay.

2. Journalize the payment of his wages for the week ended January 31, crediting Cash for the net amount.

elyse lin works for columbia indu stries her rate of 263500

Elyse Lin works for Columbia Indu stries. Her rate of pay is $9.00 per hour, and she is paid 1?1 times the regular rate for all hours worked in excess of 40 per week. During the last week of January of the current year, she worked 46 hours. Lin is married and claims two withholding allowances on her W-4 form. Her weekly wages are subject to the following deductions:

(a) Employee income tax (use Figure 8-4 on pages 286 and 287)

(b) Social Security tax at 6.2%

(c) Medicare tax at 1.45%

(d) Health insurance premium, $92.00

(e) Credit union, $110.00

(f) United Way contribution, $5.00

REQUIRED

1. Compute Lin’s regular pay, overtime pay, gross pay, and net pay.

2. Journalize the payment of her wages for the week ended January 31, crediting Cash for the net amount.

francis baker owns a business called baker construction co she 263508

Francis Baker owns a business called Baker Construction Co. She does her banking at the American National Bank in Seattle, Washington. The amounts in her general ledger for payroll taxes and employees’ withholding of Social Security, Medicare, and federal income tax payable as of July 15 of the current year are as follows:

Social Security tax payable (includes both employer and employee) $9,563

Medicare tax payable (includes both employer and employee) 2,250

FUTA tax payable 504

SUTA tax payable 3,402

Employee federal income tax payable 7,245

Journalize the payment of the employee federal income taxes and Social Security and Medicare taxes on July 15, 20–, and the payments of the FUTA and state unemployment taxes on July 31, 20–.

sail away sports limited see attachment 2 student learning outcome list below in alp 263524

1. Case study: Sail-Away Sports Limited (see attachment) 2 Student learning outcome List below, in alpha format, what key knowledge and skills students would be expected to attain by successfully completing this subject/unit (link to assessment tasks (refer to 2.4 below)): (a) Demonstrate knowledge of the links between management accounting, customers, suppliers and sources of external information and appreciate what is relevant to decision-making in a Management Accounting context. (b) Effectively use costing techniques and describe the strengths and limitations of such techniques (c) Analyse accounting information and present reports in various formats (d) Describe and utilise the basic concepts of planning and control systems (e) Show an awareness of the ethical and regulatory dimensions of accounting 2. Student assessment: Provide, in table format as shown below, a schedule of formal assessment tasks and major examinations for the subject/unit. Assessment Type When assessed Weighting Learning Outcomes Assessed Group project Week 11 Due via Moodle 10 AM Tuesday 5 February 20% a, b, c, d, e 3. The Assignment is to be submitted (using either MS Word and/or MS Excel) via Turnitin on the KOI Moodle site by 10am Tuesday 5 February 2013. A hard copy (Paper copy) of the Case study is to be handed in either at the Lecture or at the beginning of your Tutorial class in Week 11. Students should note, that the hard copy is to ASSIST in marking however the electronic submission MUST occur by 10am Tuesday 5 February otherwise there will be a 20% penalty for ANY late submission PLUS an additional 5% penalty for each day late after Monday. No assignment will be marked after one week late. Please do NOT bring Doctor’s Certificates for the due date. As this is the work of an entire group, please ensure you have sufficient group members ready to work to deliver the work ON TIME.

Attachments:

in the following summary of data for a payroll period 263527

In the following summary of data for a payroll period, some amounts have been intentionally omitted:

Earnings:

1. At regular rate ……………………………. ?

2. At overtime rate ……………………………$ 39,480

3. Total earnings ………………………………. ?

Deductions:

4. Social security tax …………………………. 15,250

5. Medicare tax …………………………………. 3,900

6. Income tax withheld ……………………….. 46,590

7. Medical insurance ………………………….. 7,775

8. Union dues ……………………………………. ?

9. Total deductions ……………………………. 76,000

10. Net amount paid …………………………… 184,000

Accounts debited:

11. Factory Wages ……………………………… 138,900

12. Sales Salaries ………………………………… ?

13. Office Salaries …………………………….. 59,200

a. Calculate the amounts omitted in lines (1), (3), (8), and (12).

b. Journalize the entry to record the payroll accrual.

c. Journalize the entry to record the payment of the payroll.

d. From the data given in this exercise and your answer to (a), would you conclude that this payroll was paid sometime during the first few weeks of the calendar year? Explain.

johnny fuller owns and manages johnny s restaurant a 24 hour re 263530

Johnny Fuller owns and manages Johnny’s Restaurant, a 24-hour restaurant near the city’s medical complex. Johnny employs 9 full-time employees and 16 part-time employees. He pays all of the full-time employees by check, the amounts of which are determined by Johnny’s public accountant, Mary Lake. Johnny pays all of his part-time employees in cash. He computes their wages and withdraws the cash directly from his cash register.

Mary has repeatedly urged Johnny to pay all employees by check. But as Johnny has told his competitor and friend, Steve Hill, who owns the Greasy Diner, ?oFirst of all, my part-time employees prefer the cash over a check, and secondly I don’t withhold or pay any taxes or workmen’s compensation insurance on those wages because they go totally unrecorded and unnoticed.??

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the legal and ethical considerations regarding Johnny’s handling of his payroll?

(c) Mary Lake is aware of Johnny’s payment of the part-time payroll in cash. What are her ethical responsibilities in this case?

(d) What internal control principle is violated in this payroll process?

maura lowe is a payroll accountant for n l 263543

Maura Lowe is a payroll accountant for N & L Company. She prepares and processes the company’s payroll on a weekly basis and has been at N & L for only three months. All employees are paid on Friday. On Wednesday afternoon, Simon Lentz, one of the company’s top sales associates, asks Maura to not take out any payroll deductions from his pay this week. He explains that he is short of cash and needs the full amount of his gross salary just to put food on the table and make his past-due car payment. He promises Maura that she can catch up on the deductions over the next month. The deductions include employee income tax, Social Security tax, Medicare tax, and health insurance premiums.

1. Is Simon’s request of Maura ethical? Why or why not?

2. If this were the first pay period of the year and Maura agreed not to take out deductions from Simon’s pay, what effect would this have on the liabilities section of the balance sheet?

3. Write a short paragraph from Maura to Simon explaining how omitting deductions from a pay period will cause errors in the company’s financial statements.

4. In small groups, discuss what action Maura should take regarding Simon’s request.

multnomah manufacturing estimated that its total payroll for the 263547

Multnomah Manufacturing estimated that its total payroll for the coming year would be $540,000. The workers’ compensation insurance premium rate is 0.2%.

REQUIRED

1. Calculate the estimated workers’ compensation insurance premium and prepare the journal entry for the payment as of January 2, 20–.

2. Assume that Multnomah Manufacturing’s actual payroll for the year was $562,000. Calculate the total insurance premium owed and prepare a journal entry as of December 31, 20–, to record the adjustment for the underpayment. The actual payment of the additional premium will take place in January of the next year.

3. Assume instead that Multnomah Manufacturing’s actual payroll for the year was $532,000. Prepare a journal entry as of December 31, 20–, for the total amount that should be refunded. The refund will not be received until the next year.

aggie co sells agricultural products aggie pays its salespeopl 263636

Aggie Co. sells agricultural products. Aggie pays its salespeople a salary plus a commission. The salary is the same for each salesperson, $1,000 per month. The commission varies by length of employment and is a percentage of the company’s total gross sales. Each salesperson starts with a commission of 1.0%, which is increased an additional 0.5% for each full year of employment with Aggie, to a maximum of 5.0%.

The total gross sales for the month of January were $120,000.

Aggie has six salespeople as follows:

Number of Years Employment

Frank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Sally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Tina . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Barry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Lisa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.75

Assume that the FICA rate is 7.65%, the FUTA rate is 6.2%, and the state unemployment rate is 5.4%. (Assume that the federal government allows the maximum credit for state unemployment tax paid.) The federal income tax withholding rate is 30%. Compute the January salaries and commissions expense, and make any necessary entries to record the payroll transactions including cash payment of all the taxes payable.

amortization of accumulated oci balances keeton company 263638

(Amortization of Accumulated OCI Balances) Keeton Company sponsors a defined-benefit pension plan for its 600 employees. The company’s actuary provided the following information about the plan. The average remaining service life per employee is 10.5 years. The service cost component of net periodic pension expense for employee services rendered amounted to $400,000 in 2010 and $475,000 in 2011. The accumulated OCI (PSC) on January 1, 2010, was $1,260,000. No benefits have been paid. Instructions (Round to the nearest dollar)

(a) Compute the amount of accumulated OCI (PSC) to be amortized as a component of net periodic pension expense for each of the years 2010 and 2011.

(b) Prepare a schedule which reflects the amount of accumulated OCI (G/L) to be amortized as a component of pension expense for 2010 and 2011.

(c) Determine the total amount of pension expense to be recognized by Keeton Company in 2010 and2011.

amortization of accumulated oci g l corridor approach 263639

(Amortization of Accumulated OCI (G/L), Corridor Approach, Pension Expense Computation) The actuary for the pension plan of Gustafson Inc. calculated the following net gains and losses. Other information about the company’s pension obligation and plan assets is as follows. Gustafson Inc. has a stable labor force of 400 employees who are expected to receive benefits under the plan. The total service-years for all participating employees is 5,600. The beginning balance of accumulated OCI G/L) is zero on January 1, 2010. The market-related value and the fair value of plan assets are the same for the 4-year period. Use the average remaining service life per employee as the basis for amortization. (Round to the nearest dollar) Prepare a schedule which reflects the minimum amount of accumulated OCI (G/L) amortized as a component of net periodic pension expense for each of the years 2010, 2011, 2012, and 2013. Apply the ?ocorridor?? approach in determining the amount to be amortized eachyear.

buhl corp sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its 263676

Buhl Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan.

Plan assets ……………………….. $480,000

Defined benefit obligation ……….. 625,000

Pension asset/liability ……………… 45,000

Unrecognized past service cost …… 100,000

As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary.

Service cost for 2012 ………………………………………. $90,000

Discount rate ……………………………………………………. 9%

Actual return on plan assets in 2012 ……………..…………. 57,000

Amortization of past service cost …………………………… 19,000

Expected return on plan assets ……………………………… 52,000

Unexpected loss from change in defined benefit obligation,

due to change in actuarial predictions ………………………. 76,000

Contributions in 2012 ……………………………………….. 99,000

Benefits paid retirees in 2012 ……………………………….. 85,000

Instructions

(a) Using the data above, compute pension expense for Buhl Corp. for the year 2012 by preparing a pension worksheet that shows the journal entry for pension expense and the year-end balances in the related pension accounts.

(b) At December 31, 2012, prepare a schedule reconciling the funded status of the plan with the pension amount reported on the statement of financial position.

comprehensive 2 year worksheet hobbs co has the following 263684

(Comprehensive 2-Year Worksheet) Hobbs Co. has the following defined-benefit pension plan balances on January 1, 2010.

Projected benefit obligation$4,600,000

Fair value of plan assets 4,600,000

The interest (settlement) rate applicable to the plan is 10%. On January 1, 2011, the company amends its pension agreement so that prior service costs of $600,000 are created. Other data related to the pension plan are:

(a) Prepare a pension worksheet for the pension plan in 2010.

(b) Prepare any journal entries related to the pension plan that would be needed at December 31, 2010.

(c) Prepare a pension worksheet for 2011 and any journal entries related to the pension plan as of December 31, 2011.

(d) Indicate the pension-related amounts reported in the 2011 financialstatements.

computation of pension expense amortization of net gain or 263693

(Computation of Pension Expense, Amortization of Net Gain or Loss–Corridor Approach, Journal Entries for 3 Years) Hiatt Toothpaste Company initiates a defined-benefit pension plan for its 50 employees on January 1, 2010. The insurance company which administers the pension plan provided the following selected information for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. There were no balances as of January 1, 2010, when the plan was initiated. The actual and expected return on plan assets was 10% over the 3-year period but the settlement rate used to discount the company’s pension obligation was 13% in 2010, 11% in 2011, and 8% in 2012. The service cost component of net periodic pension expense amounted to the following: 2010, $60,000; 2011, $85,000; and 2012, $119,000. The average remaining service life per employee is 12 years. No benefits were paid in 2010, $30,000 of benefits were paid in 2011, and $18,500 of benefits were paid in 2012 (all benefits paid at end of year)

(Round to the nearest dollar)

(a) Calculate the amount of net periodic pension expense that the company would recognize in 2010, 2011, and 2012.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record net periodic pension expense, employer’s funding contribution, and related pension amounts for the years 2010, 2011, and2012.

on march 1 2009 eckert and kelley formed a partnership 263197

On March 1, 2009, Eckert and Kelley formed a partnership. Eckert contributed $83,000 cash and Kelley contributed land valued at $66,400 and a building valued at $96,400. The partnership also assumed responsibility for Kelley’s $77,800 long-term note payable associated with the land and building. The partners agreed to share income as follows: Eckert is to receive an annual salary allowance of $30,500, both are to receive an annual interest allowance of 11% of their beginning-year capital investment, and any remaining income or loss is to be shared equally. On October 20, 2009, Eckert withdrew $32,000 cash and Kelley withdrew $25,000 cash. After the adjusting and closing entries are made to the revenue and expense accounts at December 31, 2009, the Income Summary account had a credit balance of $86,000.

1. Prepare journal entries to record (a) the partners’ initial capital investments, (b) their cash withdrawals, and (c) the December 31 closing of both the Withdrawals and Income Summary accounts.

2. Determine the balances of the partners’ capital accounts as of December 31, 2009.

on march 15 20×9 troy peter and sarah formed picture perfect 263199

On March 15, 20X9, Troy, Peter, and Sarah formed Picture Perfect general partnership.

This partnership was created to sell a variety of cameras, picture frames, and other photography accessories. When it was formed, the partners received equal profits and capital interests and the following items were contributed by each partner:

Troy-cash of $3,000, inventory with a FMV and tax basis of $5,000, and a building with a FMV of $22,000 and adjusted basis of $10,000. Additionally, the building was secured by a $10,000 nonrecourse mortgage.

Peter-cash of $5,000, accounts payable of $12,000, and land with a FMV of $27,000 and tax basis of $20,000.

Sarah-cash of $2,000, accounts receivable with a FMV and tax basis of $1,000, and equipment with a FMV of $40,000 and adjusted basis of $3,500. Sarah also contributed a $23,000 note payable, and the partnership assumed legally responsibility for paying the note. What is each partners outside basis and how much gain (loss) must the partners recognize in 20X9 when Picture Perfect was formed?

on october 1 2012 the firm of sams price and 263204

On October 1, 2012, the firm of Sams, Price, and Ladd decided to liquidate their partnership. The partners have capital balances of $54,000, $77,000, and $12,000, respectively. The cash balance is $26,000, the book values of noncash assets total $155,000, and liabilities total $38,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1.

Instructions

1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, covering the period October 1–30 2012, for each of the following independent assumptions:

a. All of the noncash assets are sold for $212,000 in cash, the creditors are paid, and the remaining cash is distributed to the partners.

b. All of the noncash assets are sold for $70,000 in cash, the creditors are paid, the partner with the debit capital balance pays the amount owed to the firm, and the remaining cash is distributed to the partners.

2. Assume the partner with the capital deficiency in part (b) above declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency. Journalize the entries to (a) allocate the partner’s deficiency and (b) distribute the remaining cash.

part 1 davis brown and nell are partners and share 263208

Part 1. Davis, Brown, and Nell are partners and share income and loss in a 5:1:4 ratio. The partnership’s capital balances are as follows: Davis, $303,000; Brown, $74,000; and Nell, $223,000. Davis decides to withdraw from the partnership, and the partners agree not to have the assets revalued upon Davis’s retirement. Prepare journal entries to record Davis’s April 30 withdrawal from the partnership under each of the following separate assumptions: Davis

(a) Sells her interest to Leer for $125,000 after Brown and Nell approve the entry of Leer as a partner;

(b) Gives her interest to a daughter-in-law, Gibson, and thereafter Brown and Nell accept Gibson as a partner;

(c) Is paid $303,000 in partnership cash for her equity; (d) is paid $175,000 in partnership cash for her equity; and

(e) Is paid $100,000 in partnership cash plus manufacturing equipment recorded on the partnership books at $269,000 less its accumulated depreciation of $168,000.

Part 2. Assume that Davis does not retire from the partnership described in Part 1. Instead, McCann is admitted to the partnership on April 30 with a 20% equity. Prepare journal entries to record the entry of McCann under each of the following separate assumptions: McCann invests (a) $150,000;

(b) $98,000; and

(c) $213,000.

part 1 meir zarcus and ross are partners and share 263210

Part 1. Meir, Zarcus, and Ross are partners and share income and loss in a 1:4:5 ratio. The partnership’s capital balances are as follows: Meir, $43,000; Zarcus, $179,000; and Ross, $228,000. Zarcus decides to withdraw from the partnership, and the partners agree to not have the assets revalued upon Zarcus’s retirement. Prepare journal entries to record Zarcus’s February 1 withdrawal from the partnership under each of the following separate assumptions: Zarcus

(a) Sells her interest to Garcia for $160,000 after Meir and Ross approve the entry of Garcia as a partner;

(b) Gives her interest to a sonin- law, Fields, and thereafter Meir and Ross accept Fields as a partner;

(c) Is paid $179,000 in partnership cash for her equity;

(d) Is paid $215,000 in partnership cash for her equity; and

(e) Is paid $20,000 in partnership cash plus equipment recorded on the partnership books at $70,000 less its accumulated depreciation of $23,200.

Part 2. Assume that Zarcus does not retire from the partnership described in Part 1. Instead, Potter is admitted to the partnership on February 1 with a 25% equity. Prepare journal entries to record Potter’s entry into the partnership under each of the following separate assumptions: Potter invests

(a) $150,000;

(b) $110,000; and

(c) $196,000.

rahmel becker and heather morrow decide to form a partnership 263230

Rahmel Becker and Heather Morrow decide to form a partnership. Becker will contribute $300,000 to the partnership, while Morrow will contribute only $30,000. However, Morrow will be responsible for running the day-to-day operations of the partnership, which are anticipated to require about 45 hours per week. In contrast, Becker will only work five hours per week for the partnership. The two partners are attempting to determine a formula for dividing partnership net income. Becker believes the partners should divide income in the ratio of 7:3, favoring Becker, since Becker provides the majority of the capital. Morrow believes the income should be divided 7:3, favoring Morrow, since Morrow provides the majority of effort in running the partnership business.

How would you advise the partners in developing a method for dividing income?

siblings jordan and morgan hartley are partners in a trendy 263256

Siblings Jordan and Morgan Hartley are partners in a trendy toy store called ToyMania! Jordan, as senior partner, receives an annual salary allowance of $20,000 and 60 percent of all income/losses after salary and interest allowances are paid. Junior partner Morgan receives an annual salary allowance of $15,000 and 40 percent of all income/losses after salary and interest allowances are paid. The partners receive a 10 percent interest allowance at the end of the accounting period based on their respective January 1 capital account balances. Capital balances as of January 1 are $60,000 for Jordan Hartley and $40,000 for Morgan Hartley.

ToyMania! uses the allowance method for uncollectible accounts. Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. Longer payment terms are available by accepting interest-bearing notes receivable. Terms will vary depending on individual circumstances and will be provided in the related transactions. Notes under $1,000 are collected by ToyMania! while notes greater than $1,000 are collected by either Dean Bank or Marshall Bank.

Interest is based on a 360-day year. Estimated uncollectibles are based on 3 percent of accounts receivable. Accounts are written off, as they are deemed uncollectible; however, efforts to collect all receivables continue for a two-year period.

ToyMania! occasionally writes notes to finance larger purchases and to extend time on accounts payable. Terms will be specified in the related transactions. Again, interest is based on a 360-day year.

Plant assets are depreciated using one of the various GAAP methods for depreciation. Fully depreciated assets that are useful remain in service until a sale, trade, or disposal is necessary. ToyMania! holds a patent on a toy which is amortized during year-end adjustments. The $25,000 patent’s economic life is 10 years although the legal life is 20 years.

A periodic inventory system is maintained valuing inventory using the First-In, First-Out (FIFO) method. The lower-of-cost-or-market rule is applied by recognizing a loss on write-down of inventory when necessary. Beginning merchandise inventory on January 1 was $91,250.

Transactions for 20-1 are provided below.

Jan. 5 Reinstated the account of Christine Roby, which had been written off in the preceding year, and received $500 cash in full settlement.

14 Issued a $3,000, 3-month, 6% note to Zekir Computer Systems to purchase a new computer system (Computer System). The system, with an expected life of four years and no salvage value, will be depreciated using the double-declining-balance method.

Feb. 15 Received a $2,500, 6-month, 7% note from Carol Reynolds for sale of merchandise.

Mar. 11 Morgan Hartley invested an additional $5,000 into the business.

Apr. 1 Disposed of a cash register (Store Equipment) originally costing $675 with a $75 salvage value. Depreciation is computed on a monthly basis with adjusting entries made at the end of each year. Depreciation after eight years of use was $480 as of December 31. The cash register had an estimated life of 10 years.

12 Borrowed $5,000 from Dean Bank, signing a 75-day, 10% note.

14 Paid $500, plus interest, to Zekir Computer Systems (see January 14) and gave a new $2,500, 30-day, 8% note to extend time for payment.

May 1 Wrote off the $1,200 balance owed by Brenda Husband as uncollectible.

14 Paid the principal and interest due on the $2,500 note to Zekir Computer Systems. (See April 14.)

25 Paid $75 cash to Snowden’s Service Station for an oil change, tire rotation, and coolant flushing on the company van.

June 1 Received a $1,700, 120-day, 8% note from Heidi Kruczkiewicz to settle an account receivable.

20 Reinstated the account of Brenda Husband, which had been written off last month, and received $1,200 cash in full settlement. (See May 1.)

22 Paid $30,000 cash to Klippi Construction for an addition (Addition) to the store so that more merchandise could be displayed. The addition has an estimated salvage value of $2,000 and an estimated life of 20 years. Depreciation is to be calculated using the straight-line method.

26 Paid the principal and interest due on the $5,000 note to Dean Bank. (See April 12.)

30 Upon opening the store, it was apparent that someone had entered the store illegally.

Jordan and Morgan need to determine whether anything had been stolen. A physical inventory was taken and it was determined that approximately $67,500 in inventory was on hand, but they need to know how much inventory should have been on hand. Estimate the cost using the retail method based on the following information.

Figures at cost: beginning inventory, $91,250; and net purchases, $70,000. Figures at retail: beginning inventory, $120,000; net purchases $95,000; and net sales, $125,000. Compare your estimate with the balance of $67,500. Does it appear that any inventory was stolen? Space is provided for your calculations following the journal pages for the problem in your working papers.

July 1 Heidi Kruczkiewicz’s note (see June 1) is discounted at Marshall Bank at a discount rate of 12%.

8 Sold $4,250 in merchandise to Kim Sackett, terms 2/10, n/30.

10 Purchased merchandise on account for $15,000 from Dionis Distributing. Credit terms are 3/20, n/30.

18 Received payment in full from Kim Sackett, less discount, for merchandise sold on July 8.

30 Paid Dionis Distributing for merchandise purchased on account on July 10.

Aug. 1 Paid $500 to Snowden’s Service Station to replace the exhaust system on the company van.

15 Received notification from Dean Bank that the principal and interest were collected on the note from Carol Reynolds. (See February 15.) The bank fee for collecting the note was $10.

22 Wrote off the $750 balance owed by Shelley Kozub as uncollectible.

Sept. 1 Traded the company car (Automobile) for a more stylish one at Plume Motors. The old car originally cost $13,000 and is depreciated up-to-date in the amount of $9,000. A trade-in allowance of $5,500 was given. The new car had a market value of $18,000 and the balance was paid in cash. The new car should last at least 100,000 miles and will be depreciated at $0.375 per mile.

9 Received a $2,000, 60-day, 7.5% note from Tammy Jones in payment of an account receivable.

15 Purchased $3,500 worth of toys from Dennis Designs, terms n/30.

Sept. 29 Received notification from Marshall Bank that Heidi Kruczkiewicz’s note was dishonored. (See June 1 and July 1.) A check is issued to cover the maturity value plus a $50 bank fee that must be paid to the bank.

Oct. 15 Issued a $3,500, 90-day, 8% note to Dennis Designs to extend time for payment on an account payable.

20 Borrowed $10,000 for 180 days from Ohler-Cupplo Savings Association on a non-interest-bearing note. The discount rate is 7.5%.

Oct. 31 Sold $125 of merchandise for cash to Melinda Miller.

Nov. 1 Received a $500, 30-day, 5% note from Laura Nottingham in payment of an account receivable.

8 Received notification from Marshall Bank that Tammy Jones dishonored her note. (See September 9.) No fee was charged.

30 Heidi Kruczkiewicz’s dishonored note is collected; Kruczkiewicz pays ToyMania! The maturity value of the note, the $50 bank fee, and interest at 9% on the maturity value plus bank fee. (See September 29.)

Dec. 1 Laura Nottingham paid the interest due on her note (see November 1), and gave a new note ($500) for 45 days at 8%.

14 Paid $2,000 to landscape and improve a grassy area on the lot. There will be no salvage value after 5 years and the landscaping will be depreciated using the sum-ofthe- years’-digits method.

31 Sold building fixtures for $100. The original cost of the fixtures was $500 with an estimated 5-year life and no salvage value. Depreciation up-to-date is $300.

REQUIRED

1. Journalize the above transactions as needed.

2. Prepare selected adjusting entries using the following information.

(a) Accrued interest receivable. (See December 1.)

(b) Accrued interest payable. Separate entries should be made for discounted and non-discounted notes. (See October 15 and October 20.)

(c) Depreciation for the year on the computer system put into service on

January 14.

(d) Depreciation for the year on the new car. 7,000 miles were traveled this period.

(e) Depreciation for the year on the addition completed June 22.

(f) Depreciation for the year on the landscaping recorded December 14.

(g) Annual amortization on the patent.

(h) Estimated uncollectibles are based on accounts receivable of $48,940. Current Allowance for Bad Debts balance is $375 credit.

(i, j) Ending inventory valued at cost on December 31 is $102,000.

(k) Ending inventory valued at market prices on December 31 is $100,500.

3. Prepare the following financial statements:

(a) Partial Income Statement showing the allocation of net income.

ToyMania! had a net income of $84,000 for the year. Each partner made withdrawals equal to his/her salary and interest allowances as stated in the partnership agreement.

(b) Statement of Partners’ Equity. No additional withdrawals were made after salary and interest allowances were allocated.

4. Prepare selected closing entries, referring to the financial statements as needed.

(a) Close Income Summary to the capital accounts.

(b) Close drawing accounts to the capital accounts.

5. Prepare reversing entries when appropriate.

6. Journalize the following transactions that occurred in the subsequent year.

Jan. 13 Paid the principal and interest due on the $3,500 note to Dennis Designs. (See October 15.)

15 Laura Nottingham paid her note plus interest. (See December 1.)

Apr. 18 Paid the principal on the $10,000 non-interest-bearing note to Ohler-Cupplo Savings Association. (See October 20.)

the after closing trial balances of the beams plank and timber 263272

The after-closing trial balances of the Beams, Plank, and Timbers partnership at December 31, 2011, included the following accounts and balances:

Cash …………………………………………… $120,000

Accounts receivable—net…………………….. 140,000

Inventory………………………………………. 200,000

Plant assets—net………………………………. 200,000

Trademarks……………………………………. 20,000

Total debits……………………………………. $680,000

Accounts payable……………………………… $150,000

Notes payable…………………………………. 100,000

Beams capital (profit sharing ratio, 50%)…… 170,000

Plank capital (profit sharing ratio, 30%)……… 180,000

Timbers capital (profit sharing ratio, 20%)…… 80,000

Total credits……………………………………. $680,000

The partnership is to be liquidated as soon as possible, and all available cash except for a

$10,000 contingency balance is to be distributed at the end of each month prior to the time that all assets are converted into cash.

During January 2012, $100,000 was collected from accounts receivable, inventory items with a book value of $80,000 were sold for $100,000, and available cash was distributed.

During February 2012, Beams received plant assets with a book value of $60,000 and a fair value of $50,000 in partial settlement of her equity in the partnership. Also during February, the remaining inventory items were sold for $60,000, liquidation expenses of $2,000 were paid, and a liability of $8,000 was discovered. Cash was distributed on February 28.

During March 2012, the plant assets were sold for $110,000, the remaining non-cash assets were written off, final liquidation expenses of $5,000 were paid, and cash was distributed. The dissolution of the partnership was completed on March 31, 2012.

REQUIRED

Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the Beams, Plank, and Timbers partnership for the period January 1 to March 31, 2012.

the assets and equities of the quen reed and stacy 263273

The assets and equities of the Quen, Reed, and Stacy partnership at the end of its fiscal year on October 31, 2011, are as follows:

?

The partners decide to liquidate the partnership. They estimate that the non-cash assets, other than the loan to Reed, can be converted into $100,000 cash over the two-month period ending December 31, 2011. Cash is to be distributed to the appropriate parties as it becomes available during the liquidation process.

1. The partner most vulnerable to partnership losses on liquidation is:

a. Quen

b. Reed

c. Reed and Quen equally

d. Stacy

2. If $90,000 is available for the first distribution, it should be paid to:

?



3. If a total amount of $7,500 is available for distribution to partners after all non-partner liabilities are paid, it should be paid asfollows:

the at partnership was organized several years ago and on 263275

The AT Partnership was organized several years ago, and on January 1, 2011, the partners agree to admit Carmen for a 40 percent interest in capital and earnings. Capital account balances and profit and loss sharing ratios at January 1, 2011, before the admission of Carmen, are as follows:

Aida (50%) ………… $500,000

Thais (50%) …………. 280,000

REQUIRED: Prepare journal entries to record the admission of Carmen for a 40 percent interest in the capital and rights to future profits under the following independent assumptions.

1. Carmen pays $450,000 directly to Aida and Thais for 40% of each of their interests, and the bonus procedure is used.

2. Carmen pays $600,000 directly to Aida and Thais for 40% of each of their interests, and goodwill is recorded.

3. Carmen invests $450,000 in the partnership for her 40% interest, and goodwill is recorded.

4. Carmen invests $600,000 in the partnership for her 40% interest, and goodwill is recorded.

the balance sheet of roger susan and tom who share 263276

The balance sheet of Roger, Susan, and Tom, who share partnership profits 30 percent, 30 percent, and 40 percent, respectively, included the following balances on January 1, 2011, the date of dissolution:

?



During January 2011, part of the firm’s assets are sold for $40,000. In February the remaining assets are sold for $21,000. Assume that available cash is distributed to the proper parties at the end of January and at the end of February.

REQUIRED

Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation with supporting safe payments schedules for each cash distribution. (It will not be possible to determine the actual gains and losses inJanuary.)

the capital account balances and profit and loss sharing ratios 263279

The capital account balances and profit and loss sharing ratios of the Byd, Box, Dar, and Fus partnership on December 31, 2011, after closing entries are as follows:

Byd (30%) …………. $ 30,000

Box (20%) …………… 25,000

Dar (40%) ……………. 25,000

Fus (10%) ……………. 20,000

Total capital ……….. $100,000

Box is retiring from the partnership, and the partners agree that he will receive a cash payment of $35,000 in final settlement of his interest. The book values of partnership assets and liabilities are equal to fair values, except for a building with a book value of $15,000 and a fair value of $25,000.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record Box’s retirement assuming that assets are revalued to the basis implied by the excess payment to Box.

2. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record Box’s retirement assuming the bonus approach is used.

the capital balances and profits and loss sharing percentages fo 263287

The capital balances and profits and loss sharing percentages for the Sprint, Jog, and Run partnership at December 31, 2011, are as follows:

Sprint capital (30%) ……. $160,000

Jog capital (50%) ………. $180,000

Run capital (20%) ……… $140,000

The partners agree to admit Walk into the partnership on January 1, 2012, for a 20 percent interest in the capital and income of the business.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record Walk’s admission to the partnership assuming that he invests $100,000 in the partnership for the 20% interest and that partnership capital is revalued. Assume that the book value of partnership assets equals the fair value.

2. Prepare the journal entry or entries to record Walk’s admission to the partnership assuming that he invests $140,000 in the partnership for the 20% interest and that partnership capital is revalued.

the following events pertain to a partnership formed by mark 263295

The following events pertain to a partnership formed by Mark Raymond and Stan Bryden to operate a floor-cleaning company:

2011

Feb 14 The partnership was formed. Raymond transferred to the partnership $80.000 cash, land worth $800,000, a building worth $480,000, and a mortgage on the building of $240,000. Bryden transferred to the partnership $40,000 cash and equipment worth $160,000.

Dec. 31 During 2011, the partnership earned income of just $84,000. The partnership agreement specifics that income and losses are to be divided by paying salaries of $40000 to Raymond and $60,000 to Bryden, allowing 8 percent interest on beginning capital investment, and dividing any remainder equally.

2012

Jan 1 To improve the prospects for the company, the partners decided to take in a new partner, Chuck Menzer, who had experience in the floor-cleaning business. Menzer invested $156,000 for a 25 percent interest in the business. A bonus was transferred in equal amounts from the original partners’ Capital accounts to Menzer’s Capital account.

Dec. 31 During 2012, the company earned income of $87,200. The new partnership agreement specified that income and losses would be divided by paying salaries of $60,000 to Bryden and $80,000 to Menzer (no salary to Raymond), allowing 8 percent interest on beginning capital balances after Menzer’s admission, and dividing the remainder equally.

2013

Jan 1 Because it appeared that the business could not support the three partners, the partners decided to liquidate the partnership. The asset and liability accounts of the partnership were as follows: Cash, $407,200; Accounts Receivable (net), $68,000; Land, $80,000; Building (net), $448,000; Equipment (net), $236,000; Accounts Payable, $88,000; and Mortgage Payable, $224,000. The equipment was sold for $200,000. The accounts payable were paid. The loss was distributed equally to the partners’ Capital accounts. A statement of liquidation was prepared, and the remaining assets and liquidation were distributed. Raymond agreed to accept cash plus the land and building at book value and the mortgage payable as payments for his share. Bryden accepted cash and the accounts receivable for his share. Menzer was paid in cash.

Required

Prepare entries in journal form record all of the faces above. Support your computations with schedules, and prepare a statement of liquation in connection with January 1, 2013, entries.

the following information pertains to kwon corp at january 1 263296

The following information pertains to Kwon Corp. at January 1, 2010.

Common stock, $10 par, 50,000 shares authorized,

2,000 shares issued and outstanding $20,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par, common stock 15,000

Retained earnings 65,000

Kwon Corp. completed the following transactions during 2010:

1. Issued 2,000 shares of $10 par common stock for $25 per share.

2. Repurchased 200 shares of its own common stock for $22 per share.

3. Resold 50 shares of treasury stock for $26 per share.

Required

a. How many shares of common stock were outstanding at the end of the period?

b. How many shares of common stock had been issued at the end of the period?

c. Organize the transactions data in accounts under the accounting equation.

d. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet reflecting these transactions. Include the number of shares authorized, issued, and outstanding in the description of the common stock.

the notes to the annual report for kpmg llp u k 263305

The notes to the annual report for KPMG LLP (U.K.) indicated the following policies regarding the partners’ capital:

The allocation of profits to those who were partners during the financial year occurs following the finalization of the annual financial statements. During the year, partners receive monthly drawings and, from time to time, additional profit distributions. Both the monthly drawings and profit distributions represent payments on account of current-year profits and are reclaimable from partners until profits have been allocated.

Assume that the partners draw ?L40 million per month for 2012 and the net income for the year is ?L600 million. Journalize the partner capital and partner drawing control accounts in the following requirements:

a. Provide the journal entry for the monthly partner drawing for January.

b. Provide the journal entry to close the income summary account at the end of the year.

c. Provide the journal entry to close the drawing account at the end of the year.

d. Why would partner drawings be considered ?oreclaimable?? until profits have been allocated?

the partners in apache company decide to liquidate the firm 263311

The partners in Apache Company decide to liquidate the firm when the balance sheet shows the following.

?

The partners share income and loss 5:3:2. During the process of liquidation, the transactions below were completed in the following sequence.

1. A total of $57,000 was received from converting noncash assets into cash.

2. Gain or loss on relization was allocated to partners.

3. Liabilities were paid in full.

4. Cash was paid to the partners with credit balances.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a schedule of cash payments.

(b) Prepare the entries to record the transactions.

(c) Post to the cash and capitalaccounts.

the partners in river song company decide to liquidate the 263313

The partners in River Song Company decide to liquidate the firm when the balance sheet shows the following.

?



The partners share income and loss 5 : 3 : 2. During the process of liquidation, the following transactions were completed in the following sequence.

1. A total of $55,000 was received from converting non-cash assets into cash.

2. Gain or loss on realization was allocated to partners.

3. Liabilities were paid in full.

4. P. Tyler paid his capital deficiency.

5. Cash was paid to the partners with credit balances.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the entries to record the transactions.

(b) Post to the cash and capital accounts.

(c) Assume that Tyler is unable to pay the capital deficiency.

(1) Prepare the entry to allocate Tyler’s debit balance to Mangold and Otis.

(2) Prepare the entry to record the final distribution ofcash.

the partnership agreement of alex carl and erika provides that 263319

The partnership agreement of Alex, Carl, and Erika provides that profits are to be divided as follows:

1. Alex is to receive a salary allowance of $10,000 for managing the partnership business.

2. Partners are to receive 10% interest on average capital balances. Drawings are excluded from computing these averages.

3. Remaining profits are to be divided 30%, 30%, and 40% to Alex, Carl, and Erika, respectively.

Alex had a capital balance of $60,000 at January 1, 2011, and had drawings of $8,000 on July 1, 2011. Carl’s capital balance on January 1, 2011, was $90,000, and he invested an additional $30,000 on September 1, 2011. Erika’s beginning capital balance was $110,000, and she withdrew $10,000 on July 1 but invested an additional $20,000 on October 1, 2011. The partnership has a net loss of $12,000 during 2011, and the accountant in charge allocated the net loss as follows: $200 profit to Alex, $4,800 loss to Carl, and $7,400 loss to Erika.

REQUIRED

1. A schedule to show the correct allocation of the partnership net loss for 2011

2. A statement of partnership capital for the year ended December 31, 2011

3. Journal entries to correct the books of the partnership at December 31, 2011, assuming that all closing entries for the year have been recorded.

the partnership of jones keller and glade was created on 263333

The partnership of Jones, Keller, and Glade was created on January 2, 2011, with each of the partners contributing cash of $30,000. Reported profits, withdrawals, and additional investments were as follows:



The partnership agreement provides that partners are to be allowed 10 percent interest on the beginning-of-the-year capital balances, that Jones is to receive a $7,000 salary allowance, and that remaining profits are to be divided equally.

After the books were closed on December 31, 2013, it was discovered that depreciation had been understated by $2,000 each year and that the inventory taken at December 31, 2013, was understated by $8,000.

REQUIRED

1. Calculate the balances in the three capital accounts on January 1, 2014.

2. Calculate the balances that should be in the three capital accounts on January 1, 2014, taking into account the corrections that must be made for errors made in the calculation of income in the prior years.

3. Give the journal entry (one entry) to correct the books on January 1,2014.

cummings and stickel construction company a partnership is ope 262937

Cummings and Stickel Construction Company, a partnership, is operating a general contracting business. Ownership of the company is divided among the partners, Katie Cummings, Julie Stickel, Roy Hewson, and Patricia Weber. Profits and losses are shared equally. The books are kept on the calendar-year basis.

On August 10, after the business had been in operation for several years, Patricia Weber died. Mr. Weber wished to sell his wife’s interest for $30,000. After the books were closed, the partners’ capital accounts had credit balances as follows:

Katie Cummings ……. $90,000

Julie Stickel ………….. 60,000

Roy Hewson …………. 50,000

Patricia Weber ……….. 40,000

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the general journal entry required to enter the check issued to Mr. Weber in payment of his deceased wife’s interest in the partnership. According to the partnership agreement, the difference between the amount paid to Mr. Weber and the book value of Patricia Weber’s capital account is allocated to the remaining partners based on their ending capital account balances.

2. Assume instead that Mr. Weber is paid $60,000 for the book value of Patricia Weber’s capital account. Prepare the necessary journal entry.

3. Assume instead that Julie Stickel (with the consent of the remaining partners) purchased Weber’s interest for $70,000 and gave Mr. Weber a personal check for that amount. Prepare the general journal entry for the partnership only.

doctors maben orlando and clark have been in a group 262965

Doctors Maben, Orlando, and Clark have been in a group practice for several years. Maben and Orlando are family practice physicians, and Clark is a general surgeon. Clark receives many referrals for surgery from his family practice partners. Upon the partnership’s original formation, the three doctors agreed to a two-part formula to share income. Every month each doctor receives a salary allowance of $3,000. Additional income is divided according to a percent of patient charges the doctors generate for the month. In the current month, Maben generated 10% of the billings, Orlando 30%, and Clark 60%. The group’s income for this month is $50,000. Clark has expressed dissatisfaction with the income-sharing formula and asks that income be split entirely on patient charge percents.

Required

1. Compute the income allocation for the current month using the original agreement.

2. Compute the income allocation for the current month using Clark’s proposed agreement.

3. Identify the ethical components of this partnership decision for the doctors.

excel medical llc consists of two doctors douglass and finn 262996

Excel Medical, LLC, consists of two doctors, Douglass and Finn, who share in all income and losses according to a 2:3 income-sharing ratio. Dr. Lindsey Koster has been asked to join the LLC. Prior to admitting Koster, the assets of Excel Medical were revalued to reflect their current market values. The revaluation resulted in medical equipment being increased by $25,000. Prior to the revaluation, the equity balances for Douglass and Finn were $240,000 and $275,000, respectively.

(a) Provide the journal entry for the asset revaluation.

(b) Provide the journal entry for the bonus under the following independent situations:

1. Koster purchased a 30% interest in Excel Medical, LLC, for $310,000.

2. Koster purchased a 25% interest in Excel Medical, LLC, for $160,000.

hall lang and das are members of evergreen sales llc 263028

Hall, Lang, and Das are members of Evergreen Sales, LLC, sharing income and losses in the ratio of 2:2:1, respectively. The members decide to liquidate the limited liability company. The members’ equity prior to liquidation and asset realization on May 1, 2012, are as follows:

Hall ……………. $37,000

Lang ……………. 40,000

Das …………….. 18,000

Total ………….. $95,000

In winding up operations during the month of May, noncash assets with a book value of $107,000 are sold for $123,000, and liabilities of $25,000 are satisfied. Prior to realization, Evergreen Sales has a cash balance of $13,000.

a. Prepare a statement of LLC liquidation.

b. Provide the journal entry for the final cash distribution to members.

c. What is the role of the income- and loss-sharing ratio in liquidating a LLC?

healthsource llc consists of two doctors drew and moore who 263032

HealthSource, LLC, consists of two doctors, Drew and Moore, who share in all income and losses according to a 2:3 income-sharing ratio. Dr. Mann has been asked to join the LLC. Prior to admitting Mann, the assets of HealthSource were revalued to reflect their current market values. The revaluation resulted in medical equipment being increased by $35,000. Prior to the revaluation, the equity balances for Drew and Moore were $201,000 and $289,000, respectively.

a. Provide the journal entry for the asset revaluation.

b. Provide the journal entry for the bonus under the following independent situations:

1. Mann purchased a 30% interest in HealthSource, LLC, for $285,000.

2. Mann purchased a 25% interest in HealthSource, LLC, for $155,000.

in january 2010 edie rivera and babs bacon agreed to 263081

In January 2010, Edie Rivera and Babs Bacon agreed to produce and sell chocolate candies. Rivera contributed $240,000 in cash to the business. Bacon contributed the building and equipment, valued at $220,000 and $140,000, respectively. The partnership had an income of $84,000 during 2010 but was less successful during 2011, when income was only $40,000.

Required

1. Prepare the entry in journal form to record the investment of both partners in the partnership.

2. Determine the share of income for each partner in 2010 and 2011 under each of the following conditions:

a. The partners agreed to share income equally.

b. The partner failed to agree on an income-sharing arrangement.

c. The partners agreed to share income according to the ratio of their original investments.

d. The partners agreed to share income by allowing interest of 10 percent on their original investments and dividing the remainder equally.

e. The partners agreed to share income by allowing salaries of $40,000 for Rivera and $28,000 for Bacon, and dividing the remainder equally.

f. The partners agreed to share income by paying salaries of $40,000 to Rivera and $28,000 to Bacon, allowing interest of 9 percent on their original investment, and dividing the remainder equally.

3. What are some of factors that need to be considered in choosing the plan of partners income sharing among the options shown in requirement 2?

intermedia llc has three members wyxt partners lindsey wilso 263088

Intermedia, LLC, has three members: WYXT Partners, Lindsey Wilson, and Daily Sun Newspaper, LLC. On January 1, 2010, the three members had equity of $200,000, $50,000, and $120,000, respectively. WYXT Partners contributed an additional $50,000 to Intermedia, LLC, on June 1, 2010. Lindsey Wilson received an annual salary allowance of $115,600 during 2010. The members’ equity accounts are also credited with 12% interest on each member’s January 1 capital balance. Any remaining income is to be shared in the ratio of 4:3:3 among the three members. The net income for Intermedia, LLC, for 2010 was $650,000. The salary and interest allowances were distributed to the members.

(a) Determine the division of income among the three members.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to close the net income and withdrawals to the individual member equity accounts.

(c) Prepare a statement of members’ equity for 2010.

jerry graves and bonnie moss decide to form a partnership 263112

Jerry Graves and Bonnie Moss decide to form a partnership. Graves will contribute $300,000 to the partnership, while Moss will contribute only $30,000. However, Moss will be responsible for running the day-to-day operations of the partnership, which are anticipated to require about 45 hours per week. In contrast, Graves will only work five hours per week for the partnership. The two partners are attempting to determine a formula for dividing partnership net income. Graves believes the partners should divide income in the ratio of 7:3, favoring Graves, since Graves provides the majority of the capital. Moss believes the income should be divided 7:3, favoring Moss, since Moss provides the majority of effort in running the partnership business.

How would you advise the partners in developing a method for dividing income?

jones smith and tandy are partners in a furniture store 263119

Jones, Smith, and Tandy are partners in a furniture store that began liquidation on January 1, 2011, when the ledger contained the following account balances:

?



The following transactions and events occurred during the liquidation process:

January Inventories were sold for $20,000 cash, collections on account totaled $14,000, and half of the amount due to creditors was paid.

February Land costing $40,000 was sold for $60,000, the remaining land and buildings were sold for $40,000, half of the remaining receivables were collected, and the remainder were uncollectible.

March The remaining liabilities were paid, and available cash was distributed to the partners in final liquidation.

REQUIRED

Prepare a statement of liquidation for the Jones, Smith, and Tandypartnership.

homework help 263130

CRC offers racqueball and other physical fitness facilities to its mbrs. There are 4 of these clubs in the metro area. each club has between 1800 to 250 mbs. revenue is derived from annual mbrship fees and hourly curt fees. The annual mbrships fee: individual $40.00; student 25, and family 95. The hourly court fee vary from $6 to 10 depending upon the season and the time of day (prime vs. nonprime time).The peak racqu. season is considered to run from sept to april. during this period, court usage averages 90 to 100% of capacity during prime time 5-9pm & 50% capacity during the remaining hours Daily court usage during the the off season ie summer average 20-40% of capacity.most of crc mbr have sept. expiration. A sustantial amount of the cash receipts are collected during the early part of the racq. season due to the renewal of the annual mbrship fee and heavy curt usage. However cash receipts are nt as large in spring and drop sig. in the summer months.CRC is considering change it s mbrship & fee structure in an attept to change it cash reciept. under the new mbrship plan., only an annual mbrship fee would be charged, rather than a mbrship fee plus hourly court fee. There would be 2 classes of mbrship: indiv. $250 and family 400The annual fee would collected in adv. at the time the mbrship application is completed mbr would be allowed to use the raquetball courts as often as they wish during the yr under the new plan.

All future mbrship would be sold under these new terms. current mbrship would be honored on the old basis until they expire However aspecialpromotioncampaignwould be institute toattractnew mbr and to encourage current mbrs to convert to new mbrship plan immediately.

The annual fee for indiv. family mbrship would reduced $200 and $300 respectedly during the two month promotion campaing. in additon all mbrship sold and renewed during this period would be for 15 mos rather than the normal one year period. current mbrs also would be given a credit toward the annal fee for the unexpired portion of their mbrship fee and for all prepaid hourly court fee for league play that have not yet been used.

CRC management estimate that 60 to 70% of the present mbrship would continue w. the club. The most active mbr (45%of the present mbrship) would convert immediately to the new plan. while the remaining mbr who continue would wait until their current mbrship expire. Those mbrs who would not continue are not consider active (ie they play five or less time during the year) management estimates that the losss of mbr would be offset full by new members within 6 months ofinstitutingthe new plan. Furthermore, many of the new mbrs would be individuals who would play during nonprime time. management estimates that adequate courtime will be available for all member under the new plan.If the mbrship plan is adopted, it would be instituted on Feb. 1, well before the summer season. The special promotionalcampaignwould be conducted during March and April. once the plan implemented. annual renewal mbrship and payment of fees would take place as each indiv. or family membership expired.

****
I need to do
Develop a Schedule 1 (revenue) budget and a Schedule 7 (cash receipts) budget based on the new membership plan and fee structure. Will CRC’s new membership plan and fee structure improve its ability to plan its cash receipts? Why or why not?

karen rhea and wayne sellevaeg decided to form a partnership 263135

Karen Rhea and Wayne Sellevaeg decided to form a partnership on July 1, 20-1. Rhea invested $100,000 and Sellevaeg invested $50,000. For the fiscal year ended June 30, 20-2, a net income of $90,000 was earned. Determine the amount of net income that Rhea and Sellevaeg would receive under each of the following independent assumptions:

1. There is no agreement concerning the distribution of net income.

2. Each partner is to receive 10% interest on their original investment. The remaining net income is to be divided equally.

3. Rhea and Sellevaeg are to receive a salary allowance of $30,000 and $40,000, respectively. The remaining net income is to be divided equally.

4. Each partner is to receive 10% interest on their original investment. Rhea and Sellevaeg are to receive a salary allowance of $30,000 and $40,000, respectively. The remaining net income is to be divided as follows: Rhea, 40% and Sellevaeg, 60%.

kathy and eddie formed the k e partnership several 263138

Kathy and Eddie formed the K & E partnership several years ago. Capital account balances on January 1, 2011, were as follows:

Kathy ……….. $496,750

Eddie ……….. $268,250

The partnership agreement provides Kathy with an annual salary of $10,000 plus a bonus of 5 percent of partnership net income for managing the business. Eddie is provided an annual salary of $15,000 with no bonus. The remainder is shared evenly. Partnership net income for 2011 was $30,000. Eddie and Kathy each invested an additional $5,000 during the year to finance a special purchase. Year-end drawing account balances were $15,000 for Kathy and $10,000 for Eddie.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare an income allocation schedule.

2. Create the journal entries to update the equity accounts at the end of the year.

3. Determine the capital balances as of December 31, 2011.

kathy lentz rob snyder and tom rohm were all general 263139

Kathy Lentz, Rob Snyder, and Tom Rohm were all general partners in a consulting business. Each partner owned one-third of the business. The partnership agreement stated that all three partners must approve vouchers for payments in amounts exceeding $5,000. While Tom was on vacation, Kathy and Rob decided to purchase a new computer system costing $6,800. A voucher was prepared and Rob signed both his and Tom’s name. Kathy signed her name and gave the voucher to the accounts payable clerk who wrote the check for $6,800.

1. Why would a partnership agreement specify that all purchases over a certain amount be approved by all partners? Are there any circumstances that would warrant deviation from this policy?

2. What are the disadvantages of the partnership form of business ownership?

3. Write a short memo from Tom Rohm to Kathy Lentz and Rob Snyder expressing disapproval of the situation.

4. In groups of three or four, discuss some of the possible outcomes of this situation.

macro media llc has three members wlkt partners amanda nelso 263158

Macro Media, LLC, has three members: WLKT Partners, Amanda Nelson, and Daily Sentinel Newspaper, LLC. On January 1, 2012, the three members had equity of $250,000, $50,000, and $140,000, respectively. WLKT Partners contributed an additional $50,000 to Macro Media, LLC, on June 1, 2012. Amanda Nelson received an annual salary allowance of $88,700 during 2012. The members’ equity accounts are also credited with 10% interest on each member’s January 1 capital balance. Any remaining income is to be shared in the ratio of 4:3:3 among the three members. The net income for Macro Media, LLC, for 2012 was $720,000. Amounts equal to the salary and interest allowances were withdrawn by the members.

a. Determine the division of income among the three members.

b. Prepare the journal entry to close the net income and withdrawals to the individual member equity accounts.

c. Prepare a statement of members’ equity for 2012.

d. What are the advantages of an income-sharing agreement for the members of this LLC?

mel and dav created a partnership to own and operate 263165

Mel and Dav created a partnership to own and operate a health-food store. The partnership agreement provided that Mel receive a salary of $10,000 and Dav a salary of $5,000 to recognize their relative time spent in operating the store. Remaining profits and losses were divided 60:40 to Mel and Dav, respectively. Income of $13,000 for 2011, the first year of operations, was allocated $8,800 to Mel and $4,200 to Dav.

On January 1, 2012, the partnership agreement was changed to reflect the fact that Dav could no longer devote any time to the store’s operations. The new agreement allows Mel a salary of $18,000, and the remaining profits and losses are divided equally. In 2012 an error was discovered such that the 2011 reported income was understated by $4,000. The partnership income of $25,000 for 2012 included this $4,000 related to 2011.

REQUIRED: Prepare a schedule to allocate the $25,000 reported 2012 partnership income to Mel and Dav.

next to the following list of eight characteristics of business 263179

Next to the following list of eight characteristics of business organizations, enter a brief description of how each characteristic applies to general partnerships.

Characteristic Application to General Partnerships

1. Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. Owners’ liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Legal status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4. Tax status of income . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5. Owners’ authority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6. Ease of formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7. Transferability of ownership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8. Ability to raise large amounts of capital . . . . . . .

o guillen beginning capital 60 000 and k williams beginnin 263181

O. Guillen (beginning capital, $60,000) and K.Williams (beginning capital $90,000) are partners. During 2010, the partnership earned net income of $70,000, and Guillen made drawings of $18,000 while Williams made drawings of $24,000.

Instructions

(a) Assume the partnership income-sharing agreement calls for income to be divided 45% to Guillen and 55% to Williams. Prepare the journal entry to record the allocation of net income.

(b) Assume the partnership income-sharing agreement calls for income to be divided with a salary of $30,000 to Guillen and $25,000 to Williams, with the remainder divided 45% to Guillen and 55% to Williams. Prepare the journal entry to record the allocation of net income.

(c) Assume the partnership income-sharing agreement calls for income to be divided with a salary of $40,000 to Guillen and $35,000 to Williams, interest of 10% on beginning capital, and the remainder divided 50%–50%. Prepare the journal entry to record the allocation of net income.

(d) Compute the partners’ ending capital balances under the assumption in part (c).

on december 31 the capital balances and 263186

On December 31, the capital balances and income ratios in SAR Company are as follows.

?

Instructions

(a) Journalize the withdrawal of Ruscoe under each of the following assumptions.

(1) Each of the continuing partners agrees to pay $18,000 in cash from personal funds to purchase Ruscoe’s ownership equity. Each receives 50% of Ruscoe’s equity.

(2) Ames agrees to purchase Ruscoe’s ownership interest for $25,000 cash.

(3) Ruscoe is paid $34,000 from partnership assets, which includes a bonus to the retiring partner.

(4) Ruscoe is paid $22,000 from partnership assets, and bonuses to the remaining partners are recognized.

(b) If Ames’s capital balance after Ruscoe’s withdrawal is $42,400, what were (1) the total bonus to the remaining partners and (2) the cash paid by the partnership toRuscoe?

on december 31 the capital balances and income 263187

On December 31, the capital balances and income ratios in Canasta Company are as follows.

?



Instructions

(a) Journalize the withdrawal of Spade under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Each of the remaining partners agrees to pay $15,000 in cash from personal funds to purchase Spade’s ownership equity. Each receives 50% of Spade’s equity.

(2) Club agrees to purchase Spade’s ownership interest for $22,000 in cash.

(3) From partnership assets, Spade is paid $34,000, which includes a bonus to the retiring partner.

(4) Spade is paid $19,000 from partnership assets. Bonuses to the remaining partners are recognized.

(b) If Club’s capital balance after Spade’s withdrawal is $55,000, what were

(1) The total bonus to the remaining partners and

(2) The cash paid by the partnership toSpade?

on june 3 2012 the firm of lyon malone and 263192

On June 3, 2012, the firm of Lyon, Malone, and Chen decided to liquidate their partnership.

The partners have capital balances of $12,000, $76,000, and $104,000, respectively. The cash balance is $19,000, the book values of noncash assets total $218,000, and liabilities total $45,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 1:2:2.

Instructions

1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, covering the period June 3–29, 2012, for each of the following independent assumptions:

a. All of the noncash assets are sold for $272,000 in cash, the creditors are paid, and the remaining cash is distributed to the partners.

b. All of the noncash assets are sold for $105,000 in cash, the creditors are paid, the partner with the debit capital balance pays the amount owed to the firm, and the remaining cash is distributed to the partners.

2. Assume the partner with the capital deficiency in part (b) above declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency. Journalize the entries to (a) allocate the partner’s deficiency and (b) distribute the remaining cash.

be2 5 presented below are three different transactions related to materiality explai 262687

BE2-5 Presented below are three different transactions related to materiality. Explain whether you would classify these transactions as material.

(a) Blair Co. has reported a positive trend in earnings over the last 3 years. In the current year, it reduces its bad debt allowance to ensure another positive earnings year. The impact of this adjustment is equal to 3% of net income.

(b) Hindi Co. has an extraordinary gain of $3.1 million on the sale of plant assets and a $3.3 million loss on the sale of investments. It decides to net the gain and loss because the net effect is considered immaterial. Hindi Co.’s income for the current year was $10 million.

(c) Damon Co. expenses all capital equipment under $25,000 on the basis that it is immaterial. The company has followed this practice for a number of years

be2 13 explain how you would decide whether to record each of the following expendit 262695

BE2-13 Explain how you would decide whether to record each of the following expenditures as an asset or an expense. Assume all items are material.

(a) Legal fees paid in connection with the purchase of land are $1,500.

(b) Eduardo, Inc. paves the driveway leading to the office building at a cost of $21,000.

(c) A meat market purchases a meat-grinding machine at a cost of $3,500.

(d) On June 30, Monroe and Meno, medical doctors, pay 6 months’ office rent to cover the month of July and the next 5 months.

(e) Smith’s Hardware Company pays $9,000 in wages to laborers for construction on a building to be used in the business.

(f) Alvarez’s Florists pays wages of $2,100 for the month an employee who serves as driver of their delivery truck.

e2 1 usefulness objective of financial reporting indicate whether the following stat 262696

E2-1 (Usefulness, Objective of Financial Reporting) Indicate whether the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or false. If false, provide a brief explanation supporting your position.

(a) Accounting rule-making that relies on a body of concepts will result in useful and consistent pronouncements.

(b) General-purpose financial reports are most useful to company insiders in making strategic business decisions.

(c) Accounting standards based on individual conceptual frameworks generally will result in consistent and comparable accounting reports.

(d) Capital providers are the only users who benefit from general-purpose financial reporting.

(e) Accounting reports should be developed so that users without knowledge of economics and business can become informed about the financial results of a company.

(f) The objective of financial reporting is the foundation from which the other aspects of the framework logically result.

e2 2 usefulness objective of financial reporting qualitative characteristics indicat 262697

E2-2 (Usefulness, Objective of Financial Reporting, Qualitative Characteristics) Indicate whether the following statements about the conceptual framework are true or false. If false, provide a brief explanation supporting your position.

(a) The fundamental qualitative characteristics that make accounting information useful are relevance and verifiability.

(b) Relevant information only has predictive value, confirmatory value, or both.

(c) Information that is a faithful representation is characterized as having predictive or confirmatory value.

(d) Comparability pertains only to the reporting of information in a similar manner for different companies.

(e) Verifiability is solely an enhancing characteristic for faithful representation.

(f) In preparing financial reports, it is assumed that users of the reports have reasonable knowledge of business and economic activities.

e2 5 elements of financial statements ten interrelated elements that are most direct 262700

E2-5 (Elements of Financial Statements) Ten interrelated elements that are most directly related to measuring the performance and financial status of an enterprise are provided below. Assets Distributions to owners Expenses Liabilities Comprehensive income Gains Equity Revenues Losses Investments by owners Instructions Identify the element or elements associated with the 12 items below.

(a) Arises from peripheral or incidental transactions.

(b) Obligation to transfer resources arising from a past transaction.

(c) Increases ownership interest.

(d) Declares and pays cash dividends to owners.

(e) Increases in net assets in a period from nonowner sources.

(f) Items characterized by service potential or future economic benefit.

(g) Equals increase in assets less liabilities during the year, after adding distributions to owners and subtracting investments by owners.

(h) Arises from income statement activities that constitute the entity’s ongoing major or central operations.

(i) Residual interest in the assets of the enterprise after deducting its liabilities.

(j) Increases assets during a period through sale of product.

(k) Decreases assets during the period by purchasing the company’s own stock.

(l) Includes all changes in equity during the period, except those resulting from investments by owners and distributions to owners.

e2 6 assumptions principles and constraints presented below are the assumptions prin 262701

E2-6 (Assumptions, Principles, and Constraints) Presented below are the assumptions, principles, and constraints used in this chapter.

1. Economic entity assumption

2. Going concern assumption

3. Monetary unit assumption

4. Periodicity assumption

5. Historical cost principle

6. Fair value principle

7. Expense recognition principle

8. Full disclosure principle

9. Cost constraint

10. Industry practices

Instructions

Identify by number the accounting assumption, principle, or constraint that describes each situation on the next page. Do not use a number more than once.

(a) Allocates expenses to revenues in the proper period.

(b) Indicates that fair value changes subsequent to purchase are not recorded in the accounts. (Do not use revenue recognition principle.)

(c) Ensures that all relevant financial information is reported.

(d) Rationale why plant assets are not reported at liquidation value. (Do not use historical cost principle.)

(e) Indicates that personal and business record keeping should be separately maintained.

(f) Separates financial information into time periods for reporting purposes.

(g) Permits the use of fair value valuation in certain industries. (Do not use fair value principle.)

(h) Assumes that the dollar is the “measuring stick” used to report on financial performance.

assume that you are the auditor of weller inc and that you have been asked to explai 262703

E2-8 (Full Disclosure Principle)

Presented below are a number of facts related to Weller, Inc. Assume that no mention of these facts was made in the financial statements and the related notes.

Instructions

Assume that you are the auditor of Weller, Inc. and that you have been asked to explain the appropriate accounting and related disclosure necessary for each of these items.

(a) The company decided that, for the sake of conciseness, only net income should be reported on the income statement. Details as to revenues, cost of goods sold, and expenses were omitted.

(b) Equipment purchases of $170,000 were partly financed during the year through the issuance of a $110,000 notes payable. The company offset the equipment against the notes payable and reported plant assets at $60,000.

(c) Weller has reported its ending inventory at $2,100,000 in the financial statements. No other information related to inventories is presented in the financial statements and related notes.

(d) The company changed its method of valuing inventories from weighted-average to FIFO. No mention of this change was made in the financial statements.

e2 10 accounting principles mdash comprehensive presented below is information relat 262705

E2-10 (Accounting Principles—Comprehensive) Presented below is information related to Anderson, Inc.

Instructions Comment on the appropriateness of the accounting procedures followed by Anderson, Inc.

(a) Depreciation expense on the building for the year was $60,000. Because the building was increasing in value during the year, the controller decided to charge the depreciation expense to retained earnings instead of to net income. The following entry is recorded. Retained Earnings 60,000 Accumulated Depreciation—Buildings 60,000

(b) Materials were purchased on January 1, 2012, for $120,000 and this amount was entered in the Materials account. On December 31, 2012, the materials would have cost $141,000, so the following entry is made. Inventory 21,000 Gain on Inventories 21,000

(c) During the year, the company purchased equipment through the issuance of common stock. The stock had a par value of $135,000 and a fair value of $450,000. The fair value of the equipment was not easily determinable. The company recorded this transaction as follows. Equipment 135,000 Common Stock 135,000

(d) During the year, the company sold certain equipment for $285,000, recognizing a gain of $69,000. Because the controller believed that new equipment would be needed in the near future, she decided to defer the gain and amortize it over the life of any new equipment purchased.

(e) An order for $61,500 has been received from a customer for products on hand. This order was shipped on January 9, 2013. The company made the following entry in 2012.

Accounts Receivable 61,500

Sales Revenue 61,500

what is the most important quality for accounting information as identified in the c 262707

CA2-2 (Conceptual Framework—General) The Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) has developed a conceptual framework for financial accounting and reporting. The FASB has issued eight Statements of Financial Accounting Concepts. These statements are intended to set forth the objective and fundamentals that will be the basis for developing financial accounting and reporting standards. The objective identifies the goals and purposes of financial reporting. The fundamentals are the underlying concepts of financial accounting that guide the selection of transactions, events, and circumstances to be accounted for; their recognition and measurement; and the means of summarizing and communicating them to interested parties. The purpose of the statement on qualitative characteristics is to examine the characteristics that make accounting information useful. These characteristics or qualities of information are the ingredients that make information useful and the qualities to be sought when accounting choices are made.

Instructions

(a) Identify and discuss the benefits that can be expected to be derived from the FASB’s conceptual framework study.

(b) What is the most important quality for accounting information as identified in the conceptual framework? Explain why it is the most important.

(c) Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts No. 8 describes a number of key characteristics or qualities for accounting information. Briefly discuss the importance of any three of these qualities for financial reporting purposes. (CMA adapted)

what criterion should be used to evaluate trade offs between information characteris 262709

CA2-4 (Qualitative Characteristics) Accounting information provides useful information about business transactions and events. Those who provide and use financial reports must often select and evaluate accounting alternatives. The FASB statement on qualitative characteristics of accounting information examines the characteristics of accounting information that make it useful for decision-making. It also points out that various limitations inherent in the measurement and reporting process may necessitate trade-offs or sacrifices among the characteristics of useful information.

Instructions

(a) Describe briefly the following characteristics of useful accounting information.

(1) Relevance

(2) Faithful representation

(3) Understandability

(4) Comparability

(5) Consistency

(b) For each of the following pairs of information characteristics, give an example of a situation in which one of the characteristics may be sacrificed in return for a gain in the other.

(1) Relevance and faithful representation.

(2) Relevance and consistency.

(3) Comparability and consistency.

(4) Relevance and understandability.

(c) What criterion should be used to evaluate trade-offs between information characteristics?

discuss the propriety of timing the recognition of revenue in piper publishing compa 262710

CA2-5 (Revenue and Expense Recognition Principles) After the presentation of your report on the examination of the financial statements to the board of directors of Piper Publishing Company, one of the new directors expresses surprise that the income statement assumes that an equal proportion of the revenue is earned with the publication of every issue of the company’s magazine. She feels that the “crucial event” in the process of earning revenue in the magazine business is the cash sale of the subscription. She says that she does not understand why most of the revenue cannot be “recognized” in the period of the sale.

Instructions

(a) List the various accepted times for recognizing revenue in the accounts and explain when the methods are appropriate.

(b) Discuss the propriety of timing the recognition of revenue in Piper Publishing Company’s accounts with:

(1) The cash sale of the magazine subscription.

(2) The publication of the magazine every month.

(3) Both events, by recognizing a portion of the revenue with the cash sale of the magazine subscription and a portion of the revenue with the publication of the magazine every month.

explain the main difference between the economic concept of business income as refle 262711

CA2-6 (Revenue and Expense Recognition Principles) On June 5, 2011, Argot Corporation signed a contract with Lopez Associates under which Lopez agreed

(1) to construct an office building on land owned by Argot,

(2) to accept responsibility for procuring financing for the project and finding tenants, and

(3) to manage the property for 35 years. The annual net income from the project, after debt service, was to be divided equally between Argot Corporation and Lopez Associates. Lopez was to accept its share of future net income as full payment for its services in construction, obtaining finances and tenants, and management of the project. By May 31, 2012, the project was nearly completed, and tenants had signed leases to occupy 90% of the available space at annual rentals totaling $4,000,000. It is estimated that, after operating expenses and debt service, the annual net income will amount to $1,500,000. The management of Lopez Associates believed that

(a) the economic benefit derived from the contract with Argot should be reflected on its financial statements for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, and directed that revenue be accrued in an amount equal to the commercial value of the services Lopez had rendered during the year,

(b) this amount should be carried in contracts receivable, and

(c) all related expenditures should be charged against the revenue.

Instructions

(a) Explain the main difference between the economic concept of business income as reflected by Lopez’s management and the measurement of income under generally accepted accounting principles.

(b) Discuss the factors to be considered in determining when revenue should be recognized for the purpose of accounting measurement of periodic income.

(c) Is the belief of Lopez’s management in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles for the measurement of revenue and expense for the year ended May 31, 2012? Support your opinion by discussing the application to this case of the factors to be considered for asset measurement and revenue and expense recognition. (AICPA adapted).

explain the rationale for recognizing costs as expenses at the time of product sale 262712

CA2-7 (Expense Recognition Principle) An accountant must be familiar with the concepts involved in determining earnings of a business entity. The amount of earnings reported for a business entity is dependent on the proper recognition, in general, of revenue and expense for a given time period. In some situations, costs are recognized as expenses at the time of product sale. In other situations, guidelines have been developed for recognizing costs as expenses or losses by other criteria.

Instructions

(a) Explain the rationale for recognizing costs as expenses at the time of product sale.

(b) What is the rationale underlying the appropriateness of treating costs as expenses of a period instead of assigning the costs to an asset? Explain.

(c) In what general circumstances would it be appropriate to treat a cost as an asset instead of as an expense? Explain.

(d) Some expenses are assigned to specific accounting periods on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost. Explain the underlying rationale for recognizing expenses on the basis of systematic and rational allocation of asset cost.

(e) Identify the conditions under which it would be appropriate to treat a cost as a loss. (AICPA adapted)

briefly discuss each item from the viewpoint of matching costs with revenues and sug 262713

CA2-8 (Expense Recognition Principle) Accountants try to prepare income statements that are as accurate as possible. A basic requirement in preparing accurate income statements is to record costs and revenues properly. Proper recognition of costs and revenues requires that costs resulting from typical business operations be recognized in the period in which they expired.

Instructions

(a) List three criteria that can be used to determine whether such costs should appear as charges in the income statement for the current period.

(b) As generally presented in financial statements, the following items or procedures have been criticized as improperly recognizing costs. Briefly discuss each item from the viewpoint of matching costs with revenues and suggest corrective or alternative means of presenting the financial information.

(1) Receiving and handling costs.

(2) Cash discounts on purchases.

would it be preferable to amortize the cost of display houses on the basis of 262714

CA2-9 (Expense Recognition Principle) Daniel Barenboim sells and erects shell houses, that is, frame structures that are completely finished on the outside but are unfinished on the inside except for flooring, partition studding, and ceiling joists. Shell houses are sold chiefly to customers who are handy with tools and who have time to do the interior wiring, plumbing, wall completion and finishing, and other work necessary to make the shell houses livable dwellings. Barenboim buys shell houses from a manufacturer in unassembled packages consisting of all lumber, roofing, doors, windows, and similar materials necessary to complete a shell house. Upon commencing operations in a new area, Barenboim buys or leases land as a site for its local warehouse, field office, and display houses. Sample display houses are erected at a total cost of $30,000 to $44,000 including the cost of the unassembled packages. The chief element of cost of the display houses is the unassembled packages, inasmuch as erection is a short, low-cost operation. Old sample models are torn down or altered into new models every 3 to 7 years. Sample display houses have little salvage value because dismantling and moving costs amount to nearly as much as the cost of an unassembled package.

Instructions

(a) A choice must be made between

(1) expensing the costs of sample display houses in the periods in which the expenditure is made and

(2) spreading the costs over more than one period. Discuss the advantages of each method.

(b) Would it be preferable to amortize the cost of display houses on the basis of

(1) the passage of time or

(2) the number of shell houses sold? Explain. (AICPA adapted)

explain why these financial statements are neither relevant nor representationally f 262715

CA2-10 (Qualitative Characteristics) Recently, your Uncle Carlos Beltran, who knows that you always have your eye out for a profitable investment, has discussed the possibility of your purchasing some corporate bonds. He suggests that you may wish to get in on the “ground floor” of this deal. The bonds being issued by Neville Corp. are 10-year debentures which promise a 40% rate of return. Neville manufactures novelty/party items. You have told Neville that, unless you can take a look at its financial statements, you would not feel comfortable about such an investment. Believing that this is the chance of a lifetime, Uncle Carlos has procured a copy of Neville’s most recent, unaudited financial statements which are a year old. These statements were prepared by Mrs. Andy Neville. You peruse these statements, and they are quite impressive. The balance sheet showed a debt-to-equity ratio of 0.10 and, for the year shown, the company reported net income of $2,424,240. The financial statements are not shown in comparison with amounts from other years. In addition, no significant note disclosures about inventory valuation, depreciation methods, loan agreements, etc. are available.

Instructions Write a letter to Uncle Carlos explaining why it would be unwise to base an investment decision on the financial statements that he has provided to you. Be sure to explain why these financial statements are neither relevant nor representationally faithful.

ca2 12 cost constraint the aicpa special committee on financial reporting proposed t 262717

CA2-12 (Cost Constraint) The AICPA Special Committee on Financial Reporting proposed the following constraints related to financial reporting. 1. Business reporting should exclude information outside of management’s expertise or for which management is not the best source, such as information about competitors. 2. Management should not be required to report information that would significantly harm the company’s competitive position. 3. Management should not be required to provide forecasted financial statements. Rather, management should provide information that helps users forecast for themselves the company’s financial future. 4. Other than for financial statements, management need report only the information it knows. That is, management should be under no obligation to gather information it does not have, or does not need, to manage the business. 5. Companies should present certain elements of business reporting only if users and management agree they should be reported—a concept of flexible reporting. 6. Companies should not have to report forward-looking information unless there are effective deterrents to unwarranted litigation that discourages companies from doing so.

Instructions For each item, briefly discuss how the proposed constraint addresses concerns about the costs and benefits of financial reporting.

barney betty and rubble are partners in a business that 262887

Barney, Betty, and Rubble are partners in a business that is in the process of liquidation. On January 1, 2011, the ledger accounts show the balances indicated:

?



The cash is distributed to partners on January 1, 2011. Inventory and supplies are sold for a lump-sum price of $81,000 on February 9, 2011, and on February 10, 2011, cash on hand is distributed to the partners in final liquidation of the business.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare the journal entry to distribute available cash on January 1, 2011. Include a safe payments schedule as proper explanation of who should receive cash.

2. Prepare journal entries necessary on February 9, 2011, to record the sale of assets and distribution of the gain or loss to the partners’ capital accounts.

3. Prepare the journal entry to distribute cash on February 10, 2011, in final liquidation of thebusiness.

calloway company was started on january 1 2012 when the 262917

Calloway Company was started on January 1, 2012, when the owners invested $40,000 cash in the business. During 2012, the company earned cash revenues of $18,000 and incurred cash expenses of $12,500. The company also paid cash distributions of $3,000.

Required

Prepare the 2012 income statement, capital statement (statement of changes in equity), balance sheet, and statement of cash flows using each of the following assumptions.

a. Calloway is a sole proprietorship owned by Macy Calloway.

b. Calloway is a partnership with two partners, Macy Calloway and Artie Calloway. Macy Calloway invested $25,000 and Artie Calloway invested $15,000 of the $40,000 cash that was used to start the business. A. Calloway was expected to assume the vast majority of the responsibility for operating the business. The partnership agreement called for A. Calloway to receive 60 percent of the profits and M. Calloway to get the remaining 40 percent. With regard to the $3,000 distribution, A. Calloway withdrew $1,200 from the business and M. Calloway withdrew $1,800.

c. Calloway is a corporation. It issued 5,000 shares of $5 par common stock for $40,000 cash to start the business.

colin maples m d and daniel graham m d are sole owners 262936

Colin Maples, M.D., and Daniel Graham, M.D., are sole owners of two medical practices that operate in the same medical building. The two doctors agree to combine assets and liabilities of the two businesses to form a partnership. The partnership agreement calls for dividing income equally between the two doctors. After several months, the following conversation takes place between the two doctors:

Maples: I’ve noticed that your patient load has dropped over the last couple of months. When we formed our partnership, we were seeing about the same number of patients per week. However, now our patient records show that you have been seeing about half as many patients as I have. Are there any issues that I should be aware of?

Graham: There’s nothing going on. When I was working on my own, I was really putting in the hours. One of the reasons I formed this partnership was to enjoy life a little more and scale back a little bit.

Maples: I see. Well, I find that I’m working as hard as I did when I was on my own, yet making less than I did previously. Essentially, you’re sharing in half of my billings and I’m sharing in half of yours. Since you are working much less than I am, I end up on the short end of the bargain.

Graham: Well, I don’t know what to say. An agreement is an agreement. The partnership is based on a 50/50 split. That’s what a partnership is all about.

Maples: If that’s so, then it applies equally well on the effort end of the equation as on the income end.

Discuss whether Graham is acting in an ethical manner. How could Maples renegotiate the partnership agreement to avoid this dispute?

proper measurement of profit 262131

Paula purchased a bakery from gianni fiori.The purchase agreement included a provison that required paula to pay gianni 25 percent of the bakerys profit in eachof the next 5 years. The agreement stated that the bakerys profit would be measured in fair and reasonable manner but not in accordance with the applicable financial standards.

In measuring profit paula used following policiies.

(a) revenue was recognized when cash was reveived from customers. most customers paid in cash but fer customers purchased and were allowed to pay in 30 days.

(b) paula set her annual salary at 60,000. she also paid 30,000 to her spouse and children tennage.these family memebers did not work in the business regularly but helped during busy days.

(c) the bakery had modern baking equipment valued at 50, 000at the time paula purchased company. the income statement for the first year included a 50,000 equipment expense related to these aasets.

(d) income taxes included the amount paid by the corporation as well as income taxes paid by various members of paula family.

Required

(a) discuss the fairness and reasonablennes of paula accounting policies?

(b)do you think that the net cash flow from operations (cash receipts minus cash payments) is high or lower than profit reported by paula? explain

written assignment specification page 1assessment task 262240

ACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 1Assessment Task 1:1. Case study: Sail-Away Sports Limited (see attachment)2 Student learning outcomeList below, in alpha format, what key knowledge and skills students would be expected to attain by successfully completing this subject/unit (link to assessment tasks (refer to 2.4 below)):(a) Demonstrate knowledge of the links between management accounting, customers, suppliers and sources of external information and appreciate what is relevant to decision-making in a Management Accounting context.(b) Effectively use costing techniques and describe the strengths and limitations of such techniques(c) Analyse accounting information and present reports in various formats(d) Describe and utilise the basic concepts of planning and control systems(e) Show an awareness of the ethical and regulatory dimensions of accounting2. Student assessment:Provide, in table format as shown below, a schedule of formal assessment tasks and major examinations for the subject/unit.Assessment TypeWhen assessedWeightingLearning Outcomes AssessedGroup projectWeek 11Due via Moodle 10 AM Tuesday 5 February20%a, b, c, d, e3. The Assignment is to be submitted (using either MS Word and/or MS Excel) via Turnitin on the KOI Moodle site by 10am Tuesday 5 February 2013. A hard copy (Paper copy) of the Case study is to be handed in either at the Lecture or at the beginning of your Tutorial class in Week 11.Students should note, that the hard copy is to ASSIST in marking however the electronic submission MUST occur by 10am Tuesday 5 February otherwise there will be a 20% penalty for ANY late submission PLUS an additional 5% penalty for each day late after Monday. No assignment will be marked after one week late. Please do NOT bring Doctor’s Certificates for the due date. As this is the work of an entire group, please ensure you have sufficient group members ready to work to deliver the work ON TIME.ACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 2ACC200 – Introduction to Management AccountingTrimester 3 – 2012Group AssignmentDue 10am Tuesday 5 January 2013 (Week 11)Sail-away Sports Limited design and manufacture small sail craft (boats). They manufacture three different model boats as follows:Model 3DSB – 3m Dinghy Sail BoatModel 36THS – 3.6m 2-handed Sail BoatModel 40CSB – 4.0m 2-handed Sports BoatThe following information is known about Sail-away Limited:Sail-away’s boats are made in three stages:The HULL (the bottom part of the boat that goes in the water) and the DECK (a cover that is glued to the HULL to make it water-tight) are made from fibreglass. To make the Hull and Decks, the fibreglass is formed in a MOULD one mould for each component which can be re-used many times. This operation is performed in the Moulding Department. Once the hull and deck components are formed and set, they are then sent to the Fitting Department for “FITTING”In the FITTING Department buoyancy devices (foam blocks to prevent the boats from sinking in case of capsize) are fitted and the Hull and Decks are glued together to form the final boat shape (called a ‘HULL UNIT’) along with final fibreglass forming. The Fitting Department pass these HULL UNITS along to the storage facility to be held for later use. As each unit is supervised by a separate team leader and there may be a separation of time between MOULDING and FITTING, separate Production Process Reports are used for each of the Departments and the finished ‘HULL UNIT’ are considered ‘completed at this stage of production.The sails for the boats are standardised designs however each model boat has a different-sized sail. The sails are made in a second production line as the skills required to make sails are quite different to those for moulding and fitting the boats. As the sails are standardised in size and materials, Sail-away Sports runs a separate production line for the making of the sails. The Sail cloth is quite ‘high-tech’ and must be cut carefully by experienced sail-makers and each section is carefully labelled to avoid unnecessary wastage and is batched according to sail-type then passed to the Stitching and Gluing Department. The Stitching and Gluing Department assembles the sail, using various glues and heat-fusion techniques and some stitching processes to complete each sail. Once finished, the completed sails must be handled carefully to ensure they are not damaged and are passed to the Packaging Department for careful packaging, labelling and storage ready for sale.Once Sail-away Sports receives the orders from the Schools for their boats, finished Hulls and sails are taken from the Storage Facility and sent to the Rigging Department where final RIGGING (The aluminium masts, pulleys (blocks), cleats (components to hold adjustable ropes in place), rudders,ACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 3centreboards and other necessary components are fitted to the boats in batches according to the number required for each customer order.With a storage facility that can hold many ‘completed’ HULL UNITS and many SAILS, Sail-away Sports can more evenly space production throughout the year to maintain the labour force over the ‘quiet months’ (typically during Winter) and have plenty of stock ready for the busy periods during Spring and Summer when the ‘Sailing Season’ is fully underway.Finally, each order is sent to the Packaging and Logistics Department where it is given a final quality check, cleaned and packaged for shipping to the Customer with all components packaged together as complete boat sets in ‘ready-to-sail’ condition for use by the schools.Sail-away Sports has a small sales team and a customer service and training team which are available to visit schools that order their sail boats. These teams are trained in both sailing and can also make small warranty repairs and train school staff on the maintenance and upkeep of the boats. This level of service is highly valued by schools and has led to increasing demand for their products as their reputation for a good quality product and great service has spread among schools so that advertising is rarely required apart from some sponsorship funding to regattas that are often held when inter-school competition occurs.Recently, due to the great success and popularity of their product, the Australian Sports Commission, keen to expand on Australia’s recent success in sailing at the recent Olympic Games, is looking for ways to satisfy increased community interest in the sport of sailing. Along with Yachting Australia (the Sport’s governing body), they are considering offering support to local sailing clubs around Australia to buy small fleets of standardised but competitive sail-boats. Like most Government bodies however, before they agree to offer contracts to supply to any company, they want to be sure these potential suppliers are well-run and financially stable.Sail-away Sports have been approached and offered an opportunity to participate as a ‘Preferred Supplier’. To obtain this status however they must submit (in confidence) full costing reports to a ‘Review Panel’ who will assess the management and viability of the business before accreditation can be granted.You are the Management Accountant at Sail-away Sports and for this reason you have been asked to generate full costing reports (including variations from STANDARD COSTS) based on the past year’s production.Direct Material: Each boat uses a different quantity of materials which include fibreglass matting and resin products to make the hull, decks and the same materials also used in the fitting department where buoyancy blocks (waterproof foam blocks) are also fitted therefore a single Standard Price or Quantity Variance cannot easily be calculated.(See attached worksheets for detailed information.)What you are required to do:ACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 4Your task is to calculate the Standard Material and Labour Variances for all three models. You are then to prepare a BRIEF report which includes a summary of the results of Sail-away’s production over the past year.This should include a FULL analysis of the Actual Results compared to the Standard Costs.How do you calculate the variances for Material if a product has different quantities of different material all at different prices?All variances must be calculated for EACH LINE of Labour AND EACH LINE of Material. (Use the columns to the right of the numbers supplied in the MS Excel Worksheet for your calculations.)Notice the Labour Rate is different for each activity in the boat-making process (Sail-makers will be paid more than Warehouse Store Persons as they have a much higher skill-level etc.) so the Rate Variations should be calculated for EACH separate Labour Rate/Activity shown. Similarly, the Efficiency Variances should be calculated for each line shown for Labour for each activity.Likewise, Material Quantity and Cost Variances will have to be calculated for EACH LINE for EACH ACTIVITY for EACH PRODUCT. (Once you have worked out the headings and the formulae, this should be VERY STRAIGHT-FORWARD.)What do you do with the Weighted Average Labour Rate?Note: There is a weighted average Labour Rate for each product AND a weighted average PLANT-WIDE Labour Rate shown at the bottom of each Excel Worksheet. (This has been calculated by averaging all wage rates and standard times given the amount of output for 1. Each Product; and 2. for the entire plant.) NOTE: This can NOT be done for Material Variances as there are so many different components and usage quantities for each product so this can ONLY be calculated LINE by LINE for each INPUT (e.g. Fibreglass Matting or Resin etc.) separately for each product.You can work out the Labour Rate and Efficiency variance for the Product AS A WHOLE using the Weighted Average ProductWhat you do NOT have to do…You do NOT have to calculate any overhead variances as we have not fully discussed this in class and therefore would be too difficult at this stage to calculate for most students.Is there anything else?In addition, the report should include a SHORT (500 word) summary of the benefits and limitations of the Standard Costing System and how improvements may be made to the results of the Company using timely feedback to the various department managers and employees. Were there any great results or ‘EXCEPTIONS’ that you believe should be investigated further?Copies of the actual MS Excel Worksheets are available under WEEK 9 for you to download. Don’t forget next week’s Lecture will cover Overhead Variances in more detail and you can bring your questions in relation to the Assignment and we will try and assist you then!ACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 5How can we keep track of those students who are not participating in group work?Each student in a group, up to three in a group, (if you have more than three, two will have to work together ONLY with the Lecturer’s approval) and each student should work on a product EACH. There are three products so there is one for each student. If you can all work together, I suggest you do so however as it will be MUCH FASTER and you should all learn together how to solve problems and apply the theory from the course.Please advise ASAP if a group member is not cooperating in setting up meeting times. DO NOT CONTACT ME ASKING IF YOU CAN DO THE ASSIGNMENT ON YOUR OWN. EVERY STUDENT HAS HAD 11 WEEKS TO FIND A PARTNER(S) SO YOU SHOULD HAVE HAD THAT ORGANISED BY NOW.Likewise, if a student is without a group and asks to join your group, PLEASE do everything you can to accept that member into your group and work together. Being flexible in this manner is a strong sign of maturity and is a skill that is highly prized by employers, practice that skill now!ACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 6Budgeted Units500Model 3DSB – 3m Sports BoatUnits produced600LabourMaterialsLabour cost per unitLabour hours per unitTotal hoursTotal Standard CostLabour Hours this yearAnnual labour cost (average)Material Cost per unitUnit measuredQuantity per unit produced **Cost per unit produced **Total standard material usedTotal standard material costQuantity used this yearMaterial Cost this yearHull-makingMoulding$30.005.503300$99,000.003465$94,050.00Resins$25.00litres10$250.006000.00$150,000.006600$156,750.00Glass Matting$12.00metres20$240.0012000.00$144,000.0012600$143,640.00Fitting$30.002.501500$45,000.001575$42,750.00Resins$25.00litres4$100.002400.00$60,000.002760$65,550.00Glass Matting$12.00metres1$12.00600.00$7,200.00708$8,071.20Bouyancy Blocks$7.50each4$30.002400.00$18,000.002400$18,900.00Sail-makingCutting$40.001.00600$24,000.00576$24,960.00Main-sail cloth – Mylar$25.00metres4$100.002400.00$60,000.002520$66,150.00Headsail cloth – Kevlar Fibre$35.00metres3$105.001800.00$63,000.001926$70,780.50Glueing and stitching$40.001.50900$36,000.00873$37,440.00RiggingRigging$30.004.252550$76,500.002448$79,560.00Rigging Set$1,950.00One set1$1,950.00600.00$1,170,000.00600$97,500.00Storage, Packaging & Shipping$25.002.251350$33,750.001417.5$36,112.50Weighted average hourly rate this MODEL$30.81TotalTotalTotal standard/actual costs:17.0010200$314,250.0010355$314,872.50$2,787.0028200$1,672,200.001682400.00$1,986,450.00Weighted average PLANT-WIDE Direct Labour Hourly Rate$30.87* Note that the ‘Units’ in this column is the units of INPUT to each unit of output (eg there are 4 Bouyancy Blocks used each Model 3DSB Boat)** Note that the ‘Units Produced’ referred to in this column refers to finished units of product (eg the standard cost of Bouyancy Blocks is $30 per UNIT PRODUCED or 4 x $7.40 each)Actual Labout Costs and HoursStandard quantities and costsActual Material Costs and UsageStandard quantities and costsVariable budget used – based on quantity producedACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 7Budgeted Units550Model 36THS – 3.6m Sports BoatUnits produced575LabourMaterialsLabour cost per unitLabour hours per unitTotal hoursTotal Standard CostLabour Hours this yearAnnual labour cost (average)Material Cost per unitUnit measuredQuantity per unit produced **Cost per unit produced **Total standard material usedTotal standard material costQuantity used this yearMaterial Cost this yearHull-makingMoulding$30.005.753306.25$99,187.503537.6875$94,228.13Resins$25.00litres13$325.007475$186,875.006600$156,750.00Glass Matting$12.00metres25$300.0014375$172,500.0012600$143,640.00Fitting$30.002.651523.75$45,712.501630.4125$42,055.50Resins$25.00litres6$150.003450$86,250.003968$94,228.13Glass Matting$12.00metres2$24.001150$13,800.001357$15,469.80Bouyancy Blocks$7.50each6$45.003450$25,875.003450$27,168.75Sail-makingCutting$40.001.10632.5$25,300.00607.2$26,312.00Main-sail cloth – Mylar$25.00metres6$150.003450$86,250.003623$95,090.63Headsail cloth – Kevlar Fibre$35.00metres4.5$157.502588$90,562.502769$101,746.97Glueing and stitching$40.001.65948.75$37,950.00920.2875$39,468.00RiggingRigging$30.005.253018.75$90,562.502898$94,185.00Rigging Set$1,650.00One set1$1,650.00575$948,750.00600$79,062.50Storage, Packaging & Shipping$25.002.751581.25$39,531.251660.3125$42,298.44Weighted average hourly rate this MODEL$30.72TotalTotalTotal standard/actual costs:19.1511011$338,243.7511254$338,547.06$2,801.5036513$1,610,862.501621874$1,949,106.25Weighted average PLANT-WIDE Direct Labour Hourly Rate$30.87* Note that the ‘Units’ in this column is the units of INPUT to each unit of output (eg there are 4 Bouyancy Blocks used each Model 3DSB Boat)** Note that the ‘Units Produced’ referred to in this column refers to finished units of product (eg the standard cost of Bouyancy Blocks is $30 per UNIT PRODUCED or 4 x $7.40 each)Standard quantities and costsActual Labout Costs and HoursStandard quantities and costsActual Material Costs and UsageVariable budget used – based on quantity producedACC200ACC200 T3-12 Written Assignment Specification Page 8Budgeted Units190Model 40CSB – 4m Sports BoatUnits produced235LabourMaterialsLabour cost per unitLabour hours per unitTotal hoursTotal Standard CostLabour Hours this yearAnnual labour cost (average)Material Cost per unitUnit measuredQuantity per unit produced **Cost per unit produced **Total standard material usedTotal standard material costQuantity used this yearMaterial Cost this yearHull-makingMoulding$30.006.601551$46,530.001628.55$44,203.50Resins$25.00litres20$500.004700$117,500.006600$156,750.00Glass Matting$12.00metres35$420.008225$98,700.0012600$143,640.00Fitting$30.003.75881.25$26,437.50925.3125$25,115.63Resins$25.00litres6.5$162.501528$38,187.501757$41,719.84Glass Matting$12.00metres2.2$26.40517$6,204.00610$6,954.68Bouyancy Blocks$7.50each8$60.001880$14,100.001880$14,805.00Sail-makingCutting$40.002.10493.5$19,740.00473.76$20,529.60Main-sail cloth – Mylar$25.00metres4$100.00940$23,500.00987$25,908.75Headsail cloth – Kevlar Fibre$35.00metres3$105.00705$24,675.00754$27,722.36Glueing and stitching$40.002.30540.5$21,620.00524.285$22,484.80RiggingRigging$30.005.751351.25$40,537.501297.2$42,159.00Rigging Set$3,200.00One set1$3,200.00235$752,000.00600$62,666.67Storage, Packaging & Shipping$25.003.75881.25$22,031.25925.3125$23,573.44Weighted average hourly rate this MODEL$31.04TotalTotalTotal standard/actual costs:24.255699$176,896.255774$178,065.96$4,573.9018730$1,074,866.501080565$1,251,762.75Weighted average PLANT-WIDE Direct Labour Hourly Rate$30.87* Note that the ‘Units’ in this column is the units of INPUT to each unit of output (eg there are 4 Bouyancy Blocks used each Model 3DSB Boat)** Note that the ‘Units Produced’ referred to in this column refers to finished units of product (eg the standard cost of Bouyancy Blocks is $30 per UNIT PRODUCED or 4 x $7.40 each)Standard quantities and costsActual Labout Costs Standard quantities and costsActual Material Costs Variable budget used – based on quantity produced

Attachments:

1 cob inc a partner in tlc partnership assigns its 262563

1. Cob, Inc., a partner in TLC Partnership, assigns its partnership interest to Bean, who is not made a partner. After the assignment, Bean asserts the rights to:

I Participate in the management of TLC

II Cob’s share of TLC’s partnership profits

Bean is correct as to which of these rights?

(a) I only

(b) II only

(c) I and II

(d) Neither I nor II

2. When property other than cash is invested in a partnership, at what amount should the noncash property be credited to the contributing partner’s capital account?

(a) Fair value at the date of contribution

(b) Contributing partner’s original cost

(c) Assessed valuation for property tax purposes

(d) Contributing partner’s tax basis

3. Arthur Plack, a partner in the Brite Partnership, has a 30% participation in partnership profits and losses. Plack’s capital account had a net decrease of $60,000 during the calendar year 2011. During 2011, Plack withdrew $130,000 (charged against his capital account) and contributed property valued at $25,000 to the partnership. What was the net income of the Brite Partnership for 2011?

(a) $150,000

(b) $233,333

(c) $350,000

(d) $550,000

4. Fox, Greg, and Howe are partners with average capital balances during 2011 of $120,000, $60,000, and $40,000, respectively. Partners receive 10% interest on their average capital balances. After deducting salaries of $30,000 to Fox and $20,000 to Howe, the residual profit or loss is divided equally. In 2011 the partnership sustained a $33,000 loss before interest and salaries to partners. By what amount should Fox’s capital account change?

(a) $7,000 increase

(b) $11,000 decrease

(c) $35,000 decrease

(d) $42,000 increase

5. Beck, an active partner in the Beck and Cris partnership, receives an annual bonus of 25% of partnership net income after deducting the bonus. For the year ended December 31, 2011, partnership net income before the bonus amounted to $300,000. Beck’s 2011 bonus should be:

(a) $56,250

(b) $60,000

(c) $62,500

(d) $75,000

1 george and martha are married and file a joint 262567

1. George and Martha are married and file a joint tax return claiming their two children, ages 10 and 8 as dependents. Assuming their AGI is $123,450, George and Martha’s child tax credit is:

a. $0,?b. $750.?c. $1,300.?d. $2,000.?e. None of the above.

2. Bob and Sally are married, file a joint tax return, have AGI of $108,000, and have two children. Del is beginning her freshman year at State College during Fall 2011, and Owen is beginning his senior year at Southwest University during Fall 2011. Owen completed his junior year during the Spring semester of 2009 (i.e., he took a “leave of absence” during the 2010-2011 school year). Both Del and Owen are claimed as dependents on their parents’ tax return. Del’s qualifying tuition expenses and fees total $5,000 for the Fall semester, while Owen’s qualifying tuition expenses were $6,100 for the Fall 2011 semester. Del’s roam and baard costs were $3,200 for the Fall semester. Owen did not incur room and board costs since he lived with his aunt and uncle during the year. Full payment is made for the tuition and related expenses for both children at the beginning of each semester. in addition to the children’s college expenses, Bob also spent $3,000 on professional education seminars during the year in order to maintain his license as a practicing dentist. Bob attended the seminars during July and August 2011. Compute the available education tax credits for Bob and Sally for 2011.

a. $3,100.?b. $5,000.?c. $5,420.?d. $5,600.?e. None of the above.

3. Ashley sells real property for $280,000. The buyer pays $4,000 in property taxes that had accrued during the year while the property was still legally owned by Ashley. In addition, Ashley pays $14,000 in commissions and $3,000 in legal fees in connection with the sale. How much does Ashley realize (the amount realized) from the sale of her property?

a. $259,000.?b. $263,000.?c. $267,000.?d. $280,000.?e. None of the above

1 in a partnership liquidation the final cash distribution to 262569

1. In a partnership liquidation, the final cash distribution to the partners should be made in accordance with the:

a. Partner profit and loss sharing ratios

b. Balances of partner capital accounts

c. Ratio of the capital contributions by partners

d. Safe payments computations

2. In accounting for the liquidation of a partnership, cash payments to partners after all non-partner creditors’ claims have been satisfied, but before final cash distribution, should be according to:

a. Relative profit and loss sharing ratios

b. The final balances in partner capital accounts

c. The relative share of gain or loss on liquidation

d. Safe payments computations

3. After all non-cash assets have been converted into cash in the liquidation of the Maris and DeMarco partnership, the ledger contains the following account balances:

?

Available cash should be distributed as follows: $25,000 to accounts payable and:

a. $9,000 for loan payable to Maris

b. $4,500 each to Maris and DeMarco

c. $1,000 to Maris and $8,000 to DeMarco

d. $8,000 to Maris and $1,000 to DeMarco

4. The partnership of Gwen, Bill, and Sissy is liquidating and the ledger shows the following:

Cash ………………………. $ 80,000

Inventories………………… 100,000

Accounts payable…………. 60,000

Gwen capital (50%) ……… 40,000

Bill capital (25%) ………… 45,000

Sissy capital (25%)………. 35,000

If all available cash is distributed immediately:

a. Gwen, Bill, and Sissy should get $26,667 each

b. Gwen, Bill, and Sissy should get $6,667 each

c. Gwen should get $10,000, and Bill and Sissy should get $5,000 each

d. Bill should get $15,000, and Sissy $5,000

5. The following balance sheet summary, together with residual profit sharing ratios, was developed on April 1, 2011, when the Dick, Frank, and Helen partnership began its liquidation:

?

If available cash except for a $5,000 contingency fund is distributed immediately, Dick, Frank, and Helen, respectively, should receive:

a. $0, $60,000, and $15,000

b. $11,000, $22,000, and $22,000

c. $0, $70,000, and $5,000

d. $0, $27,500, and $27,500

6. The partnership of Unsel, Vance, and Wayne was dissolved on June 30, 2011, and account balances after noncash assets were converted into cash on September 1, 2011, are:

?

Personal assets and liabilities of the partners at September 1, 2011, are:

?



If Wayne contributes $70,000 to the partnership to provide cash to pay the creditors, what amount of Unsel’s $90,000 partnership equity would appear to be recoverable?

a. $90,000

b. $81,000

c. $79,000

d. None of the above

1 josh recently died at the age of 63 leaving 262571

1. Josh recently died at the age of 63, leaving a qualified plan account with a balance of $1,000,000. Josh was married to Kay, age 53 who is the designated beneficiary of the qualified plan. Which of the following is correct?

a. Kay must distribute the entire account balance within five years of Josh’s death.

b. Kay must begin taking distributions over Josh’s remaining single-life expectancy.

c. Any distribution from the plan to Kay will be subject to a 10 percent early withdrawal penalty until she is 59.5

d. Kay can receive annual distribution over her remaining single-life expectancy, recalculated each year.

2. Which of the following statements is/are correct regarding the early distribution 10 percent penalty tax from a qualified plan?

1. Retirement at age 55 or older exempts the distribution from the early withdrawal penalty tax.

2. Distributions used to pay medical expenses in excess of the 7.5% of AIG for a tax filer who itemizes are exempt from the early withdrawal penalty.

3. Distributions that are part of a series of equal periodic payments paid over the life or life expectancy of the participant are exempt from the early withdrawal penalty.

a 3 only

b. 1 and 3

c. 2 and 3

d. 1, 2 and 3

3. Jose Sequential, age 70.5 in October of this year, worked for several companies over his lifetime. He has worked for the following companies (a-E) and still has the following qualified plan account balances at those companies.

Company Jose’s account balance

A$250,000

B350,000

C150,000

D350,000

E200,000

Jose is currently employed with company E. what, if any, is his required minimum distribution for the current year from all plans? Life expectancy tables are 27.4 for age 70 and 26.5 for age 71.

$0

$ 40,146

$41,509

$47,445

4. Tom age 39 is an employer of Star, Inc. which has a profit sharing plan with a CODA feature. His total account balance is $412,000, $82,000 of which represents employee elective deferrals and earnings on those deferrals. The balance is profit sharing contributions made by the employer and earnings n those contributions. Tom is 100 percent vested. Which of the following statements is/are correct?

1. Tom may take a loan from the plan, but maximum loan is $41,000 and the normal repayment period will be 5 years.

2. If Tom takes a distribution (plan permitting) to pay health care premiums (no coverage by employer) he will be subject to income tax, but not the 105 penalty.

a. 1 only

b. 2 only

c. 1 and 2

d. Neither 1 nor 2

5. Brenda, age 53 and a recent widow, is deciding between taking a lump-sum distribution from her husband’s pension plan of $263,500 now or selecting a life annuity starting when she is age 65 (life expectancy 65 is 21 years) of $2,479 per month. Current 30 year treasuries are yielding 6 percent annually. Which of the statements below are true?

1. If he takes the lump-sum distribution, she will receive $263,500 in cash now and be able to reinvest for 34 years, creating an annuity of $4,570 per month.

2. If she takes the lump-sum distribution, she will be subject to the 10% early withdrawal penalty.

a. 1 only

b. 2 only

c. 1 and 2

d. Neither 1 nor 2

1 partners allen baker and coe share profits and losses 262572

1. Partners Allen, Baker, and Coe share profits and losses 50:30:20, respectively. The balance sheet at April 30, 2011, follows:



The assets and liabilities are recorded and presented at their respective fair values. Jones is to be admitted as a new partner with a 20% capital interest and a 20% share of profits and losses in exchange for a cash contribution. No goodwill or bonus is to be recorded. How much cash should Jones contribute?

(a) $60,000

(b) $72,000

(c) $75,000

(d) $80,000

2. Elton and Don are partners who share profits and losses in the ratio of 7:3, respectively. On November 5, 2011, their respective capital accounts were as follows:

Elton …….. $ 70,000

Don ……….. 60,000

$130,000

On that date they agreed to admit Kravitz as a partner with a one-third interest in the capital and profits and losses upon his investment of $50,000. The new partnership will begin with a total capital of $180,000. Immediately after Kravitz’s admission, what are the capital balances of Elton, Don, and Kravitz, respectively?

(a) $60,000, $60,000, $60,000

(b) $63,000, $57,000, $60,000

(c) $63,333, $56,667, $60,000

(d) $70,000, $60,000, $50,000

3. William desires to purchase a one-fourth capital and profit and loss interest in the partnership of Eli, George, and Dick. The three partners agree to sell William one-fourth of their respective capital and profit and loss interests in exchange for a total payment of $40,000. The capital accounts and the respective percentage interests in profits and losses immediately before the sale to William are as follows:

Eli capital (60%) …….…… $ 80,000

George capital (30%) ………. 40,000

Dick capital (10%) …………. 20,000

$140,000

All other assets and liabilities are fairly valued, and implied goodwill is to be recorded prior to the acquisition by William. Immediately after William’s acquisition, what should be the capital balances of Eli, George, and Dick, respectively?

(a) $60,000, $30,000, $15,000

(b) $69,000, $34,500, $16,500

(c) $77,000, $38,500, $19,500

(d) $92,000, $46,000, $22,000

4. The capital accounts of the partnership of Newton, Sharman, and Jackson on June 1, 2011, are presented, along with their respective profit and loss ratios:



On June 1, 2011, Sidney was admitted to the partnership when he purchased, for $132,000, a proportionate interest from Newton and Sharman in the net assets and profits of the partnership. As a result of this transaction, Sidney acquired a one-fifth interest in the net assets and profits of the firm. Assuming that implied goodwill is not to be recorded, what is the combined gain realized by Newton and Sharman upon the sale of a portion of their interests in the partnership to Sidney?

(a) $0

(b) $43,200

(c) $62,400

(d) $82,000

5. Kern and Pate are partners with capital balances of $60,000 and $20,000, respectively. Profits and losses are divided in the ratio of 60:40. Kern and Pate decide to admit Grant, who invested land valued at $15,000 for a 20% capital interest in the partnership. Grant’s capital account should be credited for:

(a) $12,000

(b) $15,000

(c) $16,000

(d) $19,000

6. James Dixon, a partner in an accounting firm, decided to withdraw from the partnership. Dixon’s share of the partnership profits and losses was 20%. Upon withdrawing from the partnership, he was paid $74,000 in final settlement for his partnership interest. The total of the partners’ capital accounts before recognition of partnership goodwill prior to Dixon’s withdrawal was $210,000. After his withdrawal, the remaining partners’ capital accounts, excluding their share of goodwill, totaled $160,000. The total agreed-upon goodwill of the firm was:

(a) $120,000

(b) $140,000

(c) $160,000

(c) $250,000

7. On June 30, 2011, the balance sheet for the partnership of Williams, Brown, and Lowe, together with their respective profit and loss ratios, is summarized as follows:



Williams has decided to retire from the partnership, and by mutual agreement the assets are to be adjusted to their fair value of $360,000 at June 30, 2011. It is agreed that the partnership will pay Williams $102,000 cash for his partnership interest exclusive of his loan, which is to be repaid in full. Goodwill is to be recorded in this transaction, as implied by the excess payment to Williams. After Williams’s retirement, what are the capital account balances of Brown and Lowe, respectively?

(a) $65,000 and $150,000

(b) $97,000 and $246,000

(c) $73,000 and $174,000

(d) $77,000 and $186,000

a publicly traded corporation has a defined benefit pension plan 262594

CLO 4

  1. A publicly traded corporation has a defined benefit pension plan in place for its employees. Under generally accepted accounting principles, as a measure of the company’s pension liability, the company should not use what type of benefit obligation?
  1. What information about its pension plan would a company normally be required to disclose in the notes to the financial statements?

CLO 5

  1. When a company decides to switch from LIFO to FIFO for inventory valuation, this change should be treated as what?

CLO 6

  1. Which formula would a bank or an investor most likely use when evaluating a company’s cash flows?
Document Preview:

ACC410C Review Final Exam (28 MC x 7 = 196 points) CLO 4 A publicly traded corporation has a defined benefit pension plan in place for its employees. Under generally accepted accounting principles, as a measure of the company’s pension liability, the company should not use what type of benefit obligation? What information about its pension plan would a company normally be required to disclose in the notes to the financial statements? CLO 5 When a company decides to switch from LIFO to FIFO for inventory valuation, this change should be treated as what? CLO 6 Which formula would a bank or an investor most likely use when evaluating a company’s cash flows? CLO 7 Companies following the full disclosure principle should report what? Which of the following post-balance-sheet events would require adjustment of the accounts before issuance of the financial statements? CLO 1 Problem – Know how to calculate earnings per share on common stock. Problem – On an interest payment date, a company has bonds that were converted into shares of the company’s common stock, each having a certain par value and a market value. There is an unamortized discount on the bonds. Using the book value method, the company would record what increase in paid-in capital in excess of par?????Problem –Company A issued bonds due in ten years. One detachable stock warrant entitling the holder to purchase shares of Company B’s common stock was attached to each bond. At the date of issuance, the market value of the bonds, without the stock warrants, was quoted at a certain amount. The market value of each detachable warrant was quoted at a certain amount. What amount should record as paid-in capital from stock warrants? Problem –A company granted stock options to officers and key employees for the purchase shares of the company’s par common stock at a certain amount per share as additional compensation for services to be rendered over the next three years. The market price of common…

Attachments:

account balances for the rob tom and val partnership on 262596

Account balances for the Rob, Tom, and Val partnership on October 1, 2011, are as follows:

?

The partners have decided to liquidate the business. Activities for October and November are as follows:

October

1. Rob is short of funds, and the partners agree to charge her loan to her capital account.

2. $40,000 is collected on the accounts receivable; $4,000 is written off as uncollectible.

3. Half the inventory is sold for $50,000.

4. Equipment with a book value of $55,000 is sold for $60,000.

5. The $50,000 bank note plus $600 accrued interest is paid in full.

6. The accounts payable are paid.

7. Liquidation expenses of $2,000 are paid.

8. Except for a $5,000 contingency fund, all available cash is distributed to partners at the end of October.

November

9. The remaining equipment is sold for $38,000.

10. Val accepts inventory with a book value of $20,000 and a fair value of $10,000 as payment for part of her capital balance. The rest of the inventory is written off.

11. Accounts receivable of $10,000 are collected. The remaining receivables are written off.

12. Liquidation expenses of $800 are paid.

13. Remaining cash, including the contingency fund, is distributed to the partners.

REQUIRED

Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation for the period October 1 through November30.

it is most sensible to start with the sales budget and develop the other budget from 262598

Consider the following statement: It is most sensible to start with the sales budget and develop the other budget from there. After what you have learned this week with regards to budget processes and procedures, analyse the validity of this statement. Do you agree with the statement? Justify your answer based on the week’s readings. How should sales revenues be considered when determining other costs? need 750 words, use 3-4 references including the attached reading material( publication and book

(Atrill & McLaney 2012) please make sure it is checked for plagiarism as last time had really high return and i will ask for refund if that is the case again. try to use one example from your own experience or from the web. the deadline is in 30 hours from now. but please don’t copy and paste from internet as plagiarism level allowed is 9% and please your response to be related to the attached reading material.

after the accounts are closed on july 3 2012 prior 262614

After the accounts are closed on July 3, 2012, prior to liquidating the partnership, the capital accounts of Rebecca Adams, Austin Cooper, and Ricardo Ruiz are $22,400, $5,300, and $31,900, respectively. Cash and noncash assets total $8,800 and $68,800, respectively.

Amounts owed to creditors total $18,000. The partners share income and losses in the ratio of 2:1:1. Between July 3 and July 29, the noncash assets are sold for $33,200, the partner with the capital deficiency pays his deficiency to the partnership, and the liabilities are paid.

Instructions

1. Prepare a statement of partnership liquidation, indicating

(a) The sale of assets and division of loss,

(b) The payment of liabilities,

(c) The receipt of the deficiency (from the appropriate partner), and

(d) The distribution of cash.

2. Assume the partner with the capital deficiency declares bankruptcy and is unable to pay the deficiency. Journalize the entries to

(a) Allocate the partner’s deficiency and

(b) Distribute the remaining cash.

aikman beginning capital 60 000 and rory beginning capital 262636

Aikman (beginning capital, $60,000) and Rory (beginning capital $90,000) are partners. During 2012, the partnership earned net income of $70,000, and Aikman made drawings of $18,000 while Rory made drawings of $24,000.

Instructions

(a) Assume the partnership income-sharing agreement calls for income to be divided 45% to Aikman and 55% to Rory. Prepare the journal entry to record the allocation of net income.

(b) Assume the partnership income-sharing agreement calls for income to be divided with a salary of $30,000 to Aikman and $25,000 to Rory, with the remainder divided 45% to Aikman and 55% to Rory. Prepare the journal entry to record the allocation of net income.

(c) Assume the partnership income-sharing agreement calls for income to be divided with a salary of $40,000 to Aikman and $35,000 to Rory, interest of 10% on beginning capital, and the remainder divided 50%–50%. Prepare the journal entry to record the allocation of net income.

(d) Compute the partners’ ending capital balances under the assumption in part (c).

critically analyze whether any government in the world is alwa 262651

Critically analyze whether any Government in the world is always administer their nation in the interest of citizens. Hint: You may include various examples in your discussion. Bear in mind that your discussions should not be politically motivated

Document Preview:

COURSEWORK – ASSIGNMENT 1 Year?THREE/2013?MONTH?JAN 2013?? Subject?FIN 4344 TAXATION 2??Weight?10% ?Submission Date?27TH FEB 2013??Student Name??Student ID??? Regulations A. Late Submission A 10% deduction per day of total coursework marks (excluding weekends and public holidays). Late submission between 5 to 10 days, results in a 50% deduction of total coursework marks. Late submission past 10 days results in an automatic 0% for coursework and the student will be barred from the final examination. B. Deliverables Students must submit all materials supporting their coursework listed in the deliverable section. The coursework must be done INDIVIDUALLY and must be entirely your own work. Please make sure that you are aware of the rules concerning plagiarism. If you are unclear about them, please consult your program coordinator/lecturer. Plagiarism is presenting somebody else’s work as your own. It includes: copying information directly from the Web or books without referencing the material; submitting joint coursework as an individual effort; copying another student’s coursework; stealing coursework from another student and submitting it as your own. Suspected plagiarism will be investigated and if found to have occurred will be dealt with according to the procedures set down by the university/college. The coursework should exhibit formal research skills i.e. with a table of content, proper citations, references, and appendixes. The coursework write up must be able to demonstrate critical analysis and application of both theory and practical issues to the company that you have selected. Student may include additional relevant data/information apart from the proposed guidelines in conjunction to your research. Additional marks will be awarded for such attempt. Your coursework should not be more than 2000 words. You should bind your coursework with the coursework cover as the 1st page. A CD containing the softcopy version of your coursework should be…

Attachments:

auditing and assurance services 2 the coursework must be done individually 262657

Year 2013 Exam Sitting APRIL Subject AUDITING AND ASSURANCE SERVICES 2 Weightage 26% Submission Date WEEK 8 Regulations A. Late Submission • A 10% deduction per day of total coursework marks (excluding weekends and public holidays). • Late submission between 5 to 10 days, results in a 50% deduction of total coursework marks. • Late submission past 10 days results in an automatic 0% for coursework and the student will be barred from the final examination. B. Deliverables Students must submit all materials supporting their coursework listed in the deliverable section. ? The coursework must be done individually and must be entirely your own work. Please make sure that you are aware of the rules concerning plagiarism. If you are unclear about them, please consult your program coordinator/lecturer. ? The coursework should exhibit formal research skills i.e. with a table of content, proper citations, references, and appendixes. ? The coursework write up must be able to demonstrate critical analysis and application of both theory and practical issues to the company that you have selected. ? Student may include additional relevant data/information apart from the proposed guidelines in conjunction to your research. Additional marks will be awarded for such attempt. ? Your coursework should not be more than 2000 words. ? You should bind your coursework with the coursework cover as the 1st page. ? A diskette containing the softcopy version of your coursework should be submitted as well (if required). 1. Question Required: (a) Conduct a research related to whistleblower processes. Summarize the key characteristics for the operation of an effective corporate whistleblower hotline. (b) As Vice President of Internal Audit, Cynthia Cooper reported directly to Worldcom’s CFO, Scott Sullivan, and not the CEO or the audit committee. Research professional standards of the Institute of Internal Auditors to identify recommendations for organizational reporting lines of authority appropriate for effective internal audit function within the organization. (c) Often the life of a whistleblower involves tremendous ridicule and scrutiny from others, despite doing the “right thing”. Describe your views as to why whistleblowers face tremendous obstacles as a result of bringing the inappropriate actions of others to light. (d) Describe the personal characteristics a person should possess to be an effective whistleblower. As you prepare your list, consider whether you’ve got what it takes to be a whistleblower. (e) Assume that a close family member came to you with information about a potential fraud at his or her employer. Summarise the advice you would offer as he/she considers taking the information forward. Your essay should include: • Cover Page • Grading Scheme • Table of Content • Answers to the questions above • List of References/Bibliography • Appendices (if necessary) Guidelines (1) Your mark in this coursework will carry a 26% weight in the assessment of your overall performance in this module. (2) You will be working on this coursework individually. (3) The assignment will be in an essay format of not more than 3,000 words. (4) Appropriate APA referencing system will be employed where applicable. (5) Your assignment should be type written, 1 ½ line spaced, font 12 Times New Roman and justify aligned. Please comb bind. (6) Please provide an executive summary, table of content, page number, proper heading title for each part answered and references. (7) Use an appropriate cover sheet. (8) Please attach a copy of the grading scheme at the front of your coursework (after the Cover Page) during submission. (9) The assignment will be submitted in Week 8 in class. Assignment of Grades for Written Work Written assignments will be graded according to the following distribution: • Content (thoroughness of preparation, information, and content) • Style (grammar, writing quality, clarity of writing at the sentence level) • Presentation (organization, clarity of writing at the paper level) What this means in practice is that if you do the work, but don’t organize your thoughts or write clearly, you will end with at most a C. However, you will not be given full credit for content if the lecturer cannot understand what you’re saying, so if you don’t write clearly, you will probably end up losing points on content as well. Grading Scheme (Coursework) SUBJECT: _____________________________________ SUBJECT CODE: _____________________________________ PORGRAMME: _____________________________________ STUDENT’S NAME: _____________________________________ 3. Marking Scheme ASSESSMENT CRITERIA MARKS MAKS AWARDED (a) -Identification of the key characteristic of a whistleblower hotline. -Explanation of each key characteristics identified. 2 8 (b) -Provide a summary of research conducted. -Based on the research, describing at least 2 recommendations stating the appropriate reporting lines for internal auditors based on the Institute of Internal Auditors. 3 6 (c) -Explain why whistleblowers face many obstacles in bringing matters to light. 8 (d) -Identification and explanation of key characteristics of whistleblowers -Relating the above to yourself. 4 2 (e) -Describing the advise you would give your family member. 6 List of references using APA 3

Attachments:

46 taxation revenue policy a n t i a v o i d a n c e 262659

46
Taxation Revenue Policy
A n t i – A v o i d a n c e – R e s t r i c t i o n s i n Ta x
P l a n n i n g
Conor Kennedy and Daragh O’Shaughnessy provide an overview of the historical and
current approach taken by Revenue and the Department of Finance in combating tax
avoidance
One particular change will ensure
that those going temporarily offshore
to avoid capital gains tax
liability will no longer be able to use the
loophole in question. I will continue to act
quickly to close down tax avoidance schemes
as they come to my attention
(Minister for Finance, Charlie McCreevy,
Budget 2003 speech)
This (anti-avoidance measure) will deal
with an unacceptable interpretation of VAT
law being propounded by some tax
practitioners
(Minister for Finance, Charlie McCreevy,
Budget 2004 speech)
I am closing off two particular loopholes in
the tax system relating to Capital Gains Tax
and interest relief in groups of companies
(Minister for Finance, Brian Cowen, Budget
2006 speech)
As the above extracts illustrate, a regular
feature of the annual Finance Act is the
amendment of specific sections of legislation
to combat what the Minister for Finance and
the Revenue Commissioners perceive to be
abuses of the tax system. Such specific
amendments are introduced only after the
deemed shortcomings of the existing
legislation are brought to the attention of the
Minister and the Revenue Commissioners
due to taxpayers minimising their tax liabilities
within the existing law. Lord Wilbeforce
referred to such amendments in his
judgement in Ramsay –v- Inland Revenue
Commissioners [1982] AC 300 as the “hole
and plug” solution to tax avoidance. However,
if the introduction of such specific antiavoidance
measures is considered the “cure”
for aggressive tax planning, then a general
pre-emptive approach to prevent the need for
amendments in the first place is obviously the
ideal for the Government and tax authorities
alike.
This pre-emptive approach to tax avoidance
is codified in current Irish legislation in Section
811 of the Taxes Consolidation Act 1997,
which was originally introduced in Finance Act
1989. The introduction of this general antiavoidance
provision became necessary after it
became clear that the judiciary could not be
relied upon to assume as aggressive a stance
towards tax avoidance, as would be preferred
by Revenue and the Government. The history
of the conception and birth of Section 811 is
best illustrated by reference to the relevant
case law.
Form over Substance
The case of Duke of Westminster -v- Inland
Revenue Commissioners (1936) 19 TC 490
[1936] AC 1, concerned the characterisation
of certain payments made by the Duke to his
domestic employees. Payments made under
deeds of covenant could reduce his liability to
a surtax; payments made as wages to his
employees could not. The Duke executed
deeds of covenant in favour of his employees,
and reduced their wages accordingly, and
thus mitigated his exposure to the surtax.
47
Taxation Revenue Policy
The Inland Revenue contended that the
payments under the deed were, in substance,
salaries or wages and should therefore not be
considered deductible for the purposes of
calculating the Duke’s exposure to the surtax.
This opinion was upheld in the High Court but
overturned in the Court of Appeal.
The House of Lords dismissed the appeal
of this decision by the Inland Revenue. In
delivering his opinion, Lord Tomlin said:
“ … it is said that in revenue cases there is
a doctrine that the Court may ignore the
legal position and regard what is called
“the substance of the matter,” … This socalled
doctrine of “the substance” seems
to me to be nothing more than an attempt
to make a man pay notwithstanding that
he has so ordered his affairs that the
amount of tax sought from him is not
legally claimable.”
This doctrine of depending only on the
legally enforceable “form” of a transaction,
instead of its economic “substance” or
financial result when determining liability to
tax, was approved by the Irish judiciary in the
case of O’Sullivan –v- P Limited, the
judgement in which referred to the Duke of
Westminster case.
Doctrine of Fiscal Nullity
The general application of the doctrine of
“form over substance” as laid down in the
Duke of Westminster case continued to hold
until two important UK cases in the early
1980s.
In the 1982 case of Ramsay –v- Inland
Revenue Commissioners [1982] AC 300, the
House of Lords rejected a claim for relief for
capital losses generated by the taxpayer
through a series of pre-arranged artificial steps
which served no commercial purpose other
than the reduction in a Capital Gains Tax
liability. The core of the decision essentially
rested with the fact that the taxpayer had not
suffered an actual commercial loss, but a
capital loss technically generated by the
structure of the tax law. The series of artificial
steps had left the taxpayer in essentially the
same commercial position as before, but with
the benefit of a capital loss for tax purposes. It
was decided that in such circumstances, the
actual effect of the transactions taken as a
whole should be studied, and the taxpayer’s
liability decided accordingly, applying a
principle known as the “doctrine of fiscal
nullity”, where a series of “self-cancelling” or
“circular” transactions are ignored for tax
purposes.
In 1984, the case of Furniss (Inspector of
Taxes) -v- Dawson [1984] AC 474 further
extended this principle. The Dawson family
had sought to defer a Capital Gains Tax
liability on the sale of their shares in two
family companies by selling them via an Isle
of Man company incorporated for that
purpose. Even though this series of
transactions had a commercial effect, with the
proceeds of the sale now owned by the Isle
of Man company as opposed to the Dawson
family personally, the House of Lords applied
the principle of the Ramsay case on the basis
that artificial steps had been inserted into the
sale of the companies for a non-commercial
purpose, i.e. the deferment of the Capital
Gains Tax liability.
These judgements were reconciled with
that of the Duke of Westminster case by virtue
of the fact that, while each individual
transaction could be judged on the merits of
its legal form, the totality of a series of
transactions could be viewed differently.
The McGrath Case
In Ireland, the Appeal Commissioners
applied the doctrine of fiscal nullity in rejecting
a claim for loss relief for artificial losses in the
case of P.W. McGrath –v- J.E. McDermott
(Inspector of Taxes) [1988] IR 258.
In brief terms, McGrath had purchased
shares in a company for Stg£900, from a
company with which he was connected.
Upon selling the same shares to an
unconnected purchaser for Stg£900, McGrath
crystallised a significant loss for Capital Gains
Tax purposes due to a technicality in the
“market value” rules governing disposals
between connected parties, that deemed his
acquisition cost to be significantly higher that
the Stg£900 actually paid.
Therefore to address this apparent lacuna in the
law, a new all-embracing anti-avoidance provision
was introduced which is now encompassed as
Section 811 Taxes Consolidation Act 1997
48
Taxation Revenue Policy
As McGrath had not made any actual loss,
Revenue refused the loss relief claim and the
Appeal Commissioners upheld the refusal. This
decision was rejected by the High Court and then
unanimously by the Supreme Court.
In rejecting Revenue’s argument, Finlay CJ
stated that the “function of the courts in
interpreting a statute of the Oireachtas is ….
strictly confined to ascertaining the true meaning
of the each statutory provision, resorting in cases
of doubt or ambiguity to a consideration of the
purpose and intention of the legislature to be
inferred from the provisions of the statute
involved, or even of statutes expressed to be
construed with it. The courts have not got a
function to add to or delete from express
statutory provisions so as to achieve objectives
which to the courts appear desirable. In rare and
limited circumstances words or phrases may be
implied into statutory provisions solely for the
purpose of making them effective to achieve their
expressly avowed objective.”
He concluded that “…for this court to avoid the
application of the provisions of the [Capital Gains
Tax Act 1975] to these transactions [by the
application of the doctrine of ‘fiscal nullity’] could
only constitute the invasion by the judiciary of the
powers and functions of the legislature, in plain
breach of the constitutional separation of
powers”
Section 811 and the Constitution
Following this decision, the Revenue feared
open season in the manifestation of tax avoidance
schemes. Therefore to address this apparent
lacuna in the law, a new all-embracing antiavoidance
provision was introduced which is now
encompassed as Section 811 Taxes Consolidation
Act 1997. This legislation enables Revenue to recharacterise
any transaction where they form an
opinion that a transaction gives rise to a tax
advantage or “…was not undertaken or arranged
primarily for purposes other than to give rise to a
tax advantage.” The formulation of an opinion by
Revenue as to whether or not a transaction
comprises a ‘tax avoidance transaction’ could be
regarded as the making of law. If litigation ensues,
it would be open to the applicant to argue that the
Revenue has exceeded its Constitutional authority
to the extent that Article 6.2 provides that no body
can exercise the powers vested exclusively in
another body. However, notwithstanding the
judgement in the McGrath case, the general
attitude of the Irish judiciary towards the
constitutionality of tax legislation should be
considered before any such litigation is pursued.
Personal & Property Rights
The State is required to ensure that the property
rights of every citizen are protected from unjust
attack.
Article 40.3.2 of the Constitution provides that
“The State shall, in particular, by its laws protect
and as best it may from unjust attack and, in the
case of injustice done, vindicate the life, person,
good name and property rights of every citizen”. In
Daly v Revenue Commissioners & AG 5 ITR 213,
a medical doctor challenged the basis upon which
professional services withholding tax was levied.
The repugnant provision attempted to prevent a
taxpayer obtain a full refund of one year’s tax on
a switch from the prior year basis to the current
year basis. It was held that such a provision failed
the proportionality test because it was manifestly
unfair and caused hardship. As such the effect on
the taxpayer’s property rights was not
proportionate to the objectives to be achieved.
However, in PJ Madigan and P Madigan v The
Attorney General (1986) IRLM 136, the
applicants sought a determination that the
manner in which Residential Property Tax was
imposed upon them infringed the rights of the
person, privacy and property in contravention of
Articles 40.1, 40.3 and 41 of the Constitution.
O’Hanlon J, in dismissing the applicants’ claims
said that “ … so far as the courts are concerned
this is a taxation measure. As such it necessarily
interferes with the property rights of affected
citizens. However, such interference cannot be
challenged as being unjust on that account, if
what has been done can be regarded as action
by the State in accordance with the principles of
social justice and having regard to the exigencies
of the common good as envisaged by Article
43.2 of the Constitution.”
Authority to Make Law
The Irish Constitution advocates a tripartite
separation of powers involving the legislature, the
executive and the judiciary. This doctrine instils a
certain degree of independence between the
parties whereby a system of checks and balances
can operate.
The Oireachtas or legislature makes the laws.
Article 15. 2. 1° of the Constitution provides that
the sole and exclusive power of making laws for
the State is vested in the Oireachtas and no other
legislative authority has power to make laws for
the State.
…the general attitude of the Irish judiciary towards the
constitutionality of tax legislation should be considered
before any such litigation is pursued.
49
Taxation Revenue Policy
Article 28.2 provides that the executive power of
the State “shall be exercised by or on the authority
of the Government”. Therefore the Government is
the executive organ of the State and collectively
responsible for all the Departments of the State
which are administered by individual members of
the Government.
The function of the courts is to interpret the law.
Article 34.1 requires that justice shall be
administered in courts established by law by
judges appointed in the manner provided by the
Constitution, and, save in such special and limited
cases as may be prescribed by law, shall be
administered in public.
To this extent, in Maher v Attorney General
[1973] IR 412, the Supreme Court refused to
remove words from a piece of legislation in order
to render the legislation constitutional. The Court
held that such intrusion would involve “law
making”, and therefore this responsibility could
only be performed by Parliament.
In Deaton v Attorney General [1963] IR 170, it
was held that a law allowing the Revenue
Commissioners choose what type of penalty tax
offenders would face was declared
unconstitutional on the grounds that only judges
may make such a decision
Difficulties in Challenging Tax
Laws
Article 15.4.1 states that “the Oireachtas shall
not enact any law which is repugnant to this
Constitution or any provision thereof.” In Pigs
Marketing Board v Donnelly [1939] IR 413 Hanna
J said “When the Court has to consider the
Constitutionality of a law it must, in the first place,
be accepted as an axiom that a law passed by the
Oireachtas, the elected representatives of the
people, is presumed to be constitutional unless
and until the contrary is clearly established.”
Courts have been particularly reluctant to hold
that tax laws amount to an unjust attack on
property rights. Such laws enjoy the benefit of a
very strong presumption of constitutionality and
will only be considered repugnant if they are
discriminatory or arbitrary in their operation. In
Madigan v The Attorney General (1986) IRLM
136 O’Hanlon J said that while Article 40.3 can be
invoked against a tax law which amounts to an
unjust attack on property rights, he stated that is
recognised “that tax laws are in category of their
own, and that very considerable latitude must be
allowed to the legislature in the enormously
complex task of organising and directing the
financial affairs of the State”
ECJ Matters – VAT Avoidance
Schemes
Three UK cases recently before the European
Court of Justice concerned taxpayers entering into
arrangements designed to mitigate irrecoverable
VAT. Halifax Plc, BUPA and University of
Huddersfield were all concerned with the denial by
UK Revenue Authorities of VAT on arrangements
to recover VAT. The UK Revenue Authorities took a
view that VAT avoidance schemes should be
discarded resulting in no entitlement to recover
the VAT. However, the Advocate General rejected
the view of the UK Revenue Authorities, stating
that the transactions undertaken by Halifax Plc,
BUPA and the University of Huddersfield were
economic activities. The Advocate General
endorsed the view that the taxpayer may structure
economic activities in a manner conducive for the
reduction of tax, and this basis was not justification
for the UK to disregard the transaction accordingly.
The Advocate General published his opinion on
7th April 2005.
On 21 February 2006 the ECJ handed down
judgement in the three cases before it. Amongst
the findings, it held that “each of the transactions
at issue must be considered objectively and per
se. In that regard, the fact that a supply is made
with the sole intention of obtaining a tax
advantage is immaterial.” It will take some time to
digest the full findings from the Court and its
implications for the future of general tax planning
in Ireland.
Conclusion
The creation of the High Wealth Individuals
Business Unit within Revenue represents a
fundamental recognition of the need to monitor
and police tax avoidance schemes. This
monitoring process is further augmented by the
introduction in this year’s Finance Bill of a
requirement to give “protective notice” to Revenue
furnishing full details of the tax planning
arrangement. The failure to make such a
“protective notice” declaration to Revenue of a
transaction that falls foul of S.811 TCA 1997, will
give rise to interest and a 10% surcharge.
As such, it is now of particular importance for
practitioners to be aware of Revenue’s tolerance of
acceptable tax planning arrangements. One
cannot say for sure if the proposed Finance Bill
amendments to the general anti-avoidance
provisions will become law in their current form,
but the result should be anticipated and prepared
for by any practitioner involved in the provision of
advice on tax planning.
Conor Kennedy is a Barrister-at-Law and Daragh
O’Shaughnessy is Manager, Tax & Legal Services
with KSi Faulkner Orr
CPE Programme
Conor Kennedy will be
speaking on the One Day
Update Series 2 in May on
“Anti-Avoidance – Restrictions
in Tax Planning” in Dundalk,
Dublin West, Galway and
Cork. See CPA website for full
details.

ifrsyou are the financial controller of dd which currently prepares financial statem 262661

SEGI BAC Adv. Financial Accounting & Reporting 2 Coursework Questions. 1. You are the financial controller of DD which currently prepares financial statements in accordance with local GAAP. Your finance director has been in discussions with your corporate reporting advisors about whether to move to reporting under IFRS and has forwarded to you the following note received from them: “There are a number of differences between the local GAAP and the IFRS recognition and measurement rules. Using information on our files, we have conducted a preliminary review of how your most recent financial statements might change if you had reported under IFRS. Below we show our estimates of the effect on equity at the end of the last year, together with brief notes on the different rules. $’000 $’000 Equity as reported under local GAAP 6,688 Adjustments: Amortisation of goodwill acquired in business combination 250 Valuation of property measured under revaluation model 1,200 Depreciation thereof (350) 850 Development expenditure 180 Amortisation thereof (40) 140 Equity as reported under IFRS 7,928 Recognition and Local GAAP IFRS measurement rules Goodwill You, like most local companies, Goodwill amortisation is Amortise goodwill over 20 years prohibited Property – revaluation Existing use value, that is taking Fair value, that is the open model –basis of into account what you use it for market value taking into valuation account all possible uses. Development You, like most local companies, Recognition as an asset is Expenditure choose to write off development compulsory when certain Expenditure as incurred conditions are met. Your finance director is aware that those making economic decisions use financial information for various purposes, including for the assessment of financial performance. He is pleased that the introduction of IFRS increases equity, remarking: íf equity increases, then profit must increase both in the year of change and in future years. This will improve our performance. Shouldn’t we move to IFRS as soon as possible? Requirement: In advance of a meeting with your finance director to discuss his remark, prepare an essay about the likely effect on performance if DD adopts IFRS.

Attachments:

at april 30 partners capital balances in bab company are 262674

At April 30, partners’ capital balances in BAB Company are: Barney $30,000. Andy $16,000, and Bea $15,000.The income-sharing ratios are 5:3:2, respectively. On May 1, the BABE Company is formed by admitting Ellen to the firm as a partner.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the admission of Ellen under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Ellen purchases 50% of Bea’s ownership interest by paying Bea $6,000 in cash.

(2) Ellen purchases 50% of Andy’s ownership interest by paying Andy $10,000 in cash.

(3) Ellen invests $29,000 cash in the partnership for a 40% ownership interest that includes a bonus to the new partner.

(4) Ellen invests $24,000 in the partnership for a 20% ownership interest, and bonuses are given to the old partners.

(b) Andy’s capital balance is $24,000 after admitting Ellen to the partnership by investment. If Andy’s ownership interest is 24% of total partnership capital, what were (1) Ellen’s cash investment and

(2) The total bonus to the old partners?

at april 30 partners capital balances in skg company are 262675

At April 30, partners’ capital balances in SKG Company are: S. Seger $52,000, J. Kensington $54,000, and T. Gomez $18,000. The income sharing ratios are 5:4:1, respectively.

On May 1, the SKGA Company is formed by admitting D. Atchley to the firm as a partner.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the admission of Atchley under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Atchley purchases 50% of Gomez’s ownership interest by paying Gomez $16,000 in cash.

(2) Atchley purchases 331/3% of Kensington’s ownership interest by paying Kensington $15,000 in cash.

(3) Atchley invests $66,000 for a 30% ownership interest, and bonuses are given to the old partners.

(4) Atchley invests $46,000 for a 30% ownership interest, which includes a bonus to the new partner.

(b) Kensington’s capital balance is $32,000 after admitting Atchley to the partnership by investment. If Kensington’s ownership interest is 20% of total partnership capital, what were?

(1) Atchley’s cash investment and

(2) The bonus to the new partner?

at the end of its first year of operations on december 262677

At the end of its first year of operations on December 31, 2010, KAT Company’s accounts show the following.

?

The capital balance represents each partner’s initial capital investment. Therefore, net income or net loss for 2010 has not been closed to the partners’ capital accounts.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the entry to record the division of net income for 2010 under each of the independent assumptions shown on the next page.

(1) Net income is $50,000. Income is shared 5:3:2.

(2) Net income is $40,000. Kirk and Andres are given salary allowances of $15,000 and $10,000, respectively. The remainder is shared equally.

(3) Net income is $37,000. Each partner is allowed interest of 10% on beginning capital balances. Kirk is given an $20,000 salary allowance. The remainder is shared equally.

(b) Prepare a schedule showing the division of net income under assumption (3) above.

(c) Prepare a partners’ capital statement for the year under assumption (3)above.

be2 2 match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements 262684

BE2-2 Match the qualitative characteristics below with the following statements.

1. Timeliness

2. Completeness

3. Free from error

4. Understandability

5. Faithful representation

6. Relevance

7. Neutrality

8. Confirmatory value

(a) Quality of information that assures users that information represents the economic phenomena that it purports to represent.

(b) Information about an economic phenomenon that corrects past or present expectations based on previous evaluations.

(c) The extent to which information is accurate in representing the economic substance of a transaction.

(d) Includes all the information that is necessary for a faithful representation of the economic phenomena that it purports to represent.

(e) Quality of information that allows users to comprehend its meaning.

purchase commitments at december 31 2011 volkan company has ou 261647

Purchase Commitments at December 31, 2011, Volkan Company has outstanding non-cancelable purchase commitments for 40,000 gallons, at $3.00 per gallon, of raw material to be used in its manufacturing process. The company prices its raw material inventory at cost or market, whichever is lower.

(a) Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2011, is $3.30, how would this matter be treated in the accounts and statements? Explain.

(b) Assuming that the market price as of December 31, 2011, is $2.70, instead of $3.30, how would you treat this situation in the accounts and statements?

(c) Give the entry in January 2012, when the 40,000-gallon shipment is received, assuming that the situation given in (b) above existed at December 31, 2011, and that the market price in January 2012 was $2.70 per gallon. Give an explanation of your treatment.

purchase commitments prophet company signed a long term purchase 261652

Purchase Commitments Prophet Company signed a long-term purchase contract to buy timber from the U.S. Forest Service at $300 per thousand board feet. Under these terms, Prophet must cut and pay $6,000,000 for this timber during the next year. Currently the market value is $250 per thousand board feet. At this rate, the market price is $5,000,000. Jerry Herman, the controller, wants to recognize the loss in value on the year-end financial statements, but the financial vice president, Billie Hands, argues that the loss is temporary and should be ignored. Herman notes that market value has remained near $250 for many months, and he sees no sign of significant change.

(a) What are the ethical issues, if any?

(b) Is any particular stakeholder harmed by the financial vice president’s decision?

(c) What should the controller do?

purchases recorded gross and net some of the transactions of 261654

Purchases Recorded Gross and Net some of the transactions of Torres Company during August are listed below. Torres uses the periodic inventory method.

August 10 Purchased merchandise on account, $12,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

13 Returned part of the purchase of August 10, $1,200, and received credit on account.

15 Purchased merchandise on account, $16,000, terms 1/10, n/60.

25 Purchased merchandise on account, $20,000, terms 2/10, n/30.

28 Paid invoice of August 15 in full

(a) Assuming that purchases are recorded at gross amounts and that discounts are to be recorded when taken:

(1) Prepare general journal entries to record the transactions.

(2) Describe how the various items would be shown in the financial statements.

(b) Assuming that purchases are recorded at net amounts and that discounts lost are treated as financial expenses:

(1) Prepare general journal entries to enter the transactions.

(2) Prepare the adjusting entry necessary on August 31 if financial statements are to be prepared at that time.

(3) Describe how the various items would be shown in the financial statements.

(c) Which of the two methods do you prefer and why?

refer to problem 2 9 assume that walmart wmt has accounted 261661

Refer to Problem 2.9. Assume that Walmart (WMT) has accounted for the value of the land at acquisition cost and sells the land on December 31, 2011, for a two-year note receivable with a present value of $180,000 instead of for cash. The note bears interest at 8 percent and requires cash payments of $100,939 on December 31, 2012 and 2013. Interest rates for notes of this risk level increase to 10 percent on December 31, 2012, resulting in a market value for the note on this date of $91,762.

Required

Ignore income taxes. Using the analytical framework discussed in the chapter, indicate the effect of the preceding information for 2011, 2012, and 2013 under each of the following valuation methods.

a. Valuation of the note at the present value of future cash flows using the historical market interest rate of 8 percent (Approach 1).

b. Valuation of the note at the present value of future cash flows, adjusting the note to fair value upon changes in market interest rates and including unrealized gains and losses in net income (Approach 3).

c. Why is retained earnings on December 31, 2013, equal to $101,878 in both cases despite the reporting of different amounts of net income each year?

retail inventory method fuque inc uses the retail inventory met 261675

Retail Inventory Method Fuque Inc. uses the retail inventory method to estimate ending inventory for its monthly financial statements. The following data pertain to a single department for the month of October 2011.

(a) Using the conventional retail method, prepare a schedule computing estimated lower of-cost-or-market inventory for October 31, 2011.

(b) A department store using the conventional retail inventory method estimates the cost of its ending inventory as $60,000. An accurate physical count reveals only $47,000 of inventory at lower-of-cost-or-market. List the factors that may have caused the difference between the computed inventory and the physicalcount.

retail inventory method conventional and lifo robinson company b 261687

Retail Inventory Method—Conventional and LIFO Robinson Company began operations late in 2010 and adopted the conventional retail inventory method. Because there was no beginning inventory for 2010 and no markdowns during 2010, the ending inventory for 2010 was $14,000 under both the conventional retail method and the LIFO retail method. At the end of 2011, management wants to compare the results of applying the conventional and LIFO retail methods. There was no change in the price level during 2011. The following data are available for computations. Compute the cost of the 2011 ending inventory under both

(a) The conventional retail method and

(b) The LIFO retailmethod.

retail lifo retail and inventory shortage late in 2007 joan 261689

Retail, LIFO Retail, and Inventory Shortage Late in 2007, Joan Seceda and four other investors took the chain of Becker Department Stores private, and the company has just completed its third year of operations under the ownership of the investment group. Andrea Selig, controller of Becker Department Stores, is in the process of preparing the year-end financial statements. Based on the preliminary financial statements, Seceda has expressed concern over inventory shortages, and she has asked Selig to determine whether an abnormal amount of theft and breakage has occurred. The accounting records of Becker Department Stores contain the following amounts on November 30, 2010, the end of the fiscal year.

Cost Retail

Beginning inventory $ 68,000 $100,000

Purchases 255,000 400,000

Net markups 50,000

Net markdowns 110,000

Sales 320,000

According to the November 30, 2010, physical inventory, the actual inventory at retail is $115,000.

(a) Describe the circumstances under which the retail inventory method would be applied and the advantages of using the retail inventory method.

(b) Assuming that prices have been stable, calculate the value, at cost, of Becker Department Stores’ ending inventory using the last-in, first-out (LIFO) retail method. Be sure to furnish supporting calculations.

(c) Estimate the amount of shortage, at retail, that has occurred at Becker Department Stores during the year ended November 30, 2010.

(d) Complications in the retail method can be caused by such items as

(1) Freight-in costs,

(2) Purchase returns and allowances,

(3) Sales returns and allowances, and

(4) Employee discounts. Explain how each of these four special items is handled in the retail inventory method.

(CMA adapted)

southern copper corporation pcu acquired mining equipment for 261701

Southern Copper Corporation (PCU) acquired mining equipment for $100,000 cash on January 1, 2009. The equipment had an expected useful life of four years and zero salvage value. PCU calculates depreciation using the straight-line method over the remaining expected useful life in all cases. On December 31, 2009, after recognizing depreciation for the year, PCU learns that new equipment now offered on the market makes the purchased equipment partially obsolete. The market value of PCU’s equipment on December 31, 2009, reflecting this obsolescence, is $60,000. The expected useful life does not change. On December 31, 2010, the market value of the equipment is $48,000. PCU sells the equipment on January 1, 2012, for $26,000.

Required

Ignore income taxes.

a. Assume for this part that PCU accounts for the equipment using acquisition cost adjusted for depreciation and impairment losses. Using the analytical framework discussed in the chapter, indicate the effects of the following events on the balance sheet and income statement.

(1) Acquisition of the equipment for cash on January 1, 2009.

(2) Depreciation for 2009.

(3) Impairment loss for 2009.

(4) Depreciation for 2010.

(5) Depreciation for 2011.

(6) Sale of the equipment on January 1, 2012.

b. Assume that PCU accounts for the equipment using current fair market values adjusted for depreciation and impairment losses (with changes in fair market values recognized in net income). Using the analytical framework discussed in the chapter, indicate the effect of the following events on the balance sheet and income statement.

(1) Acquisition of the equipment for cash on January 1, 2009.

(2) Depreciation for 2009.

(3) Impairment loss for 2009.

(4) Depreciation for 2010.

(5) Recognition of unrealized holding gain or loss for 2010.

(6) Depreciation for 2011.

(7) Recognition of unrealized holding gain or loss for 2011.

(8) Sale of the equipment on January 1, 2012.

c. After the equipment is sold, why is retained earnings on January 1, 2012, equal to a negative $74,000 in both cases despite having shown a different pattern of expenses, gains, and losses over time?

t j international was founded in 1969 as trus joist 261711

T J International was founded in 1969 as Trus Joist International. The firm, a manufacturer of specialty building products, has its headquarters in Boise, Idaho. The company, through its partnership in the Trus Joist MacMillan joint venture, develops and manufactures engineered lumber. This product is a high- quality substitute for structural lumber, and uses lower-grade wood and materials formerly considered waste. The company also is majority owner of the Outlook Window Partnership, which is a consortium of three wood and vinyl window manufacturers. Following is T J International’s adapted income statement and information concerning inventories from its annual report.



Instructions

(a) How much would income before taxes have been if FIFO costing had been used to value all inventories?

(b) If the income tax rate is 46.6%, what would income tax have been if FIFO costing had been used to value all inventories? In your opinion, is this difference in net income between the two methods material? Explain.

(c) Does the use of a different costing system for different types of inventory mean that there is a different physical flow of goods among the different types of inventory?Explain.

the financial statements of nike corporation reveal the informat 261720

The financial statements of Nike Corporation reveal the information regarding income taxes shown in Exhibit 2.15.

Required

a. Assuming that Nike had no significant permanent differences between book income and taxable income, did income before taxes for financial reporting exceed or fall short of taxable income for 2007? Explain.

b. Did book income before taxes for financial reporting exceed or fall short of taxable income for 2008? Explain.

c. Will the adjustment to net income for deferred taxes to compute cash flow from operations in the statement of cash flows result in an addition or a subtraction for 2008?

d. Nike recognizes provisions for sales returns and doubtful accounts each year in computing income for financial reporting. Nike cannot claim an income tax deduction for these returns and doubtful accounts until customers return goods or accounts receivable become uncollectible. Why do the deferred taxes for returns and doubtful accounts appear as deferred tax assets instead of deferred tax liabilities? Suggest possible reasons why the deferred tax asset for sales returns and doubtful accounts increased between 2007 and 2008.

e. Nike recognizes an expense related to deferred compensation as employees render services but cannot claim an income tax deduction until it pays cash to a retirement fund. Why do the deferred taxes for deferred compensation appear as a deferred tax asset? Suggest possible reasons why the deferred tax asset increased between 2007 and 2008.

f. Nike states that it recognizes a valuation allowance on deferred tax assets related to foreign loss carryforwards because the benefits of some of these losses will expire before the firm realizes the benefits. Why might the valuation allowance have decreased slightly between 2007 and 2008?

g. Nike reports a large deferred tax liability for Intangibles. In another footnote, Nike states, ?oDuring the fourth quarter ended May 31, 2008 the Company completed the acquisition of Umbro Plc (?oUmbro??). As a result, $378.4 million was allocated to unamortized trademarks, $319.2 million was allocated to goodwill and $41.1 million was allocated to other amortized intangible assets consisting of Umbro’s sourcing network, established customer relationships and the United Soccer League Franchise.?? Why would Nike report a deferred tax liability associated with this increase in intangible assets on the balance sheet?

h. Nike recognizes its share of the earnings of foreign subsidiaries each year for financial reporting but recognizes income from these investments for income tax reporting only when it receives a dividend. Why do the deferred taxes related to these investments appear as a deferred tax liability?

i. Why does Nike recognize both deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities related to investments in foreign operations?

the financial statements of starbucks corporation are presented 261725

The financial statements of Starbucks Corporation are presented in Exhibits 1.26–1.28. The income tax note to those financial statements reveals the information regarding income taxes shown in Exhibit 2.16.

Required

a. Assuming that Starbucks had no significant permanent differences between book income and taxable income, did income before taxes for financial reporting exceed or fall short of taxable income for 2007? Explain.

b. Did book income before taxes for financial reporting exceed or fall short of taxable income for 2008? Explain.

c. Will the adjustment to net income for deferred taxes to compute cash flow from operations in the statement of cash flows result in an addition or subtraction for 2007? For 2008?

d. Starbucks rents retail space for its coffee shops. It must recognize rent expense as it uses rental facilities but cannot claim an income tax deduction until it pays cash to the landlord. Suggest the scenario that would give rise to a deferred tax asset instead of a deferred tax liability related to occupancy cost.

e. Starbucks recognizes an expense related to retirement benefits as employees rendered services but cannot claim an income tax deduction until it pays cash to a retirement fund. Why do the deferred taxes for deferred compensation appear as a deferred tax asset? Suggest possible reasons why the deferred tax asset decreased between the end of 2007 and the end of 2008.

f. Starbucks reports deferred revenue for sales of stored value cards, such as the Starbucks Card and gift certificates. These amounts are taxed when collected, but not recognized in financial reporting income until tendered at a store. Why does the tax effect of deferred revenue appear as a deferred tax asset? Why might the value of this deferred tax asset doubled from 2007 to 2008?

g. Starbucks recognizes a valuation allowance on its deferred tax assets to reflect ?onet operating losses of consolidated foreign subsidiaries.?? Presumably, these are included in ?oOther?? deferred tax assets. Why might the valuation allowance have increased between 2007 and 2008?

h. Starbucks uses the straight-line depreciation method for financial reporting and accelerated depreciation for income tax reporting. Why do the deferred taxes related to depreciation appear as deferred tax liabilities? Suggest possible reasons why the amount of the deferred tax liability related to depreciation decreased between 2007 and 2008.

the initiation banquet for new members of your business club 261745

The initiation banquet for new members of your business club is being held at an excellent restaurant. You are sitting next to two college students who are majoring in marketing. In discussing the accounting course they are taking, they mention that they are having difficulty understanding the lean philosophy. They have read that the elements of a company’s operating system support the concepts of simplicity, continuous improvement, waste reduction, timeliness, and efficiency. They realize that to understand lean thinking in a complex manufacturing environment, they must first understand lean in a simpler context. They ask you to explain the philosophy and provide an example.

Briefly explain the lean philosophy. Apply the elements of a JIT operating system to the restaurant where the banquet is being held. Do you believe the lean philosophy applies in all restaurant operations? Explain your answer.

the text states oover sufficiently long time periods net incom 261761

The text states, ?oOver sufficiently long time periods, net income equals cash inflows minus cash outflows, other than cash flows with owners.?? Demonstrate the accuracy of this statement in the following scenario:

Two friends contributed $50,000 each to form a new business. The owners used the amounts contributed to purchase a machine for $100,000 cash. They estimated that the useful life of the machine was five years and the salvage value was $20,000. They rented out the machine to a customer for an annual rental of $25,000 a year for five years. Annual cash operating costs for insurance, taxes, and other items totaled $6,000 annually. At the end of the fifth year, the owners sold the equipment for $22,000, instead of the $20,000 salvage value initially estimated.

this case continues the financial statement analysis of procter 261762

This case continues the financial statement analysis of Procter & Gamble Co. begun in Minicase 9.1 and developed further in Minicases 11.1 and12.1. This installment focuses on forecasting and valuation, with further development in Minicase 15.1 in the next chapter.

Financial statements for Procter & Gamble are presented in Exhibit 9.15 in Chapter 9. If you worked Minicase 9.1, you will have reformulated the income statements and balance sheets to distinguish operating activities from financing activities. If you worked Minicases M11.1 and 12.1, you will have reached an understanding of P&G’s core profitability and the factors that drive that profitability. If not, you should do so now.

To start, calculate residual core operating income for the years 2006-2008 and note changes overtime. Use a required equity return of 8.5 percent but convert it to an unlevered required return (for operations). In July 2008, just after the fiscal year ended, the 3,033 million outstanding shares of P&G were trading at $64.The risk-free rate was about 4.5 percent, so an 8.5 percent required return implies a 4 percent risk premium suitable for equity with a beta less than 1.0. What is the trend in residual operating income? Does P&G appear to be a growth company? What drives the trend?

A. Develop forecasts of residual operating income for 2009 and growth there after based solely on information in the financial statements. Your analysis should include a no growth (SF2) forecast, along with a (SF3) forecast that includes growth. Consider a weighted-average SF3 forecast. Do you think these forecasts are applicable to P&G?

Carry out a sensitivity analysis to changes in inputs by developing a valuation grid.

B. Analysts were forecasting $4.28 in earnings per share for fiscal year 2009. How does the analyst forecast compare with yours?

C. Calculate the (traded) enterprise price-to-book ratio and reconcile it to the levered price-to-book ratio. Now calculate an intrinsic enterprise P/B using equation 14.3a in this chapter. Do you think the $64 price is reasonable?

various inventory issues the following independent situations re 261779

Various Inventory Issues The following independent situations relate to inventory accounting.

1. Kim Co. purchased goods with a list price of $175,000, subject to trade discounts of 20% and 10%, with no cash discounts allowable. How much should Kim Co. record as the cost of these goods?

2. Keillor Company’s inventory of $1,100,000 at December 31, 2010, was based on a physical count of goods priced at cost and before any year-end adjustments relating to the following items.

a. Goods shipped from a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 24, 2010, at an invoice cost of $69,000 to Keillor Company were received on January 4, 2011.

b. The physical count included $29,000 of goods billed to Sakic Corp. f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2010. The carrier picked up these goods on January 3, 2011. What amount should Keillor report as inventory on its balance sheet?

3. Zimmerman Corp. had 1,500 units of part M.O. on hand May 1, 2010, costing $21 each. Purchases of part M.O. during May were as follows.

Units Unit Cost

May 9 2,000 $22.00

17 3,500 23.00

26 1,000 24.00

A physical count on May 31, 2010, shows 2,000 units of part M.O. on hand. Using the FIFO method, what is the cost of part M.O. inventory at May 31, 2010? Using the LIFO method, what is the inventory cost? Using the average cost method, what is the inventory cost?

4. Ashbrook Company adopted the dollar-value LIFO method on January 1, 2010 (using internal price indexes and multiple pools). The following data are available for inventory pool A for the 2 years following adoption of LIFO.

At Base- At Current-

Inventory Year Cost Year Cost

1/1/10 $200,000 $200,000

12/31/10 240,000 264,000

12/31/11 256,000 286,720

Computing an internal price index and using the dollar-value LIFO method, at what amount should the inventory be reported at December 31, 2011?

5. Donovan Inc., a retail store chain, had the following information in its general ledger for the year 2011.

Merchandise purchased for resale $909,400

Interest on notes payable to vendors 8,700

Purchase returns 16,500

Freight-in 22,000

Freight-out 17,100

Cash discounts on purchases 6,800

What is Donovan’s Inventoriable cost for 2010? Answer each of the preceding questions about inventories, and explain your answers.

walmart wmt acquires a tract of land on january 1 261780

Walmart (WMT) acquires a tract of land on January 1, 2009, for $100,000 cash. On December 31, 2009, the current market value of the land is $150,000. On December 31, 2010, the current market value of the land is $120,000. The firm sells the land on December 31, 2011, for $180,000 cash.

Required

Ignore income taxes. Using the analytical framework discussed in the chapter, indicate the effect of the preceding information for 2009, 2010, and 2011 under each of the following valuation methods (Parts a–c).

a. Valuation of the land at acquisition cost until sale of the land.

b. Valuation of the land at current market value but including unrealized gains and losses in accumulated other comprehensive income until sale of the land.

c. Valuation of the land at current market value and including market value changes each year in net income.

d. Why is retained earnings on December 31, 2011, equal to $80,000 in all three cases despite the reporting of different amounts of net income each year?

answers 261962

Finlon Upholstery, Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 20×1, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date. Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours, multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 20×2 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year follow. Direct Materials Used $5,600,000.00 Direct Labor $4,350,000.00 Indirect Material Used $65,000.00 Indirect Labor $2,860,000.00 Factory Depreciation $1,740,000.00 Factory Insurance $59,000.00 Factory Utilities $830,000.00 Selling and Administrative Expenses $2,160,000.00 Total $17,664,000.00 Job no. 2077 was completed in January 20×2; there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 20×2 were sold with the exception of job no. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over applied overhead to Cost of Goods Sold. Directions: You are to do the following: Calculate the companies predetermined overhead application rate. Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor and manufacturing overhead. Calculate the finished goods inventory for the 12/31/x2 balance sheet. Calculate the over-applied or under applied overhead at year end. Explain if it is appropriate to include the selling and administrative expenses within cost of goods sold.

assets owners equity and liabilities 261994

Problem Number 1) Show the effect on the accounting equation of the following events for the APRIL Company.

Example: Investors purchased common stock in APRIL for $1,000 cash.Answer: Assets increasedOwners’ Equity increased

a) APRIL borrowed $8,000 from the bank on a note.b) APRIL purchased a desk and two chairs for $1,500 cash.c) APRIL purchased supplies on account for $700.d)APRIL provided services to others for $7,200 cash.e) APRIL provided services to others for $2,300 on account.f) APRIL paid $280 cash for a newspaper ad.g) APRIL collected $600 of the money it was owed due to the services provided in e.h) APRIL paid off $300 of its supplies account created in c.i) APRIL paid its utility bill in the amount of $400 cash.j) APRIL paid a dividend to its investors in the amount of $500 cash.k) APRIL paid off half of its bank note from (a) by giving the bank $4,000 of common stock.

compute fifo lifo average cost periodic presented below is inf 262005

Compute FIFO, LIFO, Average Cost—Periodic Presented below is information related to radios for the Couples Company for the month of July.

(a) Assuming that the periodic inventory method is used, compute the inventory cost at July 31 under each of the following cost flow assumptions.

(1) FIFO.

(2) LIFO.

(3) Weighted-average.

(b) Answer the following questions.

(1) Which of the methods used above will yield the lowest figure for gross profit for the income statement? Explain why.

(2) Which of the methods used above will yield the lowest figure for ending inventory for the balance sheet? Explainwhy.

financial statement effects of fifo and lifo the management of 262117

Financial Statement Effects of FIFO and LIFO the management of Tritt Company has asked its accounting department to describe the effect upon the company’s financial position and its income statements of accounting for inventories on the LIFO rather than the FIFO basis during 2010 and 2011. The accounting department is to assume that the change to LIFO would have been effective on January 1, 2010, and that the initial LIFO base would have been the inventory value on December 31, 2009. Presented below are the company’s financial statements and other data for the years 2010 and 2011 when the FIFO method was employed. Other data:

1. Inventory on hand at December 31, 2009, consisted of 40,000 units valued at $3.00 each.

2. Sales (all units sold at the same price in a given year):

2010—150,000 units @ $6.00 each 2011—180,000 units @ $7.50 each

3. Purchases (all units purchased at the same price in given year):

2010—150,000 units @ $3.50 each 2011—180,000 units @ $4.40 each

4. Income taxes at the effective rate of 40% are paid on December 31 each year. Name the account(s) presented in the financial statements that would have different amounts for 2011 if LIFO rather than FIFO had been used, and state the new amount for each account that is named. Show computations.

(CMAadapted)

gross profit method you are called by kevin garnett of 261479

Gross Profit Method You are called by Kevin Garnett of Celtic Co. on July 16 and asked to prepare a claim for insurance as a result of a theft that took place the night before. You suggest that an inventory be taken immediately. The following data are available.

Inventory, July 1 $ 38,000

Purchases—goods placed in stock July 1–15 90,000

Sales—goods delivered to customers (gross) 116,000

Sales returns—goods returned to stock 4,000

Your client reports that the goods on hand on July 16 cost $30,500, but you determine that this figure includes goods of $6,000 received on a consignment basis. Your past records show that sales are made at approximately 25% over cost. Garnett’s insurance covers only goods owned. Compute the claim against the insurance company.

internal indexes dollar value lifo on january 1 2010 bonanza w 261537

Internal Indexes—Dollar-Value LIFO On January 1, 2010, Bonanza Wholesalers Inc. adopted the dollar-value LIFO inventory method for income tax and external financial reporting purposes. However, Bonanza continued to use the FIFO inventory method for internal accounting and management purposes. In applying the LIFO method, Bonanza uses internal conversion price indexes and the multiple pools approach under which substantially identical inventory items are grouped into LIFO inventory pools. The following data were available for inventory pool no. 1, which comprises products A and B, for the 2 years following the adoption of LIFO.

(a) Prepare a schedule to compute the internal conversion price indexes for 2010 and 2011. Round indexes to two decimal places

(b) Prepare a schedule to compute the inventory amounts at December 31, 2010 and 2011, using the dollar-value LIFO inventory method.

(AICPAadapted)

inventoriable costs assume that in an annual audit of webber 261541

Inventoriable Costs Assume that in an annual audit of Webber Inc. at December 31, 2010, you. Find the following transactions near the closing date.

1. A special machine, fabricated to order for a customer, was finished and specifically segregated in the back part of the shipping room on December 31, 2010. The customer was billed on that date and the machine excluded from inventory although it was shipped on January 4, 2011.

2. Merchandise costing $2,800 was received on January 3, 2011 and the related purchase invoice recorded January 5. The invoice showed the shipment was made on December 29, 2010, f.o.b. destination.

3. A packing case containing a product costing $3,400 was standing in the shipping room when the physical inventory was taken. It was not included in the inventory because it was marked ?oHold for shipping instructions.?? Your investigation revealed that the customer’s order was dated December 18, 2010, but that the case was shipped and the customer billed on January 10, 2011. The product was a stock item of your client.

4. Merchandise costing $720 was received on December 28, 2010, and the invoice was not recorded. You located it in the hands of the purchasing agent; it was marked ?oon consignment.??

5. Merchandise received on January 6, 2011, costing $680 was entered in the purchase journal on January 7, 2011. The invoice showed shipment was made f.o.b. supplier’s warehouse on December 31, 2010. Because it was not on hand at December 31, it was not included in inventory. Assuming that each of the amounts is material, state whether the merchandise should be included in the client’s inventory, and give your reason for your decision on each item

inventoriable costs george solti the controller for garrison lu 261543

Inventoriable Costs George Solti, the controller for Garrison Lumber Company, has recently hired you as assistant controller. He wishes to determine your expertise in the area of inventory accounting and therefore asks you to answer the following unrelated questions.

(a) A company is involved in the wholesaling and retailing of automobile tires for foreign cars. Most of the inventory is imported, and it is valued on the company’s records at the actual inventory cost plus freight-in. At year-end, the warehousing costs are prorated over cost of goods sold and ending inventory. Are warehousing costs considered a product cost or a period cost?

(b) A certain portion of a company’s ?oinventory?? is composed of obsolete items. Should obsolete items that are not currently consumed in the production of ?ogoods or services to be available for sale?? be classified as part of inventory?

(c) A company purchases airplanes for sale to others. However, until they are sold, the company charters and services the planes. What is the proper way to report these airplanes in the company’s financial statements?

(d) A company wants to buy coal deposits but does not want the financing for the purchase to be reported on its financial statements. The company therefore establishes a trust to acquire the coal deposits. The company agrees to buy the coal over a certain period of time at specified prices. The trust is able to finance the coal purchase and pay off the loan as it is paid by the company for the minerals. How should this transaction be reported?

inventoriable costs in your audit of garza company you find 261544

Inventoriable Costs in your audit of Garza Company, you find that a physical inventory on December 31, 2010, showed merchandise with a cost of $441,000 was on hand at that date. You also discover the following items were all excluded from the $441,000.

1. Merchandise of $61,000 which is held by Garza on consignment. The consignor is the Bontemps Company.

2. Merchandise costing $33,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. destination to a customer on December 31, 2010. The customer was expected to receive the merchandise on January 6, 2011.

3. Merchandise costing $46,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. shipping point to a customer on December 29, 2010. The customer was scheduled to receive the merchandise on January 2, 2011.

4. Merchandise costing $73,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. destination on December 30, 2010, and received by Garza on January 4, 2011.

5. Merchandise costing $51,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 31, 2010, and received by Garza on January 5, 2011.Based on the above information, calculate the amount that should appear on Garza’s balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for inventory.

inventoriable costs presented below is a list of items that 261546

Inventoriable Costs Presented below is a list of items that may or may not be reported as inventory in a company’s December 31 balance sheet.

1. Goods sold on an installment basis (bad debts can be reasonably estimated).

2. Goods out on consignment at another company’s store.

3. Goods purchased f.o.b. shipping point that is in transit at December 31.

4. Goods purchased f.o.b. destination that are in transit at December 31.

5. Goods sold to another company, for which our company has signed an agreement to repurchase at a set price that covers all costs related to the inventory.

6. Goods sold where large returns are predictable.

7. Goods sold f.o.b. shipping point that is in transit at December 31.

8. Freight charges on goods purchased.

9. Interest costs incurred for inventories that are routinely manufactured.

10. Materials on hand not yet placed into production by a manufacturing firm.

11. Costs incurred to advertise goods held for resale.

12. Office supplies.

13. Raw materials on which a manufacturing firm has started production, but which are not completely processed.

14. Factory supplies.

15. Goods held on consignment from another company.

16. Costs identified with units completed by a manufacturing firm, but not yet sold.

17. Goods sold f.o.b. destination that are in transit at December 31.

18. Short-term investments in stocks and bonds that will be resold in the near future. Indicate which of these items would typically be reported as inventory in the financial statements. If an item should not be reported as inventory, indicate how it should be reported in the financial statements.

inventory errors at december 31 2010 dwight corporation report 261555

Inventory Errors At December 31, 2010, Dwight Corporation reported current assets of $390,000 and current liabilities of $200,000. The following items may have been recorded incorrectly. Dwight uses the periodic method.

1. Goods purchased costing $22,000 were shipped f.o.b. shipping point by a supplier on December 28. Dwight received and recorded the invoice on December 29, 2010, but the goods were not included in Dwight’s physical count of inventory because they were not received until January 4, 2011.

2. Goods purchased costing $20,000 were shipped f.o.b. destination by a supplier on December 26. Dwight received and recorded the invoice on December 31, but the goods were not included in Dwight’s 2010 physical count of inventory because they were not received until January 2, 2011.

3. Goods held on consignment from Kishi Company were included in Dwight’s December 31, 2010, physical count of inventory at $13,000.

4. Freight-in of $3,000 was debited to advertising expense on December 28, 2010.

(a) Compute the current ratio based on Dwight’s balance sheet.

(b) Re-compute the current ratio after corrections are made.

(c) By what amount will income (before taxes) be adjusted up or down as a result of the corrections?

inventory errors periodic thomason company makes the following e 261556

Inventory Errors—Periodic Thomason Company makes the following errors during the current year. (In all cases, assume ending inventory in the following year is correctly stated.)

1. Both ending inventory and purchases and related accounts payable are understated. (Assume this purchase was recorded and paid for in the following year.)

2. Ending inventory is overstated, but purchases and related accounts payable are recorded correctly.

3. Ending inventory is correct, but a purchase on account was not recorded. (Assume this purchase was recorded and paid for in the following year.)

Indicate the effect of each of these errors on working capital, current ratio (assume that the current ratio is greater than 1), retained earnings, and net income for the current year and the subsequent year.

case 5 1 microimage technology inc answer the required 261558

Case 5-1 Microimage Technology, Inc. : Answer the “Required” questions at the beginning of page 3. Use the below to assist you in answering. Make sure to show all work when applicable. Microimage Technology, Inc. produces miniature digital color cameras that can be attached to endoscopes and other medical devices. The cameras sell for $215 per unit and are disposed of after each use. For 2014, the company’s first full year of operation, the company had sales of 80,000 units and a net loss of $9,810,000, as follows: Microimage Technology, Inc. Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31, 2014: Sales $17,200,000 Less Cost of Goods Sold $18,360,000 Gross Profit (loss) (1,160,000) Less selling and administrative expenses: Selling expense $3,750,000 Administrative expense $4,900,000 $8,650,000 Net loss ($9,810,000) The company is closely held, with six major investors. Early in the first quarter of 2015, Warren Logan, company CFO, was preparing to meet with them to present profitability estimates for the coming two years. He expected the meeting to be somewhat hostile. Two days before, he had received an email from one of the investors, Sanjay Patel: Warren: I expected a net loss but not this big. And I certainly didn’t expect a negative gross profit! It looks like more we sell, the more we’ll lose. I hope you come to the investor meeting next week with some explanations and some better numbers. SP. In preparing for the meeting, Warren assembled the following information based on results for 2014: Units Sold $80,000 Units Produced $80,000 Selling Price $ 215 Manufacturing Costs: Direct material costs $1,280,000 Direct labor costs $1,200,000 Variable manufacturing overhead: Equipment Maintenance $ 160,000 Inspection costs $ 400,000 Miscellaneous fixed manufacturing overhead $ 3,700,000 $18,360,000 Selling expenses Variable selling expense: Shipping $ 280,000 Commissions $ 800,000 Travel $ 120,000 Fixed selling expense: Salaries $1,900,000 Miscellaneous fixed Selling expense $ 650,000 $3,750,000 Administrative expenses (all fixed) Research and development $2,700,000 Administrative salaries not related to R&D $1,300,000 Miscellaneous administrative expense $ 900,000 $ 4,900,000 Assumptions for 2015 1.) The company will hire two additional sales managers at a base salary of $90,000 each. 2.) R&D will be cut by $1,100,000. 3.) Unit sales will increase by 30 percent. Assumptions for 2016 1.) The company will hire one additional sales manager at a base salary of $90,000. 2.) R&D will be increased by $600,000 over 2015. 3.) Unit sales will increase by 60 percent over 2015. Required: a.) Recast the full costing income statement for 2014 into a variable costing format. Does it appear, as Sanjay Patel contends, that the more the company sells, the more it loses? b.) Based on the previous information, calculate sales in dollars and units needed to break even in 2015. c.) Warren Logan, CFO, has developed assumptions that he believes are reasonable for 2015 and 2016. Using these assumptions, prepare budgeted income statements for 2015 and 2016 using the variable costing method. Are the major investors likely to find forecasted profits encouraging?

Attachments:

jones co is in a technology intensive industry recently one o 261559

Jones Co. is in a technology-intensive industry. Recently, one of its competitors introduced a new product with technology that might render obsolete some of Jones’s inventory. The accounting staff wants to follow the appropriate authoritative literature in determining the accounting for this significant market event.

Instructions

Access the IFRS authoritative literature at the IASB website (http://eifrs.iasb.org/). When you have accessed the documents, you can use the search tool in your Internet browser to respond to the following questions. (Provide paragraph citations.)

(a) Identify the authoritative literature addressing inventory pricing.

(b) List three types of goods that are classified as inventory. What characteristic will automatically exclude an item from being classified as inventory?

(c) Define ?onet realizable value?? as used in the phrase ?olower-of-cost-or-net realizable value.??

(d) Explain when it is acceptable to state inventory above cost and which industries allow this practice.

discuss the difference in cost allocation between traditional method 261569

Please, answers all “Required” questions (A-E). Please, show all work when applicable.

Problem 6-15 Riverdale Printing:

Riverdale Printing Company prints limited edition art books with production runs of $15,000 to $100,000. It has recently adopted an activity-based costing system to assign manufacturing overhead to products. The following data relate to one product, Art of Design, and the ABC cost pools:

Art of Design:

Annual production $40,000 units

Direct material per unit $ 37

Direct labor per unit $ 8

Manufacturing overhead cost pools:

Cost Pool Cost Cost Driver

Material ordering $ 840,000 Number of purchase orders

Materials inspections $ 252,000 Number of receiving reports

Equipment setup $2,500,000 Number of setups

Quality control $1,000,000 Number of inspections

Other $25,000,000 Direct labor cost

Total manufacturing overhead $29,865,000

Annual activity information related to cost drivers:

Cost Pool All Books Art of Design

Materials ordering $120,000 orders 1,200

Materials inspection $ 2,100 receiving reports 315

Equipment setup 215 setups 1

Quality control 5,000 500

Other $12,500,000 direct labor $320,000

Required:

a.) Calculate the overhead rate per unit of activity for each of the five cost pools.

b.) Calculate the total overhead assigned to the production of the Art of Design. Round two decimal places.

c.) Calculate the overhead cost per unit for the Art of Design.

d.) Calculate the total unit cost for the Art of Design.

e.) Suppose that Riverdale Printing allocation base and one cost pool. Determine the overhead rate per direct labor dollar and the per unit overhead assigned to the Art of Design. Discuss the difference in cost allocation between traditional method and the activity-based costing approach.

Document Preview:

Problem 6-15 Riverdale Printing: Riverdale Printing Company prints limited edition art books with production runs of $15,000 to $100,000. It has recently adopted an activity-based costing system to assign manufacturing overhead to products. The following data relate to one product, Art of Design, and the ABC cost pools: Art of Design: Annual production $40,000 units Direct material per unit $ 37 Direct labor per unit $ 8 Manufacturing overhead cost pools: Cost Pool Cost Cost Driver Material ordering $ 840,000 Number of purchase orders Materials inspections $ 252,000 Number of receiving reports Equipment setup $2,500,000 Number of setups Quality control $1,000,000 Number of inspections Other $25,000,000 Direct labor cost Total manufacturing overhead $29,865,000 Annual activity information related to cost drivers: Cost Pool All Books Art of Design Materials ordering $120,000 orders 1,200 Materials inspection $ 2,100 receiving reports 315 Equipment setup 215 setups 1 Quality control 5,000 500 Other $12,500,000 direct labor $320,000 Required: Calculate the overhead rate per unit of activity for each of the five cost pools. Calculate the total overhead assigned to the production of the Art of Design. Round two decimal places. Calculate the overhead cost per unit for the Art of Design. Calculate the total unit cost for the Art of Design. Suppose that Riverdale Printing allocation base and one cost pool. Determine the overhead rate per direct labor dollar and the per unit overhead assigned to the Art of Design. Discuss the difference in cost allocation between traditional method and the activity-based costing approach.

Attachments:

lifo effect the following example was provided to encourage the 261575

LIFO Effect The following example was provided to encourage the use of the LIFO method. In a nutshell, LIFO subtracts inflation from inventory costs, deducts it from taxable income, and records it in a LIFO reserve account on the books. The LIFO benefit grows as inflation widens the gap between current-year and past-year (minus inflation) inventory costs. This gap is:

(a) Explain what is meant by the LIFO reserve account.

(b) How does LIFO subtract inflation from inventory costs?

(c) Explain how the cash flow of $174,400 in this example was computed. Explain why this amount may not be correct.

(d) Why does a company that uses LIFO have extra cash? Explain whether this situation will alwaysexist.

lower of cost or market fiedler co follows the practice of valu 261580

Lower-of-Cost-or-Market Fiedler Co. follows the practice of valuing its inventory at the lower-of-cost-or-market. The following information is available from the company’s inventory records as of December 31, 2010.Greg Forda is an accounting clerk in the accounting department of Fiedler Co., and he cannot understand why the market value keeps changing from replacement cost to net realizable value to something that he cannot even figure out. Greg is very confused, and he is the one who records inventory purchases and calculates ending inventory. You are the manager of the department and an accountant.

(a) Calculate the lower-of-cost-or-market using the ?oindividual item?? approach.

(b) Show the journal entry he will need to make in order to write down the ending inventory from cost to market.

(c) Then write a memo to Greg explaining what designated market value is as well as how it is computed. Use your calculations to aid in yourexplanation.

lower of cost or market ogala corporation purchased a significan 261583

Lower-of-Cost-or-Market Ogala Corporation purchased a significant amount of raw materials inventory for a new product that it is manufacturing. Ogala uses the lower-of-cost-or-market rule for these raw materials. The replacement cost of the raw materials is above the net realizable value, and both are below the original cost. Ogala uses the average cost inventory method for these raw materials. In the last 2 years, each purchase has been at a lower price than the previous purchase, and the ending inventory quantity for each period has been higher than the beginning inventory quantity for that period.

(a) (1) At which amount should Ogala’s raw materials inventory be reported on the balance sheet? Why?

(2) In general, why is the lower-of-cost-or-market rule used to report inventory?

(b) What would have been the effect on ending inventory and cost of goods sold had Ogala used the LIFO inventory method instead of the average-cost inventory method for the raw materials? Why?

lower of cost or market remmers company manufactures desks most 261584

Lower-of-Cost-or-Market Remmers Company manufactures desks. Most of the company’s desks are standard models and are sold on the basis of catalog prices. At December 31, 2010, the following finished desks appear in the company’s inventory. The 2010 catalog was in effect through November 2010 and the 2011 catalog is effective as of December 1, 2010. All catalog prices are net of the usual discounts. Generally, the company attempts to obtain a 20% gross margin on selling price and has usually been successful in doing so. At what amount should each of the four desks appear in the company’s December 31, 2010, inventory, assuming that the company has adopted a lower-of-FIFO-cost-or-market approach for valuation of inventories on an individual-itembasis?

lower of cost or market journal entries dover company began oper 261597

Lower-of-Cost-or-Market—Journal Entries Dover Company began operations in 2010 and determined its ending inventory at cost and at lower-of-cost-or-market at December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011. This information is presented below.

Cost Lower-of-Cost-or-Market

12/31/10 $346,000 $322,000

12/31/11 410,000 390,000

(a) Prepare the journal entries required at December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, assuming that the inventory is recorded at lower-of-cost-or-market, and a perpetual inventory system (direct method) is used.

(b) Prepare journal entries required at December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, assuming that the inventory is recorded at cost and an allowance account is adjusted at each year-end under a perpetual system.

(c) Which of the two methods above provides the higher net income in each year?

lucent technologies inc was formed from at t s bell laborator 261599

Lucent Technologies, Inc., was formed from AT&T’s Bell Laboratories research organization after the breakup of AT&T in to the Baby Bells. Lucent designs, develops, and manufactures communication systems, supplying these systems to most of the world’s telecom operators for both wired and wireless services for voice, data, and video delivery. In 1999 Lucent reported $38.301 billion in revenues, against $31.806 billion in 1998 and $27.611 billion in 1997.

Analysts have complained about the quality of Lucent’s reported earnings over the years.

A. What questions arise regarding the quality of Lucent’s earnings for 1997, 1998, and 1999 from the partial cash flow statements in Exhibit 17.5?

B. How do deferred tax footnotes help in ascertaining the quality of the accounting? Does the note below (from the 1999 report) raise any quality questions? The components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at September 30, 1999, and 1998 are as follows:

C. Lucent reported effective tax rates of 33.9 percent in 1999, 35.3 percent in 1998, and 36.8 percent1997. Do these rates raise quality questions?

D. Look at the footnote for the pension cost that follows. Does this note revise your assessment as to the quality of earnings reported from1997 to 1999?

Effective October 1, 1998, Lucent changed its method for calculating the market-related value of plan assets used in determining the expected return-on-asset component of annual net pension and postretirement benefit cost. Under the previous accounting method, the calculation of the market-related value of plan assets included only interest and dividends immediately, while all other realized and unrealized gains and losses were amortized on a straight-line basis over a five-year period. The new method used to calculate market-related value includes immediately an amount based on Lucent’s historical asset returns and amortizes the difference between that amount and the actual return on a straight-line basis over a five-year period. The new method is preferable under Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No.87 because it results in calculated plan asset values that are closer to current fair value, thereby lessening the accumulation of unrecognized gains and losses while still mitigating the effects of annual market value fluctuations.

The cumulative effect of this accounting change related to periods prior to fiscal year 1999 of $2, 150 ($1,308 after-tax, or $0.43 and $0.42 per basic and diluted share, respectively) is a one-time, noncash credit to fiscal 1999 earnings. This accounting change also resulted in a reduction in benefit costs in the year ended September 30, 1999, that increased income by $427($260 after-tax, or $0.09 and $0.08 per basic and diluted share, respectively) as compared with the previous accounting method. A comparison of pro forma amounts below shows the effects if the accounting change were applied retroactively:

noven pharmaceuticals inc headquartered in miami florida de 261621

Noven Pharmaceuticals, Inc., headquartered in Miami, Florida, describes itself in a recent annual report as follows.

Noven Pharmaceuticals, Inc.

Noven is a place of ideas—a company where scientific excellence and state-of-the-art manufacturing combine to create new answers to human needs. Our transdermal delivery systems speed drugs painlessly and effortlessly into the bloodstream by means of a simple skin patch. This technology has proven applications in estrogen replacement, but at Noven we are developing a variety of systems incorporating bestselling drugs that fight everything from asthma, anxiety and dental pain to cancer, heart disease and neurological illness. Our research portfolio also includes new technologies, such as iontophoresis, in which drugs are delivered through the skin by means of electrical currents, as well as products that could satisfy broad consumer needs, such as our anti-microbial mouthrinse.

Noven also reported in its annual report that its activities to date have consisted of product development efforts, some of which have been independent and some of which have been completed in conjunction with Rhone-Poulenc Rorer (RPR) and Ciba-Geigy. The revenues so far have consisted of money received from licensing fees, ?omilestone?? payments (payments made under licensing agreements when certain stages of the development of a certain product have been completed), and interest on its investments. The company expects that it will have significant revenue in the upcoming fiscal year from the launch of its first product, a transdermal estrogen delivery system.

The current assets portion of Noven’s balance sheet follows.

Cash and cash equivalents $12,070,272

Securities held to maturity 23,445,070

Inventory of supplies 1,264,553

Prepaid and other current assets 825,159

Total current assets $37,605,054

Inventory of supplies is recorded at the lower of cost (first-in, first-out) or net realizable value and consists mainly of supplies for research and development.

Instructions

(a) What would you expect the physical fl ow of goods for a pharmaceutical manufacturer to be most like: FIFO, LIFO, or random (fl ow of goods does not follow a set pattern)? Explain.

(b) What are some of the factors that Noven should consider as it selects an inventory measurement method?

(c) Suppose that Noven had $49,000 in an inventory of transdermal estrogen delivery patches. These patches are from an initial production run, and will be sold during the coming year. Why do you think that this amount is not shown in a separate inventory account? In which of the accounts shown is the inventory likely to be? At what point will the inventory be transferred to a separate inventory account?

cash flow statement 261635

You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.
Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the companybased on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow

a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you’ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:

i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?

III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.

a. What is the product cost for the expansion product?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set forthe expansion product?
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?

IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.

a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory’s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

SPREADSHEET FOR II

ABC Company’s current financial information (before/without expansion)

Dec. 31,19X2

Dec. 31,19X1

Cash

$ 5,000

$ 7,000

Accounts receivable (net)

$ 12,000

$ 18,000

Merchandise inventory

$ 35,000

$ 28,000

Property plant, & equipment

$ 40,000

$ 30,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

$ (17,000)

$(10,000)

Total assets

$ 75,000

$ 73,000

Accounts payable*

$ 25,000

$ 21,000

Income taxes payable

$ 4,000

$ 1,000

Common stock

$ 24,000

$ 24,000

Retained earnings

$ 22,000

$ 27,000

Total liabilities & stock, equity

$ 75,000

$ 73,000

The firm’s accrual-basis income statement revealed the following data:

Sales

$120,000

Cost of goods sold

$80,000

selling and administrative expenses

$25,000

Depreciation expense

$7,000

Income taxes

$3,000

Dividends declared and paid during 19X2

$10,000

ABC purchased $10,000 of equipment for cash on August 14.

(There was no interest expense.)

SPREAD SHEET FOR II

ABC’s Product information

Current Product

Expansion Product (estimate)

Selling Price

$12.00

?

Units produced and expected to be sold

80,000

5,000

Machine Hours

40,000

5,000

Direct Materials

$1.30 per unit

$5.60 per unit

Direct labor dollars needed per product

$2.80 per unit

$4.00 per unit

Variable Factory Overhead

$1.00 per Machine Hour

$1.00 per Machine Hour

Variable Selling Expense

$0.20 per unit

$0.20 per unit

Total Fixed Costs:

Fixed Factory Overhead

$198,000

Fixed Selling expenses

$191,250

assume that equipment costing 125 000 was purchased for cash 261636

On the basis of the following data for Teller Co. for 2006 and the preceding year ended December 31, 2005, prepare a statement of cash flows in excel. Use the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities.

Additional Information

1) Assume that equipment costing $125,000 was purchased for cash and equipment costing $85,000 with accumulated depreciation of $65,000 was sold for $15,000;

2) The stock was issued for cash;

3) The only entries in the retained earnings account were net income of $51,000 and cash dividends declared of $13,000.

Balance Sheets

Year

Year

2006

2005

Cash

$100,000

$ 78,000

Accounts receivable (net)

78,000

85,000

Inventories

101,500

90,000

Equipment

410,000

370,000

Accumulated depreciation

(150,000)

(158,000)

$539,500

$465,000

========

========

Accounts payable (merchandise creditors)

$ 58,500

$ 55,000

Cash dividends payable

5,000

4,000

Common stock, $10 par

200,000

170,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par–common stock

62,000

60,000

Retained earnings

214,000

176,000

$539,500

$465,000

========

========

Attachments:

to evaluate the reporting of the firms financial instruments 261074

Using the same companies and observation period, you are further required to evaluate the reporting (recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure) of the firms financial instruments (i.e. derivatives, bonds, loans, receivables and others; choose 2 types of financial instruments). You will be given additional 5 marks if you can find company which reported financial instruments that were used to be an off-balance sheet items before the issuance of the financial instrument accounting standards.

Document Preview:

ACT 3127 EXEC: ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING II (SEM 1:12/13) (GROUP ASSIGNMENT = 15%) In a group of 5 to 6 members (your group members will be set), each group is required to identify 5 or 6 companies (depending on the number of your group member) such that each company represents different industries from Bursa Malaysia Stock Exchange. Each member is required to analyse the recognition, measurement (initial and subsequent, taking into consideration of respective MFRS 136 requirement), presentation and disclosure of goodwill of the selected companies from financial year ended 2004 to 2011. You are also required to discuss the impact of MFRS 3 (pre and post amendment), MFRS 127 (Latest Amendment) and MFRS 10 issuance on the reporting of their acquisition (including merger if exist) activities. Using the same companies and observation period, you are further required to evaluate the reporting (recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure) of the firms financial instruments (i.e. derivatives, bonds, loans, receivables and others; choose 2 types of financial instruments). You will be given additional 5 marks if you can find company which reported financial instruments that were used to be an off-balance sheet items before the issuance of the financial instrument accounting standards. The group assignment needs to be prepared in a form of report which includes information about the companies’ background and activities. The information above need to be evaluated and discussed based on the requirements of their respective accounting standards including MFRS 13 and also reviews of journals articles on the subjects. You will be given more merit when you provide critical views on the reporting practice of the companies based on your literature research and other relevant readings (eg based on information gathered on perspectives and needs of users of financial report and constraint faced by preparers) rather than simply reporting what the companies…

Attachments:

kipmar company s managers are considering expanding the product line by introducing 261116

Kipmar Company’s managers are considering expanding the product line by introducing a leather briefcase. The new briefcase is expected to sell for $93.00; variable costs would amount to $39.00 per briefcase. If Kipmar introduces the leather briefcase, the company will incur an additional $984,600 per year in advertising costs. Kipmar’s marketing department has estimated that one new leather briefcase would be sold for every four molded briefcases.

(a) If managers decide to introduce the new leather briefcase, how many units of each briefcase would be required to break even in the coming year? Cost of good sold for the molded briefacse is expected to be $16.50 per unit. (For computational purposes round contribution margin per unit to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.75. Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 3,500.)

change to lifo retail dollar value lifo retail davenport depart 261138

Change to LIFO Retail; Dollar-Value LIFO Retail Davenport Department Store converted from the conventional retail method to the LIFO retail method on January 1, 2010, and is now considering converting to the dollar-value LIFO inventory method. During your examination of the financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2011, management requested that you furnish a summary showing certain computations of inventory cost for the past 3 years. Here is the available information.

1. The inventory at January 1, 2009, had a retail value of $56,000 and cost of $29,800 based on the conventional retail method.

2. Transactions during 2009 were as follows.

Cost Retail

Gross purchases $311,000 $554,000

Purchase returns 5,200 10,000

Purchase discounts 6,000

Gross sales (after employee discounts) 551,000

Sales returns 9,000

Employee discounts 3,000

Freight-in 17,600

Net markups 20,000

Net markdowns 12,000

3. The retail value of the December 31, 2010, inventory was $75,600, the cost ratio for 2010 under the LIFO retail method was 61%, and the regional price index was 105% of the January 1, 2010, price level.

4. The retail value of the December 31, 2011, inventory was $62,640, the cost ratio for 2011 under the LIFO retail method was 60%, and the regional price index was 108% of the January 1, 2010, price level.

(a) Prepare a schedule showing the computation of the cost of inventory on hand at December 31, 2009, based on the conventional retail method.

(b) Prepare a schedule showing the re-computation of the inventory to be reported on December 31, 2009, in accordance with procedures necessary to convert from the conventional retail method to the LIFO retail method beginning January 1, 2010. Assume that the retail value of the December 31, 2009, inventory was $60,000.

(c) Without prejudice to your solution to part (b), assume that you computed the December 31, 2009, inventory (retail value $60,000) under the LIFO retail method at a cost of $33,300. Prepare a schedule showing the computations of the cost of the store’s 2010 and 2011 year-end inventories under the dollar-value LIFO method.

(AICPA adapted)

components of the deferred tax asset of biosante pharmaceuticals 261141

Components of the deferred tax asset of Biosante Pharmaceuticals are shown in Exhibit 2.12. The company had no deferred tax liabilities.

Required

a. At the end of 2008, the largest deferred tax asset is for net operating loss carryforwards.(Net operating loss carryforwards [also referred to as tax loss carryforwards] are amounts reported as taxable losses on tax filings. Because the tax authorities generally do not ?opay?? corporations for incurring losses, companies are allowed to ?ocarry forward?? taxable losses to future years to offset taxable income. These future tax benefits give rise to deferred tax assets.) As of the end of 2008, what is the dollar amount of the company’s net operating loss carryforwards? What is the dollar amount of the deferred tax asset for the net operating loss carryforwards? Describe how these two amounts are related.

b. Biosante has gross deferred tax assets of $28,946,363. However, the net deferred tax assets balance is zero. Explain.

c. The valuation allowance for the deferred tax asset increased from $21,818,084 to $28,946,363 between 2007 and 2008. How did this change affect the company’s net income?

compute fifo lifo and average cost some of the information 261143

Compute FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost some of the information found on a detail inventory card for Slatkin Inc. for the first month of operations is as follows.

(a) From these data compute the ending inventory on each of the following bases. Assume that perpetual inventory records are kept in units only. Carry unit costs to the nearest cent and ending inventory to the nearest dollar.

(1) First-in, first-out (FIFO).

(2) Last-in, first-out (LIFO).

(3) Average cost.

(b) If the perpetual inventory record is kept in dollars, and costs are computed at the time of each withdrawal, would the amounts shown as ending inventory in 1, 2, and 3 above be the same? Explain andcompute.

conventional and dollar value lifo retail as of january 1 2010 261149

Conventional and Dollar-Value LIFO Retail As of January 1, 2010, Aristotle Inc. installed the retail method of accounting for its merchandise inventory. To prepare the store’s financial statements at June 30, 2010, you obtain the following data.

(a) Prepare a schedule to compute Aristotle’s June 30, 2010, inventory under the conventional retail method of accounting for inventories.

(b) Without prejudice to your solution to part (a), assume that you computed the June 30, 2010, inventory to be $59,400 at retail and the ratio of cost to retail to be 70%. The general price level has increased from 100 at January 1, 2010, to 108 at June 30, 2010. Prepare a schedule to compute the June 30, 2010, inventory at the June 30 price level under the dollar-value LIFO retail method.

(AICPAadapted)

which of these three models best describes standard setting in the united states com 261198

CA1-11 (Models for Setting GAAP) Presented below are three models for setting GAAP.

1. The purely political approach, where national legislative action decrees GAAP.

2. The private, professional approach, where GAAP is set and enforced by private professional actions only.

3. The public/private mixed approach, where GAAP is basically set by private-sector bodies that behave as though they were public agencies and whose standards to a great extent are enforced through governmental agencies.

Instructions

(a) Which of these three models best describes standard-setting in the United States? Comment on your answer.

(b) Why do companies, financial analysts, labor unions, industry trade associations, and others take such an active interest in standard-setting?

(c) Cite an example of a group other than the FASB that attempts to establish accounting standards. Speculate as to why another group might wish to set its own standards.

ca1 14 accounting pronouncements standard setting bodies have issued a number of aut 261201

CA1-14 (Accounting Pronouncements) Standard-setting bodies have issued a number of authoritative pronouncements. A list is provided on the left, below, with a description of these pronouncements on the right.

Instructions

Match the description to the pronouncements.

1. _____ Staff Positions

2. _____ Interpretations (of the Financial Accounting Standards Board)

3. _____ Statement of Financial Accounting Standards

4. _____ EITF Statements

5. _____ Opinions

6. _____ Statement of Financial Accounting Concepts Concepts for Analysis 27 (a) Offi cial pronouncements of the APB. (b) Sets forth fundamental objectives and concepts that will be used in developing future standards. (c) Primary document of the FASB that establishes GAAP. (d) Provides additional guidance on implementing or applying FASB Standards or Interpretations. (e) Provides guidance on how to account for new and unusual fi nancial transactions that have the potential for creating diversity in fi nancial reporting practices. (f) Represent extensions or modifi cations of existing standards.

explain from where the securities and exchange commission receives its authority 261203

CA1-16 (Securities and Exchange Commission) The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) was created in 1934 and consists of five commissioners and a large professional staff. The SEC professional staff is organized into five divisions and several principal offices. The primary objective of the SEC is to support fair securities markets. The SEC also strives to foster enlightened stockholder participation in corporate decisions of publicly traded companies. The SEC has a significant presence in financial markets, the development of accounting practices, and corporation-shareholder relations, and has the power to exert influence on entities whose actions lie within the scope of its authority.

Instructions

(a) Explain from where the Securities and Exchange Commission receives its authority.

(b) Describe the official role of the Securities and Exchange Commission in the development of financial accounting theory and practices.

(c) Discuss the interrelationship between the Securities and Exchange Commission and the Financial Accounting Standards Board with respect to the development and establishment of financial accounting theory and practices. (CMA adapted)

describe the process by which a topic is selected or identified as appropriate for s 261204

CA1-17 (Rule-Making Process) In 1973, the responsibility for developing and issuing rules on accounting practices was given to the Financial Accounting Foundation and, in particular, to an arm of the foundation called the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). The generally accepted accounting principles established by the FASB are enunciated through a publication series entitled Statements of Financial Accounting Standards. These statements are issued periodically, and over 160 have been issued. The statements have a significant influence on the way in which financial statements are prepared by U.S. corporations.

Instructions

(a) Describe the process by which a topic is selected or identified as appropriate for study by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB).

(b) Once a topic is considered appropriate for consideration by the FASB, a series of steps is followed before a Statement of Financial Accounting Standards is issued. Describe the major steps in the process leading to the issuance of a standard.

(c) Identify at least three other organizations that influence the setting of generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP). (CMA adapted)

what appears to be the ethical issue involved in this case 261205

CA1-18 (Financial Reporting Pressures) Presented below is abbreviated testimony from Troy Normand in the WorldCom case. He was a manager in the corporate reporting department and is one of five individuals who pleaded guilty. He is testifying in hopes of receiving no prison time when he is ultimately sentenced.

Q. Mr. Normand, if you could just describe for the jury how the meeting started and what was said during the meeting? A. I can’t recall exactly who initiated the discussion, but right away Scott Sullivan acknowledged that he was aware we had problems with the entries, David Myers had informed him, and we were considering resigning. He said that he respected our concerns but that we weren’t being asked to do anything that he believed was wrong. He mentioned that he acknowledged that the company had lost focus quite a bit due to the preparations for the Sprint merger, and that he was putting plans in place and projects in place to try to determine where the problems were, why the costs were so high. He did say he believed that the initial statements that we produced, that the line costs in those statements could not have been as high as they were, that he believed something was wrong and there was no way that the costs were that high. I informed him that I didn’t believe the entry we were being asked to do was right, that I was scared, and I didn’t want to put myself in a position of going to jail for him or the company. He responded that he didn’t believe anything was wrong, nobody was going to be going to jail, but that if it later was found to be wrong, that he would be the person going to jail, not me. He asked that I stay, don’t jump off the plane, let him land it softly, that’s basically how he put it. And he mentioned that he had a discussion with Bernie Ebbers, asking Bernie to reduce projections going forward and that Bernie had refused. Q. Mr. Normand, you said that Mr. Sullivan said something about don’t jump out of the plane. What did you understand him to mean when he said that? A. Not to quit. Q. During this meeting, did Mr. Sullivan say anything about whether you would be asked to make entries like this in the future? A. Yes, he made a comment that from that point going forward we wouldn’t be asked to record any entries, high-level late adjustments, that the numbers would be the numbers. Q. What did you understand that to be mean, the numbers would be the numbers? A. That after the preliminary statements were issued, with the exception of any normal transaction, valid transaction, we wouldn’t be asked to be recording any more late entries. Q. I believe you testified that Mr. Sullivan said something about the line cost numbers not being accurate. Did he ask you to conduct any analysis to determine whether the line cost numbers were accurate? A. No, he did not. Q. Did anyone ever ask you to do that? A. No. Q. Did you ever conduct any such analysis? A. No, I didn’t. Q. During this meeting, did Mr. Sullivan ever provide any accounting justification for the entry you were asked to make? A. No, he did not. Q. Did anything else happen during the meeting? A. I don’t recall anything else. Q. How did you feel after this meeting? A. Not much better actually. I left his office not convinced in any way that what we were asked to do was right. However, I did question myself to some degree after talking with him wondering whether I was making something more out of what was really there.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) What appears to be the ethical issue involved in this case?

(b) Is Troy Normand acting improperly or immorally?

(c) What would you do if you were Troy Normand?

(d) Who are the major stakeholders in this case?

what authority for compliance with gaap has existed throughout the history of rulema 261208

Financial Reporting Problem

Beverly Crusher, a new staff accountant, is confused because of the complexities involving accounting standard-setting. Specifically, she is confused by the number of bodies issuing financial reporting standards of one kind or another and the level of authoritative support that can be attached to these reporting standards. Beverly decides that she must review the environment in which accounting standards are set, if she is to increase her understanding of the accounting profession. Beverly recalls that during her accounting education there was a chapter or two regarding the environment of financial accounting and the development of GAAP. However, she remembers that her instructor placed little emphasis on these chapters.USING YOUR JUDGMENT

Instructions

(a) Help Beverly by identifying key organizations involved in accounting rule-making.

(b) Beverly asks for guidance regarding authoritative support. Please assist her by explaining what is meant by authoritative support.

(c) Give Beverly a historical overview of how rule-making has evolved so that she will not feel that she is the only one to be confused.

(d) What authority for compliance with GAAP has existed throughout the history of rulemaking?

dollar value lifo richardson company cans a variety of vegetable 261385

Dollar-Value LIFO Richardson Company cans a variety of vegetable-type soups. Recently, the company decided to value its inventories using dollar-value LIFO pools. The clerk who accounts for inventories does not understand how to value the inventory pools using this new method, so, as a private consultant, you have been asked to teach him how this new method works. He has provided you with the following information about purchases made over a 6-year period. You have already explained to him how this inventory method is maintained, but he would feel better about it if you were to leave him detailed instructions explaining how these calculations are done and why he needs to put all inventories at a base-year value.

(a) Compute the ending inventory for Richardson Company for 2006 through 2011 using dollar-value LIFO.

(b) Using your computation schedules as your illustration, write a step-by-step set of instructions explaining how the calculations are done. Begin your explanation by briefly explaining the theory behind this inventory method, including the purpose of putting all amounts into base-year pricelevels.

fifo and lifo harrisburg company is considering changing its inv 261433

FIFO and LIFO Harrisburg Company is considering changing its inventory valuation method from FIFO to LIFO because of the potential tax savings. However, the management wishes to consider all of the effects on the company, including its reported performance, before making the final decision. The inventory account, currently valued on the FIFO basis, consists of 1,000,000 units at $8 per unit on January 1, 2010. There are 1,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of January 1, 2010, and the cash balance is $400,000. The company has made the following forecasts for the period 2010–2012.

(a) Prepare a schedule that illustrates and compares the following data for Harrisburg Company under the FIFO and the LIFO inventory method for 2010–2012. Assume the company would begin LIFO at the beginning of 2010.

(1) Year-end inventory balances.

(2) Annual net income after taxes.

(3) Earnings per share.

(4) Cash balance.

Assume all sales are collected in the year of sale and all purchases, operating expenses, and taxes are paid during the year incurred.

(b) Using the data above, your answer to (a), and any additional issues you believe need to be considered, prepare a report that recommends whether or not Harrisburg Company should change to the LIFO inventory method. Support your conclusions with appropriate arguments.

(CMAadapted)

fifo and lifo periodic tom brady shop began operations on januar 261437

FIFO and LIFO—Periodic Tom Brady Shop began operations on January 2, 2010. The following stock record card for footballs was taken from the records at the end of the year. A physical inventory on December 31, 2010, reveals that 110 footballs were in stock. The bookkeeper informs you that all the discounts were taken. Assume that Tom Brady Shop uses the invoice price less discount for recording purchases.

(a) Compute the December 31, 2010, inventory using the FIFO method.

(b) Compute the 2010 cost of goods sold using the LIFO method.

(c) What method would you recommend to the owner to minimize income taxes in 2010, using the inventory information for footballs as aguide?

fifo lifo and average cost determination lobianco company s re 261438

FIFO, LIFO, and Average Cost Determination LoBianco Company’s record of transactions for the month of April was as follows.

(a) Assuming that periodic inventory records are kept, compute the inventory at April 30 using

(1) LIFO and

(2) Average cost.

(b) Assuming that perpetual inventory records are kept in both units and dollars, determine the inventory at April 30 using

(1) FIFO and

(2) LIFO.

(c) Compute cost of goods sold assuming periodic inventory procedures and inventory priced at FIFO.

(d) In an inflationary period, which inventory method—FIFO, LIFO, average cost—will show the highest netincome?

fly away luggage shop is a small retail establishment located 261450

Fly Away Luggage Shop is a small retail establishment located in a large shopping mall. This shop has implemented the following procedures regarding inventory items:

a. Whenever Fly Away receives a shipment of new inventory, the items are taken directly to the stockroom. Fly Away’s accountant uses the vendor’s invoice to record the amount of inventory received.

b. Since the shop carries mostly high-quality, designer luggage, all inventory items are tagged with a control device that activates an alarm if a tagged item is removed from the store.

c. Since the display area of the store is limited, only a sample of each piece of luggage is kept on the selling floor. Whenever a customer selects a piece of luggage, the salesclerk gets the appropriate piece from the store’s stockroom. Since all salesclerks need access to the stockroom, it is not locked. The stockroom is adjacent to the break room used by all mall employees. State whether each of these procedures is appropriate or inappropriate. If it is inappropriate, state why.

garcia home improvement company installs replacement siding win 261463

Garcia Home Improvement Company installs replacement siding, windows, and louvered glass doors for single-family homes and condominium complexes in northern New Jersey and southern New York. The company is in the process of preparing its annual financial statements for the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, and Jim Alcide, controller for Garcia, has gathered the following data concerning inventory.

At May 31, 2012, the balance in Garcia’s Raw Materials Inventory account was $408,000, and the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market had a credit balance of $27,500. Alcide summarized the relevant inventory cost and market data at May 31, 2012, in the schedule below. Alcide assigned Patricia Devereaux, an intern from a local college, the task of calculating the amount that should appear on Garcia’s May 31, 2012, financial statements for inventory under the lower-of-costor-market rule as applied to each item in inventory. Devereaux expressed concern over departing from the cost principle



Instructions

(a) (1) Determine the proper balance in the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market at May 31, 2012.

(2) For the fiscal year ended May 31, 2012, determine the amount of the gain or loss that would be recorded due to the change in the Allowance to Reduce Inventory to Market.

(b) Explain the rationale for the use of the lower-of-cost-or-market rule as it applies to inventories.

(CMAadapted)

good morning enterprises produces digital alarm clocks it has a 261466

Good Morning Enterprises produces digital alarm clocks. It has a just-in-time assembly process and uses back-flush costing to record production costs. Overhead is assigned at a rate of $17 per assembly labor hour. There were no beginning inventories in March. During Match, the following operating data were generated:

Cost of direct materials purchased and used………………………………….$53,200

Direct labor cost incurred …………………………………………………….$27,300

Overhead costs assigned …………………………………………………….. ?

Assembly hours worked …………………………………………………….. 3,840 hours

Ending work in process inventory,…………………………………………… $1,050

Ending finished goods inventory…………………………………………….. $,960

Using T accounts, show the flow of costs through the back-flush costing system what is the total cost of goods sold in March?

gross profit method on april 15 2011 fire damaged the 261476

Gross Profit Method On April 15, 2011, fire damaged the office and warehouse of Stanislaw Corporation. The only accounting record saved was the general ledger, from which the trial balance below was prepared. The following data and information have been gathered.

1. The fiscal year of the corporation ends on December 31.

2. An examination of the April bank statement and canceled checks revealed that checks written during the period April 1–15 totaled $13,000: $5,700 paid to accounts payable as of March 31, $3,400 for April merchandise shipments, and $3,900 paid for other expenses. Deposits during the same period amounted to $12,950, which consisted of receipts on account from customers with the exception of a $950 refund from a vendor for merchandise returned in April.

3. Correspondence with suppliers revealed unrecorded obligations at April 15 of $15,600 for April merchandise shipments, including $2,300 for shipments in transit (f.o.b. shipping point) on that date.

4. Customers acknowledged indebtedness of $46,000 at April 15, 2011. It was also estimated that customers owed another $8,000 that will never be acknowledged or recovered. Of the acknowledged indebtedness, $600 will probably be uncollectible.

5. The companies insuring the inventory agreed that the corporation’s fire-loss claim should be based on the assumption that the overall gross profit ratio for the past 2 years was in effect during the current year. The corporation’s audited financial statements disclosed this information:

Year Ended

December 31

2010 2009

Net sales $530,000 $390,000

Net purchases 280,000 235,000

Beginning inventory 50,000 66,000

Ending inventory 75,000 50,000

6. Inventory with a cost of $7,000 was salvaged and sold for $3,500. The balance of the inventory was a total loss. Prepare a schedule computing the amount of inventory fire loss. The supporting schedule of the computation of the gross profit should be in good form.

(AICPAadapted)

complete the table below using vertical analysis then answer the subsequent question 260418

Chapter 3; Question1 (page 106 of your text)
Rubric: Table complete and correct worth 3 points, each question “a” through “g” worth 1 point each
Complete the table below using vertical analysis, then answer the subsequent questions:

Document Preview:

Answer Sheet – Homework Assignment # 4 Question 1 Chapter 7; Question 1 (page 269 of your text)  Rubric:  Each table complete and correct worth 2.5 points each Read question 1 from your text, chapter 7 page 269, then complete the shaded areas of the following table: Rosa and Gabriel’s Mexican Grill (Suburb – Rosa)     Desired Product Cost Percentage: 28%       Product Cost Percentage Method       Item Cost of Product Desired Product Cost Percentage Selling Price Steak Fajitas $4.50 Chicken Fajitas 4.00 Carne Asada 4.25 Cheese Enchiladas 2.00 Beef Enchiladas 2.50 Enchiladas Verde 2.00 Chili Rellenos 2.75 Tacos 0.30 Bean Chalupas 0.25 Tortilla Soup 0.30 Question 1 Continued: Rosa and Gabriel’s Mexican Grill (Downtown – Gabriel)     Desired Product Cost Percentage: 32%       Factor Method       Item Cost of Product Factor Selling Price Steak Fajitas $4.50 Chicken Fajitas 4.00 Carne Asada 4.25 Cheese Enchiladas 2.00 Beef Enchiladas 2.50 Enchiladas Verde 2.00 Chili Rellenos 2.75 Tacos 0.30 Bean Chalupas 0.25 Tortilla Soup 0.30 Question 2 Chapter 7; Question 2 (page 270 of your text)  Rubric:  Table complete and correct worth 5 points David owns a successful BBQ restaurant. The entrée menu has eight items. The following are last week’s sales and cost data for all eight items. Using this data, complete the shaded areas of the table below: Menu Item Number Sold Selling Price Total Sales Item Cost Total Cost Item Contribution Margin Total Contribution Margin Food Cost % Dry Rubbed Ribs 210 $11.95 $4.10 BBQ Ribs 242 9.95 4.25 Salmon Grill 51 14.95 6.45 Brisket 88 8.95 2.85 Sausage Links 103 6.95 1.45 Cowboy Combo 145 9.95 4.20 1/2 Roast Chicken 185 8.95 3.10 Mesquite Chicken 160 6.95 1.75 Total           Weighted Average Question 3 Chapter 6; Question 2 (page 232 of your text)  Rubric:  Tables complete and correct worth 2.5 points each. …

the july 1998 issue of inc magazine includes an article 260429

The July 1998 issue of Inc. magazine includes an article by Jeffrey L. Seglin entitled ?oWould You Lie to Save Your Company??? It recounts the following true situation:

?oA Chief Executive Officer (CEO) of a $20-million company that repairs aircraft engines received notice from a number of its customers that engines that it had recently repaired had failed, and that the company’s parts were to blame. The CEO had not yet determined whether his company’s parts were, in fact, the cause of the problem. The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) had been notified and was investigating the matter.

What complicated the situation was that the company was in the midst of its year-end audit. As part of the audit, the CEO was required to sign a letter saying that he was not aware of any significant outstanding circumstances that could negatively impact the company—in accounting terms, of any contingent liabilities. The auditor was not aware of the customer complaints or the FAA investigation.

The company relied heavily on short-term loans from eight banks. The CEO feared that if these lenders learned of the situation, they would pull their loans. The loss of these loans would force the company into bankruptcy, leaving hundreds of people without jobs. Prior to this problem, the company had a stellar performance record.??

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the CEO’s possible courses of action? What are the potential results of each course of action? (Take into account the two alternative outcomes: the FAA determines the company

(1) Was not at fault, and

(2) Was at fault.)

(c) What would you do, and why?

(d) Suppose the CEO decides to conceal the situation, and that during the next year the company is found to be at fault and is forced into bankruptcy. What losses are incurred by the stakeholders in this situation? Do you think the CEO should suffer legal consequences if he decides to conceal the situation?

a computer manufacturer produces three types of devices mobile phones 260438

A computer manufacturer produces three types of devices: mobile phones, tablets, and computers. For the production of these three devices you have the following information: Phone Tablet Computer Material cost per unit £90 £140 £315 Direct labor hours per unit 2 2.5 4 Budgeted units 1,500,000 900,000 1,200,000 Labor cost per hour £8 Overhead costs per annum Utilities £20,000,000 Rent £15,000,000 Audit and legal £5,000,000 Administrative staff £40,000,000 Total £80,000,000 ABC analysis suggested that overhead costs are distributed to the three products according to the table below: Overheads Phone Tablet Computer Utilities £8,000,000 £5,000,000 £7,000,000 Rent £8,250,000 £2,250,000 £4,500,000 Audit and legal £2,900,000 £1,250,000 £850,000 Administrative staff £23,200,000 £6,000,000 £10,800,000 For each of the three products, the company aims at a different percentage for profit. Under the full absorption costing method and the targeted profit percentage, the prices of the three products should be: Phone Tablet Computer Full costing price £170.69 £233.87 £435.67 1. Calculate the aimed profit percentages for the three products and under the full absorption costing method, with overhead costs absorbed on the basis of direct labour hours. 2. Use the profit percentages that you derived in (1) and calculate the prices of the three products under the ABC system. 3. Recommend a cost system and include any changes that you would suggest to the pricing strategy of the computer company (target length 300 words).

Document Preview:

A computer manufacturer produces three types of devices: mobile phones, tablets, and computers. For the production of these three devices you have the following information:  ?Phone?Tablet?Computer??Material cost per unit ?£90?£140?£315??Direct labor hours per unit ?2?2.5?4??Budgeted units?1,500,000?900,000?1,200,000?? ?????Labor cost per hour?£8????????Overhead costs per annum??Utilities?£20,000,000??Rent?£15,000,000??Audit and legal?£5,000,000??Administrative staff?£40,000,000??Total?£80,000,000??ABC analysis suggested that overhead costs are distributed to the three products according to the table below: Overheads?Phone?Tablet ?Computer??Utilities? £8,000,000 ? £5,000,000 ? £7,000,000 ??Rent? £8,250,000 ? £2,250,000 ? £4,500,000 ??Audit and legal? £2,900,000 ? £1,250,000 ? £850,000 ??Administrative staff? £23,200,000 ? £6,000,000 ? £10,800,000 ??For each of the three products, the company aims at a different percentage for profit. Under the full absorption costing method and the targeted profit percentage, the prices of the three products should be: ?Phone?Tablet?Computer??Full costing price ?£170.69 ?£233.87 ?£435.67 ??Calculate the aimed profit percentages for the three products and under the full absorption costing method, with overhead costs absorbed on the basis of direct labour hours. Use the profit percentages that you derived in (1) and calculate the prices of the three products under the ABC system. Recommend a cost system and include any changes that you would suggest to the pricing strategy of the computer company (target length 300 words).

Attachments:

the may 8 2008 edition of the wall street journal 260442

The May 8, 2008, edition of the Wall Street Journal contains an article by Heather Won Tesoriero titled ?oOil Firms Settle Claims in MTBE Leak Cases.??

Instructions

Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) In addition to paying $423 million in cash, the oil companies agreed to pay cleanup costs that arise in the next 30 years. What accounting issues arise for the oil companies from the promise to pay in the future?

(b) Discuss the accounting criteria that the oil companies must apply toward their promise to pay future costs.

(c) What accounting challenges do the companies face in trying to apply the accounting criteria to the promise to pay in the future? What challenges are faced by investors who are analyzing the oil companies?

(d) Exxon Mobil Corp. chose to not settle. Instead it will go to court to dispute the charges. Discuss the implications of this decision for Exxon Mobil’s accounting versus that of the companies that chose to settle the case.

the oaks national bank has a note receivable of 500 000 260446

The Oaks National Bank has a note receivable of $500,000 from the Haldane Company that it is carrying at face value and is due on December 31, 2013. Interest on the note is payable at 6% each December 31. The Haldane Company paid the interest due on December 31, 2007, but informed the bank that it would probably miss the next three years’ interest payments because of its financial difficulties. After that, it expected to resume its annual interest payments, but it would make the principal payment two years late, with interest paid for the additional years. On January 1, 2010 the bank received new information and now expected the Haldane Company to pay the interest for 2010 through 2015 on December 31 of each year.

Required

1. Compute the value of the impaired loan on December 31, 2007.

2. Prepare the journal entries from 2007 to 2015 for the bank to record the above loan impairment events.

the rosen corporation was formed on december 12 2006 it 260484

The Rosen Corporation was formed on December 12, 2006. It plans to close its books annually each December 31. The corporation is located in Lanmark City and Apple County. The fiscal period of these two governmental units runs from July 1 to June 30. The property tax that they assess on property held on January 1 of each year becomes a lien against the property on July 1. The estimated property taxes for Rosen Corporation for the period July 1, 2007 to June 30, 2008 are $15,300. The tax bill is mailed in October with a requirement that the tax be paid before December 31. The tax bill received on October 30, 2007 for the Rosen Corporation revealed an actual tax of $15,680, and the corporation paid this amount on November 30, 2007. The corporation elects to record monthly property tax adjustments for interim statements required by management.

Required

1. Prepare all property-tax related entries for Rosen for the period July 1, 2007 to June 30, 2008.

2. Show how the preceding information would be reported on the December 31, 2007 balance sheet of Rosen Corporation.

the shank corporation issued 1 500 000 of 10 convertible bonds 260494

The Shank Corporation issued $1,500,000 of 10% convertible bonds for $1,620,000 on March 1, 2006. The bonds are dated March 1, 2006, pay interest semiannually on August 31 and February 28, and the premium is amortized using the straight-line method. The bonds are due on February 28, 2016, and each $1,000 bond is convertible into 25 shares of Shank Corporation $10 par common stock. On March 1, 2008, when the shares were selling for $28 per share, $300,000 of bonds were converted. On September 1, 2010, when the shares were selling for $30 per share, the remainder of the bonds were converted.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries to record each bond conversion using

(a) The book value method, and

(b) The market value method.

2. If the company were required under GAAP to assign a value to the conversion feature, explain how the valuation would be determined (no calculations are required).

3. Compute the company’s debt-to-equity ratio (total liabilities divided by total stockholders’ equity, as mentioned in Chapter 6) under each alternative. Assume the company’s other liabilities are $3 million, and that stockholders’ equity before conversion is $3.5 million.

the smart company sold 500 000 in 8 percent 20 year bonds 260506

The Smart Company sold $500,000 in 8 percent, 20-year bonds on April 1, 2011, at 105. The semiannual interest payment dates are March 31 and September 30. The market interest rate is 7.5 percent. The company’s fiscal year ends September 30. Use the effective interest method to calculate the amortization.

1. With regard to the bond issue on April 1, 2011:

a. How much cash is received?

b. How much is Bonds Payable?

c. What is the difference between a and b called how much is it?

2. With regard to the bond interest payment on September 30, 2011:

a. How much cash is paid in interest?

b. How much is the amortization?

c. How much is interest expense?

3. With regard to the end bond interest payment on March 31, 2012:

a. How much cash is paid in interest?

b. How much is the amortization?

c. How much is interest expense?

the wilkerson corporation issued 1 million of 13 5 bonds for 260522

The Wilkerson Corporation issued $1 million of 13.5% bonds for $985,071.68. The bonds are dated and issued October 1, 2007, are due September 30, 2011, and pay interest semiannually on March 31 and September 30. Assume an effective yield rate of 14%.

Required

1. Prepare a bond interest expense and discount amortization schedule using the straight-line method.

2. Prepare a bond interest expense and discount amortization schedule using the effective interest method.

3. Prepare adjusting entries for the end of the fiscal year December 31, 2007 using:

a. The straight-line method of amortization

b. The effective interest method of amortization

4. If income before interest and income taxes of 30% in 2008 is $500,000, compute net income under each alternative.

5. Assume the company retired the bonds on June 30, 2008 at 98 plus accrued interest. Prepare the journal entries to record the bond retirement using:

a. The straight-line method of amortization

b. The effective interest method of amortization

6. Compute the company’s times interest earned (pretax operating income divided by interest expense) under each alternative.

tradewell rentals purchased a piece of equipment with an fmv 260575

Tradewell Rentals purchased a piece of equipment with an FMV of $11,348 in exchange for a five-year, non-interest-bearing note with a face value of $20,000.

(a) Compute the effective interest rate on the note payable.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase.

(c) How much interest expenses should Tradewell recognize on the note payable during the first year?

(d) What is the balance sheet value of the note at the end of the first year?

(e) Will the interest expense recognized by Tradewell in the second be greater than, equal to, or less than the interest expenses recognized in the first year? Why?

(f) Will the interest expenses recognized in the third year be greater than, equal to, or less than the interest expenses recognized in the second year?

use the same information as in e14 21 above except that 260624

(Term Modification with Gain—Debtor’s Entries) Use the same information as in E14-21 above except that American Bank reduced the principal to $1,900,000 rather than $2,400,000. On January 1, 2014, Barkley pays $1,900,000 in cash to American Bank for the principal.

(a) Can Barkley Company record a gain under this term modification? If yes, compute the gain for

Barkley Company.

(b) Prepare the journal entries to record the gain on Barkley’s books.

(c) What interest rate should Barkley use to compute its interest expense in future periods? Will your answer be the same as in E14-21 above? Why or why not?

(d) Prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring.

(e) Prepare the interest payment entries for Barkley Company on December 31, of 2011, 2012, and 2013.

(f) What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2014?

using accounts receivables to achieve off balance sheet financin 260626

Using accounts receivables to achieve off-balance-sheet financing. Cypress Appliance store has $100,000 of account receivable on its books on January 2, 2008. These receivables are due on December 31, 2008. The firm wants to use these accounts receivables to obtain financing.

a. Prepare journal entries during 2008 for the transactions in parts (i) and (ii) below:

(i) The firm borrows $92,593 from its bank, using the accounts receivable as collateral. The loan is repayable on December 31, 2008, with interest at 8%.

(ii) The firm sells the accounts record able to the bank for $92,593. It collects amounts due from customers on these accounts and remits the cash to the bank.

b. Compare and contrast the income statement and balance sheet effects of these two transactions.

c. How should Cypres Appliance Store structure this transaction to ensure that it qualifies as a sale instead of a collateralized loan?

venezuela co is building a new hockey arena at a cost 260664

(Issuance and Retirement of Bonds) Venezuela Co. is building a new hockey arena at a cost of $2,500,000. It received a down payment of $500,000 from local businesses to support the project, and now needs to borrow $2,000,000 to complete the project. It therefore decides to issue $2,000,000 of 10.5%, 10-year bonds. These bonds were issued on January 1, 2009, and pay interest annually on each January

1. The bonds yield 10%. Venezuela paid $50,000 in bond issue costs related to the bond sale.

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds and the related bond issue costs incurred on January 1, 2009.

(b) Prepare a bond amortization schedule up to and including January 1, 2013, using the effective interest method.

(c) Assume that on July 1, 2012, Venezuela Co. retires half of the bonds at a cost of $1,065,000 plus accrued interest. Prepare the journal entry to record this retirement.

3 using the following adjusted trial balance 1 prepare an income 260862

(3) Using the following Adjusted Trial Balance, (1) prepare an Income Statement, (2)

Statement of Retained Earnings (note that Retained Earnings has a beginning balance

of $78,600 as shown in the unadjusted Trial Balance), and (3) Balance Sheet.

(4) Prepare the three closing entries.

Watson Technical Institute

Adjusted Trial Balance

December 31, 2011

Debit Credit

Cash ……………………………………………………………….. $ 26,000

Accounts receivable………………………………………… 7,500

Teaching supplies …………………………………………… 2,600

Prepaid insurance……………………………………………. 12,000

Prepaid rent…………………………………………………….. 0

Equipment ………………………………………………………. 100,000

Accounts payable …………………………………………………………………………… 36,000

Salaries payable……………………………………………………………………………….. 400

Unearned training fees…………………………………….. ……………………………….6,600

Common stock ………………………………………………………………………………. 10,000

Retained earnings…………………………………………………………………………… 78,600

Dividends………………………………………………………… 40,000

Tuition fees earned………………………………………….. ……………………………..109,500

Training fees earned………………………………………… ……………………………..42,400

Salaries expense …………………………………………….. 48,400

Insurance expense…………………………………………… 3,000

Rent expense…………………………………………………… 24,000

Teaching supplies expense ……………………………… 7,400

Advertising expense………………………………………… 7,000

Utilities expense………………………………………………. 5,600 _______

Totals ……………………………………………………………… $283,500……………… $283,500

Attachments:

willy randolph corporation sells portable computers under a 2 ye 260927

Willy Randolph Corporation sells portable computers under a 2-year warranty contract that requires the corporation to replace defective parts and to provide the necessary repair labor. During 2008 the corporation sells for cash 300 computers at a unit price of $3,500. On the basis of past experience, the 2-year warranty costs are estimated to be $155 for parts and $185 for labor per unit. (For simplicity, assume that all sales occurred on December 31, 2008.) The warranty is not sold separately from the computer.

Instructions

(a) Record any necessary journal entries in 2008, applying the cash basis method.

(b) Record any necessary journal entries in 2008, applying the expense warranty accrual method.

(c) What liability relative to these transactions would appear on the December 31, 2008, balance sheet, and how would it be classified if the cash basis method is applied?

(d) What liability relative to these transactions would appear on the December 31, 2008, balance sheet, and how would it be classified if the expense warranty accrual method is applied?

In 2009 the actual warranty costs to Willy Randolph Corporation were $21,400 for parts and $24,900 for labor.

(e) Record any necessary journal entries in 2009, applying the cash basis method.

(f) Record any necessary journal entries in 2009, applying the expense warranty accrual method.

wright company s balance sheet at december 31 2011 is presente 260940

Wright Company’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011, is presented below.

?



During January 2012, the following transactions occurred. (Wright Company uses the perpetual inventory system.)

1. Wright paid $250 interest on the note payable on January 1, 2012. The note is due December 31, 2013.

2. Wright purchased $241,100 of inventory on account.

3. Wright sold for $480,000 cash, inventory which cost $265,000. Wright also collected $28,800 in sales taxes.

4. Wright paid $230,000 in accounts payable.

5. Wright paid $17,000 in sales taxes to the state.

6. Paid other operating expenses of $20,000.

7. On January 31, 2012, the payroll for the month consists of salaries and wages of $60,000. All salaries and wages are subject to 8% FICA taxes. A total of $8,900 federal income taxes are withheld. The salaries and wages are paid on February 1.

Adjustment data:

8. Interest expense of $250 has been incurred on the notes payable.

9. The insurance for the year 2012 was prepaid on December 31, 2011.

10. The equipment was acquired on December 31, 2011, and will be depreciated on a straight-line basis over 5 years with a $2,000 salvage value.

11. Employer’s payroll taxes include 8% FICA taxes, a 5.4% state unemployment tax, and an 0.8% federal unemployment tax.

Instructions

(You may need to set up T accounts to determine ending balances.)

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above and the adjusting entries.

(b) Prepare an adjusted trial balance at January 31, 2012.

(c) Prepare an income statement, an owner’s equity statement for the month ending January 31, 2012, and a classified balance sheet as of January 31,2012.

yellowcard company manufactures accessories for ipods it had th 260949

YellowCard Company manufactures accessories for iPods. It had the following selected transactions during 2012.

1. YellowCard provides a 2-year warranty on its docking stations, which it began selling in 2012. During 2012, YellowCard spent $6,000 servicing warranty claims. At year-end, Yellow- Card estimates that an additional $45,000 will be spent in the future to service warranties related to 2012 sales.

2. YellowCard has a $200,000 loan outstanding from First Trust Corp. The loan is set to mature on February 28, 2013. For several years, First Trust has agreed to extend the loan, as long as YellowCard makes all its quarterly interest payments (interest is due on the last days of each February, May, August, and November) and maintains an acid-test ratio (also called ?oquick ratio??) of at least 1.25. First Trust has provided YellowCard a ?ocommitment letter?? indicating that First Trust will extend the loan another 12 months, providing YellowCard makes the interest payment due on March 31.

3. During 2011, YellowCard constructed a small manufacturing facility specifically to manufacture one particular accessory. YellowCard paid the construction contractor $5,000,000 cash (which was the total contract price) and placed the facility into service on January 1, 2012. Because of technological change, YellowCard anticipates that the manufacturing facility will be useful for no more than 10 years. The local government where the facility is located required that, at the end of the 10-year period, YellowCard remediate the facility so that it can be used as a community center. YellowCard estimates the cost of remediation to be $500,000.

Accounting

Prepare all 2012 journal entries relating to (a) YellowCard’s warranties, (b) YellowCard’s loan from First Trust Corp., and (c) the new manufacturing facility YellowCard opened on January 1, 2012.

Analysis

Describe how the transactions above affect ratios that might be used to assess YellowCard’s liquidity. How important is the commitment letter that YellowCard has from First Trust Corp. to these ratios?

Principles

YellowCard is contemplating offering an extended warranty. If customers pay an additional $50 at the time of product purchase, YellowCard would extend the warranty an additional two years. Would the extended warranty meet the definition of a liability under current generally accepted accounting principles? Briefly explain?

you are the independent auditor engaged to audit christine agazz 260972

You are the independent auditor engaged to audit Christine Agazzi Corporation’s December 31, 2008, financial statements. Christine Agazzi manufactures household appliances. During the course of your audit, you discovered the following contingent liabilities.

1. Christine Agazzi began production on a new dishwasher in June 2008 and, by December 31, 2008, sold 100,000 to various retailers for $500 each. Each dishwasher is under a one-year warranty. The company estimates that its warranty expense per dishwasher will amount to $25. At year-end, the company had already paid out $1,000,000 in warranty expenses. Christine Agazzi’s income statement shows warranty expenses of $1,000,000 for 2008. Agazzi accounts for warranty costs on the accrual basis.

2. In response to your attorney’s letter, Robert Sklodowski, Esq., has informed you that Agazzi has been cited for dumping toxic waste into the Kishwaukee River. Clean-up costs and fines amount to $3,330,000.

Although the case is still being contested, Sklodowski is certain that Agazzi will most probably have to pay the fine and clean-up costs. No disclosure of this situation was found in the financial statements.

3. Christine Agazzi is the defendant in a patent infringement lawsuit by Heidi Goldman over Agazzi’s use of a hydraulic compressor in several of its products. Sklodowski claims that, if the suit goes against Agazzi, the loss may be as much as $5,000,000; however, Sklodowski believes the loss of this suit to be only reasonably possible. Again, no mention of this suit occurs in the financial statements.

As presented, these contingencies are not reported in accordance with GAAP which may create problems in issuing a clean audit report. You feel the need to note these problems in the work papers.

Instructions

Heading each page with the name of the company, balance sheet date, and a brief description of the problem, write a brief narrative for each of the above issues in the form of a memorandum to be incorporated in the audit work papers. Explain what led to the discovery of each problem and what the problem really is. In addition, indicate the proper accounting (along with any appropriate journal entries) to record these contingencies in accordance with GAAP.

alfa romeo incurs costs of 30 000 in manufacturing a red 261045

Alfa Romeo incurs costs of $30,000 in manufacturing a red convertible automobile during 2009. Assume that it incurs all of these costs in cash. Alfa Romeo sells this automobile to you on January 1, 2010, for $45,000. You pay $5,000 immediately and agree to pay $14,414 on December 31, 2010, 2011, and 2012. Based on the interest rate appropriate for this note of 4 percent on January 1, 2012, the present value of the note is $40,000. The interest rate appropriate for this note is 5 percent on December 31, 2010, resulting in a present value of the remaining cash flows of $26,802. The interest rate appropriate for this note is 8 percent on December 31, 2011, resulting in a present value of the remaining cash flows of $13,346.

Required

Ignore income taxes.

a. Assume that Alfa Romeo accounts for this note throughout the three years using its initial present value and the historical interest rate (Approach 1). Using the analytical framework discussed in the chapter, indicate the effects of the following events on the balance sheet and income statement.

(1) Manufacture of the automobile during 2009.

(2) Sale of the automobile on January 1, 2010.

(3) Cash received and interest revenue recognized on December 31, 2010.

(4) Cash received and interest revenue recognized on December 31, 2011.

(5) Cash received and interest revenue recognized on December 31, 2012.

b. Assume that Alfa Romeo values this note receivable at fair value each year with fair value changes recognized in net income (Approach 3). Changes in market interest rates affect the valuation of the note on the balance sheet immediately and the computation of interest revenue for the next year.

(1) Manufacture of the automobile during 2009.

(2) Sale of the automobile on January 1, 2010.

(3) Cash received and interest revenue recognized on December 31, 2010.

(4) Note receivable revalued and an unrealized holding gain or loss recognized on December 31, 2010.

(5) Cash received and interest revenue recognized on December 31, 2011.

(6) Note receivable revalued and an unrealized holding gain or loss recognized on December 31, 2011.

(7) Cash received and interest revenue recognized on December 31, 2012.

c. Why is retained earnings on December 31, 2012, equal to $18,242 in both cases despite having shown a different pattern of income over time?

d. Discuss the trade-off in financial reporting when moving from Approach 1 in Part a to Approach 3 in Part b.

bill and steve recently formed a company that manufactures and sells high end kitche 261061

Exercise 1-24

Business Activities

Bill and Steve recently formed a company that manufactures and sells high-end kitchen appliances. The following is a list of activities that occurred during the year.

Classify each of the business activities listed as either an operating activity (O), an investing activity (I), or afinancingactivity (F).

a. Bill and Steve each contributed cash in exchange for common stock in the company.

b. Land and a building to be used as a factory to make the appliances were purchased for cash.

c. Machines used to make the appliances were purchased for cash.

d. Various materials used in the production of the appliances were purchased for cash.

e. Three employees werepaid cashto operate the machines and make the appliances.

f. Running low on money, the company borrowed money from a local bank.

g. The money from thebank loanwas used to buy advertising on local radio and television stations.

h. The company sold the appliances to local homeowners for cash.

i. Due to extremely high popularity of its products, Bill and Steve built another factory building on its land for cash.

j. The company paid a cash dividend to Bill and Steve.

Exercise 1-25
Accounting Concepts
A list of accounting concepts and related definitions is presented below.
Match each of the concepts with its corresponding definition.
Revenue Owner’s claim on the resources of a company
Expense The difference between revenues and expenses
Net income (loss) Increase in assets from the sale of goods or services
Dividend Economic resources of a company
Asset Cost of assets consumed in the operation of a business
Liability Creditors’ claims on the resources of a company
Stockholders’ equity Distribution of earnings to stockholders
  • Check My Work(3 remaining)
Exercise 1-26 (Algorithmic)
The Fundamental Accounting Equation
Financial information for three independent cases is given below.
Compute the missing numbers in each case.

Assets Liabilities Equity
1. $112,200 $ $51,400
2. 277,000 162,500 $
3. $ 15,000 43,200

Exercise 1-28 (Algorithmic)

Identifying Current Assets and Liabilities

Dunn Sporting Goods sells athletic clothing and footwear to retail customers. Dunn’s accountant indicates that the firm’s operating cycle averages six months. At December 31, 2011, Dunn has the following assets and liabilities:

  1. Prepaidrent in the amount of $8,500. Dunn’s rent is $500 per month.
  2. A $10,400 account payable due in 45 days.
  3. Inventory in the amount of $47,290. Dunn expects to sell $38,000 of the inventory within three months. The remainder will be placed in storage until September 2012. The items placed in storage should be sold by November 2012.
  4. Aninvestmentin marketable securities in the amount of $1,900. Dunn expects to sell $700 of the marketable securities in six months. The remainder are not expected to be sold until 2014.
  5. Cash in the amount of $1,020.
  6. An equipmentloanin the amount of $60,000 due in March 2016. Interest of $4,500 is due in March 2012 ($3,750 of the interest relates to 2011, with the remainder relating to the ?rst three months of 2012).
  7. An account receivable from a local university in the amount of $2,850. The university has promised to pay the full amount in three months.
  8. Store equipment at a cost of $9,200. Accumulated depreciation has been recorded on the store equipment in the amount of $1,250.

Hide

1. Prepare the current asset and current liability portions of Dunn’s December 31, 2011, balance sheet.

Dunn Sporting Goods
Partial Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011
Current assets:
$
Total current assets
$
Current liabilities:
$
Total current liabilities
$

2. Compute Dunn’s working capital and current ratio at December 31, 2011. Round current ratio answer to two decimal places.

Working Capital $
Current Ratio

3. What do these ratios tell us about Dunn’s liquidity?

The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

  • Check My Work(3 remaining)

Exercise 1-31 (Algorithmic)

Stockholders’ Equity

On January 1, 2011, Mulcahy Manufacturing Inc., a newly formed corporation, issued 1,000 shares of common stock in exchange for $135,000 cash. No other shares were issued during 2011, and no shares were repurchased by the corporation. On November 1, 2011, the corporation’s major stockholder sold 300 shares to another stockholder for $43,800. The corporation reported net income of $28,400 for 2011.

Hide

Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of Mulcahy’s balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

Mulcahy Manufacturing Inc.
Partial Balance Sheet
December 31, 2011
Stockholders’ equity:
$
Total stockholders’ equity
$

Attachments:

telemix company is engaged in the retail sale of high definition 260178

Telemix Company is engaged in the retail sale of high-definition televisions (HDTVs). Each HDTV has a 24-month warranty on parts. If a repair under warranty is required, a charge for the labor is made. Management has found that 20 percent of the HDTVs sold require some work before the warranty expires. Furthermore, the average cost of replacement parts has been $60 per repair. At the beginning of January, the account for the estimated liability for product warranties had a credit balance of $14,300. During January, 146 HDTV’s were returned under the warranty. The cost of the parts used in repairing the HDTVs was $8,760, and $ 9,442 was collected as service revenue for the labor involved. During January, the month before the Super Bowl, Telemix Company sold 450 new HDTVs.

Required

1. Prepare entries in journal form to record each of the following:

(a) The warranty work completed during the month, including related revenue:

(b) The estimate liability for product warranties for HDTVs sold during the month.

2. Compute the balance of the Estimated Product Warranty Liability account at the end of the month.

3. If the company’s product warranty liability is overestimated, what are the effect on current and future years’ income?

the 10th national bank has a 200 000 12 note receivable 260185

The 10th National Bank has a $200,000, 12% note receivable from the Priday Company that is due on December 31, 2010. On December 31, 2007 the company misses the interest payment due on that date. The bank expects that the company will also miss the next payment, but will pay the principal on the maturity date. On December 31, 2008 the company misses the interest payment due on that date. On December 31, 2009 the company pays half the interest payment due on that date and is not expected to pay the other half. In early January 2010 the bank and the company agree to a loan restructuring because of the financial condition of the company. The bank forgives the unpaid interest, extends the loan to December 31, 2012, and reduces the interest rate to 6%. The market rate for the loan is estimated to be 10% at this time.

Required

1. Compute the value of the impaired loan on December 31, 2007.

2. Prepare the journal entries from 2007 to 2012 for the bank to record the above events.

the annual examination of tidal company s financial statements b 260196

The annual examination of Tidal Company’s financial statements by its external public accounting firm (auditors) is nearing completion. The following conversation took place between the controller of Tidal Company (Jose) and the audit manager from the public accounting firm (Cara).

Cara: You know, Jose, we are about to wrap up our audit for this fiscal year. Yet, there is one item still to be resolved.

Jose: What’s that?

Cara: Well, as you know, at the beginning of the year, Tidal began a defined benefit pension plan. This plan promises your employees an annual payment when they retire, using a formula based on their salaries at retirement and their years of service. I believe that a pension expense should be recognized this year, equal to the amount of pension earned by your employees.

Jose: Wait a minute. I think you have it all wrong. The company doesn’t have a pension expense until it actually pays the pension in cash when the employee retires. After all, some of these employees may not reach retirement, and if they don’t, the company doesn’t owe them anything.

Cara: You’re not really seeing this the right way. The pension is earned by your employees during their working years. You actually make the payment much later—when they retire. It’s like one long accrual—much like incurring wages in one period and paying them in the next. Thus, I think that you should recognize the expense in the period the pension is earned by the employees.

Jose: Let me see if I’ve got this straight. I should recognize an expense this period for something that may or may not be paid to the employees in 20 or 30 years, when they finally retire. How am I supposed to determine what the expense is for the current year? The amount of the final retirement depends on many uncertainties: salary levels, employee longevity, mortality rates, and interest earned on investments to fund the pension. I don’t think that an amount can be determined, even if I accepted your arguments.

Evaluate Cara’s position. Is she right or is Jose correct?

homework 260208

Donegan’s Lawn Care Service began operations in July 2011. The company uses the following general ledger accounts:

Cash Capital Stock
Accounts Receivable Retained Earnings
Office Supplies Mowing Revenue
Mowing Equipment Salaries Expense
Accounts Payable Fuel Expense
Notes Payable

The company engaged in the following transactions during its first month of operations:

July 18 Issued 500 shares of capital stock to Patrick Donegan for $1,500.
July 22 Purchased office supplies on account for $100.
July 23

Purchased mowing equipment for $2,000, paying $400 cash and issuing a 60-day note payable for the remaining balance.

July 24 Paid $25 cash for gasoline. All of this fuel will be used in July.
July 25 Billed Lost Creek Cemetery $150 for mowing services. The entire amount is due July 30.
July 26 Billed Golf View Condominiums $200 for mowing services. The entire amount is due August 1.
July 30 Collected $150 from Lost Creek Cemetery for mowing services provided on July 25.
July 31 Paid $80 salary to employee Teddy Grimm for work performed in July.

a.

Record each of the above transactions in general journal form. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Date General Journal Debit Credit
July 18 (Click to select)Mowing equipmentCapital stockFuel expenseOffice suppliesMowing revenueNotes payableAccounts payableCash
(Click to select)Fuel expenseCashNotes payableOffice suppliesMowing equipmentCapital stockMowing revenueAccounts payable
22 (Click to select)Notes payableMowing revenueOffice suppliesMowing equipmentFuel expenseCapital stockAccounts payableCash
(Click to select)Capital stockFuel expenseNotes payableCashOffice suppliesAccounts payableMowing equipmentMowing revenue
23 (Click to select)Notes payableOffice suppliesMowing revenueCashAccounts payableFuel expenseMowing equipmentCapital stock
(Click to select)Notes payableCapital stockMowing equipmentFuel expenseAccounts receivableOffice suppliesCashAccounts payable
(Click to select)Office suppliesFuel expenseCapital stockMowing equipmentAccounts payableNotes payableCashAccounts receivable
24 (Click to select)Fuel expenseCapital stockMowing revenueAccounts payableOffice suppliesMowing equipmentNotes payableCash
(Click to select)Office suppliesCashFuel expenseMowing revenueAccounts payableCapital stockMowing equipmentNotes payable
25 (Click to select)Office suppliesAccounts receivableFuel expenseNotes payableMowing equipmentCapital stockMowing revenueCash
(Click to select)Accounts payableOffice suppliesFuel expenseCapital stockMowing revenueNotes payableCashMowing equipment
26 (Click to select)Mowing revenueOffice suppliesMowing equipmentFuel expenseNotes payableCapital stockAccounts receivableCash
(Click to select)Office suppliesMowing revenueCapital stockFuel expenseAccounts payableCashMowing equipmentNotes payable
30 (Click to select)Mowing equipmentAccounts payableOffice suppliesCapital stockMowing revenueNotes payableFuel expenseCash
(Click to select)Mowing equipmentOffice suppliesNotes payableFuel expenseCashMowing revenueAccounts receivableCapital stock
31 (Click to select)Salaries expenseCashNotes payableCapital stockAccounts payableFuel expenseOffice suppliesMowing revenue
(Click to select)Capital stockMowing equipmentOffice suppliesNotes payableCashFuel expenseMowing revenueAccounts payable

b.

Post each entry to the appropriate ledger accounts. (Record the transactions in the given order.Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cash


(Click to select)July 31July 22July 26July 23July 18 (Click to select)July 25July 28July 24July 26July 23
(Click to select)July 30July 23July 20July 18July 26 (Click to select)July 23July 30July 26July 18July 24
(Click to select)July 31July 18July 24July 26July 25


(Click to select)July 25July 24July 18July 31July 22 bal.


Accounts Receivable


(Click to select)July 26July 23July 30July 25July 18 (Click to select)July 23July 25July 30July 18July 26
(Click to select)July 26July 30July 18July 23July 25


(Click to select)July 20July 31July 23July 25July 26 bal.


Office Supplies


(Click to select)July 26July 23July 30July 22July 18


(Click to select)July 25July 31July 23July 26July 20 bal.


Mowing Equipment


(Click to select)July 23July 22July 26July 30July 18


(Click to select)July 31July 23July 18July 22July 26 bal.


Accounts Payable


(Click to select)July 18July 23July 22July 31July 26


(Click to select)July 26July 23July 18July 31July 22 bal.


Notes Payable


(Click to select)July 26July 23July 31July 22July 18


(Click to select)July 18July 23July 22July 26July 31 bal.


Capital Stock


(Click to select)July 23July 31July 18July 22July 26


(Click to select)July 26July 31July 22July 18July 23 bal.


Retained Earnings




(Click to select)July 18July 23July 22July 31July 26 bal.


Mowing Revenue


(Click to select)July 23July 31July 25July 18July 26
(Click to select)July 26July 25July 23July 18July 31


(Click to select)July 30July 28July 31July 25July 1 bal.


Salaries Expense


(Click to select)July 31July 24July 18July 23July 26


(Click to select)July 26July 23July 31July 25July 18 bal.


Fuel Expense


(Click to select)July 24July 18July 26July 31July 23


(Click to select)July 23July 18July 25July 31July 26 bal.



c.

Prepare a trial balance dated July 31, 2011. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

DONEGAN’S LAWN CARE SERVICE
Trial Balance
July 31, 2011
(Click to select)Mowing equipmentCapital stockAccounts payableCashNotes payable $
(Click to select)Accounts receivableCapital stockNotes payableRetained earningsMowing equipment
(Click to select)Mowing equipmentAccounts payableOffice suppliesCapital stockNotes payable
(Click to select)Office suppliesAccounts payableCapital stockMowing equipmentNotes payable
(Click to select)Office suppliesAccounts receivableCashAccounts payableSalaries expense $
(Click to select)Accounts receivableOffice suppliesNotes payableCashSalaries expense
(Click to select)Office suppliesCapital stockAccounts receivableSalaries expenseCash
(Click to select)Accounts receivableSalaries expenseCashRetained earningsOffice supplies
(Click to select)Mowing revenueFuel expenseAccounts receivableSalaries expenseCash
(Click to select)Fuel expenseAccounts payableSalaries expenseMowing revenueRetained earnings
(Click to select)Fuel expenseRetained earningsSalaries expenseMowing revenueAccounts payable


$ $

the batson corporation issued 800 000 of 12 face value bonds 260224

The Batson Corporation issued $800,000 of 12% face value bonds for $851,705.70. The bonds were dated and issued on April 1, 2007, are due March 31, 2011, and pay interest semiannually on September 30 and March 31. The company sold the bonds to yield 10%.

Required

1. Prepare a bond interest expense and premium amortization schedule using the straight-line method.

2. Prepare a bond interest expense and premium amortization schedule using the effective interest method.

3. Prepare any adjusting entries for the end of the fiscal year, December 31, 2007, using:

a. The straight-line method of amortization

b. The effective interest method of amortization

4. Assume the company retires the bonds on June 30, 2008, at 103 plus accrued interest. Prepare the journal entries to record the bond retirement using:

a. The straight-line method of amortization

b. The effective interest method of amortization

the baxter corporation issued 400 000 of 11 bonds for 385 279 260227

The Baxter Corporation issued $400,000 of 11% bonds for $385,279.91 on January 1, 2006. The bonds pay interest semiannually on June 30 and December 31, were issued to yield 12%, and are due on December 31, 2010. Interest is amortized using the effective interest method, and the bonds are callable at 105. In 2008 Baxter wishes to take advantage of more favorable market interest rate conditions and issues $450,000 of 11%, 10-year bonds at 102 on June 1. Interest on these bonds is payable each May 31 and November 30. Sufficient proceeds from this issue are used to recall the original issue on July 1, 2008.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries to record

(a) The original issue,

(b) The new issue, and

(c) The recall of the old issue.

2. If the company were required to reflect the current yield each year, explain how it would account for the bonds. For simplicity, assume that the yield changes from 12% to 11% on January 1, 2008. No calculations are required.

the consolidated statement of earnings of anonymous corporation 260247

The consolidated statement of earnings of Anonymous Corporation for the year ended

December 31, 2009, is as follows:

Net sales …………………………………………………… $1,550,010,000

Other income, net ………………………………………….. 10,898,000

1,560,908,000

Costs and expenses:

Cost of goods sold …………………………………………. 1,237,403,000

Depreciation and amortization ……………………………… 32,229,000

Selling, general, and administrative ………………………… 178,850,000

Interest ………………………………………………………37,646,000

1,486,128,000

Earnings from continuing operations before income

taxes and equity earnings …………………………………….. 74,780,000

Income taxes ………………………………………………….. 37,394,000

Earnings from continuing operations before equity earnings …37,386,000

Equity in net earnings of unconsolidated subsidiaries

and affiliated companies ………………………………………27,749,000

Earnings from continuing operations ………………………….65,135,000

Earnings (losses) from discontinued operations,

net of applicable income taxes ………………………………… 6,392,000

Net earnings …………………………………………………… $ 71,527,000

Required

a. Compute the times interest earned for 2009.

b. Compute the times interest earned for 2009, including the equity income in the coverage.

c. What is the impact of including equity earnings from the coverage? Why should equity income be excluded from the times interest earned coverage?

lease 260271

Kevin Pte Ltd signs a 5-year non-cancellable lease for a piece of equipment with SamuelCompany on 1 Jan 2012. Kevin’s financial year ends on 31 Dec and depreciates fixed assets on astraight-line basis.Under the lease agreement, Kevin has to pay annual instalments of $80,000 in arrears on 31 Deceach year. The lease has no renewal option and the equipment will be returned to SamuelCompany on 1 Jan 2017. Other information relating to the equipment are:i) The equipment has an economic useful life of 6 years.ii) The fair value of the equipment on 1 Jan 2012 was $303,263.iii) The implicit interest rate of the lease is $10%.Required:a) Explain why Kevin Pte Ltd should treat this lease as a financial lease.(15.5 marks)b) Prepare a lease amortization schedule for the entire lease period for the firm. (Round upyour figures to whole numbers). (5 marks) c) Prepare appropriate journal entries for years ending 31 Dec 2012 and 31 Dec 2013. (15.5 marks)d) For years ending 31 Dec 2012 and 31 Dec 2012, prepare extracts of:- the statements of comprehensive income- the statements of financial position (9 marks)All workings must be shown. ( Total : 45 marks)

the following amounts are shown on plymouth company s adjusted t 260272

The following amounts are shown on Plymouth Company’s adjusted trial balance for the year 2012:

Accounts Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $ 36,000

Property Taxes Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6,300

Short-Term Notes Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44,000

Mortgage Payable (due within 1 year) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,000

Mortgage Payable (due after 1 year). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300,000

Accrued Interest on Mortgage Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,000

Lease Liability (current portion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58,000

Lease Liability (long term) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,000

Rent Payable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70,000

Income Taxes Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,000

Federal and State Unemployment Taxes Payable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,000

Required:

Prepare the liabilities section of Plymouth Company’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012.

the following article appeared in the wall street 260284

The following article appeared in the Wall Street Journal.

Bond Markets

Giant Commonwealth Edison Issue Hits Resale Market With $70 Million Left Over New York—Commonwealth Edison Co.’s slow-selling new 9?1% bonds were tossed onto the resale market at a reduced price with about $70 million still available from the $200 million offered Thursday, dealers said.

The Chicago utility’s bonds, rated double-A by Moody’s and double-A-minus by

Standard & Poor’s, originally had been priced at 99.803, to yield 9.3% in 5 years. They were marked down yesterday the equivalent of about $5.50 for each $1,000 face amount, to about 99.25, where their yield jumped to 9.45%.

Instructions

(a) How will the development above affect the accounting for Commonwealth Edison’s bond issue?

(b) Provide several possible explanations for the markdown and the slow sale of Commonwealth Edison’s bonds.

the following information is taken from the 2012 annual report 260306

The following information is taken from the 2012 annual report of Bugant, Inc. Bugant’s fiscal year ends December 31 of each year. Bugant’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet is as follows.

Bugant, Inc.

Balance Sheet

December 31, 2012

Assets

Cash …………………………………………………….$ 450

Inventory ……………………………………………….1,800

Total current assets ……………………………………2,250

Plant and equipment ……………………………..……2,000

Accumulated depreciation ……………………………..(160)

Total assets ……………………………..……………$4,090

Liabilities

Bonds payable (net of discount) ……………………..$1,426

Stockholders’ equity

Common stock ……………………………………..…1,500

Retained earnings ……………………………………..1,164

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity ……………$4,090

Additional information concerning 2013 is as follows.

1. Sales were $3,500, all for cash.

2. Purchases were $2,000, all paid in cash.

3. Salaries were $700, all paid in cash.

4. Property, plant, and equipment was originally purchased for $2,000 and is depreciated straight-line over a 25-year life with no salvage value.

5. Ending inventory was $1,900.

6. Cash dividends of $100 were declared and paid by Bugant.

7. Ignore taxes.

8. The market rate of interest on bonds of similar risk was 12% during all of 2013.

9. Interest on the bonds is paid semiannually each June 30 and December 31.

Accounting

Prepare a balance sheet for Bugant, Inc. at December 31, 2013, and an income statement for the year ending December 31, 2013. Assume semiannual compounding of the bond interest.

Analysis

Use common ratios for analysis of long-term debt to assess Bugant’s long-run solvency. Has Bugant’s solvency changed much from 2012 to 2013? Bugant’s net income in 2012 was $550 and interest expense was $169.

Principles

Recently, the FASB and the IASB allowed companies the option of recognizing in their financial statements the fair values of their long-term debt. That is, companies have the option to change the balance sheet value of their long-term debt to the debt’s fair value and report the change in balance sheet value as a gain or loss in income. In terms of the qualitative characteristics of accounting information (Chapter 2), briefly describe the potential trade-off(s) involved in reporting long-term debt at its fair value.

the following is taken from the gajda company balance sheet 260332

The following is taken from the Gajda Company balance sheet.

?

Interest is payable semiannually on January 1 and July 1. The bonds are callable on any semiannual interest date. Gajda uses straight-line amortization for any bond premium or discount. From December 31, 2012, the bonds will be outstanding for an additional 10 years (120 months).

Instructions

(a) Journalize the payment of bond interest on January 1, 2013.

(b) Prepare the entry to amortize bond premium and to pay the interest due on July 1, 2013, assuming no accrual of interest on June 30.

(c) Assume that on July 1, 2013, after paying interest, Gajda Company calls bonds having a face value of $1,200,000. The call price is 101. Record the redemption of the bonds.

(d) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2013, to amortize bond premium and to accrue interest on the remainingbonds.

the following items were selected from among the transactions co 260344

The following items were selected from among the transactions completed by Davidson Co. during the current year:

Feb. 15 Purchased merchandise on account from Ranier Co., $36,000, terms n/30.

Mar. 17 Issued a 30-day, 8% note for $36,000 to Ranier Co., on account.

Apr. 16 Paid Ranier Co. the amount owed on the note of March 17.

July 15 Borrowed $40,000 from Black Mountain Bank, issuing a 90-day, 8% note.

25 Purchased tools by issuing an $80,000, 120-day note to Sun Supply Co., which discounted the note at the rate of 7%.

Oct. 13 Paid Black Mountain Bank the interest due on the note of July 15 and renewed the loan by issuing a new 30-day, 9% note for $40,000. (Record both the debit and credit to the notes payable account.)

Nov. 12 Paid Black Mountain Bank the amount due on the note of October 13.

22 Paid Sun Supply Co. the amount due on the note of July 25.

Dec. 1 Purchased office equipment from Valley Equipment Co. for $125,000, paying $25,000 and issuing a series of ten 12% notes for $10,000 each, coming due at 30-day intervals.

17 Settled a product liability lawsuit with a customer for $52,000, payable in January. Renaissance accrued the loss in a litigation claims payable account.

31Paid the amount due Valley Equipment Co. on the first note in the series issued on December 1.

Instructions

1. Record the transactions.

2. Record the adjusting entry for each of the following accrued expenses at the end of the current year:

(a) Product warranty cost, $22,500;

(b) Interest on the nine remaining notes owed to Valley Equipment Co.

the following payroll liability accounts are included in 260351

The following payroll liability accounts are included in the ledger of Wimble Company on January 1, 2012.

FICA Taxes Payable……………………………… $ 760.00

Federal Income Taxes Payable…………………… 1,204.60

State Income Taxes Payable……………………… 108.95

Federal Unemployment Taxes Payable………….. 288.95

State Unemployment Taxes Payable…………….. 1,954.40

Union Dues Payable……………………………… 870.00

U.S. Savings Bonds Payable……………………… 360.00

In January, the following transactions occurred.

Jan. 10 Sent check for $870.00 to union treasurer for union dues.

12 Remitted check for $1,964.60 to the Federal Reserve bank for FICA taxes and federal income taxes withheld.

15 Purchased U.S. Savings Bonds for employees by writing check for $360.00.

17 Paid state income taxes withheld from employees.

20 Paid federal and state unemployment taxes.

31 Completed monthly payroll register, which shows office salaries $26,600, store wages $28,400, FICA taxes withheld $4,400, federal income taxes payable $2,158, state income taxes payable $454, union dues payable $400, United Fund contributions payable $1,888, and net pay $45,700.

31 Prepared payroll checks for the net pay and distributed checks to employees.

At January 31, the company also makes the following accrued adjustments pertaining to employee compensation.

1. Employer payroll taxes: FICA taxes 8%, federal unemployment taxes 0.8%, and state unemployment taxes 5.4%.

* 2. Vacation pay: 6% of gross earnings.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjustments pertaining to employee compensation at January 31.

advance managerial accounting 260377

Consider the following information, prepared based on a capacity of 40,000 units:

Category

Cost per Unit

Variable manufacturing costs

$5.00

Fixed manufacturing costs

$1.50

Variable marketing costs

$1.00

Fixed marketing costs

$0.50

Capacity cannot be added in the short run and the firm currently sells the product for $10 per unit.

Consider each of these scenarios independent of each other.

a) The company is currently producing 30,000 units per month. A potential customer has contacted the firm and offered to purchase 10,000 units this month only. The customer is willing to pay $5.50 per unit. Since the potential customer approached the firm, there will be no variable marketing costs incurred. Should the company accept the special order? Why or why not? Be specific.

b) Assume the same facts as in part a, except that the company is producing 40,000 units per month. Should the company accept the special order? Why or why not? Be specific.

c) List and describe other factors should be taken into consideration when deciding whether to accept a special order? Be specific in your responses

the following situations relate to bolivia company 1 bolivia p 260378

The following situations relate to Bolivia Company.

1. Bolivia provides a warranty with all its products it sells. It estimates that it will sell 1,000,000 units of its product for the year ended December 31, 2012, and that its total revenue for the product will be $100,000,000. It also estimates that 60% of the product will have no defects, 30% will have major defects, and 10% will have minor defects. The cost of a minor defect is estimated to be $5 for each product sold, and the cost for a major defect cost is $15. The company also estimates that the minimum amount of warranty expense will be $2,000,000 and the maximum will be $10,000,000.

2. Bolivia is involved in a tax dispute with the tax authorities. The most likely outcome of this dispute is that Bolivia will lose and have to pay $400,000. The minimum it will lose is $20,000 and the maximum is $2,500,000.

Instructions

Prepare the journal entry to record provisions, if any, for Bolivia at December 31, 2012.

the following summary data for the payroll period ended december 260379

The following summary data for the payroll period ended December 27, 2009, are available for Cayman Coating Co.:

Gross pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $53,000

FICA tax withholdings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

Income tax withholdings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,680

Group hospitalization insurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 960

Employee contributions to pension plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

Total deductions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,088

Net pay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ?

Additional information

?c FICA tax rates for 2009 were 7.65% on the first $106,800 of each employee’s annual earnings and 1.45% on any earnings in excess of $106,800. However, no employees had accumulated earnings for the year in excess of the $106,800 limit. The FICA tax rates are levied against both employers and employees.

?c The federal and state unemployment compensation tax rates are 0.8% and 5.4%, respectively. These rates are levied against the employer for the first $7,000 of each employee’s annual earnings. Only $7,500 of the gross pay amount for the December 27, 2009, pay period was owed to employees who were still under the annual limit.

Required:

Assuming that Cayman Coating Co.’s payroll for the last week of the year is to be paid on January 3, 2010, use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the effects of the December 27, 2009, entries for

a. Accrued payroll.

b. Accrued payroll taxes.

the following transactions of brooks garrett occurred during 201 260394

The following transactions of Brooks Garrett occurred during 2012:

Apr 30 Garrett is party to a patent infringement lawsuit of $200,000. Garrett’s attorney is certain it is remote that Garrett will lose this lawsuit.

Jun 30 Estimated warranty expense at 2% of sales of $400,000.

Jul 28 Warranty claims paid in the amount of $6,000.

Sep 30 Garrett is party to a lawsuit for copyright violation of $100,000. Garrett’s attorney advises that it is probable Garrett will lose this lawsuit.

Dec 31 Garrett estimates warranty expense on sales for the second half of the year of $500,000 at 2%.

Requirements

1. Journalize required transactions, if any, in Garrett’s general journal. Explanations are not required.

2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?

the following transactions of dunn miles occurred during 2012 a 260396

The following transactions of Dunn Miles occurred during 2012:

Apr 30 Miles is party to a patent infringement lawsuit of $230,000. Miles’s attorney is certain it is remote that Miles will lose this lawsuit.

Jun 30 Estimated warranty expense at 3% of sales of $430,000.

Jul 28 Warranty claims paid in the amount of $6,400.

Sep 30 Miles is party to a lawsuit for copyright violation of $130,000. Miles’s attorney advises that it is probable Miles will lose this lawsuit.

Dec 31 Miles estimates warranty expense on sales for the second half of the year of $510,000 at 3%.

Requirements

1. Journalize required transactions, if any, in Miles’s general journal. Explanations are not required.

2. What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable?

the following transactions of emergency pharmacies occurred duri 260397

The following transactions of Emergency Pharmacies occurred during 2014 and 2015:

2014

Mar 1 Borrowed $360,000 from Lessburg Bank. The six-year, 10% note requires payments due annually, on March 1. Each payment consists of $60,000 principal plus one year’s interest.

Mar 1 Reclassified current portion of Lessburg Bank note.

Dec 1 Mortgaged the warehouse for $200,000 cash with Saputo Bank. The mortgage requires monthly payments of $4,000. The interest rate on the note is 9% and accrues monthly. The first payment is due on January 1, 2015.

Dec 1 Reclassified current portion of the Saputo Bank note for the principal due in 2015 of $31,505

Dec 31 Recorded interest accrued on the Saputo Bank note.

Dec 31 Recorded interest accrued on the Lessburg Bank note.

2015

Jan 1 Paid Saputo Bank monthly mortgage payment

Feb 1 Paid Saputo Bank monthly mortgage payment

Mar 1 Paid Saputo Bank monthly mortgage payment

Mar 1 Paid first installment on note due to Lessburg Bank

Requirements

1. Journalize the transactions in Emergency Pharmacies’ general journal. Round all answers to the nearest dollar. Explanations are not required.

2. Assume Emergency Pharmacies only adjusts the current portion of long-term notes on the last day of each year, December 31. Prepare the liabilities section of the balance sheet for Emergency Pharmacies on March 1, 2015.

sara chung knew the construction contractors in her area well 260058

Sara Chung knew the construction contractors in her area well. She was the purchasing manager at the power plant, a business that was the major employer in the region. Whenever a repair or maintenance job came up, Sara’s friends would inflate the invoice by 10%. The invoice would then be passed through the accounts payable department, where the clerk was supposed to review and verify the charges before processing the payment. The accounts payable clerk, Valerie Judson, was happy to have a job and didn’t want anything to jeopardize it. She knew the deal, but kept her mouth shut. Sara’s contractor friends would always ?okick back?? the 10% extra to Sara under the table. One day Valerie had a heart attack and went into the hospital. The company hired a new accounts payable clerk, Spencer Finn. He had worked construction in his college days and suspected something was fishy, but he couldn’t prove it. He did, however, wish to protect himself in case the fraud came to light.

Requirements

1. How could an auditor detect fraud of this sort?

2. What can a business do to prevent this kind of fraudulent activity?

3. What should the new accountant do to protect himself?

scott robertson has just approached a venture capitalist for fin 260064

Scott Robertson has just approached a venture capitalist for financing for his sailing school. The venture capitalist is willing to loan Scott $90,000 at a high-risk annual interest rate of 18%. The loan is payable over 2 years in monthly installments of $4,493. Each payment includes principal and interest, calculated using the effective interest method for amortizing debt. Scott receives the loan on May 1, 2012, which is the first day of his fiscal year. Scott makes the first payment on May 31, 2012.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an amortization schedule for the period from May 1, 2012, to August 31,

2012. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

(b) Prepare all journal entries for Scott Robertson for the period beginning May 1, 2012, and ending July 31, 2012. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

selected transactions of the shadrach computer corporation durin 260076

Selected transactions of the Shadrach Computer Corporation during November and December of 2007 are as follows:

Nov. 1 Borrowed money from the bank by issuing a non-interest-bearing, $40,000, 90-day note. The note is discounted on a 12% basis.

9 Sold 100 computers with a one-year warranty for $5,000 each on credit (ignore cost of goods sold). Past experience indicates that warranty costs average $125 per computer. The corporation uses the expense warranty accrual method for record keeping.

12 Sold 100 software packages at $300 each on credit (ignore cost of goods sold). With each software package the corporation offered a premium in the form of a package of disks for the return of one proof of purchase. The offer expires June 30, 2008. The cost of each package of disks is $5, and the company estimates that 80% of the premiums will be redeemed; therefore, 80 packages of disks were purchased on credit.

20 Paid $2,900 in fulfillment of the warranty agreement on several of the computers sold on November 9.

30 Accrued monthly vacation pay. Shadrach Computer Corporation has 90 employees, who are each paid an average of $160 per day. The corporation has a policy of allowing each employee 12 days’ paid vacation per year; the related liability is recorded on a monthly basis. Employees are paid monthly; two-thirds of the employees work in the sales force and one-third work in the office.

30 Paid monthly payroll. Gross salaries for the sales force were $288,000 and for the office staff were $144,000. No vacations were taken during November. Income tax withholdings of 20% are applicable to the salaries of all employees. An 8% F.I.C.A. tax for both employees and employers is also applicable. These rates apply to all salaries because no employee’s salary has exceeded the maximum wage limit. The state allows the corporation a 1% unemployment compensation merit-rating reduction from the normal rate of 5.4%. The federal unemployment rate is 0.8%. Prior to October, each individual employee had accumulated a gross salary in excess of $7,000 for 2007.

Dec.14 Twenty proofs of purchase were returned from the November 12 sale.

29 An individual filed suit against Shadrach Computer Corporation for damages caused in a November 5 accident that resulted when a member of the sales force hit the individual’s car while on personal business. The amount of the suit filed was $1,500. Because the employee was on personal business, the company’s insurance company will not pay the claim. In the opinion of the company’s attorney, the amount of the suit is reasonable; furthermore, the company believes it is likely to lose the suit.

31 Accrued monthly vacation pay.

31 Paid monthly payroll. Gross salaries for the sales force were $290,000 and for the office staff were $145,000. The salaries included $6,800 of vacation pay in the sales force and $3,200 of vacation pay in the office staff. The F.I.C.A. tax rate still applies to all wages, because no employee’s salary exceeded the maximum wage limit.

31 Recorded president’s bonus. The president receives a 10% bonus computed on income after deducting income taxes but before deducting the bonus. The corporation’s effective income tax rate is 30%, and income before income taxes and bonus for 2007 was $560,000. The bonus will be paid in January 2008.

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions of the Shadrach Computer Corporation for 2007. Include yearend accruals. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

settlement of debt strickland company owes 200 000 plus 18 0 260080

(Settlement of Debt) Strickland Company owes $200,000 plus $18,000 of accrued interest to Moran State Bank. The debt is a 10-year, 10% note. During 2010, Strickland’s business deteriorated due to a faltering regional economy. On December 31, 2010, Moran State Bank agrees to accept an old machine and cancel the entire debt. The machine has a cost of $390,000, accumulated depreciation of $221,000, and a fair market value of $180,000.

(a) Prepare journal entries for Strickland Company and Moran State Bank to record this debt settlement.

(b) How should Strickland report the gain or loss on the disposition of machine and on restructuring of debt in its 2010 income statement?

(c) Assume that, instead of transferring the machine, Strickland decides to grant 15,000 shares of its common stock ($10 par) which has a fair value of $180,000 in full settlement of the loan obligation. If Moran State Bank treats Strickland’s stock as a trading investment, prepare the entries to record the transaction for both parties.

several months ago reiltz industries inc experienced a hazard 260085

Several months ago, Reiltz Industries, Inc. experienced a hazardous materials spill at one of its plants. As a result, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) fined the company $570,000. The company is contesting the fine. In addition, an employee is seeking $560,000 in damages related to the spill. Lastly, a homeowner has sued the company for $364,000.

The homeowner lives 35 miles from the plant, but believes that the incident has reduced the home’s resale value by $364,000.

Reiltz’s legal counsel believes that it is probable that the EPA fine will stand. In addition, counsel indicates that an out-of-court settlement of $238,000 has recently been reached with the employee. The final papers will be signed next week. Counsel believes that the homeowner’s case is much weaker and will be decided in favor of Reiltz. Other litigation related to the spill is possible, but the damage amounts are uncertain.

a. Journalize the contingent liabilities associated with the hazardous materials spill. Use the account ?oDamage Awards and Fines?? to recognize the expense for the period.

b. Prepare a note disclosure relating to this incident.

shen corporation can either lease or buy a small garage 260094

Shen Corporation can either lease or buy a small garage next to its business that will provide parking for its customers. The company can lease the building for a period of 12 years, which approximates the useful life of the facility and thus qualifies as a capital lease. The terms of the lease are payments $12,000 per year for 12 years. Shen currently is able to borrow money at a long-term interest rate of 9 percent. The company can purchase the building by signing an $80,000 long-term mortgage with monthly payments of $1,000. The mortgage also carries an interest rate of 9 percent.

Required

1. with regard to the lease option,

(a) Calculate the present value of the lease.

(b) Prepare the entry in journal form to record the lease agreement.

(c) Prepare the entry in journal form to record depreciation of the building for the first year using the straight-line method.

d. Prepare the entries in journal form to record the lease payments for the two years.

2. With regard to the purchase option,

(a) Prepare a monthly payments schedule showing the monthly payment, the interest for the month, the reduction in debt, and the unpaid balance for the first three months.

(b) Prepare entries in Journal form to record the purchase and the first two monthly payments.

3. Based on your calculations, which options seems to be best? Aside from cost, name an advantage and a disadvantage of each option.

sherwill s statement of consolidated income is as follows net s 260095

Sherwill’s statement of consolidated income is as follows:

Net sales …………………………………………………….$658

Other income ……………………………………………….. 8

666

Costs and expenses:

Cost of products sold ……………………………………….. 418

Selling, general, and administrative expenses ……………….. 196

Interest ……………………………………………………….. 16

630

Income before income taxes and extraordinary charges ……… 36

Income taxes ………………………………………………….. 18

Income before extraordinary charge …………………………… 18

Extraordinary charge—losses on tornado damage (net) ………. 4

Net income …………………………………………………….. $ 14

Depreciation expense totals $200; operating lease payments total $150; and preferred dividends total $50. Assume that one-third of operating lease payments is for interest.

Required

a. Compute the times interest earned.

b. Compute the fixed charge coverage.

shoyo corporation in preparation of its december 31 2008 fina 260105

Shoyo Corporation, in preparation of its December 31, 2008, financial statements, is attempting to determine the proper accounting treatment for each of the following situations.

1. As a result of uninsured accidents during the year, personal injury suits for $350,000 and $60,000 have been filed against the company. It is the judgment of Shoyo’s legal counsel that an unfavorable outcome is unlikely in the $60,000 case but that an unfavorable verdict approximating $225,000 will probably result in the $350,000 case.

2. Shoyo Corporation owns a subsidiary in a foreign country that has a book value of $5,725,000 and an estimated fair value of $8,700,000. The foreign government has communicated to Shoyo its intention to expropriate the assets and business of all foreign investors. On the basis of settlements other firms have received from this same country, Shoyo expects to receive 40% of the fair value of its properties as final settlement.

3. Shoyo’s chemical product division consisting of five plants is uninsurable because of the special risk of injury to employees and losses due to fire and explosion. The year 2008 is considered one of the safest (luckiest) in the division’s history because no loss due to injury or casualty was suffered. Having suffered an average of three casualties a year during the rest of the past decade (ranging from $60,000 to $700,000), management is certain that next year the company will probably not be so fortunate.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries that should be recorded as of December 31, 2008, to recognize each of the situations above.

(b) Indicate what should be reported relative to each situation in the financial statements and accompanying notes. Explain why.

on november 1 2010 gordon co collected 25 200 in cash 259787

On November 1, 2010, Gordon Co. collected $25,200 in cash from its tenant as an advance rent payment on its store location. The six-month lease period ends on April 30, 2011, at which time the contract may be renewed.

Required:

a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entries) to record the effects of the following items for Gordon Co.:

1. The six months of rent collected in advance on November 1, 2010.

2. The adjustment that will be made at the end of every month to show the amount of rent ?oearned?? during the month.

b. Calculate the amount of unearned rent that should be shown on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet with respect to this lease.

c. Suppose the advance collection received on November 1, 2010, covered an 18-month lease period at the same amount of rent per month. How should Gordon Co. report the unearned rent amount on its December 31, 2010, balance sheet?

on november 24 2008 26 passengers on tom paris airlines 259791

On November 24, 2008, 26 passengers on Tom Paris Airlines Flight No. 901 were injured upon landing when the plane skidded off the runway. Personal injury suits for damages totaling $5,000,000 were filed on January 11, 2009, against the airline by 18 injured passengers.

The airline carries no insurance. Legal counsel has studied each suit and advised Paris that it can reasonably expect to pay 60% of the damages claimed. The financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2008, were issued February 27, 2009.

Instructions

(a) Prepare any disclosures and journal entries required by the airline in preparation of the December 31, 2008, financial statements.

(b) Ignoring the Nov. 24, 2008, accident, what liability due to the risk of loss from lack of insurance coverage should Tom Paris Airlines record or disclose? During the past decade the company has experienced at least one accident per year and incurred average damages of $3,200,000. Discuss fully.

business law 259803

I need this assignment back by Sunday January 27, 2013. 3 pages and please list the sourcesused.

Document Preview:

Week 1 Assignment 3 Scenario 1 – Car Lots Answered a question, supporting the response with appropriate cases, laws, and other relevant examples. Partnership Contracts Wally and Beaver were general partners in a car dealership. Using the partnership name, Wally entered into a contract to purchase 30 used cars from Car Lots. Car Lots was not aware that Wally was not authorized to enter into this type of agreement. When the cars were delivered, Beaver refused to accept the cars. Car Lots wants to enforce the contract.??Each party will view this situation and the likely outcome to be different.  What are the best arguments for Car Lots?  What are the best arguments for the car dealership? After examining the facts and the various legal arguments on behalf of each party, make a final determination as to which party is most likely to win if this case were to go to court.  Be sure to base your conclusions on your analysis taking into account the facts provided, reasonable assumptions and the relevant law (as opposed to listing your personal opinion).   Week 1 Assignment 3 Scenario 2 – Pierce the Corporate Veil Answered a question, supporting the response with appropriate cases, laws, and other relevant examples. William Rich is an extremely wealthy entrepreneur who has owned several businesses. William sold some of the businesses while others failed and ended up in bankruptcy. Most recently, William incorporated DSM with himself as the sole shareholder. He invested $5,000 in the company as a capital contribution. DSM then purchased 1,000 acres of land for $500,000 with the intent to develop an upscale subdivision. Nine months later, DSM became unable to pay its bills. As one of DSM’s creditors, your business seeks to pierce the corporation and hold William personally liable for the company’s debts. Will your business be successful in holding William liable for DSM’s debts?   What information is important when conducting this type of investigation? ?Explain the…

Attachments:

part a the two basic requirements for the accrual of 259856

Part a. The two basic requirements for the accrual of a loss contingency are supported by several basic concepts of accounting. Three of these concepts are: periodicity (time periods), measurement, and objectivity.

?Required

Discuss how the two basic requirements for the accrual of a loss contingency relate to the three concepts listed previously.

Part b. The following three independent sets of facts relate to

(1) The possible accrual or

(2) The possible disclosure by other means of a loss contingency.

Situation I

A company offers a one-year warranty for the product that it manufactures. A history of warranty claims has been compiled and the probable amount of claims related to sales for a given period can be determined.

Situation II

Subsequent to the date of a set of financial statements, but prior to the issuance of the financial statements, a company enters into a contract that will probably result in a significant loss to the company. The amount of the loss can be reasonably estimated.

Situation III

A company has adopted a policy of recording self-insurance for any possible losses resulting from injury to others by the company’s vehicles. The premium for an insurance policy for the same risk from an independent insurance company would have an annual cost of $2,000. During the period covered by the financial statements, there were no accidents involving the company’s vehicles that resulted in injury to others.

Required

Explain the accrual and/or type of disclosure necessary (if any) and the reason(s) why such disclosure is appropriate for each of the three independent sets of facts in the situations described here. Complete your response to each situation before proceeding to the next situation.

part a nazir corporation whose fiscal year ended june 30 259857

Part A: Nazir Corporation, whose fiscal year ended June 30, 2011, completed the following transactions involving notes payable:

May 21 Obtained a 60-day extension on an $18,000 trade account payable owed to a supplier by signing a 60-day $18,000 note. Interest is in addition to the face value, at the rate of 14 percent.

June 30 Made the end-of-year adjusting entry to accrue interest expense.

July 20 Paid off the note plus interest due the supplier.

Required

1. Prepare entries in journal form for the notes payable transactions.

2. When notes payable appears on the balance sheet, what other current liability would you look for to be associated with the notes? What would it mean if this other current liability did not appear?

Part B: The payroll register for Nazir Corporation contained the following totals at the end of July: wages, $139,125; federal income taxes withheld, $35,582; state income taxes withheld, $5,863; Social Security tax withheld, $8,626; Medicare tax withheld, $2,017; medical insurance deductions, $4,800; and wages subject to unemployment taxes, $85,860.

Required

Prepare entries in journal form to record the (1) monthly payroll and (2) employer payroll expenses, assuming Social Security and Medicare taxes equal to the amount for employees, a federal unemployment insurance tax of 0.8 percent, a state unemployment tax of 5.4 percent and medical insurance premiums for which the employer pays 80 percent of the cost.

partial classified balance sheet for walgreens the following ite 259860

Partial Classified Balance Sheet for Walgreens The following items, listed alphabetically, appear on Walgreens’ consolidated balance sheet at August 31, 2008 (in millions):

Accrued expenses and other liabilities $2,272

Deferred income tax (long-term) 150

Long-term debt 1,337

Other noncurrent liabilities 1,410

Short-term borrowing 83

Trade accounts payable 4,289

Required

1. Prepare the Current Liabilities and Long-Term Liabilities sections of Walgreens’ classified balance sheet at August 31, 2008.

2. Walgreens had total liabilities of $8,210 and total shareholders’ equity of $11,104 at August 31, 2007. Total shareholders’ equity at August 31, 2008, amounted to $12,869. (All amounts are in millions.) Compute Walgreens’ debt-to-equity ratio at August 31, 2008 and 2007. As an investor, how would you react to the changes in this ratio?

3. What other related ratios would the company’s lenders use to assess the company? What do these ratios measure?

pleasant co manufactures specialty bike accessories the compan 259899

Pleasant Co. manufactures specialty bike accessories. The company is known for product quality, and it has offered one of the best warranties in the industry on its higher-priced products—a lifetime guarantee, performing all the warranty work in its own shops. The warranty on these products is included in the sales price. Due to the recent introduction and growth in sales of some products targeted to the low price market, Pleasant is considering partnering with another company to do the warranty work on this line of products, if customers purchase a service contract at the time of original product purchase. Pleasant has called you to advise the company on the accounting for this new warranty arrangement.

Instructions

If your school has a subscription to the FASB Codification, go to log in and prepare responses to the following. Provide Codification references for your responses.

(a) Identify the accounting literature that addresses the accounting for the type of separately priced warranty that Pleasant is considering.

(b) When are warranty contracts considered separately priced?

(c) What are incremental direct acquisition costs and how should they be treated?

presented below are two different situations related to mckee co 259925

Presented below are two different situations related to Mckee Corporation debt obligations. Mckee’s next financial reporting date is December 31, 2012. The financial statements are authorized for issuance on March 1, 2013.

1. Mckee has a long-term obligation of $400,000, which is maturing over 4 years in the amount of $100,000 per year. The obligation is dated November 1, 2012, and the first maturity date is November 1, 2013.

2. Mckee has a short-term obligation due February 15, 2013. Its lender agrees to extend the maturity date of this loan to February 15, 2015. The agreement for extension is signed on January 15, 2013.

Instructions

Indicate how each of these debt obligations is reported on Mckee’s statement of financial position on December 31, 2012.

presented below are two independent situations a cece winans 259928

Presented below are two independent situations.

(a) CeCe Winans Corporation incurred the following costs in connection with the issuance of bonds:

(1) Printing and engraving costs, $12,000;

(2) Legal fees, $49,000, and

(3) Commissions paid to underwriter, $60,000. What amount should be reported as Unamortized Bond Issue Costs, and where should this amount be reported on the balance sheet?

(b) Ron Kenoly Inc. issued $600,000 of 9%, 10-year bonds on June 30, 2008, for $562,500. This price provided a yield of 10% on the bonds. Interest is payable semiannually on December 31 and June 30. If Kenoly uses the effective interest method, determine the amount of interest expense to record if financial statements are issued on October 31, 2008.

presented below are two independent situations 1 sunny isles c 259933

Presented below are two independent situations.

1. Sunny Isles Car Rental leased a car to Emmaus Company for one year. Terms of the operating lease agreement call for monthly payments of $500.

2. On January 1, 2012, Wruck Inc. entered into an agreement to lease 20 computers from Braskich Electronics. The terms of the lease agreement require three annual rental payments of $30,000 (including 10% interest) beginning December 31, 2012. The present value of the three rental payments is $74,606. Wruck considers this a capital lease.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the appropriate journal entry to be made by Emmaus Company for the first lease payment.

(b) Prepare the journal entry to record the lease agreement on the books of Wruck Inc. on

January 1, 2012.

richmond company engaged in the following transactions during 20 260013

Richmond Company engaged in the following transactions during 2009:

a. Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on February 16. The seller offered terms of 1/10, n/15.

b. Paid for the purchased merchandise (transaction a) on February 26.

c. Borrowed $140,000 on a 10-month, 9 percent interest-bearing note on April 30.

d. Purchased $28,000 of merchandise on June 4. The seller offered terms of 2/15, n/20.

e. Paid for the purchased merchandise (transaction d) on June 24.

f. Received from Haywood, Inc., on August 19 a $12,000 deposit against a total selling price of $120,000 for merchandise to be manufactured for Haywood.

g. Paid quarterly installments of Social Security and individual federal income tax withholdings, as shown below, on October 15. The Social Security was recorded as an expense during the quarter, and the amount paid represents both the employee and employer share (50% each).

Social Security tax ……………………………..$116,000

Federal income tax withheld ………………….. 419,000

Assume that Richmond records inventory using the gross method.

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for these transactions.

2. Prepare any adjusting entries necessary at December 31, 2009.

rogers company completed the following transactions during 2011 260034

Rogers Company completed the following transactions during 2011. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2011.

Jan. 8 Purchased merchandise for resale on account at an invoice cost of $14,860; assume a periodic inventory system.

17 Paid January 8 invoice.

Apr. 1 Borrowed $35,000 from National Bank for general use; executed a 12-month, 12 percent interest-bearing note payable.

June 3 Purchased merchandise for resale on account at an invoice cost of $17,420.

July 5 Paid June 3 invoice.

Aug. 1 Rented a small office in a building owned by the company and collected six months’ rent in advance amounting to $6,000. (Record the collection in a way that will not require an adjusting entry at year-end.)

Dec. 20 Received a $100 deposit from a customer as a guarantee to return a large trailer ?oborrowed?? for 30 days.

31 Determined wages of $9,500 earned but not yet paid on December 31 (disregard payroll taxes).

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

2. Prepare all adjusting entries required on December 31, 2011.

3. Show how all of the liabilities arising from these transactions are reported on the balance sheet at December 31, 2011.

4. For each transaction, state whether cash flow from operating activities is increased or decreased or whether there is no effect.

on january 1 2006 brewster company issued 2 000 of its 259585

On January 1, 2006 Brewster Company issued 2,000 of its five-year, $1,000 face value, 11% bonds dated January 1 at an effective annual interest rate (yield) of 9%. Brewster uses the effective interest method of amortization. On December 31, 2007 Brewster extinguished the 2,000 bonds early through acquisition in the open market for $1,980,000.

On July 1, 2006 Brewster issued 5,000 of its six-year, $1,000 face value, 10% convertible bonds dated July 1 at an effective annual interest rate (yield) of 12%. The bonds are convertible at the option of the investor into Brewster’s common stock at a ratio of 10 shares of common stock for each bond. Brewster uses the effective interest method of amortization.

On July 1, 2007 an investor in Brewster’s convertible bonds tendered 1,500 bonds for conversion into 15,000 shares of Brewster’s common stock, which had a market value of $105 per share at the date of the conversion.

Required

1. a. Were the 11% bonds issued at par, at a discount, or at a premium? Why?

b. Is the amount of interest expense for the 11% bonds using the effective interest method of amortization higher in the first or second year of the life of the bond issue? Why?

2. a. How is a gain or loss on early extinguishment of debt determined? Does the early extinguishment of the 11% bonds result in a gain or loss? Why?

b. How does Brewster report the early extinguishment of the 11% bonds on the 2007 income statement?

3. a. Does recording the conversion of the 10% convertible bonds into common stock under the book value method affect net income? What is the rationale for the book value method?

b. Does recording the conversion of the 10% convertible bonds into common stock under the market value method affect net income? What is the rationale for the market value method?

on january 1 2007 seaver company sold land with a 259598

On January 1, 2007 Seaver Company sold land with a book value of $23,000 to Bench Company. Bench Company paid $15,000 down and signed a $15,000 non-interest-bearing note, payable in two $7,500 annual installments on December 31, 2007 and 2008. Neither the fair value of the land nor of the note is determinable. Bench Company’s incremental borrowing rate is 12%. Later in the year, on July 1, 2007, Seaver Company sold a building to Hane Company, accepting a two-year, $100,000 non-interest-bearing note due July 1, 2009. The fair value of the building was $82,644.60 on the date of the sale. The building had been purchased at a cost of $90,000 on January 1, 2002, and had a book value of $67,500 on December 31, 2006. It was being depreciated on a straight-line basis (no residual value) over a 20-year life.

Required

1. Prepare all the journal entries on Seaver Company’s books for January 1, 2007 through December 31, 2008 in regard to the Bench Company note.

2. Prepare all the journal entries on Seaver Company’s books for July 1, 2007 through July 1, 2009 in regard to the Hane Company note.

3. Prepare the notes receivable portion of the Seaver Company’s balance sheet on December 31, 2007 and 2008.

can you please let me know how much it will be to help with this and when it will be 259611

Will you be able to show the path to the solutions?

Document Preview:

1. value:?0.00 points Parker Company manufactures and sells a single product.?? Required:?? 1.?A partially completed schedule of the company’s total and per unit costs over a relevant range of 60,000 to 100,000 units produced and sold each year is given below. Complete the schedule of the company’s total and unit costs. (Round the “Cost per unit” to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? ??Units Produced and Sold????60,000?80,000?100,000??Total costs:??????Variable costs??$ 150,000 ?$ ?$ ??Fixed costs??360,000 ??????????Total costs??$ 510,000 ?$ ?$ ??? ? ? ? ??Cost per unit:??????Variable cost??$ ?$ ?$ ??Fixed cost????????????Total cost per unit??$ ?$ ?$ ??? ? ? ? ???? 2.?Assume that the company produces and sells 90,000 units during the year at the selling price of $7.50 per unit. Prepare a contribution format income statement for the year. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? Parker Company?Contribution Format Income Statement???$ ??????????????????$ ?? 2. value:?0.00 points Speedy Parcel Service operates a fleet of delivery trucks in a large metropolitan area. A careful study by the company’s cost analyst has determined that if a truck is driven 120,000 miles during a year, the average operating cost is 11.6 cents per mile. If a truck is driven only 80,000 miles during a year, the average operating cost increases to 13.6 cents per mile.?? Required:??1.?Using the high-low method, estimate the variable and fixed cost elements of the annual cost of truck operation. (Round the “Variable cost per mile” to 3 decimal places and the “Fixed cost” to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? ????Variable cost?$ ?per mile??Fixed cost?$ ?per year???? 2.?Express the variable and fixed costs in the form Y = a + bX. (Round the “Variable cost per mile” to 3 decimal places and the “Fixed cost” to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$”…

Attachments:

stockholders equity 259629

How do you figure out how many shares are issued and which ones are considered treasury?

Document Preview:

1. Stockholders’ Equity: Show your work 9% Preferred Stock, $100 par, 300,000 cumulative shares authorized 150,000 issued?$ 15,000,000??Common stock, $5 par, 2,000,000 shares authorized, ____?______ issued, 950,000 shares outstanding? 6,000,000??Additional paid in capital??? From issuance of common stock? 10,800,000??Total Contributed Capital?31,800,000??Retained Earnings?42,900,000??Less: Treasury Stock? (5,000,000)??Total Stockholders’ Equity?$69,700,000?? How many shares of common stock are issued? How many shares of common stock are in treasury?

Attachments:

on january 1 2010 learned inc issued 60 million face 259641

On January 1, 2010, Learned, Inc., issued $60 million face amount of 20-year, 14% stated rate bonds when market interest rates were 16%. The bonds pay interest semiannually each June 30 and December 31 and mature on December 31, 2029.

Required:

a. Using the present value tables in Chapter 6, calculate the proceeds (issue price) of Learned, Inc.’s, bonds on January 1, 2010, assuming that the bonds were sold to provide a market rate of return to the investor.

b. Assume instead that the proceeds were $62,000,000. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to record the payment of semiannual interest and the related premium amortization on June 30, 2010, assuming that the premium of $2,000,000 is amortized on a straight-line basis.

c. If the premium in part b were amortized using the compound interest method, would interest expense for the year ended December 31, 2010, be more than, less than, or equal to the interest expense reported using the straight-line method of premium amortization? Explain.

d. In reality, the difference between the stated interest rate and the market rate would be substantially less than 2%. The dramatic difference in this problem was designed so that you could use present value tables to answer part a. What causes the stated rate to be different from the market rate, and why is the difference likely to be much less than depicted in this problem?

on january 1 2010 the ledger of glennon company contained 259643

On January 1, 2010, the ledger of Glennon Company contained these liability accounts.

Accounts Payable ……………..$42,500

Sales Taxes Payable ……………..6,600

Unearned Service Revenue …….19,000

During January the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 1 Borrowed $15,000 in cash from Midland Bank on a 4-month, 8%, $15,000 note.

5 Sold merchandise for cash totaling $6,510, which includes 5% sales taxes.

12 Provided services for customers who had made advance payments of $10,000. (Credit Service Revenue.)

14 Paid state treasurer’s department for sales taxes collected in December 2009, $6,600.

20 Sold 500 units of a new product on credit at $48 per unit, plus 5% sales tax.

During January the company’s employees earned wages of $70,000. Withholdings related to these wages were $5,355 for Social Security (FICA), $5,000 for federal income tax, and $1,500 for state income tax. The company owed no money related to these earnings for federal or state unemployment tax. Assume that wages earned during January will be paid during February. No entry had been recorded for wages or payroll tax expense as of January 31.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the January transactions.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entries at January 31 for the outstanding note payable and for wages expense and payroll tax expense.

(c) Prepare the current liabilities section of the balance sheet at January 31, 2010. Assume no change in Accounts Payable.

on january 1 2011 boston company completed the following trans 259652

On January 1, 2011, Boston Company completed the following transactions (use a 7 percent annual interest rate for all transactions):

a. Borrowed $115,000 for seven years. Will pay $8,050 interest at the end of each year and repay the $115,000 at the end of the 7th year.

b. Established a plant addition fund of $490,000 to be available at the end of year 8. A single sum that will grow to $490,000 will be deposited on January 1, 2011.

c. Agreed to pay a severance package to a discharged employee. The company will pay $75,000 at the end of the first year, $112,500 at the end of the second year, and $150,000 at the end of the third year.

d. Purchased a $170,000 machine on January 1, 2011, and paid cash, $40,000. A five-year note payable is signed for the balance. The note will be paid in five equal year-end payments starting on December 31, 2011.

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. In transaction (a), determine the present value of the debt.

2. In transaction (b), what single sum amount must the company deposit on January 1, 2011? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

3. In transaction (c), determine the present value of this obligation.

4. In transaction (d), what is the amount of each of the equal annual payments that will be paid on the note? What is the total amount of interest expense that will be incurred?

on january 1 2011 collins copy machine company issued thirty 259653

On January 1, 2011, Collins Copy Machine Company issued thirty $1,000 face-value bonds with a stated annual rate of 10 percent that mature in ten years. Interest is paid semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds were issued at face value.

(a) Prepare the entry to record the issuance of these bonds on January 1, 2011.

(b) Prepare all the entries associated with these bonds during 2011 (excluding the entry to record the issuance).

(c) Compute the balance sheet value of the bond liability as of December 31, 2011.

(d) Compute the present value of the bond’s remaining cash flows as of December 31, 2011.

(e) Repeat (c) and (d) as of December 31, 2012, and explain the relationship between the balance sheet value and the present value.

on january 1 2011 ellsworth company completed the following tr 259654

On January 1, 2011, Ellsworth Company completed the following transactions (use an 8 percent annual interest rate for all transactions):

a. Borrowed $2,000,000 to be repaid in five years. Agreed to pay $150,000 interest each year for the five years.

b. Established a plant addition fund of $1,000,000 to be available at the end of year 10. A single sum that will grow to $1,000,000 will be deposited on January 1, 2011.

c. Purchased a $750,000 machine on January 1, 2011, and paid cash, $400,000. A four-year note payable is signed for the balance. The note will be paid in four equal year-end payments starting on December 31, 2011.

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. In transaction (a), determine the present value of the obligation.

2. In transaction (b), what single amount must the company deposit on January 1, 2011? What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned?

3. In transaction (c), what is the amount of each of the equal annual payments that will be paid on the note? What is the total amount of interest expense that will be incurred?

on january 1 2011 nichols company issued for 1 085 800 259659

(Bond Theory: Balance Sheet Presentations, Interest Rate, Premium) On January 1, 2011, Nichols Company issued for $1,085,800 its 20-year, 11% bonds that have a maturity value of $1,000,000 and pay interest semiannually on January 1 and July 1. Bond issue costs were not material in amount.

Below are three presentations of the long-term liability section of the balance sheet that might be used for these bonds at the issue date.

(a) Discuss the conceptual merit(s) of each of the date-of-issue balance sheet presentations shown above for these bonds.

(b) Explain why investors would pay $1,085,800 for bonds that have a maturity value of only $1,000,000.

(c) Assuming that a discount rate is needed to compute the carrying value of the obligations arising from a bond issue at any date during the life of the bonds, discuss the conceptual merit(s) of using for this purpose:

(1) The coupon or nominal rate.

(2) The effective or yield rate at date of issue.

(d) If the obligations arising from these bonds are to be carried at their present value computed by means of the current market rate of interest, how would the bond valuation at dates subsequent to the date of issue is affected by an increase or a decrease in the market rate of interest?

(AICPAadapted)

on january 1 2011 shannon company completed the following tran 259662

On January 1, 2011, Shannon Company completed the following transactions (assume a 10 percent annual interest rate):

a. Bought a delivery truck and agreed to pay $50,000 at the end of three years.

b. Rented an office building and was given the option of paying $10,000 at the end of each of the next three years or paying $28,000 immediately.

c. Established a savings account by depositing a single amount that will increase to $40,000 at the end of seven years.

d. Decided to deposit a single sum in the bank that will provide 10 equal annual year-end payments of $15,000 to a retired employee (payments starting December 31, 2011).

Required (show computations and round to the nearest dollar):

1. In (a), what is the cost of the truck that should be recorded at the time of purchase?

2. In (b), which option for the office building should the company select?

3. In (c), what single amount must be deposited in this account on January 1, 2011?

4. In (d), what single sum must be deposited in the bank on January 1, 2011?

on january 1 2012 sneed co borrowed cash from best 259681

On January 1, 2012, Sneed Co. borrowed cash from Best Bank by issuing a $100,000 face value, four-year term note that had a 10 percent annual interest rate. The note is to be repaid by making annual cash payments of $31,547 that include both interest and principal on December 31 of each year. Sneed used the proceeds from the loan to purchase land that generated rental revenues of $40,000 cash per year.

Required

a. Prepare an amortization schedule for the four-year period.

b. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.

c. Prepare an income statement, a balance sheet, and a statement of cash flows for each of the four years.

d. Does cash outflow from operating activities remain constant or change each year? Explain.

on january 2 2003 banno corporation issued 1 500 000 of 10 259706

On January 2, 2003, Banno Corporation issued $1,500,000 of 10% bonds at 97 due December 31, 2012. Legal and other costs of $24,000 were incurred in connection with the issue. Interest on the bonds is payable annually each December 31. The $24,000 bond issue costs are being deferred and amortized. The discount on the bonds is also being amortized.

The bonds are callable at 101 (i.e., at 101% of face amount), and on January 2, 2008, Banno called $900,000 face amount of the bonds and retired them. For the bonds called, unamortized bond discount at retirement was $13,500, and unamortized bond issue cost was $7,200.

Instructions

Ignoring income taxes, compute the amount of loss, if any, to be recognized by Banno as a result of retiring the $900,000 of bonds in 2008, and prepare the journal entry to record the retirement.

on july 1 2010 remington chemical company issued 4 000 000 fa 259721

On July 1, 2010, Remington Chemical Company issued $4,000,000 face value, 10%,10-year bonds at $4,543,627.This price resulted in an 8% effective-interest rate on the bonds. Remington uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds pay semiannual interest on each July 1 and January 1.

Instructions

(Round all computations to the nearest dollar.)

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the following transactions.

(1) The issuance of the bonds on July 1, 2010.

(2) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2010.

(3) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on July 1, 2011, assuming no accrual of interest on June 30.

(4) The accrual of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2011.

(b) Show the proper balance sheet presentation for the liability for bonds payable on the

December 31, 2011, balance sheet.

(c) Provide the answers to the following questions in letter form.

(1) What amount of interest expense is reported for 2011?

(2) Would the bond interest expense reported in 2011 be the same as, greater than, or less than the amount that would be reported if the straight-line method of amortization were used?

(3) Determine the total cost of borrowing over the life of the bond.

(4) Would the total bond interest expense be greater than, the same as, or less than the total interest expense if the straight-line method of amortization were used?

act 5733 advanced managerial accounting winter 2013 hw 2 259724

ACT 5733 – Advanced Managerial Accounting

Winter 2013

HW #2

Directions: Answer all the questions.
Please submit your work in Word or PDF formats only.
You can submit an Excel file to support calculations, but please “cut and paste” your solutions into the Word or PDF file. Be sure to show how you did your calculations. Also, please be sure to include your name at the top of the first page of your file. You can use any sources you wish, except for other people. Please be sure to document any source you use. The assignment is due by 9:00 AM on Monday, February 4
th. Please run spell check and proofread your answers. If you have any questions, please e-mail me at af878@nova.edu or andrew.felo@gmail.com. Good luck!

Question #1

Consider the following information:

Q1 Q2 Q3
Beginning inventory (units) 0 300 300
Actual units produced 1,000 800 1,250
Budgeted units to be produced 1,000 1,000 1,000
Units sold 700 800 1,500
Manufacturing costs per unit produced $900 $900 $900
Marketing costs per unit sold $600 $600 $600
Fixed manufacturing costs $400,000 $400,000 $400,000
Fixed marketing costs $140,000 $140,000 $140,000
Selling price per unit $2,500 $2,500 $2,500

There are no price, efficiency, or spending variances, and any production-volume variance is directly written off to cost of goods in the quarter in which it occurs.

a) Prepare income statements for Q1, Q2, and Q3 using variable costing and absorption costing.

b) Explain the differences in operating income between the two costing systems for each quarter.
Be specific!

Question #2

a) Under which inventory costing method would managers have an incentive to build excess inventory? Be sure to justify your answer.

b) What can a manager do to reduce the incentive to build excess inventory?
Be specific!

Question #3

a) What role does the choice of capacity level impact income reported under variable costing?
Be specific!

b) What role does the choice of capacity level impact income reported under full absorption costing?
Be specific!

Question #4

A firm expects to sell 10,000 units of its product annually. It estimates that it costs $200 to place an order and that each unit costs $7 annually to carry in inventory. It takes 7 days to receive an order once it is placed, and the store is open 365 days per year.

a) How many units should the firm order at a time if it wants to minimize the sum of ordering and carrying costs?

b) How many orders will it place in a year?

c) What will its average inventory level be during the year?

d) What is its reorder point?

Question #5

If a firm decides to implement a JIT inventory system, list and describe five metrics (measures) that the firm should begin tracking to assess the JIT system.

Attachments:

homework question 1 a under which inventory costing method would managers 259727

HOMEWORK

Question #1

a) Under which inventory costing method would managers have an incentive to build excess inventory? Be sure to justify your answer.

b) What can a manager do to reduce the incentive to build excess inventory? Be specific!

Question #2

a) What role does the choice of capacity level impact income reported under variable costing? Be specific!

b) What role does the choice of capacity level impact income reported under full absorption costing? Be specific!

Question #3

A firm expects to sell 10,000 units of its product annually. It estimates that it costs $200 to place an order and that each unit costs $7 annually to carry in inventory. It takes 7 days to receive an order once it is placed, and the store is open 365 days per year.

a) How many units should the firm order at a time if it wants to minimize the sum of ordering and carrying costs?

b) How many orders will it place in a year?

c) What will its average inventory level be during the year?

d) What is its reorder point?

Question #4

If a firm decides to implement a JIT inventory system, list and describe five metrics (measures) that the firm should begin tracking to assess the JIT system.

Document Preview:

HOMEWORK Question #1 a) Under which inventory costing method would managers have an incentive to build excess inventory? Be sure to justify your answer. b) What can a manager do to reduce the incentive to build excess inventory? Be specific! Question #2 a) What role does the choice of capacity level impact income reported under variable costing? Be specific! b) What role does the choice of capacity level impact income reported under full absorption costing? Be specific! Question #3 A firm expects to sell 10,000 units of its product annually. It estimates that it costs $200 to place an order and that each unit costs $7 annually to carry in inventory. It takes 7 days to receive an order once it is placed, and the store is open 365 days per year. a) How many units should the firm order at a time if it wants to minimize the sum of ordering and carrying costs? b) How many orders will it place in a year? c) What will its average inventory level be during the year? d) What is its reorder point? Question #4 If a firm decides to implement a JIT inventory system, list and describe five metrics (measures) that the firm should begin tracking to assess the JIT system.

Attachments:

homework for my managerial accouting class 259736

Managerial Accounting Homework helpProblem 3-45 Cost Behavior, High-Low Method, Pricing Decision Fonseca, Ruiz, and Dunn is a large, local accounting firm located in a southwestern city. Carlos Ruiz, one of the firm’s founders, appreciates the success his firm has enjoyed and wants to give something back to his community. He believes that an inexpensive accounting services clinic could provide basic accounting services for small businesses located in the barrio. He wants to price the services at cost. Since the clinic is brand new, it has no experience to go on. Carlos decided to operate the clinic for two months before determining how much to charge per hour on an ongoing basis. As a temporary measure, the clinic adopted an hourly charge of $25, half the amount charged by Fonseca, Ruiz, and Dunn for professional services. The accounting services clinic opened on January 1. During January, the clinic had 120 hours of professional service. During February, the activity was 150 hours. Costs for these two levels of activity usage are as follows: 1.Classify each cost as fixed, variable, or mixed, using hours of professional service as the activity driver. Salaries: Senior accountant Office assistant Internet and software subscriptions Consulting by senior partner Depreciation (equipment) Supplies Administration Rent (offices) Utilities 2.Use the high-low method to separate the mixed costs into their fixed and variable components. Round variable rates to the nearest cent and fixed amounts to the nearest dollar. Components Mixed costVariable rateFixed Amount Internet and software subscriptionsSuppliesUtilities$$ 3a.Luz Mondragon, the chief paraprofessional of the clinic, has estimated that the clinic will average 140 professional hours per month. If the clinic is to be operated as a nonprofit organization, how much will it need to charge per professional hour? Round answer to the nearest cent. $ 3b.How much of this charge is variable? Round answer to the nearest cent. $ 3c.How much is fixed? Round answer to the nearest cent. $ 4a.Conceptual Connection: Suppose the accounting center averages 170 professional hours per month. How much would need to be charged per hour for the center to cover its costs? Round answer to the nearest cent. $

on july 2 2006 the mcgraw corporation issued 500 000 of 259739

On July 2, 2006 the McGraw Corporation issued $500,000 of convertible bonds. Each $1,000 bond could be converted into 20 shares of the company’s $5 par value stock. On July 3, 2008, when the bonds had an unamortized discount of $7,400, and the market value of the McGraw shares was $52 per share, all the bonds were converted into common stock.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entry to record the conversion of the bonds under

(a) The book value method, and

(b) The market value method.

2. Compute the company’s debt-to-equity ratio (total liabilities divided by total stockholders’ equity, as mentioned in Chapter 6) under each alternative. Assume the company’s other liabilities are $2 million and stockholders’ equity before the conversion is $3 million.

on march 1 2011 sealy company sold its 5 year 1 000 face 259768

(Bond Theory: Price, Presentation, and Retirement) On March 1, 2011, Sealy Company sold its 5-year, $1,000 face value, 9% bonds dated March 1, 2011, at an effective annual interest rate (yield) of 11%. Interest is payable semiannually, and the first interest payment date is September 1, 2011. Sealy uses the effective-interest method of amortization. Bond issue costs were incurred in preparing and selling the bond issue. The bonds can be called by Sealy at 101 at any time on or after March 1, 2012.

Instructions

(a) (1) How would the selling price of the bond be determined?

(2) Specify how all items related to the bonds would be presented in a balance sheet prepared immediately after the bond issue was sold.

(b) What items related to the bond issue would be included in Sealy’s 2011 income statement, and how would each be determined?

(c) Would the amount of bond discount amortization using the effective-interest method of amortization be lower in the second or third year of the life of the bond issue? Why?

(d) Assuming that the bonds were called in and retired on March 1, 2012, how should Sealy report the retirement of the bonds on the 2012 income statement?

(AICPA adapted)

on march 1 2012 mechanics credit union mcu issued 7 259770

On March 1, 2012, Mechanics Credit Union (MCU) issued 7%, 20-year bonds payable with maturity value of $300,000. The bonds pay interest on February 28 and August 31. MCU amortizes bond premium and discount by the straight-line method.

Requirements

1. If the market interest rate is 6% when MCU issues its bonds, will the bonds be priced at maturity (par) value, at a premium, or at a discount? Explain.

2. If the market interest rate is 8% when MCU issues its bonds, will the bonds be priced at par, at a premium, or at a discount? Explain.

3. The issue price of the bonds is 95. Journalize the following bond transactions:

(a) Issuance of the bonds on March 1, 2012

(b) Payment of interest and amortization of discount on August 31, 2012

(c) Accrual of interest and amortization of discount on December 31, 2012

(d) Payment of interest and amortization of discount on February 28, 2013

john s drug store has four employees who are paid on 259271

John’s Drug Store has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus time-and a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 a week. Payroll data for the week ended February 15, 2010, are shown at the top of the page 521.

?



Uddin and Conway are married. They claim 2 and 4 withholding allowances, respectively. The following tax rates are applicable: FICA 8%, state income taxes 3%, state unemployment taxes 5.4%, and federal unemployment 0.8%. The first three employees are sales clerks (store wages expense).The fourth employee performs administrative duties (office wages expense).

Instructions

(a) Prepare a payroll register for the weekly payroll.

(b) Journalize the payroll on February 15, 2010, and the accrual of employer payroll taxes.

(c) Journalize the payment of the payroll on February 16, 2010.

(d) Journalize the deposit in a Federal Reserve bank on February 28, 2010, of the FICA and federal income taxes payable to thegovernment.

jose corporation has 4 000 000 of 9 percent 25 year bonds date 259275

Jose Corporation has $4,000,000 of 9 percent, 25-year bonds dated March 1, 2010, with interest payable on February 28 and August 31. The company’s fiscal year end in February 28. It uses the effective interest method to amortize both premiums or discounts. (Round amounts to the nearest dollar.)

Required

1. Assume the bonds are issued at 110.7 on March 1, 2010, to yield an effective interest rate of 8 percent. Prepare entries in Journal form for march 1, 2010, August 31, 2010, and February 28, 2011.

2. Assume the bonds are issued at 90.87 on March 1, 2010, to yield an effective interest rate of 10 percent. Prepare entries in journal form for March 1, 2010, August 31, 2010, and February 28, 2011.

3. Explain the role that market interest rates play in causing a premium in requirement 1 and a discount in requirement 2.

kaye co issued 1 million face amount of 11 20 year 259301

Kaye Co. issued $1 million face amount of 11%, 20-year bonds on April 1, 2010. The bonds pay interest on an annual basis on March 31 each year.

Required:

a. Assume that market interest rates were slightly lower than 11% when the bonds were sold. Would the proceeds from the bond issue have been more than, less than, or equal to the face amount? Explain.

b. Independent of your answer to part a, assume that the proceeds were $1,080,000. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entry) to show the effect of issuing the bonds.

c. Calculate the interest expense that Kaye Co. will show with respect to these bonds in its income statement for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2010, assuming that the premium of $80,000 is amortized on a straight-line basis.

lachgar industries develops and produces bio diesel an alternat 259338

Lachgar Industries develops and produces bio diesel, an alternative energy source. The company has an outstanding $200,000,000, 30-year, 12% bond issue dated July 1, 2005. The bond issue is due June 30, 2035. The bond indenture requires a bond sinking fund, which has a balance of $24,000,000 as of July 1, 2010. The company is currently experiencing a shortage of funds due to a recent acquisition. Abdou Hatch, the company’s treasurer, is considering using the funds from the bond sinking fund to cover payroll and other bills that are coming due at the end of the month. Abdou’s brother-in-law is a trustee in a sinking fund, who has indicated willingness to allow Abdou to use the funds from the sinking fund to temporarily meet the company’s cash needs. Discuss whether Abdou’s proposal is appropriate.

leased assets koffman and sons signed a four year lease for 259348

Leased Assets Koffman and Sons signed a four-year lease for a forklift on January 1, 2010. Annual lease payments of $1,510, based on an interest rate of 8%, are to be made every December 31, beginning with December 31, 2010.

Required

1. Assume that the lease is treated as an operating lease.

a. Will the value of the forklift appear on Koffman’s balance sheet?

b. What account will indicate that lease payments have been made?

2. Assume that the lease is treated as a capital lease.

a. Identify and analyze the effect when the lease is signed. Explain why the value of the leased asset is not recorded at $6,040 ($1,510 A? 4).

b. Identify and analyze the effect of the first payment of December 31, 2010.

c. Calculate the amount of depreciation expense for the year 2010.

d. At what amount would the lease obligation be presented on the balance sheet as of December 31, 2010?

professional simulation in this simulation 259353

Professional Simulation In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding accounting for pensions. Prepare responses to all parts. Using Your Judgment 1273 Melanie Vail Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan. Plan assets $480,000 Projected benefit obligation 625,000 Accumulated OCI (PSC) 100,000 Dr. As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary. Service cost for 2012 $90,000 Settlement rate 9% Actual return on plan assets in 2012 57,000 Amortization of prior service cost 19,000 Expected return on plan assets 52,000 Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions 76,000 Contributions in 2012 99,000 Benefits paid retirees in 2012 85,000 Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources (a) Use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. (b) Compute the same items as in (a), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Prepare the journal entry to record pension expense in 2012. Indicate the reporting of the 2012 pension amounts in this income statement and balance sheet

Document Preview:

Professional Simulation In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding accounting for pensions. Prepare responses to all parts. Melanie Vail Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan. Plan assets $480,000 Projected benefit obligation 625,000 Accumulated OCI (PSC) 100,000 Dr. As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary. Service cost for 2012 $90,000 Settlement rate 9% Actual return on plan assets in 2012 57,000 Amortization of prior service cost 19,000 Expected return on plan assets 52,000 Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions 76,000 Contributions in 2012 99,000 Benefits paid retirees in 2012 85,000 Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources (a) Use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. (b) Compute the same items as in (a), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Prepare the journal entry to record pension expense in 2012. Indicate the reporting of the 2012 pension amounts in this income statement and balance sheet. 12345 A B C + KWW_Professional_Simulation Accounting for Pensions Time Remaining 2 hours 20 minutes Unsplit Split Horiz Split Vertical Spreadsheet Calculator Exit ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

louis welch is general manager of united tanning salons during 259389

Louis Welch is general manager of United Tanning Salons. During 2012, Welch worked for the company all year at a $6,200 monthly salary. He also earned a yearend bonus equal to 10% of his salary. Welch’s federal income tax withheld during 2012 was $850 per month, plus $924 on his bonus check. State income tax withheld came to $70 per month, plus $40 on the bonus. The FICA tax withheld was 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. Welch authorized the following payroll deductions: Charity Fund contribution of 1% of total earnings and life insurance of $5 per month. United incurred payroll tax expense on Welch for FICA tax of 7.65% of the first $106,800 in annual earnings. The company also paid state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of 0.8% on the first $7,000 in annual earnings. In addition, United provides Welch with health insurance at a cost of $150 per month. During 2012, United paid $4,000 into Welch’s retirement plan.

Requirements

1. Compute Welch’s gross pay, payroll deductions, and net pay for the full year 2012. Round all amounts to the nearest dollar.

2. Compute United’s total 2012 payroll expense for Welch.

3. Make the journal entry to record United’s expense for Welch’s total earnings for the year, his payroll deductions, and net pay. Debit Salary expense and Bonus expense as appropriate. Credit liability accounts for the payroll deductions and Cash for net pay. An explanation is not required.

mackey company acquired equipment on january 1 2011 through a 259398

Mackey Company acquired equipment on January 1, 2011, through a leasing agreement that required an annual payments of $30,000. Assume that the lease has a term of five year and that the life of the equipment is also five years. The lease is treated as a capital lease, and the FMV of the equipment is $119,781. Mackey uses the straight-line method to depreciated its fixed assets. The effective annual interest rate on the lease is 8 percent.

Required:

(a) Compute the amounts that would complete the table:



(b) Compute rent expense for 2011-2015 if the lease is treated as an operating lease.

(c) Compute total expense over the five-year period under the two methods and comment.

majestic mountain bikes markets mountain bike tours to clients v 259404

Majestic Mountain Bikes markets mountain-bike tours to clients vacationing in various locations in the mountains of Colorado. In preparation for the upcoming summer biking season, Majestic entered into the following transactions related to notes payable.

Mar. 1 Purchased Puma bikes for use as rentals by issuing a $9,000, 3-month, 6% note payable that is due June 1.

Mar. 31 Recorded accrued interest for the Puma note.

Apr. 1 Issued a $45,000 9-month note for the purchase of mountain property on which to build bike trails. The note bears 8% interest and is due January 1.

Apr. 30 Recorded accrued interest for the Puma note and the land note.

May 1 Issued a 4-month note to Jackson State Bank for $12,000 at 6%. The funds will be used for working capital for the beginning of the season; the note is due September 1.

May 31 Recorded accrued interest for all three notes.

June 1 Paid principal and interest on the Puma note.

June 30 Recorded accrued interest for the land note and the Jackson State Bank note.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions noted above.

(b) Post the above entries to the Notes Payable, Interest Payable, and Interest Expense accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Assuming that Majestic’s year-end is June 30, show the balance sheet presentation of notes payable and interest payable at that date.

(d) How much interest expense relating to notes payable did Majestic incur during the year?

many businesses borrow money during periods of increased busines 259409

Many businesses borrow money during periods of increased business activity to finance inventory and accounts receivable. Neiman Marcus is one of America’s most prestigious retailers. Each Christmas season, Neiman Marcus builds up its inventory to meet the needs of Christmas shoppers. A large portion of these Christmas sales are on credit. As a result, Neiman Marcus often collects cash from the sales several months after Christmas. Assume that on November 1, 2011, Neiman Marcus borrowed $4.8 million cash from Texas Capital Bank for working capital purposes and signed an interest-bearing note due in six months. The interest rate was 8 percent per annum payable at maturity. The accounting period ends December 31.

Required:

1. Give the journal entry to record the note on November 1.

2. Give any adjusting entry required at the end of the annual accounting period.

3. Give the journal entry to record payment of the note and interest on the maturity date, April 30, 2012.

4. If Neiman Marcus needs extra cash during every Christmas season, should management borrow money on a long-term basis to avoid the necessity of negotiating a new short-term loan each year?

many companies have a form of debt called capital leases 259410

Many companies have a form of debt called capital leases. A capital lease is created when a company agrees to rent an asset, such as equipment or a building, for such a long time that GAAP treats the lease as if the asset were purchased using borrowed funds. A capital lease creates a liability for the company that acquired the leased asset because it has promised to make payments to another company for several years in the future. If a company has any capital leases, it must disclose them in the footnotes to the financial statements, and will sometimes disclose them in a separate account in the liabilities section of the balance sheet.

Using the most current Forms 10-K for Union Pacific Corporation, complete the requirements below. To obtain the 10-Ks use either the EDGAR system following the instructions in Appendix A, or the company’s website.

Required

a. What was Union Pacific’s debt to assets ratio? (You will need to compute total liabilities by subtracting ?oCommon shareholders’ equity?? from total assets.)

b. How much interest expense did Union Pacific incur?

c. What amount of liabilities did Union Pacific have as a result of capital leases? Footnote 5 presents information about Union Pacific’s leases.

d. What percentage of Union Pacific’s long-term liabilities was the result of capital leases?

e. Many companies try to structure (design) leasing agreements so their leases will not be

classified as capital leases. Explain why a company such as Union Pacific might want to avoid reporting capital leases.

marini corporation sold 2 600 000 9 20 year bonds on decembe 259425

Marini Corporation sold $2,600,000, 9%, 20-year bonds on December 31, 2011. The bonds were dated December 31, 2011, and pay interest on December 31. The company uses straight-line amortization for premiums and discounts. Financial statements are prepared annually.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds assuming they sold at:

(1) 98.

(2) 104.

(b) Prepare amortization tables for both of the assumed sales for the first three interest payments.

(c) Prepare the journal entries to record interest expense for the first two interest payments under both of the bond issuances assumed in part (a).

(d) Show the long-term liabilities balance sheet presentation for both of the bond issuances assumed in part (a) at December 31, 2012.

multiple choice questions 1 liabilities are recognized a in e 259482

Multiple-Choice Questions

1. Liabilities are recognized:

a. In exchange for goods.

b. In exchange for services.

c. In exchange for borrowing money.

d. All of the above.

2. When reporting liabilities on a balance sheet, in theory, what measurement should be used?

a. Future value of the present outflow

b. Present value of the present outflow

c. Future value of the future outflow

d. Present value of the future outflow

3. Kinsella Seed borrowed $200,000 on October 1, 2008, at 10 percent interest.

The interest and principal are due on September 30, 2009. What journal entry should be recorded on December 31, 2008?

a. Debit Interest Payable 5,000; credit Interest Expense 5,000.

b. Debit Interest Receivable 20,000; credit Interest Expense 20,000.

c. Debit Interest Expense 5,000; credit Interest Payable 5,000.

d. No entry is necessary.

4. Kinsella Seed borrowed $200,000 on October 1, 2008, at 10 percent interest.

The interest and principal are due on September 30, 2009. What journal entry should be made with respect to the interest payment on September 30, 2009?

a. Debit Interest Expense 15,000; debit Interest Payable 5,000; credit Cash 20,000.

b. Debit Interest Expense 15,000; credit Cash 15,000.

c. Debit Interest Expense 20,000; credit Cash 20,000.

d. Debit Cash 20,000; credit Interest Expense 15,000; credit Interest Payable 5,000.

5. Which of the following is not a current liability?

a. Bonds payable due in five years

b. Unearned revenue

c. Sales tax

d. Accounts payable

6. Which of the following is not an example of an accrued payable?

a. Wages payable

b. Accounts payable

c. Property taxes payable

d. Interest payable

7. Kramerica, Inc., sold 200 oil drums to Thompson Manufacturing for $100 each. In addition to the $100 sale price per drum, there is a $2 per drum federal excise tax and a 10 percent state sales tax. What journal entry should be made to record this sale?

a. Debit Accounts Receivable 20,000; debit Tax Expense 2,400; credit Federal Excise Tax Payable $400; credit State Sales Tax Payable 2,000; credit Revenue 20,000.

b. Debit Accounts Receivable 22,400; credit Federal Excise Tax Payable $400; credit State Sales Tax Payable 2,000; credit Revenue 20,000.

c. Debit Accounts Receivable 22,400; credit Revenue 22,400.

d. Debit Accounts Receivable 20,000; credit Revenue 20,000.

8. All of the following represent taxes commonly collected by businesses from customers except:

a. State sales tax

b. Federal excise tax

c. Local sales tax

d. Unemployment tax

multiple choice questions 1 which of the following statements r 259485

Multiple-Choice Questions

1. Which of the following statements regarding bonds payable is true?

a. Generally, bonds are issued in denominations of $100.

b. When an issuing company’s bonds are traded in the ?~?~secondary’’ market, the company will receive part of the proceeds when the bonds are sold from the first purchaser to the second purchaser.

c. A debenture bond is backed by specific assets of the issuing company.

d. The entire principal amount of most bonds mature on a single date.

2. Bonds are sold at a premium if the

a. Issuing company has a better reputation than other companies in the same business.

b. Market rate of interest was less than the stated rate at the time of issue.

c. Market rate of interest was more than the stated rate at the time of issue.

d. Company will have to pay a premium to retire the bonds.

3. If bonds are issued at 101.25, this means that

a. A $1,000 bond sold for $101.25.

b. The bonds sold at a discount.

c. A $1,000 bond sold for $1,012.50.

d. The bond rate of interest is 10.13 percent of the market rate of interest.

4. What best describes the discount on bonds payable account?

a. An asset

b. An expense

c. A liability

d. A contra liability

5. The premium on bonds payable account is shown on the balance sheet as

a. A contra asset.

b. A reduction of an expense.

c. An addition to a long-term liability.

d. A subtraction from a long-term liability.

6. When bonds are issued by a company, the accounting entry typically shows an

a. Increase in liabilities and a decrease in stockholders’ equity.

b. Increase in liabilities and an increase in stockholders’ equity.

c. Increase in assets and an increase in liabilities.

d. Increase in assets and an increase in stockholders’ equity.

7. The Bower Company sold $100,000 of 20-year bonds for $95,000. The stated rate on the bonds was 7 percent, and interest is paid annually on December 31. What entry would be made on December 31 when the interest is paid? (Numbers are omitted.)

a. Interest Expense

Cash

b. Interest Expense

Discount on Bonds Payable

Cash

c. Interest Expense

Discount on Bonds Payable

Cash

d. Interest Expense

Bonds Payable

Cash

8. Bonds in the amount of $100,000 with a life of 10 years were issued by the Roundy Company. If the stated rate is 6 percent and interest is paid semiannually, what would be the total amount of interest paid over the life of the bonds?

a. $60,000

b. $120,000

c. $30,000

d. $6,000

9. Sean Corp. issued a $40,000, 10-year bond, with a stated rate of 8 percent, paid semiannually. How much cash will the bond investors receive at the end of the first interest period?

a. $800

b. $1,600

c. $3,200

d. $4,000

multiple choice questions 1 which of the following statements r 259487

Multiple-Choice Questions

1. Which of the following statements regarding leases is false?

a. Lease agreements are a popular form of financing the purchase of assets because leases do not require a large initial outlay of cash.

b. Accounting recognizes two types of leases-operating and capital leases.

c. If a lease is classified as an operating lease, the lessee records a lease liability on its balance sheet.

d. If a lease is classified as a capital lease, the lessee records a lease liability on its balance sheet.

2. Which of the following lease conditions would result in a capital lease to the lessee?

a. The lessee will return the property to the lessor at the end of the lease term.

b. The lessee can purchase the property for $1 at the end of the lease term.

c. The fair market value of the property at the inception of the lease is $18,000; the present value of the minimum lease payments is $15,977.

d. The lease term is 70 percent of the property’s economic life.

3. On January 2, 2007, Sylvester Metals Co. leased a mining machine from EDH Leasing Corp. The lease qualifies as an operating lease. The annual payments are $4,000 paid at the end of each year, and the life of the lease is 10 years. What entry would Sylvester Metals Co. make when the machine is delivered by EDH Leasing Corp.?

a. Leased Asset 40,000

Lease Liability 40,000

b. Prepaid Rent 40,000

Lease Liability 40,000

c. Prepaid Rent 4,000

Lease Liability 4,000

d. No entry is necessary.

4. WVA Mining Company has leased a machine from Franklin Machinery Company. The annual payments are $6,000, and the life of the lease is 8 years. It is estimated that the useful life of the machine is 9 years. How would WVA Mining record the acquisition of the machine?

a. The machine would be recorded as an asset with a cost of $48,000.

b. The company would not record the machine as an asset but would record rent expense of $6,000 per year.

c. The machine would be recorded as an asset, at the present value of the annual cash payments, $6,000 for eight years.

d. The machine would be recorded as an asset, at the present value of the annual cash payments, $6,000 for nine years.

5. Willow Corporation’s balance sheet showed the following amounts: Current Liabilities, $5,000; Bonds Payable, $1,500; Lease Obligations, 2,300. Total stockholders’ equity was $6,000. The debt-to-equity ratio is:

a. 0.63.

b. 0.83.

c. 1.42.

d. 1.47.

6. Kinsella Corporation’s balance sheet showed the following amounts: Current Liabilities, $75,000; Total Liabilities, $100,000; Total Assets, $200,000. What is the long-term debt to equity ratio?

a. 0.75

b. 0.375

c. 0.25

d. 0.125

7. McLaughlin Corporation’s balance sheet showed the following amounts: Current Liabilities, $75,000; Total Liabilities, $100,000; Total Assets, $200,000. What is the debt to total assets ratio?

a. 2

b. 1

c. 0.875

d. 0.5

8. The bond issue price is determined by calculating the:

a. Present value of the stream of interest payments and the future value of the maturity amount.

b. Future value of the stream of interest payments and the future value of the maturity amount.

c. Future value of the stream of interest payments and the present value of the maturity amount.

d. Present value of the stream of interest payments and the present value of the maturity amount.

multiple choice questions a which of the following ratios can 259488

Multiple-choice questions:

a. Which of the following ratios can be used as a guide to a firm’s ability to carry debt from an income perspective?

1. Debt ratio

2. Debt to tangible net worth

3. Debt/equity

4. Times interest earned

5. Current ratio

b. There is disagreement on all but which of the following items as to whether it should be considered a liability in the debt ratio?

1. Short-term liabilities

2. Reserve accounts

3. Deferred taxes

4. Noncontrolling income (loss)

5. Preferred stock

c. A firm may have substantial liabilities that are not disclosed on the face of the balance sheet from all but which of the following?

1. Leases

2. Pension plans

3. Joint ventures

4. Contingencies

5. Bonds payable

d. In computing the debt ratio, which of the following is subtracted in the denominator?

1. Copyrights

2. Trademarks

3. Patents

4. Marketable securities

5. None of the above

e. All but which of these ratios are considered to be debt ratios?

1. Times interest earned

2. Debt ratio

3. Debt/equity

4. Fixed charge ratio

5. Current ratio

f. Which of the following statements is false?

1. The debt to tangible net worth ratio is more conservative than the debt ratio.

2. The debt to tangible net worth ratio is more conservative than the debt/equity ratio.

3. Times interest earned indicates an income statement view of debt.

4. The debt/equity ratio indicates an income statement view of debt.

5. The debt ratio indicates a balance sheet view of debt.

g. Sneider Company has long-term debt of $500,000, while Abbott Company has long-term debt of $50,000. Which of the following statements best represents an analysis of the long-term debt position of these two firms?

1. Sneider Company’s times interest earned should be lower than Abbott Company’s.

2. Abbott Company’s times interest earned should be lower than Sneider Company’s.

3. Abbott Company has a better long-term borrowing ability than does Sneider Company.

4. Sneider Company has a better long-term borrowing ability than does Abbott Company.

5. None of the above

h. A times interest earned ratio of 0.20 to 1 means

1. That the firm will default on its interest payment.

2. That net income is less than the interest expense (including capitalized interest).

3. That cash flow exceeds the net income.

4. That the firm should reduce its debt.

5. None of the above

i. In computing debt to tangible net worth, which of the following is not subtracted in the denominator?

1. Patents

2. Goodwill

3. Land

4. Bonds payable

5. Both 3 and 4

j. The ratio fixed charge coverage

1. Is a cash flow indication of debt-paying ability.

2. Is an income statement indication of debt-paying ability.

3. Is a balance sheet indication of debt-paying ability.

4. Will usually be higher than the times interest earned ratio.

5. None of the above

k. Under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act, a company can be liable for its pension plan up to

1. 30% of its net worth.

2. 30% of pension liabilities.

3. 30% of liabilities.

4. 40% of its net worth.

5. None of the above

l. Which of the following statements is correct?

1. Capitalized interest should be included with interest expense when computing times interest earned.

2. A ratio that indicates a firm’s long-term debt-paying ability from the balance sheet view is the times interest earned.

3. Some of the items on the income statement that are excluded in order to compute times interest earned are interest expense, income taxes, and interest income.

4. Usually, the highest times interest coverage in the most recent five-year period is used as the primary indication of the interest coverage.

5. None of the above

m. Which of these items does not represent a definite commitment to pay out funds in the future?

1. Notes payable

2. Bonds payable

3. Noncontrolling interests

4. Wages payable

5. None of the above

norman co borrowed 15 000 from the local bank on april 259510

Norman Co. borrowed $15,000 from the local bank on April 1, 2012, when the company was started. The note had an 8 percent annual interest rate and a one-year term to maturity. Norman Co. recognized $42,000 of revenue on account in 2012 and $56,000 of revenue on account in 2013. Cash collections from accounts receivable were $38,000 in 2012 and $58,000 in 2013.

Norman Co. paid $26,000 of salaries expense in 2012 and $32,000 of salaries expense in 2013. Norman Co. paid the loan and interest at the maturity date.

Required

a. Organize the information in accounts under an accounting equation.

b. What amount of net cash flow from operating activities would be reported on the 2012 cash flow statement?

c. What amount of interest expense would be reported on the 2012 income statement?

d. What amount of total liabilities would be reported on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet?

e. What amount of retained earnings would be reported on the December 31, 2012, balance sheet?

f. What amount of cash flow from financing activities would be reported on the 2012 statement of cash flows?

g. What amount of interest expense would be reported on the 2013 income statement?

h. What amount of cash flows from operating activities would be reported on the 2013 cash flow statement?

i. What amount of assets would be reported on the December 31, 2013, balance sheet?

off balance sheet financing matt ryan corporation is intereste 259525

(Off-Balance-Sheet Financing) Matt Ryan Corporation is interested in building its own soda can manufacturing plant adjacent to its existing plant in Partyville, Kansas. The objective would be to ensure a steady supply of cans at a stable price and to minimize transportation costs. However, the company has been experiencing some financial problems and has been reluctant to borrow any additional cash to fund the project. The company is not concerned with the cash flow problems of making payments, but rather with the impact of adding additional long-term debt to its balance sheet.

The president of Ryan, Andy Newline, approached the president of the Aluminum Can Company (ACC), their major supplier, to see if some agreement could be reached. ACC was anxious to work out an arrangement, since it seemed inevitable that Ryan would begin their own can production. The Aluminum Can Company could not afford to lose the account. After some discussion a two-part plan was worked out. First, ACC was to construct the plant on Ryan’s land adjacent to the existing plant. Second, Ryan would sign a 20-year purchase agreement. Under the purchase agreement, Ryan would express its intention to buy all of its cans from ACC, paying a unit price which at normal capacity would cover labor and material, an operating management fee, and the debt service requirements on the plant. The expected unit price, if transportation costs are taken into consideration, is lower than current market. If Ryan did not take enough production in any one year and if the excess cans could not be sold at a high enough price on the open market, Ryan agrees to make up any cash shortfall so that ACC could make the payments on its debt. The bank will be willing to make a 20-year loan for the plant, taking the plant and the purchase agreement as collateral. At the end of 20 years the plant is to become the property of Ryan.

(a) What are project financing arrangements using special purpose entities?

(b) What are take-or-pay contracts?

(c) Should Ryan record the plant as an asset together with the related obligation?

(d) If not, should Ryan record an asset relating to the future commitment?

(e) What is meant by off-balance-sheet financing?

on december 31 2007 atwood table company has 8 million 259544

On December 31, 2007 Atwood Table Company has $8 million of short-term notes payable owed to City National Bank. On February 1, 2008 Atwood negotiates a revolving credit agreement providing for unrestricted borrowings up to $6 million. Borrowings will bear interest at 1% over the prevailing prime rate, will have stated maturities of 120 days, and will be continuously renewable for 120-day periods for four years. Atwood plans to refinance as much as possible of the notes outstanding with the proceeds available from this agreement. Assume that Atwood’s December 31, 2007 year-end financial statements are issued on March 30, 2008.

Required

Prepare a partial December 31, 2007 balance sheet for Atwood Table Company showing how the $8 million short-term debt should be reported.

on december 31 2012 the american bank enters into a 259572

On December 31, 2012, the American Bank enters into a debt restructuring agreement with Barkley Company, which is now experiencing financial trouble. The bank agrees to restructure a 12%, issued at par, $3,000,000 note receivable by the following modifications:

1. Reducing the principal obligation from $3,000,000 to $2,400,000.

2. Extending the maturity date from December 31, 2012, to January 1, 2016.

3. Reducing the interest rate from 12% to 10%.

Barkley pays interest at the end of each year. On January 1, 2016, Barkley Company pays $2,400,000 in cash to Firstar Bank.

Instructions

(a) Will the gain recorded by Barkley be equal to the loss recorded by American Bank under the debt restructuring?

(b) Can Barkley Company record a gain under the term modification mentioned above? Explain.

(c) Assuming that the interest rate Barkley should use to compute interest expense in future periods is 1.4276%, prepare the interest payment schedule of the note for Barkley Company after the debt restructuring.

(d) Prepare the interest payment entry for Barkley Company on December 31, 2014.

(e) What entry should Barkley make on January 1, 2016?

accounting managerial 258580

The PaciSc Manufacturing Company operates a job-order costing system and applies overhead cost to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost. Its predetermined overhead rate was based on a cost formula that estimated $126,000 of manufacturing overhead for an estimated allocation base of $84,000 direct labor dollars. The company has provided the following data in the form of an Excel worksheet:

4715-3-24IP1.png (353×279)

Required:

1. a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate for the year.

b. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year.

2. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year. Assume all raw materials are used in production as direct materials.

3. Compute the unadjusted cost of goods sold for the year. (Do not include any underapplied or overapplied overhead in your cost of goods sold Sgure.) What options are available for disposing of underapplied or overapplied overhead?

4. Job 137 was started and completed during the year. What price would have been charged to the customer if the job required $3,200 in materials and $4,200 in direct labor cost, and the company priced its jobs at 40% above the job”s cost according to the accounting system?

5. Direct labor made up $8,000 of the $40,000 ending Work in Process inventory balance. Supply the information missing below: Direct materials $ ? Direct labor 8,000 Manufacturing overhead ? Work in process inventory$40,000

Direct materials  $?

Direct labor  8,000

Manufacturing  overhead ?

Work in process inventory$40,000

 

effect of temporary differences on income taxes woodward corpor 258585

Effect of temporary differences on income taxes. Woodward Corporation purchases a new machine for $50,000 on January 1, 2008. The machine has a four-year estimated service life and an estimated salvage value of zero. After paying the cost of running and maintaining the machine, the firm enjoys a $25,000-per-year excess of revenue over expenses (except depreciation and taxes). In addition to the $25,000 from the machine, other pretax income each year is $35,000. Woodward uses straight-line depreciation for financial reporting and depreciates the machine for tax reporting using the following percentages: 33% in the first year, 44% in the second, 15% in the third, and 8% in the fourth. Depreciation is Woodward’s only temporary differences. Woodward pays combined federal and local income taxes at a rate of 40% of taxable income.

(a) Compute the amount of income taxes currently payable for each of the four years.

(b) Compute the carrying value of the machine for financial reporting and the tax basis of the machine for tax reporting at the end of each of the four years. The tax basis is the amortized cost for income tax purposes.

(c) Compute the amount of income tax expense for each of the four years.

(d) Give the journal entries to record income tax expense and income tax payable for 2008 through 2011.

effective interest method samantha cordelia an intermediate a 258586

(Effective-Interest Method) Samantha Cordelia, an intermediate accounting student, is having difficulty amortizing bond premiums and discounts using the effective-interest method. Furthermore, she cannot understand why GAAP requires that this method be used instead of the straight-line method. She has come to you with the following problem, looking for help.

On June 30, 2010, Hobart Company issued $2,000,000 face value of 11%, 20-year bonds at $2,171,600, a yield of 10%. Hobart Company uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premiums or discounts. The bonds pay semiannual interest on June 30 and December 31. Compute the amortization schedule for four periods. Using the data above for illustrative purposes, write a short memo (1–1.5 pages double-spaced) to Samantha, explaining what the effective-interest method is, why it is preferable, and how it is computed. (Do not forget to include an amortization schedule, referring to it whenever necessary.)

1 calculate net cash flows for 10 years 10 marks 2 evaluate the project by usin 258591

Mr. Ali wants to start “Rent-A-Car” business. He wants to start this business with at least 20cars. He estimates that the required investment for the business is Rs. 30 Million. He projectsthat revenue (before tax and depreciation) from the business will be Rs. 6 Million for the firstyear and it will keep on g rowing at a rate of 5% annually till the 10thyear.Some other information regarding the project is as follows:? Annual depreciation will be Rs. 3 Million under the straight line method.? Cost of capital is 10% while the rate of tax is 35%.Suppose you are running a financial consultancy firm, Mr. Ali wants to get his project evaluatedby your firm. You have to suggest Mr. Ali about the feasibility of the project after applyingdifferent capital budgeting techniques.

Document Preview:

SEMESTER FALL 2012 BUSINESS FINANCE (ACC501) ASSIGNMENT # 02 ND DUE DATE: 22 JANUARY 2013 MARKS: 30 Learning Objectives: After attempting this assignment whole-heartedly, the students will be able to: ? Calculate net cash flows by incorporating the effects of depreciation and tax. ? Evaluate any proposed project by using different capital budgeting techniques. ? Derive inferences regarding the acceptance/rejections of the project. Assignment: Mr. Ali wants to start “Rent-A-Car” business. He wants to start this business with at least 20 cars. He estimates that the required investment for the business is Rs. 30 Million. He projects that revenue (before tax and depreciation) from the business will be Rs. 6 Million for the first th year and it will keep on growing at a rate of 5% annually till the 10 year. Some other information regarding the project is as follows: ? Annual depreciation will be Rs. 3 Million under the straight line method. ? Cost of capital is 10% while the rate of tax is 35%. Suppose you are running a financial consultancy firm, Mr. Ali wants to get his project evaluated by your firm. You have to suggest Mr. Ali about the feasibility of the project after applying different capital budgeting techniques. Requirement: Keeping your task into consideration, provide answers to the following: 1. Calculate net cash flows for 10 years. (10 Marks) 2. Evaluate the project by using the following capital budgeting techniques: a. Payback Period (The desired payback period is 5 years) (04 Marks) b. Net Present Value (10 Marks) c. Profitability Index (03 Marks)3. Is there any contradiction among the results of above used techniques? What would be your final recommendation regarding the acceptance/rejection of the project? Support your recommendation with financial rationale. (03 Marks) Special Note: Complete calculations are required for Part (1) and Part (2). Incomplete…

Attachments:

entries and questions for bond transactions on june 30 2010 258608

(Entries and Questions for Bond Transactions) On June 30, 2010, Mackes Company issued $5,000,000 face value of 13%, 20-year bonds at $5,376,150, a yield of 12%. Mackes uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount. The bonds pay semiannual interest on June 30 and December 31.

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the following transactions.

(1) The issuance of the bonds on June 30, 2010.

(2) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2010.

(3) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on June 30, 2011.

(4) The payment of interest and the amortization of the premium on December 31, 2011.

(b) Show the proper balance sheet presentation for the liability for bonds payable on the December 31, 2011, balance sheet.

(c) Provide the answers to the following questions.

(1) What amount of interest expense is reported for 2011?

(2) Will the bond interest expense reported in 2011 be the same as, greater than, or less than the amount that would be reported if the straight-line method of amortization were used?

(3) Determine the total cost of borrowing over the life of the bond.

(4) Will the total bond interest expense for the life of the bond be greater than, the same as, or less than the total interest expense if the straight-line method of amortization were used?

entries for life cycle of bonds on april 1 2010 258612

(Entries for Life Cycle of Bonds) On April 1, 2010, Seminole Company sold 15,000 of its 11%, 15-year, $1,000 face value bonds at 97. Interest payment dates are April 1 and October 1, and the company uses the straight-line method of bond discount amortization. On March 1, 2011, Seminole took advantage of favorable prices of its stock to extinguish 6,000 of the bonds by issuing 200,000 shares of its $10 par value common stock. At this time, the accrued interest was paid in cash. The company’s stock was selling for $31 per share on March 1, 2011.

Prepare the journal entries needed on the books of Seminole Company to record the following.

(a) April 1, 2010: issuance of the bonds.

(b) October 1, 2010: payment of semiannual interest.

(c) December 31, 2010: accrual of interest expense.

(d) March 1, 2011: extinguishment of 6,000 bonds. (No reversing entries made.)

entry for retirement of bond bond issue costs on january 258615

(Entry for Retirement of Bond; Bond Issue Costs) On January 2, 2005, Prebish Corporation issued $1,500,000 of 10% bonds at 97 due December 31, 2014. Legal and other costs of $24,000 were incurred in connection with the issue. Interest on the bonds is payable annually each December 31. The $24,000 issue costs are being deferred and amortized on a straight-line basis over the 10-year term of the bonds. The discount on the bonds is also being amortized on a straight-line basis over the 10 years. (Straight-line is not materially different in effect from the preferable ?ointerest method??.) The bonds are callable at 101 (i.e., at 101% of face amount), and on January 2, 2010, Prebish called $1,000,000 face amount of the bonds and retired them. Ignoring income taxes, compute the amount of loss, if any, to be recognized by Prebish as a result of retiring the $1,000,000 of bonds in 2010 and prepare the journal entry to record the retirement.

(AICPA adapted)

evans ltd publishes a monthly newsletter for retail marketing m 258622

Evans Ltd. publishes a monthly newsletter for retail marketing managers and requires its subscribers to pay $50 in advance for a one-year subscription. During the month of September 2010, Evans Ltd. sold 200 one-year subscriptions and received payments in advance from all new subscribers. Only 120 of the new subscribers paid their fees in time to receive the September newsletter; the other subscriptions began with the October newsletter.

Required:

a. Use the horizontal model (or write the journal entries) to record the effects of the following items:

1. Subscription fees received in advance during September 2010.

2. Subscription revenue earned during September 2010.

b. Calculate the amount of subscription revenue earned by Evans Ltd. during the year ended December 31, 2010, for these 200 subscriptions.

Evans Ltd. is now considering the possibility of offering a lifetime membership option to its subscribers. Under this proposal, subscribers could receive the monthly newsletter throughout their lives by paying a flat fee of $600. The one-year subscription rate of $50 would continue to apply to new and existing subscribers who choose to subscribe on an annual basis. Assume that the average age of Evans Ltd.’s current subscribers is 38, and their average life expectancy is 78 years. Evans Ltd.’s average interest rate on long-term debt is 12%.

c. Using the information given, determine whether it would be profitable for Evans Ltd. to sell lifetime subscriptions.

d. What additional factors should Evans Ltd. consider in determining whether to offer a lifetime membership option? Explain your answer as specifically as possible.

fallon company a toy manufacturer that also operates several re 258669

Fallon Company, a toy manufacturer that also operates several retail outlets, is preparing its December 31, 2007 financial statements. It has identified the following legal situations that may qualify as contingencies:

1. A customer is suing the company for $800,000 in damages because her child was injured in November 2007 while riding an escalator that stopped suddenly in one of its stores. The child was hurt when he tripped and fell while walking ?odown?? an escalator that was going ?oup.?? Legal counsel feels that the child is partially at fault, but that it is probable that the lawsuit will be settled for between $50,000 and $100,000, with $80,000 being the most likely amount.

2. The company has discovered that a skateboard it began manufacturing and selling in 2007 has defective bearings, sometimes causing a wheel to fall off. The company has issued a ?orecall?? notice in newspapers and magazines in which it offers to replace the bearings. It estimates a cost of $200,000 for these repairs. No lawsuits have been filed for injury claims, although the company feels that there is a reasonable possibility that claims may total as high as $2 million.

3. The company has an incinerator behind one of its retail outlets which is used to burn cardboard boxes received in shipments of inventory from suppliers. The state environmental protection agency filed suit against the company in August 2007 for air pollution. The company expects to stop using the incinerator and begin recycling. However, its lawyers believe that it is probable that a fine of between $40,000 and $60,000 will be levied against the company, although they cannot predict the exact amount.

4. In early 2007 the company signed a contract with a computer vendor to install ?ostate of the art?? cash registers in all of its retail outlets. Because of the vendor’s inability to acquire sufficient cash registers, the vendor canceled the contract. The company has filed a breach of contract suit against the vendor, claiming $300,000 in damages. The company’s lawyers expect that it will settle the suit ?oout of court?? for $150,000.

Required

For each situation, prepare the journal entry (if any) on December 31, 2007 to record the information for Fallon Company, and explain your reasoning. If no journal entry is recorded, explain how the information would be disclosed in Fallon Company’s 2007 annual report.

simulation professional simulation in this simulation you are asked to address 258702

Simulation – Professional Simulation In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding accounting for pensions.

Document Preview:

Professional Simulation In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding accounting for pensions. Prepare responses to all parts. Melanie Vail Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan. Plan assets $480,000 Projected benefit obligation 625,000 Accumulated OCI (PSC) 100,000 Dr. As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary. Service cost for 2012 $90,000 Settlement rate 9% Actual return on plan assets in 2012 57,000 Amortization of prior service cost 19,000 Expected return on plan assets 52,000 Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions 76,000 Contributions in 2012 99,000 Benefits paid retirees in 2012 85,000 Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources (a) Use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. (b) Compute the same items as in (a), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Prepare the journal entry to record pension expense in 2012. Indicate the reporting of the 2012 pension amounts in this income statement and balance sheet. 12345 A B C + KWW_Professional_Simulation Accounting for Pensions Time Remaining 2 hours 20 minutes Unsplit Split Horiz Split Vertical Spreadsheet Calculator Exit ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

case for global accounting standards introduction keypoints with descriptions 258718

case for global accounting standards

introduction, keypoints with descriptions and conclusion minimum 2000 words, with no plagarism

Document Preview:

1 Appendix The Case for Global Accounting Standards: Arguments and Evidence Ann Tarca Professor of Accounting, University of Western Australia. Academic Fellow -Research, IFRS Foundation1 Abstract This paper outlines the arguments for a common set of accounting standards and the forces that have promoted adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). Widespread use of IFRS since 2005 provides an opportunity for empirical investigation of the benefits of IFRS. I summarise results of studies that are relevant for assessing the role of IFRS in both developing and developed capital markets. Introduction The expected benefits of global accounting standards are compelling. The use of one set of high quality standards by companies throughout the world has the potential to improve the comparability and transparency of financial information and reduce financial statement preparation costs. When the standards are applied rigorously and consistently, capital market participants will have higher quality information and can make better decisions. Thus markets allocate funds more efficiently and firms can achieve a lower cost of capital. These arguments have been used to support the adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) for financial reporting for consolidated listed entities in European Union (EU) member states (EC1606/2002). Other jurisdictions have cited similar reasons for adoption of IFRS (see Brown, 2011), reflecting the demand for high quality standards that can improve the quality and comparability of financial reporting and promote the development of national capital markets and the integration of markets internationally. For the first time in history, we have substantial numbers of firms domiciled in different countries using common standards. Consequently we can collect evidence about the extent to which we observe benefits in capital markets. This paper presents research findings about the impact of adoption of IFRS since 2005…

Attachments:

for the year ended december 31 2010 blasing electrical repair 258724

For the year ended December 31, 2010, Blasing Electrical Repair Company reports the following summary payroll data.

?

Blasing Company’s payroll taxes are: FICA 8%, state unemployment 2.5% (due to a stable employment record), and 0.8% federal unemployment. Gross earnings subject to FICA taxes total $485,000, and gross earnings subject to unemployment taxes total $135,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a summary journal entry at December 31 for the full year’s payroll.

(b) Journalize the adjusting entry at December 31 to record the employer’s payroll taxes.

(c) The W-2 Wage and Tax Statement requires the following dollardata.

fridley manufacturing s accounting records reveal the following 258749

Fridley Manufacturing’s accounting records reveal the following account balances after adjusting entries are made on December 31, 2012:

Accounts payable ……………………………………………………….$ 62,500

Bonds payable (9.4%, due in 2019) ……………………………………. 800,000

Capital lease liability* ………………………………………………….. 41,500

Bonds payable (8.7%, due in 2015) ……………………………………. 50,000

Deferred tax liability* ………………………………………………….. 133,400

Discount on bonds payable (9.4%, due in 2019) ………………………. 12,600

Income taxes payable …………………………………………………… 26,900

Interest payable ………………………………………………………… 38,700

Installment note payable (8% equal installments due

2013 to 2016) …………………………………………………………… 120,000

Notes payable (7.8%, due in 2017) ……………………………………… 400,000

Premium on notes payable (7.8%, due in 2017) ………………………… 6,100

Zero coupon note payable, $50,000 face amount, due in 2018 ………… 31,900

* Long-term liability

Required:

Prepare the current liabilities and long-term debt portions of Fridley’s balance sheet at December 31, 2012. Provide a separate line item for each issue (i.e., do not combine separate bonds or notes payable), but some items may need to be split into more than one item.

gearing manufacturing inc is planning a 1 000 000 expansion 258771

Gearing Manufacturing, Inc., is planning a $1,000,000 expansion of its production facilities. The expansion could be financed by the sale of $1,250,000 in 8 percent notes or by the sale of $1,250,000 in capital stock, which would raise the number of shares outstanding from 50,000 to 75,000. Gearing pays income taxes at a rate of 30 percent.

Required:

1. Suppose that income from operations is expected to be $550,000 per year for the duration of the proposed debt issue. Should Gearing finance with notes or stock? Explain your answer.

2. Suppose that income from operations is expected to be $275,000 per year for the duration of the proposed debt issue. Should Gearing finance with notes or stock? Explain your answer.

3. Suppose that income from operations varies from year to year but is expected to be above $300,000, 40 percent of the time and below $300,000, 60 percent of the time. Should Gearing finance with notes or stock? Explain your answer.

4. As an investor, how would you use accounting information to evaluate the risk of excessive use of leverage? What additional information would be useful? Explain.

hechinger co and home depot are two home improvement retailers 258826

Hechinger Co. and Home Depot are two home improvement retailers. Compared to Hechinger, founded in the early 1900s, Home Depot is a relative newcomer. But, in recent years, while Home Depot was reporting large increases in net income, Hechinger was reporting increasingly large net losses. Finally, largely due to competition from Home Depot, Hechinger was forced to file for bankruptcy. Here are financial data for both companies (in millions).

?



Instructions

Using the data provided, perform the following analysis.

(a) Calculate working capital and the current ratio for each company. Discuss their relative liquidity.

(b) Calculate the debt to total assets ratio and times interest earned for each company. Discuss their relative solvency.

(c) Calculate the return on assets ratio and profit margin ratio for each company. Comment on their relative profitability.

(d) The notes to Home Depot’s financial statements indicate that it leases many of its facilities using operating leases. If these assets had instead been purchased with debt, assets and liabilities would have increased by approximately $2,347 million. Calculate the company’s debt to total assets ratio employing this adjustment. Discuss the implications.

hincapie co manufactures specialty bike accessories the compan 258844

Hincapie Co. manufactures specialty bike accessories. The company is most well known for its product quality, and it has offered one of the best warranties in the industry on its higher-priced products—a lifetime guarantee. The warranty on these products is included in the sales price. Hincapie has a contract with a service company, which performs all warranty work on Hincapie products. Under the contract, Hincapie guarantees the service company at least $200,000 of warranty work for each year of the 3-year contract.

The recent economic recession has been hard on Hincapie’s business, and sales for its higher-end products have been especially adversely impacted. As a result, Hincapie is planning to restructure its high-quality lines by moving manufacturing for those products into one of its other factories, shutting down assembly lines, and terminating workers. In order to keep some workers on-board, Hincapie plans to bring all warranty work in-house. It can terminate the current warranty contract by making a one-time termination payment of $75,000.

The restructuring plans have been discussed by management during November 2010; they plan to get approval from the board of directors at the December board meeting and execute the restructuring in early 2011. Given the company’s past success, the accounting for restructuring activities has never come up. Hincapie would like you to do some research on how it should account for this restructuring according to IFRS.

Instructions

Access the IFRS authoritative literature at the IASB website (http://eifrs.iasb.org/). When you have accessed the documents, you can use the search tool in your Internet browser to respond to the following questions. (Provide paragraph citations.)

(a) Identify the accounting literature that addresses the accounting for the various costs that will be incurred in the restructuring.

(b) Advise Hincapie on the restructuring costs. When should Hincapie recognize liabilities arising from the restructuring? What costs can be included? What costs are excluded?

(c) Does Hincapie have a liability related to the service contract? Explain. If Hincapie has a liability, at what amount should it be recorded?

hira hardware has four employees who are paid on an 258845

Hira Hardware has four employees who are paid on an hourly basis plus time-and-a half for all hours worked in excess of 40 a week. Payroll data for the week ended March 15, 2012, are presented below.

?

Hana and Alina are married. They claim 0 and 4 withholding allowances, respectively. The following tax rates are applicable: FICA 8%, state income taxes 3%, state unemployment taxes 5.4%, and federal unemployment 0.8%.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a payroll register for the weekly payroll. (Use the wage-bracket withholding table in the text for federal income tax withholdings.)

(b) Journalize the payroll on March 15, 2012, and the accrual of employer payroll taxes.

(c) Journalize the payment of the payroll on March 16, 2012.

(d) Journalize the deposit in a Federal Reserve bank on March 31, 2012, of the FICA and federal income taxes payable to thegovernment.

impact of a discount berol corporation sold 20 year bonds on 258944

Impact of a Discount Berol Corporation sold 20-year bonds on January 1, 2010. The face value of the bonds was $100,000, and they carry a 9% stated rate of interest, which is paid on December 31 of every year. Berol received $91,526 in return for the issuance of the bonds when the market rate was 10%. Any premium or discount is amortized using the effective interest method.

Required

1. Identify and analyze the effect of the sale of the bonds on January 1, 2010, and the proper balance sheet presentation on this date.

2. Identify and analyze the effect of the payment of interest December 31, 2010, and the proper balance sheet presentation on this date.

3. Explain why it was necessary for Berol to issue the bonds for only $91,526 rather than $100,000.

impact of transactions involving capital leases on statement of 258948

Impact of Transactions Involving Capital Leases on Statement of Cash Flows Assume that Garnett Corporation signs a lease agreement with Duncan Company to lease a piece of equipment and determines that the lease should be treated as a capital lease. Garnett records a leased asset in the amount of $53,400 and a lease obligation in the same amount on its balance sheet.

Required

1. Indicate how this transaction would be reported on Garnett’s statement of cash flows.

2. In the following list of transactions relating to this lease, identify each item as operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or not separately reported on the statement of cash flows (N). ____________ Reduction of lease obligation (principal portion of lease payment)

____________ Interest expense

____________ Depreciation expense—leased assets

issuance and retirement of bonds income statement presentation 259226

(Issuance and Retirement of Bonds; Income Statement Presentation) Holiday Company issued its 9%, 25-year mortgage bonds in the principal amount of $3,000,000 on January 2, 1996, at a discount of $150,000, which it proceeded to amortize by charges to expense over the life of the issue on a straight-line basis. The indenture securing the issue provided that the bonds could be called for redemption in total but not in part at any time before maturity at 104% of the principal amount, but it did not provide for any sinking fund. On December 18, 2010, the company issued its 11%, 20-year debenture bonds in the principal amount of $4,000,000 at 102, and the proceeds were used to redeem the 9%, 25-year mortgage bonds on January 2, 2011. The indenture securing the new issue did not provide for any sinking fund or for retirement before maturity.

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of the 11% bonds and the retirement of the 9% bonds.

(b) Indicate the income statement treatment of the gain or loss from retirement and the note disclosure required.

compensated absences the bettinghaus corporation began business 257984

Compensated Absences The Bettinghaus Corporation began business on January 2, 2007 with five employees. It created a sick leave and vacation policy stated as follows: Each employee is allowed eight days of paid sick leave each year and one day of paid vacation leave for each month worked. The accrued vacation leave cannot be taken until the employee has been with the company one year. The sick leave, if not used, accumulates to an 18-day maximum. The vacation leave accumulates for five years, but at any time the employee may request additional compensation in lieu of taking paid vacation leave. The company considers that the requirements of FASB Statement No. 43 have been met and desires to record the liability for both compensated absences on a quarterly basis. The daily gross wages for each employee are $160.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the liability for compensated absences for the first quarter of 2007. Assume no sick leave had been taken by the employees.

2. Prepare a partial interim balance sheet showing how the liability created in Requirement 1 would be reported on March 31, 2007.

connor corporation sells rock climbing products and also operate 257996

Connor Corporation sells rock-climbing products and also operates an indoor climbing facility for climbing enthusiasts. During the last part of 2012, Connor had the following transactions related to notes payable.

Sept. 1 Issued a $12,000 note to Patrick to purchase inventory. The 3-month note payable bears interest of 6% and is due December 1. (Connor uses a perpetual inventory system.)

Sept. 30 Recorded accrued interest for the Patrick note.

Oct. 1 Issued a $16,500, 8%, 4-month note to Canton Bank to finance the purchase of a new climbing wall for advanced climbers. The note is due

February 1.

Oct. 31 Recorded accrued interest for the Patrick note and the Canton Bank note.

Nov. 1 Issued a $26,000 note and paid $8,000 cash to purchase a vehicle to transport clients to nearby climbing sites as part of a new series of climbing classes. This note bears interest of 6% and matures in 12 months.

Nov. 30 Recorded accrued interest for the Patrick note, the Canton Bank note, and the vehicle note.

Dec. 1 Paid principal and interest on the Patrick note.

Dec. 31 Recorded accrued interest for the Canton Bank note and the vehicle note.

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries for the transactions noted above.

(b) Post the above entries to the Notes Payable, Interest Payable, and Interest Expense accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of notes payable and interest payable at December 31.

(d) How much interest expense relating to notes payable did Connor incur during the year?

coral sands marina issued 100 ten year bonds july 1 2012 258028

Coral Sands Marina issued 100 ten-year bonds July 1, 2012. The interest payments are due semiannually (January 1 and July 1) at an annual rate of 8 percent. The effective rate on the bonds is 6 percent. The face value of each bond is $1,000.

(a) Prepare the journal entry that would be recorded on July 1, 2012, when the bonds are issued.

(b) Prepare the journal entries that would be recorded on December 31, 2012.

(c) Compute the balance sheet value of the bond liability as of December 31, 2012.

(d) Compute the present value of the bonds remaining cash flows as of December 31, 2012, using the effective rate at the time the bonds were issued. Explain the relationship between the balance sheet value of the liability and the present value of the future cash payments.

craig corporation s accounting records reveal the following acco 258038

Craig Corporation’s accounting records reveal the following account balances after adjusting entries are made on December 31, 2008:

Accounts payable ………………………………………………………..$ 73,000

Bonds payable (9.4%, due in 2013) ……………………………………… 900,000

Capital lease liability* …………………………………………………… 30,000

Bonds payable (8.3%, due in 2012) ……………………………………… 60,000

Deferred tax liability* …………………………………………………… 127,600

Discount on bonds payable (9.4%, due in 2013) ………………………… 11,900

Income taxes payable ……………………………………………………. 28,100

Interest payable ………………………………………………………….. 33,400

Installment note payable (9%, equal installments due 2009 to 2015) …… 110,000

Notes payable (7.8%, due in 2017) ………………………………………. 350,000

Premium on notes payable (7.8%, due in 2017) …………………………. 5,000

Zero coupon note payable, $50,000 face amount, due in 2019 ………….. 29,800

* Long-term liability

Required:

Prepare the current liabilities and long-term-debt portions of Craig’s balance sheet at December 31, 2008. Provide a separate line item for each issue (i.e., do not combine separate bonds or notes payable), but some items may need to be split into more than one item.

curb company completed the following transactions during 2009 t 258040

Curb Company completed the following transactions during 2009. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2009.

Jan. 15 Purchased and paid for merchandise for resale at an invoice cost of $14,200; periodic inventory system.

Apr. 1 Borrowed $700,000 from Summit Bank for general use; executed an 10-month, 8 percent interest-bearing note payable.

June 14 Received a $15,000 customer deposit from Mark Muller for services to be performed in the future.

July 15 Performed $3,750 of the services paid for by Mr. Muller.

Dec. 12 Received electric bill for $27,860. The company will pay it in early January.

31 Determined wages of $15,000 earned but not yet paid on December 31 (disregard payroll taxes).

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

2. Prepare all adjusting entries required on December 31, 2009.

curb company completed the following transactions during 2010 t 258043

Curb Company completed the following transactions during 2010. The annual accounting period ends December 31, 2010.

Jan. 15 Recorded tax expense for the year in the amount of $125,000. Current taxes payable were $93,000.

31 Paid accrued interest expense in the amount of $52,000.

Apr. 30 Borrowed $550,000 from Commerce Bank; executed a 12-month, 12 percent interest-bearing note payable.

June 3 Purchased merchandise for resale at an invoice cost of $75,820, on account.

July 5 Paid June 3 invoice.

Aug. 31 Signed contract to provide security service to a small apartment complex and collected six months’ fees in advance amounting to $12,000. (Record the collection in a way that will not require an adjusting entry at year-end.)

Dec. 31 Reclassified a long-term liability in the amount of $100,000 to a current liability classification.

31 Determined salary and wages of $85,000 earned but not yet paid December 31 (disregard payroll taxes).

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries for each of these transactions.

2. Prepare all adjusting entries required on December 31, 2010.

3. Show how all of the liabilities arising from these transactions are reported on the balance sheet at December 31, 2010.

4. For each transaction, state whether cash flow from operating activities is increased, decreased, or there is no effect.

cyprus corporation issued 150 000 of bonds on january 1 2012 258044

Cyprus Corporation issued $150,000 of bonds on January 1, 2012, to raise funds to buy some special machinery. The maturity date of the bonds is January 1, 2017, with interest payable each January 1 and July 1. The stated rate of interest is 10%. When the bonds were sold, the effective rate of interest was 12%. The company’s financial reporting year ends December 31.

Required:

1. Determine the price at which the bonds would be sold.

2. Prepare the amortization schedule using the effective-interest method.

3. Prepare a comparative schedule of interest expense for each year (2012–2017) for the effective-interest and straight-line methods of amortization.

4. Record the journal entry for the last payment using the amortization schedule in part (2).

5. Record the journal entry for the retirement of the bonds.

6. Interpretive Question: Is the difference between the interest expense each year between the straight-line and effective-interest methods sufficient to require the use of the effective-interest method? How do you think this question would be answered in practice?

debtor creditor entries for continuation of troubled debt 258075

(Debtor/Creditor Entries for Continuation of Troubled Debt with New Effective Interest) Crocker Corp. owes D. Yeager Corp. a 10-year, 10% note in the amount of $330,000 plus $33,000 of accrued interest. The note is due today, December 31, 2010. Because Crocker Corp. is in financial trouble,

D. Yeager Corp. agrees to forgive the accrued interest, $30,000 of the principal, and to extend the maturity date to December 31, 2013. Interest at 10% of revised principal will continue to be due on 12/31 each year. Assume the following present value factors for 3 periods.

(a) Compute the new effective interest rate for Crocker Corp. following restructure.

(b) Prepare a schedule of debt reduction and interest expense for the years 2010 through 2013.

(c) Compute the gain or loss for D. Yeager Corp. and prepare a schedule of receivable reduction and interest revenue for the years 2010 through 2013.

(d) Prepare all the necessary journal entries on the books of Crocker Corp. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012.

(e) Prepare all the necessary journal entries on the books of D. Yeager Corp. for the years 2010, 2011, and2012.

described below are certain transactions of edwardson corporatio 258121

Described below are certain transactions of Edwardson Corporation. The company uses the periodic inventory system.

1. On February 2, the corporation purchased goods from Martin Company for $70,000 subject to cash discount terms of 2/10, n/30. Purchases and accounts payable are recorded by the corporation at net amounts after cash discounts. The invoice was paid on February 26.

2. On April 1, the corporation bought a truck for $50,000 from General Motors Company, paying $4,000 in cash and signing a one-year, 12% note for the balance of the purchase price.

3. On May 1, the corporation borrowed $83,000 from Chicago National Bank by signing a $92,000 zero-interest- bearing note due one year from May 1.

4. On August 1, the board of directors declared a $300,000 cash dividend that was payable on September 10 to stockholders of record on August 31.

Instructions

(a) Make all the journal entries necessary to record the transactions above using appropriate dates.

(b) Edwardson Corporation’s year-end is December 31. Assuming that no adjusting entries relative to the transactions above have been recorded, prepare any adjusting journal entries concerning interest that are necessary to present fair financial statements at December 31. Assume straight-line amortization of discounts.

despite being a publicly traded company only since 1987 northla 258124

Despite being a publicly traded company only since 1987, Northland Cranberries of Wisconsin Rapids, Wisconsin, is one of the world’s largest cranberry growers. During its short life as a publicly traded corporation, it has engaged in an aggressive growth strategy. As a consequence, the company has taken on significant amounts of both short-term and long-term debt. The following information is taken from recent annual reports of the company.

Northland Cranberries

?

Instructions

(a) Evaluate the company’s liquidity by calculating and analyzing working capital and the current ratio.

(b) The discussion of the company’s liquidity, shown on page 770, was provided by the company in the Management Discussion and Analysis section of the company’s annual report. Comment on whether you agree with management’s statements, and what might be done to remedy the situation.

The lower comparative current ratio in the current year was due to $3 million of short-term borrowing then outstanding which was incurred to fund the Yellow River Marsh acquisitions last year. As a result of the extreme seasonality of its business, the company does not believe that its current ratio or its underlying stated working capital at the current, fiscal year-end is a meaningful indication of the Company’s liquidity. As of March 31 of each fiscal year, the Company has historically carried no significant amounts of inventories and by such date all of the Company’s accounts receivable from its crop sold for processing under the supply agreements have been paid in cash, with the resulting cash received from such payments used to reduce indebtedness. The Company utilizes its revolving bank credit facility, together with cash generated from operations, to fund its working capital requirements throughout its growingseason.

determine proper amounts in account balances presented below 258130

(Determine Proper Amounts in Account Balances) Presented below are three independent situations.

(a) Chinook Corporation incurred the following costs in connection with the issuance of bonds:

(1) Printing and engraving costs, $15,000; (2) legal fees, $49,000, and (3) commissions paid to underwriter, $60,000. What amount should be reported as Unamortized Bond Issue Costs, and where should this amount be reported on the balance sheet?

(b) Mc Entire Co. sold $2,500,000 of 10%, 10-year bonds at 104 on January 1, 2010. The bonds were dated January 1, 2010, and pay interest on July 1 and January 1. If Mc Entire uses the straight-line method to amortize bond premium or discount, determine the amount of interest expense to be reported on July 1, 2010, and December 31, 2010.

(c) Cheriel Inc. issued $600,000 of 9%, 10-year bonds on June 30, 2010, for $562,500. This price provided a yield of 10% on the bonds. Interest is payable semiannually on December 31 and June 30. If Cheriel uses the effective-interest method, determine the amount of interest expense to record if financial statements are issued on October 31, 2010.

diane corporation is preparing its 2012 balance sheet the compa 258152

Diane Corporation is preparing its 2012 balance sheet. The company records show the following selected amounts at the end of the accounting period, December 31, 2012:

Total assets ………………………….. $530,000

Total noncurrent assets ………………. 362,000

Liabilities:

Notes payable (8%, due in 5 years) …… 15,000

Accounts payable ……………………… 56,000

Income taxes payable ………………….. 14,000

Liability for withholding taxes …………. 3,000

Rent revenue collected in advance …….. 7,000

Bonds payable (due in 15 years) ……… 90,000

Wages payable …………………………. 7,000

Property taxes payable …………………. 3,000

Note payable (10%, due in 6 months) … 12,000

Interest payable ………………………….. 400

Common stock ………………………. 100,000

Required:

1. Compute (a) working capital and (b) the quick ratio (quick assets are $70,000). Why is working capital important to management? How do financial analysts use the quick ratio?

2. Would your computations be different if the company reported $250,000 worth of contingent liabilities in the notes to the statements? Explain.

what is the expected growth rate in earnings based upon fundamentals for the high gr 258212

Church & Dwight, a large producer of sodium bicarbonate, reported earnings per share of $1.50 in 1993 and paid dividends per share of $0.42. In 1993, the firm also reported the following: Net Income = $30 million Interest Expense = $0.8 million Book Value of Debt = $7.6 million Book Value of Equity = $160 million The firm faced a corporate tax rate of 38.5%. (The market value debt to equity ratio is 5%.) The treasury bond rate is 7%. The firm expected to maintain these financial fundamentals from 1994 to 1998, after which it was expected to become a stable firm with an earnings growth rate of 6%. The firm’s financial characteristics were expected to approach industry averages after 1998. The industry averages were as follows: Return on Capital = 12.5% Debt/Equity Ratio = 25% Interest Rate on Debt = 7% Church and Dwight had a beta of 0.85 in 1993 and the unlevered beta was not expected to change over time. a. What is the expected growth rate in earnings, based upon fundamentals, for the high- growth period (1994 to 1998)? b. What is the expected payout ratio after 1998? c. What is the expected beta after 1998? d. What is the expected price at the end of 1998? e. What is the value of the stock, using the two-stage dividend discount model? f. How much of this value can be attributed to extraordinary growth? to stable growth?

how would you explain the difference between the two models and which one would you 258216

Kimberly-Clark, a household product manufacturer, reported earnings per share of $3.20 in 1993 and paid dividends per share of $1.70 in that year. The firm reported depreciation of $315 million in 1993 and capital expenditures of $475 million. (There were 160 million shares outstanding, trading at $51 per share.) This ratio of capital expenditures to depreciation is expected to be maintained in the long term. The working capital needs are negligible. Kimberly-Clark had debt outstanding of $1.6 billion and intends to maintain its current financing mix (of debt and equity) to finance future investment needs. The firm is in steady state and earnings are expected to grow 7% a year. The stock had a beta of 1.05. (The treasury bond rate is 6.25%.) a. Estimate the value per share, using the Dividend Discount Model. b. Estimate the value per share, using the FCFE Model. c. How would you explain the difference between the two models and which one would you use as your benchmark for comparison to the market price?

as the expected growth rate in cash flows increases the value of an asset increases 258324

Discounted cash flow valuation is based upon the notion that the value of an asset is the present value of the expected cash flows on that asset, discounted at a rate that reflects the riskiness of those cash flows. Specify whether the following statements about discounted cash flow valuation are true or false, assuming that all variables are constant except for the variable discussed below: A. As the discount rate increases, the value of an asset increases. B. As the expected growth rate in cash flows increases, the value of an asset increases. C. As the life of an asset is lengthened, the value of that asset increases. D. As the uncertainty about the expected cash flows increases, the value of an asset increases. E. An asset with an infinite life (i.e., it is expected to last forever) will have an infinite value.

looking at the assets that coca cola has on its balance sheet which assets are likel 258328

Consider the assets on Coca Cola’s balance sheet and answer the following questions: a. Looking at the assets that Coca Cola has on its balance sheet, which assets are likely to be assessed closest to market value? Explain. b. Coca Cola has net fixed assets of $3,669 million. Can you estimate how much Coca Cola paid for these assets? Is there any way to know the age of these assets? c. Coca Cola seems to have far more invested in current assets, rather than fixed assets. Is this significant? Explain. d. In the early 1980s, Coca Cola sold off its bottling operations, with the bottlers becoming independent companies. How would this action have impacted the assets on Coca Cola’s balance sheet? (The manufacturing plants are most likely to be part of the bottling operations)

during 2011 schmaal corporation had the following transactions 258352

During 2011, Schmaal Corporation had the following transactions relating to long-term liabilities:

May 1 Purchased a machine costing $600,000 from Kretschmar Corporation. Issued a three-year, interest-bearing note with interest payable on May 1 of each year. The note matures on May 1, 2014, and carries an interest rate of 7%.

July 1 Borrowed $25,000 from South-Central National Bank. The terms of the note require semiannual payments of interest on December 31 and June 30. The note matures in two years and carries an interest rate of 6%.

Required:

1. Prepare the journal entries made on May 1 and July 1 to record the issuance of these two notes.

2. Prepare all journal entries made on December 31, 2011.

3. Prepare all journal entries made during 2012.

during 2011 seagul outboards sold 200 outboard engines for 250 258553

During 2011, Seagul Outboards sold 200 outboard engines for $250 each. The engines are under a one-year warranty for parts and labor, and from past experience, the company estimates that, on average, warranty costs will equal $20 per engine. As of December 31, 2011, 50 engines had been serviced at a total cost of $1,400. During 2012, engines were serviced at a total cost of $2,600. Assume that all repairs used cash.

a. Prepare the journal entries that would be recorded at the following times:

(1) During 2011 to record the sale of the engines.

(2) During 2011 to accrue the contingent loss on warranties.

(3) During 2011 and 2012 to record the actual warranty cost incurred.

b. Assume that seagull chose not to treat the warranty costs as contingent losses. Instead, it chose to expense warranty costs as they were paid. Compute the total net income for 2011 and 2012 for each of the two accounting treatments.

during the summer of 2002 the financial press reported that 258569

During the summer of 2002, the financial press reported that Citigroup was being investigated for allegations that it had arranged transactions for Enron so as to intentionally misrepresent the nature of the transactions and consequently achieve favorable balance sheet treatment. Essentially, the deals were structured to make it appear that money was coming into Enron from trading activities, rather than from loans.

A July 23, 2002, the New York Times article by Richard Oppel and Kurt Eichenwald entitled ?oCitigroup Said to Mold Deal to Help Enron Skirt Rules?? suggested that Citigroup intentionally kept certain parts of a secret oral agreement out of the written record for fear that it would change the accounting treatment. Critics contend that this had the effect of significantly understating Enron’s liabilities, thus misleading investors and creditors. Citigroup maintains that, as a lender, it has no obligation to ensure that its clients account for transactions properly. The proper accounting, Citigroup insists, is the responsibility of the client and its auditor.

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) Do you think that a lender, in general, in arranging so called ?ostructured financing?? has a responsibility to ensure that its clients account for the financing in an appropriate fashion, or is this the responsibility of the client and its auditor?

(c) What effect did the fact that the written record did not disclose all characteristics of the transaction probably have on the auditor’s ability to evaluate the accounting treatment of this transaction?

(d) The New York Times article noted that in one presentation made to sell this kind of deal to Enron and other energy companies, Citigroup stated that using such an arrangement ?oeliminates the need for capital markets disclosure, keeping structure mechanics private.?? Why might a company wish to conceal the terms of a financing arrangement from the capital markets (investors and creditors)? Is this appropriate? Do you think it is ethical for a lender to market deals in this way?

(e) Why was this deal more potentially harmful to shareholders than other off-balance-sheet transactions (for example, lease financing)?

dygat corporation has 10 000 000 of 9 percent 20 year bonds da 258572

Dygat Corporation has $10,000,000 of 9 percent, 20-year bonds dated June 1, 2010 with interest payment dates of May 31 and November 30. The company’s fiscal year ends November 30. It uses the effective interest method to amortize bond premiums or discounts.

Required

1. Assume the bonds are issued at 109.9 on June 1 to yield an effective interest rate of 8 percent, prepare entries in journal form for June 1, 2010, November 30, 2010, and May 31, 2011.

2. Assume the bonds are issued at 91.4 on June 1 to yield an effective interest rate of 10 percent. Prepare entries in Journal form for June 1, 2010, November 30, 2010, and May 31, 2011.

3. Explain the role that market interest rates play in causing a premium in requirement 1 and a discount in requirement 2.

multiple choice 1 should the following bond issue costs be 257604

(Multiple Choice)

1. Should the following bond issue costs be expensed as incurred?

Underwriting

Legal Fees Costs

a. No ………………………. No

b. No ………………………. Yes

c. Yes ………………………. No

d. Yes ………………………. Yes

2. On December 31, 2006 Dumont Corporation had outstanding 8%, $2,000,000 face value convertible bonds maturing on December 31, 2010. Interest is payable annually on December 31. Each $1,000 bond is convertible into 60 shares of Dumont’s $10 par value common stock. The unamortized balance on December 31, 2007 in the Premium on Bonds Payable account was $45,000. On December 31, 2007 an individual holding 200 of the bonds exercised the conversion privilege when the market value of Dumont’s common stock was $18 per share. Using the book value method, Dumont’s entry to record the conversion should include a credit to additional paid-in capital of

a. $80,000

b. $84,500

c. $96,000

d. $125,000

3. On January 1, 2007 when the market rate for bond interest was 14%, Luba Corporation issued bonds in the face amount of $500,000, with interest at 12% payable semiannually. The bonds mature on December 31, 2017, and were issued at a discount of $53,180. How much of the discount should be amortized by the effective interest method at July 1, 2007?

a. $1,277

b. $2,659

c. $3,191

d. $3,723

4. When the cash proceeds from a bond issued with detachable stock purchase warrants exceed the sum of the par value of the bonds and the fair value of the warrants, the excess should be credited to

a. Additional paid-in capital

b. Retained earnings

c. Premium on bonds payable

d. Detachable stock warrants outstanding

5. When the issuer of bonds exercises the call provision to retire the bonds, the excess of the cash paid over the carrying amount of the bonds should be recognized separately as a(n)

a. Extraordinary loss

b. Extraordinary gain

c. Loss from continuing operations

d. Loss from discontinued operations

6. Peterson Company has a $500,000, 15%, three year note dated January 1, 2006, payable to Forest National Bank. On December 31, 2007 the bank agreed to settle the note and unpaid interest of $75,000 for 2007 for $50,000 cash and marketable securities having a current market value of $375,000. Peterson’s acquisition cost of the securities is $385,000. Ignoring income taxes, what amount should Peterson report as a gain from the debt restructuring in its 2007 income statement?

a. $65,000

b. $75,000

c. $140,000

d. $150,000

7. When the interest payment dates of a bond are May 1 and November 1, and a bond issue is sold on June 1, the amount of cash received by the issuer will be

a. Increased by accrued interest from June 1 to November 1

b. Increased by accrued interest from May 1 to June 1

c. Decreased by accrued interest from June 1 to November 1

d. Decreased by accrued interest from May 1 to June 1

8. On January 1, 2007 Parke Company borrowed $360,000 from a major customer evidenced by a noninterest-bearing note due in three years. Parke agreed to supply the customer’s inventory needs for the loan period at lower than market price. At the 12% imputed interest rate for this type of loan, the present value of the note is $255,000 at January 1, 2007. What amount of interest expense should be included in Parke’s 2007 income statement?

a. $43,200

b. $35,000

c. $30,600

d. $0

9. For the issuer of a 10-year term bond, the amount of amortization using the effective interest method would increase each year if the bond was sold at a

Discount Premium

a. No …………….. No

b. Yes …………….. Yes

c. No …………….. Yes

d. Yes …………….. No

10. On April 1, 2007 Girard Corporation issued at 98 plus accrued interest, 200 of its 10%, $1,000 bonds. The bonds are dated January 1, 2007, and mature on January 1, 2017. Interest is payable semiannually on January 1 and July 1. From the bond issuance Girard would realize net cash receipts of

a. $191,000

b. $196,000

c. $198,500

d. $201,000

a large retailer was sued nearly 5 000 times in a 257660

A large retailer was sued nearly 5,000 times in a recent year—about once every two hours every day of the year. It has been sued for everything imaginable—ranging from falls on icy parking lots to injuries sustained in shoppers’ stampedes to a murder with a rifle purchased at one of its stores. The company reported the following in the notes to its financial statements:

The Company and its subsidiaries are involved from time to time in claims, proceedings, and litigation arising from the operation of its business. The Company does not believe that any such claim, proceeding, or litigation, either alone or in the aggregate, will have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial position or results of its operations.

Instructions

(a) Explain why the company does not have to record these contingent liabilities.

(b) Comment on any implications for analysis of the financial statements.

a major defense contractor ltv faced with huge liabilities on 257664

A major defense contractor, LTV, faced with huge liabilities, once declared Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection. Under Chapter 11, a company continues to operate but is protected from creditors while it tries to work out a reorganization plan. At that time, the company’s management chose to accrue a $2.26 billion liability to reflect the potential cost of medical and life insurance benefits for its 118,000 current and retired employees, which was not required by generally accepted accounting principles. The Wall Street Journal reported that the company chose to recognize the charge because ?oif the company waited until after it negotiated new credit agreements and emerged from bankruptcy law proceedings before taking the $2 billion charge, the additional liability could trigger violations of its debt covenants.??

REQUIRED:

a. Provide the journal entry to record the $2.26 billion charge recognized by LTV.

b. Explain how taking the charge before negotiating new credit agreements could avoid violating debt covenants.

c. It was also reported that LTV took several other significant charges while it was under bankruptcy proceeding. In addition to its concern about debt covenants, in general, why might management have chosen to take these charges at this time?

adams corp is planning to issue 520 000 of 6 five year 257685

Adams, Corp., is planning to issue $520,000 of 6%, five-year bonds payable to borrow for a major expansion. The chief executive, Shane Adams, asks your advice on some related matters.

Requirements

1. Answer the following questions:

(a) At what type of bond price will Adams have total interest expense equal to the cash interest payments?

(b) Under which type of bond price will Adams’ total interest expense be greater than the cash interest payments?

(c) If the market interest rate is 7%, what type of bond price can Adams expect for the bonds?

2. Compute the price of the bonds if the bonds sell for 93.

3. How much will Adams pay in interest each year? How much will Adams’ interest expense be for the first year, assuming the straight-line method is used?

agilent technologies inc a diversified technology company se 257690

Agilent Technologies, Inc., a diversified technology company, sells extended warranties for the products and services provided to customers, deferring the revenue until future recognition. The following information about the extended warranty liability account was taken from Agilent’s annual report (dollars in millions);

?

REQUIRED:

a. Draw a T-account for the extended warranty liability, record the activity disclosed above in that account, and explain how the entries represent an application of the matching principle.

b. Explain how the cash flow for warranties is different from the profitability of warranties.

amortization of premium or discount bonds payable are dated janu 257704

Amortization of Premium or Discount Bonds payable are dated January 1, 2010, and are issued on that date. The face value of the bonds is $100,000, and the face rate of interest is 8%. The bonds pay interest semiannually. The bonds will mature in five years. The market rate of interest at the time of issuance was 6%.

Required

1. Using the effective interest amortization method, what amount should be amortized for the first six-month period? What amount of interest expense should be reported for the first six-month period?

2. Using the effective interest amortization method, what amount should be amortized for the period from July 1 to December 31, 2010? What amount of interest expense should be reported for the period from July 1 to December 31, 2010?

an examination of the accounting records of the durham corporati 257710

An examination of the accounting records of the Durham Corporation on January 1, 2008 (after reversing entries had been made for all accrued interest at the end of 2007) disclosed the following information regarding the company’s long-term debt:

12.5% bonds, dated January 1, 2004, paying interest semiannually on June 30 and

December 31, and due December 31, 2010. ……………..……………………….. $1,300,000

11% convertible bonds, dated April 1, 2006, paying interest semiannually on March 31

and September 30, and due March 31, 2011. ……………………………………… $ 500,000

Discount on convertible bonds payable ………………………………………………… (17,500)

$ 482,500

9% bonds, dated March 1, 2007, paying interest annually on February 28, and due

February 28, 2012. …………………………………………………………………. $ 100,000

Discount on bonds payable ………………………………………………………………. (3,960)

$ 96,040

4-year, non-interest-bearing note issued January 1, 2007. (Durham’s incremental

borrowing rate on the date the note was issued was 10%.) …………………………. $ 80,000

Discount on note payable ………………………………………………………………. (19,895)

$ 60,105

Additional information disclosed in the notes to Durham Corporation’s 2007 financial statements:

1. The conversion option allows the holder of each $1,000 bond to exchange it for 30 shares of $10 par common stock. Durham uses the book value method to record conversions of bonds to common stock.

2. Each $1,000 bond of the 9% bonds dated March 1, 2007 carries 15 detachable warrants. The company had recorded the 1,500 warrants on the bonds at $4,800 in a Common Stock Warrants account. The exchange of three warrants allows the holder to acquire one share of $10 par common stock for $27.

3. The discount on the convertible bonds and the discount on the 9% bonds with detachable warrants are being amortized using the straight-line method.

4. The discount on the note payable is being amortized annually using the effective interest method.

During 2008, the Durham Corporation engaged in the following long-term debt transactions:

Jan. 1 Issued 11%, $800,000 face value bonds for $820,302, a price to yield 10%. Interest on these bonds is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31, and they are due December 31, 2010. The effective interest method is to be used to amortize the premium. The bonds are callable at 107.

May 1 Six hundred warrants from the 9% bonds were exercised when the common stock was selling for $42 per share.

Sept. 29 Convertible bonds of $100,000 were exchanged when the common stock was selling for $45 per share.

Nov. 1 Retired $200,000 of the bonds issued on January 1, 2008, at the call price plus accrued interest.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries for Durham Corporation to record all the transactions that occurred during 2008 relating to the preceding information.

2. Prepare the long-term debt section of the Durham Corporation’s balance sheet on December 31, 2008.

analysis of amortization schedule and interest entries the fol 257713

(Analysis of Amortization Schedule and Interest Entries) The following amortization and interest schedule reflects the issuance of 10-year bonds by Capulet Corporation on January 1, 2004, and the subsequent interest payments and charges. The company’s year-end is December 31, and financial statements are prepared once yearly.

(a) Indicate whether the bonds were issued at a premium or a discount and how you can determine this fact from the schedule.

(b) Indicate whether the amortization schedule is based on the straight-line method or the effective interest method and how you can determine which method is used.

(c) Determine the stated interest rate and the effective interest rate.

(d) On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2004.

(e) On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry or entries to reflect the bond transactions and accruals for 2004. (Interest is paid January 1.)

(f) On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry or entries to reflect the bond transactions and accruals for 2011. Capulet Corporation does not use reversingentries.

as discussed in the chapter an important consideration in evalu 257736

As discussed in the chapter, an important consideration in evaluating current liabilities is a company’s operating cycle. The operating cycle is the average time required to go from cash to cash in generating revenue. To determine the length of the operating cycle, analysts use two measures: the average days to sell inventory (inventory days) and the average days to collect receivables (receivable days). The inventory-days computation measures the average number of days it takes to move an item from raw materials or purchase to final sale (from the day it comes in the company’s door to the point it is converted to cash or an account receivable). The receivable days computation measures the average number of days it takes to collect an account.

Most businesses must then determine how to finance the period of time when the liquid assets are tied up in inventory and accounts receivable. To determine how much to finance, companies first determine accounts payable days—how long it takes to pay creditors. Accounts payable days measures the number of days it takes to pay a supplier invoice. Consider the following operating cycle worksheet for BOP Clothing Co.

?

These data indicate that BOP has reduced its overall operating cycle (to 261.5 days) as well as the number of days to be financed with sources of funds other than accounts payable (from 78 to 63 days). Most businesses cannot finance the operating cycle with accounts payable financing alone, so working capital financing, usually short-term interest-bearing loans, is needed to cover the shortfall. In this case, BOP would need to borrow less money to finance its operating cycle in 2012 than in 2011.

Instructions

(a) Use the BOP analysis to briefly discuss how the operating cycle data relate to the amount of working capital and the current and acid-test ratios.

(b) Select two other real companies that are in the same industry and complete the operating cycle worksheet on the previous page, along with the working capital and ratio analysis. Briefly summarize and interpret the results. To simplify the analysis, you may use ending balances to compute turnoverratios.

at december 31 2009 the records of pearson corporation provide 257786

At December 31, 2009, the records of Pearson Corporation provided the following information:

Income statement

Revenues ……………………………………….. $140,000

Depreciation expense (straight line) …………… (11,000)†

Remaining expenses (excluding income tax) …… (90,000)

Pretax income …………………………………… $ 39,000

†Equipment depreciated—acquired January 1, 2009, cost $44,000; estimated useful life, four years and no residual value. Accelerated depreciation is used on the tax return as follows: 2009, $17,600; 2010, $13,200; 2011, $8,800; and 2012, $4,400.

a. Income tax rate, 30 percent. Assume that 85 percent is paid in the year incurred.

b. Taxable income from the 2009 income tax return, $32,400.

Required:

1. Compute income taxes payable and deferred income tax for 2009. Is the deferred income tax a liability or an asset? Explain.

2. Show what amounts related to 2009 income taxes should be reported on the income statement and balance sheet.

bailey dry cleaners has six employees who were paid the 257811

Bailey Dry Cleaners has six employees who were paid the following wages during 2007:

Frank Johnson ……………….. $ 27,000

Bill Long ………………………. 18,000

Duff Morse ……………………. 95,000

Laura Stewart …………………. 28,000

Cindy Sharpe ………………….. 26,000

Melissa Ledbetter ……………… 20,000

Total …………………………. $214,000

The state allows the company a 1% unemployment compensation merit-rating reduction from the normal rate of 5.4%. The federal unemployment rate is 0.8%. The maximum unemployment wages per employee are $7,000 for both the state and the federal government. Income tax withholdings of 20% are applied to all employees. An 8% F.I.C.A. tax for both employees and employers is applied to the first $90,000 of each employee’s wages.

Required

1. Calculate the amount of payroll taxes to be paid by Bailey.

2. Prepare the journal entries to record the payment of payroll and the payroll tax expense.

before the merger of mendy s and arby s wendy s made a 257835

Before the merger of Mendy’s and Arby’s Wendy’s made a huge purchase of its own shares and in total bought back over 26 million shares for approximately $1 billion. Before the purchase, 125.5 million shares were outstanding, and the financial statements appeared as follows (dollars in millions)

Income Statement

Revenue …………… $ 2,439

Expense …………….. 2,345

Net income ………….…. 94

Balance sheet

Assets …………….. $ 3,060

Liabilities …………. $1,048

Shareholder’s Equity $2,012

(a) Provide the journal entry for the treasury stock purchase.

(b) Compute the ration of total liabilities to shareholders’ equity before and after the purchase.

(c) Compute earnings per share before and after the purchase.

(d) Compute on why a company might choose to purchase treasury stock.

beryl forman has just approached a venture capitalist for financ 257842

Beryl Forman has just approached a venture capitalist for financing for her new business venture, the development of a local ski hill. On July 1, 2011, Beryl was loaned $150,000 at an annual interest rate of 7%. The loan is repayable over 5 years in annual installments of $36,584, principal and interest, due each June 30. The first payment is due June 30, 2012. Beryl uses the effective-interest method for amortizing debt. Her ski hill company’s year-end will be June 30.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an amortization schedule for the 5 years, 2011–2016. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

(b) Prepare all journal entries for Beryl Forman for the first 2 fiscal years ended June 30, 2012, and June 30, 2013. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar.

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the note payable as of June 30, 2013.

bill and edna had been married two years and had 257848

Bill and Edna had been married two years, and had just reached the point where they had enough savings to start investing. Bill’s uncle Dave told them that he had recently inherited some very rare railroad bonds from his grandmother’s estate. He wanted to help Bill and Edna get a start in the world, and would sell them 50 of the bonds at $100 each. The bonds were dated 1873, beautifully engraved, showing a face value of $1,000 each. Uncle Dave pointed out that ?oUnited States of America?? was printed prominently at the top, and that the U.S. government had established a ?osinking fund?? to retire the old railroad bonds. All Bill and Edna needed to do was hold on to them until the government contacted them, and they would eventually get the full $1,000 for each bond. Bill and Edna were overjoyed…..until a year later when they saw the exact same bonds for sale at a coin and stamp shop priced as ?ocollectors items?? for $9.95 each!

Requirements

1. If a company goes bankrupt, what happens to the bonds they issued, and the investors who bought the bonds?

2. When investing in bonds, how do you tell if it is a legitimate transaction?

3. Is there a way to determine the relative risk of corporate bonds?

bond issue donald lennon is the president founder 257867

(Bond Issue) Donald Lennon is the president, founder, and majority owner of Wichita Medical Corporation, an emerging medical technology products company. Wichita is in dire need of additional capital to keep operating and to bring several promising products to final development, testing, and production. Donald, as owner of 51% of the outstanding stock, manages the company’s operations. He places heavy emphasis on research and development and long-term growth. The other principal stockholder is Nina Friendly who, as a nonemployee investor, owns 40% of the stock. Nina would like to deemphasize the R & D functions and emphasize the marketing function to maximize short-run sales and profits from existing products. She believes this strategy would raise the market price of Wichita’s stock. All of Donald’s personal capital and borrowing power is tied up in his 51% stock ownership. He knows that any offering of additional shares of stock will dilute his controlling interest because he won’t be able to participate in such an issuance. But, Nina has money and would likely buy enough shares to gain control of Wichita. She then would dictate the company’s future direction, even if it meant replacing Donald as president and CEO. The company already has considerable debt. Raising additional debt will be costly, will adversely affect Wichita’s credit rating, and will increase the company’s reported losses due to the growth in interest expense. Nina and the other minority stockholders express opposition to the assumption of additional debt, fearing the company will be pushed to the brink of bankruptcy. Wanting to maintain his control and to preserve the direction of ?ohis?? company, Donald is doing everything to avoid a stock issuance and is contemplating a large issuance of bonds, even if it means the bonds are issued with a high effective interest rate.

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What are the ethical issues in this case?

(c) What would you do if you were Donald?

amorization 257875

1.On January 1, 2010 Sycamore Co. issued 7%, 5 year bonds with a face amount of 5 million dollars. The market yield for bonds of similar risk and maturity was 8%. Interest is paid semiannually on June 30 and December 31. Prepare an amortization table for Sycamore Co. assuming the effective interest method is used. Follow the format of the amortization table on page 792 in your text. Round amounts to the nearest dollar. Include all 10 payments in your table and totals for cash paid, interest expense, and discount amortized.

2.Prepare an amortization table for Sycamore Co. assuming the market rate was 6% and the effective interest method is used. Follow the format of the amortization table on page 793 in your text. Round amounts to the nearest dollar. Include all 10 payments in your table and totals for cash paid, interest expense, and premium amortized.

3.Prepare an amortization table for Sycamore assuming the market rate was 8% and the company elected to use the straight-line amortization method since the results were not materially different from the effective int. method.

Use excel’s formula functions to complete your amortization tables. In other words, don’t just do the tables by hand and then copy your numbers into excel. The whole point of using excel is to make this a more efficient process. If you do the tables manually and copy the numbers into excel you will receive a 0/20. You may need to manually enter the interest expense and discount/premium amortization on the last payment so that your carrying value of the bonds at 12/31/2014 is $5,000,000.

business transactions often involve the exchange of property go 257919

Business transactions often involve the exchange of property, goods, or services for notes or similar instruments that may stipulate no interest rate or an interest rate that varies from prevailing rates.

Required

1. When a company exchanges a note for property, goods, or services, what value does it place on the note:

a. If it bears interest at a reasonable rate and is issued in a bargained transaction entered into at arm’s length? Explain.

b. If it bears no interest and/or is not issued in a bargained transaction entered into at arm’s length? Explain.

2. If the recorded value of a note differs from the face value:

a. Explain how the company should account for the difference.

b. Explain how the company should present this difference in the financial statements.

completing the accounting cycle describe the accounting cycle and the role of closin 257923

LO1 Describe the accounting cycle and the role of closing entries in the preparation of financial statements. (pp. 144–146) LO2 Prepare closing entries. (pp. 147–151) LO3 Prepare reversing entries. (pp. 152–153) LO4 Prepare and use a work sheet. (pp. 154–158)

The Accounting Cycle As Figure 4-1 shows, the accounting cycle is a series of steps whose ultimate purpose is to provide useful information to decision-makers. These steps are as follows: 1. Analyze business transactions from source documents. 2. Record the transactions by entering them in the general journal. 3. Post the journal entries to the ledger, and prepare a trial balance. 4. Adjust the accounts, and prepare an adjusted trial balance. 5. Prepare financial statements. 6. Close the accounts, and prepare a post-closing trial balance. You are already familiar with Steps 1 through 5 from previous chapters. In the next section, we describe Step 6, which may be performed before or after Step 5. Closing Entries Balance sheet accounts, such as Cash and Accounts Payable, are considered permanent accounts, or real accounts, because they carry their end-of-period balances into the next accounting period. In contrast, revenue and expense accounts, such as Revenues Earned and Wages Expense, are considered temporary accounts, or nominal accounts, because they begin each accounting period with a zero balance, accumulate a balance during the period, and are then cleared by means of closing entries. Closing entries are journal entries made at the end of an accounting period. They have two purposes: 1. They set the stage for the next accounting period by clearing revenue and expense accounts and the Withdrawals account of their balances.

Document Preview:

Ch4 CP 13 Ch4 CP 12 Ch4 CP 11 Ch4 CP 10 Ch4 CP 9 Ch4 CP 8 Ch4 CP 7 Ch4 CP 6 Ch4 CP 5 Ch4 CP 4 Ch4 CP 3 Ch4 CP 2 Ch4 CP 1 Choices_Wrapper T Z General Journal Page 5 Post. Date Description Ref. Debit Credit Aug. Wages Payable Wages Expense Design Revenue Accounts Receivable Entries: Cash Office Equipment Office Supplies Accounts Payable Unearned Design Revenue Page 6 Utilities Expense Prepaid Rent General Ledger Account No. 111 Balance Item July Account No. 113 Account No. 117 Account No. 146 Account No. 147 Account No. 212 Account No. 213 Account No. 214 Account No. 313 Income Summary Account No. 411 Account No. 511 Account No. 512 Rent Expense Account No. 514 Office Supplies Expense Account No. 517 Work Sheet Adjusted Trial Balance Adjustments Income Statement Balance Sheet Account Name Net Income 6. Expenses Total expenses Net income Subtotal Assets Total assets Liabilities Total liabilities Total owner’s equity Total liabilities and owner’s equity – = 9. Post-closing trial balance prepared Post-Closing Trial Balance Chapter 4, Comprehensive Problem (Continued) 1. Reversing entries prepared and posted Transactions for August journalized and posted 7 and 8. Adjusting and closing entries prepared and posted Page 7 Page 8 Chapter 4, Comprehensive Problem ` Reversing entries: Adjusting entries: Closing entries: Account No. 311 Revenue 2. 2011 J. Miller, Capital J. Miller, Withdrawals 3. For the Month Ended August 31, 2011 Account No. 115 Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment Account No. 312 Depreciation Expense—Office Equipment Account No. 519 Miller Design Studio Accumulated Depreciation— Depreciation Expense— 4. Trial balance amounts entered on the work sheet Income statement, statement of owner’s equity, and balance sheet prepared Statement of Owner’s Equity August 31, 2011 J. Miller,…

clark inc issued 50 000 of 10 year 9 bonds payable on 257952

Clark, Inc., issued $50,000 of 10-year, 9% bonds payable on January 1, 2012. Clark pays interest each January 1 and July 1 and amortizes discount or premium by the straight-line method. The company can issue its bonds payable under various conditions.

Requirements

1. Journalize Clark’s issuance of the bonds and first semiannual interest payment assuming the bonds were issued at par value. Explanations are not required.

2. Journalize Clark’s issuance of the bonds and first semiannual interest payment assuming the bonds were issued at a price of 95. Explanations are not required.

3. Journalize Clark’s issuance of the bonds and first semiannual interest payment assuming the bonds were issued at a price of 106. Explanations are not required.

4. Which bond price results in the most interest expense for Clark? Explain in detail.

classification of liabilities presented below are various acco 257956

(Classification of Liabilities) Presented below are various account balances.

(a) Bank loans payable of a winery, due March 10, 2014. (The product requires aging for 5 years before sale.)

(b) Unamortized premium on bonds payable, of which $3,000 will be amortized during the next year.

(c) Serial bonds payable, $1,000,000, of which $250,000 is due each July 31.

(d) Amounts withheld from employees’ wages for income taxes.

(e) Notes payable due January 15, 2013.

(f) Credit balances in customers’ accounts arising from returns and allowances after collection in full of account.

(g) Bonds payable of $2,000,000 maturing June 30, 2012.

(h) Overdraft of $1,000 in a bank account. (No other balances are carried at this bank.)

(i) Deposits made by customers who have ordered goods.

Indicate whether each of the items above should be classified on December 31, 2011, as a current liability, a long-term liability, or under some other classification. Consider each one independently from all others; that is, do not assume that all of them relate to one particular business. If the classification of some of the items is doubtful, explain why in each case.

the investment manager of 4th national bank invests some of 257192

The investment manager of 4th National Bank invests some of the bank’s financial resources in trading securities. During the last quarter of 2007 the following transactions occurred in regard to these trading securities:

Nov. 5 Purchased 200 shares of M Company common stock at $86 per share

Nov. 19 Purchased 300 shares of P Company preferred stock at $63 per share

Nov. 29 Sold 100 shares of M Company common stock at $89 per share

Dec. 15 Purchased 400 shares of T Company common stock at $37 per share

Dec. 17 Sold 100 shares of P Company preferred stock at $62 per share

On December 31, 2007 the market values of the shares were as follows: M, $87 per share; P, $61 per share; and T, $37.25 per share. The bank held no trading securities at the beginning of the last quarter of 2007.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding information.

2. Show what the bank reports on its fourth quarter 2007 income statement for these trading securities.

3. Show how the bank reports these trading securities on its December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

the johnson research organization a nonprofit organization that 257200

The Johnson Research Organization, a nonprofit organization that does not pay taxes, is considering buying laboratory equipment with an estimated life of seven years so it will not have to use outsiders’ laboratories for certain types of work. The following are all of the cash flows affected by the decision:

Investment (outflow at time 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$6,000,000

Periodic operating cash flows:

Annual cash savings because outside laboratories

are not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,400,000

Additional cash outflow for people and supplies to operate

the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200,000

Salvage value after seven years, which is the estimated

life of this project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400,000

Discount rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10%

Required

Calculate the net present value of this decision. (Refer to Exhibit A.2 in formatting your answer.) Should the organization buy the equipment?

the mccall syndicate owns four resort hotels in europe because 257217

The McCall Syndicate owns four resort hotels in Europe. Because the Paris operation (Hotel 1) has been booming over the past five years, management has decided to build an addition to the hotel. This addition will increase the hotel’s capacity by 20 percent. A construction company has bid to build the addition at a cost of $30,000,000. The building will have an increased residual value of $3,000,000.

Daj Van Dyke, the controller, has started an analysis of the net present value for the project. She has calculated the annual net cash inflows by subtracting the increase in cash operating expenses from the increase in case inflows from room rentals. Her partially completed schedule follows:

Year………………..Net Cash Inflows

1-20 (each year)…………$3,900,000

Capital investment projects must generate a 12 percent minimum rate of return to qualify for consideration.

Using net present value analysis, evaluate the proposal and make a recommendation to management. Explain how your recommendation would change if management were willing to accept a 10 percent minimum rate of return. Use Tables 1 and 2 in the appendix on present value tables.

the portfolio manager of a hedge fund believes that stock 257229

The portfolio manager of a hedge fund believes that stock A is undervalued and stock B is overvalued. Currently their prices are $30 and $30, respectively. The portfolio manager of the fund buys 100 shares of A and sells 100 shares of B short.

a) Why does the portfolio manager establish these two positions?

b) What is the initial cash outflow from the two positions?

c) What are the net profits and losses on the positions if, after a period of time, the prices of each stock are

Price of A Price of B

$25 ………………..$25

27.50 ………………..27.50

30 ………………..30

32.50 ………………..32.50

35 ………………..35

d) What are the net profits and losses on the positions if, after a period of time, the prices of each stock are

Price of A Price of B

$25 ………………..$35

27.50 ………………..32.50

30 ………………..30

32.50 ………………..27.50

35 ………………..25

e) What are the net profits and losses on the positions if, after a period of time, the prices of each stock are

Price of A Price of B

$25 ………………..$20

27.50 ………………..25

30 ………………..30

32.50 ………………..35

35 ………………..40

f) What are the net profits and losses on the positions if, after a period of time, the prices of each stock are

Price of A Price of B

$25 ………………..$27.50

27.50 ………………..28.25

30 ………………..30

32.50 ………………..31.25

35 ………………..32.50

g) For the portfolio manager’s expectation to be fulfilled, the prices of the stocks have to follow which of the above four patterns? What are the implications if the other patterns of stock prices occur?

the preceding problems can be solved using the interest tables 257231

The preceding problems can be solved using the interest tables supplied in Appendix A. To test your ability to construct your own interest factors or to use the computer programs available with this text, solve the following problems.

a) You place $1,300 in a savings account that pays 5.3 percent annually. How much will you have in the account at the end of six years and three months?

b) You invest $1,000 annually for seven years and earn 7.65 percent annually. How much interest will you have accumulated at the end of the seventh year?

c) An investment promises to pay you $10,000 each year for ten years. If you want to earn 8.42 percent on your investments, what is the maximum price you should pay for this asset?

d) You bought a stock for $10 a share and sold it for $25.60 after 5. years. What was your annual return (rate of growth) on the investment?

e) You can earn 7.2 percent annually; how much must you invest annually to accumulate $50,000 after five years?

the stockholders equity of tal corporation at december 31 2011 257239

The stockholders’ equity of Tal Corporation at December 31, 2011, was $380,000, consisting of the following (in thousands):

Capital stock, $10 par (24,000 shares outstanding) $240

Additional paid-in capital 60

Retained earnings 80

Total stockholders’ equity$380

On January 1, 2012, Tal Corporation, which was in a tight working capital position, sold 12,000 shares of previously unissued stock to Riv Corporation for $250,000. All of Tal’s identifiable assets and liabilities were recorded at fair values on this date except for a building with a 10-year remaining useful life that was undervalued by $60,000. During 2012, Tal Corporation reported net income of $120,000 and paid dividends of $90,000.

REQUIRED: Prepare all journal entries necessary for Riv Corporation to account for its investment in Tal for 2012.

the treasurer of miller co has read on the internet 257245

The treasurer of Miller Co. has read on the Internet that the stock price of Wade Inc. is about to take off. In order to profit from this potential development, Miller Co. purchased a call option on Wade common shares on July 7, 2012, for $240. The call option is for 200 shares (notional value), and the strike price is $70. (The market price of a share of Wade stock on that date is $70.) The option expires on January 31, 2013. The following data are available with respect to the call option.

?

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries for Miller Co. for the following dates.

(a) July 7, 2012—Investment in call option on Wade shares.

(b) September 30, 2012—Miller prepares financial statements.

(c) December 31, 2012—Miller prepares financial statements.

(d) January 4, 2013—Miller settles the call option on the Wadeshares.

analytical procedures the audit manager of a medium sized film 257247

You are the audit manager of a medium-sized film and have just received a package from Adam Smith. the financial controller of Accrod Ltd. a toy manufacturer. This is your firnis first year as auditor of Accrod. The following financial reports were prepared for a board meeting and Adam felt it might be useful to you in preparation of the forthcoming audit for the year ended 30 June 2012. During a brief telephone call with Adam. you made the following notes: 1. One of the conditions of the long-term loan is that the company is not to exceed a debt-to equity ratio of 2:1 at any time. The loan is reviewed each year on 30 June. 2. Provision against inventor). obsolescence is provided for at a flat rate of 5%. The amount provided in previous years was 10% and 20% respectively. Adam said that the company believes it has been overly conservative in previous years and 5% is a more realistic level, given the nature of its products. 3. The long-term loan receivable is from a company involved in the development and production of computer software. It is owned by one of the directors.

Attachments:

tony skateboards is considering building a new plant james bott 257282

Tony Skateboards is considering building a new plant. James Bott, the company’s marketing manager, is an enthusiastic supporter of the new plant. Alyssa Minh, the company’s chief financial officer, is not so sure that the plant is a good idea. Currently the company purchases its skateboards from foreign manufacturers. The following figures were estimated regarding the construction of a new plant.

Cost of plant …………… $4,000,000

Estimated useful life ……… 15 years

Annual cash inflows …… 4,000,000

Salvage value …………. $2,000,000

Annual cash outflows ….. 3,550,000

Discount rate …………………. 11%

James Bott believes that these figures understate the true potential value of the plant. He suggests that by manufacturing its own skateboards the company will benefit from a ?obuy American?? patriotism that he believes is common among skateboarders. He also notes that the firm has had numerous quality problems with the skateboards manufactured by its suppliers. He suggests that the inconsistent quality has resulted in lost sales, increased warranty claims, and some costly lawsuits. Overall, he believes sales will be $200,000 higher than projected above, and that the savings from lower warranty costs and legal costs will be $80,000 per year. He also believes that the project is not as risky as assumed above, and that a 9% discount rate is more reasonable.

Instructions

Answer each of the following.

(a) Compute the net present value of the project based on the original projections.

(b) Compute the net present value incorporating James’ estimates of the value of the intangible benefits, but still using the 11% discount rate.

(c) Compute the net present value using the original estimates, but employing the 9% discount rate that James suggests is more appropriate.

(d) Comment on your findings.

tortuga enterprises loaned 350 000 to turner inc on january 1 257284

Tortuga Enterprises loaned $350,000 to Turner Inc. on January 1, 2010. The terms of the loan require principal payments of $70,000 each year for five years plus interest at the market rate of interest of 6%. The first principal and interest payment is due on January 1, 2011. Turner made the required payments during 2011 and 2012. However, during 2012 Turner began to experience financial difficulties, requiring Tortuga to reassess the collectibility of the loan. On December 31, 2012, Tortuga determines that the remaining principal payments will be collected, but the collection of interest is unlikely.

1. Compute the present value of the expected future cash flows as of December 31, 2012.

2. Provide the journal entry to record the loan impairment as of December 31, 2012. 3. Provide the journal entries for 2013 to record the receipt of the principal payment on January 1 and the recognition of interest revenue as of December 31, assuming that Tortuga’s assessment of the collectibility of the loan has not changed.

tricia corporation exchanged 40 000 previously unissued no par 257289

Tricia Corporation exchanged 40,000 previously unissued no par common shares for a 40 percent interest in Lisa Corporation on January 1, 2011. The assets and liabilities of Lisa on that date (after the exchange) were as follows (in thousands):



The direct cost of issuing the shares of stock was $20,000, and other direct costs of combination were $80,000.

REQUIRED

1. Assume that the January 1, 2011, market price for Tricia’s shares is $24 per share. Prepare a schedule to allocate the investment cost/book value differentials.

2. Assume that the January 1, 2011, market price for Tricia’s shares is $16 per share. Prepare a schedule to allocate the investment cost/book value differentials. Assume that other direct costs were$0.

using an aging schedule to account for bad debts rough 257327

Using an Aging Schedule to Account for Bad Debts Rough Stuff is a distributor of large rocks. It sells on credit to commercial landscaping companies and extends terms that require customers to pay in 60 days. For accounts that are not overdue, Rough Stuff has found that there is a 90% probability of collection. For accounts up to one month past due, the likelihood of collection decreases to 75%. If accounts are between one and two months past due, the probability of collection is 65%, and if an account is over two months past due, Rough Stuff estimates only a 25% chance of collecting the receivable.

On December 31, 2010, the balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $34,590. The amounts of gross receivables, by age, on this date are as follows:

Category Amount

Current ……………………..$200,000

Past due:

Less than one month …………60,300

One to two months …………..35,000

Over two months …………….45,000

Required

1. Prepare a schedule to estimate the amount of uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2010.

2. Rough Stuff knows that $40,000 of the $45,000 amount that is more than two months overdue is due from one customer that is in severe financial trouble. It is rumored that the customer will be filing for bankruptcy in the near future. As controller for Rough Stuff, how would you handle this situation?

3. Show how accounts receivable would be presented on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet.

during the current financial year big fuel ltd has moved from the research phase to 257328

During the current financial year, Big Fuel Ltd has moved from the research phase to the development phase of an internal project designed to result ultimately in the marketing of a new motor vehicle fuel injection system. The company, through it separate fuel injection research and development division, has incurred the following costs during the financial year:

(a) Salaries of the division’s marketing department staff in developing materials to instil market recognition of the Big Fuel brand name.

(b) Salaries of divisional staff and costs of books and other reference materials incurred in obtaining knowledge of alternative possible fuel injection systems.

(c) Salaries of company staff, following a final decision on the new fuel injection system’s design, to evaluate possible alternative processes for production of the new fuel injection system.

(d) Design and construction of a pre-production prototype of the fuel injection system.

(e) Construction and operation of a small pilot production plant for manufacture of the fuel injection system.

(f) Administration and general office overhead expenditure arising from the research phase of the project.

(g) Administration and general office overhead expenditure arising from the development phase of the project.

(h) Fees to register a patent over the new fuel injection system design.

Required:

For each of the above costs, indicate whether that cost could be recognised as an intangible asset by Big Fuel Ltd in accordance with AASB 138. Provide relevant paragraph numbers from the standard to support your answer.

Document Preview:

Internally generated intangible asset During the current financial year, Big Fuel Ltd has moved from the research phase to the development phase of an internal project designed to result ultimately in the marketing of a new motor vehicle fuel injection system. The company, through it separate fuel injection research and development division, has incurred the following costs during the financial year: (a) Salaries of the division’s marketing department staff in developing materials to instil market recognition of the Big Fuel brand name. (b) Salaries of divisional staff and costs of books and other reference materials incurred in obtaining knowledge of alternative possible fuel injection systems. (c) Salaries of company staff, following a final decision on the new fuel injection system’s design, to evaluate possible alternative processes for production of the new fuel injection system. (d) Design and construction of a pre-production prototype of the fuel injection system. (e) Construction and operation of a small pilot production plant for manufacture of the fuel injection system. (f) Administration and general office overhead expenditure arising from the research phase of the project. (g) Administration and general office overhead expenditure arising from the development phase of the project. (h) Fees to register a patent over the new fuel injection system design. Required: For each of the above costs, indicate whether that cost could be recognised as an intangible asset by Big Fuel Ltd in accordance with AASB 138. Provide relevant paragraph numbers from the standard to support your answer.??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

using an aging schedule to account for bad debts sparkle 257329

Using an Aging Schedule to Account for Bad Debts Sparkle Jewels distributes fine stones. It sells on credit to retail jewelry stores and extends terms that require the stores to pay in 60 days. For accounts that are not overdue, Sparkle has found that there is a 95% probability of collection. For accounts up to one month past due, the likelihood of collection decreases to 80%. If accounts are between one and two months past due, the probability of collection is 60%, and if an account is over two months past due, Sparkle Jewels estimates only a 40% chance of collecting the receivable.

On December 31, 2010, the balance in Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is $12,300. The amounts of gross receivables by age on this date are as follows:

Category Amount

Current ……………………$200,000

Past due:

Less than one month …………45,000

One to two months ………….25,000

Over two months ………………1000

Required

1. Prepare a schedule to estimate the amount of uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2010.

2. On the basis of the schedule in (1), identify and analyze the adjustment on December 31, 2010, to estimate bad debts.

3. Show how accounts receivable would be presented on the December 31, 2010, balance sheet.

using net present value and internal rate of return to 257332

Using net present value and internal rate of return to evaluate investment opportunities Kerry Wood’s rich uncle gave him $60,000 cash as a gift for his 40th birthday. Unlike his spoiled cousins who spend money carelessly, Mr. Wood wants to invest the money for his future retirement. After an extensive search, he is considering one of two investment opportunities. Project 1 would require an immediate cash payment of $52,800; Project 2 needs only a $24,000 cash payment at the beginning. The expected cash inflows are $17,280 per year for Project 1 and $8,400 per year for Project 2. Both projects are expected to provide cash flow benefits for the next four years. Mr. Wood found that the interest rate for a four-year certificate of deposit is about 7 percent. He decided that this is his required rate of return.

Required

a. Compute the net present value of each project. Which project should Mr. Wood adopt based on the net present value approach?

b. Compute the approximate internal rate of return of each project. Which project should Mr. Wood adopt based on the internal rate of return approach?

c. Compare the net present value approach with the internal rate of return approach. Which method is better in the given circumstances?

death of a partner and retirement of a partner 257350

Partners Danao, Diaz, Dolor and Dungca share profits in the ration of 40%, 30%, 15% and 15% respectively. The partnership agreement provides that in the event of the death of a partner, the firm shall continue until the fiscal period. Profits shall be considered to have been earned proportionately during the period and the deceased partner’s capital shall be adjusted by his share of the profit or loss to the date of death.From the date of death until the date of settlement with the estate, there shall be added interest of 10% computed on the adjusted capital. The remaining partners shall continue to divide profits in the old ratio. Payment to the estate shall be made within 2 years from the date of partner’s death. As of January 1, 2010, the capital balances of the partners were as follows :Danao 84000Diaz 75000Dolor 48000Dungca 45000

Dungca died on Sept. 30, 2010. The boooks of the partnership were closed as of Dec.31, arriving at a credit balance of 45000 for the income summary account.

On Dec 31, 2010, Dolor notified the remaining partners that he was retiring from the partnership and was willing to accept in settlement of his interest the balance of his capital account after the distribution of profits less 25 %

The remaining artners accepted his offer and issued a 120-day, 10 % note to Dolor in payment of his interest.

Required: journal entries to record the transactions above.

vat company acquired a 30 percent interest in the voting 257381

Vat Company acquired a 30 percent interest in the voting stock of Zel Company for $331,000 on January 1, 2011, when Zel’s stockholders’ equity consisted of capital stock of $600,000 and retained earnings of $400,000. At the time of Vat’s investment, Zel’s assets and liabilities were recorded at their fair values, except for inventories that were undervalued by $30,000 and a building with a 10-year remaining useful life that was overvalued by $60,000. Zel has income for 2011 of $100,000 and pays dividends of $50,000. Assume undervalued inventories are sold in 2011.

REQUIRED

1. Compute Vat’s income from Zel for 2011.

2. What is the balance of Vat’s Investment in Zel account at December 31, 2011?

3. What is Vat’s share of Zel’s recorded net assets at December 31, 2011?

victoria company has investments in equity securities classified 257387

Victoria Company has investments in equity securities classified as trading and available for sale. At the beginning of the year, the aggregate market value of each portfolio exceeded its cost. During the year, Victoria sold some securities from each portfolio. At the end of the year, the aggregate cost of each portfolio exceeded its market value. Victoria also has investments in bonds classified as held to maturity, all of which were purchased for face value. During the year, some of these bonds held by Victoria were called prior to their maturity by the bond issuer. Three months before the end of the year, additional similar bonds were purchased for face value plus two months’ accrued interest.

Required

1. a. Explain how Victoria accounts for the sale of securities from each portfolio.

b. Explain how Victoria accounts for each equity securities portfolio at year-end.

2. Explain how Victoria accounts for the disposition prior to their maturity of the long-term bonds called by their issuer.

3. Explain how Victoria reports the purchase of the additional similar bonds at the date of the acquisition.

warner company started business on january 1 2011 the followin 257412

Warner Company started business on January 1, 2011. The following transactions and events occurred in 2011 and 2012. For simplicity, information for sales, inventory purchases, collections on account, and payments on account is given in summary form at the end of each year.

2011

Jan. 1 Issued 150,000 shares of $1-par common stock to investors at $15 per share.

1 Purchased a building for $720,000. The building has a 25-year expected useful life and a $70,000 expected salvage value. Warner uses the straight-line method of depreciation.

1 Leased equipment under a 10-year lease. The five lease payments of $20,000 each are to be made on December

31 of each year. The cash price of the equipment is $134,202. This lease is accounted for as a capital lease with an implicit interest rate of 8%. The equipment has a 10-year useful life and zero expected salvage value; Warner uses straight-line depreciation with all of its equipment.

Feb. 1 Borrowed $1.8 million from Foley Bank. The loan bears a 9% annual interest rate. Interest is to be paid each year on February 1. The principal on the loan will be repaid in four years.

Mar. 1 Purchased 50,000 shares of Ryan Company for $30 per share. Warner classifies this as an investment in trading securities. These securities are reported as a current asset.

July 15 Purchased 55,000 shares of Anson Company for $23 per share. Warner classifies this as an investment in available-for-sale securities. These securities are reported as a long-term asset.

Nov. 17 Declared a cash dividend of $0.30 per share, payable on January 15, 2012.

Dec. 31 Made the lease payment.

31 The Ryan Company shares had a market value of $26 per share. The Anson Company shares had a market value of $28 per share.

Summary:

a. Sales for the year (all on credit) totaled $900,000. The cost of inventory sold was $480,000.

b. Cash collections on credit sales for the year were $420,000.

c. Inventory costing $540,000 was purchased on account. (Warner Company uses the perpetual inventory method.)

d. Payments on account totaled $500,000.

2012

Jan. 1 Issued $400,000 in bonds at par value. The bonds have a stated interest rate of 10%, payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.

1 The estimated useful life and salvage value for the building were changed. It is now estimated that the building has a remaining life (as of January 1, 2012) of 20 years. Also, it is now estimated that the building will have no salvage value. These changes in estimate are to take effect for the year 2012 and subsequent years.

15 Paid the cash dividend declared in November 2011.

Feb. 1 Warner Company repurchased 15,000 shares of its own common stock to be held as treasury stock. The price paid was $32 per share.

1 Paid the interest on the loan from Foley Bank.

Apr. 10 Sold all 50,000 shares of the Ryan Company stock. The shares were sold for $25 per share.

July 1 Paid the interest on the bonds.

Oct. 1 Retired the bonds that were issued on January 1. Warner had to pay $380,000 to retire the bonds. This amount included interest that had accrued since July 1.

Nov. 20 Declared a cash dividend of $0.30 per share. The dividend applies only to outstanding shares, not to treasury shares.

Dec. 31 Made the lease payment.

31 After recording depreciation expense for the year, the building was evaluated for possible impairment. The building is expected to generate cash flows of $18,000 per year for its 19-year remaining life. The building has a current market value of $320,000.

31 The Anson Company shares had a market value of $19 per share.

Summary:

a. Sales for the year (all on credit) totaled $1.8 million. The cost of inventory sold was $950,000.

b. Cash collections on credit sales for the year were $1.54 million.

c. Inventory costing $1,000,000 was purchased on account.

d. Payments on account totaled $970,000.

Required:

1. Prepare all journal entries to record the information for 2011. Also, prepare any necessary adjusting entries.

2. Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2011. There is no need to show your ledger T-accounts; however, preparing and posting to T-accounts may aid in the preparation of the trial balance.

3. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.

4. Prepare all journal entries to record the information for 2012. Also prepare any necessary adjusting entries.

5. Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2012. (As you compute the amounts to include in the trial balance, don’t forget the beginning balances left over from 2011.)

6. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

hsa 525 health finacail management 257437

7.1 Assume that the managers of Fort Winston Hospital are setting the price on a new outpatient service. Here are relevant data estimates:

Variable cost per visit$5.00

Annual direct fixed costs$500,000

Annual overhead allocation$50,000Expected annual utilization10,000

  1. What per-visit price must be set for the service to break even? Toearn an annual profit of $100,000?
  2. Repeat Part a, but assume that the variable cost per visit is $10.
  3. Return to the data given in the problem. Again repeat Part a, butassume that direct fixed costs are $1,000,000.
  4. Repeat Part a assuming both $10 in variable cost and $1,000,000 in direct fixed costs.

7.2 The audiology department at Randall Clinic offers many services to the clinic’s patients. The three most common, along with cost andutilization data, are as follows:

ServiceVariable Cost Annual DirectAnnual # Visits

per ServiceFixed Costs

Basic exam$5$50,0003,000

Advanced examination$7$30,0001,500

Therapy session$10$40,000500

  1. What is the fee schedule for these services, assuming that the goal is to cover only variable and direct fixed costs?
  2. Assume that the audiology department is allocated $100,000 intotal overhead by the clinic, and the department director has al­located $50.000 of this amount to the three services listed above.What is the fee schedule assuming that these overhead costs mustbe covered? (To answer this question, assume that the allocation of overhead costs to each service is made on the basis of numberof visits.)
  3. Assume that these services must make a combined profit of $25,000 .Now what is the fee schedule? (To answer this question, assumethat the profit requirement is allocated in the same way as overheadcosts.)lied Laboratories is combining some of its most common

7.3Allied Laboratories is combining some of its most common tests into one-price packages. One such package will contain three tests that have the following variable costs:

Test ATest BTest C

Disposable syringe$3.00$3.00$3.00

Blood vial0.500.500.50

Forms0.150.150.15

Reagents0.800.601.20

Sterile bandage0.100.100.10

Breakage/losses0.050.050.05

When the tests are combined, only one syringe, form, and sterile ban­dage will be used. Furthermore, only one charge for breakage/losseswill apply. Two blood vials are required, and reagent costs will remainthe same (reagents from all three tests are required).

  1. As a starting point, what is the price of the combined test assumingmarginal cost pricing?
  2. Assume that Allied wants a contribution margin of $10 per test.What price must be set to achieve this goal?
  3. Allied estimates that 2,000 of the combined tests will be conduct­ed during the first year. The annual allocation of direct fixed andoverhead costs total $40,000. What price must be set to cover fullcosts? What price must be set to produce a profit of $20,000 on thecombined test?

7.4 Assume that Valley Forge Hospital has only the following three payergroups:

Number ofAverage RevenueVariable Cost

PayerAdmissionsper Admissionper Admission

PennCare1,000$5,000$3,000

Medicare4,0004,5004,000

Commercial8,0007,0002,500

The hospital’s fixed costs are $38 million,

  1. What is the hospital’s net income?
  2. Assume that half of the 100.000 covered lives in the commercial payer group will be moved into a capitated plan. All utilization andcost data remain the same. What PMPM rate will the hospital haveto charge to retain its Part a net income?
  3. What overall net income would be produced if the admission rateof the capitated group were reduced from the commercial level by10 percent?
  4. Assuming that the utilization reduction also occurs, what overall net income would be produced if the variable cost per admission for the capitated group were lowered to $2,200?

8.1Consider the following 2011 data for Newark General Hospital (in millionsof dollars):

StaticFlexibleActual

BudgetBudgetResults

Revenues$4.7$4.8$4.5

Costs4.14.14.2

Profits0.60.70.3

a.Calculate and interpret the profit variance.

b.Calculate and interpret the revenue variance.

c.Calculate and interpret the cost variance.

d.Calculate and interpret the volume and price variances on the revenue side.

e.Calculate and interpret the volume and management variances on the cost side.

f.How are the variances calculated above related?

8.2 Here are the 2011 revenues for the Wendover Group Practice Association for four different budgets (in thousands of dollars):

FlexibleFlexible

StaticEnrollment/Utilization)(Enrollment)Actual

BudgetBudgetBudgetResults

$425$200$180$300

a.What does the budget data tell you about the nature of Wendover’spatients: Are they capitated or fee-for-service? (Hint: See the note toExhibit 8.7.)

b.Calculate and interpret the following variances:

•Revenue variance

•Volume variance

•Price variance

•Enrollment variance

8.3 Here are the budgets of Brandon Surgery Center for the most recenthistorical quarter (in thousands of dollars):

StaticFlexibleActual

Number of surgeries1,200 1,3001,300

Patient revenue$2,400$2,600$2,535

Salary expense1,2001,3001,365

Non-salary expense600650585

Profit$600$650$585

The center assumes that all revenues and costs are variable andhence tied directly to patient volume.

a.Explain how each amount in the flexible budget was calculated. (HintExamine the static budget to determine the relationship of each bud­ get line to volume.)

b.Determine the variances for each line of the profit and loss statement,both in dollar terms and in percentage terms. (Hint: Each line has atotal variance, a volume variance, and a price variance [for revenues and management variance [for expenses].)

c.What do the Part b results tell Brandon’s managers about the surgery center’s operations for the quarter?

8.4 Refer to Carroll Clinic’s 2011 operating budget contained in Exhibit 8.3, Instead of the actual results reported in Exhibit 8.4, assume the resultsreported below:

Carroll Clinic: New 2011 Results

/.Volume:

A. FFS34,000visits

B.Capitated lives30,000membersNumber of member-months360,000

Actual utilization per

member-month0.12

Number of visits43,200 visits

C.Total actual visits77,200 visits

II.Revenues:

A.FFS$28per visit

X 34,000actual visits$952,000

B.Capitated lives$2.75PMPM

X 360,000actual member-months $990,000

C.Total actual revenues$1,942,000

III. Costs:

A. Variable Costs:

Labor$1,242,000 (46,000 hours at $27/hour)

Supplies126,000 (90,000 units at $1.40/unit)

Total variable costs$17.72 ($1,368,000 / 77,200)

B. Fixed Costs

Overhead, plant,

and equipment$525,000

C. Total actual costs$1,893,000

IV. Profit & Loss Statement:

Revenues:

FFS$952,000

Capitated$990,000

Total$1,942,000

Costs:

Variable:

FFS$602,487

Capitated765,513

Total$1,368,000

Contribution Margin$574,000

Fixed Costs525,000

Actual profit$49,000

  1. Construct Carroll’s flexible budget for 2011.
  1. What are the profit variance, revenue variance, and cost variance?
  1. Consider the revenue variance. What is the component volume variance? The price variance?
  1. Break down the cost variance into volume and management components.

  1. Break down the management variance into labor, supplies, and fixed cost variances.
  1. Interpret your results. In particular, focus on the differences between the variance analysis here and the Carroll Clinic illustration presented in the chapter.

quake corporation paid 1 680 000 for a 30 percent interest in 256850

Quake Corporation paid $1,680,000 for a 30 percent interest in Tremor Corporation’s outstanding voting stock on January 1, 2011. The book values and fair values of Tremor’s assets and liabilities on January 1, along with amortization data, are as follows (in thousands):



Tremor Corporation reported net income of $1,200,000 for 2011 and paid dividends of $600,000.

REQUIRED

1. Prepare a schedule to allocate the investment fair values/book value differentials relating to Quake’s investment in Tremor.

2. Calculate Quake’s income from Tremor for 2011.

3. Determine the balance of Quake’s Investment in Tremor account at December 31,2011.

retirement planning and federal income taxation can mary set up 256918

1. Can Mary set up an IRA and deduct the contribution from her income that is subject to federal income taxation? Does the same apply to Jason? Could Marys or Jasons children have IRA accounts?

2. Can Mary or Jason set up a Keogh account and deduct the contribution from income that is subject to federal income taxation? Could their children establish Keogh accounts?

3. Is there any reason why Mary or Jason should prefer a 401(k) or Keogh retirement account to an IRA?

4. Is the income generated by Marys 401(k) account subject to current federal income taxation? If Jason created a retirement account, would the income be subject to current federal income taxation?

5. If either Mary or Jason were to withdraw funds from their retirement accounts, would they pay federal income taxes and penalties?

6. If Mary or Jason purchased stock outside of a retirement account, should the purchases emphasize income or capital gains? Would purchasing stock outside a retirement account be a desirable strategy?

7. Would the purchase of an annuity offer tax benefits that are similar to a retirement account?

8. Would the funds in Marys or Jasons retirement accounts be subject to federal estate taxation?

9. What general strategies would you suggest to an individual seeking to accumulate funds for retirement?

MINI CASE

Your financial planning practice services several sophisticated individuals who have accumulated a substantial amount of assets but who are naive concerning potential strategies to reduce taxes. To increase their awareness, one client suggested that you offer a complimentary seminar to explain fundamental means for reducing taxes. Your immediate reaction was that each individuals tax situation differs, so the seminar would be of little benefit. On further reflection, however, you thought a focused presentation could be beneficial, especially if you limit the discussion to one topic, retirement planning, and cover other tax strategies such as capital gains or estate planning only to the extent that they affect retirement planning. To illustrate the differences in retirement planning, you selected two very different case studies. Mary Brost is a single parent with one teenage son. She has a well-paying, secure job that offers a 401(k) plan, life insurance, and other benefits. While Ms. Brost has sufficient resources to finance her sons college education, he works in a local CPA office that provides him with sufficient spending money, including the cost of insurance for his car.

retirement plans and investment choices if bozena participates 256919

1. If Bozena participates and the 401(k) earns 10 percent annually, how much will she have accumulated in 45 years (to age 67) even if her salary does not change?

2. If she does not participate and annually saves $1,600 on her own, how much will she have accumulated if she earns 10 percent and is in the 20 percent federal income tax bracket?

3. If she retires at age 67, given the amounts in (1) and (2), how much can Bozena withdraw and spend each year for 20 years from each alternative? Assume she continues to earn 10 percent (before tax) and remains in the 20 percent federal income tax bracket.

4. If her salary grows, what impact will the increase have on the 40l (k) plan? To illustrate the effect on her accumulated funds, assume a $5,000 increment every five years so that she is earning $72,000 in years 41-45 (ages 63-67).

5. What are the risks and potential returns associated with each of the six alternative funds?

6. Who bears the risk associated with Bozenas retirement income? 7. Why does Ken not have to make these investment decisions? What are the risks associated with his retirement plan?

8. At this point in Bozenas life, which alternative(s) do you suggest she select?

MINI CASE

Ken Saffafs 22-year-old daughter Bozena has just accepted a job with Doctor Medical Systems (DMS), a firm specializing in computer services for doctors. DMS offers employees a 401(k) plan to which employees may contribute 5 percent of their salary. DMS will match $0.50 for every dollar contributed. Bozenas starting salary is $32,000, so she could contribute up to $1,600 and DMS would contribute an additional $800. If she did decide to contribute to the plan, she has the following choices of funds, all managed by Superior Investments. She may select any combination of the funds and change the selection quarterly.

rit corporation paid 1 372 000 for a 30 percent interest in 256928

Rit Corporation paid $1,372,000 for a 30 percent interest in Tel Corporation’s outstanding voting stock on April 1, 2011. At December 31, 2010, Tel had net assets of $4,000,000 and only common stock outstanding. During 2011, Tel declared and paid dividends of $80,000 each quarter on March 15, June 15, September 15, and December 15 ($320,000 in total). At April 1, 2011, the book value of assets and liabilities equals the fair value. Tel’s 2011 income was reported as follows:

Income before extraordinary item $480,000

Extraordinary gain, December 2011 160,000

Net income $640,000

REQUIRED: Determine the following items for Rit:

1. Goodwill from the investment in Tel

2. Income from Tel for 2011

3. Investment in Tel account balance at December 31, 2011

4. Rit’s equity in Tel’s net assets at December 31, 2011

5. The amount of extraordinary gain that Rit will show on its 2011 income statement

samson products inc is a wholesaler of men s hair products 256951

Samson Products, Inc., is a wholesaler of men’s hair products. The company began operations on January 1, 2012. The following transactions relate to securities acquired by Samson Products, Inc., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2012

Jan. 3. Purchased 5,000 shares of Merlin Inc. as an available-for-sale investment at $22 per share, including the brokerage commission.

July. 8. Merlin Inc. stock was split two for one. The regular cash dividend of $0.40 per share was received on the stock after the stock split.

Oct. 19. Sold 1,200 shares of Merlin Inc stock at $13 per share, less a brokerage commission of $50.

Dec. 12. Received the regular cash dividend of $0.40 per share.

31. Merlin Inc. is classified as an available-for-sale investment and is adjusted to a fair value of $9.50 per share, Use the valuation allowance for available-for-sale investments account in making the adjustment.

2013

Jan. 5. Purchased an influential interest in Juarez Co. for $540,000 by purchasing

60,000 shares directly from the estate of the founder of Juarez. There are 150,000 shares of Juarez Co. stock outstanding.

July 9. Received the regular cash divided of $0.50 per share on Merlin Inc. stock.

Dec. 8. Received the regular cash dividend of $0.50 per share plus an extra dividend of $0.05 per share on Merlin Inc. stock.

Dec. 31. Received $21,000 of c-ash dividends oil Juarez Co. stock. Juarez Co. reported net income of’ $96,000 in 2013. Samson Products uses the equity method of accounting for its investments in Juarez Co.

31. Merlin Inc. is classified as an available-for-sale investment and is adjusted to a fair value of $10 per share. Use the valuation allowance for available-for-sale investments account in making the adjustment for the Increase in fair value from $9.50 to $10 per share.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record the preceding transactions.

2. Prepare the investment-related asset and stockholders equity balance sheet disclosures for Samson Products, Inc., on December 31, 2013, assuming the Retained Earnings balance on December 31, 2013, is $395,000.

savers mart inc is a general merchandise retail company that 256955

Savers Mart Inc. is a general merchandise retail company that began operations on January 1, 2012. The following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by Savers Mart Inc., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2012

May 1. Purchased $80,000 of Northridge City 4.5%, 10-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $600. The bonds pay interest semiannually on March 1 and September 1.

June 16. Purchased $38,000 of Hancock Co. 6%, 12-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $95. The bonds pay interest semiannually on June 1 and December 1.

Sept. 1 Received semiannual interest on the Northridge City bonds.

Oct. 1 Sold $24,000 of Northridge City bonds at 102 plus accrued interest of $90.

Dec. 1Received semiannual interest on Hancock Co. bonds.

31. Accrued $840 interest on Northridge City bonds.

31. Accrued $190 interest on Hancock Co. bonds.

2013

Mar. 1 Received semiannual interest on the Northridge City bonds.

June. 1 Received semiannual interest on the Hancock Co. bonds

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.

2. If the bond portfolio was classified as available-for-sale, what impact would this have on financial statement disclosure?

selected transactions completed by delhome products inc during 256961

Selected transactions completed by Delhome Products Inc. during the fiscal year ending July 31, 2008, were as follows:

a. Issued 12,500 shares of $30 par common stock at $65, receiving cash.

b. Issued 10,000 shares of $125 par preferred 8% stock at $160, receiving cash.

c. Issued $15,000,000 of 10-year, 12% bonds at an effective interest rate of 10%, with interest payable semiannually. Use the present value tables in Appendix A to determine the bond proceeds. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

d. Declared a dividend of $0.25 per share on common stock and $2.50 per share on preferred stock. On the date of record, 125,000 shares of common stock were outstanding, no treasury shares were held, and 18,750 shares of preferred stock were outstanding.

e. Paid the cash dividends declared in (d).

f. Redeemed $500,000 of 8-year, 15% bonds at 101. The balance in the bond premium account is $6,150 after the payment of interest and amortization of premium have been recorded. (Record only the redemption of the bonds payable.)

g. Purchased 6,250 shares of treasury common stock at $62.50 per share.

h. Declared a 2% stock dividend on common stock and a $2.50 cash dividend per share on preferred stock. On the date of declaration, the market value of the common stock was $63.75 per share. On the date of record, 125,000 shares of common stock had been issued, 6,250 shares of treasury common stock were held, and 18,750 shares of preferred stock had been issued. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

i. Issued the stock certificates for the stock dividends declared in (h) and paid the cash dividends to the preferred stockholders.

j. Purchased $150,000 of Lewis Sports Inc. 10-year, 15% bonds, directly from the issuing company, for $145,500 plus accrued interest of $5,625.

k. Sold, at $72.50 per share, 3,750 shares of treasury common stock purchased in (g).

l. Recorded the payment of semiannual interest on the bonds issued in (c) and the amortization of the premium for six months. The amortization was determined using the straight-line method. (Round the amortization to the nearest dollar.)

m. Accrued interest for four months on the Lewis Sports Inc. bonds purchased in (j). Also recorded amortization of $120.

Instructions

1. Journalize the selected transactions.

2. After all of the transactions for the year ended July 31, 2008, had been posted (including the transactions recorded in (1) and all adjusting entries), the data below and on the following page were taken from the records of Delhome Products Inc.

a. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended July 31, 2008, concluding with earnings per share. In computing earnings per share, assume that the average number of common shares outstanding was 125,000 and preferred dividends were $131,250. (Round earnings per share to the nearest cent.)

b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended July 31, 2008.

c. Prepare a balance sheet in report form as of July 31, 2008.

Income statement data:

Advertising expense ……………………………………………………..$ 150,000

Cost of merchandise sold ………………………………………………..3,498,750

Delivery expense ………………………………………………………… 27,000

Depreciation expense—office buildings and equipment ………………… 25,000

Depreciation expense—store buildings and equipment …………………. 90,000

Gain on redemption of bonds …………………………………………… 1,150

Income tax:

Applicable to continuing operations ……………………………………. 247,509

Applicable to loss from discontinued operations ………………………. 100,000

Applicable to gain from redemption of bonds ………………………….. 150

Interest expense ………………………………………………………… 778,266

Interest revenue ………………………………………………………… 2,025

Loss from disposal of discontinued operations ………………………… 250,000

Loss from fixed asset impairment ……………………………………… $ 187,500

Miscellaneous administrative expenses ………………………………… 7,500

Miscellaneous selling expenses ………………………………………… 13,750

Office rent expense …………………………………………………….. 50,000

Office salaries expense …………………………………………………. 170,000

Office supplies expense ………………………………………………… 10,000

Restructuring charges …………………………………………………… 93,750

Sales …………………………………………………………………….. 6,300,000

Sales commissions ……………………………………………………… 195,000

Sales salaries expense …………………………………………………… 360,000

Store supplies expense ………………………………………………….. 20,000

Retained earnings and balance sheet data:

Accounts payable ……………………………………………………….. 212,000

Accounts receivable …………………………………………………….. 562,500

Accumulated depreciation—office buildings and equipment ………….. 1,670,650

Accumulated depreciation—store buildings and equipment …………… 4,428,750

Allowance for doubtful accounts ………………………………………. 43,750

Bonds payable, 11%, due 2018 ………………………………………… 14,500,000

Cash ……………………………………………………………………. 250,000

Common stock, $30 par (400,000 shares authorized;

124,875 shares outstanding) …………………………………………… 3,746,250

Deferred income tax payable (current portion, $17,500) ………………. 51,375

Dividends:

Cash dividends for common stock …………………………………….. 122,815

Cash dividends for preferred stock …………………………………… 187,500

Stock dividends for common stock …………………………………… 151,406

Dividends payable …………………………………………………….. 37,500

Employee termination obligation (current) ……………………………. 81,250

Goodwill ……………………………………………………………… 540,000

Income tax payable …………………………………………………… 40,000

Interest receivable …………………………………………………….. 7,500

Investment in Lewis Sports Inc. bonds (long-term) ………………….. 145,620

Merchandise inventory (July 31, 2008), at lower of

cost (FIFO) or market ………………………………………………… 850,000

Notes receivable ……………………………………………………… 156,250

Office buildings and equipment ……………………………………… 7,412,500

Paid-in capital from sale of treasury stock …………………………… 37,500

Paid-in capital in excess of par—common stock …………………….. 700,000

Paid-in capital in excess of par—preferred stock ……………………. 300,000

Preferred 8% stock, $125 par (30,000 shares authorized;

18,750 shares issued) …………………………………………………. 2,343,750

Premium on bonds payable …………………………………………… 1,769,722

Prepaid expenses ……………………………………………………… 31,250

Retained earnings, August 1, 2007 …………………………………… 2,302,970

Store buildings and equipment ……………………………………….. 21,920,876

Treasury stock (2,500 shares of common stock at cost

of $62.50 per share) …………………………………………………… 156,250

selected transactions completed by everyday products inc during 256962

Selected transactions completed by Everyday Products Inc. during the fiscal year ending December 31, 2012, were as follows:

a. Issued 12, 500 shares of $25 par common stock at $32, receiving cash.

b. issued 2,000 shares of $100 par preferred 5% stock at $105, receiving cash.

c. Issued $400,000 of 10-year, 6% bonds at 105, with interest payable semiannually.

d. Declared a quarterly dividend of $0.45 per share on common stock and $1.25 per share on preferred stock. On the data of record, 85,000 shares of common stock were outstanding, no treasury share were held, and 17,000 shares of preferred stock were outstanding.

e. Paid the cash dividends declared in (d).

f. Purchased 5,500 shares of kress Corp. at $22 per share, plus a $275 brokerage commission. The investment is classified as an available-for-sale investment.

g. Purchased 6,500 shares of treasury common stock at $35 per share.

h. Purchased 36,000 shares of Lifecare Co. stock directly from the founders for $18 per share. Lifecare has 112,500 shares issued and outstanding. Everyday products Inc. treated the investment as an equity method investment.

i. Declared a 2% stock dividend on common stock and a $1.25 quarterly cash dividend per share on preferred stock. On the date of declaration, the market value of the common stock was $40 per share. On the date of record, 85,000 shares of common stock had been issued, 6,500 shares of treasury common stock were held, and 17,000 shares of preferred

stock had been issued.

j. Issued the stock certificates for the stock dividends declared in (h) and paid the cash dividends to the preferred stockholders.

k. Received $24,500 dividend from Lifecare Co, investment in (h)

l. Purchased $62,000 of Nordic Wear Inc. 10-year, 6% bonds, directly from the issuing company at par value, plus accrued interest of $550. The bonds are classified as a held-to-maturity long-term investment.

m. sold, at $42 per share, 2,600 shares of treasury common stock purchased in (g).

n. Received a dividend of $0.65 per share from the Kress Corp. investment in (f).

o. Sold 500 shares of Kress corp. at $26.50, including commission.

p. Recorded the payment of semiannual interest on the bonds issued in (c) and the amortization of the premium for six months. The amortization was determined using the straight-line method.

q. Accrued interest for three months on the Nordic Wear Inc. bonds purchased in (1).

r. Lifecare Co. recorded total earnings of $205,000. Everyday products recorded equity earnings for its share of Lifecare co. net income.

s. The fair value for Kress Corp. stock was $18.50 per share on December 31, 2012. The investment is adjusted to fair value using a valuation allowance account. Assume Valuation Allowance for Available-for-sale Investments had a beginning balance of zero.

Instructions

1. Journalize the selected transactions.

2. After all of the transactions for the year ended December 31, 2012, had been posted [including the transactions recorded in part (1) and all adjusting entries], the data on the following page were taken from the records of Everyday Products Inc.

a. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, concluding with earnings per share. In computing earnings per share, assume that the average number of common shares outstanding was 84,000 and preferred dividends were $85,000. (Round earnings per share to the nearest cent.)

b. Prepare a retained earnings statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.

c. Prepare a balance sheet in report form as of December 31, 2012.

starbucks is a rapidly expanding company that provides high qual 257024

Starbucks is a rapidly expanding company that provides high-quality coffee products. Assume that as part of its expansion strategy, Starbucks plans to open numerous new stores in Mexico in five years. The company has $5 million to support the expansion and has decided to invest the funds in corporate bonds until the money is needed. Assume that Starbucks purchased bonds with $5 million face value at par for cash on July 1, 2011. The bonds pay 8 percent interest each June 30 and December 31 and mature in five years. Starbucks plans to hold the bonds until maturity.

Required:

1. What accounts are affected when the bonds are purchased on July 1, 2011?

2. What accounts are affected when interest is received on December 31, 2011?

3. Should Starbucks prepare a journal entry if the market value of the bonds decreased to $4,000,000 on December 31, 2011? Explain.

tecumseh products company has its headquarters in tecumseh mich 257046

Tecumseh Products Company has its headquarters in Tecumseh, Michigan. It describes itself as ?oa global multinational corporation producing mechanical and electrical components essential to industries creating end-products for health, comfort, and convenience.?? The following was excerpted from the management discussion and analysis section of a recent annual report.

Tecumseh Products Company

Management Discussion and Analysis

The company has invested approximately $50 million in a scroll compressor manufacturing facility in Tecumseh, Michigan. After experiencing setbacks in developing a commercially acceptable scroll compressor, the Company is currently testing a new generation of scroll product. The Company is unable to predict when, or if, it will offer a scroll compressor for commercial sale, but it does anticipate that reaching volume production will require a significant additional investment. Given such additional investment and current market conditions, management is currently reviewing its options with respect to scroll product improvement, cost reductions, joint ventures and alternative new products.

Instructions

Discuss issues the company should consider and techniques the company should employ to determine whether to continue pursuing this project.

terry s concrete acquired 20 of the outstanding common stock of 257049

Terry’s Concrete acquired 20% of the outstanding common stock of Blakeley, Inc. on January 1, 2010, by paying $1,100,000 for 40,000 shares. Blakeley declared and paid a $0.50 per share cash dividend on June 30 and again on December 31, 2010. Blakeley reported net income of $600,000 for the year. At December 31, 2010, the market price of Blakeley’s common stock was $30 per share.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries for Terry’s Concrete for 2010 assuming Terry’s cannot exercise significant influence over Blakeley. (Use the cost method and assume Blakeley common stock should be classified as available-for-sale.)

(b) Prepare the journal entries for Terry’s Concrete for 2010, assuming Terry’s can exercise significant influence over Blakeley. (Use the equity method.)

(c) Indicate the balance sheet and income statement account balances at December 31, 2010, under each method of accounting.

the bruckners asset allocation you have new clients 257062

1. How much is allocated to each class of assets?

2. Based on the historical returns in Exhibit 10.2, how much will be in each account when the girls approach college age ten years from now?

3. Since historical returns are averages, how much will be in each account assuming that the worst-and best-case scenarios based on Exhibit 10.4 were to occur? (Be careful to select the appropriate time horizon for the comparisons.)

4. What would have been the impact on the terminal amounts in Question 3 if the allocation had been 40 percent large cap companies and 60 percent small cap companies?

5. Given the values in Question 3, what is the portfolio’s asset allocation after ten years have passed? What steps should be taken?

6. If the Bruckners do not need the funds to finance their daughters’ college education, how much will be in each account when they approach retirement in their mid-60s under the original allocation?

7. Based on the rate of inflation in Exhibit 10.2, goods and services costing $100 will cost how much at their retirement? How much annual income is necessary to maintain their standard of living?

8. If their combined life expectancy is 15 years at retirement, can they maintain their standard of living if their funds as a whole earn 7 percent after they retire? What is the future rate of inflation assumed in your answer to the previous question? Is that assumption reasonable?

9. Based on the above answers, what are some suggested courses of actions the Bruckners should consider taking?

MINI CASE

You have new clients, Erik and Senta Bruckner. They are in their mid-30s and have two children, Stella and Chloe, ages 6 and 8. The Bruckners’ primary financial objective is to provide for their children’s college education. Their secondary objective is to plan for retirement. They own a home with a mortgage and have total family income of $100,000. Senta’s employer provides medical insurance and life insurance. She participates in her employer’s 401(k) retirement plan and currently has $40,000 in the plan. The funds are invested in her company’s stock. Erik is self-employed and works from their home. He has not established a retirement plan. After deducting the amount of the mortgage, the family has total assets of $200,000 available for investing in addition to the $40,000 in the retirement account.

the capital investment committee of cross continent trucking inc 257067

The capital investment committee of Cross Continent Trucking Inc. is considering two investment projects. The estimated income from operations and net cash flows from each investment are as follows:



Each project requires an investment of $480,000. Straight-line depreciation will be used, and no residual value is expected. The committee has selected a rate of 15% for purposes of the net present value analysis.

Instructions

1. Compute the following:

(a) The average rate of return for each investment. Round to one decimal place.

(b) The net present value for each investment. Use the present value of $1 table appearing in this chapter.

2. Prepare a brief report for the capital investment committee, advising it on the relative merits of the two projects.

first i was asked by my teacher to do a 10 minutes presentation including the follow 257068

Project proposal
First I was asked by my teacher to do a 10 minutes presentation including the following:

  • AREA: tax, the question I choose for this dissertation is: THE RULE OF TAXES TO IMPROVE THE ECONOMICIN RECESSION

I need to briefly talk what is going to be about

  • READINGS: example citations for readings
  • RESEARCH AIMS:

  • RESEARCH OBJECTIVES:

  • SIGNIFICANCE OF MY RESEARCH:

After I complete the stage above I will submit a form to my teacher to authorize my topic to start doing my dissertation.

  • Dissertation question: THE RULE OF TAXES TO IMPROVE THE ECONOMIC IN RECESSION

Document Preview:

Project proposal First I was asked by my teacher to do a 10 minutes presentation including the following: AREA: tax, the question I choose for this dissertation is: THE RULE OF TAXES TO IMPROVE THE ECONOMICIN RECESSION I need to briefly talk what is going to be about READINGS: example citations for readings RESEARCH AIMS: RESEARCH OBJECTIVES: SIGNIFICANCE OF MY RESEARCH: After I complete the stage above I will submit a form to my teacher to authorize my topic to start doing my dissertation. Dissertation question: THE RULE OF TAXES TO IMPROVE THE ECONOMIC IN RECESSION

Attachments:

professional simulation use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a pension worksheet on 257081

Melanie Vail Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan. Plan assets $480,000 Projected benefit obligation 625,000 Accumulated OCI (PSC) 100,000 Dr. As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary. Service cost for 2012 $90,000 Settlement rate 9% Actual return on plan assets in 2012 57,000 Amortization of prior service cost 19,000 Expected return on plan assets 52,000 Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions 76,000 Contributions in 2012 99,000 Benefits paid retirees in 2012 85,000 Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources (a) Use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. (b) Compute the same items as in (a), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Prepare the journal entry to record pension expense in 2012. Indicate the reporting of the 2012 pension amounts in this income statement and balance sheet.

Document Preview:

Professional Simulation In this simulation, you are asked to address questions regarding accounting for pensions. Prepare responses to all parts. Melanie Vail Corp. sponsors a defined benefit pension plan for its employees. On January 1, 2012, the following balances relate to this plan. Plan assets $480,000 Projected benefit obligation 625,000 Accumulated OCI (PSC) 100,000 Dr. As a result of the operation of the plan during 2012, the following additional data are provided by the actuary. Service cost for 2012 $90,000 Settlement rate 9% Actual return on plan assets in 2012 57,000 Amortization of prior service cost 19,000 Expected return on plan assets 52,000 Unexpected loss from change in projected benefit obligation, due to change in actuarial predictions 76,000 Contributions in 2012 99,000 Benefits paid retirees in 2012 85,000 Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources Directions Situation Measurement Journal Entry Disclosure Resources (a) Use a computer spreadsheet to prepare a pension worksheet. On the pension worksheet, compute pension expense, pension asset/liability, projected benefit obligation, plan assets, prior service cost, and net gain or loss. (b) Compute the same items as in (a), assuming that the settlement rate is now 7% and the expected rate of return is 10%. Prepare the journal entry to record pension expense in 2012. Indicate the reporting of the 2012 pension amounts in this income statement and balance sheet. 12345 A B C + KWW_Professional_Simulation Accounting for Pensions Time Remaining 2 hours 20 minutes Unsplit Split Horiz Split Vertical Spreadsheet Calculator Exit ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

the following information is available concerning the nunan corp 257154

The following information is available concerning the Nunan Corporation’s sinking fund:

Jan. 1, 2007 Established a sinking fund to retire an outstanding bond issue by contributing $425,000

Feb. 3, 2007 Purchased securities for $400,000

July 30, 2007 Sold securities originally costing $48,000 for $45,000

Dec. 31, 2007 Collected dividends and interest on the remaining securities in the amount of $49,000; the securities had a market value of $355,000 at this time

Dec. 31, 2008 Collected dividends and interest on the remaining securities in the amount of $40,000

Dec. 31, 2008 Paid sinking fund expenses of $4,500

Dec. 31, 2008 Sold the remaining securities in the fund for $360,000

Dec. 31, 2008 Retired an outstanding bond issue of $500,000 with the cash from the fund and transferred the remaining fund balance back to the cash account

Required

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions for the Nunan Corporation.

the following information relates to the debt securities investm 257158

The following information relates to the debt securities investments of Yellow jackets Company.

1. On February 1, the company purchased 12% bonds of Hilton Paris Co. having a par value of $500,000 at 100 plus accrued interest. Interest is payable April 1 and October 1.

2. On April 1, semiannual interest is received.

3. On July 1, 9% bonds of Chieftains, Inc. were purchased. These bonds with a par value of $200,000 were purchased at 100 plus accrued interest. Interest dates are June 1 and December 1.

4. On September 1, bonds with a par value of $100,000, purchased on February 1, are sold at 99 plus accrued interest.

5. On October 1, semiannual interest is received.

6. On December 1, semiannual interest is received.

7. On December 31, the fair value of the bonds purchased February 1 and July 1 are 95 and 93, respectively.

Instructions

(a) Prepare any journal entries you consider necessary, including year-end entries (December 31), assuming these are available-for-sale securities.

(b) If Yellow jackets classified these as held-to-maturity securities, explain how the journal entries would differ from those in part (a).

the following securities are in pascual company s portfolio of l 257168

The following securities are in Pascual Company’s portfolio of long-term available for- sale securities at December 31, 2010.

Cost

1,000 shares of Abel Corporation common stock ……… $52,000

1,400 share of Frey Corporation stock …………………… 84,000

1,200 shares of Weiss Corporation preferred stock ……… 33,600

On December 31, 2010, the total cost of the portfolio equaled total fair value. Pascual had the following transactions related to the securities during 2011.

Jan. 20 Sold 1,000 shares of Abel Corporation common stock at $55 per share less brokerage fees of $600.

28 Purchased 400 shares of $70 par value common stock of Rosen Corporation at $78 per share, plus brokerage fees of $480.

30 Received a cash dividend of $1.15 per share on Frey Corp. common stock.

Feb. 8 Received cash dividends of $0.40 per share on Weiss Corp. preferred stock.

18 Sold all 1,200 shares of Weiss Corp. preferred stock at $27 per share less brokerage fees of $360.

July 30 Received a cash dividend of $1.00 per share on Frey Corp. common stock.

Sept. 6 Purchased an additional 900 shares of $10 par value common stock of Rosen

Corporation at $82 per share, plus brokerage fees of $1,200.

Dec. 1 Received a cash dividend of $1.50 per share on Rosen Corporation common stock.

At December 31, 2011, the fair values of the securities were:

Frey Corporation common stock $64 per share

Rosen Corporation common stock $72 per share

Pascual Company uses separate account titles for each investment, such as ?oInvestment in Frey Corporation Common Stock.??

Instructions

(a) Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

(b) Post to the investment accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2011 to report the portfolio at fair value.

(d) Show the balance sheet presentation at December 31, 2011, for the investment-related accounts.

the following transactions of kelsey inc occurred within the 257172

The following transactions of Kelsey, Inc., occurred within the same accounting period:

(a) Purchased $55,000 U.S. Treasury 6% bonds, paying 102 plus accrued interest of $1,400. In addition, Kelsey paid brokerage fees of $500. Kelsey uses the revenue approach to record accrued interest on purchased bonds. Kelsey classified this security as a trading security.

(b) Purchased 2,100 shares of Dulce Co. common stock at $67 per share plus brokerage fees of $1,300. Kelsey classifies this stock as an available-for-sale security.

(c) Received semiannual interest on the U.S. Treasury bonds.

(d) Sold 400 shares of Dulce at $81 per share.

(e) Sold $20,000 of U.S. Treasury 6% bonds at 101 plus accrued interest of $180.

(f) Purchased an $18,000, 6-month certificate of deposit. The certificate is classified as a trading security.

Prepare the entries necessary to record these transactions.

the income statement for tri con inc for the year ended 257184

The income statement for Tri-Con, Inc., for the year ended December 31, 2012, was as follows:

Tri-Con, Inc.

Income Statement (selected items)

For the Year Ended December 31m 2012

Income from operations………………………………….. $148,000

Gain on sale of investments……………………………… 12,000

Less unrealized loss on trading investments…………….. 34,000

Net income………………………………………………. $126,000

The balance sheet dated December 31, 2011, showed a Retained Earnings balance of $614,000. During 2012, the company purchased trading investments for the first time at a cost of $166,000. In addition, trading investments with a cost of $45,000 were sold at a gain during 2012. The company paid $35,000 in dividends during 2012.

a. Determine the December 31, 2012, Retained Earnings balance.

b. Provide the December 31, 2012, balance sheet disclosure for Trading Investments.

lucent technologies clark m wheatley school of accounting 256472

LUCENT TECHNOLOGIES

Clark M. Wheatley

School of Accounting – Florida International University

BA242B – University Park, Miami, FL 33199

AT&T spun off its research and development division (the former Bell Laboratories) in April of 1996, and the newly independent company – renamed Lucent Technologies – was an instant hit with investors. The company’s stock became the most widely held in the United States, and over the following 3 years and 9 months its price increased 892%.1

Lucent Technologies manufactures, sells and services voice and data communications systems and software. By the end of its fiscal-year 1999, Lucent generated over thirty-eight billion dollars in annual revenues, employed over 150,000 people, and had offices in more than ninety countries worldwide. This remarkable price appreciation tracked a series of steadily increasing earnings that exceeded analyst expectations. Lucent, in fact, had beaten those expectations in each of its 15 quarters of operations (Zacks, 2000).

On October 26, 1999, Lucent issued a press release describing record earnings for both the quarter and the fiscal year ended September 30, 1999 (Lucent, 1999a). Lucent’s revenues were up 23 percent, and earnings were up 50 percent from the fourth quarter of the previous year. For the fiscal year, Lucent’s revenues and earnings were up 20 and 46 percent respectively. Lucent’s chairman and CEO, Richard McGinn, described the results saying: “Lucent enters the new millennium with momentum. This was the strongest quarter and the strongest year in Lucent’s history.”

The report of these record results was accompanied by another press release. This second announcement outlined a realignment of Lucent into “four core businesses.” This realignment was, in the words of McGinn, “…intended to mirror the way we are approaching customers today – with converged network solutions. We are sharpening our focus on high-growth areas – such as data networking, optical networking, wireless semiconductors, e-business and professional services – while speeding our growth in international markets. And, we will also be aligning our management structure to increase productivity and accelerate our response to customer needs” (Lucent, 1999b).

Over the ensuing days and weeks, Lucent’s share price soared. Climbing steadily from $59 7/8 on October 25, 1999, it traded at prices over $82 during December 1999, and closed at $72 3/8 on January 5, 2000.

On January 6, however, Lucent filed a Form 8-K with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission. Form 8-Ks are used to report “material events,” and Lucent’s “event” was that first quarter earnings for the quarter ended December 31, 1999 would be significantly below expectations. Lucent reported that its revenue from Service Provider Networks was down 2%. A result, company executives said, that was caused by the domino effect of unanticipated customer shifts to new optical systems and the manufacturing deployment and capacity problems that ensued. Indeed, analysts estimated that Lucent lost up to $1 billion in sales because of production delays, delivery problems and cancelled orders during the quarter (Dow Jones, 1/20/00).

1 Lucent’s beta as reported by Yahoo Finance was 1.6 on January 6, 2000.

Attachments:

metro goldwyn mayer studios inc mgm is a major producer and d 256483

Metro-Goldwyn-Mayer Studios Inc. (MGM) is a major producer and distributor of theatrical and television filmed entertainment. Regarding theatrical films, MGM states, ?oOur feature films are exploited through a series of sequential domestic and international distribution channels, typically beginning with theatrical exhibition. Thereafter, feature films are first made available for home video generally six months after theatrical release; for pay television, one year after theatrical release; and for syndication, approximately three to five years after theatrical release.??

Assume that MGM produces a film during early 2011 at a cost of $195 million, and releases it halfway through the year. During the last half of 2011, the film earns revenues of $235 million at the box office. The film requires $50 million of advertising during the release. One year later, by the end of 2012, the film is expected to earn MGM net cash flows from home video sales of $36 million. By the end of 2013, the film is expected to earn MGM $43 million from pay TV; and by the end of 2014, the film is expected to earn $12 million from syndication.

(a) Determine the net present value of the film as of the beginning of 2011 if the desired rate of return is 20%. To simplify present value calculations, assume all annual net cash flows occur at the end of each year. Use the table of the present value of $1 appearing in Exhibit 1 of this chapter. Round to the nearest whole million dollars.

(b) Under the assumptions provided here, is the film expected to be financially successful?

midwest bank invests in trading securities at the beginning of 256486

Midwest Bank invests in trading securities. At the beginning of December 2007, the bank held no trading securities. During December of 2007, it entered into the following trading securities transactions:

Dec. 10 Purchased 500 shares of C Company common stock for $76 per share

Dec. 21 Purchased 800 shares of D Company common stock for $34 per share

At the end of December, the C Company common stock had a quoted market price of $79 per share and the D Company common stock had a quoted market price of $33 per share.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the preceding information.

2. What is the unrealized holding gain or loss and where is it reported in the 2007 financial statements?

3. Show how the bank reports the trading securities on its December 31, 2007 balance sheet.

natalie has been approached by ken thornton a shareholder of 256517

Natalie has been approached by Ken Thornton, a shareholder of The Beanery Coffee Inc. Ken wants to retire and would like to sell his 1,000 shares in The Beanery Coffee, which represents 20% of all shares issued. The Beanery is currently operated by Ken’s twin daughters, who each own 40% of the common shares. The Beanery not only operates a coffee shop but also roasts and sells beans to retailers, under the name ?oRocky Mountain Beanery.??

Ken has met with Curtis and Natalie to discuss the business operation. All have concluded that there would be many advantages for Cookie & Coffee Creations Inc. to acquire an interest in The Beanery Coffee. Despite the apparent advantages, however, Natalie and Curtis are still not convinced that they should participate in this business venture.

notes receivable patterson company is a large diversified busine 256525

Notes Receivable Patterson Company is a large diversified business with a unit that sells commercial real estate. As a company, Patterson has been profitable in recent years with the exception of the real estate business, where economic conditions have resulted in weak sales. The vice president of the real estate division is aware of the poor performance of his group and needs to find ways to ?oshow a profit.??

During the current year, the division is successful in selling a 100-acre tract of land for a new shopping center. The original cost of the property to Patterson was $4 million. The buyer has agreed to sign a $10 million note with payments of $2 million due at the end of each of the next five years. The property was appraised late last year at a market value of $7.5 million. The vice president has come to you, the controller, asking that you record a sale for $10 million with a corresponding increase in Notes Receivable for $10 million.

Required

1. Does the suggestion by the vice president as to how to record the sale violate any accounting principle? If so, explain the principle it violates.

2. What would you do? Write a brief memo to the vice president explaining the proper accounting for the sale.

accounting and finance for decision making 256545

ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE FOR DECISION MAKING

Assignment brief:

  • Explain through a real world example of how accounting and budgeting information can contribute to, and support, effective strategic decision-making;
  • Raffles & Co produces three products, A, B and C. All three products use the same material. At present, it is using traditional method to allocate overheads to its products.

The company recently hires you as its Cost Accountant and the management is considering an activity based costing system in order to improve profitability.

Information of the three products for last year is presented in the following table.

A B C
Productionand sales volumes (units) 15,000 12,000 18,000
Selling price per unit $ 7.50 $12.00 $13.00
Raw material usage (kg) per unit 2 3 4
Direct labor hours per unit 0.10 0.15 0.20
Machine hours per unit 0.50 0.7 0.9
Number of production runs per annum 16 12 8
Number of purchase orders per annum 24 28 42
Number deliveries to retailers per annum 48 30 62

The price for raw materials remained constant throughout the year at $1.20 per kg. The direct labor cost was $14.80 per hour. The annual overhead costs were as follows:

Machine Set-up costs$ 26,550.00

Machine running costs$ 66,400.00

Procurement costs$ 48,000.00

Delivery costs$ 54,320.00

Based on the above information,

  • Calculate the full cost per unit for each product under traditional costing method, using direct labor hours as the basis for appointment.
  • Calculate the full cost per unit for each product using activity based costing.
  • Based on your above calculation, explain and discuss how activity based costing may help Raffles & Co to improve the profitability of each product and why activity-based costing may be preferred to traditional absorption costing in the modern manufacturing environment.

Report Requirement

  1. Word length of 1500-2000 words (includes Introduction – Conclusion/Recommendation) Papers exceed the maximum word length will receive a 10% penalty.
  2. Citations: minimum of three sources. Peer-review are the strongest, web pages are the weakest.
  3. APA citation and referencing. See http://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/resouce/560/01/
  4. Order of pages:
  1. Cover Page (provided by the lecturer)
  2. Executive Summary
  3. Table of Contents
  4. Introduction
  5. Main Body ( use information titles – do not title ‘Main Body’
  6. Conclusions
  7. Recommendations
  8. Reference List
  9. Appendix Items
  1. Paper submitted with a Similarity Index greater than 20% in total and greater than 6% from a single source will result in a zero (0) mark. (use page turnitin to check the similarity).

The assignment should be achieved:

  • Answer is focused on the question/ issue/ problem (20 marks)

The content is focused on the question; explanation provided to show how content is relevant to the question/ issue/ problem is evident in Executive summary and Introduction.

  • Development of argument (35 marks)

Consistent and convincing reasons for point of view; reasoning correctly applied to standard form or logical structure.

  • Critical evaluation/ analysis (35 marks)

Use of externally sources material; interpretation of this material to support argument; reference list and citations with text follow APA style;
turnitin score supports individual work.

  • Use of external evidence (10 marks)

Layout has logical structure and follows standard format. Spelling, grammar, parts of speech, punctuation. Pages are ordered per assessment brief; standard cover sheet used.

Attachments:

on december 31 2006 marsh company held 1 000 shares of 256561

On December 31, 2006 Marsh Company held 1,000 shares of X Company common stock in its portfolio of long-term investments in available-for-sale securities. The stock had cost $15 per share and has a current market value of $13 per share. The December 31, 2006 balance sheet showed the following:

Assets

Long-term investment in available-for-sale securities ….. $15,000

Less: Allowance for change in value of investment ……… (2,000)

$13,000

Stockholders’ Equity

Unrealized decrease in value of available-for-sale securities $ … (2,000)

During 2007 the company acquired as long-term investments 900 shares of Y Company common stock for $18 per share and 800 shares of Z Company common stock for $22 per share. At the end of 2007 the respective market values per share were:

X—$14, Y—$17, and Z—$20.

Required

Record the purchase of the investments in 2007 and the adjusting entry on December 31, 2007, and show the respective December 31, 2007 balance sheet accounts.

on january 1 2007 lion company paid 600 000 for 10 000 256606

On January 1, 2007 Lion Company paid $600,000 for 10,000 shares of Wolf Company’s voting common stock, which was a 10% interest in Wolf. Lion does not have the ability to exercise significant influence over the operating and financial policies of Wolf. Lion received dividends of $1.00 per share from Wolf on October 2, 2007. Wolf reported net income of $400,000 for the year ended December 31, 2007 and the ending market price of its shares was $63. On July 2, 2008 Lion paid $1,950,000 for 30,000 additional shares of Wolf Company’s voting common stock, which represents a 30% investment in Wolf. The fair values of all of Wolf’s assets, net of liabilities, were equal to their book values of $6,500,000. As a result of this transaction, Lion has the ability to exercise significant influence over the operating and financial policies of Wolf. Lion received dividends of $1.00 per share from Wolf on April 2, 2008 and $1.35 per share on October 1, 2008. Wolf reported net income of $500,000 for the year ended December 31, 2008, and $200,000 for the 6 months ended December 31, 2008.

Required

1. For the Lion Company show the dividend revenue for 2007, as well as the December 31, 2007 unrealized increase in value of available-for-sale securities and carrying value of the investment account.

2. Assuming that Lion Company issues comparative financial statements for 2007 and 2008, show the investment income for 2007 and 2008, as well as the December 31, 2007 and 2008 carrying value of the Investment account.

on january 1 2008 rob wilco company purchased 200 000 8 256620

On January 1, 2008, Rob Wilco Company purchased $200,000, 8% bonds of Mercury Co. for $184,557. The bonds were purchased to yield 10% interest. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. The bonds mature on January 1, 2013. Rob Wilco Company uses the effective-interest method to amortize discount or premium. On January 1, 2010, Rob Wilco Company sold the bonds for $185,363 after receiving interest to meet its liquidity needs.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the purchase of bonds on January 1. Assume that the bonds are classified as available-for-sale.

(b) Prepare the amortization schedule for the bonds.

(c) Prepare the journal entries to record the semiannual interest on July 1, 2008, and December 31, 2008.

(d) If the fair value of Mercury bonds is $186,363 on December 31, 2009, prepare the necessary adjusting entry. (Assume the securities fair value adjustment balance on January 1, 2009, is a debit of $3,375.)

(e) Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the bonds on January 1, 2010.

on january 1 2011 standard co bought 40 of the 256635

On January 1, 2011, Standard Co. bought 40% of the outstanding common stock of Exchange Corp. for $380,000 cash. Standard Co. accounts for this investment by the equity method. At the date of acquisition of the stock, Exchange Corp.’s net assets had a carrying value of $630,000. Assets with an average remaining life of five years have a current fair value that is $160,000 in excess of their carrying values. The remaining difference between the purchase price and the value of the underlying stockholders’ equity cannot be attributed to any identifiable tangible or intangible asset. Accordingly, the remaining difference is allocated to goodwill. At the end of 2011, Exchange Corp. reports net income of $210,000. During 2011, Exchange Corp. declared and paid cash dividends of $30,000.

Instructions:

Give the entries necessary to reflect Standard Co.’s investment in Exchange Corp. for 2011.

on january 1 2012 acker inc had the following balance 256640

On January 1, 2012, Acker Inc. had the following balance sheet.

?



The accumulated other comprehensive income related to unrealized holding gains on available-for-sale securities. The fair value of Acker Inc.’s available-for-sale securities at December 31, 2012, was $190,000; its cost was $140,000. No securities were purchased during the year. Acker Inc.’s income statement for 2012 was as follows. (Ignore income taxes.)

ACKER INC.

INCOME STATEMENT

FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 2012

Dividend revenue ……………………….$ 5,000

Gain on sale of investments ……………..30,000

Net income ……………………………..$35,000

Instructions

(Assume all transactions during the year were for cash.)

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record the sale of the available-for-sale securities in 2012.

(b) Prepare a statement of comprehensive income for 2012.

(c) Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31,2012.

on january 1 stoker company purchased an 80 000 machine the 256665

On January 1, Stoker Company purchased an $80,000 machine. The estimated life of the machine was eight years, and the estimated salvage value was $6,000. The machine had an estimated useful life in productive output of 110,000 units. Actual output for the first two years was: year 1, 15,000 units; year 2, 13,000 units.

Required:

1. Compute the amount of depreciation expense for the first year, using each of the following methods:

a. Straight-line

b. Units-of-production

c. Sum-of-the-years’-digits

d. Double-declining-balance

2. What was the book value of the machine at the end of the first year, assuming that straight-line depreciation was used?

3. If the machine is sold at the end of the fifth year for $28,500, how much should the company report as a gain or loss (assuming straight-line depreciation)?

on july 1 2012 philip ward bought a used pickup 256709

On July 1, 2012, Philip Ward bought a used pickup truck at a cost of $5,300 for use in his business. On the same day, Ward had the truck painted blue and white (his company’s colors) at a cost of $800. Ward estimates the life of the truck to be three years or 40,000 miles. He further estimates that the truck will have a $450 scrap value at the end of its life, but that it will also cost him $50 to transfer the truck to the junkyard.

Required:

1. Record the following journal entries:

a. July 1, 2012: Paid all bills pertaining to the truck. (No previous entries have been recorded concerning these bills.)

b. December 31, 2012: Recorded depreciation expense for the year, using the straight-line method.

c. December 31, 2013: Recorded depreciation expense for 2013, again using the straight-line method.

d. January 2, 2014: Sold the truck for $2,600 cash.

2. What would the depreciation expense for 2012 have been if the truck had been driven 8,000 miles and the units-of-production method of depreciation had been used?

3. Interpretive Question: In part (ld), there is a loss of $650. Why did this loss occur?

on november 3 2012 sprinkle co invested 200 000 in 4 000 256735

On November 3, 2012, Sprinkle Co. invested $200,000 in 4,000 shares of the common stock of Pratt Co. Sprinkle classified this investment as available-for-sale. Sprinkle Co. is considering making a more significant investment in Pratt Co. at some point in the future but has decided to wait and see how the stock does over the next several quarters. To hedge against potential declines in the value of Pratt stock during this period, Sprinkle also purchased a put option on the Pratt stock. Sprinkle paid an option premium of $600 for the put option, which gives Sprinkle the option to sell 4,000 Pratt shares at a strike price of $50 per share. The option expires on July 31, 2013. The following data are available with respect to the values of the Pratt stock and the put option.

?



Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries for Sprinkle Co. for the following dates.

(1) November 3, 2012—Investment in Pratt stock and the put option on Pratt shares.

(2) December 31, 2012—Sprinkle Co. prepares financial statements.

(3) March 31, 2013—Sprinkle prepares financial statements.

(4) June 30, 2013—Sprinkle prepares financial statements.

(5) July 1, 2013—Sprinkle settles the put option and sells the Pratt shares for $43 per share.

(b) Indicate the amount(s) reported on the balance sheet and income statement related to the Pratt investment and the put option on December 31, 2012.

(c) Indicate the amount(s) reported on the balance sheet and income statement related to the Pratt investment and the put option on June 30,2013.

on the first day of its fiscal year pedro dynamite 256757

On the first day of its fiscal year, Pedro Dynamite Company issued $11,000,000 of five-year, 9% bonds to finance its operations of producing and selling home electronics equipment.

Interest is payable semiannually. The bonds were issued at an effective interest rate of 12%, resulting in Pedro Dynamite Company receiving cash of $9,785,645.

a. Journalize the entries to record the following:

1. Sale of the bonds.

2. First semiannual interest payment. (Amortization of discount is to be recorded annually.)

3. Second semiannual interest payment.

4. Amortization of discount at the end of the first year, using the interest method. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

b. Compute the amount of the bond interest expense for the first year.

ophir investments inc is a regional investment company that beg 256764

Ophir Investments Inc. is a regional investment company that began operations on January 1, 2012. The following transactions relate to trading securities acquired by Ophir Investments Inc., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2012

Feb. 3 Purchase 2,000 shares of Mapco Inc. as a trading security at $42 per share plus a brokerage commission of $500.

Mar. 23Purchased 1,400 shares of Swift Inc. as a trading security at $23 per share plus a brokerage commission of $210.

May. 19 Sold 500 shares of Mapco Inc. for $46 per share less an $80 brokerage commission.

June. 12Received an annual dividend of $0.14 per share on Mapco stock.

Dec. 31The portfolio of trading securities was adjusted to fair values of $40 and $29 per share for Mapco Inc. and Swift Inc., respectively.

2013

Apr. 9purchased 900 shares of Corvair Inc. as a trading security at $62 per share plus a $90 brokerage commission.

June 15Received an annual dividend of $0.16 per share on Mapco Inc. stock.

Aug. 30Sold 200 shares of Corvair Inc. for $51 per share less a $60 brokerage commission.

Dec. 31The portfolio of trading securities had a cost of $139,255 and fair value of $133, 470, requiring a credit balance in Valuation Allowance for Trading Investments of $ 133,470, requiring a credit balance in Valuation Allowance for Trading Investments of $5,785 ($139,255 ?^? $133,470). Thus, the debit balance from December 31, 2012, is to be adjusted to the new balance.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.

2. Prepare the investment-related current asset balance sheet disclosures for Ophir

Investments Inc. on December 31, 2012.

3. How are unreaized gains or losses on trading investments disclosed on the financial

Statements of Ophir Investments Inc.?

pal corporation purchased for cash 6 000 shares of voting common 256779

Pal Corporation purchased for cash 6,000 shares of voting common stock of Sap Corporation at $16 per share on July 1, 2011. On this date, Sap’s equity consisted of $100,000 of $10 par capital stock, $20,000 retained earnings from prior periods, and $10,000 current earnings (for one-half of 2011). Sap’s income for 2011 was $20,000, and it paid dividends of $12,000 on November 1, 2011. All of Sap’s assets and liabilities had book values equal to fair values at July 1, 2011, and any differences between investment cost and book value acquired should be assigned to equipment and amortized over a 10- year period.

REQUIRED: Compute the correct amounts for each of the following items using the equity method of accounting for Pal’s investment:

1. Pal’s income from its investment in Sap for the year ended December 31, 2011.

2. The balance of Pal’s Investment in Sap account at December 31, 2011.

(Note: Assumptions on page 46 are needed for this problem.)

premium amortization on bond investment and partial sale of the 256817

Premium Amortization on Bond Investment and Partial Sale of the Investment Using the Effective Interest Method On January 1, 2007 the Hyde Corporation purchased bonds with a face value of $300,000 for $308,373.53. The bonds are due June 30, 2010, carry a 13% stated interest rate, and were purchased to yield 12%. Interest is payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. On March 31, 2008, in contemplation of a major acquisition, the company sold one-half the bonds for $159,500 including accrued interest; the remainder were held until maturity.

Required

Prepare the journal entries to record the purchase of the bonds, each interest payment, the partial sale of the investment on March 31, 2008, and the retirement of the bond issue on June 30, 2010.

purchase and sale of bonds starship enterprises enters into the 256837

Purchase and Sale of Bonds Starship Enterprises enters into the following transactions during 2010 and 2011:

2010

Jan. 1: Purchased $100,000 face value of Northern Lights Inc. bonds at face value. The newly issued bonds have an interest rate of 8% paid semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds mature in five years.

June 30: Received interest on the Northern Lights Inc. bonds.

Dec. 31: Received interest on the Northern Lights Inc. bonds.

2011

Jan. 1: Sold the Northern Lights Inc. bonds for $102,000.

Required

1. Identify and analyze all transactions on Starship’s records to account for its investment in the Northern Lights bonds.

2. Why was Starship able to sell its Northern Lights bonds for $102,000?

put call parity in effect states that long positions in a 256846

Put–call parity in effect states that long positions in a call and a risk-free bond plus a short position in a put must be the same value as the underlying stock. If not, at least one market is in disequilibrium. The resulting arbitrage alters the securities’ prices until the value of the three securities equals the value of the stock. Currently, the price of a stock is $50, while the price of a call option at $50 is $3, the price of the put option is $1.50, and the rate of interest is 10 percent—so that the investor may purchase a $50 discounted note for $45.50. Given these prices, an arbitrage opportunity exists. Verify this by setting up a riskless arbitrage. Show the possible profit if the price of the stock is $45, $50, or $55 at the expiration of the options.

a city engages in the following transactions seen below 256287

A city engages in the following transactions seen below. For each transaction indicate the amount of revenue or expenditure that it should report in 2011. Assume first that the main objective of the financial statements is to enable users to assess budgetary compliance. Then calculate the amounts, assuming that the main objective is to assess interperiod equity. The city prepares its budget on a “modified” cash basis (that is, it expands its definition of cash to include short term marketable securities) and its fiscal year ends on December 31.

  1. Employees earned $128,000 in salaries and wages for the last five days in December 2011. They were paid on January 8th, 2012.
  2. A consulting actuary calculated that per an accepted actuarial cost method, the city should contribute $225,000 to its firefighters’ pension fund for benefits earned in 2011. However, the city contributed only $170,000, the amount budgeted at the beginning of the year.
  3. The city acquired three police cars for $35,000 each. The vehicles are expected to last for three years.
  4. On December 1, 2011, the city invested $99,000 in short-term commercial paper (promissory notes). The notes matured on January 1, 2012. The city received $100,000. The $1,000 difference between the two amounts represents the city’s return (interest) on the investment.
  5. On January 2, 2011, the city acquired a new $10 million office building, financing it with 25 year serial bonds. The bonds are to be repaid evenly over the period they are outstanding – that is, $400,000 per year. The useful life of the building is 25 years.
  6. On January 3, 2011, the city acquired another $10 million office building, financing this facility with 25 year term bonds. The bonds will be repaid entirely when they mature on January 1, 2036. The useful life of this building is also 25 years.
  7. City restaurants are required to pay a $1,200 annual license fee, the proceeds of which the city used to fund a restaurant inspection program. The license covers the period July 1 through June 30. In 2011 the city collected $120,000 in fees for the license period beginning July 1, 2011.
  8. The city borrowed $300,000 in November 2011 to cover a temporary shortage of cash. It expects to repay the loan in February 2012.

Attachments:

interstate manufacturing is considering either replacing one of 256308

Interstate Manufacturing is considering either replacing one of its old machines with a new machine or having the old machine overhauled. Information about the two alternatives follows. Management requires a 10% rate of return on its investments.

Alternative 1: Keep the old machine and have it overhauled. If the old machine is overhauled, it will be kept for another five years and then sold for its salvage value.

Cost of old machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $112,000

Cost of overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,000

Annual expected revenues generated . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95,000

Annual cash operating costs after overhaul . . . . . . . . 42,000

Salvage value of old machine in 5 years . . . . . . . . . . . 15,000

Alternative 2: Sell the old machine and buy a new one. The new machine is more efficient and will yield substantial operating cost savings with more product being produced and sold.

Cost of new machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $300,000

Salvage value of old machine now . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,000

Annual expected revenues generated . . . . . . . . . 100,000

Annual cash operating costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32,000

Salvage value of new machine in 5 years . . . . . . . 20,000

Required

1. Determine the net present value of alternative 1.

2. Determine the net present value of alternative 2.

3. Which alternative do you recommend that management select? Explain.

investing an inheritance what is the percentage return earned b 256310

1. What is the percentage return earned by Darin if he acquires 100 shares, holds the stock for a year, and sells the stock for $80?

2. What is the percentage return earned by Victor if he acquires 100 shares on margin, holds the stock for a year, and sells the stock for $80? What advantage does buying stock on margin offer Victor?

3. What would be the percentage returns if the sale prices had been $50 or $100?

4. Must the two brothers leave the stock registered in street name? If not, what would be the advantage of leaving the stock with the broker? Does leaving the stock increase their risk exposure?

5. What would be the impact on the brothers returns if the rate of interest charged by the broker increases to 10 percent?

6. If the maintenance margin requirement were 30 percent and the price of the stock declined to $50, what impact would that have on each brothers position? At what price of the stock would they receive a margin call?

7. Why would buying the stock be more advantageous to both brothers than the alternatives you anticipate them to select?

MINI CASE

The Kelleher brothers, Victor and Darin, could not be more different. Victor is assertive and enjoys taking risks, while Darin is reserved and is exceedingly risk averse. Both have jobs that pay well and provide fringe benefits, including medical insurance and pension plans. You are the executor for their grandfathers estate and know that each brother will soon inherit $85,000 from the estate. Neither has an immediate need for the cash, which could be invested to meet some long-term financial goal.
Once the funds have been received, you expect Victor to acquire some exceedingly risky investment (if he does not immediately squander the money). You would be surprised, however, if Darin chose to do anything other than place the funds in a low-yielding savings account. Neither alternative makes financial sense to you, so before the distribution of the funds you decide to offer financial suggestions that would reduce Victors risk exposure and increase Darins potential return.

investments in bonds and stock swartz inc enters into the 256315

Investments in Bonds and Stock Swartz Inc. enters into the following transactions during 2010: July 1: Paid $10,000 to acquire on the open market $10,000 face value of Gallatin bonds. The bonds have a stated annual interest rate of 6% with interest paid semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds mature in 5?1 years.

Oct. 23: Purchased 600 shares of Eagle Rock common stock at $20 per share.

Nov. 21: Purchased 200 shares of Montana preferred stock at $30 per share.

Dec. 10: Received dividends of $1.50 per share on the Eagle Rock stock and $2.00 per share on the Montana stock. Dec. 28: Sold 400 shares of Eagle Rock common stock at $25 per share.

Dec. 31: Received interest from the Gallatin bonds.

Required

Identify and analyze all transactions on Swartz’s records to account for its investments during 2010.

ironic metal products inc acquired a machine on january 2 256324

Ironic Metal Products, Inc., acquired a machine on January 2, 2010, for $76,600. The useful life of the machine was estimated to be eight years with a salvage value of $4,600. Depreciation is recorded on December 31 of each year using the sum-of-the-years’-digits method. At the beginning of 2012, the company estimated the remaining useful life of the machine to be four years and changed the estimated salvage value from $4,600 to $2,600. On January 2, 2013, major repairs on the machine cost the company $34,000. The repairs added two years to the machine’s useful life and increased the salvage value to $3,000.

Required:

1. Prepare journal entries to record:

a. The purchase of the machine

b. Annual depreciation expense for the years 2010 and 2011

c. Depreciation in 2012 under the revised estimates of useful life and salvage value

d. The expenditure for major repairs in 2013

e. Depreciation expense for 2013

2. Compute the book value of the machine at the end of 2013.

isaac s auto repair is considering the purchase of a new 256329

Isaac’s Auto Repair is considering the purchase of a new tow truck. The garage doesn’t currently have a tow truck, and the $65,000 price tag for a new truck would represent a major expenditure for the garage. Isaac Mayer, owner of the garage, has compiled the following estimates in trying to determine whether to purchase the truck.

Initial cost ……………………………………$65,000

Estimated useful life …………………………8 years

Net annual cash inflows from towing ………..$9,600

Overhaul costs (end of year 4) ………………..$7,000

Salvage value …………………………………$16,000

Isaac’s good friend, Brad Jolie, stopped by. He is trying to convince Isaac that the tow truck will have other benefits that Isaac hasn’t even considered. First, he says, cars that need towing need to be fixed. Thus, when Isaac tows them to his facility his repair revenues will increase. Second, he notes that the tow truck could have a plow mounted on it, thus saving Isaac the cost of plowing his parking lot. (Brad will give him a used plow blade for free if Isaac will plow Brad’s driveway.) Third, he notes that the truck will generate goodwill; that is, people who are rescued by Isaac and his tow truck will feel grateful and might be more inclined to use his service station in the future or buy gas there. Fourth, the tow truck will have ?oIsaac’s Auto Repair?? on its doors, hood, and back tailgate—a form of free advertising wherever the tow truck goes.

Brad estimates that, at a minimum, these benefits would be worth the following.

Additional annual net cash flows from repair work ………………..$2,600

Annual savings from plowing …………………………………………600

Additional annual net cash flows from customer ?ogoodwill?? ……….1,200

Additional annual net cash flows resulting from free advertising …….500

The company’s cost of capital is 10%.

Instructions

(a) Calculate the net present value, ignoring the additional benefits described by Brad.

Should the tow truck be purchased?

(b) Calculate the net present value, incorporating the additional benefits suggested by

Brad. Should the tow truck be purchased?

(c) Suppose Brad has been overly optimistic in his assessment of the value of the additional benefits. At a minimum, how much would the additional benefits have to be worth in order for the project to be accepted?

jen corporation became a subsidiary of laura corporation on july 256347

Jen Corporation became a subsidiary of Laura Corporation on July 1, 2011, when Laura paid $1,980,000 cash for 90 percent of Jen’s outstanding common stock. The price paid by Laura reflected the fact that Jen’s inventories were undervalued by $50,000 and its plant assets were overvalued by $500,000. Jen sold the undervalued inventory items during 2011 but continues to hold the overvalued plant assets that had a remaining useful life of nine years from July 1, 2011. During the years 2011 through 2013, Jen’s paid-in capital consisted of $1,500,000 capital stock and $500,000 additional paid-in capital. Jen’s retained earnings statements for 2011, 2012, and 2013 were as follows (in thousands):



Laura uses the equity method in accounting for its investment in Jen.

REQUIRED

1. Compute Laura Corporation’s income from its investment in Jen for 2011.

2. Determine the balance of Laura Corporation’s Investment in Jen account at December 31, 2012.

3. Prepare the journal entries for Laura to account for its investment in Jen for2013.

jennifer cosmetics wants to construct a new building it has 256350

Jennifer Cosmetics wants to construct a new building. It has two building options, as follows:

a. Hire a contractor to do all the work. Jennifer has a bid of $850,000 from a reputable contractor to complete the project.

b. Construct the building itself by taking out a construction loan of $800,000. Using this alternative, Jennifer believes materials and labor will cost $800,000, and interest on the construction loan will be calculated as follows:

$200,000 @ 12% for 9 months

$300,000 @ 12% for 6 months

$200,000 @ 12% for 3 months

Required:

1. What will be the recorded cost of the building under each alternative?

2. Assuming the building is depreciated over a 20-year period using straight-line depreciation with no salvage value, how much is the annual depreciation expense under each alternative? $100,000 @ 12% for 1 month

jordon company is considering replacing its automated stamping m 256361

Jordon Company is considering replacing its automated stamping machine. The machine is specialized and very expensive. Jordon is considering three acquisition alternatives. The first is to lease a machine for 10 years at $1 million per year, after which time Jordon can buy the machine for $1 million. The second alternative is to pay cash for the machine at a cost of $7 million. The third alternative is to make a down payment of $3 million, followed by 10 annual payments of $550,000. The company is trying to decide which alternative to select.

Required:

1. Assuming the present value of the lease payments is $7.2 million and the present value of the 10 loan payments of $550,000 is $4.1 million, determine which alternative Jordon should choose.

2. Interpretive Question: Your decision in part (1) was based only on financial factors. What other qualitative issues might influence your decision?

jupiter insurance co is a regional insurance company that began 256373

Jupiter Insurance Co. is a regional insurance company that began operations on January 1, 2010. The following transactions relate to trading securities acquired by Jupiter Insurance Co., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2010

Feb. 21. Purchased 3,000 shares of Loral Inc. as a trading security at $25 per share plus a brokerage commission of $600.

Mar. 2. Purchased 900 shares of Monarch Inc. as a trading security at $52 per share plus a brokerage commission of $180.

May 3. Sold 800 shares of Loral Inc. for $23.50 per share less a $80 brokerage commission.

June 8. Received an annual dividend of $0.18 per share on Loral Inc. stock.

Dec. 31. The portfolio of trading securities was adjusted to fair values of $24 and $48 per share for Loral Inc. and Monarch Inc., respectively.

2011

May 11. Purchased 1,600 shares of Echelon Inc. as a trading security at $18 per share plus a $160 brokerage commission.

June 11. Received an annual dividend of $0.20 per share on Loral Inc. stock.

Aug. 14. Sold 400 shares of Echelon Inc. for $20 per share less a $80 brokerage commission.

Dec. 31. The portfolio of trading securities was adjusted to fair value using the following fair values per share for the trading securities:

Echelon Inc. $22

Loral Inc. 23

Monarch Inc. 49

The portfolio of trading securities was adjusted to fair value.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.

2. Prepare the investment-related current asset balance sheet disclosures for Jupiter Insurance Co. on December 31, 2011.

3. How are unrealized gains or losses on trading investments disclosed on the financial statements of Jupiter Insurance Co.?

komissarov company has a debt investment in the bonds issued 256398

Komissarov Company has a debt investment in the bonds issued by Keune Inc. The bonds were purchased at par for $400,000 and, at the end of 2012, have a remaining life of 3 years with annual interest payments at 10%, paid at the end of each year. This debt investment is classified as held-for-collection. Keune is facing a tough economic environment and informs all of its investors that it will be unable to make all payments according to the contractual terms. The controller of Komissarov has prepared the following revised expected cash flow forecast for this bond investment.

Expected

Dec. 31 ………………….Cash Flows

2013 ………………………$ 35,000

2014 …………………………35,000

2015 ……………………….385,000

Total cash flows …………$455,000

Instructions

(a) Determine the impairment loss for Komissarov at December 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare the entry to record the impairment loss for Komissarov at December 31,

2012.

(c) On January 15, 2013, Keune receives a major capital infusion from a private equity investor. It informs Komissarov that the bonds now will be paid according to the contractual terms. Briefly describe how Komissarov would account for the bond investment in light of this new information.

lenitnes company is considering an investment in technology to i 256417

Lenitnes Company is considering an investment in technology to improve its operations. The investment will require an initial outlay of $250,000 and will yield the following expected cash flows. Management requires investments to have a payback period of three years, and it requires a 10% return on its investments.

Period Cash Flow

1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . $125,000

2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,000

3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,000

4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,000

5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,000

Required

1. Determine the payback period for this investment.

2. Determine the break-even time for this investment.

3. Determine the net present value for this investment.

Analysis component

4. Should management invest in this project? Explain.

5. Compare your answers for parts 1 through 4 with those for Problem 11-5A. What are the causes of the differences in results and your conclusions?

lew jewelry co uses gold in the manufacture of its 256420

LEW Jewelry Co. uses gold in the manufacture of its products. LEW anticipates that it will need to purchase 500 ounces of gold in October 2012, for jewelry that will be shipped for the holiday shopping season. However, if the price of gold increases, LEW’s cost to produce its jewelry will increase, which would reduce its profit margins.

To hedge the risk of increased gold prices, on April 1, 2012, LEW enters into a gold futures contract and designates this futures contract as a cash flow hedge of the anticipated gold purchase. The notional amount of the contract is 500 ounces, and the terms of the contract give LEW the right and the obligation to purchase gold at a price of $300 per ounce. The price will be good until the contract expires on October 31, 2012. Assume the following data with respect to the price of the call options and the gold inventory purchase.

Date Spot Price for October Delivery

April 1, 2012 ………………………………..$300 per ounce

June 30, 2012 …………………………………310 per ounce

September 30, 2012 ………………………….315 per ounce

Instructions

Prepare the journal entries for the following transactions.

(a) April 1, 2012—Inception of the futures contract, no premium paid.

(b) June 30, 2012—LEW Co. prepares financial statements.

(c) September 30, 2012—LEW Co. prepares financial statements.

(d) October 10, 2012—LEW Co. purchases 500 ounces of gold at $315 per ounce and settles the futures contract.

(e) December 20, 2012—LEW sells jewelry containing gold purchased in October 2012 for $350,000. The cost of the finished goods inventory is $200,000.

(f) Indicate the amount(s) reported on the balance sheet and income statement related to the futures contract on June 30, 2012.

(g) Indicate the amount(s) reported in the income statement related to the futures contract and the inventory transactions on December 31, 2012.

like many other entrepreneurs when laura trust and alan litchma 256424

Like many other entrepreneurs, when Laura Trust and Alan Litchman decided to buy a business, they raised some money from friends and family. Unlike many entrepreneurs, however, they were so adamant about retaining full control of the business they bought—Finagle A Bagel—that they would not even consider venture capital financing or selling stock. Instead, Litchman says, ?oWe made the decision to get banks to finance this company, which is a difficult thing.??

1. If the copresidents of Finagle A Bagel had approached venture capitalists for funding, they probably would have been able to open more new stores in less time. Instead, they opted to use bank financing that has to be repaid. Do you agree with their decision? Why?

2. Given their growth plans, why would the copresidents repay principal and interest on borrowed money rather than pay interest only? Which repayment plan would Finagle A Bagel’s bank prefer?

3. Assuming that Finagle A Bagel decides to raise money through an IPO, what are the advantages and disadvantages of issuing stock to obtain the money needed to start or expand a business?

4. As an investor, would you be willing to buy shares in Finagle A Bagel? Explain why the company’s stock would or would not be a good investment for you.

limitations of capital investment techniques webb publishing com 256426

Limitations of capital investment techniques Webb Publishing Company is evaluating two investment opportunities. One is to purchase an Internet company with the capacity to open new marketing channels through which Webb can sell its books. This opportunity offers a high potential for growth but involves significant risk. Indeed, losses are projected for the first three years of operation. The second opportunity is to purchase a printing company that would enable Webb to better control costs by printing its own books. The potential savings are clearly predictable but would make a significant change in the company’s long-term profitability.

Required

Write a response discussing the usefulness of capital investment techniques (net present value, internal rate of return, payback, and unadjusted rate of return) in making a choice between these two alternative investment opportunities. Your response should discuss the strengths and weaknesses of capital budgeting techniques in general. Furthermore, it should include a comparison between techniques based on the time value of money versus those that are not.

lipscomb inc purchased a portfolio of available for sale securi 256429

Lipscomb Inc. purchased a portfolio of available-for-sale securities in 2009, its first year of operations. The cost and fair value of this portfolio on December 31, 2009, was as follows:

?



On May 10, 2010, Lipscomb purchased 700 shares of Nova Inc. at $50 per share plus a $150 brokerage fee. On December 31, 2010, the available-for-sale security portfolio had the following cost and fair value:

?



Provide the journal entries to record the following:

(a) The adjustment of the available-for-sale security portfolio to fair value on December 31, 2009.

(b) The May 10, 2010, purchase of Nova Inc. stock.

(c) The adjustment of the available-for-sale security portfolio to fair value on December 31,2010.

lon timur is an accounting major at a midwestern state 256439

Lon Timur is an accounting major at a midwestern state university located approximately 60 miles from a major city. Many of the students attending the university are from the metropolitan area and visit their homes regularly on the weekends. Lon, an entrepreneur at heart, realizes that few good commuting alternatives are available for students doing weekend travel. He believes that a weekend commuting service could be organized and run profitably from several suburban and downtown shopping mall locations.

Lon has gathered the following investment information.

1. Five used vans would cost a total of $75,000 to purchase and would have a 3-year useful life with negligible salvage value. Lon plans to use straight-line depreciation.

2. Ten drivers would have to be employed at a total payroll expense of $48,000.

3. Other annual out-of-pocket expenses associated with running the commuter service would include Gasoline $16,000, Maintenance $3,300, Repairs $4,000, Insurance $4,200, Advertising $2,500.

4. Lon has visited several financial institutions to discuss funding. The best interest rate he has been able to negotiate is 15%. Use this rate for cost of capital.

5. Lon expects each van to make ten round trips weekly and carry an average of six students each trip. The service is expected to operate 30 weeks each year, and each student will be charged $12.00 for a round-trip ticket.

Instructions

(a) Determine the annual (1) net income and (2) net annual cash flows for the commuter service.

(b) Compute (1) the cash payback period and (2) the annual rate of return. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the net present value of the commuter service. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(d) What should Lon conclude from these computations?

luang company is considering the purchase of a new machine 256442

Luang Company is considering the purchase of a new machine. Its invoice price is $122,000, freight charges are estimated to be $3,000, and installation costs are expected to be $5,000. Salvage value of the new machine is expected to be zero after a useful life of 4 years. Existing equipment could be retained and used for an additional 4 years if the new machine is not purchased. At that time, the salvage value of the equipment would be zero. If the new machine is purchased now, the existing machine would be scrapped. Luang’s accountant, Lisa Hsung, has accumulated the following data regarding annual sales and expenses with and without the new machine.

1. Without the new machine, Luang can sell 10,000 units of product annually at a per unit selling price of $100. If the new unit is purchased, the number of units produced and sold would increase by 25%, and the selling price would remain the same.

2. The new machine is faster than the old machine, and it is more efficient in its usage of materials.

With the old machine the gross profit rate will be 28.5% of sales, whereas the rate will be 30% of sales with the new machine.

3. Annual selling expenses are $160,000 with the current equipment. Because the new equipment would produce a greater number of units to be sold, annual selling expenses are expected to increase by 10% if it is purchased.

4. Annual administrative expenses are expected to be $100,000 with the old machine, and $112,000 with the new machine.

5. The current book value of the existing machine is $40,000. Luang uses straight-line depreciation.

6. Luang’s management has a required rate of return of 15% on its investment and a cash payback period of no more than 3 years.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, answer the following. (Ignore income tax effects.)

(a) Calculate the annual rate of return for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)

(b) Compute the cash payback period for the new machine. (Round to two decimals.)

(c) Compute the net present value of the new machine. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

(d) On the basis of the foregoing data, would you recommend that Luang buy the machine? Why?

lulus operates a chain of sandwich shops the company is 256443

Lulus operates a chain of sandwich shops. The company is considering two possible expansion plans. Plan A would open eight smaller shops at a cost of $8,450,000. Expected annual net cash inflows are $1,750,000, with zero residual value at the end of eight years. Under Plan B, Lulus would open three larger shops at a cost of $8,000,000. This plan is expected to generate net cash inflows of $1,020,000 per year for eight years, which is the estimated useful life of the properties. Estimated residual value for Plan B is $1,200,000. Lulus uses straight-line depreciation and requires an annual return of 6%

Requirements

1. Compute the payback period, the ROR, the NPV, and the profitability index of these two plans. What are the strengths and weaknesses of these capital budgeting models?

2. Which expansion plan should Lulus choose? Why?

3. Estimate Plan A’s IRR. How does the IRR compare with the company’s required rate of return?

mcelroy company has the following portfolio of investment securi 256470

McElroy Company has the following portfolio of investment securities at September 30, 2012, its last reporting date.

?

On October 10, 2012, the Horton shares were sold at a price of $54 per share. In addition, 3,000 shares of Patriot common stock were acquired at $54.50 per share on November 2, 2012. The December 31, 2012, fair values were: Monty $106,000, Patriot $132,000, and the Oakwood common $193,000. All the securities are classified as trading.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries to record the sale, purchase, and adjusting entries related to the trading securities in the last quarter of 2012.

(b) How would the entries in part (a) change if the securities were classified asavailable-for-sale?

during 2012 its first year of operation newton company purchas 255904

During 2012, its first year of operation, Newton Company purchased two available-for-sale investments as follows:

?

Assume that as of December 31, 2012, the Starlight Products, Inc., stock had a market value of $55 per share and the Reynolds Co. stock had a market value of $18 per share. Newton Company had net income of $250,000, and paid no dividends for the year ending December 31, 2012.

a. Prepare the Current Assets section of the balance sheet presentation for the available-for-sale investments.

b. Prepare the Stockholders’ Equity section of the balance sheet to reflect the earnings and unrealized gain (loss) for the available-for-sale investments.

during 2012 norcross corporation held a portfolio of available 255905

During 2012, Norcross Corporation held a portfolio of available-for-sale securities having a cost of $175,000. There were no purchases or sales of investments during the year. The market values at the beginning and end of the year were $215,000 and $150,000, respectively. The net income for 2012 was $110,000, and no dividends were paid during the year. The Stockholders’ Equity section of the balance sheet was as follows on December 31, 2011:

Norcross Corporation

Stockholders’ Equity

December 31, 2011

Common Stock………………………………………………..$ 50,000

Paid-in Capital in excess of par value ……………………….. 350,000

Retained earnings…………………………………………….. 265,000

Unrealized gain (loss) on available-for-sale investments……. 40,000

Total ………………………………………………………. $705,000

Prepare the Stockholders’ Equity section of the balance sheet for December 31, 2012.

effect of errors on financial statements using the notation o s 255936

Effect of errors on financial statements. Using the notation O/S (overstated), U/S (understated), or NO (no effect), indicate the effects on assets, liabilities, shareholders equity, and net income of each of the independent errors that follow. Ignore income tax effects.

a. In applying the equity method. P correctly accrues its share of S’s net income for the year. However, when receiving a dividend. P credits Dividend Revenue.

b. P acquired 30% of S on January 1 of the current year for an amount in excess of the carrying value of S’s net assets. The excess relates to patents. P correctly accounted for its share of S’s net income and dividends for the year but neglected to amortize any of the excess purchase price.

c. During the current year, P sold inventory items to S, it wholly owned subsidiary at a profit. S sold these inventory items, and S paid P for them before the end of the year. The firms made no elimination entry for this intercompany sale on the consolidation work sheet.

d. Refer to part c. Assume that S owes P $10,000 for intercompany purchases at year-end. The firm made no elimination entry for this intercompany debt.

e. P owns 90% of S. P treats the non-controlling interest in consolidated subsidiaries as a liability. In preparing a consolidated work sheet, the firms made no entry to accrue the non-controlling interest’s share of S’s net income or of S’s net assets.

effects of straight line versus accelerated depreciation 255937

Effects of straight-line versus accelerated depreciation on an investment decision Pacific Steel Company decided to spend $160,000 to purchase new state-of-the-art equipment for its manufacturing plant. The equipment has a five-year useful life and a salvage value of $40,000. It is expected to generate additional cash revenue of $64,000 per year. Pacific Steel required rate of return is 10 percent; its effective income tax rate is 25 percent.

Required

a. Determine the net present value and the present value index of the investment, assuming that Pacific Steel uses straight-line depreciation for financial and income tax reporting.

b. Determine the net present value and the present value index of the investment, assuming that Pacific Steel uses double-declining-balance depreciation for financial and income tax reporting.

c. Why are there differences in the net present values computed in Requirements a and b?

d. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate of return (use average investment), assuming that Pacific Steel uses straight-line depreciation.

e. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate of return (use average investment), assuming that Pacific Steel uses double-declining-balance depreciation. (Note: Use average annual cash flow when computing the payback period and average annual income when computing the unadjusted rate of return.)

f. Why are there no differences in the payback period or unadjusted rate of return computed in Requirements d and e?

evaluating discounted cash flow techniques rita hendrix is angry 255950

Evaluating discounted cash flow techniques Rita Hendrix is angry with Bill Shaw. He is behind schedule developing supporting material for tomorrow’s capital budget committee meeting. When she approached him about his apparent lackadaisical attitude in general and his tardiness in particular, he responded, ?oI don’t see why we do this stuff in the first place. It’s all a bunch of estimates. Who knows what future cash flows will really be? I certainly don’t. I’ve been doing this job for five years, and no one has ever checked to see if I even came close at these guesses. I’ve been waiting for marketing to provide the estimated cash inflows on the projects being considered tomorrow. But, if you want my report now, I’ll have it in a couple of hours. I can make up the marketing data as well as they can.??

Required

Does Mr. Shaw have a point? Is there something wrong with the company’s capital budgeting system? Write a brief response explaining how to improve the investment evaluation system.

felicia company acquired some of the 65 000 shares of outstandin 255983

Felicia Company acquired some of the 65,000 shares of outstanding common stock (no-par) of Nueces Corporation during 2011 as a long-term investment. The annual accounting period for both companies ends December 31. The following transactions occurred during 2011:

Jan. 10 Purchased 22,750 shares of Nueces common stock at $11 per share.

Dec. 31 a. Received the 2011 financial statements of Nueces Corporation that reported net income of $80,000.

b. Nueces Corporation declared and paid a cash dividend of $0.60 per share.

c. Determined the market price of Nueces stock to be $10 per share.

Required:

1. What accounting method should the company use? Why?

2. Give the journal entries for each of these transactions. If no entry is required, explain why.

3. Show how the long-term investment and the related revenue should be reported on the 2011 financial statements (balance sheet and income statement) of the company.

fernandez corp invested its excess cash in available for sale s 255984

Fernandez Corp. invested its excess cash in available-for-sale securities during 2012. As of December 31, 2012, the portfolio of available-for-sale securities consisted of the following common stocks.

?



Instructions

(a) What should be reported on Fernandez’s December 31, 2012, balance sheet relative to these securities? What should be reported on Fernandez’s 2012 income statement? On December 31, 2013, Fernandez’s portfolio of available-for-sale securities consisted of the following common stocks.

?

During the year 2013, Fernandez Corp. sold 2,000 shares of Poley Corp. for $38,200 and purchased 2,000 more shares of Lindsay Jones, Inc. and 1,000 shares of Duff Company.

(b) What should be reported on Fernandez’s December 31, 2013, balance sheet? What should be reported on Fernandez’s 2013 income statement?

On December 31, 2014, Fernandez’s portfolio of available-for-sale securities consisted of the following common stocks.

?



During the year 2014, Fernandez Corp. sold 3,000 shares of Lindsay Jones, Inc. for $39,900 and 500 shares of Duff Company at a loss of $2,700.

(c) What should be reported on the face of Fernandez’s December 31, 2014, balance sheet? What should be reported on Fernandez’s 2014 income statement?

(d) What would be reported in a statement of comprehensive income at (1) December 31, 2012, and (2) December 31,2013?

first guarantee financial inc purchased the following trading 255990

First Guarantee Financial, Inc., purchased the following trading securities during 2012, its first year of operations:

?

The market price per share for the trading security portfolio on December 31, 2012, was as follows:

Market Price Per Share

Dec. 31, 2012

B&T Transportation, Inc…………………$26

Citrus Foods, Inc…………………………..19

Stuart House wares, Inc……………………52

a. Provide the journal entry to adjust the trading security portfolio to fair value on December 31, 2012.

b. Assume the market prices of the portfolio were the same on December 31, 2013, as they were on December 31, 2012. What would be the journal entry to adjust the portfolio to fairvalue?

fleet inc is an athletic footware company that began operations 255994

Fleet Inc. is an athletic footware company that began operations on January 1, 2012. The following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by Fleet Inc., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2012

Mar. 1Purchased $36,000 of Madison Co. 5%, 10-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $150. The bonds pay interest semiannually on February 1 and August 1.

Apr. 16Purchased $45,000 of Westville 4%, 15-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $75. The bonds pay interest semiannually on April 1 and October 1.

Aug. 1Received semiannual interest on the Madison Co. bonds.

Sept. 1Sold $12,000 of Madison Co. bonds at 98 plus accrued interest of $50.

Oct. 1Received semiannual interest on Westville bonds.

Dec. 31. Accrued $500 interest on Madison Co. bonds.

31. Accrued $450 interest on Westville bonds.

2013

Feb. 1Received semiannual interest on the Madison Co. bonds.

Apr. 1Received semiannual interest on the Westville bonds.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.

2. If the bond portfolio was classified as available-for-sale, what impact would this have on financial statement disclosure?

franklin bakery is considering buying a new doughnut making mach 256025

Franklin Bakery is considering buying a new doughnut-making machine. The cost of the machine is $10,000. The machine will last for 10 years and is expected to be worth $1,000 as scrap at that time. It is expected that the new machine will increase doughnut sales by 15,000 doughnuts per year. Each doughnut has a selling price of 50 cents. The annual operating costs of the doughnut machine are projected to be as follows. Note: These cost projections are based on the forecasted sales level of 15,000 doughnuts per year.

Raw materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $2,250

Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,200

Variable production overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1,650

Variable selling costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 900

Direct fixed costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3,000

Indirect fixed costs* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4,000

* The indirect fixed costs represent the routine allocation of general company overhead to projects. Actually, because of the efficiency and reliability of the machine, general fixed company overhead will go down by $3,700 as a result of the purchase of the new doughnut-making machine. For simplicity, assume that all doughnut sales occur at the end of the year and that all costs are paid for in cash at the end of the year. Franklin Bakery has determined that the appropriate cost of capital to use in evaluating this doughnut machine is 16%.

Required:

1. With the numbers given, compute the net present value of the doughnut machine.

2. Assume that the appropriate cost of capital is 10% instead of 16%. Compute the net present value of the doughnut machine.

3. Assume again that the cost of capital is 16%. Now assume that the doughnut machine will increase production by 10,000 doughnuts per year instead of 15,000 doughnuts per year. This is within the relevant range. Compute the net present value of the doughnut machine.

4. Assume a cost of capital of 16% and an increase in production of 15,000 doughnuts per year. Now assume that the machine will cost $12,000 instead of $10,000 but that the machine will last 12 years instead of 10 years. The scrap value at the end of 12 years is still $1,000. Compute the net present value of the doughnut machine.

funding a pension plan if each individual retires at age 65 256029

1. If each individual retires at age 65, how much will his or her estimated pension be?

2. Life expectancy for both employees is 15 years at age 65. If the firm buys an annuity from an insurance company to fund each pension and the insurance company asserts it is able to earn 9 percent on the funds invested in the annuity, what is the cost or the amount required to purchase the annuity contracts?

3. If the firm can earn 8 percent on the money it must invest annually to fund the pension, how much will the firm have to invest annually to have the funds necessary to purchase the annuities?

4. What would be the impact of each of the following on the amount that the firm must invest annually to fund the pension?

a) Life expectancy is increased to 20 years.

b) The rate of interest on the annuity contract with the insurance company is reduced to 7 percent.

c) Barber retires at age 62 instead of 65.

MINI CASE

Erin O Reilly was recently employed by the human resources department of a moderate-sized engineering firm. Management is considering the adoption of a defined-benefit pension plan in which the firm will pay 75 percent of an individuals last annual salary if the employee has worked for the firm for 25 years. The amount of the pension is to be reduced by 3 percent for every year less than 25, so that an individual who has been employed for 15 years will receive a pension of 45 percent of the last years salary [75 percent – (10 x 3%)]. Pension payments will start at age 65, provided the individual has retired. There is no provision for early retirement. Continuing to work after age 65 may increase the individuals pension if the person has worked for less than 25 years or if the salary were to increase.

gaines company recently initiated a postaudit program to motiva 256035

Gaines Company recently initiated a postaudit program. To motivate employees to take the program seriously, Gaines established a bonus program. Managers receive a bonus equal to 10 percent of the amount by which actual net present value exceeds the projected net present value. Victor Holt, manager of the North Western Division, had an investment proposal on his desk when the new system was implemented. The investment opportunity required a $250,000 initial cash outflow and was expected to return cash inflows of $90,000 per year for the next five years. Gaines’ desired rate of return is 10 percent. Mr. Holt immediately reduced the estimated cash inflows to $70,000 per year and recommended accepting the project.

Required

a. Assume that actual cash inflows turn out to be $91,000 per year. Determine the amount of Mr. Holt’s bonus if the original computation of net present value were based on $90,000 versus $70,000.

b. Is Mr. Holt’s behavior in violation of any of the standards of ethical conduct in Exhibit 10.14 of Chapter 10?

c. Speculate about the long-term effect the bonus plan is likely to have on the company.

d. Recommend how to compensate managers in a way that discourages gamesmanship.

given the following information price of a stock 101 256050

Given the following information,

Price of a stock …………………$101

Strike price of a six-month call …………………$100

Market price of the call …………………$5

Strike price of a six-month put …………………$100

Market price of the put …………………$4

Answer the following sentences.

a) Which option is ?oin?? the money?

b) What is the time premium paid for the put?

c) If an investor establishes a naked call position, what amount is received?

d) What is the most the buyer of the call can lose?

e) What is the maximum amount a short seller (of the stock) can lose?

At the expiration of the options (i.e., after six months have elapsed), the price of the stock is $93.

f) What is the profit (loss) from buying the stock?

g) What is the profit (loss) from buying the call?

h) What is the profit (loss) from writing the call covered?

i) What is the profit (loss) from selling the put?

j) At expiration, what time premium is paid for the call?

goals and portfolio selection vanessa avoletta 256058

Vanessa Avoletta is a very successful self-employed freelance writer of romantic novels. She has a reputation for writing rapidly and is able to complete at least four books a year, which net after expenses $25,000 to $50,000 per book per year. With this much income, Avoletta is concerned with both sheltering income from taxes and planning for retirement. Currently she is 40 years old, is divorced, and has a child who is entering high school. Avoletta anticipates sending the child to a quality college to pursue a degree in computer sciences.

She asked you for several alternative courses of action, and you offered the following possibilities.

1. An IRA with a bank with the funds deposited in a variable-rate account.

2. A self-directed Keogh account with a major brokerage firm.

3. A Keogh account with a major mutual fund.

4. An account with a brokerage firm to accumulate common stocks with substantial growth potential but little current income.

How would you reply to each question? Which course(s) of action would you suggest that she pursue? Finally, how would each of the following alter your advice?

1. Avoletta has a record of poor health.

2. Avoletta would like to write less and perhaps teach creative writing at a local college.

3. Avoletta has expensive tastes and finds saving to be difficult.

guardian devices inc manufactures and sells commercial and re 256076

Guardian Devices, Inc., manufactures and sells commercial and residential security equipment. The comparative unclassified balance sheets for December 31, 2013 and 2012 are provided below. Selected missing balances are shown by letters.

?

Note 1. Investments are classified as available for sale. The investments at cost and fair value on December 31, 2012, are as follows:

?

Note 2. The Investment in Omaha Co. stock is an equity method investment representing 32% of the outstanding shares of Omaha Co.

The following selected investment transactions occurred during 2013:

Apr. 21. Purchased 500 shares of Walton Winery, Inc., at $25 including brokerage commission. Walton Winery is classified as an available-for-sale security.

Sept. 9. Dividends of $7.500 are received on the Omaha Co. investment.

Oct. 1, Purchased $15,000 of Yokohama Co. 6%, 10-year bonds at 100. The bonds are classified as available for sale. The bonds pay interest on October 1 and April 1.

Dec. 31. Omaha Co. reported a total net income of $50,000 for 2013. Guardian recorded equity earnings for its share of Omaha Co. net income.

Dec. 31. Accrued interest for three months on Yokohama bonds purchased on October 1.

31. Adjusted the available-for-sale investment portfolio to fair value using the following fair value per-share amounts:

Available-for-Sale

Investments Fair Value

Tyndale Inc. stock…………………. $26 per share

UR-Smart, Inc., stock …………….. $15 per share

Walton Winery, Inc., stock……….. $30 per share

Yokohama Co. bonds …………….. 101 per $100 of face value

31. Closed the Guardian Devices, Inc., net income of $28,925 for 2013. Guardian paid no dividends during 2013.

Instructions

Determine the missing letters in the unclassified balance sheet. Provide appropriate supporting calculations.

hatfield company produces jewelry that requires electroplating w 256086

Hatfield Company produces jewelry that requires electroplating with gold, silver, and other valuable metals. Electroplating uses large amounts of water and chemicals, producing wastewater with a number of toxic residuals. Currently, Hatfield uses settlement tanks to remove waste; unfortunately, the approach is inefficient, and much of the toxic residue is left in the water that is discharged into a local river. The amount of toxic discharge exceeds the legal, allowable amounts, and the company is faced with substantial, ongoing environmental fines. The environmental violations are also drawing unfavorable public reaction, and sales are being affected. A lawsuit is also impending, which could prove to be quite costly.

Management is now considering the installation of a zero-discharge, closed-loop system to treat the wastewater. The proposed closed-loop system would not only purify the wastewater, but it would also produce cleaner water than that currently being used, increasing plating quality. The closed-loop system would produce only four pounds of sludge, and the sludge would be virtually pure metal, with significant market value. The system requires an investment of $420,000 and will cost $30,000 in increased annual operation plus an annual purchase of $5,000 of filtration medium. However, management projects the following savings:

Water usage ……………………$ 45,000

Chemical usage ………………….28,000

Sludge disposal ………………….60,000

Recovered metal sales …………..30,000

Sampling of discharge …………..80,000

Total ………………………….$243,000

The equipment qualifies as a seven-year MACRS asset. Management has decided to use straight-line depreciation for tax purposes, using the required half-year convention. The tax rate is 40 percent. The projected life of the system is 10 years. The hurdle rate is 16 percent for all capital budgeting projects, although the company’s cost of capital is 12 percent.

Required:

1. Based on the financial data provided, prepare a schedule of expected cash flows.

2. What is the payback period?

3. Calculate the NPV of the closed-loop system. Should the company invest in the system?

4. The calculation in Requirement 3 ignored several factors that could affect the project’s viability: savings from avoiding the annual fines, positive effect on sales due to favorable environmental publicity, increased plating quality from the new system, and the avoidance of the lawsuit. Can these factors be quantified? If so, should they have been included in the analysis? Suppose, for example, that the annual fines being incurred are $50,000, the sales effect is $40,000 per year, the quality effect is not estimable, and that cancellation of the lawsuit because of the new system would avoid an expected settlement at the end of Year 3 (including legal fees) of $200,000. Assuming these are all after-tax amounts, what effect would their inclusion have on the payback period? On the NPV?

hiland inc manufactures snowsuits hiland is considering purcha 256099

Hiland Inc. manufactures snowsuits. Hiland is considering purchasing a new sewing machine at a cost of $2.45 million. Its existing machine was purchased five years ago at a price of $1.8 million; six months ago, Hiland spent $55,000 to keep it operational. The existing sewing machine can be sold today for $260,000. The new sewing machine would require a one-time, $85,000 training cost. Operating costs would decrease by the following amounts for years 1 to 7:

Year 1 $390,000

2 ……………………..400,000

3 ……………………..411,000

4 ……………………..426,000

5 ……………………..434,000

6 ……………………..435,000

7 ……………………..436,000

The new sewing machine would be depreciated according to the declining-balance method at a rate of 20%. The salvage value is expected to be $350,000. This new equipment would require maintenance costs of $100,000 at the end of the fifth year. The cost of capital is 9%.

Instructions

Use the net present value method to determine whether Hiland should purchase the new machine to replace the existing machine, and state the reason for your conclusion.

horizon bancorp inc purchased a portfolio of trading securities 256105

Horizon Bancorp Inc. purchased a portfolio of trading securities during 2009. The cost and fair value of this portfolio on December 31, 2009, was as follows:

?

On April 3, 2010, Horizon Bancorp Inc. purchased 500 shares of Cable, Inc., at $30 per share plus a $100 brokerage fee. On December 31, 2010, the trading security portfolio had the following cost and fair value:

?

Provide the journal entries to record the following:

(a) The adjustment of the trading security portfolio to fair value on December 31, 2009.

(b) The April 3, 2010, purchase of Cable, Inc.,stock.

question decentralisation and segment reporting 256240

Question 5: Decentralisation and Segment Reporting

Sparky Electrical Services is organised into three divisions: Metro, Suburban and Regional. The company uses a responsibility accounting system to evaluate the performance of its divisions and divisional managers. Data for the divisions for the last year were as follows:

Metro Suburban Regional
Service revenue $950,000 $750,000 $350,000
Variable expenses 150,000 100,000 50,000
Fixed expenses controllable by divisional manager 350,000 270,000 100,000
Fixed expenses traceable to division but controllable by others 180,000 150,000 40,000

In addition to the expenses listed above, the company had $450,000 of common fixed expenses which it allocated to each division based on their percentage of total service revenue earned.

Required

Prepare a segmented income statement for Sparky Electrical Services that highlights

the profitability/performance of the three divisions and the divisional managers.

Question 6: Measuring Performance (19 Marks)

NZ Lawn Care Ltd sells a range of garden tools and fertilisers. Due to the differences in the market segments that they cater for, both garden tools and the fertilizer division operate independently, where divisional managers are responsible for investment and operating decisions of their own divisions. The performances of managers are evaluated against the target return on investment (ROI) of the company which is set at 10% and by the residual income (RI) each division generates. Managers who exceed this target are rewarded with a bonus.

The following financial information relates to the divisional performance for the year ended April 2012.

Garden tools($) Fertiliser($)
Operating profit 1,356,000 1,840,500
Sales revenue 8,475,000 10,225,000
Invested capital 16,950,000 20,450,000

During the last financial year, both divisions were severely affected by the global economic downturn and the managers have suggested the following strategies to overcome the problem:

  • The manager of the Garden tools division proposes to cut the work force by 10% by which the division’s operating expenditure can be reduced by 30% without sacrificing sales revenue. In addition, he also hopes to implement a Just-in-time (JIT) system for inventories which would reduce the capital invested in the division by $2,500,000.
  • The manager of the Fertiliser division reckons that the main problem with his division is the lack of sales volume due to the stiff competition that it faces. He proposed to acquire a competitor, paying $10,000,000 to consolidate the market and to increase sales. The following are the financial data pertaining to the competitor:
Competitor ($)
Operating profit 980,000
Sales revenue 8,000,000

In addition, both managers expressed their dissatisfaction over the company’s preference to evaluate their performance based on ROI and RI. They argue that an approach based on economic value added (EVA
®) would provide a better measure.

Required:

  1. Compute the ROI for both divisions showing the return on sales and investment turnover for the year ended April 2012.
  1. Evaluate the impact that the proposed strategies would have on ROI and RI for each division assuming that NZ Lawn Care Ltd’s minimum required rate of return is 9%. (In each instance show the return on sales and investment turnover). Comment also on the validity of adopting the strategies in the short and long term.
  1. Explain why EVA® is considered a superior performance evaluation method in comparison to ROI and RI?

Attachments:

in 2007 yorkshire company purchased land and a building at 256258

In 2007, Yorkshire Company purchased land and a building at a cost of $700,000, of which $150,000 was allocated to the land and $550,000 was allocated to the building. As of December 31, 2011, the accounting records related to these assets were as follows:

Land . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $150,000

Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550,000

Accumulated Depreciation, Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150,000

On January 1, 2012, it is determined that there is toxic waste under the building and the future cash flows associated with the land and building are less than the recorded total book value for those two assets. The fair value of the land and building together is now only $120,000, of which $50,000 is land and $70,000 is the building. How should this impairment in value be recognized? Make the entry on January 1, 2012, to record the impairment of the land and building.

consider how smith valley snow park lodge could use capital 255426

Consider how Smith Valley Snow Park Lodge could use capital budgeting to decide whether the $13,500,000 Snow Park Lodge expansion would be a good investment. Assume Smith Valley’s managers developed the following estimates concerning the expansion:

Number of additional skiers per day . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Average number of days per year that weather

conditions allow skiing at Smith Valley . . . . . . . 142

Useful life of expansion (in years) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Average cash spent by each skier per day . . . . . . . . . . $ 236

Average variable cost of serving each skier per day . . . $ 76

Cost of expansion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $13,500,000

Discount rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10%

Assume that Smith Valley uses the straight-line depreciation method and expects the lodge expansion to have a residual value of $1,000,000 at the end of its 10-year life.

Requirements

1. Compute the average annual net cash inflow from the expansion.

2. Compute the average annual operating income from the expansion.

consider the following four investments a you invest 3 000 an 255433

Consider the following four investments.

a) You invest $3,000 annually in a mutual fund that earns 10 percent annually, and you reinvest all distributions. How much will you have in the account at the end of 20 years?

b) You invest $3,000 annually in a mutual fund with a 5 percent load fee so that only $2,850 is actually invested in the fund. The fund earns 10 percent annually, and you reinvest all distributions. How much will you have in the account at the end of 20 years? (Assume that all distributions are not subject to the load fee.)

c) You invest $3,000 annually in a no-load mutual fund that charges 12b-1 fees of 1 percent. The fund earns 10 percent annually before fees, and you reinvest all distributions. How much will you have in the account at the end of 20 years?

d) You invest $3,000 annually in no-load mutual fund that has a 5 percent exit fee. The fund earns 10 percent annually before fees, and you reinvest all distributions. How much will you have in the account at the end of 20 years?

In each case you invest the same amount ($3,000) every year; the fund earns the same return each year (10 percent), and you make each investment for the same time period (20 years). At the end of the 20 years, you withdraw the funds. Why is the final amount in each mutual fund different?

consider the following statements about capital budgeting a 255436

Consider the following statements about capital budgeting.

a._____ is (are) more appropriate for long-term investments.

b._____ highlights risky investments.

c._____ shows the effect of the investment on the company’s accrual-based income.

d._____ is the interest rate that makes the NPV of an investment equal to zero.

e._____ In capital rationing decisions, management must identify the discount rate when the method is used.

f._____ provides management with information on how fast the cash invested will be recouped.

g._____ is the rate of return, using discounted cash flows, a company can expect to earn by investing in the asset.

h._____ does not consider the asset’s profitability.

i.______ uses accrual accounting rather than net cash inflows in its computation.

Requirement

1. Fill in each statement with the appropriate capital budgeting method: Payback period, ROR, NPV, or IRR.

accounting 255515

The following calendar year-end information is taken from the December 31, 2011, adjusted trial balance and other records of Plaza Company. Prepare the company’s 2011 manufacturing statement.

Advertising expense$ 29,700

Direct labor $690,000

Depreciation expense—Office equipment 10,800

Income taxes expense 272,900

Depreciation expense—Selling equipment 10,100

Indirect labor 59,000

Depreciation expense—Factory equipment 38,900

Miscellaneous production costs 11,900

Factory supervision 117,400

Office salaries expense 74,000

Factory supplies used 7,500

Raw materials purchases 933,000

Factory utilities 33,000

Rent expense—Office space 29,000

Inventories

Rent expense—Selling space 25,700

Raw materials, December 31, 2010 166,400

Rent expense—Factory building 80,100

Raw materials, December 31, 2011 190,000

Maintenance expense—Factory equipment 36,400

Goods in process, December 31, 2010 16,900

Sales 4,500,000

Goods in process, December 31, 2011 24,900

Sales discounts 63,700

Finished goods, December 31, 2010 162,100

Sales salaries expense 396,000

Finished goods, December 31, 2011 140,600

buacc 2614 management accounting 2 summer 2012 27 255575

BUACC 2614 – Management Accounting 2

Summer 2012/27

Assignment

  • Problem 17.46 from the BUACC 2614 text book.
  • Format: Written response to each question
  • Contribution to overall assessment: 25%
  • Due date: week 10 (23rd January 2013 at 4.00pm sharp)
  • Your work must comply with the University’s General Guide for the Presentation of Academic Work.
  • This assignment is to be completed in pairs. Please organise yourselves into pairs.
  • Please make sure that names and ID numbers of both members are stated on the cover sheet of your submission.
  • BUACC2614, Management Accounting 2
  • Summer 2012/27 Group Assignment

Names: Student Numbers:

Bases of assessment HD P NN
Format: The IBCAR outline as per University’s General Guide for the Presentation of Academic Work.
Expression – clarity, style (formal and academic), coherence in writing, grammar, punctuation, spellings and sentence structure.
Expression of your view (and not a catalogue of quotes/ others’ ideas)
A logical flow of argument at both the paragraph level and the overall text level.
Use of supporting arguments.
Use of literature to support the argument.
Referencing procedure (within the text, and at the end of the text).
Appropriately styled and punctuated bibliography.
Overall Presentation – including cover page, line spacing, page numbering.

Overall grade
:

17.46)
Environmental
performance indicators; sustainability reporting: insurance company

WealhWise insurance has recently set up an internal information system to improve social and environmental practices within the company. The company has its head office in Brisbane and offices in all capital cities and every regional city with a population of more than 50,000 people. One of the underlying principles of the company is to be socially and environmentally responsible .This principle has been in place for many years, dating back to the firm’s founder, Jeannette Dai, who felt that she would like to contribute to social rather than simply maximizing profits.

The company is a major contributor to charities, particularly those that focus on the homeless and the poor. It actively promotes environmental management in all of the company operations. it sponsors a program that provides scholarships to disadvantaged students to allow them to attend university, and it is proud to offer employment in the company to long –term unemployed and the poor. Each year it publishes a sustainability report that summarizes its achievements across each area of performance.

Over time these activities have become a marketing strength of wealthwise. The social and environmental stance taken by the company has attracted many customers to the company. Listed on the Australian stock exchange in 2001.the company has also become a preferred investment of ethical and green investment funds.

The mission statement of wealthwise states that it will aim to:

  • Support employees in achieving their personal and career goals
  • Act in a socially responsible way when dealing with insurance clients and the general community
  • Promote a better social and physical environment for the world.

However the current chief executive officer, Sylvia Trott, thinks that the firm has become complacent and is resting on its past achievements. she is concerned that the firm has built up a reputation for good social and environmental practices but is not “walking the talk’. There is some level of discontent among employees about the way that management treats staff and this is impacting on employee satisfaction. there have also been negative reports in the media of its treatment of business in Phuket and Langkawi that were damaged in the December 2004 Tsunami. The reports claim that the company has tries to minimize the amounts paid to these business by strictly applying clauses in the insurance contracts cover earthquake damage but not flood damage.

In 2004,the company’s net profit rose by 15 per cent to $ 173 million on an asset base of $1235 million. This is the third consecutive years of increased profits. Earnings per share were 62 cents ,and th market value was $5.40 per share. The board is concerned that wilthwise makes a loss on its insurance business, while its investment yield a strong return and are the main reason for the increase in profitability. its investment portfolio includes shares BHP Billiton ,Qantas ,Telstra and James Hardie industries.

the board adopts a sustainability approach to approach to viewing its performance and uses the following key performances indicators to assess performance:

Financial:

  • Net profit
  • Gross insurance premiums
  • Return on investment

Economic indicators:

  • Policy practices and spending on local suppliers
  • Procedures for hiring local staff
  • Development projects primarily for public benefit

Social indicators:

  • Employee satisfaction ratings
  • Percentage of women in the top three tiers of management
  • Number of indigenous employees
  • Customer’s ethical ranking of sales staff
  • Number of staff hired who were previously unemployed teenagers.

Environmental indicators:

  • Tonnes of paper recycled per annum
  • Percentage reduction in electricity usage
  • Litres of fuel per dollar of sales

Required:

  1. Explain what is meant by sustainability reporting and why a publicly listed insurance company like WealthWise may adopt this approach.
  2. Consider the list of key performance indicators used by Wealth Wise. Explain how these measures could be used to help achieve the mission.
  3. Suggest alternative performance measure that could be included in the performance measurement system to assist WealthWise to achieve its system.
  4. Write a report to a chief executive officer explaining what step she can take to encourage staff to behave in a way that support sustainability. Specifically explain to her how the performance measurement system could be used in a balanced way to support the achievement of the company goals.

Attachments:

ha3051 assignment this assignment is to be conducted between two people 255585

HA3051 Assignment, This assignment is to be conducted between two people. The assessment carries 20% of the total assessment for this subject. The assignment is due week 9 (by wednesday 23rd January). You are required to submit a soft-copy to Safeassign (please note, only one member from the team) and a hard-copy (which will be assessed and returned to you). Word limit: Whilst there is not a maximum limit, the minimum is 2,000 words (1,000 words per person). Assignment requirements. You are to read the report “The case for global accounting standards” by Professor Ann Tarca (UWA) and analyse what the key points are of the report. Then prepare a report either supporting or challenging the position of the author. The report must include clear evidence that you have conducted research to support your position and it must be analytically sound and detailed. There is not a limit on referenced material BUT all sourced references must be clearly identified (within the body of your report and a list of references at the rear of your paper) and must be accompanied with your own comments and views. The references should be considered in the context of supporting your views. Sources that you will find useful include; Websites: • AASB (website of Australian Accounting Standards Board) • IASB (website of International Accounting Standards Board) • FASB (website of US-based Financial Accounting Standards Board • ICAA (Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia) • CPAA (Certified Practising Accountants Australia) It is also recommended that you utilise Proquest and Google Scholar. Marks will be given on the soundness of your argument, research conducted, quality of report (presentation, referencing) and the understanding of the issues. Each report will be assessed individually. Report structure: should consist of summary, introduction, points of discussion and conclusion. It is recommended that you focus on key points within the provided paper and the overall position of the author rather than all the points raised.

value the equity in pmt corporation assuming that the current management continues i 255606

You are considering a takeover of PMT Corporation, a firm that has significantly underperformed its peer group over the last five years and you wish to estimate the value of control. The data on PMT Corporation, the peer group, and the best managed firm in the group are given below.

PMT Corporation reported earnings per share of $2.50 in the most recent time period and is expected to reach stable growth in five years, after which the growth rate is expected to be 6% for all firms in this group.The beta during the stable growth period is expected to be 1 for all firms. There are 100 million shares outstanding and the treasury bond rate is

7% (the tax rate is 40% for all firms).

a. Value the equity in PMT Corporation, assuming that the current management continues in place.

b. Value the equity in PMT Corporation, assuming that it improves its performance to peer group levels.

c. Value the equity in PMT Corporation, assuming that it improves its performance to the level of the best managed firm in the group.

estimate the value of the building based upon expected cash flows b estimate the va 255611

You have been asked to value an office building in Orlando, Florida with the following characteristics.

•The building was built in 1988 and has 300,000 square feet of rentable area.

•There would be an initial construction and renovation cost of $3.0 million.

•It will take two years to fill the building. The expected vacancy rates in the first two years are as follows.

Year

Vacancy Rate

1

30%

2

20%

Afteryear2

10%

The market rents in the building were expected to average $15.00 per square foot in the current year based upon average rents in the surrounding buildings.

•The market rents were assumed to grow 5% a year for five years and at 3% a year forever afterwards.

•The variable operating expenses were assumed to be $3.00 per square foot and are expected to grow at the same rate as rents. The fixed operating expense in 1994 amounted to $300,000 and was expected to grow at 3% forever.

•The real estate taxes are expected to amount to $300,000 in the first year and grow at 3% a year after that. It is assumed that all tenants will pay their pro rate share of increases in real estate taxes that exceed 3% a year.

•The tax rate on income was assumed to be 42%.

•The cost of borrowing was assumed to be 8.25%, pre-tax. It was also assumed that the building would be financed with 30% equity and 70% debt.

•A survey suggests that equity investors in real estate require a return of 12.5% of their investments.

a. Estimate the value of the building, based upon expected cash flows. b. Estimate the value of just the equity stake in this building.

this assignment is to be conducted between two people 255707

HA3051 Assignment,

This assignment is to be conducted between two people.

The assessment carries 20% of the total assessment for this subject.

The assignment is due week 9 (by Friday 18
th January). You are required to submit a soft-copy to Safeassign (please note, only one member from the team) and a hard-copy (which will be assessed and returned to you).

Word limit: Whilst there is not a maximum limit, the minimum is 2,000 words (1,000 words per person).

Assignment requirements.

You are to read the report “
The case for global accounting standards” by Professor Ann Tarca (UWA) and analyse what the key points are of the report. Then prepare a report either supporting or challenging the position of the author.

The report must include clear evidence that you have conducted research to support your position and it must be analytically sound and detailed.

There is not a limit on referenced material BUT all sourced references must be clearly identified (within the body of your report and a list of references at the rear of your paper) and must be accompanied with your own comments and views. The references should be considered in the context of supporting your views.

Sources that you will find useful include;

Websites:

  • AASB (website of Australian Accounting Standards Board)
  • IASB (website of International Accounting Standards Board)
  • FASB (website of US-based Financial Accounting Standards Board
  • ICAA (Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia)
  • CPAA (Certified Practising Accountants Australia)

It is also recommended that you utilise Proquest and Google Scholar.

Marks will be given on the soundness of your argument, research conducted, quality of report (presentation, referencing) and the understanding of the issues. Each report will be assessed individually.

Report structure: should consist of summary, introduction, points of discussion and conclusion. It is recommended that you focus on key points within the provided paper and the overall position of the author rather than all the points raised.

you are 60 years old currently you have 10 000 invested 255713

You are 60 years old. Currently, you have $10,000 invested in an IRA and have just received a lump-sum distribution of $50,000 from a pension plan, which you roll over into an IRA. You continue to make $2,000 annual payments to the regular IRA and expect to earn 9 percent on these funds until you start withdrawing the money at age 70 (i.e., after ten years). The IRA rollover will earn 9 percent for the same duration.

a) How much will you have when you start to make withdrawals at age 70?

b) If your funds continue to earn 9 percent annually and you withdraw $17,000 annually, how long will it take to exhaust your funds?

c) If your funds continue to earn 9 percent annually and your life expectancy is 18 years, what is the maximum you may withdraw each year?

you are in the 28 percent income tax bracket and 255717

You are in the 28 percent income tax bracket and pay long-term capital gains taxes of 15 percent. What are the taxes owed or saved in the current year for each of the following sets of transactions?

a) You buy 100 shares of ZYX for $10 and after seven months sell it on December 31, 200X, for $23. You buy 100 shares of WER for $10 and after fifteen months sell it on December 31, 200X, for $7. You buy 100 shares of DFG for $10 and after nine months, on December 31, 200X, it is selling for $15.

b) You buy 100 shares of ZYX for $60 and after seven months sell it on December 31, 200Y, for $37. You buy 100 shares of WER for $60 and after fifteen months sell it on December 31, 200Y, for $67. You buy 100 shares of DFG for $60 and after nine months sell it on December 31, 200Y, for $76.

c) On January 2, 200X, you buy 100 shares of ZYX for $40 and sell it for $31 after twenty-two months. On January 2, 200X, you buy 100 shares of WER for $40 and sell it for $27 after fifteen months. On January 2, 200X, you buy 100 shares of DFG for $40 and sell it for $16 after eighteen months.

d) On January 2, 200X, you buy 100 shares of ZYX for $60. On October 2, 200X, you sell 100 shares of ZYX for $40. On October 10, 200X, you purchase 100 shares of ZYX for $25.

you expect the stock market to decline but instead of 255730

You expect the stock market to decline, but instead of selling stocks short, you decide to sell a stock index futures contract based on an index of New York Stock Exchange common stocks. The index is currently 600 and the contract has a value that is $250 times the amount of the index. The margin requirement is $2,000 and the maintenance margin requirement is $1,000.

a) When you sell the contract, how much must you put up?

b) What is the value of the contract based on the index?

c) If after one week of trading the index stands at 601, what has happened to your position? How much have you lost or profited?

d) If the index rose to 607, what would you be required to do?

e) If the index declined to 594 (1 percent from the starting value), what is your percentage profit or loss on your position?

f) If you had purchased the contract instead of selling it, how much would you have invested?

g) If you had purchased the contract and the index subsequently rose from 600 to 607, what would be your required investment?

h) Contrast your answers to parts (d) and (g).

you have just started work for andre love co as 255741

You have just started work for Andre Love Co. as part of the controller’s group involved in current financial reporting problems. Jackie Franklin, controller for Love, is interested in your accounting background because the company has experienced a series of financial reporting surprises over the last few years. Recently, the controller has learned from the company’s auditors that an FASB Statement may apply to its investment in securities. She assumes that you are familiar with this pronouncement and asks how the following situations should be reported in the financial statements.

Situation 1

Trading securities in the current assets section have a fair value that is $4,200 lower than cost.

Situation 2

A trading security whose fair value is currently less than cost is transferred to the available-for-sale category.

Situation 3

An available-for-sale security whose fair value is currently less than cost is classified as noncurrent but is to be reclassified as current.

Situation 4

A company’s portfolio of available-for-sale securities consists of the common stock of one company. At the end of the prior year the fair value of the security was 50% of original cost, and this reduction in market value was reported as an other than temporary impairment. However, at the end of the current year the fair value of the security had appreciated to twice the original cost.

Situation 5

The company has purchased some convertible debentures that it plans to hold for less than a year. The fair value of the convertible debentures is $7,700 below its cost.

Instructions

What is the effect upon carrying value and earnings for each of the situations above? Assume that these situations are unrelated.

danburg company has a 5 million 9 bank loan outstanding 255791

Danburg Company has a $5 million 9% bank loan outstanding with its local bank. On January 1, 2007, when the loan has four years remaining, Danburg contracts with Bradford Investment Bank to enter into a four-year interest-rate swap with a $5 million notional amount. Danburg agrees to receive from Bradford a fixed interest rate of 9% and to pay Bradford an interest amount each year that is variable based on the LIBOR interest rate at the beginning of the year. The interest payments are made at year-end. The applicable interest rate on the swap is reset each year after the annual interest payment is made. The LIBOR interest rate is 8.6% and 9.5% at the beginning of 2007 and 2008, respectively. The three-year fixed interest rate is 10% at December 31, 2007, and the two-year rate is 8% at December 31, 2008.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries of Danburg for the bank loan and derivative for 2007 and 2008.

2. Prepare the appropriate disclosures in Danburg’s financial statements for 2007 and 2008.

balance sheet 255859

lisa started a business she invested cash by making a deposit in a bank account for 8,000. Paid rent for July $150.Purchased a used van for cash $5000. Purchased tools on account from clean tools $600. Purchased cleaning supplies that cost $300. Paid $200 cash and will pay the balance next month $100. Paid part-time assistant wages for first half of the month $100. Paid advertising $75. Paid two year premium for liability insurance on van $480. Received cash from clients for services performed $800. Performed cleaning services for clients on account $500. Paid telephone bill $40. Received cash from clients for service performed on account in transaction $200. Paid part time assistant wages for last half of month $150. Made partial payment on tools purchased in transaction $200. Earned additional revenues amounting to $800: $600 in cash and $200 on account. Lisa withdrew cash at the end of the month for personal expenses $100.

dollar mart inc is a general merchandise retail company that be 255881

Dollar-Mart Inc. is a general merchandise retail company that began operations on January 1, 2010. The following transactions relate to debt investments acquired by Dollar-Mart Inc., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2010

May 1. Purchased $60,000 of Elkin City 4%, 10-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $400. The bond is classified as an available-for-sale investment. The bonds pay interest semiannually on March 1 and September 1.

June 16. Purchased $112,000 of Morgan Co. 6%, 12-year bonds at face value plus accrued interest of $280. The bond is classified as an available-for-sale investment. The bonds pay interest semiannually on June 1 and December 1.

Sept. 1. Received semiannual interest on the Elkin City bonds.

Oct. 1. Sold $24,000 of Elkin City bonds at 103 plus accrued interest of $80.

Dec. 1. Received semiannual interest on Morgan Co. bonds.

31. Accrued $480 interest on Elkin City bonds.

31. Accrued $560 interest on Morgan Co. bonds.

31. The available-for-sale bond portfolio was adjusted to fair values of 102 and

101 for Elkin City and Morgan Co. bonds, respectively.

2011

Mar. 1. Received semiannual interest on the Elkin City bonds.

June 1. Received semiannual interest on the Morgan Co. bonds.

(Assume that there are no more purchases or sales of bonds during 2011. Also assume all subsequent interest transactions for 2011 have been recorded properly.)

Dec. 31. The available-for-sale bond portfolio was adjusted to fair values of 99 and 100 for Elkin City and Morgan Co. bonds, respectively.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.

2. Prepare the investment-related current asset and stockholders’ equity balance sheet disclosures for Dollar-Mart Inc. on December 31, 2011, assuming the Retained Earnings balance on December 31, 2011, is $310,000.

dominic hunter a second year business student at the university 255882

Dominic Hunter, a second-year business student at the University of Utah, will graduate in two years with an accounting major and a Spanish minor. Hunter is trying to decide where to work this summer. He has two choices: work full-time for a bottling plant or work part-time in the accounting department of a meat-packing plant. He probably will work at the same place next summer as well. He is able to work 12 weeks during the summer.

The bottling plant will pay Hunter $380 per week this year and 7% more next summer. At the meat-packing plant, he could work 20 hours per week at $8.75 per hour. Hunter believes that the experience he gains this summer will qualify him for a full-time accounting position with the meat-packing plant next summer. That position will pay $550 per week.

Hunter sees two additional benefits of working part-time this summer. By working only part-time, he could take two accounting courses this summer (tuition is $225 per hour for each of the four-hour courses) and reduce his studying workload during the Fall and Spring semesters. Second, he would have the time to work as a grader in the university’s accounting department during the 15-week fall term and make additional income. Grading pays $50 per week.

Requirements

1. Suppose that Hunter ignores the time value of money in decisions that cover this short time period. Suppose also that his sole goal is to make as much money as possible between now and the end of next summer. What should he do? What nonquantitative factors might Hunter consider? What would you do if you were faced with these alternatives?

2. Now suppose that Hunter considers the time value of money for all cash flows that he expects to receive one year or more in the future. Which alternative does this consideration favor? Why?

this assignment is to be completed in groups of three and carries 30 per cent of the 255884

This assignment is to be completed in groups of three and carries 30 per-cent of the marks in this unit.

Part A (15 marks)

Consider the following information

All Ords
Month Index Stock A Stock B
Value Return Return
D 240.00
J 274.08 0.09570 0.07290
F 284.20 -0.00410 0.08350
M 291.70 0.05420 0.08410
A 288.36 -0.00400 0.06660
M 290.10 -0.03630 -0.00080
J 304.00 0.14640 0.02250
J 318.66 0.09630 -0.00920
A 329.80 0.02030 0.04580
S 318.56 -0.05630 -0.09810
O 320.00 0.03132 0.12740
N 334.16 -0.07770 0.09590
D 380.34 0.09800 0.05280

The risk free rate is 0.02 and you are considering investing 60% of your funds in Stock A and 40% in Stock B.

Calculate the following.

  1. Expected Return of Stock A (.5 mark)
  2. Expected Return of Stock B (.5 mark)
  3. Standard Deviation of Stock A (.5 mark)
  4. Standard Deviation of Stock B (.5 mark)
  5. Coefficient of Variation of Stock A (.25 mark)
  6. Coefficient of Variation of Stock B (.25 mark)
  7. Covariance of Stocks A and B (.5 mark)
  8. Correlation Coefficient of Stocks A and B (.5 mark)
  9. Portfolio Return (.25 mark)
  10. Portfolio Standard Deviation and Variance (1.25 mark)
  11. Weights of the Minimum Variance Portfolio (1.25 marks)
  12. Proof that these weights lead to the Minimum Variance Portfolio (1 mark)
  13. Weights of the Optimal Risky Portfolio with a risk-free asset (1 mark)
  14. Proof that these weights lead to the Optimal Risky Portfolio (1.25 marks)
  15. Discussion on what you would do with this portfolio (1 mark)
  16. Calculate the beta for Stock A (1 mark)
  17. Using the Excel regression function regress Stock A returns against the market (.5 mark)
  18. Calculate the beta for stock B (1 mark)
  19. Using the Excel regression function regress Stock B returns against the market (.5 mark)

Using the estimated returns above determine if either Stock A or Stock B is under/over-priced according to the CAPM (1.5 marks)

Part B (7.5 marks)

Oneway Ltd had outperformed its competition for the past decade however analysts now consider that the company may experience little or no growth in the future. Not perturbed by this the company believes it could maintain a constant annual growth rate in dividends per share of 6 per cent in the future, or possibly 8 per cent for the next two years and 6 per cent thereafter based on estimates of expansion into Asian/pacific markets. By venturing into these markets, the risk of the firm as measured by beta was expected to immediately increase from 1.10 to 1.25.

The chief financial has compiled the following financial data.




Figure 1: Security market line for Oncore International

Required

1. ‘What is the firm’s current price/earnings ratio?

2. ‘What is the firm’s current book value per share?

3a. What are the required return and risk premium for Oneway Ltd’s shares using the capital asset pricing model (CAPM), assuming the beta of 1.10?

(Hint: Use the security market line – with data points noted – given in Figure 1 to find the market return.)

Attachments:

proof that these weights lead to the optimal risky portfolio 1 25 marks 255886

Summer 2012/13

ASSIGNMENT

This assignment is to be completed in groups of three and carries 30 per-cent of the marks in this unit.

Part A (15 marks)

Consider the following information

All Ords
Month Index Stock A Stock B
Value Return Return
D 240.00
J 274.08 0.09570 0.07290
F 284.20 -0.00410 0.08350
M 291.70 0.05420 0.08410
A 288.36 -0.00400 0.06660
M 290.10 -0.03630 -0.00080
J 304.00 0.14640 0.02250
J 318.66 0.09630 -0.00920
A 329.80 0.02030 0.04580
S 318.56 -0.05630 -0.09810
O 320.00 0.03132 0.12740
N 334.16 -0.07770 0.09590
D 380.34 0.09800 0.05280

The risk free rate is 0.02 and you are considering investing 60% of your funds in Stock A and 40% in Stock B.

Calculate the following.

  1. Expected Return of Stock A (.5 mark)
  2. Expected Return of Stock B (.5 mark)
  3. Standard Deviation of Stock A (.5 mark)
  4. Standard Deviation of Stock B (.5 mark)
  5. Coefficient of Variation of Stock A (.25 mark)
  6. Coefficient of Variation of Stock B (.25 mark)
  7. Covariance of Stocks A and B (.5 mark)
  8. Correlation Coefficient of Stocks A and B (.5 mark)
  9. Portfolio Return (.25 mark)
  10. Portfolio Standard Deviation and Variance (1.25 mark)
  11. Weights of the Minimum Variance Portfolio (1.25 marks)
  12. Proof that these weights lead to the Minimum Variance Portfolio (1 mark)
  13. Weights of the Optimal Risky Portfolio with a risk-free asset (1 mark)
  14. Proof that these weights lead to the Optimal Risky Portfolio (1.25 marks)
  15. Discussion on what you would do with this portfolio (1 mark)
  16. Calculate the beta for Stock A (1 mark)
  17. Using the Excel regression function regress Stock A returns against the market (.5 mark)
  18. Calculate the beta for stock B (1 mark)
  19. Using the Excel regression function regress Stock B returns against the market (.5 mark)

Using the estimated returns above determine if either Stock A or Stock B is under/over-priced according to the CAPM (1.5 marks)

Part B (7.5 marks)

Oneway Ltd had outperformed its competition for the past decade however analysts now consider that the company may experience little or no growth in the future. Not perturbed by this the company believes it could maintain a constant annual growth rate in dividends per share of 6 per cent in the future, or possibly 8 per cent for the next two years and 6 per cent thereafter based on estimates of expansion into Asian/pacific markets. By venturing into these markets, the risk of the firm as measured by beta was expected to immediately increase from 1.10 to 1.25.

The chief financial has compiled the following financial data.



Figure 1: Security market line for Oncore International

Required

1. ‘What is the firm’s current price/earnings ratio?

2. ‘What is the firm’s current book value per share?

3a. What are the required return and risk premium for Oneway Ltd’s shares using the capital asset pricing model (CAPM), assuming the beta of 1.10?

(Hint: Use the security market line – with data points noted – given in Figure 1 to find the market return.)

3b. What are the required return and risk premium for Oneway Ltd’s shares using the (CAPM), assuming the beta of 1.25?

3c. What is the effect on the required return if the beta rises as expected?

4. If the securities analysts are correct and there is no growth in future dividends, what is the value per share of Oneway Ltd? (Note: Beta = 1.25.)

5a. If predictions are correct, what is the value per share of Oneway if the firm maintains a constant annual 6 per cent growth rate in future dividends? (Note: Beta = 1.25.)

5b. If predictions are correct, what is the value per share of Oneway if the firm maintains a constant annual 8 per cent growth rate in dividends per share over the next two years and 6 per cent thereafter? (Note: Beta = 1.25.)

6. Compare the current price of the shares and the share values found in questions 2, 4 and 5. Discuss why these values may differ. Which valuation method do you believe most clearly represents the true value of the Oneway shares?

Part C (7.5 marks)

  1. How is a company’s cost of capital affected by its tax rate?
  2. Explain the common sources of risk affecting financial managers and shareholders
  3. Explain the difference in required (expected) return for the following three financial managers
  • Risk-Indifferent
  • Risk Averse
  • Risk Seeking

Attachments:

during 2011 rooster company purchased 5 000 shares of hen compa 255901

During 2011, Rooster Company purchased 5,000 shares of Hen Company common stock for $18 per share and 3,200 shares of Egg Company common stock for $21 per share. These investments are intended to be held as ready sources of cash and are classified as trading securities.

Also in 2011, Rooster purchased 6,400 shares of Chicken Company common stock for $27 per share and $80,000 of treasury notes at 103. These securities are classified as available for sale.

During 2011, Rooster received the following interest and dividend payments on its investments:

Hen Company $2.50 per share dividend

Egg Company $1.25 per share dividend

Chicken Company $1.00 per share dividend

Treasury notes8% annual interest earned for 6 months

Fair values of the securities at December 31, 2011, were as follows:

Hen Company $21 per share

Egg Company $16 per share

Chicken Company $24 per share

Treasury notes 104

On March 23, 2012, the 3,200 shares of Egg common stock were sold for $16 per share. On June 30, 2012, the treasury notes were sold at 102 plus accrued interest.

Fair values of remaining securities at December 31, 2012, were as follows:

Hen Company$20 per share

Chicken Company $30 per share

Instructions:

1. Prepare all 2011 and 2012 journal entries related to these securities.

2. Describe how the following items would be treated on Rooster Company’s statement of cash flows for the year ended December 31, 2012. Rooster uses the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities. In all cases, assume that trading securities were acquired for operating purposes.

(a) Proceeds from the sale of Egg shares and any realized gain or loss from the sale.

(b) Proceeds from the sale of the treasury securities and any realized gain or loss from the sale.

(c) Any unrealized gain or loss on the remaining securities.

algs inc wants to purchase a new machine for 29 300 255038

ALGS Inc. wants to purchase a new machine for $29,300, excluding $1,500 of installation costs. The old machine was bought five years ago and had an expected economic life of 10 years without salvage value. This old machine now has a book value of $2,000, and ALGS Inc. expects to sell it for that amount. The new machine would decrease operating costs by $8,000 each year of its economic life. The straight-line depreciation method would be used for the new machine, for a five-year period with no salvage value.

Instructions

(a) Determine the cash payback period.

(b) Determine the approximate internal rate of return.

(c) Assuming the company has a required rate of return of 10%, state your conclusion on whether the new machine should be purchased.

all star inc is considering an investment in one of two 255039

All-star, Inc., is considering an investment in one of two machines. The sewing machine will increase productivity from sewing 150 baseballs per hour to sewing 260 per hour. The contribution margin per unit is $0.54 per baseball. Assume that any increased production of baseballs can be sold. The second machine is an automatic packing machine for the golf ball line. The packing machine will reduce packing labor cost. The labor cost saved is equivalent to $25 per hour. The sewing machine will cost $360,000, have an eight-year life, and will operate for 1,700 hours per year. The packing machine will cost $ 120,000, have an eight-year life, and will operates for 1,600 hours per year. All-star seeks a minimum rate of return of 15% on its investments

(a) Determine the net present value for the two machines. Use the present value of an annuity of $1 table in the chapter (Exhibit 2), Round to two decimal places.

(b) Determine the present value index for the two machines. Round to two decimal places.

(c) If All-star has sufficient funds for only one of the machines and qualitative factors are equal between the two machines, in which machine should it invest?

allowance method of accounting for bad debts comparison of the t 255044

Allowance Method of Accounting for Bad Debts—Comparison of the Two Approaches Kandel Company had the following data available for 2010 (before making any adjustments):

Accounts receivable, 12/31/10 ………………………………$320,100

Allowance for doubtful accounts ………………………………..2,600

Net credit sales, 2010 …………………………………………834,000

Required

1. Identify and analyze the adjustment to recognize bad debts under the following assumptions:

(a) Bad debts expense is expected to be 2% of net credit sales for the year and

(b) Kandel expects it will not be able to collect 6% of the balance in accounts receivable at year-end.

2. Assume instead that the balance in the allowance account is a negative $2,600. How will this affect your answers to (1)?

an investor is in the 33 percent tax bracket and 255061

An investor is in the 33 percent tax bracket and pays long-term capital gains taxes of 15 percent. What are the taxes owed (or saved in the cases of losses) in the current tax year for each of the following situations?

a) Net short-term capital gains of $3,000; net long-term capital gains of $4,000

b) Net short-term capital gains of $3,000; net long-term capital losses of $4,000

c) Net short-term capital losses of $3,000; net long-term capital gains of $4,000

d) Net short-term capital gains of $3,000; net long-term capital losses of $2,000

e) Net short-term capital losses of $4,000; net long-term capital gains of $3,000

f) Net short-term capital losses of $1,000; net long-term capital losses of $1,500

g) Net short-term capital losses of $3,000; net long-term capital losses of $2,000

anglar company has a 3 million 7 bank loan from 255066

Anglar Company has a $3 million 7% bank loan from Castle Rock Bank. On January 1, 2007, when the $3 million loan has three years remaining, Anglar contracts with Susan Investment Bank to enter into a three-year interest-rate swap with a $3 million notional amount. Anglar agrees to receive from Susan a fixed interest rate of 7% and to pay Susan an interest amount each year that is variable based on the LIBOR interest rate at the beginning of the year. The interest payments are made at year-end. The applicable interest rate on the swap is reset each year after the annual interest payment is made. The LIBOR interest rate is 6.6% at the beginning of 2007. The three-year fixed interest rate is 8% at December 31, 2007.

Required

1. Prepare the journal entries of Anglar for the bank loan and derivative for 2007.

2. Prepare the appropriate disclosures in Anglar’s financial statements for 2007.

bartlet financial services company holds a large portfolio of de 255142

Bartlet Financial Services Company holds a large portfolio of debt and stock securities as an investment. The total fair value of the portfolio at December 31, 2010, is greater than total cost. Some securities have increased in value and others have decreased. Deb Faust, the financial vice president, and Jan McCabe, the controller, are in the process of classifying for the first time the securities in the portfolio.

Faust suggests classifying the securities that have increased in value as trading securities in order to increase net income for the year. She wants to classify the securities that have decreased in value as long-term available-for-sale securities, so that the decreases in value will not affect 2010 net income.

McCabe disagrees. She recommends classifying the securities that have decreased in value as trading securities and those that have increased in value as long-term available-for-sale securities. McCabe argues that the company is having a good earnings year and that recognizing the losses now will help to smooth income for this year. Moreover, for future years, when the company may not be as profitable, the company will have built-in gains.

Instructions

(a) Will classifying the securities as Faust and McCabe suggest actually affect earnings as each says it will?

(b) Is there anything unethical in what Faust and McCabe propose? Who are the stakeholders affected by their proposals?

(c) Assume that Faust and McCabe properly classify the portfolio. Assume, at year-end, that Faust proposes to sell the securities that will increase 2010 net income, and that McCabe proposes to sell the securities that will decrease 2010 net income. Is this unethical?

customer profitability analysis omega printers ltd handles printing jobs for a varie 255227

Question 2: Customer Profitability Analysis Omega Printers Ltd handles printing jobs for a variety of clients. The marketing manager of Omega, Joe Patterson, finds that serving some clients is more demanding than serving others. The demands made by some clients take up a lot of time that the sales staff would prefer to spend on soliciting new clients. In particular, Joe is interested in knowing the profitability of serving Expert Travels – a travel operator and Evon Cosmetics – a retailer.

Document Preview:

Question 2: Customer Profitability Analysis Omega Printers Ltd handles printing jobs for a variety of clients. The marketing manager of Omega, Joe Patterson, finds that serving some clients is more demanding than serving others. The demands made by some clients take up a lot of time that the sales staff would prefer to spend on soliciting new clients. In particular, Joe is interested in knowing the profitability of serving Expert Travels – a travel operator and Evon Cosmetics – a retailer. The management accounting department staff of Omega printers have provided the following information. Expert Travels Evon Cosmetics Sales revenue $554,000 $446,800 Cost of goods sold $288,000 $223,200 Selling costs $86,400 $64,800 Administration costs $68,400 $57,600 Cost driver data used by Omega Printers and traceable to the two clients are: Customer-driven activities Cost driver Cost driver rate Sales activity Sales visits $200 per visit Order taking Purchase orders $ 40 per purchase order Sorting & packaging Number of packages $ 50 per package Ordinary shipping Number of shipments $ 150 per shipment Special shipping Number of shipments $ 750 per shipment The following data relates to those same two clients: Customer-driven activities Expert Travels Evon Cosmetics Sales activity 10 sales visits 20 sales visits Order taking 15 purchase orders 36 purchase orders Sorting & Packaging 200 packages 1,500 packages Ordinary shipping 12 shipments 10 shipments Special shipping 3 shipments 26 shipments Required: Prepare a customer profitability analysis for Expert Travels and Evon Cosmetics. Comment on the relative profitability of the two customers by computing the gross margin, net profit margin and any other relevant ratios. Suggest and explain one non-financial performance measure that Omega Printers Ltd could use to evaluate each of the following: Customer acquisition Customer retention Customer satisfaction …

Attachments:

ha3042 taxation law trimester 3 2012 individual assignment 255273

HA3042 TAXATION LAW

TRIMESTER 3, 2012

INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT

Assessment Value: 20%

Instructions:

1. This assignment is to be submitted in accordance with

assessment policy stated in the Subject Outline and Student

Handbook.

2. It is the responsibility of the student who is submitting the work, to

ensure that the work is in fact her/his own work. Incorporating

another’s work or ideas into one’s own work without appropriate

acknowledgement is an academic offence. Students should

submit all assignments for plagiarism checking on Blackboard

before final submission in the subject. For further details, please

refer to the Subject Outline and Student Handbook.

3. Answer all questions.

4. Maximum word length: 2,000 words.

5. Maximum marks available: 20 marks.

6. Due date of submission: Week 9.

Question 1 (10 marks)

Caroline is a 55-year-old Australian resident. She is the chief

marketing officer based in Sydney for XYZ Limited (XYZ), a public

company listed on the Australian Securities Exchange (ASX). During

the financial year ended 30 June 2012, she had the following

transactions:

1. On 1 March 2012, Caroline received a $100,000 lump sum

compensation payment for an injury she suffered to her neck

in a car accident at the end of 2011.

2. Caroline put the entire $100,000 into a 90-day term deposit

maturing on 30 June 2012, with an interest of $1,258 payable

on maturity. At maturity, Caroline instructed the bank to

reinvest both the interest and the principal into a term deposit

with the same terms.

3. On 31 December 2011, she received a $30,000 dividend,

franked to 50%.

4. She received $300,000 salary from XYZ.

5. She took out a loan of $25,000 and used the entire amount to

make a contribution into her complying self-managed

superannuation fund. On 30 June 2012, she pre-paid interest

of $3,000 (for 10 months) on the loan.

6. On 30 June 2012, Caroline received $800,000 for the sale of a

property which she inherited from her deceased mother. The

property was her mother’s main residence up until her

mother’s death on 14 July 2010. The market value of the

property at the time of her mother’s death was $750,000. The

property was originally purchased for $320,000 in January

1991 and has not been used to produce assessable income.

7. Prior to her role at XYZ, Caroline was made redundant on 1

July 2011 from her position at Technology Limited, where she

had been employed since 4 April 2007. On 30 July 2011 she

was paid a genuine redundancy sum of $20,000. The payment

is considered reasonable and she did not have any unused

long service leave or annual leave.

REQUIRED:

Calculate Caroline’s taxable income for the year ended 30 June

2012. Show workings where relevant and briefly explain all

inclusions and exclusions. Cite the relevant section reference(s). Set

out your answer using the following table format:

Transaction Workings /

Brief

Explanation

Section

References

Taxable

income

Calculations

1. Compensation

2. Etc

Question 2 (10 marks)

Necktie Pty Ltd (Necktie), an Australian resident company, had the

following transactions in the year ended 30 June 2012:

Transaction Amount (A$)

1. Derived dividend income from an 8%-owned

company registered in the USA

4,000

2. Derived dividend income from an 89%-

owned company registered in Hong Kong

7,000

3. Incurred interest expense in relation to

Hong Kong dividend

(5,000)

4. Derived trading income from a New Zealand

branch dealing with New Zealand customers

840,000

5. Incurred interest in relation to New Zealand

trading income

(14,000)

6. Acquired some in-house software on 1 July

2011, to run its Australian business

(100,000)

7. Spent $2,000 on a Christmas party for 10

Australian staff. This was the only

entertainment incurred during the year.

Necktie uses the actual method for working

out its fringe benefits tax liability each year

(2,000)

REQUIRED:

Calculate the assessable / deductible amount (if any) in relation to

each of the above transactions. Cite the relevant section

reference(s). Ignore withholding tax. Set out your answer using the

following table format:

Transaction Assessable

income $

Allowable

deduction $

Relevant

section

reference(s)

1. Derived

dividend from

an 8%-owned

company in

the USA

2. Etc

Attachments:

estimate the arithmetic average and geometric average growth rate in earnings per sh 255280

Walgreen Company reported the following earnings per share from 1989 to 1994.

Year

EPS

1989

$1.28

1990

$1.42

1991

$1.58

1992

$1.78

1993

$1.98

1994

$2.30

a. Estimatethearithmetic average and geometric average growthratein earningspershare between 1989 and 1994. Why are they different? Which is more reliable?

b. Estimate the growth rate using a linear growth model.

c. Estimate the growth rate using a log-linear growth model.

bip corporation paid 390 000 for a 30 percent interest in 255281

BIP Corporation paid $390,000 for a 30 percent interest in Cow Corporation on December 31, 2011, when Cow’s equity consisted of $1,000,000 capital stock and $400,000 retained earnings. The price paid by BIP reflected the fact that Cow’s inventory (on a FIFO basis) was overvalued by $100,000. The overvalued inventory items were sold in 2012. During 2012 Cow paid dividends of $200,000 and reported income as follows (in thousands):

Income before extraordinary items $340

Extraordinary loss (net of tax effect) 40

Net income $300

REQUIRED

1. Prepare all journal entries necessary to account for BIP’s investment in Cow for 2012.

2. Determine the correct balance of BIP’s Investment in Cow account at December 31, 2012.

3. Assume that BIP’s net income for 2012 consists of $2,000,000 sales, $1,400,000 expenses, and its investment income from Cow. Prepare an income statement for BIP Corporation for 2012.

blue jet airline company is considering expanding its territory 255289

Blue Jet Airline Company is considering expanding its territory. The company has the opportunity to purchase one of two different used airplanes. The first airplane is expected to cost $9,000,000; it will enable the company to increase its annual cash inflow by $3,000,000 per year. The plane is expected to have a useful life of five years and no salvage value. The second plane costs $18,000,000; it will enable the company to increase annual cash flow by $4,500,000 per year. This plane has an eight-year useful life and a zero salvage value.

Required

a. Determine the payback period for each investment alternative and identify the alternative

Blue Jet should accept if the decision is based on the payback approach.

b. Discuss the shortcomings of using the payback method to evaluate investment opportunities.

bob and barbara are 55 and 50 years old bob 255291

Bob and Barbara are 55 and 50 years old. Bob annually contributes $1,500 to Barbara’s IRA. They plan to make contributions until Bob retires at age 65 and then to leave the funds in as long as possible (i.e., age 70 to ease calculations). Mike and Mary are 55 and 50 years old. Mike annually contributes $2,000 to Mike’s IRA. They plan to make contributions until Mike retires at age 65 and then leave the funds in as long as possible (i.e., age 70 to ease calculations). Both Barbara’s and Mike’s IRAs yield 10 percent annually. The combined life expectancy of both couples is to age 85 of the wife. What will be each couple’s annual withdrawal from the IRA based on life expectancy? (This problem is designed to illustrate an important point in financial planning for retirement. What is the point?)

brandt manufacturing inc produces washing machines dryers a 255308

Brandt Manufacturing, Inc., produces washing machines, dryers, and dishwashers. Because of increasing competition, Brandt is considering investing in an automated manufacturing system. Since competition is most keen for dishwashers, the production process for this line has been selected for initial evaluation. The automated system for the dishwasher line would replace an existing system (purchased one year ago for $6 million). Although the existing system will be fully depreciated in nine years, it is expected to last another 10 years. The automated system would also have a useful life of 10 years.

The existing system is capable of producing 100,000 dishwashers per year. Sales and production data using the existing system are provided by the accounting department:

Sales per year (units) ………………100,000

Selling price ……………………………$300

Costs per unit:

Direct materials …………………………80

Direct labor ……………………………..90

Volume-related overhead ………………20

Direct fixed overhead …………………..40*

*All cash expenses with the exception of depreciation, which is $6 per unit. The existing equipment is being depreciated using straight-line with no salvage value considered.

The automated system will cost $34 million to purchase, plus an estimated $20 million in software and implementation. (Assume that all investment outlays occur at the beginning of the first year.) If the automated equipment is purchased, the old equipment can be sold for $3 million. The automated system will require fewer parts for production and will produce with less waste. Because of this, the direct material cost per unit will be reduced by 25 percent. Automation will also require fewer support activities, and as a consequence, volume-related overhead will be reduced by $4 per unit and direct fixed overhead (other than depreciation) by $17 per unit. Direct labor is reduced by 60 percent. Assume, for simplicity, that the new investment will be depreciated on a pure straight-line basis for tax purposes with no salvage value. Ignore the half-life convention.

The firm’s cost of capital is 12 percent, but management chooses to use 20 percent as the required rate of return for evaluation of investments. The combined federal and state tax rate is 40 percent.

Required:

1. Compute the net present value for the old system and the automated system.

Which system would the company choose?

2. Repeat the net present value analysis of Requirement 1, using 12 percent as the discount rate.

3. Upon seeing the projected sales for the old system, the marketing manager commented: ?oSales of 100,000 units per year cannot be maintained in the current competitive environment for more than one year unless we buy the automated system. The automated system will allow us to compete on the basis of quality and lead time. If we keep the old system, our sales will drop by 10,000 units per year.??

Repeat the net present value analysis, using this new information and a 12 percent discount rate.

4. An industrial engineer for Brandt noticed that salvage value for the automated equipment had not been included in the analysis. He estimated that the equipment could be sold for $4 million at the end of 10 years. He also estimated that the equipment of the old system would have no salvage value at the end of 10 years. Repeat the net present value analysis using this information, the information in Requirement 3, and a 12 percent discount rate.

5. Given the outcomes of the previous four requirements, comment on the importance of providing accurate inputs for assessing investments in automated manufacturing systems.

broadway arts inc produces and sells theater set designs and 255331

Broadway Arts Inc. produces and sells theater set designs and costumes. The company began operations on January 1, 2010. The following transactions relate to securities acquired by Broadway Arts Inc., which has a fiscal year ending on December 31:

2010

Jan. 10. Purchased 5,000 shares of Crystal Inc. as an available-for-sale security at $36 per share, including the brokerage commission.

Mar. 12. Received the regular cash dividend of $0.80 per share.

Sept. 9. Split Crystal Inc. stock 2 for 1 and received the regular cash dividend of $0.40 per share on the Crystal Inc. stock.

Oct. 14. Sold 1,000 shares of Crystal Inc. stock at $15 per share, less a brokerage commission of $100.

Dec. 31. Crystal Inc. is classified as an available-for-sale investment and is adjusted to a fair value of $19 per share. Use the Valuation Allowance for

Available-for-Sale Investments account in making the adjustment.

2011

Jan. 5. Purchased an influential interest in Bulls Eye Inc. for $410,000 by purchasing 50,000 shares directly from the estate of the founder of Bulls Eye Inc.

There are 200,000 shares of Bulls Eye Inc. stock outstanding.

Mar. 8. Received the regular cash divided of $0.45 per share on Crystal Inc. stock.

Sept. 10. Received the regular cash dividend of $0.45 per share plus an extra dividend of $0.10 per share on Crystal Inc. stock.

Dec. 31. Received $35,000 of cash dividends on Bulls Eye Inc. stock. Bulls Eye Inc. reported net income of $126,000 in 2011. Broadway Arts Inc. uses the equity method of accounting for its investment in Bulls Eye Inc.

31. Crystal Inc. is classified as an available-for-sale investment and is adjusted to a fair value of $15 per share. Use the Valuation Allowance for

Available-for-Sale Investments account in making the adjustment.

Instructions

1. Journalize the entries to record these transactions.

2. Prepare the investment-related asset and stockholders’ equity balance sheet disclosures for Broadway Arts Inc. on December 31, 2011, assuming the Retained Earnings balance on December 31, 2011, is $390,000.

burtle company is planning to add a new product to 255345

Burtle Company is planning to add a new product to its line. To manufacture this product, the company needs to buy a new machine at a $488,000 cost with an expected four-year life and a $15,200 salvage value. All sales are for cash, and all costs are out of pocket except for depreciation on the new machine.

Additional information includes the following.

Expected annual sales of new product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $1,870,000

Expected annual costs of new product

Direct materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465,000

Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .680,000

Overhead excluding straight-line depreciation on new machine . . . . . . . . . 335,000

Selling and administrative expenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,000

Income taxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40%

Required

1. Compute straight-line depreciation for each year of this new machine’s life. (Round depreciation amounts to the nearest dollar.)

2. Determine expected net income and net cash flow for each year of this machine’s life. (Round answers to the nearest dollar.)

3. Compute this machine’s payback period, assuming that cash flows occur evenly throughout each year. (Round the payback period to two decimals.)

4. Compute this machine’s accounting rate of return, assuming that income is earned evenly throughout each year. (Round the percentage return to two decimals.)

5. Compute the net present value for this machine using a discount rate of 8% and assuming that cash flows occur at each year-end.

cheese farms is a grower of hybrid seed corn for 255384

Cheese Farms is a grower of hybrid seed corn for Steenbergen Genetics Corporation. It has had two exceptionally good years and has elected to invest its excess funds in bonds. The selected transactions, shown on the next page, relate to bonds acquired as an investment by Cheese Farms, whose fiscal year ends on December 31. 2012

Jan. 1 Purchased at face value $400,000 of Stombaugh Corporation 10-year, 9% bonds dated

January 1, 2012, directly from the issuing corporation.

July 1 Received the semiannual interest on the Stombaugh bonds.

Dec. 31 Accrual of interest at year-end on the Stombaugh bonds.

(Assume that all intervening transactions and adjustments have been properly recorded and the number of bonds owned has not changed from December 31, 2012, to December 31, 2014.) 2015

Jan. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the Stombaugh bonds.

Jan. 1 Sold $200,000 of Stombaugh bonds at 114. The broker deducted $7,000 for commissions and fees on the sale.

July 1 Received the semiannual interest on the Stombaugh bonds.

Dec. 31 Accrual of interest at year-end on the Stombaugh bonds.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the listed transactions for the years 2012 and 2015.

(b) Assume that the fair value of the bonds at December 31, 2012, was $385,000. These bonds are classified as available-for-sale securities. Prepare the adjusting entry to record these bonds at fair value.

(c) Based on your analysis in part (b), show the balance sheet presentation of the bonds and interest receivable at December 31, 2012. Assume the investments are considered long-term. Indicate where any unrealized gain or loss is reported in the financial statements.

city sights ltd operates a tour and sightseeing business its 255393

City Sights, Ltd., operates a tour and sightseeing business. Its trademark is the use of trolley buses. Each vehicle has its own identity and is specially made for the company. Gridlock, the oldest bus, was purchased 15 years ago and has 5 years of its estimated useful life remaining. The company paid $25,000 for Gridlock, and the bus could be sold today for $20,000. Gridlock is expected to generate average annual net cash inflows of $24,000 for the remainder of its estimated useful life.

Management wants to replace Gridlock with a modern-looking vehicle called Phantom. Phantom has a purchase price of $140,000 and an estimated useful life of 20 years. Net cash inflows for phantom are projected to be $40,000 per year.

Assume that (1) all cash flows occur at year end, (2) each vehicle’s residual value equals 10 percent. Use Tables 1 and 2 in the appendix on present value tables.

Required

1. Compute the present value of the future cash flows from Gridlock.

2. Compute the net present value of cash flows if Phantom were purchase.

3. Should city Sights keep Gridlock or purchase Phantom?

coakley company acquired 30 of the outstanding common stock of 255399

Coakley Company acquired 30% of the outstanding common stock of Ginger Inc. on January 1, 2012, by paying $1,800,000 for 60,000 shares. Ginger declared and paid a $0.50 per share cash dividend on June 30 and again on December 31, 2012. Ginger reported net income of $800,000 for the year. Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries for Coakley Company for 2012, assuming Coakley cannot exercise significant influence over Ginger. (Use the cost method.)

(b) Prepare the journal entries for Coakley Company for 2012, assuming Coakley can exercise significant influence over Ginger. (Use the equity method.)

(c) The board of directors of Coakley Company is confused about the differences between the cost and equity methods. Prepare a memorandum for the board that explains each method and shows in tabular form the account balances under each method at December 31, 2012.

comparison of the direct write off and allowance methods of acco 255412

Comparison of the Direct Write-Off and Allowance Methods of Accounting for Bad Debts In its first year of business, Rideaway Bikes has net income of $145,000, exclusive of any adjustment for bad debts expense. The president of the company has asked you to calculate net income under each of two alternatives of accounting for bad debts: the direct write-off method and the allowance method. The president would like to use the method that will result in the higher net income. So far, no adjustments have been made to write off uncollectible accounts or to estimate bad debts. The relevant data are as follows:

Write-offs of uncollectible accounts during the year …………..$10,500

Net credit sales ………………………………………………..$650,000

Estimated percentage of net credit sales that will be uncollectible…..2%

Required

Compute net income under each of the two alternatives. Does Rideaway have a choice as to which method to use? If so, should it base its choice on which method will result in the higher net income? (Ignore income taxes.) Explain.

customer profitability analysis omega printers ltd handles printing jobs 255417

Customer Profitability Analysis Omega Printers Ltd handles printing jobs. Joe Patterson, finds that serving some clients is more demanding than serving others. The demands made by some clients take up a lot of time that the sales staff would prefer to spend on soliciting new clients. In particular, Joe is interested in knowing the profitability of serving Expert Travels – a travel operator and Evon Cosmetics – a retailer. The management accounting department staff of Omega printers have provided the following information.

Document Preview:

Customer Profitability Analysis Omega Printers Ltd handles printing jobs. Joe Patterson, finds that serving some clients is more demanding than serving others. The demands made by some clients take up a lot of time that the sales staff would prefer to spend on soliciting new clients. In particular, Joe is interested in knowing the profitability of serving Expert Travels – a travel operator and Evon Cosmetics – a retailer. The management accounting department staff of Omega printers have provided the following information. ?Expert Travels?Evon Cosmetics??Sales revenue?$554,000?$446,800??Cost of goods sold?$288,000?$223,200??Selling costs?$86,400?$64,800??Administration costs?$68,400?$57,600?? Cost driver data used by Omega Printers and traceable to the two clients are: Customer-driven activities?Cost driver?Cost driver rate??Sales activity?Sales visits?$200 per visit??Order taking?Purchase orders?$ 40 per purchase order??Sorting & packaging?Number of packages?$ 50 per package??Ordinary shipping?Number of shipments?$ 150 per shipment??Special shipping?Number of shipments?$ 750 per shipment?? The following data relates to those same two clients: Customer-driven activities?Expert Travels?Evon Cosmetics??Sales activity?10 sales visits?20 sales visits??Order taking?15 purchase orders?36 purchase orders??Sorting & Packaging?200 packages?1,500 packages??Ordinary shipping?12 shipments?10 shipments??Special shipping?3 shipments?26 shipments?? Required: Prepare a customer profitability analysis for Expert Travels and Evon Cosmetics. Comment on the relative profitability of the two customers by computing the gross margin, net profit margin and any other relevant ratios. Suggest and explain one non-financial performance measure that Omega Printers Ltd could use to evaluate each of the following: Customer acquisition Customer retention Customer satisfaction Standard Costing and Variance Analysis Chemical Manufacturing Ltd makes a cleaning product known…

Attachments:

accounting mba 273139

Britt’s Bike’s began operations in May 2012 and had the following transactions.

a)

Owner invested $40,000 cash and a truck worth $12,000 in exchange for stock.

b)

Paid rent expense of $8,000.

c)

Purchased $100,000 of bicycle inventory on credit.

d)

Sold bicycles for cash of $169,000. The cost of the bikes sold was $60,000.

e)

Sold and invoiced bicycles to a client for $31,800. The cost of the bikes sold was $16,000.

f)

Bought promotional materials and plane tickets for Tour de France, for $30,000 in cash and recorded the entire amount as advertising expense.

g)

Paid $8,000 in cash for supplies to do bike repairs.

h)

Collected $20,000 from accounts receivable.

i)

Paid for bikes purchased on credit in c above.

j)

Paid cash dividends of $1,000.

k)

Recorded revenue for $2,000 received from customer.

Record each transaction a) through k) in the financial statements effects template on the following page.

Balance Sheet

Income Statement

Transaction

Cash

Asset

+

Noncash Assets

=

Liabil

ities

+

Contrib.

Capital

+

Earned

Capital

Revenues

Expenses

=

Net

Income

act homework 273143

please see attached 675 Harding Place T5 Nashville, TN 37211 615 439 5517 MARKETING / MARKETING RESEARCH Over eight years of experience in Marketing and Marketing Research including: * Re

Document Preview:

DIYAR AMIN diyaramin@hotmail.com 675 Harding Place T5 Nashville, TN 37211 615 439 5517 MARKETING / MARKETING RESEARCH Over eight years of experience in Marketing and Marketing Research including: * Research and Analysis * Product Line Development * Advertising & Promotional Strategies * Project Team Leadership * Customer Relationship Management * Trade Show and Event Planning EDUCATION: B.S., Marketing, State University of New York at Oswego, Oswego, NY, May 2005 A.A.S., Marketing, Broome Community College, Binghamton, NY, May 2003 PROFFESIONAL EXPERIENCE OHL Logistics and Supply Chain Senior Marketing Analyst Responsible for managing all aspects of marketing analytics to drive information based segmentation in support of lead generation, new product development/enhancement and insight into the performance of OHL’s products.  Evaluated competitors and reviewed prices, sales, marketing, distribution, products, and financial feasibility to ensure optimal product offerings and elevate market presence. Collaborated with key internal groups to ensure that OHL was collecting and managing the right data to support customer acquisition strategies and brand strategies both within each business unit and for individual products.   Collected customer demographics, needs/preferences, and purchasing habits to capitalize on new markets and identify methods to boost demand. Gathered, segmented, manipulated and managed data to support Product Managers’ product development and revenue generation initiatives. Symmetry Surgical 01/10 – 8/12 Associate Product Manager / Marketing Research Analyst Defined and communicated market and product requirements for additional endoscopic and orthopedic product line offerings: including in field support, on site surgical evaluations, sales force field communication, and research analysis, therefore increasing sales and maximizing…

Attachments:

doggone groomers is in the dog grooming business its operating 273076

Doggone Groomers is in the dog grooming business. Its operating costs are described by the following formulas:

Grooming supplies (variable) …….. y = $0 + $4x

Direct labor (variable) …………… y = $0 + $12x

Overhead (mixed) ……………. y = $8,000 + $1x

Puli, the owner, has determined that direct labor is the cost driver for all three categories of costs.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a flexible budget for activity levels of 550, 600, and 700 direct labor hours.

(b) Explain why the flexible budget is more informative than the static budget.

(c) Calculate the total cost per direct labor hour at each of the activity levels specified in part (a).

(d) The groomers at Doggone normally work a total of 650 direct labor hours during each month. Each grooming job normally takes a groomer 1?1 hours. Puli wants to earn a profit equal to 40% of the costs incurred. Determine what she should charge each pet owner for grooming.

fernetti company uses budgets in controlling costs the may 2010 273101

Fernetti Company uses budgets in controlling costs. The May 2010 budget report for the company’s Packaging Department is as follows.

.

?

The monthly budget amounts in the report were based on an expected production of 50,000 units per month or 600,000 units per year.

The company president was displeased with the department manager’s performance. The department manager, who thought he had done a good job, could not understand the unfavorable results. In May, 55,000 units were produced.

Instructions

(a) State the total budgeted cost formula.

(b) Prepare a budget report for May using flexible budget data. Why does this report provide a better basis for evaluating performance than the report based on static budget data?

(c) In June, 40,000 units were produced. Prepare the budget report using flexible budget data, assuming

(1) Each variable cost was 20% less in June than its actual cost in May, and (2) fixed costs were the same in the month of June as in May.

the chief executive officer ceo of your company recently retur 272721

The chief executive officer (CEO) of your company recently returned from a luncheon meeting where activity based costing was presented and discussed. Though her background is not in accounting, she has worked for the company for 15 years and is thoroughly familiar with its operations. Her impression of the presentation about ABC was that it was just another way of dividing up total overhead cost and that the total would still be the same ?ono matter how you sliced it.??

Required

Write a memorandum to the CEO, no more than one page, explaining how ABC is different from traditional volume based costing methods. Also, identify its advantages and disadvantages vis A? vis traditional methods. Be sure it is written to be understandable to someone who is not an accountant.

the cost systems at many companies selling multiple products hav 272727

The cost systems at many companies selling multiple products have become less than adequate in today’s global competition. Managers often make important product decisions based on distorted cost information because the cost systems have been primarily designed to focus on inventory measurement. Current literature suggests that many manufacturing companies should have at least three cost systems, one each for inventory measurement, operational control, and activity based costing.

a. Identify the purpose and characteristics of each of the following cost systems:

1. Inventory measurement

2. Activity based costing

b. Discuss why a cost system developed for inventory valuation could distort product cost information.

c. Describe the benefits that management can obtain from using activity based costing.

d. List the steps that a company using a traditional cost system would take to implement activity based costing.

the following activities occur at greenwich corporation 272729

The following activities occur at Greenwich Corporation, a company that manufactures a variety of products.

a. Various individuals manage the parts inventories.

b. A clerk in the factory issues purchase orders for a job.

c. The personnel department trains new production workers.

d. The factory’s general manager meets with other department heads such as marketing to coordinate plans.

e. Direct labor workers assemble products.

f. Engineers design new products.

g. The materials storekeeper issues raw materials to be used in jobs.

h. The maintenance department performs periodic preventive maintenance on general use equipment.

Required:

Classify each of the activities above as either a unit level, batch level, product level, or organization sustaining activity.

the following six situations are independent a a manual insert 272734

The following six situations are independent.

a. A manual insertion process takes 30 minutes and 8 pounds of material to produce a product. Automating the insertion process requires 15 minutes of machine time and 7.5 pounds of material. The cost per labor hour is $12, the cost per machine hour is $8, and the cost per pound of materials is $10.

b. With its original design, a gear requires eight hours of setup time. By redesigning the gear so that the number of different groves needed is reduced by 50 percent, the setup time is reduced by 75 percent. The cost per setup hour is $50.

c. A product currently requires six moves. By redesigning the manufacturing layout, the number of moves can be reduced from six to zero. The cost per move is $20.

d. Inspection time for a plant is 16,000 hours per year. The cost of inspection consists of salaries of eight inspectors, totaling $320,000. Inspection also uses supplies costing $5 per inspection hour. The company eliminated most defective components by eliminating low quality suppliers. The number of production errors was reduced dramatically by installing a system of statistical process control. Further quality improvements were realized by redesigning the products, making them easier to manufacture. The net effect was to achieve a close to zero defect state and eliminate the need for any inspection activity.

e. Each unit of a product requires six components. The average number of components is 6.5 due to component failure, requiring rework and extra components.

Developing relations with the right suppliers and increasing the quality of the purchased component can reduce the average number of components to six components per unit. The cost per component is $500.

f. A plant produces 100 different electronic products. Each product requires an average of eight components that are purchased externally. The components are different for each part. By redesigning the products, it is possible to produce the 100 products so that they all have four components in common. This will reduce the demand for purchasing, receiving, and paying bills. Estimated savings from the reduced demand are $900,000 per year.

Required:

Estimate the non value added cost for each situation.

the manager of the avon branch of first bank of 272739

The manager of the Avon branch of First Bank of Eagle has provided the following data concerning the transactions of the branch during the past year:

Activity Total Activity at the Avon Branch

Opening accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 accounts opened

Processing deposits and withdrawals . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,000 deposits and withdrawals

Processing other customer transactions . . . . . . . . . . 1,000 other customer transactions

The lowest costs reported by other branches for these activities are displayed below:

Lowest Cost Among

Activity All First Bank of Eagle Branches

Opening accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $24.35 per account opened

Processing deposits and withdrawals . . . . . . . . . . . . $2.72 per deposit or withdrawal

Processing other customer transactions . . . . . . . . . . $48.90 per other customer transaction

Required:

1. Using the first stage allocation from Exercise 8 10 and the above data, compute the activity rates for the activity based costing system. Round all computations to the nearest whole cent.

2. What do these results suggest to you concerning operations at the Avon branch?

the operations vice president of security home bank has been 272740

The operations vice president of Security Home Bank has been interested in investigating the efficiency of the bank’s operations. She has been particularly concerned about the costs of handling routine transactions at the bank and would like to compare these costs at the bank’s various branches. If the branches with the most efficient operations can be identified, their methods can be Studied and then replicated elsewhere. While the bank maintains meticulous records of wages and there costs, there has been no attempt thus far to show how those costs are related to the various services provided by the bank. The operations vice president has asked your help in conducting an activity based costing study of bank operations. In particular, she would like to know the cost of opening an account, the cost of processing deposits and withdrawals, and the cost of processing other customer transactions. The Westfield branch of Security Home Bank has submitted the following cost data for last year:



Virtually all other costs of the branch—rent, depreciation, utilities, and so on—are organization sustaining costs that cannot be meaningfully assigned to individual customer transactions such as depositing checks. In addition to the cost data above, the employees of the Westfield branch have been interviewed concerning how their time was distributed last year across the activities included in the activity based costing study. The results of those interviews appear below:



Required:

Prepare the first stage allocation for the activity based costing study. (See Exhibit 8—5 for an example of a first stageallocation.)

thermal rising inc makes paragliders for sale through 272753

Thermal Rising, Inc., makes paragliders for sale through specialty sporting goods stores. The company has a standard paraglider model, but also makes custom designed paragliders. Management has designed an activity based costing system with the following activity cost pools and activity rates:



Management would like an analysis of the profitability of a particular customer, Big Sky Outfitters, which has ordered the following products over the last 12 months:



The company’s direct labor rate is $19.50 per hour.

Required:

Using the company’s activity based costing system, compute the customer margin of Big Sky Out fitters.

this exercise is a continuation of exercise 8 9 it should 272756

(This exercise is a continuation of Exercise 8—9; it should be assigned only if Exercise 8—9 is also assigned.) The manager of the Westfield branch of Security Home Bank has provided the following data concerning the transactions of the branch during the past year:



The lowest costs reported by other branches for these activities are displayed below:



Required:

1. Using the first stage allocation from Exercise 8—9 and the above data, compute the activity rates for the activity based costing system. (Use Exhibit 8—6 as a guide.) Round all computations to the nearest whole cent.

2. What do these results suggest to you concerning operations at the Westfieldbranch?

various activities at companhia de textils s a a manufacturin 272776

Various activities at Companhia de Textils, S.A., a manufacturing company located in Brazil, are listed below. The company makes a variety of products in its plant outside Sao Paulo.

a. Preventive maintenance is performed on general purpose production equipment.

b. Products are assembled by hand.

c. Reminder notices are sent to customers who are late in making payments.

d. Purchase orders are issued for materials to be used in production.

e. Modifications are made to product designs.

f. New employees are hired by the personnel office.

g. Machine settings are changed between batches of different products.

h. Parts inventories are maintained in the storeroom. (Each product requires its own unique parts.)

i. Insurance costs are incurred on the company’s facilities.

Required:

1. Classify each of the activities as either unit level, batch level, product level, customer level, or organization sustaining.

2. Where possible, name one or more activity measures that could be used to assign costs generated by the activity to products or customers.

wyeth corp has decided to implement an activity based costing s 272893

Wyeth Corp. has decided to implement an activity based costing system for its in house legal department. The legal department’s primary expense is professional salaries, which are estimated for associated activities as follows:

Reviewing supplier or customer contracts (Contracts) …………..$270,000

Reviewing regulatory compliance issues (Regulation) ………….. 375,000

Court actions (Court) ……………………………………………. 862,500

Management has determined that the appropriate cost allocation base for Contracts is the number of pages in the contract reviewed, for Regulation is the number of reviews, and for Court is number of hours of court time. For 2010, the legal department reviewed 450,000 pages of contracts, responded to 750 regulatory review requests, and logged 3,750 hours in court.

a. Determine the allocation rate for each activity in the legal department.

b. What amount would be charged to a producing department that had 21,000 pages of contracts reviewed, made 27 regulatory review requests, and consumed 315 professional hours in court services during the year?

c. How can the developed rates be used for evaluating output relative to cost incurred in the legal department? What alternative does the firm have to maintaining an internal legal department and how might this choice affect costs?

as sales manager magic johnson was given the following static 272937

As sales manager, Magic Johnson was given the following static budget report for selling expenses in the Clothing Department of Lakers Company for the month of October.



As a result of this budget report, Magic was called into the president’s office and congratulated on his fine sales performance. He was reprimanded, however, for allowing his costs to get out of control. Magic knew something was wrong with the performance report that he had been given.

However, he was not sure what to do, and comes to you for advice.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a budget report based on flexible budget data to help Magic.

(b) Should Magic have been reprimanded? Explain.

bedner flott inc manufactures ergonomic devices for computer 272955

Bedner & Flott Inc. manufactures ergonomic devices for computer users. Some of their more popular products include glare screens (for computer monitors), keyboard stands with wrist rests, and carousels that allow easy access to magnetic disks. Over the past 5 years, they experienced rapid growth, with sales of all products increasing 20% to 50% each year.

Last year, some of the primary manufacturers of computers began introducing new products with some of the ergonomic designs, such as glare screens and wrist rests, already built in. As a result, sales of Bedner & Flott’s accessory devices have declined somewhat. The company believes that the disk carousels will probably continue to show growth, but that the other products will probably continue to decline. When the next year’s budget was prepared, increases were built in to research and development so that replacement products could be developed or the company could expand into some other product line. Some product lines being considered are general purpose ergonomic devices including back supports, foot rests, and sloped writing pads.

The most recent results have shown that sales decreased more than was expected for the glare screens. As a result, the company may have a shortage of funds. Top management has therefore asked that all expenses be reduced 10% to compensate for these reduced sales. Summary budget information is as follows.

Direct materials ……………………$240,000

Direct labor ………………………….110,000

Insurance ………………………………50,000

Depreciation ………………………….90,000

Machine repairs ………………………30,000

Sales salaries ………………………….50,000

Office salaries ………………………..80,000

Factory salaries (indirect labor) ………50,000

Total ……………………………….$700,000

Instructions

Using the information above, answer the following questions.

(a) What are the implications of reducing each of the costs? For example, if the company reduces direct materials costs, it may have to do so by purchasing lower quality materials.

This may affect sales in the long run.

(b) Based on your analysis in (a), what do you think is the best way to obtain the $70,000 in cost savings requested? Be specific. Are there any costs that cannot or should not be reduced? Why?

chandler ltd estimates sales for the second quarter of 2012 272988

Chandler Ltd. estimates sales for the second quarter of 2012 will be as follows.

Month Units

April …………..2,550

May ……………2,475

June ……………2,390

The target ending inventory of finished products is as follows.

March 31 …………. 2,000

April 30 ……………2,230

May 31 ……………. 2,190

June 30 ……………. 2,310

Two units of material are required for each unit of finished product. Production for July is estimated at 2,700 units to start building inventory for the fall sales period. Chandler’s policy is to have an inventory of raw materials at the end of each month equal to 60% of the following month’s production requirements. Raw materials are expected to cost $4 per unit throughout the period.

Instructions

Calculate the May raw materials purchases in dollars.

(CGA adapted)

cobb company estimates that 240 000 direct labor hours will be 273000

Cobb Company estimates that 240,000 direct labor hours will be worked during 2012 in the Assembly Department. On this basis, the following budgeted manufacturing overhead data are computed.



It is estimated that direct labor hours worked each month will range from 18,000 to 24,000 hours.

During January, 20,000 direct labor hours were worked and the following overhead costs were incurred.



Instructions

(a) Prepare a monthly manufacturing overhead flexible budget for each increment of 2,000 direct labor hours over the relevant range for the year ending December 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare a manufacturing overhead budget report for January.

(c) Comment on management’s efficiency in controlling manufacturing overhead costs in January.

collins manufacturing inc operates the home appliance division 273003

Collins Manufacturing Inc. operates the Home Appliance Division as a profit center. Operating data for this division for the year ended December 31, 2012, are shown below.



In addition, Collins Manufacturing incurs $150,000 of indirect fixed costs that were budgeted at $155,000. Twenty percent (20%) of these costs are allocated to the Home Appliance Division. None of these costs are controllable by the division manager.

Instructions

(a) Prepare a responsibility report for the Home Appliance Division (a profit center) for the year.

(b) Comment on the manager’s performance in controlling revenues and costs.

(c) Identify any costs excluded from the responsibility report and explain why they were excluded.

computer associates international inc the world s leading bus 273006

Computer Associates International, Inc., the world’s leading business software company, delivers the end to end infrastructure to enable e business through innovative technology, services, and education. CA has 19,000 employees worldwide and recently had revenue of over $6 billion.

Presented below is information from the company’s annual report.

COMPUTER ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL

Management Discussion

The Company has experienced a pattern of business whereby revenue for its third and fourth fiscal quarters reflects an increase over first and second quarter revenue. The Company attributes this increase to clients’ increased spending at the end of their calendar year budgetary periods and the culmination of its annual sales plan. Since the Company’s costs do not increase proportionately with the third and fourth quarters’ increase in revenue, the higher revenue in these quarters results in greater profit margins and income. Fourth quarter profitability is traditionally affected by significant new hirings, training, and education expenditures for the succeeding year.

Instructions

(a) Why don’t the company’s costs increase proportionately as the revenues increase in the third and fourth quarters?

(b) What type of budgeting seems appropriate for the Computer Associates situation?

contemporary financial management 273018

In an effort to speed up the collection of receivables, Hill Publishing Company is considering increasing the size of its cash discount by changing its credit terms from 1/10, net 30 to 2/10, net 30. Currently, the company’s collection period averages 43 days. Under the new credit terms, it is expected to decline to 28 days. Also, the percentage of customers who will take advantage of the cash discount is expected to increase from the current 50 percent to 70 percent with the new credit terms. Bad debt losses currently average 4 percent of sales and are not expected to change significantly if Hill changes its credit policy. Annual credit sales are $3.5 million, the variable cost ratio is 60 percent, and the required pretax rate of return (i.e., the opportunity cost) on receivables investment is 14 percent. The company does not expect its inventory level to change as a result of its proposed change in credit terms. Assuming that Hill does decide to increase the size of its cash discount, determine the following:
a. The earnings on the funds released by the change in credit terms
b. The cost of the additional cash discounts taken
c. The net effect on Hill’s pretax profits

diane buswell is preparing the 2013 budget for one of 273060

Diane Buswell is preparing the 2013 budget for one of Current Designs’ rotomolded kayaks. Extensive meetings with members of the sales department and executive team have resulted in the following unit sales projections for 2013.

Quarter 1 1,000 kayaks

Quarter 2 1,500 kayaks

Quarter 3 750 kayaks

Quarter 4 750 kayaks

Current Designs’ policy is to have finished goods ending inventory in a quarter equal to 20% of the next quarter’s anticipated sales. Preliminary sales projections for 2014 are 1,100 units for the first quarter and 1,500 units for the second quarter. Ending inventory of finished goods at December 31, 2012, will be 200 rotomolded kayaks.

Production of each kayak requires 54 pounds of polyethylene powder and a finishing kit (rope, seat, hardware, etc). Company policy is that the ending inventory of polyethylene powder should be 25% of the amount needed for production in the next quarter. Assume that the ending inventory of polyethylene powder on December 31, 2012, is 19,400 pounds. The finishing kits can be assembled as they are needed. As a result, Current Designs does not maintain a significant inventory of the finishing kits.

The polyethylene powder used in these kayaks costs $1.50 per pound, and the finishing kits cost $170 each. Production of a single kayak requires 2 hours of time by more experienced, type I employees and 3 hours of finishing time by type II employees. The type I employees are paid $15 per hour, and the type II employees are paid $12 per hour. Selling and administrative expenses for this line are expected to be $45 per unit sold plus $7,500 per quarter. Manufacturing overhead is assigned at 150% of labor costs.

Instructions

Prepare the production budget, direct materials budget, direct labor budget, manufacturing overhead budget, and selling and administrative budget for this product line by quarter and in total for 2013.

perioto inc currently charges manufacturing overhead costs to p 272431

Perioto Inc. currently charges manufacturing overhead costs to products using machine hours. However, company management believes that the use of ABC would provide more realistic cost estimates and, in turn, give the company an edge in pricing over its competitors. Perioto’s accountant and production manager have provided the following budgeted information for 2011, given a budgeted capacity of 1,000,000 machine hours:

Type of Manufacturing Cost Cost Amount

Electric power …………………………………… $500,000

Work cells ………………………………………..3,000,000

Material handling …………………………………1,000,000

Quality control inspections ……………………….1,000,000

Machine setups ……………………………………. 350,000

Total budgeted overhead costs ……………….. $5,850,000

Type of Manufacturing Cost Activity Drivers

Electric power …………………………………200,000 kilowatt hours

Work cells ……………………………………..300,000 square feet

Material handling ………………………………200,000 material moves

Quality control inspections ……………………. 50,000 inspections

Machine setups ……………………………….. 25,000 setups

A national construction company approached Pete Lang, the VP of marketing, about a bid for 2,500 doors. Lang asked the cost accountant to prepare a cost estimate for producing the 2,500 doors; he received the following data:

Direct material cost ……………………… $50,000

Direct labor cost …………………………$150,000

Machine hours ……………………………… 5,000

Direct labor hours ………………………….. 2,500

Electric power—kilowatt hours ……………. 500

Work cells—square feet ……………………. 1,000

Number of material handling moves ……….. . 20

Number of quality control inspections ……….. 15

Number of setups …………………………… 6

Source: Adapted from Nabil Hassa, Herbert E. Brown, and Paul M. Saunders, ?oManagement Accounting Case Study: Beaver Window Inc.,?? Management Accounting Campus Report (Fall 1990).

Copyright Institute of Management Accountants, Montvale, NJ.

a. What is the predetermined overhead rate if the traditional measure of machine hours is used?

b. What is the manufacturing cost per door as presently accounted for?

c. What is the manufacturing cost per door under the proposed ABC method?

d. If the two cost systems will result in different cost estimates, which cost accounting system is preferable as a pricing base and why?

e. If activity based management were implemented prior to an ABC system, which of the manufacturing overhead costs might be reduced or eliminated? Why?

pixel studio inc is a small company that creates computer 272432

Pixel Studio, Inc., is a small company that creates computer generated animations for films and television. Much of the company’s work consists of short commercials for television, but the company also does realistic computer animations for special effects in movies.

The young founders of the company have become increasingly concerned with the economics of the business—particularly since many competitors have sprung up recently in the local area. To help understand the company’s cost structure, an activity based costing system has been designed. Three major activities are carried out in the company: animation concept, animation production, and contract administration. The animation concept activity is carried out at the contract proposal stage when the company bids on projects. This is an intensive activity that involves individuals from all parts of the company in creating story boards and prototype stills to be shown to the prospective client. Once a project is accepted by the client, the animation goes into production and contract administration begins. Almost all of the work involved in animation production is done by the technical staff, whereas the administrative staff is largely responsible for contract administration. The activity cost pools and their activity measures are listed below:



These activity rates include all of the company’s costs, except for the costs of idle capacity and organization sustaining costs. There are no direct labor or direct materials costs.

Preliminary analysis using these activity rates has indicated that the local commercial segment of the market may be unprofitable. This segment is highly competitive. Producers of local commercials may ask three or four companies like Pixel Studio to bid, which results in an unusually low ratio of accepted contracts to bids. Furthermore, the animation sequences tend to be much shorter for local commercials than for other work. Since animation work is hilled at fairly standard rates according to the running time of the completed animation, this means that the revenues from these short projects tend to be below average. Data concerning activity in the local commercial market appear below:



The total sales from the 10 contracts for local commercials was $180,000.

Required:

1. Determine the cost of serving the local commercial market.

2. Prepare a report showing the margin earned serving the local commercial market. (Remember, this company has no direct materials or direct labor costs.)

3. What would you recommend to management concerning the local commercialmarket?

refer to the data for advanced products corporation in exercise 272457

Refer to the data for Advanced Products Corporation in Exercise 8—14.

Required:

1. Using Exhibit 8A—1 as a guide, prepare a report showing the first stage allocations of overhead costs to the activity cost pools.

2. Using Exhibit 8A—2 as a guide, compute the activity rates for the activity cost pools.

3. Using Exhibit 8A—3 as a guide, prepare a report showing the overhead costs for the order from Shenzhen Enterprises including customer support costs.

4. Using Exhibit 8—11 as a guide, prepare a report showing the customer margin for Shenzhen Enterprises.

5. Using Exhibit 8A—5 as a guide, prepare an action analysis report showing the customer margin for Shenzhen Enterprises. Direct materials should be coded as a Green cost, direct labor and wages and salaries as Yellow costs, and other overhead costs as a Red cost.

6. What action, if any, do you recommend as a result of the above analyses?

refer to the data for gore range carpet cleaning in 272458

Refer to the data for Gore Range Carpet Cleaning in Problem 8 21.

Required:

1. Using Exhibit 8A–1 as a guide, prepare the first stage allocation of costs to the activity cost pools.

2. Using Exhibit 8A–2 as a guide, compute the activity rates for the activity cost pools.

3. The company recently completed a 6 hundred square foot carpet cleaning job at the Lazy Bee

Ranch—a 52 mile round trip journey from the company’s offices in Eagle Vail. Compute the cost of this job using the activity based costing system.

4. The revenue from the Lazy Bee Ranch was $137.70 (6 hundred square feet at $22.95 per hundred square feet). Using Exhibit 8A–5 as a guide, prepare an action analysis report of the Lazy Bee Ranch job. The president of Gore Range Carpet Cleaning considers all of the company’s costs to be Green costs except for office expenses, which are coded Yellow, and his own compensation, which is coded Red. The people who do the actual carpet cleaning are all trained part time workers who are paid only for work actually done.

5. What do you conclude concerning the profitability of the Lazy Bee Ranch job? Explain.

6. What advice would you give the president concerning pricing jobs in the future?

refer to the interview in exercise 4 7 especially to questions 272470

Refer to the interview in Exercise 4 7 (especially to Questions 4 and 7). The general ledger reveals the following annual costs:

Supervisor’s Salary ……………………$ 64,600

Clerical Salaries ………………………. 210,000

Computers, Desks, and Printers ………. 32,000

Computer Supplies ……………………. 7,200

Telephone Expenses …………………… 4,000

ATM ………………………………….. 1,250,000

All nonlabor resources, other than the ATM, are spread evenly among the eight credit department employees (in terms of assignment and usage). Credit department employees have no contact with ATMs. Printers and desks are used by the various activities in the same ratio as computers.

Required:

1. Determine the cost of all primary and secondary activities.

2. Assign the cost of secondary activities to the primary activities.

sammy inc manufactures motor scooters consider each of the f 272479

Sammy, Inc., manufactures motor scooters. Consider each of the following examples of quality costs.

_____1. Preventive maintenance on machinery.

_____2. Direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs incurred to rework a defective scooter that is detected in house through inspection.

_____3. Lost profits from lost sales if company’s reputation was hurt because customers previously purchased a poor quality scooter.

_____4. Costs of inspecting raw materials, such as chassis and wheels.

_____5. Working with suppliers to achieve on time delivery of defect free raw materials.

_____6. Cost of warranty repairs on a scooter that malfunctions at customer’s location.

_____7. Costs of testing durability of vinyl.

_____8. Cost to re inspect reworked scooters.

Requirement

1. Indicate which of the following quality cost categories each example represents.

?? P Prevention costs

?? A Appraisal costs

?? IF Internal failure costs

?? EF External failure costs

securicorp operates a fleet of armored cars that make scheduled 272490

SecuriCorp operates a fleet of armored cars that make scheduled pickups and deliveries in the Los Angeles area. The company is implementing an activity based costing system that has four activity cost pools: Travel, Pickup and Delivery, Customer Service, and Other. The activity measures are miles for the Travel cost pool, number of pickups and deliveries for the Pickup and Delivery cost pool, and number of customers for the Customer Service cost pool. The Other cost pool has a, activity measure because it is an organization sustaining activity. The following costs will be assigned using the activity based costing system:



The distribution of resource consumption across the activity cost pools is as follows:



Required:

Complete the first stage allocations of costs to activity cost pools as illustrated in Exhibit 8—5.

prepare the journal entry to record brookhaven s payroll tax expense 272502

Week Four Exercise Assignment

Liability

1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing:

  • Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned
  • Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned
  • Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500
  • State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings
  • Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings
  • State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned
  • Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned

The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month end.

a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven’s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following:

  • Social Security taxes
  • Medicare taxes
  • Federal income taxes withheld
  • State income taxes
  • Insurance withholdings

b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven’s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following:

  • Matching Social Security taxes
  • Matching Medicare taxes
  • State unemployment taxes
  • Federal unemployment taxes

2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti’s during 20XX disclosed the following:

12/1 Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3 month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity.
2/10 Established a warranty liability for the XY 80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit.
12/22 Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30.
12/26 Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a note payable due in 60 days.
12/31 Repaired six XY 80s during the month at a total cost of $162.
12/31 Accrued 3 days of salaries at a total cost of $1,400.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.

c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank’s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

3. Notes payable. Red Bank Enterprises was involved in the following transactions during the fiscal year ending October 31:

8/2: Borrowed $75,000 from the Bank of Kingsville by signing a 120 day note.
8/20: Issued a $40,000 note to Harris Motors for the purchase of a $40,000 delivery truck. The note is due in 180 days and carries a 12% interest rate.
9/10: Purchased merchandise from Pans Enterprises in the amount of $15,000. Issued a 30 day, 12% note in settlement of the balance owed.
9/11: Issued a $60,000 note to Datatex Equipment in settlement of an overdue account payable of the same amount. The note is due in 30 days and carries a 14% interest rate.
10/10: The note to Pans Enterprises was paid in full.

10/31: The note to Datatex Equipment was paid in full.

11/30: Paid note to Bank of Kingville

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions.

b. Prepare adjusting entries on October 31 to record accrued interest.

c. Prepare the Current Liability section of Red Bank’s balance sheet as of October 31. Assume that the Accounts Payable account totals $203,600 on this date.

Attachments:

highlight the correct term to indicate the type of accounting used to record each tr 272558

a) Highlight the correct term to indicate the type of accounting used to record each transaction ie whether a Cash or Accrual accounting system is applicable.

Document Preview:

Cert 4 Bui Reports Cert 4 B Bui Payments Cert 4 B Bui Receipts EX 9a & 9b Day Sheet EX 8 Booker Pmts EX 8 Booker Rec EX 7 Booker Pmts EX 7 Booker Rec EX 6 Boats Pmts EX 6 Boats Recs EX 5 Flower Pmts EX 5 Flower Rec EX 3 Abel Pmt EX 3&4 Abel Rec Exercise 3 Abel Co RECEIPTS Exercise 3 Abel Co PAYMENTS Business Bank Account Opening Balance Add Deposits Less Payments Bank Reconciliation Statement as at 31/03/05 Closing Balance as per Bank Statement Add outstanding deposits Less Unpresented Cheques 110117 Exercise 5 The Flower Stand PAYMENTS Closing Debit Balance as per Bank Statement Less Unpresented Deposits Add Unpresented Deposits Less Unpresented Cheques Exercise 5 The Flower Stand RECEIPTS Balance as per Business Records Overdraft Balance as per Business Records Exercise 6 Boats for Hire PAYMENTS Exercise 6 Boats for Hire RECEIPTS Exercise 7 Booker & Co RECEIPTS Exercise 7 Booker & Co PAYMENTS Extract of Cashbook Exercise 8 Booker & Co RECEIPTS Exercise 8 Booker & Co PAYMENTS Less Unpresented Cheques 12006 Exercise 9(a) ABC Enterprises RECEIPTS Exercise 9(b) DEF Enterprises RECEIPTS Date Particulars Ref Amount Banked GST Collected Owner Contribution Sales Sundry Income Amount Paid GST Paid Drawings Purchases Advertising Wages Bank Fees Rent Received Deductions from Day’s Income Till Cash Exp Total Fuel R&M Cleaning Balance Sheet Other Income Other Receipts Details Add Unpresented Rent on Equip Rates Other Payments Balance Sheet for B Bui Enterprises Profit and loss Statement for B Bui Enterprises Bank Reconciliation Statement B Bui Enterprises at October 31 20XX For the period 1/10/20XX to 31/10/20XX as at October 20XX $ Exercise 4 Add Total Deposits Less Total Payments Exercise 15 B Bui RECEIPTS Certificate 4 ONLY Exercise 10 B Bui PAYMENTS Certificate 4 ONLY Certificate 4 ONLY Exercise 15 Exercise 15 Banking Less Float Made up of Total Cash Sales for the Day Less Till…

panera bread report 272611

accounting WEEK 2, A3 Instructions: Select a publicly traded company from the SEC filings (Use “Panera Bread”) (http://sec.

Document Preview:

WEEK 2, A3 Instructions: Select a publicly traded company from the SEC filings (Use “Panera Bread”) (http://sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers) and analyze the financial statements (for the most recent complete year) based on the factors outlined below. The introduction to your analysis in APA format that contains the following information in the introduction: Company overview Name of CEO/CFO Location of the corporate/home office Ending date of latest fiscal year Description of the main products/services that the company provides Main geographic area of activity Name of company’s independent auditors. Explain what the auditors said about the company’s financial statements. The most recent stock price and its dividend per share. Include the date for this information.

Attachments:

solvency and profitability 272623

Nineteen Measures of Solvency and Profitability

The comparative financial statements of Blige Inc. are as follows. The market price of Blige Inc. common stock was $60 on December 31, 2012.

Instructions:

Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal place, except for dollar amounts, which should be rounded to the nearest cent. Assume 365 days a year.

1.Working capital: $
2.Current ratio:
3.Quick ratio:
4.Accounts receivable turnover:
5.Number of days’ sales in receivables:
6.Inventory turnover:
7.Number of days’ sales in inventory:
8.Ratio of fixed assets to long term liabilities:
9.Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity:
10.Number of times interest charges earned:
11.Number of times preferred dividends earned:
12.Ratio of net sales to assets:
13.Rate earned on total assets: %
14.Rate earned on stockholders’ equity: %
15.Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity: %
16.Earnings per share on common stock: $
17.Price earnings ratio:
18.Dividends per share of common stock: $
19.Dividend yield: %

determine the inventory cost and the cost of merchandise sold by three methods 272627

Determine the inventory cost and the cost of merchandise sold by three methods.

Document Preview:

Periodic Inventory by Three Methods; Cost of Merchandise Sold The units of an item available for sale during the year were as follows: ?? There are 24 units of the item in the physical inventory at December 31. The periodic inventory system is used. ? ?? HYPERLINK “http://west.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do” o “Hide” ?Hide?????Determine the inventory cost and the cost of merchandise sold by three methods. ?? ????????Schedule of Cost of Merchandise Inventory and Cost of Merchandise Sold ????Inventory Method ????Merchandise Inventory ????Merchandise Sold ????First in, first out (FIFO) ????$ Correct 8 ????$ Correct 9 ????Last in, first out (LIFO) ???? Correct 11 ???? Correct 12 ????Average cost ???? Correct 14 ???? Correct 15 ??????

Attachments:

fifi the manager of the shining shoes inc has decided to analyze the accounts payabl 272653

FiFi, the manager of the Shining Shoes, Inc., has decided to analyze the Accounts Payable

procedures at the Shining Shoes. The purpose is to document how the present system works so

the transition to a computerized system will be easier. She also hopes to improve any weaknesses

she discovers in the system. In the following narrative, Followings are procedures relating to

accounts payable:

Document Preview:

Accounting 341 Documentation Assignment FiFi, the manager of the Shining Shoes, Inc., has decided to analyze the Accounts Payable procedures at the Shining Shoes. The purpose is to document how the present system works so the transition to a computerized system will be easier. She also hopes to improve any weaknesses she discovers in the system. In the following narrative, Followings are procedures relating to accounts payable:   Before  the  Shining  Shoes  pays  a  vendor  invoice,  the  invoice  must  be  matched  against   the  purchase  order  used  to  request  the  goods  and  the  receiving  report  that  the  receiving   department  prepares.    Because  all  three  of  these  documents  enter  the  accounts  payable   department  at  different  times,  a  separate  numerical  file  is  kept  for  each  type  ofdocument.  The     purchase  orders  that  are  forwarded  from  purchasing  department,  and  the  accounts  payable   clerk,  Ella,  files  the  document  by  purchase  order  number  in  the  accounts  payable  folder.    When   the  receiving  department  sends  receiving  report  to  the  accounts  payable  department,  Ella   stores  them,  by  date,  in  the  receiving  report  file.    When  vendor  invoices  are  received,  Ella  files   the  invoices  by  date,  in  the  vendor  invoice  file.   Shining  Shoes’  policy  is  to  make  sure  all  accounts  are  paid  within  15  days  to  take   advantage  of  the  early ­ payment  discounts  that  suppliers  offer.    When  it  comes  time  to  pay  a   particular  invoice,  Ella  retrieves  and  matches  the  vendor  invoice,  the  purchase …

Attachments:

production and cash outlay computations 272669

Chapter 6 and 7 Problems

Please complete the following 8 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

Chapter 6 Exercise 2

2. Schedule of cash collections

Sugarland Company sells a single product and anticipates opening a new facility in Charlotte on May 1 of the current year. Expected sales during the first three months of activity are: May, $60,000; June, $80,000; and July, $85,000. Thirty percent of all sales are for cash; the remaining 70% are on account. Credit sales have the following collection pattern:

Collected in the month of sale 60%

Collected in the month following sale 35

Uncollectible 5

  1. Prepare a schedule of cash collections for May through July.
  2. Compute the expected balance in Accounts Receivable as of July 31.

Chapter 6 Exercise 4
4. Production and cash outlay computations


RPR, Inc., anticipates that 120,000 units of product K will be sold during May. Each unit of product K requires four units of raw material A. Actual inventories as of May 1 and budgeted inventories as of May 31 follow.

1 May 31 May
Product K (Units) 55,000 60,000
Rate Materials A (Units) 40,000 37,000

Each unit of raw material A costs $8; RPR pays for all purchases in the month of acquisition. Invoices that account for 80% of the cost of materials acquired will be paid within 10 days of receipt, entitling the company to a 2% cash discount.

  1. Determine the number of units of product K to be manufactured in May.
  2. Compute the May cash outlay for purchases of raw material A.

July August September
Beginning cash balance $10,000 $ ? $ ?
Add: Cash receipts 50,000 63,000 71,000
Deduct: Cash payments 64,000 58,000 64,000
Cash excess (deficiency) before financing ($4,000) $ ? $ ?
Financing
Borrowing to maintain minimum balance ? ? ?
Principal repayment ? ? ?
Interest payment ? ? ?
Ending cash balance $ ? $ ? $ ?

Chapter 6 Exercise 5
5. Abbreviated cash budget; financing emphasis


An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.

Big Chuck wishes to maintain a $10,000 minimum cash balance at all times. Additional financing is available (and retired) in $1,000 multiples at a 12% interest rate. Assume that borrowings take place at the beginning of the month; retirements, in contrast, occur at the end of the month. Interest is paid at the time of repaying principal and computed on the portion of principal repaid.

  1. Find the unknowns in Big Chuck’s abbreviated cash budget.
  2. Determine the outstanding loan balance as of September 30, after any repayments have been made.

Chapter 6 Problem 3
3. Comprehensive budgeting


The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 19X1, follows.

WATSON COMPANY
Balance Sheet
December 31, 19X1
Assets
Cash $4,595
Accounts receivable 10,000
Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) 4,025
Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) 1,380
Plant & equipment $50,000
Less: Accumulated depreciation 10,000 40,000
Total assets $60,000
Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity
Accounts payable to suppliers $14,000
Common stock $25,000
Retained earnings 21,000 46,000
Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity $60,000

The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records:

  1. All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 19X2 are: January, 1,500 units, February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units.
  2. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales.
  3. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs.
  4. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month.
  5. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7.

Instructions:

  1. Rounding computations to the nearest dollar, prepare the following for January through March:

1) Sales budget

2) Schedule of cash collections

3) Production budget

4) Direct material purchases budget

5) Schedule of cash disbursements for material purchases

6) Direct labor budget

  1. Determine the balances in the following accounts as of March 31:

1) Accounts Receivable

2) Direct Materials

3) Accounts Payable

Chapter 7 Exercise 3

3. Variances for direct materials and direct labor

Banner Company manufactures flags of various countries. Each flag has a standard of eight square feet of fabric and three hours of direct labor time. Information about recent production activity follows.

Actual cost of fabric: $4.50 per square foot

Fabric consumed: 32,080 square feet

Standard price per square foot of fabric: $4.25

Standard direct labor rate: $10.00 per hour

Actual direct labor rate: $10.20 per hour

Actual labor hours worked: 11,940

Actual production completed: 4,000 flags

  1. Compute the materials price variance and the materials quantity variance.
  2. Compute the labor rate variance and the labor efficiency variance.

Chapter 7 Exercise 5

5.
Overhead variances

Nova Manufacturing applies factory overhead to products on the basis of direct labor hours. At the beginning of the current year, the company’s accountant made the following estimates for the forthcoming period:

  • Estimated variable overhead: $500,000
  • Estimated fixed overhead: $400,000
  • Estimated direct labor hours: 40,000

It is now 12 months later. Actual total overhead incurred in the manufacture of 7,900 units amounted to $895,100. Actual labor hours totaled 39,800. Assuming a direct labor standard of five hours per finished unit, calculate the following:

  1. Variable overhead efficiency variance
  2. Fixed overhead volume variance
  3. Overhead spending variance

Chapter 7 Problem 1

1.
P26 A1 Basic flexible budgeting (L.O. 2)

Centron, Inc., has the following budgeted production costs:

Direct materials $0.40 per unit
Direct labor 1.80 per unit
Variable factory overhead 2.20 per unit
Fixed factory overhead
Supervision $24,000
Maintenance 18,000
Other 12,000

The company normally manufactures between 20,000 and 25,000 units each quarter. Should output exceed 25,000 units, maintenance and other fixed costs are expected to increase by $6,000 and $4,500, respectively.

During the recent quarter ended March 31, Centron produced 25,500 units and incurred the following costs:

Direct Materials $10,710
Direct Labor 47,175
Variable factory overhead 51,940
Fixed factory overhead
Supervision 24,500
Maintenance 23,700
Other 16,800
Total production costs $174,825

Instructions:

  1. Prepare a flexible budget for 20,000, 22,500, and 25,000 units of activity.
  2. Was Centron’s experience in the quarter cited better or worse than anticipated? Prepare an appropriate performance report and explain your answer.
  3. Explain the benefit of using flexible budgets (as opposed to static budgets) in the measurement of performance.

Chapter 7 Problem 5

5.
P26 B3 Straightforward variance analysis (L.O. 5)

Arrow Enterprises uses a standard costing system. The standard cost sheet for product no. 549 follows.

Direct materials: 4 units @ $6.50 $26.00
Direct labor: 8 hours @ $8.50 68
Variable factory overhead: 8 hours @ $7.00 56
Fixed factory overhead: 8 hours @ 2.5 20
Total standard cost per unit $170.00

The following information pertains to activity for December:

  1. Direct materials acquired during the month amounted to 26,350 units at $6.40 per unit. All materials were consumed in operations.
  2. Arrow incurred an average wage rate of $8.75 for 51,400 hours of activity.
  3. Total overhead incurred amounted to $508,400. Budgeted fixed overhead totals $1.8 million and is spread evenly throughout the year.
  4. Actual production amounted to 6,500 completed units.

Instructions:

  1. Compute Arrow’s direct material variances.
  2. Compute Arrow’s direct labor variances.
  3. Compute Arrow’s variances for factory overhead.

Attachments:

a a single cash inflow of 12 000 in five years discounted at a 12 rate of return 272672

Chapter Eight Problems

Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

Chapter 8 Exercise 1:

1. Basic present value calculations

Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar:

a. A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return.

b. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return.

c. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return.

d. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return.

Chapter 8 Exercise 4:

4. Cash flow calculations and net present value

On January 2, 19X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 19X1 and 19X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 19X3. On December 31, 19X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net present value method and desires a 16% return on investments.

a. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 19X3 dividend.

b. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar.

c. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain.

Chapter 8 exercise 5:

5. Straightforward net present value and internal rate of return

The City of Bedford is studying a 600 acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows:

Purchase cost: $450 per acre

Site preparation: $175,000

The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Bedford, which shares a facility in Bath Township with other municipalities, estimates that the new location will save $40,000 in annual operating costs.

a. Should the landfill be acquired if Bedford desires an 8% return on its investment? Use the net present value method to determine your answer.

b. Compute the internal rate of return on this project.

Chapter 8 Problem 1:

1. Straightforward net present value and payback computations

STL Entertainment is considering the acquisition of a sight seeing boat for summer tours along the Mississippi River. The following information is available:

Cost of boat $500,000

Service life 10 summer seasons

Disposal value at the end of 10 seasons $100,000

Capacity per trip 300 passengers

Fixed operating costs per season (including straight line depreciation) $160,000

Variable operating costs per trip $1,000

Ticket price $5 per passenger

All operating costs, except depreciation, require cash outlays. On the basis of similar operations in other parts of the country, management anticipates that each trip will be sold out and that 120,000 passengers will be carried each season. Ignore income taxes.

Instructions:

By using the net present value method, determine whether STL Entertainment should acquire the boat. Assume a 14% desired return on all investments, round calculations to the nearest dollar.

Chapter 8 Problem 4:

4. Equipment replacement decision

Columbia Enterprises is studying the replacement of some equipment that originally cost $74,000. The equipment is expected to provide six more years of service if $8,700 of major repairs are performed in two years. Annual cash operating costs total $27,200. Columbia can sell the equipment now for $36,000; the estimated residual value in six years is $5,000.

New equipment is available that will reduce annual cash operating costs to $21,000. The equipment costs $103,000, has a service life of six years, and has an estimated residual value of $13,000. Company sales will total $430,000 per year with either the existing or the new equipment. Columbia has a minimum desired return of 12% and depreciates all equipment by the straight line method.

Instructions:

a. By using the net present value method, determine whether Columbia should keep its present equipment or acquire the new equipment. Round all calculations to the nearest dollar, and ignore income taxes.

b. Columbia’s management feels that the time value of money should be considered in all long term decisions. Briefly discuss the rationale that underlies management’s belief.

Attachments:

the purpose of this ossessment tosk is to evqluote your obility to onolyse 272701

AS$ESSfifiENT TASK 4: VARIATIONS Purpose.’ The purpose of this ossessment tosk is to evqluote your obility to onolyse ond identify the reosons for ony cost voriotions, ond to communicote these voriotions to stqkeholders. lnslrucfions: A vqriqtion is required for on qdditionol complete externql quolity door to the proiect. Given the ossessment responses you hove produced obove olong with fhe 5 pock estimqte qnd rqte breok up summories, produce the following: (o) o Voriotion breokup colculotion (b) q Vqriqtion submission in q stondqrd Mqster Builders formot for submission to q client ASSESSMENT T*SK 5: PAYIWENT CLAIMS Purpose: The purpose of this ossessment tosk is to evqluqte your obility to prepore interim poyment cloims ond rise ond fqll colculqtions for the controctor ond subcontrqctors in qccordqnce with relevont codes of proctice, stondords ond legislotive requirements. Irclruclions: Given the ossessment responses you hove produced obove olong with the 5 pock estimote qnd rote breok up summories, produce the following in occordonce with “The Qld Building qnd Construction lndustry Poyments Act 2OO4″ or similor Act in your Stote/territoryr 1o) indicote the time reloted processes required fo produce o monthly progress cloim ‘l b) produce o typicol monthly progress cloim including the following: (i) volue of work done (ii) volue of work done on vqriotions 2o) Reseorch ond record your findings (in less thqn 100 words) on how q rise ond foll cost odiustment ‘^ is mode ond under whot circumstonces. Give qn exomple of q rise ond foll colculotion. 2b) describe how this would be finonciolly reported in your compony. Moster Builders Associolion Version 1.8.1 Sepr 201 I Poge 50 of I 14 CPCCBC5OO2A monitor costing syslems on medium rise building ond conslruclion proiecls A$SES.5[.YTENT TASK 2: FROJECT COSTING Purpose: The purpose of this ossessment tosk is to evqluote your obility to identify ond clossify proiect costs. lnsfruclions: Given the estimote summory ond detqils in Appendix 2 f or o 5 pock block of units in both trode bosed qnd cost cotegory formot, produce the following: (o) o breokdown in cost centre formot of the budget (b) o cost bosed risk ossessment of the tender budget, including where the risk ollocotion would be mode. ASSESSMENT TASK 3: PROJE(1ED $CHEDU;LE$ AND CAS[* FTOWS Purpose: The purpose of this ossessment tqsk is to evoluote your obility to prepore schedules of proiect expenditure, ond curves showing proiected cosh flow ond poyments. lnslrucfions: Given the ossessmeni response you hove produced obove olong with the 5 pock estimote qnd rote breok up summories, produce the following: (o) o bor chort or network diogrom for the project ,0, ;,,tJ:”:”Joted bqseline cosh flow summory in tobulor form for the proiect, showing criticol (c) o boseline octuol cost cqsh flow summory (d) colculotion of the proiected monthly progress clqim volues (e) from the obove, produce o proiected cosh flow’S’curve for the proiect (f) modified cosh flows for eorly stort qnd lote finish risk scenorios / 1 (g) modified cosh flows for olternotive cost bqsed risk scenorios (h) comporison of the obove risk qnd time reloted cqsh flows ond note differences (i) comporison of the proiected boseline income cosh flow with the boseline octuol cost cosh flow (i) o report on the purpose of monitoring expenditure schedules ond their effectiveness (k) pessimistic overdrqft requirements (l) the iypicol reosons why o cosh flow con chonge, the procedure for revising the cosh flow Msster Builders Associqlion Version 1.8.1 Sepr 201 I Poge 59 of I 14 CPCCBC5OO2A monilor cosling syslems on medium rise building ond conslruclion proiecls ASSESSAfrENT TAS,K 6: MONITORING CASH FtOttr Purpose: The purpose of this ossessment tosk is to evoluqte your obility to mointqin continuous checks on expenditure ond evoluote outcomes. lnslrucfions: Give qn exomple of how cqsh flow qnd creditor pqyments ore monitored on q doily bosis. ASSESSIVIENT TASK 7: FQRECAST’ REPORT Purpose: The purpose of this qssessment tqsk is to evoluqte your obility to prepore ond onolyse finol cost reports. lnstruclions: Given the ossessmeni responses you hove produced qbove olong with the 5 pock estimote ond rote breok up summories, produce the following: (o) o forecost finol cost mqnogement report comporing budgets with finol expenditure (b) o report on the effectiveness of comporing octuol with budgeted costs (c) o procedure for moniioring ond supervising stoff responsible for producing costing dqto ond finonciol reports (d) o report on budget vs. finql cost detoiling reosons for vorionce for both budget cosi oyerruns ond surplus for future monogement qciion ond how effective fhis is. (e) o report on whot remediql qction con be token during o prolect to ensure finonciol complionce (f) o report on whot remediol oction would be required on completion of on unfovourqble finonciol report with respect to stqndqrd compony rotes qnd pricing structures

Attachments:

smoky mountain corporation makes two types of hiking boots xtrem 272702

Smoky Mountain Corporation makes two types of hiking boots—Xtreme and the Pathfinder. Data concerning these two product lines appear below:



The company has a traditional costing system in which manufacturing overhead is applied to units based on direct labor hours. Data concerning manufacturing overhead and direct labor hours for the upcoming year appear below:



Required:

1. Using Exhibit 8–12 as a guide, compute the product margins for the Xtreme and the Pathfinder products under the company’s traditional costing system.

2. The company is considering replacing its traditional costing system with an activity based costing system that would assign its manufacturing overhead to the following four activity cost pools (the Other cost pool includes organization sustaining costs and idle capacity costs):



Using Exhibit 8—10 as a guide, compute the product margins for the Xtreme and the Pathfinder products under the activity based costing system.

3. Using Exhibit 8—13 as a guide, prepare a quantitative comparison of the traditional and activity based cost assignments. Explain why the traditional and activity based cost assignmentsdiffer.

spice a licious produces creole seasoning using the following pr 272705

Spice a licious produces creole seasoning using the following process for each batch:

Function Time (Minutes)

Receiving ingredients …………………………………………60

Moving ingredients to stockroom …………………………….80

Storing ingredients in stockroom ……………………………. 8,200

Moving ingredients from stockroom …………………………..80

Measuring ingredients ………………………………………….30

Mixing ingredients ………………………………………………60

Packaging ingredients …………………………………………..50

Moving packaged seasoning to warehouse ……………………. 100

Storing packaged seasoning in warehouse ………………… 20, 000

Moving packaged seasoning from warehouse to trucks ………. 120.

a. Calculate the total cycle time of this manufacturing process.

b. Which of the functions add value?

c. Calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency of this process.

d. What could Spice a licious do to improve its MCE?

stillicum corporation makes ultra light weight backpacking 272711

Stillicum Corporation makes ultra light weight backpacking tents. Data concerning the company’s two product lines appear below:



The company has a traditional costing system in which manufacturing overhead is applied to units based on direct labor hours. Data concerning manufacturing overhead and direct labor hours for the upcoming year appear below:



Required:

1. Determine the unit product costs of the Deluxe and Standard products under the company’s traditional costing system.

2. The company is considering replacing its traditional costing system for determining unit product costs for external reports with an activity based costing system. The activity based costing system would have the following three activity cost pools:



Determine the unit product costs of the Deluxe and Standard products under the activity based costingsystem.

stillneedpaper inc raises trees cuts the trees into logs an 272713

Stillneedpaper, Inc., raises trees, cuts the trees into logs, and processes the logs into paper. Stillneedpaper, Inc., sells the paper to a distributor, who then sells the paper to printers. Assume that a weighted average cost of capital of 10 percent is appropriate for timber and paper processing. Here are the costs and revenues of each stage of the value chain. All data are for the production of enough timber to produce 20,000 tons of paper.

Timber The estimated market value of timber assets at the beginning of the year is $5,400,000 and at the end of the year is $5,000,000. Revenues, if the timber were sold in the market, would equal $2,100,000. Operating costs total $1,500,000, excluding depreciation.

Paper Processing The estimated market value of paper processing assets at the beginning of the year is $15,000,000 and $13,000,000 at the end of the year. Revenues, if the paper were sold in the market, would be $12,000,000. Operating costs total $8,700,000, including all costs of materials but excluding depreciation.

Distributor The distributor sells the paper for $800 per ton. The cost of the paper to the distributor (cost of goods sold) can be found by reviewing the sales from paper processing. Operating costs total $135 per ton, including economic depreciation. The cost of capital for the distributor is $50 per ton.

Retailer The retailer sells the paper for $850 per ton. The cost of the paper to the retailer (cost of goods sold) can be found by reviewing the sales from the distributor. Operating costs total $25 per ton, including economic depreciation. The cost of capital for the retailer is $18 per ton.

a. Compute the profits of each stage of the value chain. Show amounts in total (for 20,000 tons) and per ton.

b. Assume you are advising a loan approval committee in a bank. Write a short memo to the loan approval committee in which you evaluate the profitability of each part of the value chain.

what are role played by self regulatory governance bodies 416327

Each student group is required to work independently. The due date of the research paper is November 7, 2013. Sources should be acknowledged in a bibliography Requirements: Font 12 Pages: 7 Space : 2 It’s 4th year research paper work. Want it to be done properly. Topic : “Increased legal regulations in corporate governance will result in fewer audit failures” Intro What are role played by Self regulatory(governance) bodies. Also discuss there enforcement What are the role played by Legal framework. Discuss it’s enforcement.

Document Preview:

Each student group is required to work independently. The due date of the research paper is November 7, 2013. Sources should be acknowledged in a bibliography Requirements: Font 12 Pages: 7 Space : 2 It’s 4th year research paper work. Want it to be done properly. Topic : “Increased legal regulations in corporate governance will result in fewer audit failures” Intro What are role played by Self regulatory(governance) bodies. Also discuss there enforcement What are the role played by Legal framework. Discuss it’s enforcement. Ethical issue in self governance Conclusion how legal regulation will lead to fewer audit failure.

Attachments:

increased legal regulations in corporate governance will result in fewer audit failu 416415

Each student group is required to work independently. The due date of the research paper is November 7, 2013. Sources should be acknowledged in a bibliography

Requirements: Font 12

Pages: 7

Space : 2

It’s 4
th year research paper work.

Want it to be done properly.

Topic : “Increased legal regulations in corporate governance will result in fewer audit failures”

Intro

What are role played by
Self regulatory(governance) bodies.

Also discuss there
enforcement

What are the
role played by Legal framework.

Discuss
it’s enforcement.

Ethical issue in self governance

Conclusion how legal regulation will lead to
fewer audit failure.

Document Preview:

Each student group is required to work independently. The due date of the research paper is November 7, 2013. Sources should be acknowledged in a bibliography Requirements: Font 12 Pages: 7 Space : 2 It’s 4th year research paper work. Want it to be done properly. Topic : “Increased legal regulations in corporate governance will result in fewer audit failures” Intro What are role played by Self regulatory(governance) bodies. Also discuss there enforcement What are the role played by Legal framework. Discuss it’s enforcement. Ethical issue in self governance Conclusion how legal regulation will lead to fewer audit failure. ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

intermediate accounting 416416

Wal Mart Stores, Inc., is the world’s largest retailer. A large portion of the premises that the company occupies are leased. Its financial statements and disclosure notes revealed the following information: Balance Sheet ($ in millions) 2011 2010 Assets Property: Property under capital lease $5,509 $5,669 Less: Accumulated amortization (2,780) (2,906) Liabilities Current Liabilities: Obligations under capital leases due within one year 336 346 Long term debt: Long term obligations under capital leases 3,150 3,170 Required: 1). Discuss some possible reasons why Walmart leases rather than purchases most of its premises. 2). The net asset “property under capital lease” has a 2011 balance of $2,729 million ($5,509 2,780). Liabilities for capital leases total $3,486 ($336+3,150). Why do the asset and liability amounts differ?

accounting homework help 416421

Walsh Company expects sales of Product W to be 59,000 units in April, 85,000 units in May and 80,000 units in June. The company desires that the inventory on hand at the end of each month be equal to 20% of the next month’s expected unit sales. Due to excessive production during March, on March 31 there were 35,000 units of Product W in the ending inventory. Given this information, Walsh Company’s production of Product W for the month of April should be:

59,000 units
41,000 units
85,000 units
32,200 units

fundamental accounting principles 20th edition 416491

Westin Watercraft’s predetermined overhead rate for year 2011 is 200% of direct labor. Information on the company’s production activities during May 2011 follows.

a. Purchased raw materials on credit, $125,000.
b. Paid $84,000 cash for factory wages.
c. Paid $11,000 cash to a computer consultant to reprogram factory equipment.
d. Materials requisitions record use of the following materials for the month.

Job 136 $ 30,000
Job 137 20,000
Job 138 12,000
Job 139 14,000
Job 140 4,000


Total direct materials 80,000
Indirect materials 12,000


Total materials used $ 92,000





e. Time tickets record use of the following labor for the month.

Job 136 $ 8,000
Job 137 7,000
Job 138 25,000
Job 139 26,000
Job 140 2,000


Total direct labor 68,000
Indirect labor 16,000


Total $ 84,000





f. Applied overhead to Jobs 136, 138, and 139.
g. Transferred Jobs 136, 138, and 139 to Finished Goods.
h. Sold Jobs 136 and 138 on credit at a total price of $340,000.
i.

The company incurred the following overhead costs during the month (credit Prepaid Insurance for expired factory insurance).

Depreciation of factory building $ 37,000
Depreciation of factory equipment 21,000
Expired factory insurance 7,000
Accrued property taxes payable 31,000

j.

Applied overhead at month end to the Goods in Process (Jobs 137 and 140) using the predetermined overhead rate of 200% of direct labor cost.

white star flour company manufactures flour by a series of three processes beginni 416502

White Star Flour Company manufactures flour by a series of three processes, beginning with wheat grain being introduced in the Milling Department. From the Milling Department, the materials pass through the Sifting and Packaging departments, emerging as packaged refined flour. The balance in the account Work in Process Sifting Department was as follows on May 1, 2012: Work in Process Sifting Department (800 units, 3/5 complete) Direct Materials (800 x 3/5 x $0.65) $1,800 Conversion (800 x 3/5 x $0.65) $312 $2,112 The following costs were charged to Work in Process Sifting Department during May: Direct Materials transferred from Milling Department 14,200 units at $2.35 a unit $33,370 Direct Labor $6,100 Factory Overhead $3,924 During May, 14,000 units of flour were completed. Work in Process Sifting Department on May 31 was 1,000 units, 4/5 completed. 1. Prepare a cost of production report for the Sifting Department for May. If an amount is zero, enter 0. If required, round your cost per equivalent unit answers to nearest cent.

help 416533

Wing Walker Aces (WWA), Inc., is considering the purchase of a small plane to use in its wing walking demonstrations and aerial tour business. Various information about the proposed investment follows:

Initial investment $ 110,000
Useful life 10 years
Salvage value $ 10,000
Annual net income generated $ 5,400
WWA’s cost of capital 10 %

1. value:

10.00 points

Required:
Help WWA evaluate this project by calculating each of the following:
(a)

Accounting rate of return. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Accounting rate of return %

check my workeBook Links (4)references

Worksheet Learning Objective: 08 01 Calculate the accounting rate of return and describe its major weaknesses. Learning Objective: 08 03 Calculate net present value and describe why it is superior to the other capital budgeting techniques.
Difficulty: Hard Learning Objective: 08 02 Calculate the payback period and describe its major weaknesses. Learning Objective: 08 04 Predict the internal rate of return and describe its relationship to net present value.

2. value:

10.00 points

(b) Payback period. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
Payback period years

check my workeBook Links (4)references

3. value:

10.00 points

(c) Net present value (NPV). (Use Table 2 &Table 4.) (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Round your intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
Net present value $

rev: 04 11 2011 check my workeBook Links (4)references

4. value:

10.00 points

(d)

Recalculate WWA’s NPV assuming the cost of capital is 6 percent. (Use Table 2 &Table 4.) (Round your intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net present value $

rev: 04 15 2011 check my workeBook Links (4)references

in the problem it says the excess over book value is allocated to undervalued assets 416565

In the problem it says the excess over book value is allocated to undervalued assets and goodwill. Here is how I calculated the excess:

Implied FV =260k/80%= 325,000

BV (130k+120k)=250,000

Excess= 75,000

The difference between PPE mkt and book is 95,000 overvalued.

My question is:

1) Did I calculate the excess correctly?

2) Why is the PPE excess larger than the total excess and where is the goodwill?

Attachments:

in conducting interviews and observing factory operations to imp 272328

In conducting interviews and observing factory operations to implement an activity based costing system, you determine that several activities are unnecessary or redundant. For example, warehouse personnel were inspecting purchased components as they were received at the loading dock. Later that day, the components were inspected again on the shop floor before being installed in the final product. Both of these activities caused costs to be incurred but were not adding value to the product. If you include this observation in your report, one or more employees who perform inspections will likely lose their jobs.

Required

1. As a plant employee, what is your responsibility to report your findings to superiors?

2. Should you attempt to determine if the redundancy is justified? Explain.

3. What is your responsibility to the employees whose jobs will likely be lost by your report?

4. What facts should you consider before making your decision to report or not?

internet designs a web site design and maintenance firm uses 272344

Internet Designs, a Web site design and maintenance firm, uses job costing. During November, the firm provided Web site services for two clients and billed those clients for the services performed. Internet Designs billed Mountain View Company for $200,000 and Palatine Productions for $100,000. Direct labor costs were $80 per hour. Internet Designs worked 1,500 hours on the Mountain View account and 900 hours on the Palatine account. The firm worked an additional 100 hours that it did not charge to either account. The firm assigns overhead to jobs at the rate of $60 per billable hour. During November, the firm incurred actual overhead of $140,000. The firm incurred marketing and administrative costs of $60,000. All transactions were on account.

a. Show how Internet Designs’ accounting system would record these revenues and costs using journal entries.

b. Prepare an income statement for November like the one in Exhibit 2.5.

c. Were the two jobs profitable for Internet Design?

iped inc produces bike parts for example wheels frames ti 272347

Iped, Inc., produces bike parts (for example, wheels, frames, tires, and sprockets) and uses these parts to assemble bikes. Iped sells the bikes to a distributor that sells the bikes to retailers. Assume that a weighted average cost of capital of 12 percent is appropriate for Iped. Here are the costs and revenues of each stage of the value chain. All data are for the production of enough bike parts to produce 10,000 bikes.

Bike Part Production The estimated market value of production assets at the beginning of the year is $1,400,000 and at the end of the year is $1,340,000. Revenues, if the parts were sold in the market, would be $300,000. Operating costs total $100,000, excluding depreciation.

Bike Assembly The estimated market value of bike assembly assets at the beginning of the year is $600,000 and $400,000 at the end of the year. Revenues, if the bikes were sold in the market, would be $1,500,000. Operating costs total $1,250,000, excluding depreciation.

Distributor The distributor sells the bikes for $175 per bike. The cost of the bike to the distributor (cost of goods sold) can be found by reviewing the sales from bike assembly. Operating costs total $5 per bike, including economic depreciation. The cost of capital for the distributor is $12 per bike.

Retailer The retailer sells the bikes for $250 per bike. The cost of the bike to the retailer (cost of goods sold) can be found by reviewing the sales from the distributor. Operating costs total $33 per bike, including economic depreciation. The cost of capital for the retailer is $4 per bike.

a. Compute the profits of each stage of the value chain. Show amounts in total (for 10,000 bikes) and per bike.

b. Assume you are advising a loan approval committee in a bank. Write a short memo to the loan approval committee in which you evaluate the profitability of the company.

jake miille has just joined the ciudad juarez factory text 272349

Jake Miille has just joined the Ciudad Juarez factory (text example) as the new production manager. He was pleased to see the company uses activity based costing. Miille believes he can reduce production costs if he reduces the number of machine setups. He has spent the past month working with purchasing and sales to better coordinate raw material arrivals and the anticipated demand for the company’s products. In March, he plans to produce 1,000 mountain bikes and 200 racing bikes. Miille believes that with his efficient production scheduling he can reduce the number of setups for both mountain and racing bikes by about 50 percent.

a. Refer to Exhibit 3.5. Compute the amount of overhead allocated to each product line— mountain bikes and racing bikes—assuming annual setups are reduced by approximately 50 percent. Assume the number of machine setups in March is seven setups for mountain bikes and 15 setups for racing bikes. Assume the overhead costs of setting up machines decrease proportionately with the reduction in the number of setups; thus, the setup rate remains at $2,000 per setup. All other overhead costs will remain the same.

b. What information did activity based costing provide that enabled Jake Miille to pursue reducing overhead costs? In general, what are the advantages of activity based costing over the traditional volume based allocation methods? What are the disadvantages?

log cabins unlimited constructs vacation houses in the north car 272368

Log Cabins Unlimited constructs vacation houses in the North Carolina Mountains. The company has developed the following value chart:

Average Number

Operations of Days

Receiving materials ………………………………. 2

Storing materials …………………………………10

Measuring and cutting materials …………………. 9

Handling materials ……………………………….. 7

Setting up and moving scaffolding ………………. 6

Assembling materials …………………………….. 3

Building fireplace ………………………………..12

Pegging logs ……………………………………… 8

Cutting and framing doors and windows ………… 5

Sealing joints ……………………………………… 4

Waiting for county inspectors ……………………. 6

Inspecting property (county inspectors) ………….. 1

a. What are the value added activities and their total time?

b. What are the non value added activities and their total time?

c. Calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency of the process.

d. Explain the difference between value added and non value added activities.

loomis and associates a cpa firm uses job costing during 272370

Loomis and Associates, a CPA firm, uses job costing. During January, the firm provided audit services for two clients and billed those clients for the services performed. Springsteen Productions was billed for 4,000 hours at $100 per hour, and RCI Records was billed for 2,000 hours at $100 per hour. Direct labor costs were $60 per hour. Of the 6,400 hours worked in January, 400 hours were not billable. The firm assigns overhead to jobs at the rate of $20 per billable hour. During January, the firm incurred actual overhead of $140,000. The firm incurred marketing and administrative costs of $20,000. All transactions were on account.

a. Show how Loomis and Associates’ accounting system would record these revenues and costs using journal entries.

b. Prepare an income statement for January like the one in Exhibit 2.5.

management at glover lamb inc is concerned about controlling 272376

Management at Glover & Lamb Inc. is concerned about controlling factory labor related costs. The following summary is the result of an analysis of the major categories of labor costs for 2010:

Category Amount

Base wages ……………………………….$63,000,000

Health care benefits ………………………. 10,500,000

Payroll taxes ……………………………… 5,018,832

Overtime ………………………………….. 8,697,600

Training …………………………………… 1,875,000

Retirement benefits ……………………….. 6,898,500

Workers’ compensation …………………… 1,199,940

Following are some of the potential cost drivers identified by the company for labor related costs, along with their 2010 volume levels:

Potential Activity Driver 2010 Volume Level

Average number of factory employees ……………………………. 2,100

Number of new hires ………………………………………………. 300

Number of regular labor hours worked ……………………… 3,150,000

Number of overtime hours worked …………………………… 288,000

Total factory wages paid …………………………………….. $71,697,600

Volume of production in units ……………………………….. 12,000,000

Number of production process changes ………………………. 600

Number of production schedule changes ……………………….. 375

a. For each cost pool, determine the cost per unit of the activity driver using the activity driver that you believe has the closest relationship to the cost pool.

b. Based on your judgments and calculations in (a), which activity driver should receive the most attention from company managers in their efforts to control labor related costs? How much of the total labor related cost is attributable to this activity driver?

c. In the contemporary environment, many firms ask their employees to work record levels of overtime. What activity driver does this practice suggest is a major contributor to labor related costs? Explain.

maxlon company manufactures custom made furniture for its local 272391

Maxlon Company manufactures custom made furniture for its local market and produces a line of home furnishings sold in retail stores across the country. The company uses traditional volume based methods of assigning direct materials and direct labor to its product lines. Overhead has always been assigned by using a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor hours. In the past few years, management has seen its line of retail products continue to sell at high volumes, but competition has forced it to lower prices on these items. The prices are declining to a level close to its cost of production. Meanwhile, its custom made furniture is in high demand and customers have commented on its favorable (lower) prices compared to its competitors. Management is considering dropping its line of retail products and devoting all of its resources to custom made furniture.

Required

1. What reasons could explain why competitors are forcing the company to lower prices on its high volume retail products?

2. Why do you believe the company charges less for custom order products than its competitors?

3. Does a company’s costing method have any effect on its pricing decisions? Explain.

4. Aside from the differences in volume of output, what production differences do you believe exist between making custom order furniture and mass market furnishings?

5. What information might the company obtain from using ABC that it might not obtain using volume based costing methods?

mcdougal company uses a predetermined overhead rate to assign ov 272392

McDougal Company uses a predetermined overhead rate to assign overhead to jobs. Because McDougal’s production is machine intensive, overhead is applied on the basis of machine hours. The expected overhead for the year was $2.8 million, and the practical level of activity is 250,000 machine hours. During the year, McDougal used 255,000 machine hours and incurred actual overhead costs of $2.82 million. McDougal also had the following balances of applied overhead in its accounts:

Work in Process Inventory …………….$192,000

Finished Goods Inventory …………….. 208,000

Cost of Goods Sold ……………………600,000

Required:

1. Compute a predetermined overhead rate for McDougal.

2. Compute the overhead variance, and label it as under or overapplied.

3. Assuming the overhead variance is immaterial, prepare the journal entry to dispose of the variance at the end of the year.

4. Assuming the overhead variance is material, prepare the journal entry that appropriately disposes of the overhead variance at the end of the year.

model x100 sells for 120 per unit whereas model x200 272404

Model X100 sells for $120 per unit whereas Model X200 offers advanced features and sells for S500 per unit. Management expects to sell 50,000 units of Model X100 and 5,000 units of Model X200 next year. The direct material cost per unit is $50 for Model X100 and $220 for Model X200. The company’s total manufacturing overhead for the year is expected to be $1,995,000. A unit of Model X100 requires 2 direct labor hours and a unit of Model X200 requires 5 direct labor hours. The direct labor wage rate is $20 per hour.

Required:

1. The company currently applies manufacturing overhead to products using direct labor hours as the allocation base. Using this traditional approach, compute the product margins for X100 and X200.

2. Management is considering an activity based costing system and would like to know what impact this would have on product costs. Preliminary analysis suggests that under activity based costing, a total of $1,000,000 in manufacturing overhead cost would be assigned to Model X100 and a total of $600,000 would be assigned to Model X200. In addition, a total of $150,000 in nonmanufacturing overhead would be applied to Model X100 and a total of $350,000 would be applied to Model X200. Using the activity based costing approach, compute the product margins for X100 and X200.

3. Explain why the product margins computed in requirement (1) differ from those computed in requirement (2).

movies and television shows are jobs some are successful some 272407

Movies and television shows are jobs. Some are successful, some are not. Studios must decide what to do with the cost of unsuccessful shows (?~?~flops’’). Some studios have been criticized for assigning the cost of flops to successful shows, which in turn reduces profits available under profit sharing agreements with actors, actresses, directors, and others associated with the successful show. One studio was criticized for carrying the cost of flops in inventory instead of writing them off, thereby overstating both assets and profits. Studios point out that flops have to be paid for out of the profits from successful shows.

a. How does carrying ?~?~flops’’ in inventory overstate assets and profits?

b. When do you think the cost of a movie that turns out to be a flop should be written off (that is, expensed)?

on january 1 a bank estimated its production capacity to 272419

On January 1, a bank estimated its production capacity to be 800 million units and used that estimate to compute its predetermined overhead rate of $0.01 per transaction (one unit ?1 one transaction). The units produced for the four quarters follow:

Quarter Actual Units of Production (in millions)

1st………………………………………………………. 200 Transactions

2nd……………………………………………………… 200 Transactions

3rd………………………………………………………. 200 Transactions

4th………………………………………………………. 100 Transactions

a. Compute the amount of total overhead applied under normal costing for each quarter.

b. What was the estimated overhead for the year for the predicted capacity of 800 million units?

splitsville company has two departments 415556

Splitsville Company has two departments. Factory overhead costs are applied based on direct labor cost in Department A and machine hours in Department B. The following information is available:

Budgeted Items Dept. A Dept. B

Direct labor cost $180,000 $165,000

Machine hours 51,000 40,000

Factory overhead cost $225,000 $180,000

Actual data for Job #10 are as follows:

Actual Items Dept. A Dept. B

Direct materials requisitioned $10,000 $16,000

Direct labor cost $11,000 $14,000

Machine hours 5,000 3,000

Required:

A) Compute the budgeted factory overhead rate for Department A.

B) Compute the budgeted factory overhead rate for Department B.

C) What is the total overhead cost for Job #10?

D) If Job #10 consists of 50 units of product, what is the unit cost of this job?

fifo 415563

The St. Vincent Manufacturing Company produces a single product in a single processing department. The material is added when 25% of the conversion costs have been added. The Work in Process Inventory account on April 30th includes the following information: Beg Bal $1,382 Material 5,325 Labor 10,863 Overhead 15,012 During the month, the company finished and transferred 72,000 units out of the Work in Process Inventory. 9,000 units were in process at the beginning of the month and were 40% complete. 8,000 units were in process at the end of the month, and were 70% complete. The company uses (FIFO) process costing. Required (use 4 decimal places for computations): (a) Compute the equivalent units of production (EUP) for materials and conversion costs in April. (b) Compute the unit conversion costs and unit material costs for April. (c) Compute the total cost transferred out of the WIP Inventory during the month of April. (d) Compute the cost of the ending inventory for April.

accounting 415585

Stanfa Corporation’s standard wage rate is $10.30 per direct labor hour (DLH) and according to the standards, each unit of output requires 9.00 DLHs. In January, 4,700 units were produced, the actual wage rate was $10.60 per DLH, and the actual hours were 32,350 DLHs. In the journal entry to record the incurrence of direct labor costs in January, the Work in Process entry would consist of a:

debit of $342,910.
debit of $435,690.
credit of $342,910.
credit of $435,690.

state college technology store scts is a retail computer store in the university 415628

State College Technology Store (SCTS) is a retail computer store in the university center of a large mid western university. SCTS engaged in the following transactions during November of the current year: Nov. 1 Purchased 20 Nopxe laptop computers on account from Led Inc. The laptop computers cost $800 each, for a total of $16,000. Payment is due in 30 days. Nov. 6 Sold four Nopxe laptop computers on account to the Department of Microbiology at State College at a retail sales price of $1,200 each, for a total of $4,800. Payment is due in 30 days. Dec. 1 Paid the $16,000 account payable to Led Inc. Dec. 6 Collected the $4,800 account receivable from State College’s Department of Microbiology. Assume that the other expenses incurred by SCTS during November and December were $1,000, and assume that all of these expenses were paid in cash. SCTS is not subject to income tax because it is a wholly owned unit of a nonprofit organization.

a state highway department is planning the construction of a 50 mile four lane tol 415638

A state highway department is planning the construction of a 50 mile, four lane toll road. It estimates that the construction cost (t=0) will be $200,000,000 and annual maintenance costs will be $1,000,000 per year forever. In addition, every 10 years in perpetuity, a major resurfacing will have to be carried out at a cost of $10,000,000. It is estimated that $6,000,000 cars and $600,000 trucks will use the road each year, and it is decided that the toll charged to a truck will be four times that of a car. Interest rate is 7%. Determine what the toll should be for each car and truck to cover all expenses over an infinite planning period. Note: The toll does not vary year to year. The answers are Tollcar = $1.87 Tolltruck = $7.48. I keep getting numbers that are too high using capitalized cost formulas I have found. I am looking for an explanation/workout of this problem.

math 415683

  1. Stock X has a required return of 10%, while Stock Y has a required return of 12%.Which of the following statements is CORRECT? Answer
    A.
    The stocks must sell for the same price.
    B.
    If the market is in equilibrium, and if Stock Y has thelowerexpected dividend yield, then it must have thehigherexpected growth rate.
    C.
    If Stock X and Stock Y have the same current dividend and the same expected dividend growth rate, then Stock Y must sell for a higher price.
    D.
    If Stock Y and Stock X have the same dividend yield, then Stock Y must have a lower expected capital gains yield than Stock X.
    E.
    Stock Y must have a higher dividend yield than Stock X.

stock dividends 415693

The stockholders equity section of Benton Corporations balance sheet as of December 31, 2012 is as follows: Stockholders Equity Common stock, $5 par value; authorized, 2,000,000 shares: issued , 400,000 shares……………………………………………………………………………………………………….$ 2,000,000 Pain in capital in excess of par……………………………………………………………………………………………..850,000 Retained earnings…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………3,000,000 $5,850,000 The following event occurred during 2013: 1. Jan 5: 20,000 shares of authorized and unissued common stock were sold $8 per share 2. Jan 16: Declared a cash dividend of 20 cents per share, payable February 15 to stockholders of record on February 5. 3. Feb 10: 30,000 shares of authorized and unissued common stock were sold for $12 per share. 4. March 1: A 30% stock dividend was declared and issued. Fair value per share is currently $15. 5. April 1: A two for one stock split was carried out. The par value of the stock was to be reduced to $2.50 per share. Fair value on March 31 was $18 per share. 6. July 1: A 15% stock dividend was declared and issued. Fair value is currently $10 per share. 7. Aug 1: A cash dividend of 20 cents per share was declared, payable September 1 to stockholders of record on August 21. Instructions: Enter the above events into the following work sheet showing how each event affects the column. Event No. 1 will serve as an example. Item No. of shares issued Total par value Paid in capital excess of par Retained earnings Beg. Balance 1/1/13 400,000 $2,000,000 $850,000 $3,000,000 Event #1 Jan 5 20,000 100,000 60,000 0 Balance 420,000 $2,100,000 $910,000 $3,000,000 Event # 2 Jan 16 (and events 3 through 7)

accounting cash budget problem 415821

Tait Company has the following information for the month of June: a. Beginning cash balance on June 1 was $94,500. b. Cash receipts from sales have the following pattern: 40% is collected in the month of sale 50% is collected in the next month 5% is collected in the second month after the sale 5% is uncollectible. c. The following are the actual and budgeted amounts of sales: April (actual) $540,000 May (actual) 720,000 June (budgeted) 630,000 d. Payments on purchases are 50% in the month of purchase and 50% in the month following the purchase. The following actual and budged amounts of merchandise purchases are known: May (actual) $270,000 June (budgeted) 405,000 e. Budged cash disbursements for salaries in June are $180,000. f. Budgeted amortization expense for June is $9,000. g. Other cash expenses budgeted for June are $48,000. h. Accrued income taxes due in June are $101,250. i. Bank loan interest due in June is $6,750. Required: Prepare a cash budget for Tait Company for the month of June.

acct 1b 415904

Textra Polymers produces parts for a variety of small machine manufacturers. Most products go through two operations, molding and trimming, before they are ready for packaging. Expected costs and activities for the molding department and for the trimming department for 2011 follow. Molding Trimming Direct labor hours 52,000 DLH 48,000 DLH Machine hours 30,500 MH 3,600 MH Overhead costs $ 730,000 $ 590,000 Data for two special order parts to be manufactured by the company in 2011 follow: Part A27C Part X82B Number of units 9,800 units 54,500 units Machine hours Molding 5,100 MH 1,020 MH Trimming 2,600 MH 650 MH Direct labor hours Molding 5,500 DLH 2,150 DLH Trimming 700 DLH 3,500 DLH Compute the plantwide overhead rate using direct labor hours as the base. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Plantwide overhead rate= $ / DLH Determine the overhead cost assigned to each product line using the plantwide rate computed in part 1. (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Product Overhead cost Part A27C= $ Part X82B= $

accounting 415924

Thomasson Air uses two measures of activity, flights and passengers, in the cost formulas in its budgets and performance reports. The cost formula for plane operating costs is $36,340 per month plus $2,078 per flight plus $1 per passenger. The company expected its activity in April to be 94 flights and 244 passengers, but the actual activity was 93 flights and 249 passengers. The actual cost for plane operating costs in April was $226,510. The activity variance for plane operating costs in April would be closest to:

$5,406 U
$2,073 F
$5,406 F
$2,073 U

standard factory overhead variance report 415941

Tiger Equipment inc,. a manufacturer of construction equipment, prepared the following factory overhead cost budget for the Welding Department for May 2012. The company expected to operate the department at 100% of normal capacity of 7,000 hours. Variable Costs: Indirect factory wages $22,050 Power and light 12,600 Indirect Materials 10,500 Total Variable Cost $45,150 Fixed Costs: Supervistory salaries $12,000 Depreciation of plant and equipment 31,450 Insurance and property taxes 9,750 Total fixed costs $53,200 Total factory overhead $98,350 During May, the department operated at 7,400 standard hours, and the factory overhead costs incurred were indirect factory wages, $23,580; power and light, $13,120; indirect materials, $11,310; supervisory salaries, $12,000; depreciation of plant and equipment, $31,450; and insurance and property taxes, $9,750. Instructions Prepare a factory overhead cost variance report for May. To be useful for cost control, the budgeted amounts should be based on 7,400 hours.

dividing partnership income 415946

Tim Snyder and Jay Wise have decided to form a partnership. They have agreed that Snyder is to invest $30,000 and that Wise is to invest $40,000. Snyder is to devote full time to the business, and Wise is to devote one half time. The following plans for the division of income are being considered:

a. Equal division.

b. In the ratio of original investments.

c. In the ratio of time devoted to the business.

d. Interest of 10% on original investments and the remainder in the ratio of 3:2.

e. Interest of 10% on original investmetns, salary allowances of $34,000 to Snyder and $17,000 to Wise, and the remainder equally.

f. Same as in (e), except that Snyder is also to be allowed a bonus equal to 20% of the amount by which net income exceeds the total salary allowances.

For each plan, determine the devision of the net income under each of the following assumptions: (1) net income of $210,000 and (2) net income of $84,000.

For plan a. with a net income of $210,000 I got that Snyder is to receive $105,000 and Wise is to receive $105,000. With a net income of $84,000 I got that Snyder is to receive $42,000 and Wise $42,000.

For plan b. with a net income of $210,000 I got that Snyder is to receive $90,000 and Wise is to receive $120,000. With a net income of $84,000 I got that Snyder is to receive $36,000 and Wise $48,000.

For plan c. with a net income of $210,000 I got that Snyder is to receive $140,000 and Wise is to receive $70,000. With a net income of $84,000 I got that Snyder is to receive $56,000 and Wise $28,000.

I need help finding how to figure the allowances for plans d, e, and f

managerial accounting problem 415951

Timmer Bachman founded the Bachman Corporation over 25 years ago. The company’s genesis was the unique climbing apparatus developed by Timmer, an avid mountaineer. Bachman Corporation has continued to produce that first product, but it has now diversified into other outdoor activity equipment as well. In fact, the vast majority of the company’s revenues are now accounted for by non climbing product sales. Timmer is considering whether his company should continue producing and selling some of its oldest products, all of which relate to mountain climbing.

To begin his decision making process, Timmer has asked the company’s controller, Marin Hennesy, to accumulate data on the original locking carabiner that set the company on its way. Accordingly, Marin accumulates the following data for last year:
‘Budgeted production and sales: 5,000 carabiners.
‘Actual production and sales: 6,000 carabiners.
‘The standard for a carabiner requires 1.5 ounces of material at a budgeted cost of $1.52 per ounce and 2 hours of assembly and testing time at a cost of $12.50 per hour.
‘The carabiner sells for $32 each.
‘Actual production costs for the 6,000 carabiners totaled $12,900 for 8,600 ounces of materials and $161,700 for 13,200 labor hours.
‘Assume variable overhead costs are negligible.
What was the budgeted contribution margin per carabiner?
$ per unit

B. What was the actual contribution margin per carabiner?
$ per unit

C. Based on the data provided in this problem, what was Bachman’s flexible budget variance?

D. What was Bachman’s direct material price variance?

E. What was Bachman’s direct material usage variance?
$ SelectFavorableUnfavorable

F. What was Bachman’s direct labor rate variance?

G. What was Bachman’s direct labor efficiency variance?

H. What would the sales price variance be if each carabiner sold for $33?

I. Based on the available information, should Bachman continue making the carabiner

managerial accounting net operating income 415961

Tolentino Kennel uses tenant days as its measure of activity; an animal housed in the kennel for one day is counted as one tenant day. During November, the kennel budgeted for 4,600 tenant days, but its actual level of activity was 4,630 tenant days. The kennel has provided the following data concerning the formulas used in its budgeting and its actual results for November:

Data used in budgeting:

Fixed element per month Variable element per tenant day
Revenue ? $33.50
Wages and salaries $3,400 $7.60
Expendables 1,100 11.90
Facility expenses 8,900 3.20
Administrative expenses

9,700

0.40

Total expenses

$23,100

$23.10

Actual results for November:

Revenue $149,905
Wages and salaries $38,028
Expendables $57,553
Facility expenses $19,730
Administrative expenses $10,555
The net operating income in the flexible budget for November would be closest to:

A. $48,152
B. $25,052
C. $47,840
D. $24,740

The Show of Work would be greatly appreciated please!!

introduction to business foundations 416137

Several types of errors can be made during the journalizing and posting process. Match the following with their best description. Answer Balance incorrectly computed. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Debit or credit posting omitted. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Wrong amount posted to an account. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Column incorrectly added. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Balance entered in wrong column of account. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Amount incorrectly entered on trial balance. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Balance entered in wrong column or omitted. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Debit posted as credit, or vice versa. Read Answer Items for Question 1 Answer A. Posting errors B. Trial balance preparation errors C. Account balance errors 8 points Question 2 Identify each of the accounts below as one of the following: Answer Unearned Rent Read Answer Items for Question 2 Prepaid Insurance Read Answer Items for Question 2 Fees Earned Read Answer Items for Question 2 Patents Read Answer Items for Question 2 Dividends Read Answer Items for Question 2 Answer A. a liability account B. a stockholders’ equity account C. an asset account D. a revenue account 5 points Question 3 For each of the following accounts, indicate whether its normal balance is on the credit side or the debit side of the T account. Answer Retained Earnings Read Answer Items for Question 3 Accounts Receivable Read Answer Items for Question 3 Accounts Payable Read Answer Items for Question 3 Interest Earned Read Answer Items for Question 3 Copyrights Read Answer Items for Question 3 Answer A. Credit side B. Debit side 5 points Question 4 July 2 Cash 1,340 Fees earned 1,340 Received fees from customers Recording this transaction will Answer 1. increase cash and decrease revenues 2. increase revenues and decrease cash 3. increase cash and increase revenues 4. decrease cash and decrease revenues 2 points Question 5 Randomly listed below are the steps for preparing a trial balance: (1) Verify that the total of the Debit column equals the total of the Credit column. (2) List the accounts from the ledger and enter their debit or credit balance in the Debit or Credit column of the trial balance. (3) List the name of the company, the title of the trial balance, and the date the trial balance is prepared. (4) Total the Debit and Credit columns of the trial balance. What is the proper order of these steps? Answer 1. (3), (2), (4), (1) 2. (3), (2), (1), (4) 3. (4), (3), (2), (1) 4. (2), (3), (4), (1) 2 points Question 6 The chart of account for the Miguel Company includes some of the following accounts: Account Name Account Number Cash 11 Accounts Receivable 13 Prepaid Insurance 15 Accounts Payable 21 Unearned Revenue 24 Capital Stock 31 Dividends 32 Fees Earned 41 Salaries Expense 54 Rent Expense 56 On the journal page 3, the following transaction was found: Cash 640 Fees Earned 640 What is the post reference that will be found on the journal entry? Answer 1. 3 2. 11 3. 11, 41 4. 41 2 points Question 7 Which of the following statements is not true about liabilities? Answer 1. Account titles of liabilities often include the term “payable”. 2. Liabilities do not include wages owed to employees of the company. 3. Cash received before services are performed are considered to be liabilities. 4. Liabilities are debts owed to outsiders. 2 points Question 8 A credit balance in which of the following accounts would indicate a likely error? Answer 1. Accounts Payable 2. Fees Earned 3. Salary Expense 4. Capital Stock 2 points Question 9 Which of the following is true about a T Account? Answer 1. Left hand side of the T Accounts is called a credit 2. Left hand side of the T Account is called a debit. 3. None are true. 4. Right hand side of the T Account is called a debit 2 points Question 10 When a transposition error is made on the trial balance, the difference between the debit and credit totals on the trial balance will be Answer 1. twice the amount of the transposition 2. divisible by 9 3. zero 4. one half the amount of the transposition 2 points Question 11 The trial balance is out of balance and the accountant suspects that a transposition or slide error has occurred. What will the accountant do to find the error? Answer 1. Determine the amount of the error and divide by two, then look for that amount on the trial balance. 2. Determine the amount of the error and divide by nine. If the result is evenly divided, then this type of error is likely. 3. Determine the amount of the error and look for that amount on the trial balance. 4. Determine the amount of the error and refer to the journal entries for that amount 2 points Question 12 May 31 Supplies 120 Accounts Payable 120 ???????????? What is the best explanation for this journal entry? Answer 1. Investment of supplies by stockholders 2. Purchased supplies on account 3. Paid accounts payable. 4. Purchased supplies with cash 2 points Question 13 Which side of the account increases a cash account? Answer 1. credit 2. debit 3. neither a debit or a credit 4. either a debit or a credit 2 points Question 14 March 10 Accounts Payable 3,300 Cash 3,300 Paid creditors on account What effect does this journal entry have on the accounts? Answer 1. Increase cash, decrease accounts payable 2. Decrease accounts payable, decrease cash 3. Decrease accounts payable, increase cash 4. Increase accounts payable, increase cash 2 points Question 15 Which of the following applications of the rules of debit and credit is true? Answer 1. increase Accounts Payable with a credit and the normal balance is a debit 2. increase Supplies Expense with a debit and the normal balance is a debit 3. decrease Prepaid Insurance with a credit and the normal balance is a credit 4. decrease Cash with a debit and the normal balance is a credit 2 points Question 16 April 23 Cash 14,000 Fees Earned 14,000 The journal entry will: Answer 1. Increase Cash and increase Revenues 2. Decrease Cash and decrease Revenues 3. Increase Revenues and decrease Cash 4. Increase Cash and decrease Revenues 2 points Question 17 Which of the following errors will cause the trial balance totals to be unequal? Answer 1. recording the same erroneous amount for both the debit and the credit parts of a transaction 2. recording the same transaction more than once 3. entering an incorrect amount on the trial balance 4. failure to record a transaction or to post a transaction 2 points Question 18 Net income will result when Answer 1. expenses (credits) < revenues (debits) 2. revenues (credits) = expenses (debits) 3. revenues (debits) > expenses (credits) 4. revenues (credits) > expenses (debits) 2 points Question 19 Which of the following entries records the payment of an account payable? Answer 1. debit Accounts Payable; credit Cash 2. debit Cash; credit Accounts Payable 3. debit Accounts Receivable; credit Cash 4. debit Cash; credit Supplies Expense 2 points Question 20 Joshua Scott transferred cash from a personal bank account to an account to be used for the business in exchange for capital stock, $65,000. How would the journal entry for this transaction be entered in the journal? Answer 1. Cash 65,000 Capital Stock 65,000 2. Cash 65,000 Accounts Payable Joshua Scott 65,000 3. Cash 65,000 Retained Earnings 65,000 4. Cash 65,000 Fees Earned 65,000 2 points Question 21 A credit may signify a Answer 1. decrease in liabilities 2. decrease in assets 3. decrease in revenue 4. decrease in capital stock 2 points Question 22 Accounts are classified in the ledger Answer 1. so that accounts used most often are listed first 2. alphabetically 3. chronologically 4. in accordance with their appearance in the financial statements 2 points Question 23 Use the following information to answer questions 96 98. The chart of account for the Corning Company includes some of the following accounts: Account Name Account Number Cash 11 Accounts Receivable 13 Prepaid Insurance 15 Accounts Payable 21 Unearned Revenue 24 Capital Stock 31 Dividends 32 Fees Earned 41 Salaries Expense 54 Rent Expense 56 On the journal page 3, the following transaction was found: Prepaid Insurance 1,530 Cash 1,530 What is the post reference that will be found on the Prepaid Insurance account? Answer 1. None 2. 15 3. 3 4. 11 2 points Question 24 Prarie Clinic purchased X ray equipment for $4,000, paid $1,275 down, with the remainder to be paid later. The correct entry would be Answer 1. Equipment Expense 4,000 Accounts Payable 1,275 Cash 2,725 2. Cash 1,275 Accounts Payable 2,725 Equipment 4,000 3. Equipment 4,000 Accounts Payable 2,725 Cash 1,275 4. Equipment 1,275 Cash 1,275 2 points Question 25 Which statement(s) concerning cash is (are) true? Answer 1. cash will always have more debits than credits 2. cash will never have a credit balance 3. all of the above 4. cash is increased by debiting 2 points Question 26 A cash payment is recorded on the cash account as a Answer 1. neither a debit or a credit 2. credit 3. debit 4. either a debit or a credit 2 points Question 27 The process of transferring the journal entries to the accounts is known as Answer 1. journalizing 2. updating 3. posting 4. summarizing 2 points Question 28 Which of the following entries records the collection of cash from cash customers? Answer 1. Fees Earned, debit; Cash, credit 2. Cash, debit; Fees Earned, credit 3. Fees Earned, debit; Accounts Receivable, credit 4. Accounts Receivable, debit; Fees Earned, credit 2 points Question 29 The process of recording a transaction in the journal is called Answer 1. posting 2. summarizing 3. journalizing 4. recording 2 points Question 30 Proof that the dollar amount of the debits equals the dollar amount of the credits in the ledger means Answer 1. only that the debit dollar amounts equal the credit dollar amounts 2. all of the information from the journal was correctly transferred to the ledger 3. all accounts have their correct balances in the ledger 4. only the journal is accurate; the ledger may be incorrect 2 points Question 31 Expenses follow the same debit and credit rules as Answer 1. Dividends 2. Capital Stock 3. Liabilities 4. Revenues 2 points Question 32 The classification and normal balance of the accounts payable account is Answer 1. an asset with a credit balance 2. stockholders’ equity with a credit balance 3. revenue with a credit balance 4. a liability with a credit balance 2 points Question 33 All of the following statements regarding a horizontal analysis are true except: Answer 1. When two statement are compared in horizontal analysis, the earlier statement is used as the base for computing the amount and the percent of change. 2. If Fees Earned in 2009 is $150,000 and Fees Earned in 2010 is $187,500, a horizontal analysis will indicate a 25% increase over this period. 3. A horizontal analysis is used to compare an item in a current statement with the same item in prior statements. 4. A horizontal analysis can be performed on a balance sheet and income statement, but not on a statement of cash flows. 2 points Question 34 For a month’s transactions for a typical medium sized business, the salary expense account is likely to have only credit entries. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 35 Posting a transaction twice will cause the trial balance totals to be equal. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 36 Once journal entries are posted to accounts, each account will show a new balance after each entry. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 37 Journalizing eliminates fraud. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 38 A credit to the cash account will increase the account. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 39 Recording a credit to all stockholders’ equity accounts will increase the account. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 40 The normal balance of revenue accounts is a credit. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 41 The erroneous moving of an entire number one or more spaces to the right or left, such as writing $85 as $850, is called a transposition. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 42 Journalizing transactions using the double entry bookkeeping system will eliminate fraud. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 43 Debits will increase Unearned Revenues and Revenues. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 44 Liability accounts are increased by debits. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 45 The process of transferring the debits and credits from the journal entries to the accounts is known as “updating the accounts”. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 46 Dividends are an example of an expense. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 47 The normal balance of an expense account is a credit. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 48 A group of related accounts that make up a complete unit is called a trial balance. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 49 Depending on the account title, the right side of the account is referred to as the credit side. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 50 Journalizing a transaction with both the debit and the credit for $69 instead of $96 will cause the trial balance to be out of balance. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 51 The recording of cash receipts to the cash account will be done by debiting the account. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 52 Issuance of capital stock increases total stockholders’ equity. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 53 The normal balance of the dividend account is a debit. Answer 1. True 2. False 1 points Question 54 When an account receivable is collected in cash, the total assets of the business increase. Answer 1. False 2. True 1 points Question 55 Unless the transaction is compound, the dollar amount of the debits for each transaction is equal to the dollar amount of the credits for that transaction, and thus the term double entry bookkeeping. Answer 1. True 2. False

tyrene products manufactures recreational equipment one of the company s pr 416153

Tyrene Products manufactures recreational equipment. One of the company’s products, a skateboard, sells for $32. The skateboards are manufactured in an antiquated plant that relies heavily on direct labor workers. Thus, variable costs are high, totaling $22.40 per skateboard of which 70% is direct labor cost. Over the past year the company sold 45,000 skateboards, with the following operating results: Sales (45,000 skateboards) $ 1,440,000 Variable expenses 1,008,000 Contribution margin 432,000 Fixed expenses 288,000 Net operating income $ 144,000 Management is anxious to maintain and perhaps even improve its present level of income from the skateboards. Required: 1a. Compute the CM ratio and the break even point in skateboards. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “%” sign in your response.) Contribution margin % Unit sales to break even skateboards 1b. Compute the degree of operating leverage at last year’s level of sales. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.) Degree of operating leverage 2. Due to an increase in labor rates, the company estimates that variable costs will increase by $1.60 per skateboard next year. If this change takes place and the selling price per skateboard remains constant at $32.00, what will be the new CM ratio and the new break even point in skateboards? (Round your intermediate calculations and the “Contribution margin” answer to 2 decimal places and other answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “%” sign in your response.) Contribution margin % Unit sales to break even skateboards 3. Refer to the data in (2) above. If the expected change in variable costs takes place, how many skateboards will have to be sold next year to earn the same net operating income, $144,000, as last year? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.) Number of skateboards 4. Refer again to the data in (2) above. The president has decided that the company may have to raise the selling price of its skateboards. If Tyrene Products wants to maintain the same CM ratio as last year, what selling price per skateboard must it charge next year to cover the increased labor costs? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Selling price $ 5. Refer to the original data. The company is considering the construction of a new, automated plant. The new plant would slash variable costs by 20%, but it would cause fixed costs to increase by 80%. If the new plant is built, what would be the company’s new CM ratio and new break even point in skateboards? (Round your intermediate calculations and the “Contribution margin” answer to 2 decimal places and other answer to the nearest whole number. Omit the “%” sign in your response.) Contribution margin % Unit sales to break even skateboards 6. Refer to the data in (5) above. a. If the new plant is built, how many skateboards will have to be sold next year to earn the same net operating income, $144,000, as last year? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Round your answer to the nearest whole number.) Number of skateboards b 1. Assume that the new plant is constructed and that next year the company manufactures and sells 45,000 skateboards (the same number as sold last year). Prepare a contribution format income statement. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) contribution income statement sales $ variable expenses contribution margin fixed cost operating income $ b 2. Compute the degree of operating leverage. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.) Degree of operating leverage

accounting 416201

Updraft Systems, Inc., makes paragliders for sale through specialty sporting goods stores. The company has a standard paraglider model, but also makes custom designed paragliders. Management has designed an activity based costing system with the following activity cost pools and activity rates: Activity Cost Pool Activity Rate Supporting manufacturing $18 per direct labor hour Order processing $184 per order Custom designing $255 per custom design Customer service $426 per customer Management would like an analysis of the profitability of a particular customer, Eagle Wings, which has ordered the following products over the last 12 months: Standard Model : Custom Design Number of gliders 13 : 3 Number of orders 2 : 3 Number of custom designs 0 : 3 Direct labor hours per glider 29.50 : 32 Selling price per glider $1,725 : $2,350 Direct materials cost per glider $478 : $576 Ac€¦ The company’s direct labor rate is $18 per hour. Using the company’s activity based costing system, compute the customer margin of Eagle Wings.

cost accounting 416250

Use the following information to answer all five questions
Gerrad Manufacturing has projected sales for the next four months are shown in the tables below. The finished product requires 3 pounds
of raw materials and 10hours of direct labor. Gerrad tries to maintain a finished good ending inventory equal to the next two months of
sales and a raw material ending inventory equal to one half of the current month’s production needs.January’s beginning inventories
are expected to conform to company policy.
a. prepare a production budget for February,March, and April
b. Prepare a forecast of the units and cost of raw material that will be required for February, March, and April. The expected cost per pound
of raw mateial is expected to be $2 in February, $2.30 in March, and $2.40 in April.
c. Prepare a direct labor budget (assuming a $12 per hour rate) for February, March, and April.

obtain the reqression equation 416276

Using the data set E, answer the questions given below.

DATA SET E Microprocessor Speed (MHz) and Power Dissipation (watts) (n = 14 chips)

Chip Speed (MHz) Power (watts)
1989 Intel 80486 20 3
1993 Pentium 100 10
1997 Pentium II 233 35
1998 Intel Celeron 300 20
1999 Pentium III 600 42
1999 AMD Athlon 600 50
2000 Pentium 4 1300 51
2004 Celeron D 2100 73
2004 Pentium 4 3800 115
2005 Pentium D 3200 130
2007 AMD Phenom 2300 95
2008 Intel Core 2 3200 136
2009 Intel Core i7 2900 95
2009 AMD Phenom II 3200 125

Obtain the regression equation. (Round your answers to 3 decimal places.)

Y = X +

Calculate R2. (Round your answer to 3 decimal places.)

R2

problem 5 40 introduction to management accounting 416312

The Valasquez Company, a maker of a variety of metal and plastic products, is in the midst of a business downturn and is saddled with many idle facilities. Columbia Health Crae has appraoached Velasquez to produce 300,000 nonslide serving trays. columbil will pay $1.30 each. Valasquez predicts that its variable costs will be $1.40 each. Its fixed costs , which had been averaging $1 per unit on a variety of other products, wil now be spread over twice as much volume, however. The president commented, “Sure we’ll lose $.10 each on the variable costs, but we’ll gain $.50 per unit by spreading our fixed costs. Therefore, we should take the offer, because it represents an advantage of $.40 per unit.” Suppose the regular business had a current volume of 300,000 units, sales of $600,000, variable costs of $420,000 and fixed costs of $300,000. Do you agree with the president and Why?

principles of accounting ii listed here are the total costs associated with the prod 272276

Chapter 18 Handout Problem Problem #1 Listed here are the total costs associated with the production and sales of 50,000 sports water bottles manufactured by Thirst Quenchers Inc for the month March 2013. The water bottles sell for $6 each. Cost Element Cost Plastic for bottles $3.00 per bottle Wages of assembly workers ($10 per hour for 5,000 hours) $60,000 Rent on factory $6,000 Other operating expenses (advertising, freight expense, etc) $30,000 Office workers salaries $15,000 Factory Insurance $6,000 Quality control testing $7,000 Sales commissions $0.10 per bottle Factory equipment depreciation (straight line method) $5,000 Required 1. Complete the schedule on the answer sheet by entering EACH COST in the amount for the production of 50,000 units as (a) either a product cost (direct materials, direct labor or factory overhead) or a period cost. 2. Compute totals for each column. In other words, you should have a total for direct materials, direct labor and factory overhead for product costs and a total for period costs. Save yourself some time – use the sum function to add column totals. 3. Compute the cost of one water bottle. Think about this. What is included in the cost of making a product? 4. Assume that you sold all bottles produced for $6.00 per bottle. Prepare a basic income statement for the month of March 2013. This is similar in format to the one you made for the excel extra credit assignment. 5. From the income statement you prepare compute the gross profit rate and profit margin for the month of March 2013 Problem #2 Horton Foods bakes and sells bagels each week to food service operations. Among the costs are bakers’ salaries, $40,000; production management salaries, $25,000, equipment operating costs, $50,000; and flour and ingredient costs, $75,000

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 Problem #1 Plastic for bottles Rent on factory Office workers salaries Sales commissions Factory Insurance Quality control testing Cost element Cost by Function Product Period Totals include labeled computations Total Problem #2 bakers’ salaries production management salaries flour and ingredient costs Prime Conversion Problem #3 manufacturing statement production equipment operating costs Cost to produce one water bottle Remember , proper formatting and formulas Direct Materials Factory Overhead Factory equipment depre. Assembly line Wages apply the excel skills you have learned Direct Labor income statement Prepare an income statement for the month (please use formulas and format the values. 1. enter cost amounts for theproduction and sale of the water bottles in the appropriate columns Other operating expenses (you DO NOT need two columns for the values!!) You don’t need to include the formal heading. You only need to enter the contents 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 Problem #1 Plastic for bottles Rent on factory Office workers salaries Sales commissions Factory Insurance Quality control testing Cost element Cost by Function Product Period Totals include labeled computations Total Problem #2 bakers’ salaries production management salaries flour and ingredient costs Prime Conversion Problem #3 manufacturing statement production equipment operating costs Cost to produce one water bottle Remember , proper formatting and formulas Direct Materials Factory Overhead Factory equipment depre. Assembly line Wages apply the excel skills you have learned Direct Labor income statement Prepare an income statement for the month (please use formulas and format the values. 1. enter cost amounts for theproduction and sale of the water bottles in the appropriate columns Other operating expenses (you DO NOT need two columns for the values!!) You don’t need…

gourmet specialty coffee company gscc is a distributor and 272277

Gourmet Specialty Coffee Company (GSCC) is a distributor and processor of different blends of coffee. The company buys coffee beans from around the world and roasts, blends, and packages them for resale. GSCC currently has 12 different coffees that it offers to gourmet shops in one pound bags. The major cost is raw materials; however, there is a substantial amount of manufacturing overhead in the predominantly automated roasting and packing process. The company uses relatively little direct labor. Some of the coffees are very popular and sell in large volumes, while a few of the newer blends have very low volumes. GSCC prices its coffee at full product cost, including allocated overhead, plus a markup of 30 percent. If prices for certain coffees are significantly higher than market, adjustments are made. The company competes primarily on the quality of its products, but customers are price conscious as well.

Data for the 20×5 budget include manufacturing overhead of $12,000,000, which has been allocated on the basis of each products direct labor cost. The budgeted direct labor cost for 20×5 totals $1,200,000. Based on the sales budget and raw material budget, purchases and use of raw materials (mostly coffee beans) will total $5,800,000.

The expected prime costs for one pound bags of two of the companys products are as follows:

Jamaican Colombian

Direct material …………………$2.90 $3.90

Direct labor …………………… 0.4 0.4

GSCCs controller believes the traditional product costing system may be providing misleading cost information. She has developed an analysis of the 20×5 budgeted manufacturing overhead costs shown in the following chart. Data regarding the 20×5 production of Jamaican and Colombian coffee are shown in the following table. There will be no raw material inventory for either of these coffees at the beginning of the year.

1) Using GSCCs current product costing system: Determine the companys predetermined overhead rate using direct labor cost as the single cost driver.

1 b) Using GSCCs current product costing system: Determine the full product costs and selling prices of one pound of Jamaican coffee and one pound of Colombian coffee.

2. Develop a new product cost, using an activity based costing approach, for one pound of Jamaican coffee and one pound of Colombian coffee.

green glider corporation makes golf carts that it sells directly 272278

Green Glider Corporation makes golf carts that it sells directly to golf courses throughout the world. Several basic models are available, which are modified to suit the needs of each particular golf course. A golf course located in the Pacific Northwest, for example, would typically specify that its golf carts come equipped with retractable rain proof covers. In addition, each customer (i.e., golf course) customizes its golf carts with its own color scheme and logo. The company typically makes all of the golf carts for a customer before starting work on the next customer’s golf carts. Below are listed a number of activities and costs at Green Glider Corporation:

a. The purchasing department orders the specific color of paint specified by the customer from the company’s supplier.

b. A steering wheel is installed in a golf cart.

c. An outside attorney draws up a new generic sales contract for the company limiting Green Glider’s liability in case of accidents that involve its golf carts.

d. The company’s paint shop makes a stencil for a customer’s logo.

e. A sales representative visits an old customer to check on how the company’s golf carts are working out and to try to make a new sale.

f. The accounts receivable department prepares the bill for a completed order.

g. Electricity is used to heat and light the factory and the administrative offices.

h. A golf cart is painted.

i. The company’s engineer modifies the design of a model to eliminate a potential safety problem.

j. The marketing department has a catalogue printed and then mails copies to golf course managers.

k. Completed golf carts are individually tested on the company’s test track.

l. A new model golf cart is shipped to the leading golfing trade magazine to be evaluated for the magazine’s annual rating of golf carts.

Required:

Classify each of the costs or activities above as unit level, batch level, product level, customer level, or organization sustaining. In this case, customers are golf courses, products are models of the golf cart, a batch is a specific order from a customer, and units are individual golf carts.

hewlett packard hp is considered one of the best managed and m 272290

Hewlett Packard (HP) is considered one of the best managed and most innovative companies in the world. It continually has shown an ability to adapt to global competitive challenges through technical innovation and continual reassessment of its management and control mechanisms. Most applications of activity based costing by Hewlett Packard have been successful. But, over the period August 1988 to August 1989, the Colorado Springs Division of Hewlett Packard designed an activity based costing system with the goal of providing for better product costing and inventory valuation. It began implementation in November 1989 but halted the process in the summer of 1992. Since then, the Colorado Springs Division has made no further attempts to re implement a more expansive ABC approach.

Instructions

The March 1997 issue of Management Accounting contains an article by Steven P. Landry, Larry M. Wood, and Tim M. Lindquist about the Colorado Springs Division entitled ?oCan ABC Bring Mixed Results??? Read the article and answer the following questions.

(a) What went wrong at HP’s Colorado Springs Division in the design, development, and implementation of its activity based costing system?

(b) What conclusions were drawn from HP’s Colorado Springs Division experience? What does successful ABC implementation require?

process costing chapter 20 handout problem 272304

Process Costing Chapter 20 Handout Problem You may want to complete this problem with pencil before entering your answers in the Excel answer sheet. This will give you good practice for the test. (You will do something like this on Test #2) Also, use formulas on the excel answer sheet. It will save you time in case you make an error. Problem #1: Randolph Company uses a process costing system to account for the manufacture of its only product – the B Box. There is just one department process to complete the product. The units are started in the Assembly Department. When they are completed in that department they are transferred to finished goods inventory. Randolph Company uses the FIFO method. Materials are added at the beginning of the process and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the period in both departments. Information for both departments for March and April is given below: March Data and Results Quantities Beginning WIP inventory 0 units Units started in March 40,000 units WIP inventory 3/31 (40% complete) 10,000 units Costs WIP inventory 3/1 $0 Costs added this period: Direct materials $100,000 Conversion Costs (direct labor & overhead) $132,000 April Data and Results Quantities WIP inventory 4/1 ? Units started in April 80,000 units WIP inventory 4/30 (70% complete) 20,000 units Costs WIP inventory 4/1 ? Costs added this period: Direct materials $168,000 Conversion Costs 246,000 Required: 1. Prepare a production cost report for the month of March. Use the format shown in the PowerPoint presentation. 2. Prepare a production cost report for the month of April. Use the format shown in the PowerPoint presentation. Problem #2 The ledger of Grogan Company has the following work in process account: Work in Process Painting Production records show that there were 800 units in the beginning inventory, 20% complete, 1,200 units started, and 1,500 units transferred out. The units in ending inventory were 60% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process. Instructions: Answer the following questions (preparing a production cost report will make these questions easier to answer): 1. Complete the Work in Process – Painting t account as you compute the values asked for below. 2. How many units were actually worked on during the month of May? 3. How many units are in process at May 31? 4. What are the total costs to account for? 5. What is the unit materials cost for May? 6. What is the unit conversion cost for May? 7. What is the total cost of units started in April and finished in May? 8. What is the total cost of units started and finished in May? 9. What is the cost of the May 31 inventory? 10. If all the products completed and transferred out were sold for $17 per unit, what would be the gross profit earned. 11. What would be the gross profit% on the units that were completed and transferred out and then sold for $17 per unit?

Problem #1
Production Cost Report
March
QUANITITES
UNITS Charged to the Dept Physical Units
Beginning Inventory
Units started this period
Units to Account for
UNITS accounted for Direct Materials Conversion Costs
Beginning Inventory
Units started and finished
Total units transferred out
ending inventory
Units accounted for
COSTS
COSTS Charged to the dept Beg. Inventory Direct Materials Conversion Costs Totals
Beginning Inventory
Costs added this period
Costs to account for
equivlent units
Unit costs
COSTS accounted for
Beginning Inventory
Units started and finished
total costs transferred out
ending inventory
Costs accounted for
Production Cost Report
April
QUANITITES
UNITS Charged to the Dept Physical Units
Beginning Inventory
Units started this period
Units to Account for
UNITS accounted for Direct Materials Conversion Costs
Beginning Inventory
Units started and finished
Total units transferred out
ending inventory
Units accounted for
COSTS
COSTS Charged to the dept Beg. Inventory Direct Materials Conversion Costs Totals
Beginning Inventory
Costs added this period
Costs to account for
equivlent units
Unit costs
COSTS accounted for
Beginning Inventory
Units started and finished
total costs transferred out
ending inventory
Costs accounted for
Problem #2
Fill out this work in process account with the costs
transferred from this department
Work In Process
Beg. Inv 6,400
1 direct materials 8,400
2 direct labor 5,000
3 factory overhead 3,200
4 total WIP
5 transferred out
6 ending inventory
7
8
9
10 express as % with 1 decimal place (as it should be expressed)
(product cost report to use below)
Production Cost Report
Department:
QUANITITES
UNITS Charged to the Dept Physical Units
Beginning Inventory
Units started this period
Units to Account for
UNITS accounted for Direct Materials Conversion Costs
Beginning Inventory
Units started and finished
Total units transferred out
ending inventory
Units accounted for
COSTS
COSTS Charged to the dept Beg. Inventory Direct Materials Conversion Costs Totals
Beginning Inventory
Costs added this period
Costs to account for
equivlent units
Unit costs
COSTS accounted for
Beginning Inventory
Units started and finished
total costs transferred out
ending inventory
Costs accounted for

week 7 measuring and controlling performance 272306

Managing Finance (MNGFIN) Week 7: Measuring and controlling performance Advantages and disadvantages of divisional structure Textbook reading (Atrill & McLaney: Ch. 10) The global business environment has spawned some of the largest organisations ever, both in terms of financial size as well as physical reach. Such organisations are involved with myriad activities and operations—some similar, some completely unrelated. A difficult choice for decision makers within these companies is how to properly segment the organisation in a manner that ‘makes sense’ while also maximising performance. One of the most appropriate methods for structuring such large organisations is by division; this divisional structure has proven to be an adequate approach to measuring as well as controlling the operations within a company. There are no boilerplate rules that must be followed with regards to how an organisation is segmented; however, it has been fairly common to create and organise divisions based on products, services, or geographic location. By doing so, decision making is transferred from executive managers at the corporate headquarters to divisional managers, who are then given the responsibility of overseeing the activities and operations of the division and charged with allocated objectives in terms of profitability. This transfer of power is an important advantage of the divisional structure, as divisional managers are allowed more freedom in decision making. It is these individuals who are closer to the action, possess greater knowledge of specific conditions, and need the ability to make the vital decisions concerning the profitability of the division in a timely manner. With this power, divisional managers are also responsible for ensuring the performance of their division, creating a continuous motivating factor for such managers to meet certain standards. While the divisional structure carries certain advantages, it also has some drawbacks that need to be discussed. Because divisional managers are charged with ensuring profitability, they may be under pressure to undertake or avoid certain activities that could affect the short term profitability of the division. While this might make the division appear profitable for a short time, it may be very detrimental to the long term success of the division and possibly to the entire organisation. The need for the manager to show profitability may very well conflict with the overall goals that the organisation has set forth, or it may encourage the manager to avoid risk at the expense of hindering performance. Because of these possibilities, it is important that the performance of divisions be measured properly and within the context of longterm profitability. Measuring divisional profit Textbook reading (Atrill & McLaney: Ch. 10) As the previous topic showed, the divisional structure has many benefits with regards to enhancing the performance of the organisation. However, such a structure also creates the possibility for conflicting goals between managers and the organisation. To help control this dilemma, it is vital that the performance of the division be measured in such a manner that truly analyses profitability. The reading for this topic examines different considerations when measuring divisional profit, such as how much the division contributes to profitability after variable costs have been subtracted from sales revenue, which is referred to as the contribution margin. The reading then examines how much profit is controllable. Here, it is important do distinguish between controllable costs (those costs under the control of divisional managers) and non controllable costs (e.g., depreciation expense). Finally, the reading examines common expenses, which include both types of costs just mentioned. From the example provided in the textbook on page 394, you can see how profit can be measured in several different ways. The first of these measures is the contribution, which deducts the variable costs from the total sales revenue. If you recall from your previous study of break even analysis, the contribution margin is equal to the selling price per unit minus the variable costs per unit. This margin tells us how much is contributed to meeting the fixed costs. The second measure is controllable profit, which deducts the amount of costs under the control of the manager from the contribution. As managers of profit centres do not have complete control over some aspects, it is necessary to include only those costs that they can actually control. This measure is generally accepted as an appropriate measure of performance. The third measure is divisional profit before common expenses, which deducts the non controllable costs. This is also considered an important measure because managers may still be able to influence certain costs, even if they cannot fully control them. This measure may be a better indicator of the overall performance of the division, while controllable profit may be a better indicator of managerial performance. The final measure is the divisional net profit, which deducts common expenses incurred. These common expenses, which include marketing, accounting, human resources, information technology, and other functional activities, are allocated to divisions from the central office based on what is believed to be a ‘fair share’. Because this allocation can be ambiguous, divisional managers often dispute the inclusion of such costs when measuring performance. While these measures can provide some insight into the performance of a division, divisional profit is lacking as an overall measure of performance because it ignores the investment required to finance the division. The next topic includes a discussion of two methods used for enhanced measurement. Divisional performance measures (ROI and RI) Textbook reading (Atrill & McLaney: Ch. 10) Journal article reading (Zimmerman: pp. 98–109) It should be clear at this point that managers are responsible for increasing the wealth of shareholders. However, merely increasing the total amount of wealth is not an accurate measure; we must also be concerned with the degree to which wealth was increased. Return on investment (ROI) is an effective measure for profitability assessment. While you can inspect the formula for calculating ROI in your reading, it is simply the divisional profit divided by the assets used or invested in the division. This measure, stated as a percentage, evaluates the performance of divisional managers based on the amount of investment placed in their division or how well they utilised the assets available. While this method does incorporate the investment required, it still utilises the divisional profit measure. As previously discussed, the appropriate choice of measure of profit is open for debate, and as such, the choice might produce varying measures of ROI. Also, because ROI is a relative measure, it does help when comparing divisions that are of unequal size. The examples provided in the textbook help to illustrate the use of ROI as well as how it is affected by depreciation and book value. While ROI incorporates the amount of investment needed to sustain a division, it falls short in that it does not account for the cost of acquiring that investment. Residual income (RI) is a method that measures the amount of income created by a division that exceeds the amount needed to finance the investment. Consider the following example: An organisation has a widget division that requires a £500,000 investment to operate this year. The organisation raises this investment through the sale of stock as well as by issuing bonds. The cost of acquiring, or financing, this investment is 10%. This percentage represents the interest paid to bondholders and dividends paid to shareholders. The cost of financing the widget division is then £50,000 (£500,000 x 10%). If the widget division has a division profit of £70,000, then the RI of this division is £20,000 (£70,000 – £50,000). Therefore, the widget division is generating enough profit to cover the cost involved in financing, while also having excess returns, which is increasing the wealth of shareholders. You may remember an earlier discussion on economic value added (EVA® ). This method has some similarities to RI, as it measures the amount of wealth that has been generated for shareholders. Because the reading for this topic only briefly discusses the use of EVA® as a measure of divisional performance, the journal article for this week has been carefully selected to allow for expanded study. This article helps to demonstrate where EVA® can be effectively used and important considerations that managers must bear in mind when deciding which measure to utilise. Transfer pricing and its problems Textbook reading (Atrill & McLaney: Ch. 10) With the large size and reach of many organisations, particularly multinationals, it is possible, if not probable, that a division will sell goods or services to another division within the same organisation. How these products should be priced is a very important issue—one with many consideration and possibilities. This process of setting prices for inter divisional goods is known as transfer pricing. The process requires attention because inter divisional pricing will determine how performance is measured, and it is vital that this measurement be meaningful. Inter divisional trading requires that the selling division be able to record sales revenue, or it will incur all the costs with no possibility of profit. On the same line, the buying division must be charged with the costs of the goods supplied, or its profitability will not adequately reflect divisional performance. Transfer pricing must be considered carefully, as the transfer price of products or services can have significant ramifications for the divisions involved. Sharp increases or decreases in a transfer price can affect the profitability of a selling or buying division. For the division that sells the product inter divisionally, the correct setting of the price it will charge should be based on the concept of opportunity cost. As we have learned, divisional managers are judged on their ability to generate profits and increase shareholder wealth; thus, these managers are greatly concerned with how transfer prices are set. Such concern with transfer pricing may cause divisional managers to look elsewhere for products, driving down the profits of the selling division and the organisation as whole. While transfer pricing is between divisions, the parent organisation must also be involved. Your reading will outline several advantages of transfer pricing. Note that this aspect is of particular importance to multinational organisations with regards to taxation. The concentration of this topic has focused on such organisations that are producing tangible goods and transferring them to another division. However, transfer pricing is also relevant to service industries, where no physical product is transferred. Consider a legal firm comprising several divisions, each specialising in certain areas of law, such as bankruptcy, real estate, divorce, etc. While these divisions remain separate, it is possible that one division provides a service to another. If this organisation conducts its training internally, it would have a separate division specifically for this purpose. When training sessions or seminars are conducted, the training division would charge the other division for its services. While this example is simplistic, it does demonstrate that transfer pricing is relevant to service organisations and, thus, must be considered when discussing the topic. While transfer pricing may be essential to many organisations, there is still the issue of how to determine what price is to be charged. The authors explore various methods for setting transfer prices, including market price, variable cost, full cost, negotiated price, and differential price. While each of the methods has some merit, there also drawbacks that limit their uses. Although more thorough description is provided in the reading, make sure that you consider how each variation could benefit the division or the organisational as a whole. Careful analysis of how to set prices for transferred goods must be conducted by the organisation and its respective divisions to ensure that it is as equitable as possible. The examples provided in the text also help to set the context for each method and its applicability. Non financial measures in decision making Textbook reading (Atrill & McLaney: Ch. 10) Financial managers, accountants, line managers, division managers, and executive leadership have long been concerned with the financial performance of the organisation. Measuring profitability is important—this is how we ultimately determine if wealth has been added or not. However, there are other aspects of the organisation’s operations that can and must be measured to determine how well the company is doing. The authors discuss several areas on which organisations tend to concentrate—the more important ones being staff training/morale, product quality, and customer satisfaction. It is necessary to regularly evaluate these aspects of the organisation, rather than simply waiting until the end of the year to see if the division or company was profitable. It is these measures that determine whether the company, its employees, and managers are performing up to the standards that have been previously determined. With such measures in place, managers are able to determine whether corrective action is needed and if the division or business unit is on course to meet its goals. The authors provide some excellent examples of non financial measures (see Real World 10.11) to demonstrate the various areas or activities that an organisation may be concerned with analysing and understanding further. Remember that if an activity is to be measured, it should be relevant to the decision at hand, helping to improve the quality of information that a manager possesses. These non financial measures should also be tied in to the financial measures, such as ROI, RI, or EVA® .

compute the cost per cost driver for each of the three cost centres 272307

Problem #1 Activity Based Costing The local accounting firm of Dewey, Cheatum, and Howe has had many profitable years providing financial planning and tax services to retirees. Recent developments in do ityourself tax software have begun to erode business and the firm wants to take a closer look at costs. As one of the firm’s new hires you have been assigned to prepare an activity based cost analysis with the following data. The focus of the analysis is to compare the cost of providing financial planning versus tax preparation services. Your analysis reveals the following about cost centers and their respective drivers:

Required 1. Compute the cost per cost driver for each of the three cost centres. 2. Use the results from part 1 to allocate costs from each of the three cost centers to both financial planning and tax preparation. Compute total cost and average cost per customer for both financial planning and tax preparation

Document Preview:

Chapter 21 Handout Problem Problem #1 Activity Based Costing The local accounting firm of Dewey, Cheetum, and Howe has had many profitable years providing financial planning and tax services to retirees. Recent developments in do it yourself tax software have begun to erode business and the firm wants to take a closer look at costs. As one of the firm’s new hires you have been assigned to prepare an activity based cost analysis with the following data. The focus of the analysis is to compare the cost of providing financial planning versus tax preparation services. Your analysis reveals the following about cost centers and their respective drivers: Cost Center Cost Cost Driver Driver Quantity Professional salaries $ 350,000 Professional hours 7,000 total hours Internet access 21,000 Number of customers 1,500 total customers Occupancy costs 30,000 Square feet 2,000 total sq. feet Total Overhead costs $401,000 The two main service activities and their related data follow: Service Hours Customers Square Feet Financial Planning 3,000 500 800 Tax Preparation 4 ,00 0 1,000 1,200 Required 1. Compute the cost per cost driver for each of the three cost centers. 2. Use the results from part 1 to allocate costs from each of the three cost centers to both financial planning and tax preparation. Compute total cost and average cost per customer for both financial planning and tax preparation Analysis Component 3. Without providing computations, would the average cost of tax preparation be higher or lower if all center costs were allocated based on the number of customers alone? Explain Problem #2 – Allocating Joint Costs Windsboro Properties is developing a subdivision that includes 400 home lots. The 300 lots in the Canyon section are below a ridge and do not have view of the neighboring canyons and hill; the 100 lots in the Hilltop section offer…

accounting help 415139

Rusties Company recently implemented an activity based costing system. At the beginning of the year, management made the following estimates of cost and activity in the company’s five activity cost pools:

Activity Cost Pool Activity Measure Expected
Overhead
Cost
Expected Activity
Labor related Direct labor hours $ 18,000 2,000 DLHs
Purchase orders Number of orders $ 1,050 525 orders
Product testing Number of tests $ 3,500 350 tests
Template etching Number of templates $ 700 28 templates
General factory Machine hours $ 50,000 10,000 MHs

5.

Required:

1.

Compute the activity rate for each of the activity cost pools.

Activity Cost Pool Activity Rate
Labor related $ per DLH
Purchase orders $ per order
Product testing $ per test
Template etching $ per template
General factory $ per MH

ask your instructor a questioncheck my workreferencesebook & resources

6.

2.

The expected activity for the year was distributed among the company’s four products as follows:

Activity Cost Pool Expected Activity

Product A Product B Product C Product D
Labor related (DLHs) 500 100 700 700
Purchase orders (orders) 80 105 180 160
Product testing (tests) 200 60 0 90
Template etching (templates) 0 14 10 4
General factory (MHs) 3,400 2,200 1,800 2,600

Using the ABC data, determine the total amount of overhead cost assigned to each product.

Total
Overhead Cost
Product A $
Product B $
Product C $
Product D $

ryan ross 111 11 1111 oscar oleander 222 22 2222 clark carey 333 33 3333 a 415149

Ryan Ross (111 11 1111), Oscar Oleander (222 22 2222), Clark Carey (333 33 3333), and Kim Kardigan (444 44 4444) are equal members in ROCK the ages, LLC. ROCK serves as agents and managers for prominent musicians in the Los Angeles area. The LLC’s Federal ID number is 55 5555555. It uses the cash basis and the calendar year and began operations on January 1, 2000. Its current address is 6102 Wilshire Boulevard, Suite 2100, Los Angeles, CA 90036. ROCK was the force behind such music icons as Rhiannon and Ulster and has had a very profitable year. The following information was taken from the LLC’s income statement for the current year: Revenues: Fees and commissions $4,800,000 Taxable interest income from bank deposits 1,600 Tax exempt interest 3,200 Gains and losses on stock sales 4,000 Total revenues $4,808,800 Expenses: Advertising and public relations $ 420,000 Charitable contributions 8,000 Section 179 expense 20,000 Employee salaries 1,200,000 Guaranteed payment, Ryan Ross, office manager 600,000 Guaranteed payment, other members 900,000 Entertainment, subject to 50% disallowance 48,000 Travel 120,000 Legal and accounting fees 108,000 Office rentals paid 86,000 Interest expense on operating line of credit 6,000 Insurance premiums 16,000 Office expense 60,000 Payroll taxes 96,000 Utilities 12,000 Total expenses $3,700,000 During the past couple of years, ROCK has taken advantage of bonus depreciation and section 179 deductions and fully remodeled the premises and upgraded its leasehold improvements. This year, ROCK wrapped up its remodel with the purchase of $20,000 of office furniture for which it will claim a section 179 deduction. (For simplicity, assume that ROCK uses the same cost recovery methods for both tax and financial purposes.) There is no depreciation adjustment for alternative minimum tax purposes. ROCK invests much of its excess cash in non dividend paying growth stocks, and tax exempt securities. During the year, the LLC sold two securities. On June 15, 2011, ROCK purchased 1,000 shares of Tech, Inc. stock for $72,000; it sold those shares on December 15, 2011, for $60,000. On March 15, 2005, ROCK purchased 2,000 shares of BioLabs, Inc. stock for $104,000; it sold those shares for $120,000 on December 15, 2011. Net income per books is $1,108,800. The firm’s activities do not constitute “qualified production activities” for purposes of the section 199 deduction. On January 1, 2011, the members’ capital accounts equaled $160,000 each. No additional capital contributions were made in 2011. In addition to their guaranteed payments, each member withdrew $240,000 cash during the year. The LLC’s balance sheet as of December 31, 2011, is as follows: Beginning Ending Cash $ 340,000 ?? Tax exempt securities 80,000 80,000 Marketable securities 420,000 600,000 Leasehold improvements, furniture, and equipment 820,000 840,000 Accumulated depreciation (820,000) (840,000) Total assets $ 840,000 ?? Operating line of credit $ 200,000 $ 160,000 Capital, Ross 160,000 ?? Capital, Oleander 160,000 ?? Capital, Carey 160,000 ?? Capital, Kardigan 160,000 ?? Total liabilities and capital $ 840,000 $ ?? Assume that all debt is shared equally by the members. Each member has personally guaranteed the debt of the LLC. None of the members, all of whom are U.S. citizens, sold any portion of their interests in ROCK during the year. All of the entity’s financial operations are concentrated in California. The LLC had no foreign bank accounts or operations and no interest in any U.S. or foreign trusts, corporations, or partnerships. The LLC is not publicly traded and is not a statutory tax shelter. The LLC is not subject to consolidated audit procedures. Ryan Ross is the tax matters partner. The business code for “Agents and Managers for Artists, Athletes, Entertainers, and Other Public Figures” is 711410. ROCK is not a partner in any other partnership. The LLC’s form 1065 was prepared by Ryan Ross and sent to the Ogden, UT IRS Service Center. All members are active in LLC operations. a) Prepare form 1065, Schedule K, and relevant supporting schedules for ROCK the Ages, LLC, leaving blank any items where insufficient information has been provided. If you are using tax return preparation software, also prepare Form 4562 and Schedule D. (Note: You can assume that the answer to each “yes/no” question on Form 1065, page 3 is “no” unless otherwise discussed above.) b) Prepare Schedule K 1 for Ryan Ross, 15520 W. Earlson Street, Pacific Palisades, CA 90272

please help me quickly 415166

Sachs Brands’ defined benefit pension plan specifies annual retirement benefits equal to: 1.5% Af— service years Af— final year’s salary, payable at the end of each year. Angela Davenport was hired by Sachs at the beginning of 1999 and is expected to retire at the end of 2033 after 35 years’ service. Her retirement is expected to span 18 years. Davenport’s salary is $93,000 at the end of 2013 and the company’s actuary projects her salary to be $295,000 at retirement. The actuary’s discount rate is 7%.

Estimate by the accumulated benefits approach the amount of Davenport’s annual retirement payments earned as of the end of 2013.

What is the company’s accumulated benefit obligation at the end of 2013 with respect to Davenport?

If no estimates are changed in the meantime, what will be the accumulated benefit obligation at the end of 2016 (three years later) when Davenport’s salary is $130,000?

exercise 17 9 liquidity analysis and interpretation l o p3 415234

Sanderson Company’s year end balance sheets follow. At December 31 2012 2011 2010 Assets Cash $ 30,800 $ 35,625 $ 36,800 Accounts receivable, net 88,500 62,500 49,200 Merchandise inventory 111,500 82,500 53,000 Prepaid expenses 9,700 9,375 4,000 Plant assets, net 277,500 255,000 229,500 Total assets $ 518,000 $ 445,000 $ 372,500 Liabilities and Equity Accounts payable $ 128,900 $ 75,250 $ 49,250 Long term notes payable secured by mortgages on plant assets 97,500 102,500 82,500 Common stock, $10 par value 162,500 162,500 162,500 Retained earnings 129,100 104,750 78,250 Total liabilities and equity $ 518,000 $ 445,000 $ 372,500 The company’s income statements for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011, follow. Assume that all sales are on credit: For Year Ended December 31 2012 2011 Sales $ 672,500 $ 530,000 Cost of goods sold $ 410,225 $ 344,500 Other operating expenses 208,550 133,980 Interest expense 11,100 12,300 Income taxes 8,525 7,845 Total costs and expenses 638,400 498,625 Net income $ 34,100 $ 31,375 Earnings per share $ 2.10 $ 1.93 references Exercise 17 9 Part 1 (1) Compute days’ sales uncollected. (Use 365 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to the nearest whole number.) Days’ sales uncollected 2012 days 2011 days check my workeBook LinkView Hint #1references Exercise 17 9 Part 2 (2) Compute accounts receivable turnover. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.) Accounts receivable turnover 2012 times 2011 times check my workeBook LinkView Hint #1references Exercise 17 9 Part 3 (3) Compute inventory turnover. (Round your answers to 1 decimal place.) Inventory turnover 2012 times 2011 times 4. Exercise 17 9 Part 4 (4) Compute days’ sales in inventory. (Use 365 days a year. Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answers to the nearest whole number.) Days’ sales in inventory 2012 days 2011 days

chapter 06 homework 415239

Sandra’s Purse Boutique has the following transactions related to its top selling Gucci purse for the month of October 2012. Sandra’s Purse Boutique uses a periodic inventory system.

Date Transactions Units Cost per Unit Total Cost

October 1 Beginning inventory 8 $760 $ 6,080

October 4 Sale 4

October 10 Purchase 7 770 5,390

October 13 Sale 5

October 20 Purchase 6 780 4 ,680

October 28 Sale 9

October 30 Purchase 8 790 6,320

$22,470

1. Calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at October 31, 2012, using the specific identification method. The October 4 sale consists of purses from beginning inventory, the October 13 sale consists of 1 purse from beginning inventory and 4 purses from the October 10 purchase, and the October 28 sale consists of 3 purses from the October 10 purchase and 6 purses from the October 20 purchase. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

2. Using FIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at October 31, 2012. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

3. Using LIFO, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at October 31, 2012. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

4. Using weighted average cost, calculate ending inventory and cost of goods sold at October 31, 2012. (Round the weighted average cost per unit to 2 decimal places. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

variable costing segment variable costing income statement and effect 415304

Segment variable costing income statement and effect on income of change in operations Extreme Camping Company manufactures three sizes of extreme weather tents”small (S), medium (M), and large (L). The income statement has consistently indicated a net loss for the M size, and management is considering three proposals: (1) continue Size M, (2) discontinue Size M and reduce total output accordingly, or (3) discontinue Size M and conduct an advertising campaign to expand the sales of Size S so that the entire plant capacity can continue to be used. If Proposal 2 is selected and Size M is discontinued and production curtailed, the annual fixed production costs and fixed operating expenses could be reduced by $57,600 and $40,300, respectively. If Proposal 3 is selected, it is anticipated that an additional annual expenditure of $43,200 for the rental of additional warehouse space would yield an increase of 130% in Size S sales volume. It is also assumed that the increased production of Size S would utilize the plant facilities released by the discontinuance of Size M. The sales and costs have been relatively stable over the past few years, and they are expected to remain so for the foreseeable future. The income statement for the past year ended June 30, 2012, is as follows: Hide Hint(s) 1. Prepare an income statement for the past year in the variable costing format. Enter all amounts as positive numbers. Extreme Camping Company Contribution Margin by Size Segment For the Year Ended June 30, 2012 Size S Size M Size L Total Sales $ $ $ $ Variable cost of goods sold Manufacturing margin $ $ $ $ Variable operating expenses Contribution margin $ $ $ $ Fixed costs: Manufacturing costs $ Operating expenses Total fixed costs $ Income from operations $

chapter 11 comprehensive problem 3 24e warren reeves 415320

Selected transactions completed by Gampfer Company during its first fiscal year ending December 31 were as follows: Jan. 2. Issued a check to establish a petty cash fund of $3200 Mar. 14. Replenished the petty cash fund based on the following summary of petty cash receipts: office supplies, $1200; miscellaneous selling expense, $410; miscellaneous administrative expense, $620. Apr. 21. Purchased $22,400 of merchandise on account, term 1/10, n/30. The perpetual inventory system is used to account for inventory. May. 20. Paid the invoice of April 21 after the discount period has passed. 23. Received cash from daily cash sales for $15,120. The amount indicated by the cash register was $15,152. June 15. Received a 60 day, 10% note for $127,500 on the Cady account. Aug. 14. Received amount owed on June 15 note, plus interest at the maturity date. 18. Received $5,440 on the Yoder account and wrote off the remainder owed on a $6400 accounts receivable balance. (the allowance method is used in accounting for uncollectible receivables.) Sep. 9. Reinstated the Yoder account written off on August 18 and received $960 cash in full payment. 15. Purchased land by issuing a $480,000 90 day note to Ace Development Co., which discounted it at 8%. Oct. 17. Sold office equipment in exchange for $96000 cash plus receipt of a $64000, 90 day, 6% note. The equipment had a cost of $224,000 and accumulated depreciation of $44,800 as of October 17. Nov. 30. Journalized the monthly payroll for November, based on the following data: Salaries: Deductions: Sales salaries $96640 Income Tax withheld $28,090 Social security tax withheld $9,110 Medicare tax withheld $2,278 Office Salaries $55,200 Total $ 151,840 Unemployment tax rates: State unemployment 4.0% Federal unemployemnt0,8% Amount subject to unemployment taxes: state unemployment $5,000 Federal unemployment $5,000 30. Journalized the employer’s payroll taxes on the payroll Dec. 14. Journalized the payment of the September 15 note at maturity 31. The pension cost for the year was $136,000 of which $99,840 was paid to the pension plan trustee. INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Journalize the selected transactions 2. Based on the following data, prepare a bank reconciliation for December of the current year: a. Balance according to the bank statement at Dec. 31. $202,240 b. Balance according to the ledger at Dec. 31. $175,440 c. Checks outstanding at Dec. 31. $48,960 d. Deposit in transit, not recorded by bank, $21,120. e. Bank debit memo for service charges, $540 f. A cechk for $11,520 in payment of an invoice was incorrectly recorded in the accounts as $11,020. 3. Based on the bank reconciliation prepare in(2), journalize the entry or entries to be made by Gampfer company. 4. based on the following selected data, journalize the adjusting entries as of Dec. 31 of the current year: a. estimated uncollectible accounts at Dec. 31, $11,520, based on an aging of accounts receivable. The balance of Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at Dec. 31 was $1,200 (debit). b. The physical inventory on Dec. 31. indicated an inventory shrinkage of $2,360. c. Prepaid insurance expired during the year, $16,300. d. Office supplies used during the year, $2,800 e. Depreciation is computed as follows: Asset Cost Residual value Acquisition date useful life in years Depreciation method used Buildings $650,000 0 Jan. 2 50 Double declining balance Office Equip 176,000. 16000 Jan. 3. 5 Straight line Store Equip. 80,000 8000 July 1 10 Straight line f. A patent costing $36,000 when acquired on Jan. 2. has a remaining legal life of eight years and is expected to have value for six years. g. The cost of mineral rights was $390,000. Of the estimated deposit of 650,000 tons of ore, 38,400 tons were mined and sold during the year. h. Vacation pay expense for December, $7500. I. A product warranty was granted beginning Dec. 1 and covering a one year period. The estimated cost is 3% of sales, which totaled $1,350,000 in Dec. j. Interest was accrued on the note receivable received on Oct. 17. 5. Based on the following information and the post closing trial balance shown below, prepare a balance sheet in report form at Dec. 31. of the current year. The merchandise inventory is stated at cost by the LIFO method. The product warranty payable is a current liability Vacation pay payable: Current liability $5,100 Long term liability $2,400 The unfunded pension liability is a long term liability: Notes payable: Current liability: $50,000 Long term liability $450,000 Gamfer company post closing trial balance Dec. 31, 2012 Debit Credit Petty Cash 3200 Cash 174,400 Notes Receivable 64,000 Accounts receivable 336000 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11520 Merchandise inventory 230000 Interest receivable 800 prepaid insurance 32600 office supplies 9600 land 470400 buildings 650000 accumulated depreciation buildings 26000 office equipment 176000 accumulated depreciation office equipment 32000 store equipment 80000 accumulated depreciation store equipment 3600 mineral rights 390000 accumulated depletion 23040 patents 30000 social security tax payable 13513 mdeicare tax payable 3378 employees federal income tax payable 28090 state unemployment tax payable 40 federal unemployment tax payable 200 salaries payable 112612 accounts payable 224000 interest payable 20207 product warranty payable 40500 vacation pay payable 7500 unfunded pension liability 36160 notes payable 500000 J. Gampfer, Capital 1564640 2647000 2647000

accounting question 415362

At September 30, the end of Excel Company’s third quarter, the following stockholders’ equity accounts are reported.
Common stock, $12 par value $ 720,000
Paid in capital in excess of par value, common stock 180,000
Retained earnings 640,000

In the fourth quarter, the following entries related to its equity are recorded.
Date General Journal Debit Credit
Oct. 2 Retained Earnings 120,000
Common Dividend Payable 120,000
Oct. 25 Common Dividend Payable 120,000
Cash 120,000
Oct. 31 Retained Earnings 150,000
Common Stock Dividend Distributable 72,000
Paid In Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock 78,000
Nov. 5 Common Stock Dividend Distributable 72,000
Common Stock, $12 Par Value 72,000
Dec. 1 Memo”Change the title of the common stock account to reflect the new par value of $4.
Dec. 31 Income Summary 420,000
Retained Earnings 420,000

Required:
2.

Complete the following table showing the equity account balances at each indicated date (include the balances from September 30). (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Oct. 2 Oct. 25 Oct. 31 Nov. 5 Dec. 1 Dec. 31
Common stock $ $ $ $ $ $
Common stock dividend distributable
Paid in capital in excess of par, common stock
Retained earnings






Total equity $ $ $ $ $ $












snow cleaners inc had net income of 494 592 for its fiscal year ended november 415459

Snow Cleaners, Inc,, had net income of $494,592 for its fiscal year ended November 30, 2012. During the year, the company had outstanding 64,000 shares of 12 percent $40 par value preferred stock, and 37,289 shares of common stock. Calculate the basic earnings per share of common stock for the 2012 fiscal year. Gwinnett Park Co. reported net income of $916,800 for its fiscal year ended September 30,2012. At the beginning of that year, 150, 000 shares of common stock were outstanding. On February 1, 2012, an additional 30,000 shares were issues. On August 1, 2012, 12,000 shares were purchased at treasury stock. During the year, the company paid the annual dividend of on 44,000 shares at 8%, $60 per value preferred stock that were outstanding during the entire fiscal year. Calculate the earnings per share of common stock for the year ended September 30, 2012.

accounting 212 help please 415486

Soldrum Company is considering automating its production facility. The initial investment in automation would be $13.10 million, and the equipment has a useful life of 10 years with a residual value of $1.10 million. The company will use straight line depreciation. Soldrum could expect a production increase of 33,000 units per year and a reduction of 20 percent in the labor cost per unit.

Current
(no automation)
Proposed
(automation)
Production and sales volume 72,000 units 105,000 units
Per Unit Total Per Unit Total
Sales revenue $ 94 ? $ 94 ?
Variable costs
Direct materials $ 15 $ 15
Direct labor 20 ?
Variable manufacturing overhead 9 9




Total variable manufacturing costs 44 ?
Contribution margin $ 50 ? $ 54 ?
Fixed manufacturing costs 1,210,000 2,200,000


Net income ? ?





rev: 04_11_2012

1. value:

10.00 points

Requirement 1:

Complete the preceding table showing the totals. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Current
(no automation)
Proposed
(automation)
Production and sales volume 72,000 units 105,000 units
Per Unit Total Per Unit Total
Sales revenue $ 94 $ $ 94 $
Variable costs
Direct materials $ 15 $ 15
Direct labor 20
Variable manufacturing overhead 9 9




Total variable manufacturing costs 44
Contribution margin $ 50 $ 54
Fixed manufacturing costs 1,210,000 2,200,000




Net income $ $









Worksheet Difficulty: Hard

2. value:

10.00 points

Requirement 2:

Determine the project’s accounting rate of return. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Accounting rate of return %
Worksheet Difficulty: Hard

3. value:

10.00 points

Requirement 3:
Determine the project’s payback period. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.)
Payback period years

4. value:

10.00 points

Requirement 4:

Using a discount rate of 13 percent, calculate the net present value (NPV) of the proposed investment. (Round your intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount. Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net present value $

Worksheet Difficulty: Hard

5. value:

10.00 points

Requirement 5:

Recalculate the NPV using a 8% discount rate. (Round your intermediate calculations to 4 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net present value $

rev: 04_11_2012

accounting 415521

Please solve.

Module 7 Assignment:
Amy’s Fashions ended the year 20XX with the following balance:
Amy’s Fashions Amy’s Fashions
Comparative Balance Sheet Comparative Income Statement
December 31, 20XX For the Year Ended 20XX
20XX 20WW Increase (Decrease) 20XX
ASSETS Revenues:
Current Assets: sales 1,100,000
Cash and cash equivalents 140,350 95,900 44,450 Cost of Goods Sold 710,000
Accounts receivable 95,300 102,300 7,000 Gross Profit 390,000
Inventory 165,200 157,900 7,300 Operating Expenses:
Prepaid expenses 6,240 5,860 380 Depreciation 23,500
Investments (long term) 35,700 84,700 49,000 Patent Amortization 7,000
Plant Assets: Other operating expenses 196,000
Land 75,000 90,000 15,000 Total Operating Expenses: 226,500
Buildings (net) 303,700 201,700 102,000 Income from operations 163,500
Equipment, net 279,800 290,300 10,500 Other Income:
Patents 58,000 65,000 7,000 Gain on sale of investments 11,000
Total Assets 1,159,290 1,093,660 65,630 Other Expenses:
Interest Expense 26,000 15,000
LIABILITIES Income before income tax 148,500
Current Liabilities: Income tax expense 50,000
Accounts Payable 43,500 46,700 3,200 Net Income 98,500
Accrued Liabilities 14,000 12,500 1,500 98,500
Income Taxes Payable 7,900 8,400 500
Dividends Payable 14,000 10,000 4,000
Long Term Liabilities: 0
Mortgage note payable 40,000 40,000
Bonds Payable 150,000 250,000 100,000
Total Liabilities 269,400 327,600 58,200
STOCKHOLDER’S EQUITY 0
Common Stock 450,000 375,000 75,000
Additional paid in capital common 66,250 41,250 25,000
Retained Earnings 373,640 349,810 23,830
Total Stockholders’ Equity 889,890 766,060 123,830
Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity 1,159,290 1,093,660 65,630
1 Using the direct method, prepare the cash flows from operations for Amy’s Fashions for the year ended 20XX.
Amy’s Fashions
Statement of Cash Flows Direct Method
For the Year Ended 20XX

spacer company has two service departments and two operating departments budgeted 415536

Spacer Company has two service departments and two operating departments. Budgeted costs and budgeted activity in the various departments for last year are shown below: Custodial Cutting Assembly Services Cafeteria Department Department Departmental costs $50,400 $28,000 $120,000 $200,000 Square feet occupied 500 1,000 4,000 5,000 Number of employees 10 15 75 100 Machine hours 10,000 15,000 Service department costs are allocated to operating departments with the costs of Custodial Services allocated on the basis of square feet of space occupied and the costs of the Cafeteria on the basis of number of employees. The departmental costs for the cutting and assembly departments are overhead costs. Predetermined overhead rates in the Cutting and Assembly departments are based on machine hours. 1. Assume that the company uses the direct method of allocation. The predetermined overhead rate in the Assembly Department would be closest to: A) $16.27 B) $15.00 C) $15.87 D) $16.00 2. Assume that the company uses the step method of allocation with Custodial Services allocated first. The amount of Custodial Services cost allocated to the Assembly Department would be: A) $0 B) $28,000 C) $24,000 D) $25,200

specialty toysa 415546

Specialty Toys Specialty Toys, Inc. sells a variety of new and innovative children’s toys. Management learned that the preholiday season is the best time to introduce a new toy, because many families use this time to look for new ideas for December holiday gifts. When Specialty discovers a new toy with good market potential, it chooses an October market entry date. In order to get toys in its stores by October, Specialty places one time orders with its manufacturers in June or July of each year. Demand for children’s toys can be highly volatile. If a new toy catches on, a sense of shortage in the marketplace often increases the demand to high levels and large profits can be realized. However, new toys can also flop, leaving Specialty stuck with high levels of inventory that must be sold at reduced prices. The most important question the company faces is deciding how many units of a new toy should be purchased to meet anticipated sales demand. If too few are purchased, sales will be lost; if too many are purchased, profits will be reduced because of low prices realized in clearance sales. For the coming season, Specialty plans to introduce a new product called WeatherTeddy. This variation of a talkingteddy bear is made by a company in Taiwan. When a child presses Teddy’s hand,the bear begins to talk. A built in barometer selects one of five responses that predict the weather conditions. The responses range from “It looks to be a very nice day! Have fun” to “I think it may rain today. Don’t forget your umbrella.” Tests with the product show that, even though it is not a perfect weather predictor, its predictions are surprisingly good. Several of Specialty’s managers claimed Teddy gave predictions of the weather that were as good as many local television weather forecasters. As with other products, Specialty faces the decision of how many Weather Teddy units to order for the upcoming holiday season. Members of the management team suggested order quantities of 15,000, 18,000, 24,000, or 28,000 units. The wide range of order quantities indicates considerable disagreement concerning the market potential. The product management team asks you for an analysis of the stock out probabilities for various order quantities, an estimate of the profit potential, and to help make an order quantity recommendation. Specialty expects to sell Weather Teddy for $24 based on a cost of $16 per unit. If inventory remains after the holiday season, Specialty will sell all surplus inventories for $5 per unit. After reviewing the sales history of similar products, Specialty’s senior forecaster predicted an expected demand of 20,000 units with a .95 probability that demand would be between 10,000 units and 30,000 units. Management Report Prepare a managerial report that addresses the following issues and recommends an order quantity for the Weather Teddy product. 1. Use the sales forecaster’s prediction to describe a normal probability distribution that can be used to approximate thedemand distribution. Sketch the distribution and show its mean and standard deviation. 2. Compute the probability of a stock out for the order quantities suggested by members of the management team. 3. Compute the projected profit for the order quantities suggested by the management team under three scenarios: worst case in which sales = 10,000 units, most likely case in which sales = 20,000 units and best case in which sales = 30,000 units. 4. One of Specialty’s managers felt that the profit potential was so great that the order quantity should have a 70% chance of meeting demand and only a 30% chance of any stock outs. What quantity would be ordered under this policy, and what is the projected profit under the three sales scenarios? 5. Provide your own recommendations for an order quantity and note the associated profit projections. Provide a rationale for your recommendation.

advanced products corporation has supplied the following data 272155

Advanced Products Corporation has supplied the following data from its activity based costing system:







During the year, Advanced Products completed one order for a new customer, Shenzhen Enterprises. This customer did not order any other products during the year. Data concerning that order follow:



Required:

1. Using Exhibit 8—5 as a guide, prepare a report showing the first stage allocations of overhead costs to the activity cost pools.

2. Using Exhibit 8—6 as a guide, compute the activity rates for the activity cost pools.

3. Prepare a report showing the overhead costs for the order from Shenzhen Enterprises including customer support costs.

4. Using Exhibit 8—11 as a guide, prepare a report showing the customer margin for ShenzhenEnterprises.

after reading an article about activity based costing in a trade 272158

After reading an article about activity based costing in a trade journal for the furniture industry, Adriana Lopez wondered if it was time to critically analyze overhead costs at Success Systems. In a recent month, Lopez found that setup costs, inspection costs, and utility costs made up most of its overhead. Additional information about overhead follows.

?

.:.

Overhead has been applied to output at a rate of 50% of direct labor costs. The following data pertain to Job 6.15.

Direct materials . . . . . . . . $2,500

Direct labor . . . . . . . . . . . $3,500

Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 batches

Number of parts . . . . . . . 400 parts

Machine hours . . . . . . . . . 600 machine hours

Required

1. Classify each of its three overhead activities as unit level, batch level, product level, or facility level.

2. What is the total cost of Job 6.15 if Success Systems applies overhead at 50% of direct labor cost?

3. What is the total cost of Job 6.15 if Success Systems uses activity based costing?

4. Which approach to assigning overhead gives a better representation of the costs incurred to produce Job 6.15? Explain.

after reviewing the new activity based costing system that janis 272159

After reviewing the new activity based costing system that Janis McGee has implemented at Joplin Industries’ Port Arthur manufacturing facility, Kris Kristoff, the production supervisor, believes that he can reduce production costs by reducing the time spent on machine setups. He has spent the last month working with employees in the plant to change over the machines more quickly with the same reliability. He plans to produce 100,000 units of J25P and 40,000 units of J40X in the first quarter. He believes that with his more efficient setup routine, he can reduce the number of setup hours for both the J25P and the J40X products by 25 percent.

Required

a. Refer to Exhibits 9.13 through 9.16. Compute the amount of overhead allocated to the J25P and the J40X cameras for the first quarter using activity based costing. Assume that all events are the same in the first quarter as in the third quarter (the text example) except for the number of setup hours. Assume the cost of a setup hour remains at $900.

b. Assume that Joplin had used machine hours and a department allocation method to allocate its overhead and that the setup hour rate for the first quarter is $900. Could Kris have made the cost reductions that he planned? What are the advantages and disadvantages of activity based costing compared to the traditional volume based allocation methods?

andre preneur supervises two consulting jobs in the consulting f 272165

Andre Preneur supervises two consulting jobs in the consulting firm of Dewey, Cheatham, and Howe, which does studies on environmental cleanup. One of the consulting jobs is for the Canadian government the other is for General Electric, Inc. After receiving the monthly financial reports on the two jobs, he immediately called his boss to report that costs were way over budget on the General Electric job. ?~?~The job is only about three fourths complete, but we’ve spent all the money that we had budgeted for the entire job,’’ he said. ?~?~You’d better watch these job costs more carefully in the future,’’ his boss advised. ?~?~Meanwhile, charge the rest of the costs needed to complete the General Electric job to your Canadian government job. We’re under budget on that job, plus we get reimbursed for costs on the government job.’’

a. What should Andre do?

b. Does it matter that Andre’s consulting firm is reimbursed for costs on the Canadian government job? Explain.

as the chief executive officer of a large corporation you 272171

As the chief executive officer of a large corporation, you have decided after discussion with production and accounting personnel to implement activity based management concepts. Your goal is to reduce cycle time and, in turn, costs. A primary way to accomplish this goal is to install highly automated equipment in your plant, which would then displace approximately 60 percent of your workforce. Your company is the major employer in the area of the country where it is located.

a. Discuss the pros and cons of installing the equipment from the perspective of your (1) stockholders, (2) employees, and (3) customers.

b. How would you explain to a worker that his or her job is a non value added activity?

c. What alternatives might you have that could accomplish the goal of reducing cycle time but not create economic havoc for the local area?

balfore office makes metal five drawer desks and occasionally 272173

Balfore Office makes metal five drawer desks and, occasionally, takes custom orders. The company’s overhead costs for a month in which no custom desks are produced are as follows:

Purchasing Department for raw material and supplies (20 purchase

orders per month) ………………………………………………$10,000

Setting up machines for production runs (4 times per month after

maintenance checks) ……………………………………………. 2,480

Utilities (based on 6,400 machine hours) ……………………………… 320

Supervisor salaries …………………………………………………….. 16,000

Machine and building depreciation (fixed) …………………………… 11,000

Quality control and inspections performed on random selection

of desks each day; one quality control worker ……………….. 5,000

Total overhead costs ………………………………………………….$44,800

Factory operations are highly automated, and overhead is allocated to products based on machine hours.

In July 2010, six orders were filled for custom desks. Selling prices were based on charges for actual direct material, actual direct labor, and the overhead rate per machine hour. During July, the following costs were incurred for 6,400 hours of machine time:

Purchasing Department for raw material and supplies (44 purchase

orders per month) ………………………………………………..$12,400

Setting up machines for production runs (18 times) …………………… 3,280

Utilities (based on 6,400 machine hours) ……………………………… 320

Supervisor salaries …………………………………………………….. 16,000

Machine and building depreciation (fixed) …………………………… 11,000

Quality control and inspections performed on random selection

of desks each day; one quality control worker ……………….. 5,960

Engineering design and specification costs ………………………….. 6,000

Total overhead costs ………………………………………………….$54,960

a. How much of the purchasing department cost is variable and how much is fixed?

What types of purchasing costs would fit into each of these categories?

b. Why might the number of machine setups have increased from 4 to 18 when only six custom orders were received?

c. Why might the cost of quality control and inspections have increased?

d. Why were engineering design and specification costs included during July?

e. If Balfore Office were to adopt activity based costing, what would you suggest as the cost drivers for each of the overhead cost items?

f. What is the current predetermined overhead rate based on machine hours? Do you think the custom orders should have been priced using this rate per machine hour?

Explain the reasoning for your answer.

cd express inc provides cd duplicating services to software 272180

CD Express, Inc., provides CD duplicating services to software companies. The customer provides a master CD from which CD Express makes copies. An order from a customer can be for a single copy or for thousands of copies. Most jobs are broken down into batches to allow smaller jobs, with higher priorities, to have access to the machines.

A number of activities carried out at CD Express are listed below.

a. Sales representatives’ periodic visits to customers to keep them informed about the services provided by CD Express.

b. Ordering labels from the printer for a particular CD.

c. Setting up the CD duplicating machine to make copies from a particular master CD.

d. Loading the automatic labeling machine with labels for a particular CD.

e. Visually inspecting CDs and placing them by hand into protective plastic cases prior to shipping.

f. Preparation of the shipping documents for the order.

g. Periodic maintenance of equipment.

h. Lighting and heating the company’s production facility.

i. Preparation of quarterly financial reports.

Required:

Classify each of the activities above as either a unit level, batch level, product level, customer level, or organization sustaining activity. An order to duplicate a particular CD is a product level activity. Assume the order is large enough that it must be broken down into batches.

choice foods inc uses activity based costing to determine produ 272181

Choice Foods Inc. uses activity based costing to determine product costs. For each activity listed in the left column, match an appropriate activity base from the right column. You may use items in the activity base list more than once or not at all.

Activity Activity Base

Accounting reports …………….Engineering change orders

Customer return processing ……Kilowatt hours used

Electric power ………………….Number of accounting reports

Human resources ………………Number of customers

Inventory control ………………Number of customer orders

Invoice and collecting …………Number of customer returns

Machine depreciation ………….Number of employees

Materials handling ……………..Number of inspections

Order shipping …………………Number of inventory transactions

Payroll ………………………….Number of machine hours

Production control ……………..Number of material moves

Production setup ……………….Number of payroll checks processed

Purchasing ……………………..Number of production orders

Quality control …………………Number of purchase orders

………………………………….Number of setups

minicase 1 272183

Jefferson Jerome is interested in purchasing “Art Specialists, Inc.”, an auction house. The company receives the right to sell art, but not to purchase the art themselves, for a 5% commission. Art Specialists rents office space and holds its auctions at local hotels.

Art Specialists, Inc.

Unadjusted Trial Balance

December 31, 2009

Cash

$ 65,000.00

Accounts receivable

$ 36,000.00

Supplies

$ 8,000.00

Equipment

$ 53,000.00

Accumulated Depreciation

$ 14,500.00

Accounts payable

$ 5,600.00

Dividends

$ 50,000.00

Capital stock

$ 25,000.00

Retained earnings

$ 84,900.00

Commission income

$ 250,000.00

Rent Expense

$ 20,000.00

Wages Expense

$ 70,000.00

Auction Expenses

$ 56,000.00

Depreciation Expenses

$ 7,000.00

Membership Expenses

$ 6,000.00

Supplies Expense

$ 9,000.00

TOTAL

$ 380,000.00

$ 380,000.00

consider the following characteristics of either a jit productio 272193

Consider the following characteristics of either a JIT production system or a traditional production system.

a. Products are produced in large batches.

b. Large stocks of finished goods protect against lost sales if customer demand is higher than expected.

c. Suppliers make frequent deliveries of small quantities of raw materials.

d. Employees do a variety of jobs, including maintenance and setups as well as operating machines.

e. Machines are grouped into self contained production cells or production lines.

f. Machines are grouped according to function. For example, all cutting machines are located in one area.

g. The final operation in the production sequence ?opulls?? parts from the preceding operation.

h. Each employee is responsible for inspecting his or her own work.

i. Management works with suppliers to ensure defect free raw materials.

Requirement

1. Indicate whether each is characteristic of a JIT production system or a traditional production system.

consider the following conversation between leonard bryner pres 272194

Consider the following conversation between Leonard Bryner, president and manager of a firm engaged in job manufacturing, and Chuck Davis, certified management accountant, the firm’s controller.

Leonard: Chuck, as you know, our firm has been losing market share over the past three years. We have been losing more and more bids, and I don’t understand why. At first, I thought that other firms were undercutting simply to gain business, but after examining some of the public financial reports, I believe that they are making a reasonable rate of return. I am beginning to believe that our costs and costing methods are at fault.

Chuck: I can’t agree with that. We have good control over our costs. Like most firms in our industry, we use a normal job costing system. I really don’t see any significant waste in the plant.

Leonard: After talking with some other managers at a recent industrial convention, I’m not so sure that waste by itself is the issue. They talked about activity based management, activity based costing, and continuous improvement. They mentioned the use of something called ?~?~activity drivers’’ to assign overhead. They claimed that these new procedures can help to produce more efficiency in manufacturing, better control of overhead, and more accurate product costing. A big deal was made of eliminating activities that added no value. Maybe our bids are too high because these other firms have found ways to decrease their overhead costs and to increase the accuracy of their product costing.

Chuck: I doubt it. For one thing, I don’t see how we can increase product costing accuracy. So many of our costs are indirect costs. Furthermore, everyone uses some measure of production activity to assign overhead costs. I imagine that what they are calling ?~?~activity drivers’’ is just some new buzzword for measures of production volume. Fads in costing come and go. I wouldn’t worry about it. I’ll bet that our problems with decreasing sales are temporary. You might recall that we experienced a similar problem about 12 years ago—it was 2 years before it straightened out.

Required:

1. Do you agree or disagree with Chuck Davis and the advice that he gave Leonard Bryner? Explain.

2. Was there anything wrong or unethical in the behavior that Chuck Davis displayed?

Explain your reasoning.

3. Do you think that Chuck was well informed—that he was aware of the accounting implications of ABC and that he knew what was meant by cost drivers? Should he have been well informed? Review (in Chapter 1) the first category of the standards of ethical conduct for management accountants. Do any of these standards apply in Chuck’s case?

curtis rich the cost accountant for hi power mower company rec 272200

Curtis Rich, the cost accountant for Hi Power Mower Company, recently installed activity based costing at Hi Power’s St. Louis lawn tractor (riding mower) plant where three models—the 8 horsepower Bladerunner, the 12 horsepower Quickcut, and the 18 horsepower Supercut—are manufactured.

Curtis’s new product costs for these three models show that the company’s traditional costing system had been significantly undercosting the 18 horsepower Supercut. This was due primarily to the lower sales volume of the Supercut compared to the Bladerunner and the Quickcut. Before completing his analysis and reporting these results to management, Curtis is approached by his friend Ed Gray, who is the production manager for the 18 horsepower Supercut model. Ed has heard from one of Curtis’s staff about the new product costs and is upset and worried for his job because the new costs show the Supercut to be losing, rather than making, money. At first, Ed condemns the new cost system, whereupon Curtis explains the practice of activity based costing and why it is more accurate than the company’s present system. Even more worried now, Ed begs Curtis, ?oMassage the figures just enough to save the line from being discontinued. You don’t want me to lose my job, do you? Anyway, nobody will know.??

Curtis holds firm but agrees to recompute all his calculations for accuracy before submitting his costs to management.

Instructions

(a) Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

(b) What, if any, are the ethical considerations in this situation?

(c) What are Curtis’s ethical obligations to the company? To his friend?

delance co makes electronic components chris delance the pr 272209

Delance & Co. makes electronic components. Chris Delance, the president, recently instructed vice president Jim Bruegger to develop a total quality control program. ?oIf we don’t at least match the quality improvements our competitors are making,?? he told Bruegger, ?owe’ll soon be out of business.?? Bruegger began by listing various ?ocosts of quality?? that Delance incurs. The first six items that came to mind were:

a. Costs incurred by Delance customer representatives traveling to customer sites to repair defective products, $15,000.

b. Lost profits from lost sales due to reputation for less than perfect products, $60,000.

c. Costs of inspecting components in one of Delance’s production processes, $25,000.

d. Salaries of engineers who are redesigning components to withstand electrical overloads, $80,000.

e. Costs of reworking defective components after discovery by company inspectors, $40,000.

F. Costs of electronic components returned by customers, $55,000.

Requirement

1. Classify each item as a prevention cost, an appraisal cost, an internal failure cost, or an external failure cost. Then, determine the total cost of quality by category.

you are an accountant in a medium sized manufacturing company you have b 272214

You are an accountant in a medium sized manufacturing company. You have been asked to mentor an accounting clerk who is new to your accounting department.

  • Explain why adjusting entries are necessary.
  • Describe the 4 types of adjusting entries, and provide a manufacturing industry example of each.
  • Describe how these entries would be recorded in a computerized accounting system.
  • Describe 1 ethical issue that could result from the preparation of these manufacturing entries.

The Accounting Cycle

To organize a business, you would need an attorney, a banker, a business plan, a

budget, capital funds, an idea, and a research project. The United States Small Business

Administration (SBA) website gives a lot of details about starting a business and how

to finance the venture.

The basic accounting equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity.

Assets are property, plant, and equipment owned by the business. Assets include cash,

accounts receivable, notes receivable, equipment, inventory, buildings, land, patents,

and goodwill.

Liabilities are debts owed by the business that are waiting to be paid. Liabilities

include accounts payable, notes payable, mortgages payable, wages payable, taxes

payable, and all other payables.

Owner’s equity is the ownership of the business. Owner’s equity is everything

contributed by the owner or owners of the business. Owner’s equity looks different for

sole proprietors and partners accounts than it does for corporations, but both types of

accounts include retained earnings.

Sole proprietors and partners accounts are the same. They list the name of each owner,

any capital, and the name of each owner’s drawing account.

Corporations have categories of stock instead of the individual names of owners, and

Document Preview:

Assignment Type: Individual Project   Deliverable Length: 3 pages    ?Points Possible: 125   Due Date: 2/23/2013 11:59:59 PM CT     ?? You are an accountant in a medium sized manufacturing company. You have been asked to mentor an accounting clerk who is new to your accounting department. Explain why adjusting entries are necessary. Describe the 4 types of adjusting entries, and provide a manufacturing industry example of each. Describe how these entries would be recorded in a computerized accounting system. Describe 1 ethical issue that could result from the preparation of these manufacturing entries. The Accounting Cycle To organize a business, you would need an attorney, a banker, a business plan, a budget, capital funds, an idea, and a research project. The United States Small Business Administration (SBA) website gives a lot of details about starting a business and how to finance the venture. The basic accounting equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owner’s Equity. Assets are property, plant, and equipment owned by the business. Assets include cash, accounts receivable, notes receivable, equipment, inventory, buildings, land, patents, and goodwill. Liabilities are debts owed by the business that are waiting to be paid. Liabilities include accounts payable, notes payable, mortgages payable, wages payable, taxes payable, and all other payables. Owner’s equity is the ownership of the business. Owner’s equity is everything contributed by the owner or owners of the business. Owner’s equity looks different for sole proprietors and partners accounts than it does for corporations, but both types of accounts include retained earnings. Sole proprietors and partners accounts are the same. They list the name of each owner, any capital, and the name of each owner’s drawing account. Corporations have categories of stock instead of the individual names of owners, and there are no drawing accounts for stockholders. If stockholders want to make a withdrawal,…

Attachments:

durban metal products ltd of the republic of south 272223

Durban Metal Products, Ltd., of the Republic of South Africa makes specialty metal parts used in applications ranging from the cutting edges of bulldozer blades to replacement parts for Land Rovers. The company uses an activity based costing system for internal decision making purposes. The company has four activity cost pools as listed below:



The managing director of the company would like information concerning the cost of a recently completed order for heavy duty trailer axles. The order required 200 direct labor hours, 4 hours of product testing, and 2 sales calls.

Required:

Prepare a report summarizing the overhead costs assigned to the order for heavy duty trailer axles. What is the total overhead cost assigned to theorder?

east valley hospital is a primary medical care facility and 272225

East Valley Hospital is a primary medical care facility and trauma center that serves 11 small, rural midwestern communities within a 40 mile radius. The hospital offers all the medical/surgical services of a typical small hospital. It has a staff of 18 full time doctors and 20 part time visiting specialists. East Valley has a payroll of 150 employees consisting of technicians, nurses, therapists, managers, directors, administrators, dieticians, secretaries, data processors, and janitors.

Instructions

With the class divided into groups, discuss and answer the following.

(a) Using your (limited, moderate, or in depth) knowledge of a hospital’s operations, identify as many activities as you can that would serve as the basis for implementing an activity based costing system.

(b) For each of the activities listed in (a), identify a cost driver that would serve as a valid measure of the resources consumed by the activity.

ellix company manufactures two models of ultra high fidelity 272227

Ellix Company manufactures two models of ultra high fidelity speakers, the X200 model and the X99 model. Data regarding the two products follow:



Additional information about the company follows:

a. Model X200 requires $72 in direct materials per unit, and model X99 requires $50.

b. The direct labor rate is $10 per hour.

c. The company has always used direct labor hours as the base for applying manufacturing overhead cost to products.

d.Model X200 is more complex to manufacture than model X99 and requires the use of special equipment.

e. Because of the special work required in (d) above, the company is considering the use of activity based costing to apply manufacturing overhead cost to products. Three activity cost pools have been identified as follows:



Required:

1. Assume that the company continues to use direct labor hours as the base for applying overhead cost to products.

a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate.

b. Compute the unit product cost of each model.

2. Assume that the company decides to use activity based costing to apply overhead cost to products.

a. Compute the activity rate for each activity cost pool and determine the amount of overhead cost that would be applied to each model using the activity based costing system.

b. Compute the unit product cost of each model.

3. Explain why overhead cost shifted from the high volume model to the low volume model under activity basedcosting.

farrah westin plans to build a concrete walkway for her 272248

Farrah Westin plans to build a concrete walkway for her home during her vacation. The following schedule shows how project time will be allocated:

Hours

Purchase materials ………………………………5

Obtain rental equipment …………………………..2

Remove sod and level site ……………………… 20

Build forms for concrete ………………………. 10

Mix and pour concrete into forms ………….…..5

Level concrete and smooth …………………….6

Let dry ………………………………………… 24

Remove forms from concrete ………………….2

Return rental tools ……………………………..1

Clean up ………………………………………..4

a. Identify the value added activities. How much of the total is value added time?

b. Identify the non value added activities. How much total time is spent performing non value added activities?

c. Calculate the manufacturing cycle efficiency.

friendly bank is in the process of implementing an activity base 272262

Friendly Bank is in the process of implementing an activity based costing system. A copy of an interview with the manager of Friendly’s credit card department follows:.

Question 1: How many employees are in your department?

Response: There are eight employees, including me.

Question 2: What do they do (please describe)?

Response: There are four major activities: supervising employees, processing credit card transactions, issuing customer statements, and answering customer questions.

Question 3: Do customers outside your department use any equipment?

Response: Yes. ATMs service customers who require cash advances.

Question 4: What resources are used by each activity (equipment, materials, energy)?

Response: We each have our own computer, printer, and desk. Paper and other supplies are needed to operate the printers. Of course, we each have a telephone as well.

Question 5: What are the outputs of each activity?

Response: Well, for supervising, I manage employees’ needs and try to ensure that they carry out their activities efficiently. Processing transactions produces a posting for each transaction in our computer system and serves as a source for preparing the monthly statements. The number of monthly customer statements has to be the product for the issuing activity, and I suppose that the number of customers served is the output for the answering activity. And I guess that the number of cash advances would measure the product of the ATM activity, although the ATM really generates more transactions for other products such as checking and savings accounts. So, perhaps the number of ATM transactions is the real output.

Question 6: Who or what uses the activity output?

Response: We have three products: classic, gold, and platinum credit cards.

Transactions are processed for these three types of cards, and statements are sent to clients holding these cards. Similarly, answers to questions are all directed to clients who hold these cards. As far as supervising, I spend time ensuring the proper coordination and execution of all activities except for the ATM. I really have no role in managing that particular activity.

Question 7: How much time do workers spend on each activity? By equipment?

Response: I just completed a work survey and have calculated the percentage of time for each worker. All seven clerks work on each of the three departmental activities. About 40 percent of their time is spent processing transactions, with the rest of their time split evenly between issuing statements and answering questions. Phone time for all seven workers is used only for answering client questions. Computer time is 70 percent transaction processing, 20 percent statement preparation, and 10 percent question answering. Furthermore, my own time and that of my computer and telephone are 100 percent administrative. Credit card transactions represent about 20 percent of the total ATM transactions.

Required:

Prepare an activity dictionary using five columns: activity name, activity description, activity type (primary or secondary), cost object(s), and activity driver.

goldman company has a jit system in place each manufacturing 272272

Goldman Company has a JIT system in place. Each manufacturing cell is dedicated to the production of a single product or major subassembly. One cell, dedicated to the production of telescopes, has four operations: machining, finishing, assembly, and qualifying (testing).

For the coming year, the telescope cell has the following budgeted costs and cell time (both at theoretical capacity):

Budgeted conversion costs …………. $7,500,000

Budgeted raw materials …………….. $9,000,000

Cell time …………………………………. 12,000 hours

Theoretical output ……………………….. 90,000 telescopes

During the year, the following actual results were obtained:

Actual conversion costs …………. $7,500,000

Actual materials …………………. $7,800,000

Actual cell time ………………………. 12,000 hours

Actual output ………………………… 75,000 telescopes

Required (Round answers to two decimal places):

1. Compute the velocity (number of telescopes per hour) that the cell can theoretically achieve. Now, compute the theoretical cycle time (number of hours or minutes per telescope) that it takes to produce one telescope.

2. Compute the actual velocity and the actual cycle time.

3. Compute the budgeted conversion costs per minute. Using this rate, compute the conversion costs per telescope if theoretical output is achieved. Using this measure, compute the conversion costs per telescope for actual output. Does this product costing approach provide an incentive for the cell manager to reduce cycle time? Explain.

managerial accounting 414463

Problem 19 1A Variable costing income statement and conversion to absorption costing income L.O. P2, P4 Torres Company began operations this year. During this first year, the company produced 100,000 units and sold 80,000 units. The absorption costing income statement for its first year of operations follows. Sales (80,000 units Af— $50 per unit) $ 4,000,000 Cost of goods sold Beginning inventory $ 0 Cost of goods manufactured (100,000 units Af— $30 per unit) 3,000,000 Cost of good available for sale 3,000,000 Ending inventory (20,000 Af— $30) 600,000 Cost of goods sold 2,400,000 Gross margin 1,600,000 Selling and administrative expenses 510,000 Net income $ 1,090,000 Additional Information a. Selling and administrative expenses consist of $350,000 in annual fixed expenses and $2 per unit in variable selling and administrative expenses. b. The company’s product cost of $30 per unit is computed as follows. Direct materials $ 4 per unit Direct labor $ 15 per unit Variable overhead $ 3 per unit Fixed overhead ($800,000 / 100,000 units) $ 8 per unit Required: 1. Prepare an income statement for the company under variable costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except net loss which should be indicated with a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

problem 4 7 income statement presentation statement of compre 414480

Problem 4 7 Income statement presentation; statement of comprehensive income; unusual items [LO4 1, 4 3, 4 4, 4 5, 4 6, 4 7]

The following income statement items appeared on the adjusted trial balance of Schembri Manufacturing Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2013 ($ in 000s): sales revenue, $18,100; cost of goods sold, $7,600; selling expenses, $1,440; general and administrative expenses, $940; interest revenue, $200; interest expense, $300. Income taxes have not yet been accrued. The company’s income tax rate is 40% on all items of income or loss. These revenue and expense items appear in the company’s income statement every year. The company’s controller, however, has asked for your help in determining the appropriate treatment of the following nonrecurring transactions that also occurred during 2013 ($ in 000s). All transactions are material in amount.

1.

Investments were sold during the year at a loss of $360. Schembri also had unrealized gains of $500 for the year on investments.

2. One of the company’s factories was closed during the year. Restructuring costs incurred were $1,700.
3.

An earthquake destroyed a warehouse causing $1,400 in damages. The event is considered to be unusual and infrequent.

4.

During the year, Schembri completed the sale of one of its operating divisions that qualifies as a component of the entity according to GAAP. The division had incurred a loss from operations of $700 in 2013 prior to the sale, and its assets were sold at a gain of $1,680.

5.

In 2013, the company’s accountant discovered that depreciation expense in 2012 for the office building was understated by $340.

6. Foreign currency translation losses for the year totaled $380.

Required:

Prepare Schembri’s combined statement of income and comprehensive income for 2013, including basic earnings per share disclosures. One million shares of common stock were outstanding at the beginning of the year and an additional 400,000 shares were issued on July 1, 2013.(Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Enter your answers in thousands except earnings per share. Round EPS answers to 2 decimal places.)

problem 5 16 applying overhead in a service company lo2 lo3 lo4 leeds architect 414486

Problem 5 16 Applying Overhead in a Service Company [LO2, LO3, LO4] Leeds Architectural Consultants uses a job order costing system and applies studio overhead to jobs on the basis of direct staff costs. Because Leeds Architectural Consultants is a service firm, the names of the accounts it uses are different from the names used in manufacturing companies. The following costs were recorded in January Cost of subcontracted work (comparable to direct materials) $ 231,700 Direct staff costs (comparable to direct labor) $ 76,600 Studio overhead (comparable to manufacturing overhead cost applied) $ 132,518 Cost of work completed (comparable to cost of goods manufactured) $ 388,100 There were no beginning inventories in January. At the end of January, only one job was still in process. This job (Lexington Gardens Project) had been charged with $6,620 in direct staff costs 1Compute the predetermined overhead rate that was used during January 2Complete the following job cost sheet for the partially completed Lexington Gardens Project. (Hint: Cost of goods manufactured equals beginning work in process inventory plus manufacturing costs incurred less ending work in process inventory.) (Round your answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

adjusting entries for bank reconcilliation 414496

PROBLEM 7 4

Green Valley Bank sent Comstock Industries their end of month bank statement for July. The end of month balance by the bank is $11,237.00. The statement shows that a deposit for $4,250 is in transit at the end of the statement period.

The statement also revealed that checks for $87.00, $105.00, and $95.00 are outstanding. Green Valley collected a 90 day, 12% interest $4,000.00 note receivable, charging $20 for the service. No interest has been accrued on the note. The bank charges a monthly account fee of $35.00.

The end of month balance per company books is $11,135.00.

Calculate the adjusted bank balance, and complete the journal entries for the reconciliation.

Adjusted bank balance = $

Jul 31 Select Notes ReceivableInterest RevenueCashInterest ExpensePetty CashItem 2 $
Select Notes ReceivableInterest ExpensePetty CashCash Short and OverBank Service Charge ExpenseItem 4 $
Select Notes ReceivableNotes PayablePetty CashCash Short and OverBank Service Charge ExpenseItem 6 $
Select Interest PayablePetty CashInterest RevenueCash Short and OverBank Service Charge ExpenseItem 8 $

Jul 31 Select CashSalesCash Short and OverPetty CashBank Service Charge ExpenseItem 10 $
Select CashSalesCash Short and OverAccounts PayableBank Service Charge ExpenseItem 12 $

upcoming fiscal year accounting 414552

The production department of Priston Company has submitted the following forecast of units to be produced by quarter for the upcoming fiscal year. 1st Quarter 2nd Quarter 3rd Quarter 4th Quarter Budgeted unit salesAc€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦Ac€¦.. 11,000 12,000 13,000 10,000 In addition, the beginning raw materials inventory for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be 8,800 pounds and the beginning accounts payable for the 1st Quarter is budgeted to be $20,900. Required: 1a. Prepare the company’s direct materials budget for the upcoming fiscal year. 1b. Prepare a schedule of expected cash disbursements for purchases of materials for the upcoming fiscal year. 2. Complete the company’s direct labor budget for the upcoming fiscal year, assuming that the direct labor workforce is adjusted each quarter to match the number of hours required to produce the forecasted number of units produced.

project 2 review of merchandising cycle introduction wally s widget compa 414578

Project 2 Review of Merchandising Cycle Introduction Wally’s Widget Company (WWC) incorporated near the end of 2010. Operations began in January of 2011. WWC prepares adjusting entries and financial statements at the end of each month. The statements report monthly results for the period February 1 29, 2011. Pertinent items of general information: Beginning Balances from 1/31/11 WWC establishes a policy that it will sell inventory at $150 per unit. In January, WWC received a $6,000 advance for 40 units, as reflected in Unearned Revenue. WWC’s February 1 inventory balance consisted of 30 units at a total cost of $2,790. WWC’s note payable accrues interest at a 10% annual rate. WWC will use the FIFO inventory method and record COGS on a perpetual basis. February Transactions 02/01 Included in WWC’s February 1 Accounts Receivable balance is a $3,000 account due from Kit Kat, a WWC customer. Kit Kat is having cash flow problems and cannot its balance at this time. WWC arranges with Kit Kat to convert the $3,000 balance to a note, and Kit Kat signs a 6 month note, at 12% interest. The principal and all interest will be due and payable to WWC on August 1, 2008. 02/02 WWC paid a $500 insurance premium covering the month of February. The amount paid is recorded directly as an expense. 02/05 An additional 160 units of inventory are purchased on account by WWC for $15,200 ‘ terms 3/15, n30. 02/05 WWC paid Federal Express $320 to have the 160 units of inventory delivered overnight. Delivery occurred on 02/06. 02/10 Sales of 120 units of inventory occurred during the period of 02/07 ‘ 02/10. The sales terms are 2/10, net 30. 02/15 The 40 units that were paid for in advance and recorded in January are delivered to the customer. 02/15 15 units of the inventory that had been sold on 2/10 are returned to WWC. The units are not damaged and can be resold. Therefore, they are returned to inventory. Assume the units returned are from the 2/05 purchase. 02/16 WWC pays the first 2 weeks wages to the employees. The total paid is $1,800. 02/17 Paid in full the amount owed for the 2/05 purchase of inventory. 02/18 Wrote off a customer’s account in the amount of $800. 02/19 $3,900 of rent for January, February, and March was paid. Because all of the rent will soon expire, the February portion of the payment is charged directly to expense. 02/19 Collected $8,000 of customers’ Accounts Receivable. Of the $8,000, the discount was taken by customers on $6,700 of the account balances, therefore WWC received less than $8,000. 02/26 WWC recovered $520 cash from the customer whose account had previously been written off (see 02/18). 02/27 A $400 utility bill for February arrived. It is due on March 15 and will be paid then. 02/28 WWC declared and paid a $500 cash dividend. ****************************************************************************************************************************************************** 02/29 (adjusting 1) Record the $1,800 employee salary that is owed but will be paid March 1. 02/29 (adjusting 2) WWC decides to use the aging method to estimate uncollectible accounts. WWC determines 12% of the ending accounts receivable balance is the appropriate end of February estimate of uncollectible accounts. (Round to the nearest dollar) 02/29 (adjusting 3) Record February interest expense accrued on the note payable. 02/29 (adjusting 4) Record one month’s interest earned Kit Kat’s note (see 02/01)

cost accounting 414611

Proration of overhead with two indirect cost pools. New Rise, Inc., produces porcelain figurines. The production is semi automated where the figurine is molded almost entirely by operator less machines and then individually hand painted. The overhead in the molding department is allocated based on machine hours and the overhead in the painting department is allocated based on direct manufacturing labor hours. New Rise, Inc. ‘ uses a normal coating system and reported actual overhead for the month of May of $17,248 and $31,485 for the molding and painting departments, respectively. The company reported the following information related to its inventory accounts and cost of goods sold for the month of May: Work in Process Finished Goods Cost of Goods Sold Balance before proration $27,720 $15,523.20 $115,156.80 Molding Dept. Overhead allocation $4,602 $957.00 $12,489.00 Painting dept. Overhead allocation $2,306 $1,897.00 $24,982.00 1. Calculate the over ‘ or ‘ under allocated overhead for each of the Molding and Painting Departments in May. 2. Calculate the ending balances in work in process, finished goods, and Cost of Goods sold (COGS) if the under or over allocated overhead amounts in each department are as follows: a) Written off to cost of goods sold b) Prorated based on the ending balance (before proration) in each of the three accounts c) Prorated based on the overhead allocated in May (before proration) in the ending balances in each of the three accounts. 3. Which method would you choose? Explain.

direct material price variane 414646

Q10 Arrow Industries employs a standard cost system in which direct materials inventory is carried at standard cost. Arrow has established the following standards for the prime costs of one unit of product. Use the data for questions 10 to 14. Standard Standard Standard Quantity Price Cost Direct materials 8 pounds $1.80 p/ pd $14.40 Direct labor 0.25 hour $8.00 p/ hr $2.00 During May, Arrow purchased 160,000 pounds of direct material at a total cost of $304,000. The total direct labor wages for May were $37,800. Arrow manufactured 19,000 units of product during May using 142,500 pounds of direct material and 5,000 direct labor hours. The direct material price variance for May is (note that the purchase price variance is based on the amount purchased while usage variance is based on amount used): Answer $16,000 unfavorable. $14,250 favorable. $16,000 favorable. $14,250 unfavorable. Q11 The direct material quantity variance for May is: Answer $17,100 unfavorable. $14,400 unfavorable. $17,100 favorable. $1,100 favorable. Q12 The direct labor rate variance for May is: Answer $2,090 favorable. $2,200 favorable. $2,000 unfavorable. $1,900 unfavorable. Q13 The direct labor efficiency variance for May is: Answer $2,000 favorable. $2,200 favorable. $1,800 unfavorable. $2,000 unfavorable.

1 ratios are fractions expressed in percent or times per year 414667

width=440

P 5 3 The Kelly Services, Inc., and Subsidiaries balance sheets from its 2010 annual report are presented in Exhibit 5 4. Required

a. Using the balance sheets, prepare a vertical common size analysis for 2010 and 2009. Use total assets as a base.

b. Using the balance sheets, prepare a horizontal common size analysis for 2010 and 2009. Use 2009 as the base.

c. Comment on significant trends that appear in ( a) and ( b).

Multiple choice questions:
a. Which of the following statements is incorrect?

1. Ratios are fractions expressed in percent or times per year.
2. A ratio can be computed from any pair of numbers.
3. A very long list of meaningful ratios can be derived.
4. There is one standard list of ratios.
5. Comparison of income statement and balance sheet numbers, in the form of ratios, should not be done.

b. A figure from this years statement is compared with a base selected from the current year.

1. Vertical common size statement
2. Horizontal common size statement
3. Funds statement
4. Absolute figures
5. Balance sheet

c. Fremont Electronics has income of $1 million. Columbus Electronics has income of $2 million. Which of the following statements is a correct statement?

1. Columbus Electronics is getting a higher return on assets employed.
2. Columbus Electronics has higher profit margins than does Fremont Electronics.
3. Fremont Electronics could be more profitable than Columbus Electronics in relation to resources employed.
4. No comparison can be made between Fremont Electronics and Columbus Electronics.
5. Fremont Electronics is not making good use of its resources.

d. Industry ratios should not be considered as absolute norms for a given industry because of all but which of the following?

1. The firms have different accounting methods.
2. Many companies have varied product lines.
3. Companies within the same industry may differ in their method of operations.
4. The fiscal year ends of the companies may differ.
5. The financial services may be private independent firms.

e. Which of the following is a publication of the federal government for manufacturing, mining, and trade corporations?

1. Annual Statement Studies
2. Standard & Poors Industry Surveys
3. Almanac of Business and Industrial Financial Ratios
4. Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios
5. The Department of Commerce Financial Report

f. Which service represents a compilation of corporate tax return data?

1. Annual Statement Studies
2. Standard & Poors Industry Surveys
3. Almanac of Business and Industrial Financial Ratios
4. Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios
5. The Department of Commerce Financial Report

g. Which service includes over 800 different lines of business?

1. Annual Statement Studies
2. Standard & Poors Industry Surveys
3. Almanac of Business and Industrial Financial Ratios
4. Industry Norms and Key Business Ratios
5. The Department of Commerce Financial Report

h. Which analysis compares each amount with a base amount for a selected base year?

1. Vertical common size
2. Horizontal common size
3. Funds statement
4. Common size statement
5. None of these

i. Suppose you are comparing two firms in the coal industry. Which type of numbers would be most meaningful for statement analysis?

1. Relative numbers would be most meaningful for both firms, especially for inter firm comparisons.
2. Relative numbers are not meaningful.
3. Absolute numbers would be most meaningful.
4. Absolute numbers are not relevant.
5. It is not meaningful to compare two firms.

j. Management is a user of financial analysis. Which of the following comments does not represent a fair statement as to the management perspective?

1. Management is not interested in the view of investors.
2. Management is interested in liquidity.
3. Management is interested in profitability.
4. Management is interested in the debt position.
5. Management is interested in the financial structure of the entity.

Attachments:

accounnting 414740

Quiz Chapter 6 1. In responsibility accounting, each segment in an organization should be charged with the costs for which it is responsible and over which it has control plus its share of common organizational costs. A) True B) False 2. Only those costs that would disappear over time if a segment were eliminated should be considered traceable costs of the segment. A) True B) False 3. Cockriel Inc., which produces a single product, has provided the following data for its most recent month of operations: There were no beginning or ending inventories. The variable costing unit product cost was: A) $42 B) $43 C) $37 D) $48 4. Fixed manufacturing overhead is included in product costs under: A) Option A B) Option B C) Option C D) Option D 5. Tennison Corporation has two major business segments Consumer and Commercial. Data for the segment and for the company for May appear below: In addition, common fixed expenses totaled $371,000 and were allocated as follows: $186,000 to the Consumer business segment and $185,000 to the Commercial business segment. A properly constructed segmented income statement in a contribution format would show that the net operating income of the company as a whole is: A) $769,000 B) $104,000 C) $475,000 D) $267,000 6. Whitney, Inc., produces a single product. The following data pertain to one month’s operations: The carrying value on the balance sheet of the ending finished goods inventory under variable costing would be: A) $16,000 B) $10,000 C) $19,000 D) $12,000 7. A manufacturing company that produces a single product has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations: What is the variable costing unit product cost for the month? A) $103 B) $99 C) $94 D) $90 8. Tsuchiya Corporation manufactures a variety of products. Last year, the company’s variable costing net operating income was $57,500. Fixed manufacturing overhead costs deferred in inventory under absorption costing amounted to $35,400. What was the absorption costing net operating income last year? A) $22,100 B) $35,400 C) $57,500 D) $92,900 9. The following cost formula relates to last year’s operations at Lemine Manufacturing Corporation: Y = $84,000 + $60.00X In the formula above, 75% of the fixed cost and 90% of the variable cost are manufacturing costs. Y is the total cost and X is the number of units produced and sold. If Lemine produces and sells 7,000 units, what is the unit product cost under each of the following methods? A) Option A B) Option B C) Option C D) Option D 10. Byron Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations: What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing? A) $86 B) $77 C) $83 D) $92

blinks and dinks business accounting 414771

The Ramapo Company produces two products, Blinks and Dinks. They are manufactured in two departments, Fabrication and Assembly. Data for the products and departments are listed below.

Product Number of units Labor hrsper unit Machine hours per unit
Blinks 1,000 4 5
Dinks 2,000 2 8

All of the machine hours take place in the Fabrication department, which has an estimated overhead of $84,000. All of the labor hours take place in the Assembly department, which has an estimated total overhead of $72,000. The Ramapo Company uses a single overhead rate to apply all overhead costs based on labor hours. What is the overhead cost per unit for Dinks? Answer

$77.00
$39.00
$19.50
$59.92

product profitability 415048

Rice Inc. manufactures lawn mowers and garden tractors. Lawn mowers are relatively simple to produce and are made in large quantities. Garden tractors are customized to individual wholesale customer specifications. The company sells 300,000 lawn mowers and 30,000 garden tractors annually. Revenues and costs incurred for each product are as follows:

Law Mower Garden Tractors Rev $19,500,000 $17,850,000 DM 4,000,000 2,700,000 DL ($20/Hr) 2,800,000 6,000,000 Overhead ? ?

Manufacturing overhead totals $3,960,000, and administrative expenses equal $7,400,000.

a. Calculate the profit (loss) in total and per unit for each product if overhead is assigned to product using a per unit basis.

b. Calculate the profit (loss) in total and per unit for each product if overhead is assigned to products using a direct labor hour basis.

c. Assume that manufacturing overhead can be divided into two cost pools as follows: $1,320,000, which has a cost driver of direct labor hours, and $2,640,000, which has a cost driver of machine hours (totaling 150,000). Lawn mower production uses 25,000 machine hours; garden tractor production uses 125,000 machine hours. Calculate the profit (loss) in total and per unit for each product if overhead is assigned to products using these two overhead bases.

d. Does your answer in (a), (b), or (c) provide the best representation of the profit contributed by each product?Explain.

robert company s power plant provides electricity to two producing departments 415069

Robert Company’s power plant provides electricity to two producing departments. The annual budget for the power plant shows the following:

Budgeted fixed costs $500,000

Budgeted variable costs per kilowatt hour $1

Actual annual costs incurred by the power plant were:

Actual fixed costs $215,000

Actual variable costs $350,000

Additional annual data follows:

Producing Department 1 Producing Department 2

Capacity available 250,000 kilowatt hours 150,000 kilowatt hours

Capacity used 270,000 kilowatt hours 165,000 kilowatt hours

Required:

A) Compute the amount of fixed costs allocated to each producing department.

B) Compute the amount of variable costs allocated to each producing department.

taxation of business entities 2013 edition chapter 8 415101

Robert and Sylvia propose to have their corporation, Wolverine Universal (WU), acquire another corporation, EMU Inc., in a stock for stock Type B acquisition. The sole shareholder of EMU, Edie Eagle, will receive $512,500 of WU voting stock in the transaction. Edie’s tax basis in her EMU stock is $248,000. (Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Loss amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) a. What amount of gain or loss does Edie recognize if the transaction is structured as a stock for stock Type B acquisition? Gain or loss recognized b. What is Edie’s tax basis in the WU stock she receives in the exchange? Tax basis $ c. What is the tax basis of the EMU stock held by WU after the exchange? Tax basis $

quiz quickly answer 415106

Robo Tech Inc. manufactures pistons for custom motorcycles within a relevant range of 83,200 to 128,000 pistons per year. Within this range, the following partially completed manufacturing cost schedule has been prepared.

Complete the cost schedule below. When computing the cost per unit, round to two decimal places. Round all other values to the nearest dollar.

Cost Report
Components produced 83,200 104,000 128,000
Total costs:
Total variable costs $29,952 $ $
Total fixed costs 33,280
Total costs $63,232 $ $
Cost per unit
Variable cost per unit $ $ $
Fixed cost per unit
Total cost per unit $ $ $

subject materiality for apollo shoes engagement 271791

Date: Wed, 9 JAN 2008 12:15:49 +0000
From: “Darlene Wardlaw”
Subject: Materiality for Apollo Shoes Engagement
You need to prepare a memo (GA 5) addressing materiality for Apollo Shoes. Remember that the workpapers document that we are following Generally Accepted Auditing Standards. In the memo,

  1. Briefly describe independent auditors’ concept of materiality.
  2. Describe some common relationships and other considerations used by auditors when assessing the dollar amount considered material. In other words, what are some common measures of materiality with respect to income, sales, and total assets?
  3. Based upon your professional judgment and your discussion of items 1 and 2 above, determine an amount you consider to be a minimum material misstatement for Apollo Shoes and justify your recommendation in your memo.

DW

Document Preview:

Date: Wed, 9 JAN 2008 12:15:49 +0000 ?From: “Darlene Wardlaw”

?Subject: Materiality for Apollo Shoes Engagement? You need to prepare a memo (GA 5) addressing materiality for Apollo Shoes. Remember that the workpapers document that we are following Generally Accepted Auditing Standards. In the memo, Briefly describe independent auditors’ concept of materiality. Describe some common relationships and other considerations used by auditors when assessing the dollar amount considered material. In other words, what are some common measures of materiality with respect to income, sales, and total assets? Based upon your professional judgment and your discussion of items 1 and 2 above, determine an amount you consider to be a minimum material misstatement for Apollo Shoes and justify your recommendation in your memo. DW

inventory 271890

The Bennington Company uses the perpetual inventory system and the FIFO inventory cost method. The Bennington Company also uses the net method to record credit sales and purchases of merchandise. The Bennington Company sells one unit of merchandise for $40.

The Bennington Company has a beginning merchandise inventory of 100 units @ $25 each. These 100 units were purchased under the terms 2/10, n/30. Of the 100 units purchased, 80 of the units were paid for within the 10 day discount period and 20 of the units were paid for after the discount period.

The Bennington Company had the following transactions during March:

March 5:

The Bennington Company purchased 400 units of merchandise @ $27 each with the terms of 2/10, n/30 from the ABC Company.

March 7:

The Bennington Company sold 200 units of merchandise to customers with the terms of 2/10, n/30.

March 9:

The Bennington Company returned 50 defective units of merchandise that were purchased on March 5, to the ABC Company.

March 10:

The Bennington Company purchased 300 units of merchandise @ $28 from the DEF Company under the terms of 1/10, n/30.

March 12:

The Bennington Company paid the ABC Company $5,292 towards the balance owed from the purchase of 400 units on March 5.

ACCT310 Chapter Eight Outline Continued 14th Edition: Page 17 of 18

March 15:

The Bennington Company sold 250 units of merchandise under the terms of 2/10, n/30.

March 17:

Customers paid the Bennington Company for 150 of the 200 units sold on March 7.

March 18:

Customers returned 10 units to the Bennington Company that were sold on March 15 and received credit. The merchandise returned was determined to be resalable by the Bennington Company.

March 19:

The Bennington Company paid the remaining balance owed to the ABC Company.

March 20:

The Bennington Company paid the DEF Company for the 300 units purchased on March 10.

March 21:

Customers paid the Bennington Company for the remaining balance owed from the items sold on March 7.

March 22:

Customers paid the Bennington Company for 100 of the 250 units sold on March 15.

March 25:

The Bennington Company purchased 200 units of merchandise from the GHI Company @ $30, under the terms of 1/10, n/30.

March 27:

The Bennington Company sold 300 units of merchandise under the terms of 2/10, n/30.

ACCT310 Chapter Eight Outline Concluded 14th Edition: Page 18 of 18

March 30:

Customers paid the remaining balance owed to the Bennington Company for the items sold on March 15.

Required Portion of The Problem Assignment:

1.Compute Gross and Net Sales for March

2.Compute the March 31 ending merchandise inventory value.

3.Determine the Cost of Goods Sold for March.

4.Record all 15 transactions listed above.

1 which of the following is a true statement about 272130

1. Which of the following is a true statement about activity based supplier costing?

a. The cost of a supplier is the purchase price of the components or materials acquired.

b. Suppliers can affect many internal activities of a firm and significantly increase the cost of purchasing.

c. It encourages managers to evaluate suppliers based on purchase cost.

d. It encourages managers to increase the number of suppliers.

e. All of the above are true.

2. This year, Lambert Company will ship 1,500,000 pounds of goods to customers at a cost of $1,200,000. If a customer orders 10,000 pounds and produces $200,000 of revenue (total revenue is $20 million), the amount of shipping cost assigned to the customer by using ABC would be

a. cannot be determined.

b. $24,000 (2 percent of the shipping cost).

c. $8,000 ($0.80 per pound shipped).

d. $12,000 (1 percent of the shipping cost).

e. none of the above.

3. Lambert Company has two suppliers: Deming and Leming. The cost of warranty work due to defective components is $2,000,000. The total units repaired under warranty average 100,000, of which 90,000 have components from Deming and 10,000 have components from Leming. Select the items below that represent true statements.

a. Components purchased from Deming cost $200,000more than their purchase price.

b. Components purchased fromLeming cost $1,800,000more than their purchase price.

c. Components from Deming appear to be of higher quality.

d. All of the above are true.

e. None of the above is true.

4. A forklift and its driver used for moving materials are examples of

a. activity outputs.

b. activity output measures.

c. resource drivers.

d. activity inputs.

e. root causes.

5. Which of the following are nonvalue added activities?

a. Moving goods

b. Storing goods

c. Inspecting finished goods

d. Reworking a defective product

e. All of the above

6. Suppose that a company is spending $50,000 per year for inspecting, $40,000 for purchasing, and $60,000 for reworking products. A good estimate of nonvalue added costs would be

a. $110,000.

b. $50,000.

c. $60,000.

d. $90,000.

e. $100,000.

7. The cost of inspecting incoming parts is most likely to be reduced by

a. activity sharing.

b. activity selection.

c. activity reduction.

d. activity elimination.

e. none of the above.

8. Thom Company produces 100 units in 5 hours. The cycle time for Thom

a. is 20 units per hour.

b. is 5 hours per unit.

c. is 3 minutes per unit.

d. is 1 hour per 20 units.

e. cannot be calculated.

9. Thom Company produces 100 units in 5 hours. The velocity for Thom

a. is 20 units per hour.

b. is 5 hours per unit.

c. is 3 minutes per unit.

d. is 1 hour per 20 units.

e. cannot be calculated.

10. Striving to produce the same activity output with lower costs for the input used is concerned with which of the following dimensions of activity performance?

a. Quality

b. Time

c. Activity sharing

d. Efficiency

e. Effectiveness

1 with abc overhead costs should be traced to which 272131

1. With ABC, overhead costs should be traced to which cost object first?

a. Units of product

b. Activities

c. Departments

d. Product lines

2. When using departmental overhead rates, which of the following cost objects is the first in the cost assignment process?

a. Activities

b. Units of product

c. Departments

d. Product lines

3. Which costing method tends to overstate the cost of high volume products?

a. Traditional volume based costing

b. Activity based costing

c. Job order costing

d. Differential costing

4. If management wants the most accurate product cost, which of the following costing methods should be used?

a. Volume based costing using departmental overhead rates

b. Volume based costing using a plantwide overhead rate

c. Normal costing using a plantwide overhead rate

d. Activity based costing

activity based costing methods are constantly being improved upo 272151

Activity based costing methods are constantly being improved upon, and many websites discuss suggestions for improvement. The article in this activity outlines an alternative perspective on activity based costing.

Address: http://hbswk.hbs.edu/item/4587l, or go to www.wiley.com/college/kimmel

Instructions

Read the article provided at the site and answer the following questions.

(a) What concerns do the authors say are raised by ?oreal world use?? of ABC? According to the authors, what benefits have companies enjoyed from the use of ABC?

(b) What method do the authors suggest for estimating practical capacity? How important is it to be precise in this estimate?

(c) Describe the steps that are taken after practical capacity has been estimated.

(d) What is one of the primary benefits obtained by management in the report entitled ?oABC, the Time Driven Way??? What is an example of how this worked for a real company?

castle company produces throw blankets that are popular holi 413847

Castle Company produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts. Standard variable costs relating to a single blanket are given below Standard Quantity or Hours Standard Price or Rate Standard Cost Direct materials 2.62 yards $5 per yard $? Direct labor 1.35 DLH $6.80 per DLH $? Variable manufacturing overhead 1.35 DLH $2 per direct labor­hour $? Total standard cost $? Overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours. During March, 924 blankets were manufactured and sold. Selected information related to the month’s production is given below: Materials Used Direct Labor Variable Manufacturin g Overhead Actual costs incurred $11,500 $8,408 $3,100 Direct materials price variance ? Actual 2,620 yards 1400 hours Direct materials quantity variance $1,000 U Direct labor rate variance ? Direct labor efficiency variance ? Variable overhead rate variance ? Variable overhead efficiency variance ? *For this month’s production of 924 blankets Submit an Excel document with each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following through your calculations: 1.What is the standard cost of a single blanket? 2.What was the actual cost per blanket produced during March? 3.What was the direct materials price variance for March? 4.What was the direct labor rate variance for March? The direct labor efficiency variance? 5.What was the variable overhead rate variance for March? The variable overhead efficiency variance?

Document Preview:

Castle Company  produces throw blankets that are popular holiday gifts.  Standard variable costs relating to a single blanket are given below Standard Quantity or Standard Price or Standard Hours Rate Cost Direct materials 2.62 yards $5 per yard $? Direct labor 1.35 DLH $6.80 per DLH $? Variable manufacturing 1.35 DLH $2 per direct $? overhead labor­hour Total standard cost $? Overhead is applied to production on the basis of direct labor hours.  During March, 924 blankets were manufactured and sold. Selected information related to the month’s production is given below: Materials Direct Variable Used Labor Manufacturin g Overhead Actual costs incurred $11,500 $8,408 $3,100 Direct materials price variance ? Actual 2,620  1400 yards hours Direct materials quantity variance $1,000 U Direct labor rate variance ?Direct labor efficiency variance ? Variable overhead rate variance ? Variable overhead efficiency variance ? *For this month’s production of 924 blankets Submit an Excel document with each tab labeled by item number in good form that demonstrates the following through your calculations: 1. What is the standard cost of a single blanket? 2. What was the actual cost per blanket produced during March? 3. What was the direct materials price variance for March? 4. What was the direct labor rate variance for March?  The direct labor efficiency variance? 5. What was the variable overhead rate variance for March?  The variable overhead efficiency variance?

Attachments:

a new product has the following profit projections and associated probabilities 413881

A new product has the following profit projections and associated probabilities:

Profit Probability
$150,000 .10
$100,000 .25
$ 50,000 .20
0 .15
$50,000 .20
$100,000 .10

a. Use the expected value approach to decide whether to market the new product.
b. Because of the high dollar values involved, especially the possibility of a $100,000 loss, the marketing vice president has expressed some concern about the use of the expected value approach. As a consequence, if a utility analysis is performed, what is the appropriate lottery?
c. Assume that the following indifference probabilities are assigned. Do the utilities reflect the behavior of a risk taker or a risk avoider?
Profit Indifference Probability
$100,000 .95
$ 50,000 .70
0 .50
$50,000 .25
d. Use expected utility to make a recommended decision.
e. Should decision maker feel comfortable with the final decision recommended by the analysis?

chapter 3 quiz question 8 413886

Nick Company has two products: A and B. The company uses activity based costing. The estimated total cost and expected activity for each of the company’s three activity cost pools are as follows:

Expected Activity

Activity Cost Pool Estimated Costs Product A Product B Total

Activity 1 $32,600 700 300 1,000Activity 2$17,600600 200 800Activity 3 $52,500 400100500

The activity rate under the activity based costing system for Activity 3 is closest to:

Answer

a. $44.65
b. $105.00
c. $525.00
d. $205.00

nick and jolene are married nick is 61 and retired in 2011 from his job with amalg 413891

Nick and Jolene are married. Nick is 61 and retired in 2011 from his job with Amalgamated Company. Jolene is 56 and works part time as a special education teacher. Nick and Jolene have a substantial amount of investment savings and would like to reorganize it to achieve the best after tax return on their investments. They give you the following list of projected cash receipts for 2012: Jolene’s salary $13,000 Nick’s pension”fully taxable 12,500 Interest income 4,000 Dividend income 2,500 Social Security benefits 7,000 Farmer’s Fund annuity 6,000 In addition, Nick tells you that he owns a duplex that he rents out. The duplex rents for 2012 are $18,000, and Nick estimates expenses of $22,000 related to the duplex. The annuity was purchased 18 years ago for $20,000, and pays $500 per month for 10 years. Nick and Jolene’s investments consist of the following: 6 month certificates of deposit (CDs) $100,000 1,000 shares of Lardee’s common stock (current market value = $7 per share, projected 2012 dividend = $1 per share)”cost 10,000 2,000 shares of Corb Company common stock (current market value = $20 per share, projected 2012 dividend = $.75 per share)”cost 20,000 a. Assuming that Nick and Jolene have total allowable itemized deductions of $12,350 in 2012 and that they have no dependents, determine their 2012 taxable income and tax liability based on the projections they gave you. b. The 6 month CDs consist of two $50,000 certificates, both of which yield 4% interest. One CD matures on January 3, 2012. Nick’s banker tells him that he can renew the CD for one year at 4%. Nick’s stockbroker tells him that he can purchase tax exempt bonds with a yield of 3%. Nick would like you to determine whether the tax exempt bonds provide him a better after tax return than the CD. c. Jolene is concerned that they are not getting the best return on their Corb Company stock. When they purchased the stock in 2001, the $.75 per share dividend was yielding 10% before taxes. However, the rise in market value has far outpaced the dividend growth, and it is yielding only 3.75%, based on the current market value. Jolene thinks they should sell the stock and purchase either the 3% tax exempt securities or the 4% CD if it would be a better deal from an income tax viewpoint. Calculate the tax effect on their 2012 income of selling the shares, and determine whether they should sell the shares and invest the after tax proceeds in tax exempt securities or the 4% CD. Do this calculation after you have determined the best option regarding the CD that matures in January.

norgaard corporation cost not allocated to a division 413911

Norgaard Corporation has two operating divisions: a Consumer Division and a Commercial Division. The company’s Customer Service Department provides services to both divisions. The variable costs of the Customer Service Department are budgeted at $75 per order. The Customer Service Department’s fixed costs are budgeted at $268,000 for the year. The fixed costs of the Customer Service Department are determined based on the peak period orders.

media/2e1/2e1bde8f 8790 4109 a93e 0d

At the end of the year, actual Customer Service Department variable costs totaled $420,438 and fixed costs totaled $279,010. The Consumer Division had a total of 1,671 orders and the Commercial Division had a total of 3,651 orders for the year. For performance evaluation purposes, how much actual Customer Service Department cost should NOT be charged to the operating divisions at the end of the year?

A) $11,010
B) $0
C) $32,298
D) $21,288

taxes 413916

Norma, who uses the cash method of accounting, lives in a state that imposes an income tax. In April 2012, she files her state income tax return for 2011 and pays an additional $1,000 in state income taxes. During 2012, her withholdings for state income tax purposes amount to $7,400, and she pays estimated state income tax $700. In April 2013, she files her state income tax return for 2012, claiming a refund of $1,800. Norma receives the refund in August 2013.

a) Assuming that Norma itemized deductions in 2012, how much may she claim as a deduction for state income taxes on her federal return for calendar year 2012 (filed April 2013)?

b) Assuming that Norma itemized deductions in 2012, how will the refund of $1,800 that she received in 2013 be treated for federal income tax purposes?

c) Assume that Norma itemized deductions in 2013 state income tax liability. How will the $1,800 be treated for federal income tax purposes?

d) Assuming that Norma did not itemize deductions in 2012, how will the refund of $1,800 received in 2013 be treated for federal income tax purposes?

accounting 414037

P5 1 Best Buy Co., Inc.’s consolidated balance sheets from its 2011 annual report are presented in Exhibit 5 3. a. Using the balance sheets, prepare a vertical common size analysis for 2011 and 2010. Use total assets as a base. b. Using the balance sheets, prepare a horizontal common size analysis for 2011 and 2010. Use 2010 as the base. c. Comment on significant trends that appear in (a) and (b). ASSETS 26 Feb 11 27 Feb 10 Current Assets Cash and cash equivalents $1,103 $1,826 Short term investments 22 90 Receivables 2,348 2,020 Merchandise inventories 5,897 5,486 Other current assets 1,103 1,114 Total current assets 10,473 10,566 Property and Equipment Land and buildings 766 757 Leasehold improvements 2,318 2,154 Fixtures and equipment 4,701 4,447 Property under capital lease 120 95 7,905 7,453 Less accumulated depreciation 4,082 3,383 Net property and equipment 3,823 4,070 Goodwill 2,454 2,452 Tradenames, Net 133 159 Customer Relationships, Net 203 279 Equity and Other Investments 328 324 Other Assets 435 452 Total Assets $17,849 $18,302 LIABILITIES AND EQUITY Current Liabilities Accounts payable $4,894 $5,276 Unredeemed gift card liabilities 474 463 Accrued compensation and related expenses 570 544 Accrued liabilities 1,471 1,681 Accrued income taxes 356 316 Short term debt 557 663 Current portion of long term debt 441 35 Total current liabilities 8,663 8,978 Long Term Liabilities 1,183 1,256 Long Term Debt 711 1,104 Equity Best Buy Co., Inc. Shareholders’ Equity Preferred stock, $1.00 par value: Authorized 400,000 shares; Issued and outstanding/none Common stock, $0.10 par value: Authorized 1.0 billion shares; Issued and outstanding 392,590,000 and 418,815,000 shares, respectively 39 42 Additional paid in capital 18 441 Retained earnings 6,372 5,797 Accumulated other comprehensive income 173 40 Total Best Buy Co., Inc. shareholders’ equity 6,602 6,320 Noncontrolling interests 690 644 Total equity 7,292 6,964 Total Liabilities and Equity $17,849 $18,302 Fiscal Years Ended 26 Feb 11 27 Feb 10 28 Feb 09 Revenue $50,272 $49,694 $45,015 Cost of goods sold 37,611 37,534 34,017 Restructuring charges/cost of goods sold 24 Gross profit 12,637 12,169 19,998 Selling, general and administrative expenses 10,325 9,873 8,984 Restructuring charges 198 52 78 Goodwill and tradename impairment 66 Operating income 2,114 2,235 1,870 Other income (expense) Investment income and other 51 54 35 Investment impairment 111 Interest expense 87 94 94 Earnings before income tax expense and equity in income of affiliates 2,078 2,195 1,700 Income tax expense 714 802 674 Equity in income of affiliates 2 1 7 Net earnings including noncontrolling interests 1,366 1,394 1,033 Net earnings attributable to noncontrolling interests 89 77 30 Net earnings attributable to Best Buy Co., Inc. 1,277 1,317 1,003 Earnings per share attributable to Best Buy Co., Inc. Basic $3.14 $3.16 $2.43 Diluted $3.08 $3.10 $2.39 Weighted average common shares outstanding (in millions) Basic 406.1 416.8 412.5 Diluted 416.5 427.5 422.9

panhandle medical practice 414058

Panhandle Medical Practice (Activity Based Costing) Panhandle Medical Practice is a group practice owned by the area’s leading hospital, Panhandle Regional Medical Center. The practice includes both primary care and specialty physicians, with an emphasis on internal medicine, obstetrics, pediatrics, and surgery. The practice has three different locations, each one staffed with a mix of primary care and specialist physicians. Traditionally, ancillary services have been performed at the hospital. Still, some ancillary services are best performed at the practice locations for one or more of the following reasons: lower costs, increased physician efficiency, and improved patient convenience. For example, one of the practice locations now has a diagnostic imaging capability. When the scanner was moved from the hospital to the practice location, volume increased, costs decreased, and both physician and patient satisfaction improved. The proposal now being considered is to provide ultrasound services at the practice locations. Preliminary analysis indicates that two approaches are most suitable. Alternative 1 involves the purchase of three ultrasound machines, one for each of the practice’s three locations. Patients would schedule appointments, generally at the location that they are using, during preset times on particular days of the week. Then, the full time ultrasound technician would travel from one location to another to administer the tests as scheduled. In Alternative 2, patient scheduling would be the same, but only one ultrasound machine would be purchased. It would be mounted in a van that the technician would drive to each of the three practice locations. Most of the operating costs of the two alternatives are identical, but Alternative 2 has the added cost of operating the van and setting up the machine after each move. The two alternatives differ substantially in initial costs because Alternative 1 requires three ultrasound machines at a cost of $75,000 each, whereas Alternative 2 requires only one. However, Alternative 2 requires a van, which with necessary modifications would cost $40,000. Thus, the start up costs for Alternative 1 total 3 Af— $75,000 = $225,000, while those for Alternative 2 amount to only $75,000 + $40,000 = $115,000. Note, though, that because the two alternatives have different operating costs, a proper cost analysis of the two alternatives must include both initial (capital) and operating costs. The hospital’s financial staff considered several methods for estimating the operating costs of each alternative. After much discussion, they decided that the activity based costing (ABC) method would be best. Furthermore, an ad hoc task force was assigned the task of performing the cost analysis. To begin the ABC analysis, the task force had to develop the activities involved in the two alternatives. This was accomplished by conducting “walk throughs” of the entire process from the standpoints of the patient, the ultrasound technician, and the billing and collections department. The results are contained in Table 1. A review of the activities confirms that all except one”machine setup”are applicable to both alternatives. The next step in the ABC process is to detail the costs associated with each activity. This step uses financial, operational, and volume data, along with the appropriate cost driver for each activity, to estimate resource consumption. Note that traditional costing, which often focuses on department level costs, typically first deals with direct costs and then allocates indirect (overhead) costs proportionally according to a predetermined allocation rate. In ABC, the activities required to produce some service, including both direct and indirect, are estimated simultaneously. For example, Table 1 contains activities that entail direct costs (such as technician time) and activities that entail indirect costs (such as billing and collection). Although the ABC method is more complex and hence costlier than the traditional method, it is the only way to accurately (more or less) estimate the costs of individual services. Activity cost detail on a per procedure basis is shown in Table 2. In essence, each activity is assigned a cost driver that is most highly correlated with the actual utilization of resources. Then the number of driver units, along with the cost per unit, is estimated for each activity. The product of the number of units multiplied by the cost per unit gives the cost of each activity. Finally, the activity costs are summed to obtain the total cost per procedure. Many of the activity costs cannot be estimated without a volume estimate. The best estimate is that 50 procedures would be done each week, regardless of which alternative is chosen. Assuming the technician works 48 weeks per year, the annual volume estimate is 2,400 procedures. Of course, a much greater total volume can be accommodated under Alternative 1, with three machines, than with Alternative 2, with only one machine. However, to keep the initial analysis manageable, the decision was made to assume the same annual volume regardless of the alternative chosen. In addition to the costs mentioned thus far, some other costs are thought to be relevant to the decision. First, in addition to the obvious costs of operating the van (primarily gas expenses), it is estimated that annual maintenance costs will run about $1,000. Furthermore, annual maintenance costs on each of the three machines under Alternative 1 are estimated at $500, while the annual maintenance costs for the single machine under Alternative 2 are estimated at a higher $1,000 because of added wear and tear. Also, the manufacturer of the ultrasound machines has indicated that a 5 percent discount may be available if three machines, as opposed to only one, are purchased. Finally, to have a rough estimate of total annual costs over the life of the equipment, it is necessary to make assumptions about the useful life of the ultrasound machines and the van. Although somewhat controversial, the decision was made to assume a five year life for both the ultrasound machines and the van. Furthermore, the assumption was made that the value of these assets would be negligible at the end of five years. Assume that you are the chairperson of the ad hoc task force. Your charge is to evaluate the two alternatives and to make a recommendation on which one to accept. Because the revenues are assumed to be identical for the two alternatives, the decision can be made solely on the basis of costs. As part of the analysis, it will be necessary to estimate the costs of the two alternatives on a per procedure and annual basis. In addition, any qualitative factors that are relevant to the decision must be considered before the recommendation is made. To keep the analysis manageable, the task force was instructed to assume that operating costs remain constant over the useful life of the equipment. For comparative purposes, this assumption is not too egregious because the activities are roughly the same for both alternatives, and hence inflation would have a somewhat neutral impact on costs. TABLE 1 Panhandle Regional Medical Center Activities Associated with Alternatives 1 and 2 1. Appointment scheduling 2. Patient check in 3. Ultrasound testing 4. Patient checkout 5. Film processing 6. Film reading 7. Billing and collection 8. General administration 9. Transportation and setup (Alternative 2 only) Questions 1. Estimate the base case cost of each alternative regarding the provision of ultrasound services. (For now, ignore the discount if three units are purchased.) 2. Which alternative has the lower total cost? 3. What value for travel and setup costs would make the costs of the two alternatives the same? 4. Now consider the 5 percent discount. What impact does this discount have on the decision? What discount amount would make the two alternatives equal in costs? 5. What subjective factors would influence the decision as to which alternative to choose? 6. What is your final decision?

audit planning analytical procedures 414072

One of the partners of the CPA firm you work for has engaged a new audit client, Pinnacle Manufacturing, for the year ended December 31, 2009. Pinnacle is a medium sized corporation, with its headquarters located in Detroit, Michigan. The company is made up of three divisions. The first division, Welburn, has been in existence for 35 years and creates powerful diesel engines for boats, trucks, and commercial farming equipment. The second division, Solar Electro, was recently acquired from a high tech manufacturing firm based out of Dallas, Texas. Solar Electro produces state of the art, solar powered engines. The solar powered engine market is relatively new, and Pinnacle’s top management believes that the Solar Electro division will be extremely profitable in the future as the focus on global climate change continues and when highly anticipated EPA regulations make solar powered engines mandatory for certain public transportation vehicles. Finally, the third division, Machine Tech, engages in a wide variety of machine service and repair operations. This division, also new to Pinnacle, is currently in its second year of operations. Pinnacle’s board of directors has recently considered selling the Machine Tech division in order to focus more on core operations”engine manufacturing. However, before any sale will be made, the board has agreed to evaluate this year’s operating results. Excellent operating results may have the effect of keeping the division a part of Pinnacle for the next few years. The vice president for Machine Tech is committed to making it profitable.

a. Calculate at least five ratios that are useful to assess going concern using Pinnacle’s financial statements, which are included in Figure 8 9. Document the ratios in a format similar to the following:

Ratio

2009

2008

2007

Current ratio

b. Based on your calculations, assess the likelihood (high, medium, or low) that Pinnacle is likely to fail financially in the next 12 months. c. Go to the Pinnacle link on the textbook Web site (www.prenhall.com/arens) and open the Pinnacle income statement, which is located in the Pinnacle Income Statement worksheet of the Pinnacle_Financials Excel file. Use the income statement information to prepare a common size income statement for all three years. See Figure 8 7 (p. 229) for an example. Use the information to identify accounts for which you believe there is a concern about material misstatements. Use a format similar to the following:

Account Balance

Estimate of $ Amount of Potential Misstatement

d. Use the three divisional income statements in the Pinnacle_Financials Excel file on the Web site to prepare a common size income statement for each of the three divisions for all three years. Each division’s income statement is in a separate worksheet in the Excel file. Use the information to identify accounts for which you believe there is a concern about material misstatements. Use a format similar to the one in requirement c.
e. Explain whether you believe the information in requirement c or d provides the most useful data for evaluating the potential for misstatements. Explain why.
f. Your aging analysis of accounts receivable and discussions with management indicate that collections of accounts receivable have been somewhat slower than in the previous year. Evaluate whether or not you believe the allowance for uncollectible accounts is fairly valued. If you believe the account is misstated, calculate the potential misstatement.

paymore products places orders for goods equal to 80 of its sales forecast in the 414124

Paymore Products places orders for goods equal to 80% of its sales forecast in the next quarter. The sales forecasts for the next five quarters are as follows: Quarter in Coming Year Sales Forecast, first quarter if $540; second quarter is $530; third quarter is 510, fourth quarter is $550; Following Year first quarter is $550 The firm pays for its goods with a 1 month delay. Therefore, on average, three fourths of purchases are paid for in the quarter that they are purchased, and one fourth are paid in the following quarter. Paymore’s customers pay their bills with a 2 month delay. Therefore, on average, two fourths of sales are collected in the quarter that they are sold, and two fourths are collected in the following quarter. Assume that sales in the last quarter of the previous year were $510. Paymore’s labor and administrative expenses are $62 per quarter and that interest on long term debt is $56 per quarter. Suppose that Paymore’s cash balance at the start of the first quarter is $40 and its minimum acceptable cash balance is $50. Work out the short term financing requirements for the firm in the coming year. The firm pays no dividends. (Negative amounts should be indicated by a minus sign. Do not round intermediate calculations.) Quarter: First Second Third Fourth Source of Cash; Cash at start of period $ _______ ? _________ ? _________? ______? Net Cash Inflow $________? ________? _________ ? ______? Cash at end of period $_______? __________? _________? _______? Minimum operating Cash Bal. $_________? ___________? _________? _______? Cumulative financing required $_________? ___________? _________? _______?

penny inc employs a process costing system direct materials are added at the beginni 414146

Penny, Inc. employs a process costing system. Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Here is information about July’s activities:

On July 1:
Beginning inventories 850 units, 60% complete
Direct materials cost $5,000
Conversion costs $4,000
During July:
Number of units started 15,000
Direct materials added $155,000
Conversion costs added $83,520
On July 31:
Ending inventories 1,600 units, 40% complete

Using the FIFO method, the cost per equivalent unit for materials used during July was

a. $9.78
b. $10.33
c. $10.78
d. $10.65

accounting help please w correct answers 414187

Pete’s Pet Products is a sole proprietorship owned by Pete Thompson. The store provides a full line of pet products, including food, grooming materials, toys, leashes, etc. The company also sells hand made pet houses, including dog houses, bird cages, and cat castles. Each of the pet houses is being evaluated in terms of cost volume profit. See the relevant information below:

Dog house

Bird cage

Cat castle

Sales Price

$140

$95

$160

Variable cost

$65

$34

$56

Fixed monthly cost

30%

25%

45%

When Pete uses a distributor to sell additional pet houses, he has to pay a sales commission of 8% of the sales price. On average, he sells 60% of each pet house through distributors. The fixed costs (shown above) are based on estimated design time for each product. Pete’s store averages $32,000 of fixed costs per month.

Refer to the Course Schedule within the Syllabus for specific project deliverables and due dates.

DELIVERABLE

Based on the information presented above, please answer the following questions. Use Excel for this assignment. Complete your calculations using the Excel features and simply type in narrative answers.

Dog House

Bird Cage

Cat Castle

Sale Price

$ 140.00

$ 95.00

$ 160.00

Variable Cost

$ 65.00

$ 34.00

$ 56.00

Fixed Monthly Cost

$ 9,600.00

$ 8,000.00

$ 14,400.00

Contribution Margin

$ 75.00

$ 61.00

$ 104.00

Total Monthly Fixed Cost

QUESTION 2

Dog House

Bird Cage

Cat Castle

Break Even Units

QUESTION 3

Dog House

Bird Cage

Cat Castle

Sale Price

$ 140.00

$ 95.00

$ 160.00

Variable Cost

$ 65.00

$ 34.00

$ 56.00

Fixed Monthly Cost

$ 9,600.00

$ 8,000.00

$ 14,400.00

Units Sold

750

335

640

Total Sales

Total Sales Through Distributors @ 60%

Sales Commison Paid @ 8%

Contribution Margin

QUESTION 4

Dog House

Bird Cage

Cat Castle

Sales Commison Paid @ 12%

Differnce between 12% and 8%

Recommended cost changes

QUESTION 5

Dog House

Sales Price

Variable Cost

Advertisment Monthly

Fixed Monthly cost

Contribution Margin

research accounting 414217

Pink Jeep tours offer off road tours to individuals and groups visiting the southwestern U.S. hopspots of Sedona, arizone, and las vegas, Nevada. Take a tour of the company web site at ww.pinkjeep.com. suppose you are the manager for the pink jeep office in Sedona. From the company web site, choose two tours offered there. One tour should last all day, and the other should be a shorter tour of 2 4 hours.

For the following requirements, assume the each jeep tour hs four adult passengers plus a tour guide.

1. List the various costs pink jeep would incur to offer each tour. Indicate whether each cost identified is variable, fixed or mixed based on the number of tours offered

2. Briefly research each cost listed in requirement 1 and estimate its amount. Estimate variable costs on a per jeep tour basis and fixed costs on a monthly basis. Break any mixed cost into variable and fixed components. Sate any assumptions that you must make when estimating these costs ( and be aware that many assumptions must be make)

3. What is pink jeep total ariable cost for each tour? Does this cost differ for each type of tour? Explain

4. Using the current tour prices listed on pink jeep web site, determine the contribution margin per jeep tour for each tour type

5. Assume pink jeep ran only the all day excursion tour in the month of august. In this case, how many tours are needed to break even

6. Assume pink jeep ran only the shorter tour during august. In this case, how many tours are needed to earn $30000 in profit for the month?

poppycrock inc manufactures large crates of microwaveable popcorn that are typic 414264

Poppycrock, inc., manufactures large crates of microwaveable popcorn that are typically sold to distributors. Its main factory has the capacity to manufacture and sell 35,000 crates per month, the following information is available for the factory. .50 sales price per crate …… $26.00 variable cost per crate: Driect materials……………$5.50 direct labor………………….. $ 10.50 variable overhead………… $ 3.50 fixed costs per month…….. $ 122,000.00 Boys and girls of canada is a not for profit organization that raises funds each year by selling popcorn door to door. It offers to pay poppycrock $ 22 per crate for a special order batch of 5,000 crates. the special order popcorn would include a unique label with information about the boys and girls of canada. The additional cost of the label is estimated at $ 1.00 per crate. In addition, the variable overhead for these special order crates would decrease by $ .50 because there would be no distribution of costs. A) what is the incremental cost o creating a normal crate of popcorn? A special order crate of popcorn? B) show the impact on poppycrocks monthly operating profit if it accepts the offer and it is producing and distributing 30,000 normal crates per month. what is the opportunity cost of accepting the offer? c) show the impact on poppycrocks monthly operating profit if it accepts the offer and it is producing and selling 35,000 normal crates per month. what is the opportunity cost of accepting the offer?

prepare a contribution margin analysis report please help 414304

Prepare a contribution margin analysis report for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Costello Industries Inc. Contribution Margin Analysis For the Year Ended December 31, 2012

Planned contribution margin $ 888,800

Effect of change in sales: ???????????????????????

Sales quantity factor $ 220,000

Unit price factor ?????????????????????????????

Total effect of change in sales $11,000

Effect of changes in variable cost of goods sold: ???????????????

Variable cost quantity factor ????????????????????

Unit cost factor ???????????????????????????

Total effect of changes in variable cost of goods sold????????????

Effect of changes in variable selling and administrative expenses:

Variable cost quantity factor ?????????????????????

Unit cost factor ?????????????????????????????????

Total effect of changes in variable selling and administrative expenses $26,400

Actual contribution margin $908,600

variable costing format please help 414341

Prepare an income statement in the variable costing format, indicating the projected annual income from operations if Proposal 3 is accepted. The expenditure of $43,200 for the rental of additional warehouse space can be added to the fixed operating expenses. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

Extreme Camping Company Contribution Margin”Proposal 3

Size S Size L Total

Sales

Variable cost of goods sold

Manufacturing margin

Variable operating expenses

Contribution margin

Fixed costs:

Manufacturing costs

Operating expenses

Total fixed costs

Income from operations

accounts receivable journal entries 414346

Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions:

(1) On December 15, 2008, the company recorded $150,000 sales on credit.

(2) On December 31, 2008, the company estimated bad debt expenses of $15,000.

(3) On January 12, 2009, collect $100,000 worth of accounts receivable.

(4) After many collection attempts, the Company determined on June 15, 2009 that it would not collect $10,000 in accounts receivables from Pendant Publishing. It decided to write off this account.

(5) On July 15, Pendant Publishing called to say that they have had financial problems but can afford to pay $7,000 to settle their $10,000 debt in full. Vandolay Industries agreed to these terms, and reversed $7,000 of the prior write off. It received a $7,000 check from Pendant the next day.

Post the above entries to the following T accounts:

Accounts Receivable

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

accounting question 414390

Presented here are selected transactions for Snow Company for 2012.

Jan. 1 Retired a piece of machinery that was purchased on January 1, 2002. The machine cost $67,800on that date and had a useful life of10years with no salvage value.
June 30 Sold a computer that was purchased on January 1, 2009. The computer cost $27,200and had a useful life of5years with no salvage value. The computer was sold for $10,880.
Dec. 31 Discarded a delivery truck that was purchased on January 1, 2007. The truck cost $54,000and was depreciated based on an8 year useful life with a $3,100salvage value.

Journalize all entries required on the above dates, including entries to update depreciation, where applicable, on assets disposed of. Snow Company uses straight line depreciation. (Assume depreciation is up to date as of December 31, 2011.)
(Record entries in the order displayed in the problem statement. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually. Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 5,250.)

accounting 414438

Problem 1 5 Income Statement, Statement of Retained Earnings, and

Balance Sheet

The following list, in alphabetical order, shows the various items that regularly appear on the financial

statements of Maple Park Theatres Corp. The amounts shown for balance sheet items are

balances as of September 30, 2012 (with the exception of retained earnings, which is the balance

on September 1, 2012), and the amounts shown for income statement items are balances for the

month ended September 30,2012.

~ Accounts payable $17,600

Accounts receivable 6,410

Advertising expense 14,500

Buildings 60,000

~ Capital stock 50,000

_ Cash 15,230

Concessions revenue 60,300

Cost of concessions sold 23,450

~ Dividends paid during the month 8,400

Furniture and fixtures 34,000

~Land 26,000

~Notes payable 20,000″,

Projection equipment 25,000

Rent expense movies 50,600

Retained earnings 73,780

Salaries and wages expense 46,490_

Ticket sales 95,100

Water, gas, and electricity 6,700

Required

1. Prepare an income statement for the month ended September 30, 2012.

2. Prepare a statement of retained earnings for the month ended September 30, 2012.

3. Prepare a balance sheet at September 30, 2012. ‘

4. You have $1,000 to invest. On the basis of the statements you prepared, would you use it to

buy stock in Maple Park? Explain. What other information would you want before making a

final decision?

managerial accounting determine ending inventory 414458

Problem 18 5A Ending inventory computation and evaluation L.O. C4

Shepler Boot Company makes specialty boots for the rodeo circuit. On December 31, 2010, the company had (a) 500 pairs of boots in finished goods inventory and (b) 1,800 heels at a cost of $15 each in raw materials inventory. During 2011, the company purchased 44,000 additional heels at $15 each and manufactured 16,450 pairs of boots.

Required:
1.

Determine the unit and dollar amounts of raw materials inventory in heels at December 31, 2011

is ms ethylene right how would you evaluate the project 411691

The Bunsen Chemical Company is currently at its target debt ratio of 40%. It is contemplating a $1 million expansion of its existing business. This expansion is expected to produce a cash inflow of $130,000 a year in perpetuity.

The company is uncertain whether to undertake this expansion and how to finance it. The two options are a $1 million issue of common stock or a $1 million issue of 20 year debt. The flotation costs of a stock issue would be around 5% of the amount raised, and the flotation costs of a debt issue would be around 1½%.

Bunsen’s financial manager, Ms. Polly Ethylene, estimates that the required return on the company’s equity is 14%, but she argues that the flotation costs increase the cost of new equity to 19%. On this basis, the project does not appear viable.

On the other hand, she points out that the company can raise new debt on a 7% yield, which would make the cost of new debt 8½%. She therefore recommends that Bunsen should go ahead with the project and finance it with an issue of long term debt.

Is Ms. Ethylene right? How would you evaluate the project?

calculate what their typical pay was before overtime was cut 412549

Cycling through Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, to look at its industrial heritage is an event open to the public. This intriguing ride is laced with the economic challenges that steel mills in Pittsburgh and other areas in the United States have faced resulting in company reductions and shutdowns. Situations similar to the following example are not uncommon. Full time employees (40 hours per week) at the local steel mill were used to earning up to 10 hours of overtime in a two week time period. They would typically work five overtime hours Monday through Friday and five overtime hours on the weekend. Many got used to the extra pay and began living beyond the means of their regular pay. Then overtime was cut. The average laborer’s pay is $25 an hour. They earned 1.5 times their regular hourly pay for overtime Monday through Friday and 2 times their regular hourly pay on weekends and holidays. Calculate what their typical pay was before overtime was cut. Then calculate what percent pay they lost when overtime was cut. Round to the nearest tenth of a percent.

what is the initial amount of cash sharon will need 412655

Sharon Fox decided to buy a home in Marblehead, Massachusetts, for $275,000. Her bank requires a 30% down payment. Sue Willis, an attorney, has notified Sharon that besides the 30% down payment there will be the following additional costs:

Recording of the deed

$ 30.00

A credit and appraisal report

155.00

Preparation of appropriate documents

48.00

A transfer tax of 1.8% of the purchase price and a loan origination fee of 2.5% of the mortgage amount

Assume a 30 year mortgage at a rate of 10%.

a. What is the initial amount of cash Sharon will need?

b. What is her monthly payment?

c. What is the total cost of interest over the life of the mortgage?

which has the highest present value the ordinary annuity or annuity due 412879

Calculating Annuities Due. As discussed in the chapter text, an ordinary annuity assumes equal payments at the end of each period over the life of the annuity. An annuity due is the same thing except the payments occur at the beginning of each period instead. Thus, a three year annual annuity due would have periodic payment cash flows occurring at Years 0, 1 and 2, whereas a three year annual ordinary annuity would have periodic payment cash flows occurring at Years 1, 2 and 3. Suppose you are going to receive $10 000 per year for five years. The appropriate interest rate is 11%.

a. What is the present value of the payments if they are in the form of an ordinary annuity? What is the present value if the payments are an annuity due?

b. Suppose you plan to invest the payments for five years. What is the future value of the payments if they are in the form of an ordinary annuity? What is the future value if the payments are an annuity due?

c. Which has the highest present value, the ordinary annuity or annuity due? Which has the highest future value, the ordinary annuity or annuity due? Will this always be true?

what is the npv of the project 413019

Project Evaluation. Alpha Acoustics Ltd (AAL) projects unit sales for a new seven octave voice emulation implant as follows:

Production of the implants will require $1 500 000 in net working capital to start and additional net working capital investment each year equal to 15% of the projected sales increase for the following year. Total fixed costs are $850 000 per year, variable production costs are $240 per unit, and the units are priced to sell at $340 each. The equipment needed to begin production has an installed cost of $22 000 000. Because the implants are intended for professional singers, this equipment is considered industrial machinery and therefore qualifies as a seven year life, even though management has decided to look at a five year time frame because of future developments in voice emulation implants. AAL projects that in five years the equipment can be sold for about 20% of its acquisition cost. AAL pays tax at the 30% company tax rate and has a required rate of return on all its projects of 18%. Based on these preliminary project estimates, what is the NPV of the project? What is the IRR?

putting on a play to entertain neighbors 413264

You live in a town with 300 adults and 200 children, and you are thinking about putting on a play to entertain your neighbors and make some money. A play has a fixed cost of $2000, but selling an extra ticket has zero marginal cost. Here are the demand schedules for your two types of customer

Price Adults Children
10 0 0
9 100 0
8 200 0
7 300 0
6 300 0
5 300 100
4 300 200
3 300 200
2 300 200
1 300 200

a. To maximize profit, what price would you charge for an adult ticket? For a child’s ticket? How much profit do you make?
b. The city council passes a law prohibiting you from charging different prices to different customers. What price do you set for a ticket now? How much profit do you make?
c. Who is worse off because of the law prohibiting price discrimination? Who is better off? (If you can, quantify the changes in welfare.)
d. If the fixed cost of the play were $2,500 rather than $2,000 how would your answers to parts a, b, and c change?
0 300

loreal american corporation purchased several marketable securities during 2013 at 413316

Loreal American Corporation purchased several marketable securities during 2013. At December 31, 2013, the company had the investiments in commom stock listed below. None was held at the last reporting date, December 31, 2012, and all are considered securities available for sale . Cost fair Value Unrealized Holding Gain ( Loss) Short term: Blair Inc. $480.000 $405.000 $ ( 75.000) ANC Corporation 450.000 480.000 30.000 Totals $ 930.000 $885.000 $ ( 45.000 ) Long Term Drake Corporation $480.000 $ 560.000 $ 80.000 Aaron Industries 720.000 660.000 ( 60.000 ) Totals $ 1.200.000 $ 1.220.000 $ 20.000 Required: 1 Prepare the apropriate adjusting entry at December 31, 2013. 2 What amounts would be reported in the income statement at December 31, 2013, as a result of the adjusting entry ? Thanks.

accounting 413337

Lunn Company makes and sells lawn mowers for which it currently makes the engines. It has an opportunity to purchase the engines from a reliable manufacturer. The annual costs of making the engines are shown here. Cost of materials (14,100 Units Af— $18) $ 253,800 Labor (14,100 Units Af— $26) 366,600 Depreciation on manufacturing equipment* 26,000 Salary of supervisor of engine production 74,000 Rental cost of equipment used to make engines 22,000 Allocated portion of corporate level facility sustaining costs 76,000 __________________________________________________________ Total cost to make 14,100 engines $ 818,400 __________________________________________________________ *The equipment has a book value of $106,000 but its market value is zero. Questions: a. Determine the maximum price per unit that Lunn would be willing to pay for the engines. (Do not round your intermediate calculations. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Maximum price per unit $ b. Determine the maximum price per unit that Lunn would be willing to pay for the engines, if production increased to 18,350 units? (Round your intermediate calculations and final answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Maximum price per unit $

managerial accounting 413378

“This makes no sense at all,” said Bill Sharp, president of Essex Company. “We sold the same number of units this year as we did last year, yet our profits have more than doubled. Who made the goof”the computer or the people who operate it?”

The statements to which Mr. Sharp was referring are shown below (absorption costing basis):

Year 1 Year 2
Sales (29,000 units each year) $1,259,000 $1,259,000
Cost of goods sold

580,000

493,000

Gross margin 679,000 766,000
Selling and administrative expenses 335,000 335,000
Net operating income

$344,000

$431,000


The statements above show the results of the first two years of operation. In the first year, the company produced and sold 29,000 units; in the second year, the company again sold 29,000 units, but it increased production as shown below:

Year 1 Year 2
Production in units 29,000 39,000
Sales in units 29,000 29,000
Variable manufacturing cost per unit produced $5 $5
Variable selling and administrative expense per unit sold $2 $2
Fixed manufacturing overhead costs (total) $435,000 $435,000

Essex Company applies fixed manufacturing overhead costs to its only product on the basis ofeach year’s production. Thus, a new fixed manufacturing overhead rate is computed each year.

Requirement 1:
Compute the unit product cost for each year under:(Round fixed manufacturing overhead cost per unit and final answers to the nearest whole dollar. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)
a. Absorption costing
b. Variable costing

Unit product cost
Year 1 Year 2
a. Absorption costing $ $
b. Variable costing $ $

Requirement 2:

Prepare a contribution format variable costing income statement for each year.(Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Year 1 Year 2
(Click to select)Goods available for saleBeginning inventoryVariable selling and administrative expensesSalesVariable manufacturing costs $ $
Variable expenses:
(Click to select)SalesEnding inventoryGoods available for saleVariable cost of goods soldVariable manufacturing costs
(Click to select)Variable manufacturing costsEnding inventoryVariable selling and administrative expensesSalesGoods available for sale
(Click to select)Fixed selling and administrative expensesContribution marginSalesGoods available for saleDirect materials
Fixed expenses:
(Click to select)Direct materialsGoods available for saleEnding inventoryFixed manufacturing overheadSales
(Click to select)Direct materialsEnding inventorySalesGoods available for saleFixed selling and administrative expenses
(Click to select)Net operating incomeNet operating loss

$

$


Requirement 3:

Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating income figures for each year.(Leave no cells blank be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Round fixed manufacturing overhead cost per unit and final answers to the nearest whole dollar. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Year 1 Year 2
Variable costing net operating income $ $
(Click to select)AddLess: Fixed manufacturing overhead cost deferred in
inventory under absorption costing
Absorption costing net operating income

$

$


Requirement 4:

The net operating income for Year 2 was higher than for Year 1 under absorption costing, although the same number of units was sold in each year. This is because by increasing production and building up inventory, profits increased without any increase in sales or reduction in costs. Is the above reason true or false?

(Click to select)FalseTrue

budgeted balance sheet 413388

The management of Academic Copy, a photocopying center located on University Avenue, has compiled the following data to use in preparing its budgeted balance sheet for next year:

Ending
Balances
Cash ?
Accounts receivable $ 9,300
Supplies inventory $ 3,500
Equipment $ 34,000
Accumulated depreciation $ 15,800
Accounts payable $ 1,710
Common stock $ 4,600
Retained earnings ?

The beginning balance of retained earnings was $34,000, net income is budgeted to be $12,000, and dividends are budgeted to be $3,400.

Required:

Prepare the company’s budgeted balance sheet.(Be sure to list the assets and liabilities in order of their liquidity.Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Academic Copy
Budgeted Balance Sheet
Assets
Current assets:
(Click to select)Supplies inventoryEquipmentAccounts receivableAccumulated depreciationCash $
(Click to select)CashAccounts receivableEquipmentSupplies inventoryAccumulated depreciation
(Click to select)Accumulated depreciationSupplies inventoryCashEquipmentAccounts receivable

Total current assets $
Plant and equipment:
(Click to select)CashSupplies inventoryAccumulated depreciationEquipmentAccounts receivable
(Click to select)CashAccounts receivableAccumulated depreciationEquipmentSupplies inventory

Plant and equipment, net

Total assets $


Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities:
(Click to select)Bills payableNotes payableAccounts payableRetained earningsCommon stock $
Stockholders’ equity:
(Click to select)EquipmentCommon stockBills payableNotes payableAccounts payable
(Click to select)Retained earningsBills payableAccounts PayableEquipmentNotes payable

Total stockholders’ equity

Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $



the marbury stein shop sells steins from all parts of the worl 413420

The Marbury Stein Shop sells steins from all parts of the world. The owner of the shop, Clint Marbury, is thinking of expanding his operations by hiring college students, on a commission basis, to sell steins at the local college. The steins will bear the school emblem. These steins must be ordered from the manufacturer three months in advance, and because of the unique emblem of each college, they cannot be returned. The steins would cost Marbury $20.00 each with a minimum order of 280 steins. Any additional steins would have to be ordered in increments of 50.

Because Marbury’s plan would not require any additional facilities, the only costs associated with the project would be the cost of the steins and the cost of sales commissions. The selling price of the steins would be $40.00 each. Marbury would pay the students a commission of $6.00 for each stein sold.

Required: 1. To make the project worthwhile in terms of his own time, Marbury would require a $10,500 profit for the first six months of the venture. What level of sales in units and dollars would be required to attain this target net operating income? (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Sales level in units _________steins

Sales level in dollars $

2. Assume that the venture is undertaken and an order is placed for 280 steins. What would be Marbury’s break even point in units and in sales dollars? (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answers to the nearest whole number. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Break even point in units steins Break even point in sales dollars $

question 14 413483

Mars Car company has capital structure made up for 40% debt and 60% equity and a tax rate of 30%. A new issue of $1,000 par bonds maturity in 20 years can be issued with a coupon of 9% at a price of 41,098.18 with no flotation costs. The firm has no internal equity available for investment at this time, but can issue new common stock at a price of $45. The next expected dividend on the stock is $2.70. The dividend for Mars Co. is expected to grow at a constant annual rate of 5% per year indefinitely. Flotation costs on new equity will be $7.00 per share. The company has the following independent investment projects available:

Project Initial Outlay IRR
1 $100,000 10%
2 $10,000 8.5%
3 $50,000 12.5%

Which of the above projects should the company take on?
a) Project 3 only
b) Projects 1,2 and 3
c) Projects 1 and 3
d) Projects 1 and 2

matthew hagen started his company the sign of things to come three years ago afte 413513

Matthew Hagen started his company, The Sign of Things to Come, three years ago after graduating from Upper State University. While earning his engineering degree, Matthew became intrigued by all of the neon signs he saw at bars and taverns around the university. Few of his friends were surprised to see him start a neon sign company after leaving school. Matthew is currently considering the introduction of a new custom neon sign that he believes will sell like hot cakes. In fact, he is estimating that the company will sell 700 of the signs. The new signs are expected to sell for $75 and require variable costs of $25. The new signs will require a $30,000 investment in new equipment. A. How many new signs must be sold to break even? signs B. How many new signs must be sold to earn a profit of $15,000 before taxes? units Consider requirements C. through F. as independent situations: C. If 700 new signs are sold, how much pre tax profit will they generate? $ D. What would be the break even point if the sales price decreased by 20 percent? Round your answer to the next highest number. units E. What would be the break even point if variable costs per sign decreased by 40 percent? units F. What would be the break even point if the additional fixed costs were $50,000 rather than $30,000? units

michelle is an employee who must use her personal automobile for employment related 413590

Michelle is an employee who must use her personal automobile for employment related business trips. During the current year, Michelle drives her car 60% for business use and incurs the following total expenses (100% use of car): Gas and oil $9000 Repairs $1400 Depreciation $4700 Insurance and license fees $1300 Parking and tolls business related $100 Total $16,500 Michelle drives 24,000 business miles during the current year and receives a reimbursement of 40 cents per mile from her employer. Assume that an adequate accounting is made to Michelle’s employer. A. states $5020 of the unreimbursed expenses are deductible from AGI, computed as follows: 24,000 miles unreimbursed at current IRS mileage rate which is 56.5 per mile, plus parking and tolls $100=1,346,100 total expenditures, yes? then minus reimbursement 24,000*.40 mile = 9600 and so 1,356,100 9600=1,346,500 deductible from AGI, yes? B. Under the actual cost method, $340 is deductible from AGI, computed as follows: Expenses excluding parking and tolls $29,000*60% business use=17,400 plus parking and tolls $100=17,500 minus employer’s reimbursement amount…..I don’t see what they’d reimbuse so I don’t know the amount. Do you know? Right now I have a deduction amount of 17,500 Question 1 What amount is deductible (before the 2% nondeductible floor) if Michelle elects to use the standard mileage method? Question 2 What amount is deductible (before the 2% nondeductible floor) if Michelle uses the actual cost method? Question 3 Can taxpayers switch back and forth between the mileage and actual methods each year?

accounting 413596

Mike purchases a heavy duty truck (5 year class recovery property) for his delivery service on April 30, 2012. The truck is not considered a passenger automobile for purposes of the listed property and luxury automobile limitations. The truck has a depreciable basis of $39,080 and an estimated useful life of 5 years. Assume no election to expense is made and no bonus depreciation is taken.<?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

a. Calculate the amount of depreciation for 2012 using financial accounting straight line depreciation (not the straight line MACRS election) over the truck’s estimated useful life.

b. Calculate the amount of depreciation for 2012 using the straight line depreciation election, using MACRS tables over the minimum number of years.

c. Calculate the amount of accelerated depreciation for 2012 that Mike could deduct using the MACRS tables.

which of the following statements is true concerning assets 413601

Which of the following statements is true concerning assets?
(a). They are recorded at cost and adjusted for inflation.
(b). They are recorded at market value for financial reporting because historical cost is arbitrary.
(c). Accounting principles require that companies report assets on the income statement.
(d). Assets are measured using the cost concept.

2. When the concept of conservation is applied to the Balance Sheet, it results in
(a). Overstatement of Capital
(b). Understatement of Capital
(c). Overstatement of Assets
(d). Understatement of Assets.

3. Which of the following is a correct expression of the accounting equation?
(a). Assets Liabilities + Owners’ Equity
(b). Assets = Liabilities Owners’ Equity
(c). Assets + Owners’ Equity = Liabilities
(d). Assets = Liabilities + Owners’ Equity

4. How is the balance sheet linked to the other financial statements?
(a). The beginning retained earnings balance on the statement of retained earnings becomes the amount of retained earnings reported on the balance sheet.
(b). Retained earnings is added to total assets and reported on the balance sheet.
(c). Net income increases retained earnings on the statement of retained earnings, which ultimately increases retained earnings on the balance sheet.
(d). There is no link between the balance sheet and the other statements.

5. The process of recording the economic effects of business transactions in a book of original entry:
(a). Double entry system
(b). Debit
(c). Credit
(d). Journalizing

Document Preview:

Multiple Choice Question – Set 2 1. Which of the following statements is true concerning assets??(a). They are recorded at cost and adjusted for inflation.?(b). They are recorded at market value for financial reporting because historical cost is arbitrary.?(c). Accounting principles require that companies report assets on the income statement.?(d). Assets are measured using the cost concept. 2. When the concept of conservation is applied to the Balance Sheet, it results in?(a). Overstatement of Capital?(b). Understatement of Capital?(c). Overstatement of Assets?(d). Understatement of Assets. 3. Which of the following is a correct expression of the accounting equation??(a). Assets Liabilities + Owners’ Equity?(b). Assets = Liabilities Owners’ Equity?(c). Assets + Owners’ Equity = Liabilities?(d). Assets = Liabilities + Owners’ Equity 4. How is the balance sheet linked to the other financial statements??(a). The beginning retained earnings balance on the statement of retained earnings becomes the amount of retained earnings reported on the balance sheet.?(b). Retained earnings is added to total assets and reported on the balance sheet.?(c). Net income increases retained earnings on the statement of retained earnings, which ultimately increases retained earnings on the balance sheet.?(d). There is no link between the balance sheet and the other statements. 5. The process of recording the economic effects of business transactions in a book of original entry:?(a). Double entry system?(b). Debit?(c). Credit?(d). Journalizing 6. If the sum of the debits and credits in a trial balance is not equal, then?(a). There is no concern because the two amounts are not meant to be equal.?(b). The chart of accounts also does not balance.?(c). It is safe to proceed with the preparation of financial statements.?(d). Most likely an error was made in posting journal entries to the general ledger or in preparing the trial balance. 7. Z Ltd had Rs. 1800 of supplies on hand at…

Attachments:

managerial accounting help 413602

Millonzi Corporation has a standard cost system in which it applies manufacturing overhead to products on the basis of standard machine hours (MHs). The company has provided the following data for the most recent month:

Budgeted level of activity 3,600 MHs
Actual level of activity 3,500 MHs
Standard variable manufacturing overhead rate $6.30 per MH
Actual total variable manufacturing overhead $21,000

What was the variable overhead rate variance for the month?
$600 unfavorable
$630 favorable
$1,680 favorable
$1,050 favorable

problem 1 responsibility income statement cost classification help 413614

Milton’s, a large department store, prepares income statements by sales department. These statements follow the contribution margin approach, showing contribution margin and responsibility margin for each profit center as well as monthly income from operations for the store. Indicate the classification of each of the costs listed below by inserting the appropriate code letters in the space provided

______ (a) The cost of merchandise sold in the Women’s Sportswear Department.
______ (b) Advertising a sale in the Housewares Department (classify as a fixed cost).
______ (c) Depreciation on equipment used in the Automotive Service Department.
______ (d) Depreciation on the store’s heating and air conditioning system.
_____ (e) Monthly salary of the manager of the Toy Department.
_____ (f) Sales taxes collected from customers and paid to local tax authorities.
_____ (g) Monthly salaries of store security guards.

mocha company manufactures a single product by a continuous process involving three 413640

Mocha Company manufactures a single product by a continuous process, involving three production departments. The records indicate that direct materials, direct labor, and applied factory overhead for Department 1 were $100,000, $125,000, and $150,000, respectively. The records further indicate that direct materials, direct labor, and applied factory overhead for Department 2 were $50,000, $60,000, and $70,000, respectively. In addition, work in process at the beginning of the period for Department 1 totaled $75,000, and work in process at the end of the period totaled $60,000.The journal entry to record the flow of costs from Department 1 into Department 2 during the period is:

a. Work in Process Department 2 390,000 Work in Process Department 1 390,000
b. Work in Process Department 2 255,000 Work in Process Department 1 255,000
c. Work in Process Department 2 375,000 Work in Process Department 1 375,000
d. Work in Process Department 2 330,000 Work in Process Department 1 330,000

accounting question 413726

Mountain High Ice Cream Company transferred $71,000 of accounts receivable to the Prudential Bank. The transfer was made with recourse. Prudential remits 90% of the factored amount to Mountain High and retains 10% to cover sales returns and allowances. When the bank collects the receivables, it will remit to Mountain High the retained amount (which Mountain estimates has a fair value of $6,100). Mountain High anticipates a $4,100 recourse obligation. The bank charges a 3% fee (3% of $71,000), and requires that amount to be paid at the start of the factoring arrangement.

Required:

Prepare the journal entry to record the transfer on the books of Mountain High assuming that the sale criteria are met. (If no entry is required for a particular event, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.)

Record the transfer of accounts receivable.

discussion board deliverable length one flow chart 270760

Assignment Type: Discussion Board Deliverable Length: One Flow Chart Points Possible: 75 Due Date: 2/20/2013 11:59:59 PM CT The Discussion Board (DB) is part of the core of online learning. Classroom discussion in an online environment requires the active participation of students and the instructor to create robust interaction and dialogue. Every student is expected to create an original response to the open ended DB question as well as engage in dialogue by responding to posts created by others throughout the week. At the end of each unit, DB participation will be assessed based on both level of engagement and the quality of the contribution to the discussion. At a minimum, each student will be expected to post an original and thoughtful response to the DB question and contribute to the weekly dialogue by responding to at least two other posts from students. The first contribution must be posted before midnight (Central Time) on Wednesday of each week. Two additional responses are required after Wednesday of each week. Students are highly encouraged to engage on the Discussion Board early and often, as that is the primary way the university tracks class attendance and participation. The purpose of the Discussion Board is to allow students to learn through sharing ideas and experiences as they relate to course content and the DB question. Because it is not possible to engage in two way dialogue after a conversation has ended, no posts to the DB will be accepted after the end of each unit. Select a company that you are familiar with from the transportation industry. • Collect the 4 main financial statements from credible sources (e.g., nationally syndicated newspapers, peer reviewed journals, investor relations, Web sites or annual reports. • Create a flow chart that illustrates the steps in the accounting cycle. • Include any other relevant information in the chart that would apply within the steps. When reviewing the financial statements, focus your attention on the expenses and revenues incurred by the company. Adhere to APA formatting guidelines when writing your response. Additionally, your response should be free of grammatical errors, use complete sentences, and give specific details to support statements made.

Attachments:

a what type of business is this company service merchandising or manufacturing 271108

Complete the following problems

Case 3.1

C3.1 13

C1.1 Select a company you are interested in and obtain a copy of its most recent annual report (Panera Bread). Keep this report for use throughout this book. Based on the information in this report, answer the following questions:

A. What type of business is this company (service, merchandising, or manufacturing)?

B. Does the company conduct business internationally?

C. What are the company’s primary products and/or services?

D. Who is the chief executive officer of the company?

E. Who is the auditor for the company?

F. Did the company have positive or negative income during the period?

G. What are the total assets at the end of the most recent period?

H. What are the total liabilities at the end of the most recent period?

I. What are the cash flows from operating activities for the most recent period?

J. What are the current, return on sales, and debt to equity ratios for the most recent period?

Refer to C1.1. Based on your knowledge of this company, describe its revenue, expenditure, and conversion (if applicable) processes.

P3.2

  • P3.2 Forster is estimating costs for the last half of the year based on activity during the first half of the year. The results from January through June are as follows:

Month

Units

Production Costs

January

3,500

$ 56,700

February

6,200

81,800

March

4,600

69,800

April

12,500

128,900

May

8,100

95,800

June

9,800

122,100

  • Required:
  • A. Using the high/low cost estimation method, determine the total variable cost per unit made.
  • B. Using the high/low cost estimation method, determine the total fixed cost per month.
  • C. What is the cost estimation equation?
  • D. Estimate the total cost if 11,000 units are made during July using the equation developed in part (C).
  • E. Why are the high and low points chosen based on units?

Top of Form

Bottom of Form

E3 13

  • E3.1LO 1 On December 29, 2009, Wolfe Company ships $100,000 of merchandise by common carrier to the Audio Midwest Company. The terms of the sale are 2/15, n/30, FOB destination. It takes five days for the merchandise to arrive at Audio Midwest. Wolfe and Audio Midwest have December 31 year ends. Which company should report the merchandise on their balance sheet? Why?
  • E3.2LO 1 Refer to E3.1. What is the available sales/purchase discount? When is it available?
  • E3.3LO 1 On December 30, 2009, Parker Company ships $250,000 of merchandise by common carrier to Jackson, Inc. The terms of the sale are 2/10, n/60, FOB shipping point. It takes four days for the merchandise to arrive at Jackson, Inc. Both Parker and Jackson have December 31 year ends. Can Parker report a sale on its income statement for fiscal 2009? Why?
  • E3.4LO 1 Refer to E3.3. What is the available sales/purchase discount? When is it available?
  • E3.5LO 1 Eddie Bauer accepts Visa, MasterCard, Discover, and American Express as well as its own Eddie Bauer charge cards. Assume that Visa and MasterCard charge a 1.8 percent processing fee while Discover and American Express charge a 3.5 percent processing fee. During the period, the following charge card sales occurred at a particular Eddie Bauer store (no payments were made by customers):

Visa

$ 8,650

MasterCard

10,625

Discover

6,175

American Express

2,130

Eddie Bauer

25,843

  • What is the net amount of cash received from charge sales during the period?
  • E3.6LO 1 Shea, a regional jewelry store, issues its own charge cards to customers. It bills its customers on the first day of every month for purchases made during the previous month. In addition, Shea accepts Visa and MasterCard, both of which charge a 1.8 percent processing fee. The following sales were made during the period:

Visa

$ 5,490

MasterCard

3,401

Shea card

10,980

Cash sales

2,695

Sales paid by check

6,400

What is the net amount of cash received from the sales made during the period (assume 10% NSF checks)?

  • E3.7LO 2 Trollinger is an automotive parts retail store. It sells motor oil, oil filters, automotive batteries, and other automotive equipment. Assume that activity is defined as the number of products sold. Identify each of the following costs as variable, fixed, or mixed. Use V for variable, F for fixed, and M for mixed.

________ A. Cost of automotive batteries

________ B. Wages paid to employees who deliver parts to customers

________ C. Cost of shelving for the showroom

________ D. Utilities: water, electricity, and heat

________ E. Freight paid to receive parts from the warehouse

________ F. Insurance paid on shipments from the factory to Trollinger

________ G. Insurance paid on retail store

________ H. Computer costs for inventory maintenance

________ I. Wages paid to employees who wait on customers

________ J. Cost of oil

  • E3.8LO 2 Leasure Locks is a hair styling salon. The following is a list of costs connected with the salon. Identify each of the costs as variable, fixed, or mixed. Assume that activity is measured as the number of customers. Use V for variable, F for fixed, and M for mixed.

________ A. Hair products sold to customers

________ B. Computer costs for inventory maintenance

________ C. Stylists’wages and commissions

________ D. Hair dryers

________ E. Combs, brushes, and miscellaneous hair supplies

________ F. Perming solution

________ G. Laundry service for towels and gowns

________ H. Shampoo and rinse

________ I. Utilities: water, electricity, and heat

________ J. Rent on the facilities

E3.9LO 2 Woznick offers clients a variety of legal services. Some clients pay Woznick a monthly retainer, while others are billed as services are rendered. Identify each of the revenues below as variable, fixed, or mixed. Use V for variable, F for fixed, and M for mixed. Activity is measured as the number of hours of legal service provided.

________ A. Nicky hires Woznick to handle her divorce. She is billed for the hours worked.

________ B. Paul hires Woznick for estate planning. He is billed a research fee plus time worked.

________ C. Michelle hires Woznick to handle her real estate transactions. This is an ongoing situation for which Michelle pays a monthly fee.

________ D. David hires Woznick for legal advice as he incorporates his business. Woznick charges David a flat fee to prepare the documents plus a fee per hours worked.

________ E. Katie hires Woznick to write a partnership agreement. Woznick charges a flat fee for this service.

________ F. Jason hires Woznick to obtain local permits to operate his business. Woznick bills Jason for time worked.

  • E3.10LO 2 Duckworth is a manufacturing firm that makes ping pong paddles. Each ping pong paddle consists of a handle, a wooden paddle, and a rubber backing for the wooden paddle. As the paddles progress through the assembly process, workers attach the handles and glue on the rubber backing. Identify each of these costs as variable, fixed, or mixed. Use V for variable, F for fixed, and M for mixed. Activity is measured as the number of ping pong paddles produced.

________ A. Cost of shipping crates

________ B. Cost of glue

________ C. Cost of wooden paddles

________ D. Production supervisor’s salary

________ E. Cost of rubber backing for the ping pong paddles

________ F. Utilities for the production facilities: water, electricity, and heat

________ G. Commission of sales personnel

________ H. Rent on production facilities

________ I. Wages of assembly workers

________ J. Cost of handles for the paddles

  • E3.11LO 3 Mitchem Fleet, Inc., has incurred the following maintenance costs on its fleet of taxicabs during the past six months. Use the high/low cost estimation method to determine the expected cost if 12,000 miles are logged in one month.

Attachments:

you will have to compute the cash dividends paid yourself 271214

Chapter 17Handout ProblemOn the Chapter 17 Excel answer sheet I have placed the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2013for Space Odyssey Voyages Corporation. Also you will see a balance sheet for December 31, 2013and specific comparative data from 2012.RequiredCompute the followingratios(not in the order given below): Fixed Asset turnoverProfit margin ratioPrice earnings ratioacid test ratioGross Profit ratio(or rate)Dividend yield*receivables turnoverReturn on total assetsDebt ratioinventory turnoverReturn on stockholders’ equityEquity ratioTotal asset turnoverEarnings per shareTimes interest earned?*YOU WILL HAVE TO COMPUTE THE CASH DIVIDENDS PAID YOURSELF. Remember where dividends fit in the financial statements: beg retained earnings + net income –dividends = ending retained earnings?Report your ratios to one or two decimal places, such as: 1.575is formatted as 1.58 or 1.6 . Use the decimal decrease or increase buttonon the toolbarto adjust the number of decimal places. For percentages: .357 would be formatted as 35.7%. Use your format buttons and the decimal increase and decrease shortcut keys to help you out. You have aleady used these shortcut keys on the extra credit excel exerciseyou completed for the Getting Started Activities?I completed the current ratio for you. Use that as a guide as to what in include in your completed answer.Make sure you write the formula in words andin numbers.I will deduct points if you don’t include the formula in words. (By the way, that is the constant when you compute ratios. The numbers change, but the words don’t. That is why I ask for the formula in words first.)?Please note:?If you do not use excel formulas to compute any part of the ratiosyou will automatically lose 4points (your maximum score will be 6points). ?If you don’t format your answers to one or two decimal places, I will deduct 1 point. You must comply with standard rules used in the industry.All you have to do is use the increase or decrease decimal places icon on the toolbar. Look at your answer before moving on and make sure it contains at least 1 decimal place.?I have split the screen for you. This is a feature in excel where you can see and scroll the top portion a worksheet and see and scroll the bottom part of the worksheet all in the visible area. This makes it easier for you to see the cell locations from the statements (top half of the screen) to use in your formulas in the ratio computation area (bottom half of the screen). This feature makes it much easier to work with worksheets that are larger in scale.

?Some of the formulas require that you use averaged amounts, such as average inventory, average receivables, etc. There is an excel funtion that greatly simplifies the formula for computing averages. =average(firstvalue, secondvalue)Example: assume that the ending inventory amountis in Cell A12 and beginning inventory is in cell B12. To compute the average using the Average Function type this: =average(A12,B12) Excel will compute the average for you. This is much easierand more reliablethan writing a complicated formula.

help 271405

a. An analysis of WTI’s insurance policies shows that $3,000 of coverage has expired.
b. An inventory count shows that teaching supplies costing $2,600 are available at year end 2011.
c. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $12,000.
d. Annual depreciation on the professional library is $6,000.
e.

On November 1, WTI agreed to do a special six month course (starting immediately) for a client. The contract calls for a monthly fee of $2,200, and the client paid the first five months’ fees in advance. When the cash was received, the Unearned Training Fees account was credited. The fee for the sixth month will be recorded when it is collected in 2012.

f.

On October 15, WTI agreed to teach a four month class (beginning immediately) for an individual for $3,000 tuition per month payable at the end of the class. The class started on October 15, but no payment has yet been received. (WTI’s accruals are applied to the nearest half month; for example, October recognizes one half month accrual.)

g.

WTI’s two employees are paid weekly. As of the end of the year, two days’ salaries have accrued at the rate of $100 per day for each employee.

h. The balance in the Prepaid Rent account represents rent for December.

an assurance engagement involves evaluation or measurement of subject matter 271470

MAA 303 Audit Assignment – Trimester 3 2012

The MAA303 audit assignment consists of three short questions. Each question must be answered within the word limit guidelines and in your own words. Marks will be deducted if your answers contain large amounts of text copied from textbooks or any other reference material. If you are unsure about this “warning” please refer to the section on plagiarism in the MAA303 unit guide.

Question 1

An assurance engagement involves evaluation or measurement of subject matter against criteria. Discuss the criteria used in a financial report audit? Discuss and critically evaluate the challenges auditors face in providing and audit opinion on a company’s environmental performance.

(Word limit: Individual – 500 words; Two – 670 words; Three – 850 words)

(8 Marks)

Question 2

The final decision in the Centro Case was handed down in the Federal Court on 27 June 2011. PWC had admitted it had erred and agreed to pay around $66 million of the $200m settlement. Had the legal case against PWC proceeded to court, on what basis might PWC have been found guilty? What are the implications from the Centro case for auditors practice in the future?

(Word limit: Individual – 500 words; Two – 670 words; Three – 850 words)

(9 Marks)

Question 3

Explain how the nature of a substantive test could affect the decisions about when and how much substantive testing is performed?

How do these decisions relate to the overall risk assessment for the item being tested?

(Word limit: Individual – 500 words; Two – 670 words; Three – 850 words)

(8 Marks)

Word Length

The assignment may be completed individually or in groups of one, two or three. Maximum word lengths vary accordingly: 1 person = 1500 words; 2 people = 2010 words, 3 people = 2550 words. The word length of the assignment should reflect the marks allocated above. (Of course, one clearly argued paragraph is preferable to five pages of confused nonsense.) Students are responsible for organising and managing their own groups and there are no restrictions on group membership. Off campus students are encouraged to organise on line groups through the discussion forum.

Caution: Each group member is responsible for the whole assignment.

MAA 303 Audit Assignment – Trimester 3 2012

Submission

Organise your submission with a title page and the three parts as described above. There is
no need for a table of contents, an executive summary or an introductory section. See the unit planner in the unit guide for submission requirements. Mailed papers will be considered to be on time if posted on the due date. The submission date will be determined by the postmark.

Include a plagiarism declaration signed by every group member. Late submissions will be penalised 1 mark per day late.

Student assignments are expected to exhibit coherence and good quality organisation, punctuation, spelling, grammar and referencing. Up to 5 marks (out of 25) will be deducted for substandard performance in
each of these areas. Where the paper is judged unreadable, students will be asked to resubmit and will not receive more than 50% for the resubmission.

Any queries about the marking of assignments should be brought to the attention of the teaching staff immediately after assignments are returned. No queries relating to the assignment will be considered
after the final exam.

Due Date

(a) On line copy due by
Thursday 5 January 2013 before 11.59 pm.

(b) Hard copy must be posted (using DSA assignment tracking) before 5.00 pm on
6 January 2013 to DSA.

Attachments:

sir grapefellow tired of selling world war i era merchandise for years is currently 271609

Sir Grapefellow, tired of selling World War I era merchandise for years, is currently thinking of entering the breakfast cereals market in North Jersey with a new brand called Sir Grapefellow. Sir Grapefellow has estimated brand awareness to be approximately 90%, because the brand will enjoy high local TV and point of purchase promotion budgets. For manufacturing and marketing, Sir Grapefellow would have to spend $1 million towards fixed costs. Just one supermarket chain, which alone sells 35% of total breakfast cereals sold in the target market, will carry the brand. According to Sir Grapefellow, this brand, to be priced at $1.00 for a half lb. pack, will sell enough to carry his company out of the red. An MR agency appointed by Sir Grapefellow has contacted a sample of households to get `intention to buy’ information for the brand. The agency reports that, given 100% awareness and availability, the percentage of respondent households who have given different ratings for `intention to buy’ on a 10 point scale (ranging from 0 = `would definitely not buy’ to 10 = `would definitely buy’) is given as follows:

Response on 0 10 scale Percent of responses

1 25

2 20

3 18

5 26

  1. 11

Sir Grapefellow’s cost accountant reports that the variable cost for 1 lb. of the cereal comes to $1.05. If the target market in North Jersey consists of 100,000 households each buying a half lb. pack per fortnight, answer the following questions:

1) What demand would you project for Sir Grapefellow for the current year?

2) Do you think Sir Grapefellow will sell enough to break even? Should he introduce his namesake cereal brand in North Jersey?

3) What is the projected pay back period?

Justify your answers with suitable calculations. (assume there are only 24 fortnights in the year)

Document Preview:

Sir Grapefellow, tired of selling World War I era merchandise for years, is currently thinking of entering the breakfast cereals market in North Jersey with a new brand called Sir Grapefellow. Sir Grapefellow has estimated brand awareness to be approximately 90%, because the brand will enjoy high local TV and point of purchase promotion budgets. For manufacturing and marketing, Sir Grapefellow would have to spend $1 million towards fixed costs. Just one supermarket chain, which alone sells 35% of total breakfast cereals sold in the target market, will carry the brand. According to Sir Grapefellow, this brand, to be priced at $1.00 for a half lb. pack, will sell enough to carry his company out of the red. An MR agency appointed by Sir Grapefellow has contacted a sample of households to get `intention to buy’ information for the brand. The agency reports that, given 100% awareness and availability, the percentage of respondent households who have given different ratings for `intention to buy’ on a 10 point scale (ranging from 0 = `would definitely not buy’ to 10 = `would definitely buy’) is given as follows: Response on 0 10 scale Percent of responses 1 25 2 20 3 18 5 26 11 Sir Grapefellow’s cost accountant reports that the variable cost for 1 lb. of the cereal comes to $1.05. If the target market in North Jersey consists of 100,000 households each buying a half lb. pack per fortnight, answer the following questions: 1) What demand would you project for Sir Grapefellow for the current year? 2) Do you think Sir Grapefellow will sell enough to break even? Should he introduce his namesake cereal brand in North Jersey? 3) What is the projected pay back period? Justify your answers with suitable calculations. (assume there are only 24 fortnights in the year)

Attachments:

accounting problem 271755

prefered stock, 4% cumulative $100 par $100,000
paid in capital in excess of par prefered 55,000
common stock $50 par 250,000
paid in capital in excess of par common 235,000
retained earnings 455,300
treasury stock at cost 700 shares 96,000

compute the following
a:
1: # of share of common stock outstanding
2: # of shares of prefered stock outstanding
3: average issue price of common stock
4: Ave. issue price of prefered stock

b: how many shares of common stock would be outstanding if victory declares a 4 for 1 stock split
c: complete the part without the stock split in part b. prepare the journal entry if the board of directors declared and distributed a 15% stock dividends on the common stock when market price was $130 per share

intermediate accounting question 411150

On June 30, 2013, the Esquire Company sold some merchandise to a customer for $30,000 and agreed to accept as payment a noninterest bearing note with an 8% discount rate requiring the payment of $30,000 on March 31, 2014. The 8% rate is appropriate in this situation.

Required:

1.

Prepare journal entries to record the sale of merchandise (omit any entry that might be required for the cost of the goods sold), the December 31, 2013 interest accrual, and the March 31, 2014 collection. (If no entry is required for a particular transaction, select “No journal entry required” in the first account field.)

A?· Record the sale of merchandise.

A?· Record the interest revenue on December 31.

A?· Record the interest revenue on March 31.

Record the cash collection.

2.

What is the effective interest rate on the note? (Round your answer to 3 decimal places.)

karl f and jeanne s wheat are married and live at 13071 forestview drive columbi 411176

Karl F. and Jeanne S. Wheat are married and live at 13071 Forestview Drive, Columbia, MO 65201. Karl is a self employed insurance claims adjuster (business activity code 524290), and Jeanne is a dietitian for the local school district. 1. Karl represents several national casualty insurance companies on a contract basis. He is paid a retainer and receives additional compensation if the claims for the year exceed a specified number. As an independent contractor, he is responsible for whatever expenses he incurs. Karl works out of an office near his home. The office is located at 1202 Brentwood Avenue. He shares Suite 326 with a financial consultant, and operating expenses are divided equally between them. The suite has a common waiting room with a receptionist furnished and paid by the landlord. Karl’s one half share of the 2011 expenses he paid is listed below. Office rent $11,600 Utilities (includes telephone and fax) 4,300 Replacement of waiting room furniture on April 22 3,600 Renters’ insurance (covers personal liability, casualty, and theft) 1,400 Office expense (supplies and postage meter) 740 New Toshiba copier (less trade in on old machine) on February 7 300 Waiting room coffee service (catered) 280 Waiting room magazine subscriptions 90 For his own business use, Karl purchased a laptop computer for $2,100 on June 17 and a Nikon camera for $1,200 on February 5. Except for his vehicle (see item 2), Karl uses the A?§ 179 write offoption whenever possible. 2. On January 2, 2011, Karl paid $31,000 (including sales tax) to purchase a gently used Dodge Durango SUV that he uses 92% of the time for business. No trade in was involved, and he did not claim any A?§ 179 expensing. Karl uses the actual operating cost method to compute his tax deduction, using the 200% declining balance MACRS depreciation method with a half year convention. His expenses relating to the Durango for 2011 are as follows: Gasoline $3,100 Auto insurance 1,500 Interest on car loan 820 Auto club dues 225 Oil changes and lubrication 140 License and registration 90 In connection with his business use of the Durango, Karl paid $510 for parking and $350 in fines for traffic violations. In 2011, Karl drove the Durango 14,352 miles for business [8,612 miles between January 1 and June 30 and 5,740 miles between July 1 and December 31] and 1,248 miles for personal use (which includes his daily round trip commute to work). 3. Karl handles most claim applications locally, but on occasion, he must travel out of town. Expenses in connection with these business trips during 2011 were $930 for lodging and $1,140 for meals. He also paid $610 for business dinners with several visiting executives of insurance companies with whom he does business. Karl’s other business related expenses for 2011 are listed below. Contribution to H.R. 10 (Keogh) retirement plan $8,000 Premiums on medical insurance covering family (spouse and children) 4,600 Premiums on disability insurance policy(pays for loss of income in the event Karl is disabled and cannot work 2,400 State and local occupation fee 450 Birthday gift for receptionist($25 box of Godiva chocolates plus $3 for gift wrap) $28 4. Jeanne earns $32,000 as a registered dietician for the Columbia School District. The job she holds, manager of the school lunch program, is not classified as full time. Consequently, she is not eligible to participate in the teacher retirement or health insurance programs. Jeanne’s expenses for 2011 are summarized as follows: Contribution to traditional IRA $4,000 Job hunting expense 720 Continuing education program 350 Membership dues to the National Association of Dietitians 120 Subscription to Nutrition Today 90 To work full time and earn a larger salary, Jeanne applied for a position as chief dietitian for a chain of nursing homes. According to the director of the recruiting service Jeanne hired, the position has not yet been filled and Jeanne is one of the leading candidates. The continuing education program was sponsored by the National Association of Dietitians and consisted of a one day seminar on special diets for seniors. Out of a total of 8,670 miles driven for the year, Jeanne drove the family Chevrolet Malibu 930 miles on job related use. She drove 410 miles between January 1 and June 30 and the remaining 520 miles between July 1 and December 31. The Wheats purchased the car on July 11, 2009, for $23,400. Jeanne uses the automatic mileage method for computing any available deduction for business use of the car. 5. The Wheats have supported Gene Isaacson, Jeanne’s widowed father, for several years, appropriately claiming him as a dependent for tax purposes. On December 27, 2010, Gene suffered a massive stroke. The doctors did everything they could for Gene, but he died in the intensive care unit of St. Mary’s Memorial Hospital on January 8, 2011. The Wheats paid the following expenses on behalf of Gene: $11,800 medical ($6,000 incurred in 2010 and $5,800 in 2011) and $5,300 funeral. [The Wheats’ medical insurance (see item 3) does not cover parents.] These expenses were paid in January and February 2011. Gene’s will named Jeanne as executor and sole heir of the estate. 6. Upon the advice of the financial consultant who shares office space with Karl, the Wheats decided to convert Gene’s home into a furnished rental house. After several minor repairs (e.g., touching up the paint on the interior walls, replacing various window screens, and pressure washing the brick exterior), the property was advertised for rent in the classified section of the local newspaper on March 1, 2011. The repairs cost $720, and the newspaper ad was $360. Based on reconstructed records and appraisal estimates, information about the property is as follows: Original Cost FMV 1/8/11 House $40,000 $220,000 Land 10,000 50,000 Furniture 21,000 14,000 7. Gene’s former residence was rented almost immediately, with occupancy commencing April 1, 2011, under the following terms: one year lease; $2,400 per month; first and last month’s rent in advance; $2,000 damage deposit; and lawn care, but not utilities, included. The tenant complied with all terms except that the December rent payment was not made until January 1, 2012″the tenant took an extended Christmas holiday trip. Expenses in connection with the property were as follows: property taxes, $2,600; repairs, $320; lawn maintenance, $540; insurance, $1,800; and street paving assessment, $2,100. The property is located at 12120 Barrington Avenue, Columbia, MO 65201. (Note: If you are using H&R Block At Home, input 365in the “days owned” box and in the “days rented” box. Otherwise, the program will apportion the expenses inappropriately). 8. In early December 2010, a friend advised Karl to buy stock in Pioneer Aviation Inc. (PAI). At that time, PAI was in serious financial straits and was headed toward bankruptcy. Nevertheless, according to Karl’s friend, the value of the corporation’s underlying assets was such that the shareholders were bound to recover considerably more than the current market price of $0.50 per share. Excited at the chance for a “sure” profit, on December 15, 2010, Karl purchased 20,000 shares for $10,000. In September 2011, the trustee in bankruptcy announced that the stock was worthless and that even some of PAI’s preferred creditors would not be paid. 9. On June 14, 2011, the Wheats sold 500 shares of Garnet Corporation for $17,500 ($35 per share). They owned 1,000 shares acquired as follows: 500 shares on November 5, 2007, for $25 a share and 500 shares on August 5, 2009, for $30 a share. The Wheats did not instruct their broker as to which 500 shares to sell. 10. One month before she died on April 14, 2002, Violet Isaacson (Jeanne’s mother) gave Jeanne a coin collection. Based on careful records that Violet kept, the collection had a cost basis of $9,000 and a fair market value of $18,000 at the time Violet passed away. On February 12, 2011, the Wheat residence was burglarized, and the coin collection was stolen. The Wheats filed a claim for $24,000 (the current value of the collection) with the carrier of their homeowner’s insurance policy. All they were able to collect, however, was $10,000, which was the maximum amount allowed for valuables (e.g., jewelry and antiques) without a special rider. 11. In her will, Violet Isaacson (see item 10) left Jeanne a vacant lot on Joplin Road. Violet had paid $15,000 for the property, and it had a value of $19,000 when she died. Violet had purchased the lot because it was adjacent to a school that she expected would expand. By 2011, it has become clear that the Joplin Road area of Columbia is not growing and that no school expansion will take place. Consequently, on July 1, 2011, Jeanne sold the lot for $19,000. Not included in this price are back property taxes (and interest on the underpaid taxes) of $700 on the lot, which the purchaser assumed and later paid. 12. Every year around Christmas, Karl receives cards from various car repair facilities (including dealerships), expressing thanks for the business referrals and enclosing cash. Karl has no arrangement, contractual or otherwise, that requires any compensation for the referrals he makes. Concerned about the legality of such “gifts,” Karl had previously consulted an attorney about the matter. Without passing judgment on the status of the payors, the attorney found that Karl’s acceptance of the payments does not violate state or local law. Karl sincerely believes that the payments he receives have no effect on the referrals he makes. During December 2011, Karl received cards containing $7,200. One card containing $900, however, was delayed in the mail and was not received by Karl until January 4, 2012. 13. In addition to those previously noted, the Wheats’ receipts during 2011 are summarized below. ‘ Payments to Karl for services rendered (as reported on Forms 1099 issued by several payor insurance companies) pursuant to contractual arrangement $82,000 Income tax refunds for tax year 2010 Federal 210 State 90 Interest income State of Missouri general purpose bonds 1,400 GE corporate bonds 1,100 Certificate of deposit at Columbia National Bank 900 Qualified dividends (Duke Energy) $ 600 Proceeds from garage sale (see item 14) 9,200 Cash gifts from Karl’s parents 24,000 Karl’s net state lottery gains (winnings, $1,000; losses, $900) 100 14. On June 2 and 3, 2011, the Wheats held a garage sale to dispose of unwanted furniture, appliances, books, bicycles, clothes, and a boat (including trailer). The estimated basis of the items sold is $25,500. All were personal use property. 15. Expenditures during 2011, not mentioned elsewhere, are as follows: Medical” Copayment portion of medical expenses $1,300 Dental (orthodontist) 1,200 Taxes” State income tax (see item 17) 3,456 State sales taxes 1,120 Property taxes on personal residence 3,800 Interest on home mortgage reported on Form 1098 4,200 Charitable contributions 3,600 The Wheats’ medical insurance does not cover dental services. The Wheats pledge contributions of $1,200 per year to their church. In 2011, they paid the pledges for 2010’2012. During 2011, the Wheats drove the Malibu 270 miles for medical purposes”150 miles in the first half of the year and 120 miles in the second half (e.g., trips to the hospital and doctor and dentist offices)”and 320 miles for charitable purposes”140 miles in the first half of the year and 180 miles in the second half (delivering meals to the poor under a church sponsored program). 16. The Wheats have two sons who live with them: Trace and Trevor. Both are full time students. Trace is an accomplished singer and made $4,200 during the year performing at special events (e.g., weddings, anniversaries, and civic functions). Trace deposits his earnings in a savings account intended to help cover future college expenses. 17. The Form W’2 Jeanne receives from her employer reflects wages of $32,000. Appropriate amounts for Social Security and Medicare taxes were deducted. Income tax with holdings were $1,320 for Federal and $1,056 for state. The Wheats made quarterly tax payments of $2,200 for Federal and $600 for state on each of the following dates: April 15, 2011; June 15, 2011; September 15, 2011; and January 15, 2012. Relevant Social Security numbers are provided below. Name Social Security Number Birth Date Karl F. Wheat 111’11’1111 06/06/1969 Jeanne S. Wheat 123’45’6781 08/14/1970 Gene Isaacson 123’45’6784 03/12/1934 Trace Wheat 123’45’6788 09/13/1993 Trevor Wheat THE WHEAT HAD ITMIZED DEDUCTION OF $18000 FROM AGI FOR 2011 OF WHICH $1500 WAS FOR STATE AND LOCAL INCOME TAX. THE TAX SHOULD BE PREPARED FOR 2012 123’45’6789 07/20/1991 Accounting

kathy company kathy company purchased and installed a machine on january 1 411186

Kathy Company…….. Kathy Company purchased and installed a machine on January 1, 2006 at a total cost of $72,000. Straight line depreciation was calculated based on the assumption of a five year life, and no salvage value. The machine was disposed of on July 1, 2009. 1. Prepare the general journal entry to update depreciation to July 1, 2009. 2. Prepare the general journal entry to record the disposal of the machine under each of these three independent situations: a. The machine was sold for $22,000 cash. b. The machine was sold for $15,000 cash. c. The machine was totally destroyed in a fire and the insurance company settled the claim for $18,000 cash. Kevin Company……….. prepare the journal entries to record all of the transactions listed below. Kevin Company hjad the following transactions involving plant assets during 2008 and 2009. Unless otherwise indicated, all transactions were for cash. Jan 2: Purchases a truck for $50,000 plus sales taxes of $3,000. The Truck is expected to have a $4,000 salvage value and a 4 year life Jan 5: Paid $5,000 to put a bigger engine in the truck. The new engine is expected to make the truck run more efficiently and will increase the truck’s useful life by another year. The salvage value is the same. Jan 3: Paid $1,500 to have the company name and logo painted on the side of the truck. This will not add to the value of the Advertising Expense Mar 1: Kevin Company paid $2000 to replace a broken tailgate. The tailgate was damaged when a large and heavy box accidently dropped on it. Dec 31: The Company recorded straight line depreciation of the truck Dec 31: Recorded Straight Line Depreciation for a year on the truck.

managerial accounting 411191

Kava Inc. manufactures industrial components. One of its products, which is used in the construction of industrial air conditioners, is known as K65. Data concerning this product are given below: The above per unit data are based on annual production of 4,000 units of the component. Direct labor can be considered to be a variable cost. (Source: CMA, adapted) The company has received a special, one time only order for 500 units of component K65. There would be no variable selling expense on this special order, and the total fixed manufacturing overhead and fixed selling and administrative expenses of the company wouldn’t be affected by the order. Assuming that Kava has excess capacity and can fill the order without cutting back on the production of any product, what is the minimum price per unit on the special order below which the company shouldn’t go? Per Unit Selling price $180 Direct materials $29 Direct labor $5 Variable manufacturing overhead $4 Fixed manufacturing overhead $21 Variable selling expense $2 Fixed selling and administrative expense $17

individual tax 411196

Kelly and Chanelle Chambers, ages 47 and.45, are married and live at 584 Thoreau
Drive, Boston, MA 59483. Kelly’s Social Secuiity number is 254.91.9483 and Chanelle’s
is,374 48 2938. The Chamber’s have two children: Emma age23, and Chet, age 19.
Their Social Security numbers are 385 64 8496 and 385 68 9462, respectively. Emria is a
single college student and’earned $8,000 during rhe summer. Kelly and Chanelle help
Emma through school by paying for her room, board, and tuition. Emma lives at home
during the summer. Chet has a physical handicap and lives at home. He attends a local
university and earned $4,000 working for a marketing firm. In sum, Kelly and Chanelle
provide rnore than Sao/” of. both Emma’s and chet’s toial support for the year.
Kelly is a commercial pilot for a small airline. His salary is $95,000, from which
. $19,000 of federal income tax and $8,000 of state income tax were withheld. Kelly also
pays premiums for health, disability and life insurance. $2,000 of the premium was for
health insurance, $250 for disability and $400 for life insurance.

Chanelle owns Alliance Networks, a proprietorship that does network consulting.
During the year, Chanelle’s gross revenues were $23,000. She incurred the following
expenses in her business:

Liability insurance $ 700
Software rental 5,400
Journals and magazines 150
Training seminars 1,200
Supplies 1,300
Donations to a political campaign fund 800
Kelly enjoys playing guitar and plays in a band. Kelly’s band has developed a local following.
This year, his gross revenues were $1,200 for playing shows attd $700 on CD
sales. He incurred the following expenses:

Studio rent expense $ 1,300
Sound system repairs 200
CD production 500
New guitar and amplifier 800

Kelly’s father passed away during the year. Kelly and Chanelle received $100,000 from
.the life insurance policy. Neither Kelly nor Chanelle paid any of the premiums.
chanelle purchased 100 shares of Thurston co. stock on May 1,1991, for $1,000.
_.Thurston Co. was declared bankrupt during rhe current year.
Chet’s physician recommended that he see a physical therapist to help with his disabilii!y. |:lty paid the therapist $7,000 during the year.because his insurance would not cover the bills.
Kelly and Chanelle went to Las Vegas and won $5,000 at the blackjack table. The next
night, they lost $6,000.
Kelly and Chanelle glyq $900 to their church and, during rhe year, they had the following other income and expenses:
Real estate taxes
$1,400
Property taxes on car (determined by value) 500
Home mortgage interest 9,000
Credit card finance charges 2,600
Tax return preparation fees ($600 is allocable to Chanelle’s business) 1,000
Sales tax on purchases during the year 6,200
Interest from a savings account 800
Interest from City of Boston Bonds 700
Dividend from 3M stock 400

Prepare Kelly and Chanelle’s taxreturn Form 1040 and Schedules A, B, C, D, and SE
for the current year.

kelly technology makes home office furniture from fine hardwoods the company opera 411206

Kelly Technology makes home office furniture from fine hardwoods. The company operates two departments, the preparation department and the fabrication department. Overhead costs are applied to jobs from each department, using machine hours as the activity level for the preparation department and direct labor hours as the activity level for the fabrication department. At the beginning of 2008, the company’s management made the following estimates: Preparation Department Fabrication Department Overhead cost $432,000 $702,000 Machine hours 90,000 25,000 Direct labor hours 35,000 65,000 In April, Kelly began working on Project 10. Project 10, which was completed in May, consisted of 100 units. The company’s cost records show the following information concerning Project 10: Preparation Department Fabrication Department Direct material cost $940 $1,200 Direct labor cost $710 $980 Machine hours 350 80 Direct labor hours 70 150 During June, Kelly sold 60 units from Project 10 to a customer. It is the policy of Project 10 to charge customers a price of 150% of total manufacturing costs for all jobs. Calculate the amount of gross profit earned by Kelly from the sale of the 60 units. Do not use decimals in your answer.

accounting 411221

Kibodeaux Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:

Standard Quality or Hours Standard Price or Rate Standard Cost Per Unit
Inputs
Direct materials 9.8 liters $6.50 per liter $63.70
Direct labor 0.1 hours $23.50 per hour $2.35
Variable overhead 0.1 hours $4.50 per hour $0.45

The company budgeted for production of 3,300 units in June, but actual production was 3,550 units. The company used 34,435 liters of direct material and 337 direct labor hours to produce this output. The company purchased 35,640 liters of the direct material at $4.80 per liter. The actual direct labor rate was $24.20 per hour and the actual variable overhead rate was $4.20 per hour.

The company applies variable overhead on the basis of direct labor hours. The direct materials purchases variance is computed when the materials are purchased.

The labor rate variance for June is?

Please explain. thank you 🙂

production cost report 411282

Krispy & Co manufactures a single product that goes through two processes, mixing and cooking. The following data are for the mixing department for June. Work in process inventory, June 1 25, 000 units Conversion 75% Work in process inventory, June 30 15, 000 units Conversion 30% Units started into production 50,000 Units completed and transferred out ? Costs Work in process inventory, June 1 Material A $ 70,500 Material B 90,250 Conversion 114,250 Cost added during June Material A 155,000 Material B 130,400 Conversion 306,500 Material A is added at the beginning of production process in the mixing department. Material B is also added in the mixing department, but not until the units are 50% complete with regard to conversion. Conversion costs are incurred uniformly during the process. The Company uses weighted average cost method. Required: (i) Prepare a four step production cost report for Krispy & Co for the month of June. (Note: In your production report units and costs of materials A, B should be identified separately, round your $$ values to 2 decimal places.) (ii) Assume that you are the company’s controller. The mixing department’s June unit cost is higher than standard cost. If the manager of the mixing department asks you to do him a favour by increasing the ending inventory completion percentage from 30 to 50 % to lower unit costs, what should you do and why? Explain using both the costing and pricing and ethical considerations. (Use 200 250 words)

managerial accounting help please cash collections 411322

  1. Lash Corporation has the following sales budget for the last half of 2000:

    (Assume all credit sales)

    July $100,000 October $90,000

    August 80,000 November 100,000

    September 110,000 December 94,000

    Historically, the cash collection of sales has been as follows:

    65 percent of sales collected in month of sale,

    25 percent of sales collected in month following sale, and

    10 percent of sales collected in second month following sale.

    1.) What are the expected cash collections in September?

    2.) What is accounts receivable at September 30?


    3.) What are the expected cash collections in November?


    4.) What are the expected cash collections in December?


    5.) What is accounts Receivable at December 31?

lease accounting chapter 24 411372

Lessee Corp. entered into a non cancellable agreement with Lessor Corp. on May 15, 2008 to lease equipment manufactured by Lessor according to Lessee’s specifications. If Lessee had purchased the equipment outright from Lessor, it would have cost Lessee $100, although Lessor’s cost was only $80. The following information is available. <?xml:namespace prefix = o ns = “urn:schemas microsoft com:office:office” />

Lease term May 15, 2008 ‘ May 14, 2012

Economonic life of equipment 6 years

Annual rental payment $25.8

1st payment due May 15, 2008

Estimated residual value, unguaranteed $13

Interest rate implied in lease 10%

Title transfer in lease? No

n = 4, I = 10

PV factor, lump sum 0.68301

PV factor, annuity due 3.48685

Lessee and Lessor Corp. year endsDecember 31

Instructions

(a) Discuss the nature of this lease to Lessee Corp.

(b) Discuss the nature of this lease to Lessor Corp.

how would this lower capacity factor alter project npv 411516

In December 2005 Mid American Energy brought online one of the largest wind farms in the world. It cost an estimated $386 million and the 257 turbines have a total capacity of 360.5 megawatts (mW). Wind speeds fluctuate and most wind farms are expected to operate at an average of only 35% of their rated capacity. In this case, at an electricity price of $55 per megawatt hour (mWh), the project will produce revenues in the first year of $60.8 million (i.e., .35 × 8,760 hours × 360.5 mW × $55 per mWh). A reasonable estimate of maintenance and other costs is about $18.9 million in the first year of operation. Thereafter, revenues and costs should increase with inflation by around 3% a year.

Conventional power stations can be depreciated using 20 year MACRS, and their profits are taxed at 35%. Suppose that the project will last 20 years and the cost of capital is 12%. To encourage renewable energy sources, the government offers several tax breaks for wind farms.

a. How large a tax break (if any) was needed to make Mid American’s investment a positive NPV venture?

b. Some wind farm operators assume a capacity factor of 30% rather than 35%. How would this lower capacity factor alter project NPV?

what s right or wrong with the treasurer s approach 411689

Suppose the project described in Problem 17 is to be undertaken by a university. Funds for the project will be withdrawn from the university’s endowment, which is invested in a widely diversified portfolio of stocks and bonds. However, the university can also borrow at 7%. The university is tax exempt.

The university treasurer proposes to finance the project by issuing $400,000 of perpetual bonds at 7% and by selling $600,000 worth of common stocks from the endowment. The expected return on the common stocks is 10%. He therefore proposes to evaluate the project by discounting at a weighted average cost of capital, calculated as:

What’s right or wrong with the treasurer’s approach? Should the university invest? Should it borrow? Would the project’s value to the university change if the treasurer financed the project entirely by selling common stocks from the endowment?

roi ri eva and performance evaluation eva manufacturing makes 270021

ROI, RI, EVA and Performance Evaluation. Eva Manufacturing makes fashion products and competes on the basis of quality and leading edge designs. The company has $3,000,000 invested in assets in its clothing manufacturing division. After tax operating income from sales of clothing this year is $600,000. The cosmetics division has $10,000,000 invested in assets and an after tax operating income this year of $1,600,000. Income for the clothing division has grown steadily over the last few years. The weighted average cost of capital for Eva is 10% and the previous period’s after tax return on investment for each division was 15%. The CEO of Eva has told the manager of each division that the division that ?operforms best?? this year will get a bonus.

1. Calculate the ROI and residual income for each division of Eva Manufacturing, and briefly explain which manager will get the bonus. What are the advantages and disadvantages of each measure?

2.The CEO of Eva Manufacturing has recently heard of another measure similar to residual income called EVA. The CEO has the accountant calculate EVA adjusted incomes of Clothing and Cosmetics, and finds that the adjusted after tax operating incomes are $720,000 and $1,430,000, respectively. Also, the Clothing Division has $400,000 of current liabilities, while the Cosmetics Division has only $200,000 of current liabilities. Using the above information, calculate EVA, and discuss which division manager will get the bonus.

3. What non financial measures could Eva use to evaluate divisional performances?

roi ri eva performance auto company operates a new car 270022

ROI, RI, EVA. Performance Auto Company operates a New Car Division (that sells high performance sports cars) and a Performance Parts Division (that sells performance improvement parts for family cars). Some division financial measures for 2008 are as follows:



1. Calculate return on investment (ROI) for each division using operating income as a measure of income and total assets as a measure of investment

2. Calculate residual income (RI) for each division using operating income as a measure of income and total assets minus current liabilities as a measure of investment.

3. William Abraham, the New Car Division manager, argues that the Performance Parts Division has ?oloaded up on a lot of short term debt?? to boost its RI. Calculate an alternative RI for each division that is not sensitive to the amount of short term debt taken on by the Performance Parts Division. Comment on the result,

4. Performance Auto Company, whose tax rate is 40%, has two sources of funds: long term debt with a market value of $18,000,000 at an interest rate of 10%, and equity capital with a market value of $12,000,000 and a cost of equity of 15%. Applying the same weighted average cost of capital (WACC) to each division, calculate EVA for each division.

5. Use your preceding calculations to comment on the relative performance of eachdivision.

roi ri measurement of assets cma adapted carter corporatio 270024

ROI, RI, measurement of assets. (CMA, adapted) Carter Corporation recently announced a bonus plan to be awarded to the manager of the most profitable division. The three division managers are to choose whether ROI or RI will be used to measure profitability. In addition, they must decide whether investment will be measured using gross book value or net book value of assets. Carter defines income as operating income and investment as total assets. The following information is available for the year just ended:



Carter uses a required rate of return of 10% on investment to calculate RI.

Each division manager has selected a method of bonus calculation that ranks his or her division Number 1. Identify the method for calculating profitability that each manager selected, supporting your answer with appropriate calculations. Comment on the strengths and weaknesses of the methods chosen by eachmanager.

transfer pricing general guideline goal congruence cma adap 270045

Transfer pricing, general guideline, goal congruence. (CMA, adapted). Quest Motors, Inc., operates as a decentralized multidivision company. The Tivo Division of Quest Motors purchases most of its airbags from the Airbag Division. The Airbag Division’s incremental cost for manufacturing the airbags is $90 per unit. The Airbag Division is currently working at 80% of capacity. The current market price of the airbags is $125 per unit

1. Using the general guideline presented in the chapter, what is the minimum price at which the Airbag Division would sell airbags to the Tivo Division?

2. Suppose that Quest Motors requires that whenever divisions with unused capacity sell products internally, they must do so at the incremental cost. Evaluate this transfer pricing policy using the criteria of goal congruence, evaluating division performance, motivating management effort, and preserving division autonomy.

3. If the two divisions were to negotiate a transfer price, what is the range of possible transfer prices? Evaluate this negotiated transfer pricing policy using the criteria of goal congruence, evaluating division performance, motivating management effort, and preserving division autonomy.

4.Do you prefer the transfer pricing policy in requirement 2 or requirement 3? Explain your answer briefly.

transfer pricing goal congruence the bosh corporation makes an 270051

Transfer pricing, goal congruence. The Bosh Corporation makes and sells 20,000 multisystem music players each year. Its assembly division purchases components from other divisions of Bosh or from external suppliers and assembles the multisystem music players. In particular, the assembly division can purchase the CD player from the compact disc division of Bosh or from Hawei Corporation. Hawei agrees to meet all of Bosh’s quality requirements and is currently negotiating with the assembly division to supply 20,000 CD players at a price between $44 and $52 per CD player. A critical component of the CD player is the head mechanism that reads the disc. To ensure the quality of its multisystem music players, Bosh requires that if Hawei wins the contract to supply CD players, it must purchase the head mechanism from Bosh’s compact disc division for $24 each. The compact disc division can manufacture at most 22,000 CD players annually. It also manufactures as many additional head mechanisms as can be sold. The incremental cost of manufacturing the head mechanism is $18 per unit. The incremental cost of manufacturing a CD player (including the cost of the head mechanism) is $30 per unit, and any number of CD players can be sold for $45 each in the external market.

Required

1. What are the incremental costs minus revenues from sale to external buyers for the company as a whole if the compact disc division transfers 20,000 CD players to the assembly division and sells the remaining 2,000 CD players on the external market?

2. What are the incremental costs minus revenues from sales to external buyers for the company as a whole if the compact disc division sells 22,000 CD players on the external market and the assembly division accepts Hawei’s offer at

(a) $44 per CD player or

(b) $52 per CD player?

3. What is the minimum transfer price per CD player at which the compact disc division would be willing to transfer 20,000 CD players to the assembly division?

4. Suppose that the transfer price is set to the minimum computed in requirement 3 plus $2, and the division managers at Bosh are free to make their own profit maximizing sourcing and selling decisions. Now, Hawei offers 20,000 CD players for $52 each.

a. What decisions will the managers of the compact disc division and assembly division make?

b. Are these decisions optimal for Bosh as a whole?

c. Based on this exercise, at what price would you recommend the transfer price be set?

transfer pricing dispute the allison chambers corporation manu 270058

Transfer pricing dispute. The Allison Chambers Corporation, manufacturer of tractors and other heavy farm equipment, is organized along decentralized product lines, with each manufacturing division operating as a separate profit center. Each division manager has been delegated full authority on all decisions involving the sale of that division’s output both to outsiders and to other divisions of Allison Chambers. Division C has in the past always purchased its requirement of a particular tractor engine component from Division A. However when informed that Division A is increasing its selling price to $150, Division C’s manager decides to purchase the engine component from external suppliers.

Division C can purchase the component for $135 per unit in the open market Division A insists that because of the recent installation of some highly specialized equipment and the resulting high depreciation charges, it will not be able to earn an adequate return on its investment unless it raises its price. Division A’s manager appeals to top management of Allison Chambers for support in the dispute with Division C and supplies the following operating data:



1. Assume that there are no alternative uses for internal facilities of Division A. Determine whether the company as a whole will benefit if Division C purchases the component from external suppliers for $135 per unit. What should the transfer price for the component be set at so that division managers acting in their own divisions’ best interests take actions that are in the best interest of the company as a whole?

2. Assume that internal facilities of Division A would not otherwise be idle. By not producing the 1,000 units for Division C, Division A’s equipment and other facilities would be used for ether production operations that would result in annual cash operating savings of $18,000. Should Division C purchase from external suppliers? Show your computations.

3. Assume that there are no alternative uses for Division A’s internal facilities and that the price from outsiders drops $20. Should Division C purchase from external suppliers? What should the transfer price for the component be set at so that division managers acting in their own divisions’ best interests take actions that are in the best interest of the company as a whole?

transfer pricing methods goal congruence british columbia lumb 270059

Transfer pricing methods, goal congruence. British Columbia Lumber has a Raw Lumber Division and a Finished Lumber Division. The variable costs are:

Raw Lumber Division: $100 per 100 board feet of raw lumber

Finished Lumber Division: $125 per 100 board feet of finished lumber

Assume that there is no board feet loss in processing raw lumber into finished lumber. Raw lumber can be sold at $200 per 100 board feet. Finished lumber can be sold at $275 per 100 board feet

1. Should British Columbia Lumber process raw lumber into its finished form? Show your calculations.

2. Assume that internal transfers are made at 110% of variable cost. Will each division maximize its division operating income contribution by adopting the action that is in the best interest of British Columbia Lumber as a whole? Explain.

3. Assume that internal transfers are made at market prices. Will each division maximize its division operating income contribution by adopting the action that is in the best interest of British Columbia Lumber as a whole? Explain.

connor chemical company s plant processes batches of organic che 270087

Connor Chemical Company’s plant processes batches of organic chemical products through three stages after starting with raw materials:

(1) Mixing and blending,

(2) Reaction chamber, and

(3) Pulverizing and packing. Connor Chemical’s estimates for the total conversion costs for each of the three processing stages are shown in the following table. These costs include production labor assigned to each stage, support labor performing tasks (such as handling the output of the previous stage and setting up for the new stage), and laboratory testing. Additional materials for packing are needed in the pulverizing and packing stage:

?

Required

(a) Determine the estimated conversion cost driver rate per process hour for each stage. (Round to three digits after the decimal point.)

(b) Consider two of Connor Chemical’s representative products, C206 and C208. Both products are derivatives of ethyl oleate and at the start of the process require the same basic raw materials. Using the information below, determine the total cost of a batch of C206 and a batch ofC208:

ming company has two service departments s1 and s2 and 270104

Ming Company has two service departments (S1 and S2) and two production departments (P1 and P2). Last year, directly identified overhead costs were $300,000 for S1 and $300,000 for S2. Information on the consumption of their services follows:

?



Required

(a) Determine the service department costs allocated to the two production departments using the direct method.

(b) Determine the service department costs allocated to the two production departments using the sequential method beginning with the allocation of S1 department costs.156 Chapter 4 Accumulating and Assigning Costs to Products

(c) Determine the service department costs allocated to the two production departments using the reciprocal method.

over the past 15 years anthony s auto shop has developed 270108

Over the past 15 years, Anthony’s Auto Shop has developed a reputation for reliable repairs and has grown from a one person operation to a nine person operation, including one manager and eight skilled auto mechanics. In recent years, however, competition from mass merchandisers has eroded business volume and profits, leading the owner, Anthony Axle, to ask his manager to take a closer look at the cost structure of the auto shop.

The manager determined that direct materials (parts and components) are identified with individual jobs and charged directly to the customer. Direct labor (mechanics) is also identified with individual jobs and charged at a prespecified rate to the customers. The salary and benefits for a senior mechanic are $65,000 per year, and they are $45,000 per year for a junior mechanic. Each mechanic can work up to 1,750 hours in a year on customer jobs, but if there are not enough jobs to keep each of them busy, the cost of their compensation still will have to be incurred. The manager’s salary and benefits amount to $75,000 per year. In addition, the following fixed costs are also incurred each year:

Rent…………………………. $40,000

Insurance………………………..7,000

Utilities…………………………. 7,000

Supplies………………………..10,000

Machine maintenance…………..9,000

Machine depreciation …………23,800

Total costs…………………… $96,800

Because material costs are recovered directly from the customers, the profitability of the operation depends on the volume of business and the hourly rate charged for labor. At present, Anthony’s Auto Shop charges $51.06 per hour for all jobs. Anthony said he would not consider firing any of the four senior mechanics because he believes it is difficult to get workers with their skills and loyalty to the firm, but he is willing to consider releasing one or two of the junior mechanics.

The present job costing system uses a single conversion rate for all jobs. The cost driver rate is currently determined by dividing estimated total labor and overhead costs by expected hours charged to customers. The eight mechanics are expected to be busy on customer jobs for 95% of the total available time. The price of $51.06 per hour is determined by adding a markup of x% to the cost driver rate, that is $51.06 = [1 + x/100] A? cost driver rate. Note that all personnel costs are included in conversion costs at present.

The manager is considering switching to the use of two rates, one for class A repairs and another for class B repairs. Electronic ignition system repairs or internal carburetor repairs are examples of class A repairs. Class A repairs require careful measurements and adjustments with equipment such as an oscilloscope or infrared gas analyzer. Class B repairs are simple repairs, such as shock absorber replacements or exhaust part replacements. Class A repairs can be done only by senior mechanics; class B repairs are done mainly by junior mechanics. Half of the hours charged to customers are expected to be for class A repairs, and the other half for class B repairs. Because class A repairs are expected to account for all of the senior mechanics’ time and most of the machine usage, 60% of the total costs (including personnel costs) are attributable to class A repairs and the remaining 40% to class B repairs.

Required

(a) Determine the markup of x% currently used.

(b) Determine the two new rates, one for class A repairs and another for class B repairs, using the same markup of x% that you determined in part a.

(c) The following are expected labor hours anticipated for two customer jobs:

?



Determine the price (in addition to materials) to be charged for each of the two jobs under the present accounting system and under the proposed accounting system.

(d) What change in service mix is likely to result from the proposed price change?

(e) Provide reasons why Anthony might retain the current costing system or change to the proposed costingsystem.

sanders manufacturing company produces electronic components on 270111

Sanders Manufacturing Company produces electronic components on a job order basis. Most business is gained through bidding on jobs. Most firms competing with Sanders bid full cost plus a 30% markup. Recently, with the expectation of gaining more sales, Sanders dropped its markup from 40% to 30%. The company operates two service departments and two production departments. Manufacturing overhead costs and quantities of activities for each department are shown here:

?



Costs of the personnel department are allocated on the basis of employees and those of the maintenance department on the basis of maintenance hours. Departmental rates are used to assign overhead costs to products. The machining department uses machine hours, and the assembly department uses direct labor hours for this purpose.

The firm is preparing to bid on job 781, which requires three machine hours per unit produced in the machining department and five direct labor hours per unit produced in the assembly department. The expected direct materials and direct labor costs per unit are $450.

Required

(a) Allocate the service department costs to the production departments using the direct method.

(b) Determine the bid price per unit produced for job 781 using the direct method.

(c) Assume that the costs of the service department incurring the greatest cost are allocated first, and allocate the service department costs to the production departments using the sequential method. When allocating personnel costs, assume the maintenance department has 0 employees.

(d) Determine the bid price per unit produced for job 781 using the sequential method in partc.

the information below pertains to october production at zippy co 270121

The information below pertains to October production at Zippy Company’s bottling plant, which produces and bottles sports drinks. Each unit consists of a case of 12 bottles:

?



Required

(a) Using the weighted average method, determine the number of equivalent units of production for materials and conversion during October.

(b) Determine the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion for October and the total cost per equivalent unit. (Round to two digits after the decimal point.)

(c) Determine whether the cost per equivalent unit for materials and conversion increased or decreased from the previousmonth.

the leblanc company employs a job order costing system to 270122

The Leblanc Company employs a job order costing system to account for its costs. The company has three production departments. Separate departmental cost driver rates are employed because the demand for overhead resources for the three departments is very different. All jobs generally pass through all three production departments. Data regarding the hourly direct labor rates, cost driver rates, and three jobs for which work was done during June appear below. Jobs 101 and 102 were completed during June, while job 103 was not completed as of June 30. The costs charged to jobs not completed at the end of a month are shown as work in process inventory at the end of that month and at the beginning of the next month:

?



Required

(a) Determine the total cost of completed job 101.

(b) Determine the total cost of completed job 102.

(c) Determine the ending balance of work in process inventory for job 103 as of June30.

warner company started business on january 1 2011 the followin 270282

Warner Company started business on January 1, 2011. The following transactions and events occurred in 2011 and 2012. For simplicity, information for sales, inventory purchases, collections on account, and payments on account is given in summary form at the end of each year.

2011

Jan. 1 Issued 150,000 shares of $1 par common stock to investors at $15 per share.

1 Purchased a building for $720,000. The building has a 25 year expected useful life and a $70,000 expected salvage value. Warner uses the straight line method of depreciation.

1 Leased equipment under a 10 year lease. The five lease payments of $20,000 each are to be made on December

31 of each year. The cash price of the equipment is $134,202. This lease is accounted for as a capital lease with an implicit interest rate of 8%. The equipment has a 10 year useful life and zero expected salvage value; Warner uses straight line depreciation with all of its equipment.

Feb. 1 Borrowed $1.8 million from Foley Bank. The loan bears a 9% annual interest rate. Interest is to be paid each year on February 1. The principal on the loan will be repaid in four years.

Mar. 1 Purchased 50,000 shares of Ryan Company for $30 per share. Warner classifies this as an investment in trading securities. These securities are reported as a current asset.

July 15 Purchased 55,000 shares of Anson Company for $23 per share. Warner classifies this as an investment in available for sale securities. These securities are reported as a long term asset.

Nov. 17 Declared a cash dividend of $0.30 per share, payable on January 15, 2012.

Dec. 31 Made the lease payment.

31 The Ryan Company shares had a market value of $26 per share. The Anson Company shares had a market value of $28 per share.

Summary:

a. Sales for the year (all on credit) totaled $900,000. The cost of inventory sold was $480,000.

b. Cash collections on credit sales for the year were $420,000.

c. Inventory costing $540,000 was purchased on account. (Warner Company uses the perpetual inventory method.)

d. Payments on account totaled $500,000.

2012

Jan. 1 Issued $400,000 in bonds at par value. The bonds have a stated interest rate of 10%, payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1.

1 The estimated useful life and salvage value for the building were changed. It is now estimated that the building has a remaining life (as of January 1, 2012) of 20 years. Also, it is now estimated that the building will have no salvage value. These changes in estimate are to take effect for the year 2012 and subsequent years.

15 Paid the cash dividend declared in November 2011.

Feb. 1 Warner Company repurchased 15,000 shares of its own common stock to be held as treasury stock. The price paid was $32 per share.

1 Paid the interest on the loan from Foley Bank.

Apr. 10 Sold all 50,000 shares of the Ryan Company stock. The shares were sold for $25 per share.

July 1 Paid the interest on the bonds.

Oct. 1 Retired the bonds that were issued on January 1. Warner had to pay $380,000 to retire the bonds. This amount included interest that had accrued since July 1.

Nov. 20 Declared a cash dividend of $0.30 per share. The dividend applies only to outstanding shares, not to treasury shares.

Dec. 31 Made the lease payment.

31 After recording depreciation expense for the year, the building was evaluated for possible impairment. The building is expected to generate cash flows of $18,000 per year for its 19 year remaining life. The building has a current market value of $320,000.

31 The Anson Company shares had a market value of $19 per share.

Summary:

a. Sales for the year (all on credit) totaled $1.8 million. The cost of inventory sold was $950,000.

b. Cash collections on credit sales for the year were $1.54 million.

c. Inventory costing $1,000,000 was purchased on account.

d. Payments on account totaled $970,000.

Required:

1. Prepare all journal entries to record the information for 2011. Also, prepare any necessary adjusting entries.

2. Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2011. There is no need to show your ledger T accounts; however, preparing and posting to T accounts may aid in the preparation of the trial balance.

3. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011, and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2011.

4. Prepare all journal entries to record the information for 2012. Also prepare any necessary adjusting entries.

5. Prepare a trial balance as of December 31, 2012. (As you compute the amounts to include in the trial balance, don’t forget the beginning balances left over from 2011.)

6. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, and a balance sheet as of December 31, 2012.

please complete the following 7 exercises below in either excel or a word document 270333

Chapter Two and Three Problems

Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

Chapter 2 Exercise 1

1. Issuance of stock

Prepare journal entries to record the issuance of 100,000 shares of common stock at $20 per share for each of the following independent cases:

  1. Jackson Corporation has common stock with a par value of $1 per share.
  2. Royal Corporation has no par common with a stated value of $5 D share.
  3. French Corporation has no par common; no stated value has been as signed

Chapter 2 Exercise 3

3. Analysis of stockholders’ equity

Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 19X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 19X6 and 19X5 follow.

19X6 19X5
Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000
Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000
Paid in capital in excess of par value
Preferred 24,000
Common 4,620,000 3,600,000
Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000
Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000
  1. Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 19X6.
  2. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 19X6.
  3. By what amount did the company’s paid in capital increase during 19X6?
  4. Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 19X6? By what amount?

Chapter 2 Problem 1

1.
Bond computations: Straight line amortization

Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 19X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow.

  • Case A—The bonds are issued at 100.
  • Case B—The bonds are issued at 96.
  • Case C—The bonds are issued at 105.

Southlake uses the straight line method of amortization.

Instructions:

Complete the following table:
Case A Case B Case C
  1. Cash inflow on the issuance date
_______ _______ _______
  1. Total cash outflow through maturity
_______ _______ _______
  1. Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue
_______ _______ _______
  1. Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 19X1
_______ _______ _______
  1. Amortization for the year ended December 31, 19X1
_______ _______ _______
  1. Unamortized premium as of December 31, 19X1
_______ _______ _______
  1. Unamortized discount as of December 31, 19X1
_______ _______ _______
  1. Bond carrying value as of December 31, 19X1
_______ _______ _______

Chapter 3 Exercise 1

1.
Product costs and period costs

The costs that follow were extracted from the accounting records of several different manufacturers:

  1. Weekly wages of an equipment maintenance worker
  2. Marketing costs of a soft drink bottler
  3. Cost of sheet metal in a Honda automobile
  4. Cost of president’s subscription to Fortune magazine
  5. Monthly operating costs of pollution control equipment used in a steel mill
  6. Weekly wages of a seamstress employed by a jeans maker
  7. Cost of compact discs (CDs) for newly recorded releases of Rush, Billy Joel, and Bryan Adams
  1. Determine which of these costs are product costs and which are period costs.
  2. For the product costs only, determine those that are easily traced to the finished product and those that are not.

Chapter 3 Exercise 2

2. Definitions of manufacturing concepts

Interstate Manufacturing produces brass fasteners and incurred the following costs for the year just ended:

Materials and supplies used

Brass $75,000

Repair parts 16,000

Machine lubricants 9,000

Wages and salaries Machine operators 128,000

Production supervisors 64,000

Maintenance personnel 41,000

Other factory overhead Variable 35,000

Fixed 46,000

Sales commissions 20,000

Compute:

  1. Total direct materials consumed
  2. Total direct labor
  3. Total prime cost
  4. Total conversion cost

Chapter 3 Exercise 5

5. Schedule
of cost of goods manufactured, income statement

The following information was taken from the ledger of Jefferson Industries, Inc.:

Direct labor $85,000 Administrative expenses $59,000
Selling expenses 34,000 Work in. process
Sales 300,000 Jan. 1 29,000
Finished goods Dec. 31 21,000
Jan. 1 115,000 Direct material purchases 88,000
Dec. 31 131,000 Depreciation: factory 18,000
Raw (direct) materials on hand Indirect materials used 10,000
Jan. 1 31,000 Indirect labor 24,000
Dec. 31 40,000 Factory taxes 8,000
Factory utilities 11,000

Prepare the following:

  1. A schedule of cost of goods manufactured for the year ended December 31.
  2. An income statement for the year ended December 31.

Chapter 3 Problem 3

3. Manufacturing statements and cost behavior

Tampa Foundry began operations during the current year, manufacturing various products for industrial use. One such product is light gauge aluminum, which the company sells for $36 per roll. Cost information for the year just ended follows.

Per Unit Variable Cost Fixed Cost
Direct materials $4.50 $ —
Direct labor 6.5
Factory overhead 9 50,000
Selling 70,000
Administrative 135,000

Production and sales totaled 20,000 rolls and 17,000 rolls, respectively There is no work in process. Tampa carries its finished goods inventory at the average unit cost of production.

Instructions:

  1. Determine the cost of the finished goods inventory of light gauge aluminum.
  2. Prepare an income statement for the current year ended December 31
  3. On the basis of the information presented:
  1. Does it appear that the company pays commissions to its sales staff? Explain.
  2. What is the likely effect on the $4.50 unit cost of direct materials if next year’s production increases? Why?

Attachments:

a comparative balance sheet for omoplata corporation is presented below 270531

14. A comparative balance sheet for Omoplata Corporation is presented below:

December 31, December 31, 2006 2005

Assets Cash 69,000 Accounts receivable 82,000 Inventories — _180,000 Land 75,000 Equipment 260,000 Accumulated depreciation (69,000) 597.000 Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Accounts 34,000 payable Dividends payable 20,000 Bonds payable 150,000 Common stock 214,000 Retained earnings 179,000 597 000

22,000 66,000 189,000 110,000 200,000 (42,004) 5.4.5121/

47,000

15,000 200,000 164,000 119,000 545 0011

Net income ftfryie ¦ 6 wa’ Cash dividends of $50,000 were paid. Land was sold at a gain 7.0,000. he company paid cash for all equipment purchases except for a $40,000 computer that was financed by the seance of common stock. Omoplata Corporation sold equipment at a loss df $30,000 tI t had a cost of $70,000 and a book value of $50,000. The company issued’&000 o onds at par during the year and redeemed other bonds for cash.

Attachments:

accounting control systems tutor marked assignment 8 40576 08 accounting controls 270653

Accounting Control Systems
Tutor Marked Assignment 8 40576/08
Accounting Controls
Answer all questions.
Describe and outline the steps involved in setting up and operating a standard costing system.
2 Discuss the practical problems of budgeting and budgetary control within an organisation. How might these be overcome?
Calculate the material price and usage variances, and the wage rate variance and labour efficiency variances for the following data.
Labour Labour Material Material Units Month Usage Cost Usage Cost Produced (Hrs) (f) (M) (f)
Standard 2.2 10.89 2.9 7.25 1 April 1990 35760 171648 44700 116220 14900
After you have completed these calculations, briefly explain your results. 4 Factory X produces a single product which is made from 10 kg of Material A and 5 kg of Material B. These quantities allow for waste. The purchase prices of these materials are: Material A f0.50 per kg of annual quantities up to 80,000 kg, with a discount of 5% for annual quantities over 80,000 kg and 10% over 100,000 kg. The discount is applied to the whole order. Material B f0.20 per kg of annual quantities up to 50,000 kg, with a discount of 10% if over 50,000 kg and 15% over 100,000 kg. The discount is applied to the whole order. The policy is to order only sufficient material to meet production requirements. The normal annual capacity of the factory is 12,000, and this requires 50,000 direct labour hours at a cost of f0.60.
40576D 63

question 1 which of the following would be an example 270732

Question 1

Which of the following would be an example of a fixed cost?

Answer

raw materials
sales commissions
utilities
property taxes

3 points

Question 2

A mixed cost

Answer

contains both a fixed and variable component
is always easy to separate
will decrease as output increases
none of the answers are correct

3 points

Question 3

When a mixed cost is graphed the slope of the line equals

Answer

the fixed cost per unit of output
the total cost per unit
the sales price per unit
the variable cost per unit of the activity driver

3 points

Question 4

The scatter graph method

Answer

is the most accurate method
has the advantage of objectivity
may reveal the presence of outliers
none of the answers are correct

3 points

Question 5

The relevant range

Answer

is the normal range of output
is the range of output where cost relationships are valid
may change from period to period
all of the answers are correct

3 points

Question 6

Which of the following would probably be a discretionary fixed cost for a law firm?

Answer

salary of receptionist
cost of television commercials
depreciation on furniture and equipment
cost of legal forms

3 points

Question 7

Figure 3 2.

Lassiter Toys, Inc.
Cost of Materials
No. of toys Total cost
produced of materials
100,000 $20,000
200,000 $40,000
300,000 $60,000

See Figure 3 2: The cost behavior of the materials cost is

Answer

fixed
mixed
variable
step

3 points

Question 8

Figure 3 2.

Lassiter Toys, Inc.
Cost of Materials
No. of toys Total cost
produced of materials
100,000 $20,000
200,000 $40,000
300,000 $60,000

See Figure 3 2: What should the total materials cost be at a production level of 220,000 toys?

Answer

$88,000
$44,000
$22,000
$132,000

3 points

Question 9

Figure 3 2.

Lassiter Toys, Inc.
Cost of Materials
No. of toys Total cost
produced of materials
100,000 $20,000
200,000 $40,000
300,000 $60,000

See Figure 3 2: What is the materials cost per unit of output?

Answer

$.20
$.10
$.60
$.40

3 points

Question 10

Figure 3 3.

Okafor Company manufactures skis. The management accountant wants to calculate the fixed and variable costs associated with the leasing of machinery. Data for the past four months were collected.

Month Lease cost Machine hours
April $ 21,000 550
May 16,500 420
June 19,000 510
July 22,230 570

See Figure 3 3: Using the high low method calculate the variable rate for the lease cost

Answer

$38.20
$38.18
$61.50
$37.25

3 points

Question 11

Figure 3 3.

Okafor Company manufactures skis. The management accountant wants to calculate the fixed and variable costs associated with the leasing of machinery. Data for the past four months were collected.

Month Lease cost Machine hours
April $ 21,000 550
May 16,500 420
June 19,000 510
July 22,230 570

See Figure 3 3: Using the high low method calculate the fixed cost of leasing

Answer

$482
$516
$420
$456

3 points

Question 12

Figure 3 3.

Okafor Company manufactures skis. The management accountant wants to calculate the fixed and variable costs associated with the leasing of machinery. Data for the past four months were collected.

Month Lease cost Machine hours
April $ 21,000 550
May 16,500 420
June 19,000 510
July 22,230 570

See Figure 3 3: What would Okafor Company’s cost formula be to estimate the cost of leasing within the relevant range?

Answer

total lease cost = $456 + ($38.20 ´ machine hours)
total lease cost = $516 + ($38.18 ´ machine hours)
total lease cost = $420 + ($37.25 ´ machine hours)
none of the answers are correct

3 points

Question 13

Figure 3 3.

Okafor Company manufactures skis. The management accountant wants to calculate the fixed and variable costs associated with the leasing of machinery. Data for the past four months were collected.

Month Lease cost Machine hours
April $ 21,000 550
May 16,500 420
June 19,000 510
July 22,230 570

See Figure 3 3: What would the estimate of Okafor Company’s total lease cost be at a level of 500 machine hours?

Answer

$19,606
$19,556
$16,464
$18,546

3 points

Question 14

Figure 3 6.

Taran Company incurred the following costs for the months of January and February.

Type of Cost January February
Insurance $ 5,000 $ 5,000
Utilities 4,000 6,000
Depreciation 3,500 3,500
Materials 10,000 20,000

See Figure 3 6: From the information above we can assume that

Answer

insurance and depreciation are fixed costs
output decreased from January to February
output stayed the same from January to February
insurance is a mixed cost

3 points

Question 15

Figure 3 6.

Taran Company incurred the following costs for the months of January and February.

Type of Cost January February
Insurance $ 5,000 $ 5,000
Utilities 4,000 6,000
Depreciation 3,500 3,500
Materials 10,000 20,000

See Figure 3 6: Assume that output was 5,000 units in January and 10,000 units in February, utility cost is a mixed cost, and the fixed cost of utilities was $3,000. What was the variable rate per unit of output for utilities cost in January?

Answer

$.20
$.40
$.60
$.30

3 points

Question 16

Figure 3 6.

Taran Company incurred the following costs for the months of January and February.

Type of Cost January February
Insurance $ 5,000 $ 5,000
Utilities 4,000 6,000
Depreciation 3,500 3,500
Materials 10,000 20,000

See Figure 3 6: If output was 5,000 units in January and 10,000 units in February we can assume that

Answer

utilities and materials are variable costs
utilities, insurance, and depreciation are fixed costs
insurance and depreciation are mixed costs
materials is the only variable cost

3 points

Question 17

Figure 4 1.

Foster Company makes power tools. The budgeted sales are $420,000, budgeted variable costs are $147,000, and budgeted fixed costs are $227,500.

Refer to Figure 4 1. What is the budgeted operating income?

Answer

$273,000
$227,500
$45,500
$374,500
$567,000

3 points

Question 18

Figure 4 1.

Foster Company makes power tools. The budgeted sales are $420,000, budgeted variable costs are $147,000, and budgeted fixed costs are $227,500.

Refer to Figure 4 1. What is the variable cost ratio?

Answer

35%
54%
89%
19%
50%

3 points

Question 19

Figure 4 1.

Foster Company makes power tools. The budgeted sales are $420,000, budgeted variable costs are $147,000, and budgeted fixed costs are $227,500.

Refer to Figure 4 1. What is the breakeven point in sales dollars?

Answer

$350,000
$420,000
$650,000
$780,000
$567,000

3 points

Question 20

Figure 4 1.

Foster Company makes power tools. The budgeted sales are $420,000, budgeted variable costs are $147,000, and budgeted fixed costs are $227,500.

Refer to Figure 4 1. What is the contribution margin?

Answer

$90,000
$183,000
$36,000
$273,000
$374,500

3 points

Question 21

Figure 4 1.

Foster Company makes power tools. The budgeted sales are $420,000, budgeted variable costs are $147,000, and budgeted fixed costs are $227,500.

Refer to Figure 4 1. What is the contribution ratio?

Answer

35%
65%
54%
89%
50%

3 points

Question 22

Figure 4 6.

Xeller Company makes electronic keyboards. The practice model price is $220 and variable expenses are $190. The deluxe model price is $340 and variable expenses are $250. The professional model price is $1,200 and variable expense per unit is $800. Total fixed expenses are $187,000. Generally, Xeller sells 6 practice models and 3 deluxe models for every professional model sold.

Refer to Figure 4 6. Using the sales mix stated in the facts from Figure 4 6 to form a package, what is the total package contribution margin?

Answer

$850
$450
$520
$1,890
$587

3 points

Question 23

Figure 4 6.

Xeller Company makes electronic keyboards. The practice model price is $220 and variable expenses are $190. The deluxe model price is $340 and variable expenses are $250. The professional model price is $1,200 and variable expense per unit is $800. Total fixed expenses are $187,000. Generally, Xeller sells 6 practice models and 3 deluxe models for every professional model sold.

Refer to Figure 4 6. What is the number of practice models sold at breakeven?

Answer

850
220
180
1,320
440

3 points

Question 24

Figure 4 6.

Xeller Company makes electronic keyboards. The practice model price is $220 and variable expenses are $190. The deluxe model price is $340 and variable expenses are $250. The professional model price is $1,200 and variable expense per unit is $800. Total fixed expenses are $187,000. Generally, Xeller sells 6 practice models and 3 deluxe models for every professional model sold.

Refer to Figure 4 6. What is the number of deluxe models sold at breakeven

Answer

220
660
1,320
850
440

3 points

Question 25

Figure 4 6.

Xeller Company makes electronic keyboards. The practice model price is $220 and variable expenses are $190. The deluxe model price is $340 and variable expenses are $250. The professional model price is $1,200 and variable expense per unit is $800. Total fixed expenses are $187,000. Generally, Xeller sells 6 practice models and 3 deluxe models for every professional model sold.

Refer to Figure 4 6. What is the number of professional models sold at breakeven?

Answer

220
850
400
4,675
440

3 points

Question 26

Figure 4 6.

Xeller Company makes electronic keyboards. The practice model price is $220 and variable expenses are $190. The deluxe model price is $340 and variable expenses are $250. The professional model price is $1,200 and variable expense per unit is $800. Total fixed expenses are $187,000. Generally, Xeller sells 6 practice models and 3 deluxe models for every professional model sold.

Refer to Figure 4 6. What is the overall sales revenue at breakeven?

Answer

$778,800
$387,200
$1,288,700
$2,067,800
$968,000

3 points

Question 27

If fixed costs increase, the break even point in units will

Answer

increase
decrease
remain the same
remain the same; however, contribution per unit will decrease

3 points

Question 28

If the contribution margin per unit decreases, the break even point in units

Answer

will increase
will decrease
will remain the same
cannot be determined from the information given

3 points

Question 29

Firm X and Firm Y are competitors within the same industry. Firm X produces its product using large amounts of direct labor. Firm Y has replaced direct labor with investment in machinery. Projected sales for both firms are 15% LESS than in the prior year. Which statement regarding projected profits is TRUE?

Answer

Firm X will lose more profit than Firm Y
Firm Y will lose more profit than Firm X
Firm X and Firm Y will lose the same amount of profit.
Neither Firm X nor Firm Y will lose profit.

3 points

Question 30

Figure 4 10.

A company provided the following data:

Sales $540,000
Variable costs $378,000
Fixed costs $120,000
Expected production and sales in units 40,000

Refer to Figure 4 10. What is the break even point in sales dollars?

Answer

$498,000
$400,000
$171,429
$112,500
$150,000

4 points

Question 31

Figure 4 10.

A company provided the following data:

Sales $540,000
Variable costs $378,000
Fixed costs $120,000
Expected production and sales in units 40,000

Refer to Figure 4 10. How much sales in dollars is necessary to generate a profit of $30,000?

Answer

$528,000
$500,000
$214,286
$100,000
$150,000

3 points

Question 32

If sales remain the same and the margin of safety increases, which of the following is true?

Answer

the breakeven point has increased
the breakeven point has decreased
fixed costs have increased
none of these is true

3 points

Question 33

Operating leverage is the relative mix of

Answer

revenues earned and manufacturing costs
fixed and variable costs
high volume and low volume products
manufacturing costs and period costs
revenues earned and variable costs

Bottom of Form

Attachments:

understand how to plan an audit engagement 270750

An audit firm must evaluate the client and the engagement according to professional standards.In your Discussion Board posting, answer the following questions:

  • Should this evaluation be done on new and existing clients every year? Why or why not?
  • What is the objective of this evaluation?
  • What is involved in the evaluation process?

Do you think this evaluation is an effective method to assess clients? Why or why not? What is the focus of the assessment?

Document Preview:

NEEDS TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION, REFERENCES NEED TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION ACCT685 1301A 01 Review Course: Auditing and Regulation Assignment Name: Unit 2 Discussion Board Deliverable Length: 125 word minimum Details: An audit firm must evaluate the client and the engagement according to professional standards. In your Discussion Board posting, answer the following questions: Should this evaluation be done on new and existing clients every year? Why or why not? What is the objective of this evaluation? What is involved in the evaluation process? Do you think this evaluation is an effective method to assess clients? Why or why not? What is the focus of the assessment? Objective: ? Understand how to plan an audit engagement, the auditor’s consideration of internal control, the public company audits of internal control, and the review of audit evidence before completing the audit;?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

unit 2 ip 270752

Needs to be in APA format, References need to be in APA format

Document Preview:

NEEDS TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION, REFERENCES NEED TO BE IN APA FORMAT 6TH EDITION ACCT685 1301A 01 Review Course: Auditing and Regulation??Assignment Name:?Unit 2 Individual Project??Deliverable Length:?2–3 pages??Details:?Library Research Assignment You are a manager at a CPA firm, and you have been asked to write an article on audit planning for the firm’s monthly newsletter. Using the library, conduct research on audit planning. Prepare the article for your firm’s monthly newsletter, and include the following information: Components of the audit planning stages How to understand the client’s business What the risk assessment portions of audit planning are   ??Objective:?? Understand how to plan an audit engagement, the auditor’s consideration of internal control, the public company audits of internal control, and the review of audit evidence before completing the audit;??

Attachments:

cost centers profit centers decentralization transfer prices 269921

Cost centers, profit centers, decentralization, transfer prices. Fenster Corporation manufactures windows with wood and metal frames. Fenster has three departments: Glass, Wood, and Metal. The Glass Department makes the window glass and sends it to either the Wood or Metal Department where the glass is framed. The window is then sold. Upper management sets the production schedules for the three departments and evaluates them on output quantity, cost variances, and product quality.

1. Are the three departments cost centers, revenue centers, or profit centers?

2. Are the three departments centralized or decentralized?

3. Can a centralized department be a profit center? Why or why not?

4. Suppose the upper management of Fenster Corporation decides to let the three departments set their own production schedules, buy and sell products in the external market and have Wood and Metal negotiate with Glass for the glass panes using a transfer price.

a. Will this change your answers to requirements 1 and 2?

b. How would you recommend upper management evaluate the three departments if this change is made?

decentralization goal congruence responsibility centers hexto 269922

Decentralization, goal congruence, responsibility centers. Hexton Chemicals consists of seven independent operating divisions. The operating divisions are assisted by a number of support groups, such as R&D, human resources, and environmental management. The environmental management group consists of 20 environmental engineers. These engineers must seek business from the operating divisions— that is, the projects they work on must be mutually agreed to and paid for by one of the operating divisions. Under Hexton’s rules, the environmental group is required to charge the operating divisions for environmental services at cost

1. Is the environmental management group centralized or decentralized?

2. What type of responsibility center is the environmental management group?

3.What benefits and problems do you see in structuring the environmental management group in this way? Does it lead to goal congruence and motivation? Explain.

effect of alternative transfer pricing methods 269930

Effect of alternative transfer pricing methods on division operating income. Crango Products is a cranberry cooperative that operates two divisions: a Harvesting Division and a Processing Division. Currently, all of Harvesting’s output is converted into cranberry juice by the Processing Division, and the juice is sold to large beverage companies that produce cranberry juice blends. The Processing Division has a yield of 500 gallons of juice per 1,000 pounds of cranberries. Cost and market price data for the two divisions are as follows:



1. Compute Crango’s operating income from harvesting 400,000 pounds of cranberries during June 2009 and processing them into juice.

2. Crango rewards its division managers with a bonus equal to 5% of operating income. Compute the bonus earned by each division manager in June 2009 for each of the following transfer pricing methods:

a. 200% of full cost

b. Market price

3. Which transfer pricing method will each division manager prefer? How might Crango resolve any conflicts that may arise on the issue of transferpricing?

effect of alternative transfer pricing methods on division 269931

Effect of alternative transfer pricing methods on division operating income. (CMA, adapted) Ajax Corporation has two divisions. The Mining Division makes toldine, which is then transferred to the Metals Division. The toldine is further processed by the Metals Division and is sold to customers at a price of $150 per unit. The Mining Division is currently required by Ajax to transfer its total yearly output of 200,000 units of toldine to the Metals Division at 110% of full manufacturing cost. Unlimited quantities of toldine can be purchased and sold on the outside market at $90 per unit The following table gives the manufacturing cost per unit in the Mining and Metals divisions for 2009:



1. Calculate the operating incomes for the Mining and Metals divisions for the 200,000 units of toldine transferred under the following transfer pricing methods: (a) market price and (b) 110% of full manufacturing cost.

2. Suppose Ajax rewards each division manager with a bonus, calculated as 1% of division operating income (if positive). What is the amount of bonus that will be paid to each division manager under the transfer pricing methods in requirement 1? Which transfer pricing method will each division manager prefer to use?

3. What arguments would Brian Jones, manager of the Mining Division, make to support the transfer pricing method that heprefers?

ethics levers of control r madison adapted strategic finan 269932

Ethics, levers of control. (R. Madison, adapted, Strategic Finance, January 2000). United Forest Products (UFP) is a large timber and wood processing plant. UFP’s performance evaluation system pays its managers substantial bonuses if the company achieves annual budgeted profit numbers. In the last quarter of 2009, Amy Kimbell, UFP’s controller, noted a slight increase in output and a significant decrease in the purchase cost of raw timber

One day when Kimbell was at the log yard where timber is received and scaled (weighed and checked for quality) to determine what UFP pays for it, she noted that a timber contractor was quite aggravated when he was given the scale report (board feet and quality). When she asked one of the scale employees what was bothering the contractor he revealed that the scalers had received instructions from their supervisors to deliberately ?olowball?? evaluations of timber quantity and quality. This reduced the price paid to timber suppliers, which also reduced direct material costs, helping UFP to meet its profit target

1. What should Kimbell do?

2. Which lever of control is UFP emphasizing? What changes, if any, should be made?

executive compensation balanced scorecard community bank recent 269939

Executive compensation, balanced scorecard Community Bank recently introduced a new bonus plan for its business unit executives. The company believes that current profitability and customer satisfaction levels are equally important to the bank’s long term success. As a result, the new plan awards a bonus equal to 1% of salary for each 1% increase in business unit net income or 1% increase in the business unit’s customer satisfaction index. For example, increasing net income from $3 million to $3.3 million (or 10% from its initial value) leads to a bonus of 10% of salary, while increasing the business unit’s customer satisfaction index from 70 to 73.5 (or 5% from its initial value) leads to a bonus of 5% of salary. There is no bonus penalty when net income or customer satisfaction declines. In 2011 and 2012, Community Bank’s three business units reported the following performance results:



Required

1. Compute the bonus as a percent of salary earned by each business unit executive in 2012.

2. What factors might explain the differences between improvement rates for net income and those for customer satisfaction in the three units? Are increases in customer satisfaction likely to result in increased net income right away?

3. Community Bank’s board of directors is concerned that the 2012 bonus awards may not actually reflect the executives’ overall performance. In particular, it is concerned that executives can earn large bonuses by doing well on one performance dimension but underperforming on the other. What changes can it make to the bonus plan to prevent this from happening in the future? Explainbriefly.

foreign investment analysis a tangled affair 269950

On the basis of the information provided, together with what you have learned in Chapter 6, does MBI represent an attractive acquisition candidate?

MINI CASE

You are the CFO of Marisa Corporation, a major electronics manufacturer headquartered in Shelton, Connecticut. To date, your company’s operations have been confined to the United States and you are interested in diversifying your operations abroad. One option would be to begin establishing wholly owned subsidiaries in Europe, Latin America, and Asia. Another option is to acquire a multinational company that already has a major international presence. You are leaning toward the latter course of action as you are interested in diversifying your company’s operating risk and enhancing its bottom line as soon as possible. You also have a significant stock option package and will benefit greatly if the price of Marissa Corporation’s common stock were to rise over the next year. You are particularly interested

general guideline transfer pricing the slate company manufactur 269951

General guideline, transfer pricing The Slate Company manufactures and sells television sets. Its assembly division (AD) buys television screens from the screen division (SD) and assembles the TV sets. The SD, which is operating at capacity, incurs an incremental manufacturing cost of $65 per screen. The SD can sell all its output to the outside market at a price of $100 per screen, after incurring a variable marketing and distribution cost of $8 per screen. If the AD purchases screens from outside suppliers at a price of $100 per screen, it will incur a variable purchasing cost of $7 per screen. Slate’s division managers can act autonomously to maximize their own division’s operating income.

Required

1. What is the minimum transfer price at which the SD manager would be willing to sell screens to the AD?

2. What is the maximum transfer price at which the AD manager would be willing to purchase screens from the SD?

3. Now suppose that the SD can sell only 70% of its output capacity of 20,000 screens per month on the open market. Capacity cannot be reduced in the short run. The AD can assemble and sell more than 20,000 TV sets per month.

a. What is the minimum transfer price at which the SD manager would be willing to sell screens to the AD?

b. From the point of view of Slate’s management, how much of the SD output should be transferred to the AD?

c. If Slate mandates the SD and AD managers to ?osplit the difference?? on the minimum and maximum transfer prices they would be willing to negotiate over, what would be the resulting transfer price? Does this price achieve the outcome desired in requirement 3b?

goal incongruence and roi bleefi corporation manufactures furni 269961

Goal incongruence and ROI. BleefI Corporation manufactures furniture in several divisions, including the Patio Furniture division. The manager of the Patio Furniture division plans to retire in two years. The manager receives a bonus based on the division’s ROI, which is currently 11%.

One of the machines that the Patio Furniture division uses to manufacture the furniture is rather old, and the manager must decide whether to replace it. The new machine would cost $30,000 and would last 10 years. It would have no salvage value. The old machine is fully depreciated and has no trade in value. BleefI uses straight line depreciation for all assets. The new machine, being new and more efficient, would save the company $5,000 per year in cash operating costs. The only difference between cash flow and net income is depreciation. The internal rate of return of the project is approximately 11%. Bleefl Corporation’s weighted average cost of capital is 6%. BleefI is not subject to any income taxes.

1. Should BleefI Corporation replace the machine? Why or why not?

2. Assume that ?oinvestment?? is defined as average net long term assets after depreciation. Compute the project’s ROI for each of its first five years. If the Patio Furniture manager is interested in maximizing his bonus, would he replace the machine before he retires? Why or why not?

3. What can Bleefl do to entice the manager to replace the machine before retiring?

international transfer pricing taxes goal congruence argone d 269970

International transfer pricing, taxes, goal congruence. Argone division of Gemini Corporation is located in the United States. Its effective income tax rate is 30%. Another division of Gemini, Calcia, is located in Canada, where the income tax rate is 42%. Calcia manufactures, among other things, an intermediate product for Argone called IP 2007. Calcia operates at capacity and makes 15,000 units of IP 2007 for Argone each period, at a variable cost of $60 per unit. Assume that there are no outside customers for IP 2007. Because the IP 2007 must be shipped from Canada to the United States, it costs Calcia an additional $4 per unit to ship the IP 2007 to Argone. There are no direct fixed costs for IP 2007. Calcia also manufactures other products. A product similar to IP 2007 that Argone could use as a substitute is available in the United States for $75 per unit.

Required

1. What is the minimum and maximum transfer price that would be acceptable to Argone and Calcia for IP 2007, and why?

2. What transfer price would minimize income taxes for Gemini Corporation as a whole? Would Calcia and Argone want to be evaluated on operating income using this transfer price?

3. Suppose Gemini uses the transfer price from requirement 2, and each division is evaluated on its own after tax division operating income. Now suppose Calcia has an opportunity to sell 8,000 units of IP 2007 to an outside customer for $68 each. Calcia will not incur shipping costs because the customer is nearby and offers to pay for shipping. Assume that if Calcia accepts the special order, Argone will have to buy 8,000 units of the substitute product in the United States at $75 per unit.

a. Will accepting the special order maximize after tax operating income for Gemini Corporation as a whole?

b. Will Argone want Calcia to accept this special order? Why or why not?

c. Will Calcia want to accept this special order? Explain.

d. Suppose Gemini Corporation wants to operate in a decentralized manner. What transfer price should Gemini set for IP 2007 so that each division acting in its own best interest takes actions with respect to the special order that are in the best interests of Gemini Corporation as a whole?

multinational performance measurement roi ri the seaside corp 269984

Multinational performance measurement, ROI, RI. The Seaside Corporation manufactures similar products in the United States and Norway. The U.S. and Norwegian operations are organized as decentralized divisions. The following information is available for 2012; ROI is calculated as operating income divided by total assets:



Both investments were made on December 31, 2011. The exchange rate at the time of Seaside’s investment in Norway on December 31, 2011, was 9 kroner = $1. During 2012, the Norwegian kroner decreased steadily in value so that the exchange rate on December 31, 2012, is 10 kroner = $1. The average exchange rate during 2012 is [(9 + 10) A? 2] = 9.5 kroner = $1.

Required

1a. Calculate the U.S. division’s operating income for 2012.

b. Calculate the Norwegian division’s ROI for 2012 in kroner.

2. Top management wants to know which division earned a better ROI in 2012. What would you tell them? Explain your answer.

3. Which division do you think had the better RI performance? Explain your answer. The required rate of return on investment (calculated in U.S. dollars) is8%.

multinational transfer pricing global tax 269987

Multinational transfer pricing, global tax minimization. Industrial Diamonds, Inc., based in Los Angeles, has two divisions:

South African Mining Division, which mines a rich diamond vein in South Africa

U.S Processing Division, which polishes raw diamonds for use in industrial cutting tools

The Processing Division’s yield is 50%: It takes 2 pounds of raw diamonds to produce 1 pound of top quality polished industrial diamonds. Although all of the Mining Division’s output of 4,000 pounds of raw diamonds is sent for processing in the United States, there is also an active market for raw diamonds in South Africa. The foreign exchange rate is 7 ZAR (South African Rand) = $1 U.S. The following information is known about the two divisions:



1. Compute the annual pre tax operating income, in U.S. dollars, of each division under the following transfer pricing methods: (a) 200% of full cost and (b( market price.

2. Compute the after tax operating income, in U.S. dollars, for each division under the transfer pricing methods in requirement 1. (Income taxes are not included in the computation of cost based transfer price, and Industrial Diamonds does not pay U.S. income tax on income already taxed in South Africa.)

3. If the two division managers are compensated based on after tax division operating income, which transfer pricing method will each prefer? Which transfer pricing method will maximize the total after tax operating income of Industrial Diamonds?

4. In addition to tax minimization, what other factors might Industrial Diamonds consider in choosing a transfer pricingmethod?

multinational transfer pricing global tax minimization the morn 269989

Multinational transfer pricing, global tax minimization The Mornay Company manufactures telecommunications equipment at its plant in Toledo, Ohio. The company has marketing divisions throughout the world. A Mornay marketing division in Vienna, Austria, imports 10,000 units of Product 4A36 from the United States. The following information is available:

U.S. income tax rate on the U.S. division’s operating income 35%

Austrian income tax rate on the Austrian division’s operating income 40%

Austrian import duty 15%

Variable manufacturing cost per unit of Product 4A36 $ 550

Full manufacturing cost per unit of Product 4A36 $ 800

Selling price (net of marketing and distribution costs) in Austria $1,150

Suppose the United States and Austrian tax authorities only allow transfer prices that are between the full manufacturing cost per unit of $800 and a market price of $950, based on comparable imports into Austria. The Austrian import duty is charged on the price at which the product is transferred into Austria. Any import duty paid to the Austrian authorities is a deductible expense for calculating Austrian income taxes due.

Required

1. Calculate the after tax operating income earned by the United States and Austrian divisions from transferring 10,000 units of Product 4A36 (a) at full manufacturing cost per unit and (b) at market price of comparable imports. (Income taxes are not included in the computation of the cost based transfer prices.)

2. Which transfer price should the Mornay Company select to minimize the total of company import duties and income taxes? Remember that the transfer price must be between the full manufacturing cost per unit of $800 and the market price of $950 of comparable imports into Austria. Explain your reasoning.

pertinent transfer price europa inc has two divisions 270000

Pertinent transfer price. Europa, Inc., has two divisions, A and B, which manufacture expensive bicycles. Division A produces the bicycle frame, and Division B assembles the rest of the bicycle onto the frame. There is a market for both the subassembly and the final product. Each division has been designated as a profit center. The transfer price for the subassembly has been set at the long run average market price. The following data are available for each division:



The manager of Division B has made the following calculation:



1. Should transfers be made to Division B if there is no unused capacity in Division A? Is the market price the correct transfer price? Show your computations.

2. Assume that Division A’s maximum capacity for this product is 1,000 units per month and sales to the intermediate market are now 800 units. Should 200 units be transferred to Division B? At what transfer price? Assume that for a variety of reasons, Division A will maintain the $200 selling price indefinitely. That is, Division A is not considering lowering the price to outsiders even if idle capacity exists.

3. Suppose Division A quoted a transfer price of $150 for up to 200 units. What would be the contribution to the company as a whole if a transfer were made? As manager of Division B, would you be inclined to buy at $1 50?Explain.

pricing in imperfect markets continuation of 22 28 refer to p 270002

Pricing in imperfect markets (continuation of 22 28). Refer to Problem 22 28.

1.Suppose the manager of Division A has the option of (a) cutting the external price to $195, with the certainty that sales will rise to 1,000 units or (b) maintaining the external price of $200 for the 800 units and transferring the 200 units to Division B at a price that would produce the same operating income for Division A. What transfer price would produce the same operating income for Division A? Is that price consistent with that recommended by the general guideline in the chapter so that the resulting decision would be desirable for the company as a whole?

2. Suppose that if the selling price for the intermediate product were dropped to $195, sales to external parties could be increased to 900 units. Division B wants to acquire as many as 200 units if the transfer price is acceptable. For simplicity, assume that there is no external market for the final 100 units of Division A’s capacity.

a. Using the general guideline, what is (are) the minimum transfer price(s) that should lead to the correct economic decision? Ignore performance evaluation considerations.

b. Compare the total contributions under the alternatives to show why the transfer price(s) recommended lead (s) to the optimal economic decision.

ri eva measurement alternatives goal congruence renewal reso 270010

RI, EVA, Measurement alternatives, Goal congruence. Renewal Resorts, Inc., operates health spas in Ft. Meyers, Florida, Scottsdale, Arizona, and Monterey, California. The Ft. Meyers spa was the company’s first, opened in 1986. The Scottsdale spa opened in 1999, and the Monterey spa opened in 2008. Renewal Resorts has previously evaluated divisions based on residual income (RI), but the company is considering changing to an economic value added (EVA) approach. All spas are assumed to face similar risks. Data for 2012 follow:



Required

1. Calculate RI for each of the spas based on operating income and using total assets as the measure of investment. Suppose that the Ft. Meyers spa is considering adding a new group of saunas from Finland that will cost $225,000. The saunas are expected to bring in operating income of $22,000. What effect would this project have on the RI of the Ft. Meyers spa? Based on RI, would the Ft. Meyers manager accept or reject this project? Why? Without resorting to calculations, would the other managers accept or reject the project? Why?

2. Why might Renewal Resorts want to use EVA instead of RI for evaluating the performance of the three spas?

3. Refer back to the original data. Calculate the WACC for Renewal Resorts.

4. Refer back to the original data. Calculate EVA for each of the spas, using net book value of long term assets. Calculate EVA again, this time using gross book value of long term assets. Comment on the differences between the two methods.

5. How is goal congruence affected by the selection of asset measurementmethod?

roi and ri with manufacturing costs superior motor company make 270012

ROI and RI with manufacturing costs. Superior Motor Company makes electric cars and has only two products, the Simplegreen and the Superiorgreen. To produce the Simplegreen, Superior Motor employed assets of $13,500,000 at the beginning of the period, and $13,400,000 of assets at the end of the period. Other costs to manufacture the Simplegreen include:



General administration and selling costs total $7,340,000 for the period. In the current period, Superior Motor produced 10,000 Simplegreen cars using 6,000 setup hours and 175,200 machine hours. Superior Motor sold these cars for $12,000 each.

1. Assuming that Superior Motor defines investment as average assets during the period, what is the return on investment for the Simplegreen division?

2. Calculate the residual income for the Simplegreen if Superior Motor has a required rate of return of 12% oninvestments.

roi performance measures based on historical cost and current co 270014

ROI performance measures based on historical cost and current cost, Nature’s Elixir Corporation operates three divisions that process and bottle natural fruit juices. The historical cost accounting system reports the following information for 2008:



Nature’s Elixir estimates the useful life of each plant to be 12 years, with no terminal disposal value. The straight line depreciation method is used. At the end of 2008, the Passion Fruit plant is 10 years old, the Kiwi Fruit plant is 3 years old, and the Mango Fruit plant is 1 year old. An index of construction costs over the 10 year period that Nature’s Elixir has been operating (1998 year end = 100) is:



Given the high turnover of current assets, management believes that the historical cost and current cost measures of current assets are approximately the same.

1. Compute the ROI ratio (operating income to total assets) of each division using historical cost measures. Comment on the results.

2. Use the approach in Exhibit 23 2 to compute the ROI of each division, incorporating current cost estimates as of 2008 for depreciation expense and long term assets. Comment on the results.

3. What advantages might arise from using current cost asset measures as compared with historical cost measures for evaluating the performance of the managers of the threedivisions?

roi ri and multinational firms konekopf corporation has a 270016

ROI, RI and Multinational Firms. Konekopf Corporation has a division in the United States, and another in France. The investment in the French assets was made when the exchange rate was $1.20 per euro. The average exchange rate forth year was $1.30 per euro. The exchange rate at the end of the fiscal yearwas$1.38 per euro. Income and investment for the two divisions are:



1. The required return for Konekopf is 10%. Calculate ROI and RI for the two divisions. For the French division, calculate these measures using both dollars and euros. Which division is doing better?

2. What are the advantages and disadvantages of translating the French division information from euros todollars?

roi ri dupont method investment decisions balanced scorecard 270020

ROI, RI, DuPont method, investment decisions, balanced scorecard. Global Event Group has two major divisions: print and Internet. Summary financial data (in millions) for 2011 and 2012 are as follows:



The two division managers’ annual bonuses are based on division ROI (defined as operating income divided by total assets). If a division reports an increase in ROI from the previous year, its management is automatically eligible for a bonus; however, the management of a division reporting a decline in ROI has to present an explanation to the Global Event Group board and is unlikely to get any bonus. Carol Mays, manager of the print division, is considering a proposal to invest $960 million in a new computerized news reporting and printing system. It is estimated that the new system’s state of the art graphics and ability to quickly incorporate late breaking news into papers will increase 2013 division operating income by $144 million. Global Event Group uses a 12% required rate of return on investment for each division.

Required

1. Use the DuPont method of profitability analysis to explain differences in 2012 ROIs between the two divisions. Use 2012 total assets as the investment base.

2. Why might Mays be less than enthusiastic about accepting the investment proposal for the new system, despite her belief in the benefits of the new technology?

3. Chris Moreno, CEO of Global Event Group, is considering a proposal to base division executive compensation on division RI.

a. Compute the 2012 RI of each division.

b. Would adoption of an RI measure reduce Mays’ reluctance to adopt the new computerized system investment proposal?

4. Moreno is concerned that the focus on annual ROI could have an adverse long run effect on Global Event Group’s customers. What other measurements, if any, do you recommend that Moreno use? Explainbriefly.

bank reconciliation the following information is available to as 269694

Bank Reconciliation The following information is available to assist you in preparing a bank reconciliation for Karen’s Catering on March 31, 2010:

a. The balance on the March 31, 2010, bank statement is $6,506.10.

b. Not included on the bank statement is a $423 deposit made by Karen’s late on March 31.

c. A comparison between the canceled checks listed on the bank statement and the company records indicated that the following checks are outstanding at March 31:

No. 112 …………………. $ 42.92

No. 117 …………………. 307 .00

No. 120 …………………. 10.58

No. 122 …………………. 75.67

d. The bank acts as a collection agency for checks returned for insufficient funds. The March bank statement indicates that one such check in the amount of $45.00 was collected and deposited and a collection fee of $4.50 was charged.

e. Interest earned on the checking account and added to Karen’s account during March was $4.30. Miscellaneous bank service charges amounted to $22.

f. A comparison between the deposits listed on the bank statement and the company’s books revealed that a customer’s check in the amount of $1,250 appears on the bank statement in March but was never added to the customer’s account on the company’s books.

g. The comparison of checks cleared per the bank statement with those per the books revealed that the wrong amount was charged to the company’s account for a check. The amount of the check was $990. The proof machine encoded the check in the amount of $909, the amount charged against the company’s account.

Required

1. Determine the balance on the books before any adjustments as well as the corrected balance to be reported on the balance sheet.

2. What would you recommend Karen do as a result of the bank error in (g)? Why?

banks charge fees for obounced checks that is checks that exce 269695

Banks charge fees for ?obounced?? checks—that is, checks that exceed the balance in the account. It has been estimated that processing bounced checks costs a bank roughly $1.50 per check. Thus, the profit margin on bounced checks is very high. Recognizing this, some banks have started to process checks from largest to smallest. By doing this, they maximize the number of checks that bounce if a customer overdraws an account. For example, NationsBank (now Bank of America) projected a $14 million increase in fee revenue as a result of processing largest checks first. In response to criticism, banks have responded that their customers prefer to have large checks processed first, because those tend to be the most important. At the other extreme, some banks will cover their customers’ bounced checks, effectively extending them an interest free loan while their account is overdrawn.

Instructions

Answer each of the following questions.

(a) William Preston had a balance of $1,500 in his checking account at First National Bank on a day when the bank received the following five checks for processing against his account.

?

Assuming a $30 fee assessed by the bank for each bounced check, how much fee revenue would the bank generate if it processed checks

(1) From largest to smallest,

(2) From smallest to largest, and

(3) In order of check number?

(b) Do you think that processing checks from largest to smallest is an ethical business practice?

(c) In addition to ethical issues, what other issues must a bank consider in deciding whether to process checks from largest to smallest?

(d) If you were managing a bank, what policy would you adopt on bouncedchecks?

bob carson owns a card shop card talk the following 269715

Bob Carson owns a card shop, Card Talk. The following cash information is available for the month of August, 2012. As of August 31, the bank statement shows a balance of $17,000. The August 31 unadjusted balance in the Cash account of Card Talk is $16,000. A review of the bank statement revealed the following information:

1. A deposit of $2,260 on August 31, 2012, does not appear on the August bank statement.

2. It was discovered that a check to pay for baseball cards was correctly written and paid by the bank for $4,040 but was recorded on the books as $4,400.

3. When checks written during the month were compared with those paid by the bank, three checks amounting to $3,000 were found to be outstanding.

4. A debit memo for $100 was included in the bank statement for the purchase of a new supply of checks.

Required

Prepare a bank reconciliation at the end of August showing the true cash balance.

campus supply store purchases merchandise on credit from a large 269733

Campus Supply Store purchases merchandise on credit from a large number of suppliers. During the past five years, Campus’s annual sales have grown from $100,000 to $1,500,000. A recent article in the local newspaper disclosed that an employee of another firm had been arrested for embezzling funds from his employer by diverting payments for purchases to his own bank account. Because of that article, the accountant for Campus has decided to examine Campus’s procedures for purchases and payables.

Currently three different employees are authorized to order merchandise for the store. These employees normally complete paperwork provided by the suppliers’ sales representatives, keeping a copy for their records. When the ordered merchandise arrives, whomever the delivery person can locate signs for the package. Bills are sent to the store by suppliers and are paid by Campus’s accountant when due.

Required:

1. Indicate which general principles of internal control are violated by Campus’s procedures for purchases and payables.

2. Recommend procedures that would incorporate the five general categories of internal control where possible.

careful scrutiny of accounting records and financial statements 269734

Careful scrutiny of accounting records and financial statements can lead to the discovery of fraud or embezzlement. Each of the situations that follow may indicate a breakdown in internal control. Indicate the nature of the possible fraud or embezzlement in each of these situations.

1. Wages expense for a branch office was 30 percent higher in 2011 than in 2010, even though the office was authorized to employ only the same four employees and raises were only 5 percent in 2011.

2. Sales returns and allowances increased from 5 percent to 20 percent of sales in the first two months of 2011, after record sales in 2010 resulted in large bonuses for the sale staff.

3. Gross margin decreased from 40 percent of net sales in 2010 to 20 percent in 2011, even though there was no change in pricing. Ending inventory was 50 percent less at the end of 2011 than it was at the beginning of the year. There is no immediate explanation for the decrease in inventory.

4. A review of daily records of cash register receipts shows that one cashier consistently accepts more discount coupons for purchases than do the other cashiers.

celtic company recently changed its system of internal control o 269738

Celtic Company recently changed its system of internal control over cash disbursements. The system includes the following features.

1. Instead of being unnumbered and manually prepared, all checks must now be prenumbered and written by using the new check writer purchased by the company.

2. Before a check can be issued, each invoice must have the approval of Jane Bell, the purchasing agent, and Dick McRae, the receiving department supervisor.

3. Checks must be signed by either Frank Person, the treasurer, or Sara Goss, the assistant treasurer. Before signing a check, the signer is expected to compare the amounts of the check with the amounts on the invoice.

4. After signing a check, the signer stamps the invoice ?opaid?? and inserts within the stamp, the date, check number, and amount of the check. The ?opaid?? invoice is then sent to the accounting department for recording.

5. Blank checks are stored in a safe in the treasurer’s office. The combination to the safe is known by only the treasurer and assistant treasurer.

6. Each month the bank statement is reconciled with the bank balance per books by the assistant chief accountant.

7. All employees who handle or account for cash are bonded.

Instructions

Identify the internal control principles and their application to cash disbursements of Celtic Company.

citizenship bank has a loan receivable from therot recording com 269742

Citizenship Bank has a loan receivable from Therot Recording Company. Therot is late making payments to the bank, and Robert Phelps, a Citizenship Bank vice president, is helping Therot restructure its debt. Phelps learns that Therot is depending on landing a $1,000,000 contract from Starstruck Theater, another Citizenship Bank client. Phelps also serves as Starstruck’s loan officer at the bank. In this capacity, he is aware that Starstruck is considering declaring bankruptcy. Phelps has been a great help to Therot, and Therot’s owner is counting on him to carry the company through this difficult restructuring. To help the bank collect on this large loan, Phelps has a strong motivation to help Therot survive.

Requirements

1. Identify the ethical issue that Phelps is facing. Specify the two main alternatives available to Phelps.

2. Identify the possible consequences of Phelps identifying Starstruck’s financial position to Therot Recording Company.

3. Identify the correct ethical decision Phelps must make based on the two alternatives identified in Requirement 2.

classifying internal control procedures required match each of 269744

Classifying Internal Control Procedures

Required:

Match each of the control procedures listed below with the most closely related control procedures type. Your answer should pair each of the numbers 1 through 10 with the appropriate letter.

Control Procedure Types

A. Clearly defined authority and responsibility

B. Segregation of duties

C. Adequate documents and records

D. Safeguards over assets and records

E. Checks on recorded amounts

Control Procedures

1. The controller is required to sign the daily summary of expenditures to authorize payment.

2. Division managers are evaluated annually on the basis of their division’s profitability.

3. Invoices received from outside suppliers are filed with purchase orders.

4. Employees with access to the accounting records are not permitted to open the mail, because it contains many payments by check from customers.

5. The extent of access to the many segments of the company’s computer system is tightly controlled by individual identification cards and passwords that change at regular intervals.

6. Each shipment to customers from inventory is recorded on a specially printed form bearing a sequential number; these forms are the basis for entries into the computer system, which makes entries to inventory records and produces periodic reports of sales and shipments.

7. At regular intervals, internal audit reviews a sample of expenditure transactions to determine that payment has been made to a bona fide supplier and that the related goods or services were received and appropriately used.

8. A construction company stores large steel girders in an open yard surrounded by a 5 foot fence and stores welding supplies in a controlled access, tightly secured concrete building.

9. Cash registers display the price of each item purchased to the customer as it is recorded and produce a customer receipt that describes each item and gives its price.

10. The person in the controller’s office who prepares and mails checks to suppliers cannot make entries in the general ledger system.

consider the following situations a while reviewing the record 269750

Consider the following situations.

a. While reviewing the records of Quality Pharmacy, you find that the same employee orders merchandise and approves invoices for payment.

b. Business is slow at Amazing Amusement Park on Tuesday, Wednesday, and Thursday nights. To reduce expenses, the owner decides not to use a ticket taker on those nights. The ticket seller (cashier) is told to keep the tickets as a record of the number sold.

c. The same trusted employee has served as cashier for 12 years.

d. When business is brisk, Quickie Mart deposits cash in the bank several times during the day. The manager at one store wants to reduce the time employees spend delivering cash to the bank, so he starts a new policy. Cash will build up over weekends, and the total will be deposited on Monday.

e. Grocery stores such as Convenience Market and Natural Foods purchase most merchandise from a few suppliers. At another grocery store, the manager decides to reduce paperwork. He eliminates the requirement that the receiving department prepare a receiving report listing the goods actually received from the supplier.

Requirement

1. Consider each situation separately. Identify the missing internal control procedure from these characteristics:

?? Assignment of responsibilities

?? Separation of duties

?? Audits

?? Electronic controls

?? Other controls (specify)

questions from augustine 269776

On January 2, 2010, KJ Corporation acquired equipment for $260,000. The estimated life of the equipment is 5 years or 40,000 hours. The estimated residual value is $20,000. The equipment worked for 14,000 hrs in the first year, 10,000 hrs in the second year, 9,000 hrs in the third year, 4,000 hrs in the fourth year and 3,000 hrs in the fifth year. Using this information, answer the following.

a. Calculate the depreciable cost of the equipment.

b. If the asset is depreciated using the straight line method, calculate the depreciation expense at Dec 31, 2010 (the end of the first year) either using the straight line rate of the straight line formula.

c. Determine the straight line depreciation expense for the fourth year.

d. If the asset is depreciated using the straight line method, determine the book value of the asset at Dec 31 2012 (the end of the third year).

e. If the asset is depreciated using the units of production method, calculate the depreciation expense at Dec 31, 2010 (the end of the first year) and at Dec 31, 2011 (the end of the second year).

f. If the asset is depreciated using the double declining balance method, calculate the depreciation expense at Dec 31, 2011 (the end of the second year) and at Dec 31, 2012 (the end of the third year).

g. If the asset is depreciated using the double declining balance method, determine the book value of the asset at Dec 31, 2013 (the end of the fourth year).

developing a convenient means of providing sales representatives 269795

Developing a convenient means of providing sales representatives with cash for their incidental expenses, such as entertaining a client at lunch, is a problem many companies face. Under one company’s plan, the sales representatives receive advances in cash from the petty cash fund. Each advance is supported by an authorization from the sales manager. The representative returns the receipt for the expenditure and any unused cash, which is replaced in the petty cash fund. The cashier of the petty cash fund is responsible for seeing that the receipt and the cash returned equal the advance. When the petty cash fund is reimbursed, the amount of the representative’s expenditure is debited to Direct Sales Expense. What is the weak point in this system? What fundamental principle of internal control is being ignored? What improvement in the procedure can you suggest?

during march anderson company engaged in the following transact 269815

During March, Anderson Company engaged in the following transactions involving its petty cash fund:

a. On March 1, Anderson Company established the petty cash fund by issuing a check for $400 to the fund custodian.

b. On March 4, the custodian paid $176 out of petty cash for freight charges on new furniture.

c. On March 12, the custodian paid $87 out of petty cash for office supplies.

d. On March 22, the custodian paid $22 out of petty cash for express mail services for reports sent to the Environmental Protection Agency.

e. On March 25, the custodian filed a claim for reimbursement of petty cash expenditures during the month totaling $285.

f. On March 31, Anderson issued a check for $285 to the custodian, replenishing the fund for expenditures during the month.

Required:

Prepare the journal entries required to record the petty cash account transactions that occurred during the month of March.

each of the following situations has an internal 269824

Each of the following situations has an internal control weakness.

a. Upside – Down Applications develops custom programs to customer’s specifications. Recently, development of a new program stopped while the programmers redesigned Upside – Down’s accounting system. Upside – Down’s accountants could have performed this task.

b. Norma Rottler has been your trusted employee for 24 years. She performs all cash handling and accounting duties. Ms. Rottler just purchased a new Lexus and a new home in an expensive suburb. As owner of the company, you wonder how she can afford these luxuries because you pay her only $30,000 a year and she has no source of outside income.

c. Izzie Hardwoods, a private company, falsified sales and inventory figures in order to get an important loan. The loan went through, but Izzie later went bankrupt and could not repay the bank.

d. The office supply company where Pet Grooming Goods purchases sales receipts recently notified Pet Grooming Goods that its documents were not pre numbered. Howard Mustro, the owner, replied that he never uses receipt numbers.

e. Discount stores such as Cusco make most of their sales for cash, with the remainder in credit card sales. To reduce expenses, one store manager ceases purchasing fidelity bonds on the cashiers.

f. Cornelius’ Corndogs keeps all cash receipts in an empty bread box for a week, because he likes to go to the bank on Tuesdays when Joann is working.

Requirements

1. Identify the missing internal control characteristics in each situation.

2. Identify the possible problem caused by each control weakness.

3. Propose a solution to each internal control problem.

eric inman and darcy getz are both cash register clerks 269837

Eric Inman and Darcy Getz are both cash register clerks for Farmer John’s Markets. Nancy McNeil is the store manager for Farmer John’s Markets. The following is an excerpt of a conversation between Eric and Darcy:

Eric: Darcy, how long have you been working for Farmer John’s Markets?

Darcy: Almost five years this June. You just started two weeks ago . . . right?

Eric: Yes. Do you mind if I ask you a question?

Darcy: No, go ahead.

Eric: What I want to know is, have they always had this rule that if your cash register is short at the end of the day, you have to make up the shortage out of your own pocket?

Darcy: Yes, as long as I’ve been working here.

Eric: Well, it’s the pits. Last week I had to pay in almost $25.

Darcy: It’s not that big a deal. I just make sure that I’m not short at the end of the day.

Eric: How do you do that?

Darcy: I just shortchange a few customers early in the day. There are a few jerks that deserve it anyway. Most of the time, their attention is elsewhere and they don’t think to check their change.

Eric: What happens if you’re over at the end of the day?

Darcy: Nancy lets me keep it as long as it doesn’t get to be too large. I’ve not been short in over a year. I usually clear about $10 to $15 extra per day.

Discuss this case from the viewpoint of proper controls and professional behavior.

eyles sports shop is a small neighborhood sporting goods store 269844

Eyles Sports Shop is a small neighborhood sporting goods store. The shop’s owner, Samantha Eyles, has set up a system of internal control over sales to prevent theft and to ensure the accuracy of the accounting records. When a customer buys a product the cashier writes up a sales invoice that describes the purchase, including the total price. All sales invoices are prenumbered sequentially. If the sale is by credit card, the cashier runs the credit card through a scanner that verities the customer’s credit. The scanner prints out a receipt and a slip for the customer to sign. The signed slip is put in the cash register, and the customer is given the receipt and a copy of the sales invoice. If the sale is by cash or check, the cashier rings it up on the cash register and gives change, if appropriate. Checks must be written for the exact amount of the purchase and must be accompanied by identification. The sale is recorded on a tape inside the cash register that cannot be accessed by the cashier. The cash register may be locked with a key. The cashier is the only person other than Eyles who has a key. The cash register must be locked when the cashier is not present. Refunds are made only with Eyles’s approval, are recorded on prenumbered credit memorandum forms, and are rung up on the cash register. At the end of each day, Eyles counts the cash and checks in the cash register and compares the total with the amount recorded on the tape inside the register. Eyles totals all the signed credit card slips and ensures that the total equals the amount recorded by the scanner. Eyles also makes sure that all sales invoices and credit memoranda are accounted for. Eyles prepares a bank deposit ticket for the cash, checks, and signed credit card slips, less $40 in change to be put in the cash register the next day, and removes the record of the day’s credit card sales from the scanner. All the records are placed in an envelope that is scaled and sent to the company’s accountant for verification and recording in the company records. On the way home, Eyles places the bank deposit in the night deposit box. The company hires experienced cashiers who arc bonded. The owner spends the first half day with new cashiers, showing them the procedures and overlooking their work.

Required

1. Give an example of how each of the following control activities is applied to internal control over sales and cash at Eyles Sports Shop. (Do not address controls over inventory.)

a. Authorization

b. Recording transactions

c. Documents and records

d. Physical controls

e. Periodic independent verification

f. Separation of duties

g. Sound personnel practices

2. Can the system as described protect against a cashier who accepts cash for a sale but does not ring up the sale and pockets the cash? If so, how does it prevent this action?

firebird corp prepares monthly bank reconciliations of its chec 269850

Firebird Corp. prepares monthly bank reconciliations of its checking account balance.

The bank statement for May 2009 indicated the following:

Balance, May 31, 2009 …………………………………………$29,700

Service charge for May ………………………………………… 80

Interest earned during May …………………………………….. 120

NSF check from Valerie Corp. (deposited by Firebird) ………… 230

Note ($4,000) and interest ($100) collected for

Firebird from a customer of Firebird’s …………………………. 4,100

An analysis of canceled checks and deposits and the records of Firebird Corp. revealed the following items:

Checking account balance per Firebird’s books …………………$26,040

Outstanding checks as of May 31 ……………………………………. 2,950

Deposit in transit at May 31 ……………………………………………. 3,110

Error in recording check #4456 issued by Firebird …………….. 90

The correct amount of check #4456 is $760. It was recorded as a cash disbursement of $670 by mistake. The check was issued to pay for merchandise purchases. The check appeared on the bank statement correctly.

Required:

Prepare a bank reconciliation schedule at May 31, 2009, in proper form.

grossfeld company of omaha nebraska provides liquid fertilizer 269883

Grossfeld Company of Omaha, Nebraska, provides liquid fertilizer and herbicides to regional farmers. On July 31, 2012, the company’s Cash account per its general ledger showed a balance of $5,876.70.

The bank statement from Tri State Bank on that date showed the following balance.

?



A comparison of the details on the bank statement with the details in the Cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The bank service charge for July was $32.

2. The bank collected a note receivable of $900 for Grossfeld Company on July 15, plus $48 of interest. The bank made an $18 charge for the collection. Grossfeld has not accrued any interest on the note.

3. The July 31 receipts of $1,339 were not included in the bank deposits for July. These receipts were deposited by the company in a night deposit vault on July 31.

4. Company check No. 2480 issued to S. Tully, a creditor, for $471 that cleared the bank in July was incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal on July 10 for $417.

5. Checks outstanding on July 31 totaled $2,480.10.

6. On July 31, the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $818 for a check received by the company from L. Weare, a customer, on account.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the bank reconciliation as of July 31, 2012.

(b) Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at July 31,2012.

austin corporation prepares monthly cash budgets here are relev 269691

Austin Corporation prepares monthly cash budgets. Here are relevant data from operating budgets for 2012.

?.

All sales and purchases are on account. Budgeted collections and disbursement data are given below. All other expenses are paid in the month incurred except for administrative expenses, which include $1,000 of depreciation per month.

Other data.

1. Collections from customers: January $326,000; February $378,000.

2. Payments for purchases: January $110,000; February $135,000.

3. Other receipts: January: collection of December 31, 2011, notes receivable $15,000;

February: proceeds from sale of securities $4,000.

4. Other disbursements: February $10,000 cash dividend.

The company’s cash balance on January 1, 2012, is expected to be $46,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000.

Instructions

Prepare a cash budget for January and February

bank employees use a system known as the omaker checker system 269693

Bank employees use a system known as the ?omaker checker?? system. An employee will record an entry in the appropriate journal, and then a supervisor will verify and approve the entry. These days, as all of a bank’s accounts are computerized, the employee first enters a batch of entries into the computer, and then the entries are posted automatically to the general ledger account after the supervisor approves them on the system.

Access to the computer system is password protected and task specific, which means that the computer system will not allow the employee to approve a transaction or the supervisor to record a transaction.

Instructions

Identify the principles of internal control inherent in the ?omaker checker?? procedure used by banks.

kim company currently makes a part used in the production 269446

Kim Company currently makes a part used in the production of its best selling product. Kim has the option to buy this same part from a supplier for $50 per part. Kim uses 800 of these parts each period and has the following cost data for producing these 800 parts:

Cost per Unit

Direct labor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . $15

Direct materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Variable manufacturing overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Fixed manufacturing overhead, direct* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Fixed manufacturing overhead, indirect* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

* Based on 800 units per period. If the parts are purchased from the supplier, the direct fixed manufacturing overhead costs can be avoided.

Should Kim buy the 800 parts per period from the supplier or continue to make them?

make or buy unknown level of volume a atkinson 269450

Make or buy unknown level of volume. (A. Atkinson) Oxford Engineering manufactures small engines. The engines are sold to manufacturers who install them in such products as lawn mowers. The company currently manufactures all the parts used in these engines but is considering a proposal from external supplier who wishes to supply the starter assemblies used in these engines.

The starter assemblies are currently manufactured in Division 3 of Oxford Engineering. The costs relating to the starter assemblies for the past 12 months were as follows:



Over the past year, Division 3 manufactured 150,000 starter assemblies. The average cost for each starter assembly is $5 ($750,000 A? 150,000).

Further analysis of manufacturing overhead revealed the following information. Of the total manufacturing overhead, only 25% is considered variable. Of the fixed portion, $50,000 is an allocation of general overhead that will remain unchanged for the company as a whole if production of the starter assemblies is discontinued. A further $100,000 of the fixed overhead is avoidable if production of the starter assemblies is discontinued. The balance of the current fixed overhead, $50,000 is the division manager’s salary. If production of the starter assemblies is discontinued, the manager of Division 3 will be transferred to Division 2 at the same salary. This move will allow the company to save the $40,000 salary that would otherwise be paid to attract an outsider to this position.

1. Tidnish Electronics, a reliable supplier, has offered to supply starter assembly units at $4 per unit Because this price is less than the current average cost of $5 per unit the vice president of manufacturing is eager to accept this offer. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should the outside offer be accepted? Show your calculations.

2. How, if at all, would your response to requirement 1 change if the company could use the vacated plant space for storage and, in so doing, avoid $50,000 of outside storage charges currently incurred? Why is this information relevant orirrelevant?

make versus buy activity based costing the svenson corporation 269451

Make versus buy, activity based costing. The Svenson Corporation manufactures cellular modems. It manufactures its own cellular modem circuit boards (CMCB), an important part of the cellular modem. It reports the following cost information about the costs of making CMCBs in 2008 and the expected costs in 2009:



Svenson manufactured 8,000 CMCBs in 2008 in 40 batches of 200 each. In 2009, Svenson anticipates needing 10,000 CMCBs. The CMCBs would be produced in 80 batches of 125 each. The Minton Corporation has approached Svenson about supplying CMCBs to Svenson in 2009 at $300 per CMCB on whatever delivery schedule Svenson wants.

1. Calculate the total expected manufacturing cost per unit of making CMCBs in 2009.

2. Suppose the capacity currently used to make CMCBs will become idle if Svenson purchases CMCBs from Minton. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should Svenson make CMCBs or buy them from Minton? Show your calculations.

3. Now suppose that if Svenson purchases CMCBs from Minton, its best alternative use of the capacity currently used for CMCBs is to make and sell special circuit boards (CB3s) to the Essex Corporation. Svenson estimates the following incremental revenues and costs from CB3s:



On the basis of financial considerations alone, should Svenson make CMCBs or buy them from Minton? Show yourcalculations.

on april 1 2010 topeka brake mfg purchased new computer based 269463

On April 1, 2010, Topeka Brake Mfg. purchased new computer based production scheduling software for $480,000. On May 15, 2010, a representative of a computerized manufacturing technology company demonstrated new software that was clearly superior to that purchased by the firm in April. The price of this software is $840,000. Corporate managers estimate that the new software would save the company $32,000 annually in schedule related costs compared to the recently installed software. Both software packages should last 10 years (the expected life of the computer hardware) and have no salvage value at that time. The company can sell its existing software for $356,000 if the new software is purchased. Should the company keep and use the software purchased earlier or buy the new software? Show computations to support your answer.

one product produced and sold by outback outfitters is an 269465

One product produced and sold by Outback Outfitters is an ATV gun rack for which 2010 projections are as follows:

Projected volume in units ……………………… 120,000

Sales price per unit …………………………….. $60

Variable production cost per unit ……………… $24

Variable selling cost per unit …………………… $12

Fixed production cost …………………………. $805,000

Fixed selling and administration costs ………….$435,000

a. Compute the projected pre tax profit to be earned on the ATV gun rack during 2010.

b. Corporate management estimates that unit volume could be increased by 20 percent if sales price were decreased by 10 percent. How would such a change affect the profit level projected in part (a)?

c. Rather than cutting the sales price, management is considering holding the sales price at the projected level and increasing advertising by $185,000. Such a change would increase volume by 20 percent. How would the level of profit under this alternative compare to the profit projected in (a)?

opportunity costs the wolverine corporation is working at full 269466

Opportunity costs. The Wolverine Corporation is working at full production capacity producing 10,000 units of a unique product Rosebo. Manufacturing cost per unit for Rosebo is as follows:



Manufacturing overhead cost per unit is based on variable cost per unit of $2 and fixed costs of $30,000 full capacity of 10,000 units). Marketing cost per unit all variable, is $4, and the selling price is $20.

A customer, the Miami Company, has asked Wolverine to produce 2,000 units of Orangebo, a modification of Rosebo. Orangebo would require the same manufacturing processes as Rosebo. Miami has offered to pay Wolverine $15 for a unit of Orangebo plus half of the marketing cost per unit

1. What is the opportunity cost to Wolverine of producing the 2,000 units of Orangebo? (Assume that no overtime is worked.)

2. The Buckeye Corporation has offered to produce 2,000 units of Rosebo for Wolverine so that Wolverine may accept the Miami offer That is, if Wolverine accepts the Buckeye offer, Wolverine would manufacture 8,000 units of Rosebo and 2,000 units of Orangebo and purchase 2,000 units of Rosebo from Buckeye. Buckeye would charge Wolverine $14 per unit to manufacture Rosebo. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should Wolverine accept the Buckeye offer? Show your calculations.

3. Suppose Wolverine had been working at less than full capacity, producing 8,000 units of Rosebo at the time the Miami offer was made. Calculate the minimum price Wolverine should accept for Orangebo under these conditions. (Ignore the previous $15 sellingprice.)

optimal product mix chapter appendix della simpson inc sell 269470

Optimal product mix (Chapter Appendix) Della Simpson, Inc., sells two popular brands of cookies: Della’s Delight and Bonny’s Bourbon. Della’s Delight goes through the Mixing and Baking departments, and Bonny’s Bourbon, a filled cookie, goes through the Mixing, Filling, and Baking departments. Michael Shirra, vice president for sales, believes that at the current price, Della Simpson can sell all of daily production of Della’s Delight and Bonny’s Bourbon. Both cookies are made in batches of 3,000. In each department, the time required per batch and the total time available each day are as follows:



Revenue and cost data for each type of cookie are:



1. Using D to represent the batches of Della’s Delight and B to represent the batches of Bonny’s Bourbon made and sold each day formulate Shirra’s decision as an LP model.

2. Compute the optimal number of batches of each type of cookie that Della Simpson, Inc., should make and sell each day to maximize operatingincome.

product mix constrained resource taylor furniture produces and 269479

Product mix, constrained resource. Taylor Furniture produces and sells specialty mattresses. Production is a machine intensive process. Taylor’s variable costs are direct material costs, variable machining costs, and sales commissions. Marion Taylor, the owner, is planning production for the coming tear and collects the following data:



Salespeople are paid a 5% commission on each Nealy or Tersa sold, and a 10% commission on each Pelta sold. All other marketing and administrative costs are fixed and, along with the fixed manufacturing costs, total $8,750,000.

Annual capacity is 50,000 machine hours, which is limited by the availability of machines. Variable machining costs are $200 per hour.

Taylor Furniture holds negligible inventories to minimize business risk.

1. Calculate the machine hours required to satisfy the estimated demand for each type of mattress.

2. What is the contribution margin per unit earned from each type of mattress?

3. Advise Marion Taylor about the most profitable production levels of the three products.

4.Suppose Taylor Furniture can lease additional machining capacity on an as needed basis. What is the maximum amount that Marion Taylor would be willing to pay for each hour of additional machining capacity in the comingyear?

product mix relevant costs n melumad adapted 269481

Product mix, relevant costs (N. Melumad, adapted) Pendleton Engineering makes cutting tools for metalworking operations. It makes two types of tools: R3, a regular cutting tool, and HP6, a high precision cutting tool. R3 is manufactured on a regular machine, but HP6 must be manufactured on both the regular machine and a high precision machine. The following information is available.



Additional in formation includes:

a. Pendleton faces a capacity constraint on the regular machine of 50,000 hours per year

b. The capacity of the high precision machine is not a constraint.

c. Of the $550,000 budgeted fixed overhead costs of HP6, $300,000 are lease payments for the high precision machine. This cost is charged entirely to HP6 because Pendleton uses the machine exclusively to produce HP6. The lease agreement for the high precision machine can be canceled at any time without penalties.

d. All other overhead costs are fixed and cannot be changed.

1. What product mix—that is, how many units of R3 and HP6—will maximize Pendleton’s operating income? Show your calculations.

2. Suppose Pendleton can increase the annual capacity of its regular machines by 15,000 machine hours at a cost of $150,000. Should Pendleton increase the capacity of the regular machines by 15,000 machine hours? By how much will Pendleton’s operating income increase? Show your calculations.

3. Suppose that the capacity of the regular machines has been increased to 65,000 hours. Pendleton has been approached by Carter Corporation to supply 20,000 units of another cutting tool, S3, for $120 per unit. Pendleton must either accept the order for all 20,000 units or reject it totally. S3 is exactly like R3 except that its variable manufacturing cost is $70 per unit. (It takes one hour to produce one unit of S3 on the regular machine, and variable marketing cost equals $15 per unit) What product mix should Pendleton choose to maximize operating income? Show yourcalculations.

relevance of equipment costs the auto wash company has just 269495

Relevance of equipment costs. The Auto Wash Company has just today paid for and installed a special machine for polishing cars at one of its several outlets. It is the first day of the company’s fiscal year. The machine costs $20,000. Its annual cash operating costs total $1 5,000. The machine will have a four year useful life and a zero terminal disposal value. After the machine has been used for only one day, a salesperson offers a different machine that promises to do the same job at annual cash operating costs of $9,000. The new machine will cost $24,000 cash, installed. The ?oold?? machine is unique and can be sold outright for only $10,000, minus $2,000 removal cost. The new machine, like the old one, will have a four year useful life and zero terminal disposal value. Revenues, all in cash, will be $150,000 annually, and other cash costs will be $110,000 annually, regardless of this decision.

For simplicity, ignore income taxes and the time value of money.

1. a. Prepare a statement of cash receipts and disbursements for each of the four years under each alternative. What is the cumulative difference in cash flow for the four years taken together?

b. Prepare income statements for each of the four years under each alternative. Assume straight line depreciation. What is the cumulative difference in operating income for the four years taken together?

c. What are the irrelevant items in your presentations in requirements a and b? Why are they irrelevant?

2. Suppose the cost of the ?oold?? machine was $1 million rather than $20,000. Nevertheless, the old machine can be sold outright for only $10,000, minus $2,000 removal cost. Would the net differences in requirements la and lb change? Explain.

3. Is there any conflict between the decision model and the incentives of the manager who has just purchased the ?oold?? machine and is considering replacing it a day later?

relevant and irrelevant costs answer the following questions 1 269496

Relevant and irrelevant costs. Answer the following questions.

1. Dalton computers makes 5,000 units of a circuit board, CB76 at a cost of $230 each. Variable cost pa’ unit is $180 and fixed cost per unit is $50. Peach Electronics offers to supply 5,000 units of CB76 for $210 If Dalton buys from Peach it will be able to save $20 per unit in fixed costs but continue to incur the remaining $30 per unit. Should Dalton accept Peach’s offer? Explain.

2. AP Manufacturing is deciding whether to keep or replace an old machine. It obtains the following; information:



AP Manufacturing uses straight line depreciation. Ignore the time value of money and income taxes. Should AP Manufacturing replace the old machine?Explain.

special order louisville corporation produces baseball bats for 269505

Special Order Louisville Corporation produces baseball bats for kids that it sells for $32 each. At capacity, the company can produce 50,000 bats a year. The costs of producing and selling 50,000 bats are as follows:



1. Suppose Louisville is currently producing and selling 40,000 bats. At this level of production and sales its fixed costs are the same as given in the table above. Ripkin Corporation wants to place a one time special order for 10,000 bats at $25 each. Louisville will incur no variable selling costs for this special order. Should Louisville accept this one time special order? Show your calculations.

2. Now suppose Louisville is currently producing and selling 50,000 bats. If Louisville accepts Ripkins offer it will have to sell 10,000 fewer bats to its regular customers.

(a) On financial considerations alone should Louisville accept this one time special order? Show your calculations.

(b) On financial considerations alone, at what price would Louisville be indifferent between accepting the special order and continuing to sell to its regular customers at$32 per bat.

(c) What other factors should Louisville consider in deciding whether to accept the one time specialorder?

tate electronics manufactures computers and all required compone 269513

Tate Electronics manufactures computers and all required components. Its purchasing agent informed the company owner, Mervin Tate, that another the company had offered to supply keyboards for Tate computers at prices below the variable costs at which Tate can make them. Incredulous, Tate hired an industrial consultant to explain how the supplier could offer the keyboards at less than Tate’s variable costs.

The consultant suspects the supplier is using many undocumented laborers to work in its plant. These people are poverty stricken and will take work at substandard wages.

Tate’s purchasing agent and the plant manager recommend to Mervin Tate that the company should outsource the keyboards because “no one can blame us for the supplier’s hiring practices and if those practices come to light, no one will be able to show that we knew of those practices.”

a. What are the ethical issues involved in this case?

b. What are the advantages and disadvantages of buying from this supplier?

c. What do you think Tate should do and why?

a small company maintains a petty cash fund for minor 269594

A small company maintains a petty cash fund for minor expenditures. The following transactions occurred in June and July 2011:

a. The fund was established in the amount of $300.00 on June 1 from the proceeds of check no. 1515.

b. On June 30, the petty cash fund had cash of $46.38 and the following receipts on hand: postage, $120.00; supplies, $74.82; delivery service, $37.20; and rubber stamp, $21.60. Check no. 1527 was drawn to replenish the fund.

c. On July 31, the petty cash fund had cash of $66.18 and the following receipts on hand: postage, $102.60; supplies, $98.52; and delivery service, $19.20. The petty cash custodian could not account for the shortage. Check no. 1621 was written to replenish the fund.

Required

1. In journal form, prepare the entries necessary to record each of these transactions.

2. A charity reimburses volunteers for small out of pocket expenses such as parking and gasoline when the volunteers are carrying out the business of the charity. How might an imprest (petty cash) fund be helpful in controlling these expenditures?

alternative distributor corp a distributor of groceries and re 269619

Alternative Distributor Corp., a distributor of groceries and related products, is headquartered in Medford, Massachusetts.

During a recent audit, Alternative Distributor Corp. was advised that existing internal controls necessary for the company to develop reliable financial statements were inadequate. The audit report stated that the current system of accounting for sales, receivables, and cash receipts constituted a material weakness. Among other items, the report focused on nontimely deposit of cash receipts, exposing Alternative Distributor to potential loss or misappropriation, excessive past due accounts receivable due to lack of collection efforts, disregard of advantages offered by vendors for prompt payment of invoices, absence of appropriate segregation of duties by personnel consistent with appropriate control objectives, inadequate procedures for applying accounting principles, lack of qualified management personnel, lack of supervision by an outside board of directors, and overall poor recordkeeping.

Instructions

(a) Identify the principles of internal control violated by Alternative Distributor Corporation.

(b) Explain why managers of various functional areas in the company should be concerned about internal controls.

argonaut co records all cash receipts on the basis of 269636

Argonaut Co. records all cash receipts on the basis of its cash register tapes. Argonaut Co. discovered during November 2008 that one of its sales clerks had stolen an undetermined amount of cash receipts when she took the daily deposits to the bank. The following data have been gathered for November:

Cash in bank according to the general ledger …………………………$12,510.45

Cash according to the November 30, 2008 bank statement ………….. 22,060.65

Outstanding checks as of November 30, 2008 ……………………….. 6,381.42

Bank service charge for November …………………………………… 35.00

Note receivable, including interest collected by bank in November …. 7,140.00

No deposits were in transit on November 30, which fell on a Sunday.

a. Determine the amount of cash receipts stolen by the sales clerk.

b. What accounting controls would have prevented or detected this theft?

the fixed weekly expense of a coffee stand is 1100 and the variable cost of a cup 269641

2 3

The fixed weekly expense of a coffee stand is $1100, and the variable cost of a cup of coffee is $0.26. Calculate fixed, variable, and total cost at volumes of 1800, 1900, and 2000 cups, and also calculate the average cost per cup.

2 12

A truck incurs both fixed and variable costs. If the truck is driven 120,000 miles per year, its average cost is 11.6 cents per mile. If it is driven only 80,000 miles, average cost per mile is 13.6 cents. Estimate the variable and fixed components of the truck’s cost, and estimate the cost per mile if it was to be driven 100,000 miles.

2 13

Month Number of X Rays Total Cost ($000)

Jan 6250 28

Feb 7000 29

Mar 5000 23

Apr 4250 20

May 4500 22

Jun 3000 17

Jul 3750 18

Aug 5500 24

Sept 5750 26

A Use the high low method to estimate the cost formula for X Rays.

B If you took 4600 X Rays, what would you estimate to be the cost?

C If a least squares regression line was in the form y = $6529 + $3.29X, what would have made this different from the equation you developed in (A)?

Document Preview:

2 3 The fixed weekly expense of a coffee stand is $1100, and the variable cost of a cup of coffee is $0.26. Calculate fixed, variable, and total cost at volumes of 1800, 1900, and 2000 cups, and also calculate the average cost per cup. 2 12 A truck incurs both fixed and variable costs. If the truck is driven 120,000 miles per year, its average cost is 11.6 cents per mile. If it is driven only 80,000 miles, average cost per mile is 13.6 cents. Estimate the variable and fixed components of the truck’s cost, and estimate the cost per mile if it was to be driven 100,000 miles. 2 13 Month Number of X Rays Total Cost ($000) Jan 6250 28 Feb 7000 29 Mar 5000 23 Apr 4250 20 May 4500 22 Jun 3000 17 Jul 3750 18 Aug 5500 24 Sept 5750 26 A Use the high low method to estimate the cost formula for X Rays. B If you took 4600 X Rays, what would you estimate to be the cost? C If a least squares regression line was in the form y = $6529 + $3.29X, what would have made this different from the equation you developed in (A)?

Attachments:

assume that a company is preparing a bank reconciliation for 269653

Assume that a company is preparing a bank reconciliation for the month of June. It reconciles the bank balance and the book balance to the correct balance. For each of the following items, indicate whether the item is an addition to the bank balance (A Bank), an addition to the book balance (A Book), a deduction from the bank balance (D Bank), a deduction from the book balance (D Book), or would not appear on the June reconciliation (NA). Also, place an ADJ next to your answer for any items that will require an adjustment on the company’s books.

______ 1. Check written in June but not yet returned to the bank for payment

______ 2. Customer’s NSF check

______ 3. Customer’s check written in the amount of $54 but recorded on the books in the amount of $45*

______ 4. Service charge for new checks

______ 5. Principal and interest on a customer’s note collected for the company by the bank

______ 6. Customer’s check deposited on June 30 but not reflected on the bank statement

______ 7. Check written on the company’s account, paid by the bank, and returned with the bank statement

______ 8. Check written on the company’s account for $123 but recorded on the books as $132*

______ 9. Interest on the checking account for the month of June

*Answer in terms of the adjustment needed to correct for the error.

at hannon company checks are not prenumbered because both the 269670

At Hannon Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by the vendor, and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills PAID, files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Hannon Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.

Instructions

(a) List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.

(b) Write a memo to the company treasurer indicating your recommendations for improvement.

at morris mart inc all sales are on account mary 269682

At Morris Mart Inc., all sales are on account. Mary Morris Manning is responsible for mailing invoices to customers, recording the amount billed, opening mail, and recording the payment. Mary is very devoted to the family business and never takes off more than one or two days for a long weekend. The customers know Mary and sometimes send personal notes with their payments. Another clerk handles all aspects of accounts payable. Mary’s brother, who is president of Morris Mart, has hired an accountant to help with expansion.

Required

1. List some problems with the current accounts receivable system.

2. What suggestions would you make to improve internal control?

3. How would you explain to Mary that she personally is not the problem?

variable and absorption costing sales and operating 269257

Variable and absorption costing, sales, and operating income changes Helmetsmart, a three year old company, has been producing and selling a single type of bicycle helmet. Helmetsmart uses standard costing. After reviewing the income statements for the first three years, Stuart Weil, president of Helmetsmart, commented, ?oI was told by our accountants—and in fact, I have memorized—that our breakeven volume is 49,000 units. I was happy that we reached that sales goal in each of our first two years. But, here’s the strange thing: In our first year, we sold 49,000 units and indeed we broke even. Then, in our second year we sold the same volume and had a positive operating income. I didn’t complain, of course . . . but here’s the bad part. In our third year, we sold 20% more helmets, but our operating income fell by more than 80% relative to the second year! We didn’t change our selling price or cost structure over the past three years and have no price, efficiency, or spending variances . . . so what’s going on?!??



Required

1. What denominator level is Helmetsmart using to allocate fixed manufacturing costs to the bicycle helmets? How is Helmetsmart disposing of any favorable or unfavorable production volume variance at the end of the year? Explain your answer briefly.

2. How did Helmetsmart’s accountants arrive at the breakeven volume of 49,000 units?

3. Prepare a variable costing based income statement for each year. Explain the variation in variable costing operating income for each year based on contribution margin per unit and sales volume.

4. Reconcile the operating incomes under variable costing and absorption costing for each year, and use this information to explain to Stuart Weil the positive operating income in 2012 and the drop in operating income in2013.

you have been asked to speak at a career fair for high school students in your home 269258

assignment Type:Individual Project
Deliverable Length:3 pages

Points Possible:125
Due Date:2/16/2013 11:59:59 PM CT

You have been asked to speak at a career fair for high school students in your home town.

Specifically, you are making a presentation about your role as an accountant.

  • Describe for the students the primary objectives of accounting.
  • Explain the basic terminologyof the accounting process or financial reporting.
  • Explain how accounting has affected your personal life emphasizing professional ethics.
  • Explain the role that technology has played in small business accounting.

Please include APA in text citations and references.

Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques.

There are two main types of databases. The most popular databases are ABI Inform Global, Academic Search Premier, and Business Source Premier. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites; and materials on sites like QuickMBA.com, MarketingProfs.com, etc. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks.Acceptable internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics).
Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.

Please submit your assignment.

Accounting Fundamentals

If there is a universal truth in the world of business and finance, it is this: Never run out of cash!

At the outset, this intuitive statement sounds like simple advice. When it comes to actually

doing it, however, this task requires delicate and sound financial planning and control. After all,

cash whether cash inflow or cash outflow runs throughout the whole business system and

has to be traced and re calculated at each step of the way. Our examination of cash flow in this

unit centers on issues of documentation. Specifically, we examine accounting fundamentals,

financial statements, and methods of financial forecasting and planning.

Accounting Fundamentals:

Central to understanding the financial condition of any firm is one basic accounting equation:

Assets = Liabilities + Equity

Assets are the items of value that a business owns. Liabilities are claims on the business by

nonowners, and equity is the owners’ claim on the business. The sum of the liabilities and

equity is the total capital contributed to the business. In essence, every business at any point in

time can be defined by this statement and its set of financial statements.

Financial Statements:

The primary financial statements are the balance sheet, the income statement, and the

statement of cash flow. Financial statements are either historical or pro forma projecting the

future. Consequently, financial statements are the ideal vehicles for tracing and determining

the level of cash throughout the enterprise. If measured correctly, we should know precisely:

1. What a company’s cash situation is at any point in time whether surplus or deficit, and thus

be able to

2. Plan accordingly to avoid any cash shortage.

Forecasting and Financial Planning:

After analyzing accurate financial statements, financial managers ask the following question: In

order for this business to run smoothly over a given period of time and as planned, how much

external financing will it need? In other words, they are after the Additional Funds Needed or

AFN for the given company, but how exactly does this work?

AFN is usually calculated through a method known as the percentage of sales method.

Simply put, the percentage of sales method starts with a realistic projection of the sales over

the next period next year for example. Once we know what sales look like, we are able to

create relevant pro forma financial statements especially pro forma balance sheets. At this

point, AFN is simply the difference between the projected investment needs (total assets) and

the projected financings (total liabilities and equity). Once the AFN is quantified, financial

Attachments:

variable costing and absorption costing the all fixed company i 269261

Variable costing and absorption costing the All Fixed Company. It is the end of 2009. The All Fixed Company began operations in January 2008. The company is so named because it has no variable costs. All its costs are fixed; they do not vary with output. The All Fixed Company is located on the bank of a river and has its own hydroelectric plant to supply power, light, and heat. The company manufactures a synthetic fertilizer from air and river water and sells its product at a price that is not expected to change. It has a small staff of employees, all paid fixed annual salaries. The output of the plant can be increased or decreased by adjusting a few dials on a control panel. The following budgeted and actual data are for the operations of the All Fixed Company. All Fixed uses budgeted production as the denominator level and writes off any production volume variance to cost of goods sold.

?

1. Prepare income statements with one column for 2008, one column for 2009, and one column for the two years together, using (a) variable costing and (b) absorption costing.

2. What is the breakeven point under (a) variable costing and (b) absorption costing?

3. What inventory costs would be carried in the balance sheet on December 31, 2008 and 2009, under each method?

4. Assume that the performance of the top manager of the company is evaluated and rewarded largely on the basis of reported operating income. Which costing method would the manager prefer?Why?

variable versus absorption costing the zwatch company manufactur 269268

Variable versus absorption costing The Zwatch Company manufactures trendy, high quality moderately priced watches. As Zwatch’s senior financial analyst, you are asked to recommend a method of inventory costing. The CFO will use your recommendation to prepare Zwatch’s 2012 income statement. The following data are for the year ended December 31, 2012:

Beginning inventory, January 1, 2012 85,000 units

Ending inventory, December 31, 2012 34,500 units

2012 sales 345,400 units

Selling price (to distributor) $22.00 per unit

Variable manufacturing cost per unit, including direct materials $5.10 per unit

Variable operating (marketing) cost per unit sold $1.10 per unit sold

Fixed manufacturing costs $1,440,000

Denominator level machine hours 6,000

Standard production rate 50 units per machine hour

Fixed operating (marketing) costs $1,080,000

Assume standard costs per unit are the same for units in beginning inventory and units produced during the year. Also, assume no price, spending, or efficiency variances. Any production volume variance is written off to cost of goods sold in the month in which it occurs.

Required

1. Prepare income statements under variable and absorption costing for the year ended December 31, 2012.

2. What is Zwatch’s operating income as percentage of revenues under each costing method?

3. Explain the difference in operating income between the two methods.

4. Which costing method would you recommend to the CFO? Why?

prepare a memo from james and mike s perspective that includes 269271

REQUIRED: Prepare a memo, from James and Mike’s perspective, that includes: 1. Using the following sample or similar format, prepare a list of the different costs that the business will incur while planning and operating the business, along with the behavior of these costs, assuming the activity is defined as the total number of items sold. COST BEHAVIOR LIST Cost Item Cost Behavior Utilities Fixed, Variable or Mixed Copyright © 2012, The Ohio State University MOWA Phase 2 Page 4 2. Using the following sample or similar format, prepare a flexible cash budget, including inflows, outflows and net cash flow, for three different levels of total sales for the first year of operations: Scenario 1 – Services for 126 small lawns; 42 large lawns; and 42 “green lawns. Scenario 2 – Services for 138 small lawns; 46 large lawns; and 46 “green lawns. Scenario 3 – Services for 150 small lawns; 50 large lawns; and 50 “green lawns. Unless otherwise specified, assume all purchases made by and all services provided to the business are paid for in cash on the date the product and/or services are received. Also assume that the business will receive the bank loan on the first day of operations. In preparing the flexible budget, list each cost separately and include a clear label for every item included. Combining costs with incorrect values leads to grading complications and may result in a lower grade. FLEXIBLE CASH BUDGET Scenario 1 Scenario 2 Scenario 3 CASH INFLOWS: Item Name Item Name CASH OUTFLOWS: Item Name Item Name NET CASH FLOWS Provide a dollar value for each scenario and suitable label for each “Item Name” used in your budget. Include as many items as necessary, given the information provided in the case, which could be more or less than the number of items indicated in the example above. Copyright © 2012, The Ohio State University MOWA Phase 2 Page 5 3. James and Mike expect that for every five lawns mowed, three will be small, one will be large, and one will be “green”. Given this sales mix and the fixed and variable costs associated with the business, calculate the break even level of sales in dollars and in units for these items for the first year of operations. Use the following sample or similar format to report your break even information. BREAK EVEN SALES Total Break Even Sales Dollars $ Total Units Sold at Break Even: Small Lawns # Large Lawns # “Green” Lawns # In the case of plant, property and equipment (PPE), assume that you would like to recover their depreciable cost over the useful life. To do so, divide their cost less salvage value by the useful life to determine the fixed cost to include in the break even computation for the first year of operations. In order to effectively determine that you have identified all appropriate costs in your breakeven analysis, please provide labeled computations for all equations used in determining your break even level of sales. This includes all individual cost equations and the break even equation, itself. This information can be included as an attachment to the memo. Failure to include this information will result in a lower grade if break even computations are incorrect and individual variable components have not been specified. 4. Explain the similarities/differences between the flexible cash budgets and the break even. How can they have the same approximate sales levels and yet the net cash flows and net income not be the same? 5. Discuss the adequacy of the loan and the ownership capital that has been proposed in order to start the business. Is it too high, too low, or about right? If too high or too low, how much of a loan and/or ownership capital would you recommend? Support your conclusions by referencing work completed for other requirements of this case and/or preparing additional numerical schedule(s).

Attachments:

weighted average method ashworth handcraft is a manufacturer of 269273

Weighted average method. Ashworth Handcraft is a manufacturer of picture frames for large retailers. Every picture frame passes through two departments: the assembly department and the finishing department. This problem focuses on the assembly department. The process costing system at Ashworth has a single direct cost category (direct materials) and a single indirect cost category (conversion costs).

Direct materials are added when the assembly department process is 10% complete. Conversion costs are added evenly during the assembly department’s process.

Ashworth uses the weighted average method of process costing. Consider the following data for the assembly department in April 2012:

?

Required

Summarize total assembly department costs for April 2012, and assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work inprocess.

weighted average method larsen company manufactures car seats 269277

Weighted average method. Larsen Company manufactures car seats in its San Antonio plant. Each car seat passes through the Assembly Department and the Testing Department This problem focuses on the Assembly Department. The process costing system at Larsen Company has a single direct cost category (direct materials) and a single indirect cost category (conversion costs). Direct materials are added at the beginning of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. When the Assembly Department finishes work on each car seat it is immediately transferred to Testing. Larsen Company uses the weighted average method of process costing. Data for the Assembly Department for October 2009 are:



1. For each cost category, compute equivalent units in the Assembly Department Show physical units in the first column of your schedule.

2. For each cost category, summarize total Assembly Department costs for October 2009 and calculate the cost per equivalent unit

3. Assign total costs to units completed and transferred out and to units in ending work inprocess.

examine and discuss the characteristics of npv and the role that this method plays 269312

Examine and discuss the characteristics of NPV and the role that this method plays in capital investment decision making. In addition, discuss the advantages of using this method instead of the other evaluation methods examined this week. should be min 750 words. please please please consult the attached reading material as i will be graded on them. no plagiarism max tolerance of plagiarism 9% please try and use one real life example either personal experience or from the internet. Please use in text citations and 4 5 references including this one:

Atrill, P. & McLaney, E. (2012)
Management Accounting for Decision Makers. 7th ed. Harlow, England : Pearson Education Ltd. which is the material attached. solution should be ready in 31 hours from now.

Attachments:

zero beginning inventory materials introduced in middle of 269358

Zero beginning inventory, materials introduced in middle of process. Roary Chemicals has a Mixing Department and a Refining Department. Its process costing system in the Mixing Department has two direct materials cost categories (Chemical P and Chemical Q) and one conversion costs pool. The following data pertain to the Mixing Department for July 2009:



Chemical P is introduced at the start of operations in the Mixing Department and Chemical U is added when the product is three fourths completed in the Mixing Department. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. The ending work in process in the Mixing Department is two thirds complete.

1. Compute the equivalent units in the Mixing Department for July 2009 for each cost category.

2. Compute (a) the cost of goods completed and transferred to the Refining Department during July and (b) the cost of work in process as of July 31,2009.

assume that you are about to graduate from your university 269375

Assume that you are about to graduate from your university and are deciding whether to apply for graduate school or enter the job market.

To help make the decision, you have gathered the following data:

Costs incurred for the bachelor’s degree ……………..$163,000

Out of pocket costs for a master’s degree …………… $92,000

Estimated starting salary with B.A. ………………….. $48,400

Estimated starting salary with MA …………………… $66,800

Estimated time to complete master’s degree 2 years

Estimated time from the present to retirement 40 years

a. Which of these factors is relevant to your decision?

b. What is the opportunity cost associated with earning the master’s degree?

c. What is the out of pocket cost to obtain the master’s degree?

d. What other factors should you consider before making a decision?

choosing customers broadway printers operates a printing press 269387

Choosing customers. Broadway Printers operates a printing press with a monthly capacity of 2,000 machine hours. Broadway has two main customers: Taylor Corporation and Kelly Corporation. Data on each customer for January follows:



Kelly Corporation indicates that it wants Broadway to do an additional $80,000 worth of printing jobs during February. These jobs are identical to the existing business Broadway did for Kelly in January in terms of variable costs and machine hours required. Broadway anticipates that the business from Taylor Corporation in February will be the same as that in January. Broadway can choose to accept as much of the Taylor and Kelly business for February as its capacity allows. Assume that total machine hours and fixed costs for February will be the same as in January. What action should Broadway take to maximize its operating income? Show your calculations.

closing and opening stores sanchez corporation runs two 269389

Closing and opening stores. Sanchez Corporation runs two convenience stores, one in Connecticut and one in Rhode Island. Operating income for each store in 2014 is as follows:

The equipment has a zero disposal value. In a senior management meeting, Maria Lopez, the management accountant at Sanchez Corporation, makes the following comment, “Sanchez can increase its proStability by closing down the Rhode Island store or by adding another store like it.”

1. By closing down the Rhode Island store, Sanchez can reduce overall corporate overhead costs by $44,000. Calculate Sanchez’s operating income if it closes the Rhode Island store. Is Maria Lopez’s statement about the effect of closing the Rhode Island store correct? Explain.

2. Calculate Sanchez’s operating income if it keeps the Rhode Island store open and opens another store with revenues and costs identical to the Rhode Island store (including a cost of $22,000 to acquire equipment with a one year useful life and zero disposal value). Opening this store will increase corporate overhead costs by $4,000. Is Maria Lopez’s statement about the effect of adding another store like the Rhode Island store correct? Explain.

closing down divisions aristide corporation has four operating 269390

Closing down divisions. Aristide corporation has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2009, the company reported total income from operations of $61,000 and the following results for each division:



Further analysis of costs reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division

Cost of goods sold 90% 80% 90%

95%

Selling, general, and administrative expenses 60% 60% 70%

80%

Closing down any division would result in savings of 60% of the fixed costs of that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (A and D) and is considering shutting them down.

1. Calculate the contribution margin for the two unprofitable divisions (A and D).

2. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should the top management of Aristide shut down Division A? Division D?

3. What other factors should the top management of Aristide consider before making adecision?

contribution approach relevant costs air frisco has leased 269393

Contribution approach, relevant costs. Air Frisco has leased a single jet aircraft that it operates between San Francisco and the Fijian Islands. Only tourist class seats are available on its planes. An analyst has collected the following information:



Assume that fuel costs are unaffected by the actual number of passengers on a flight.

1. Calculate the total contribution margin from passengers that Air Frisco earns on each one way flight between San Francisco and Fiji.

2. The Market Research Department of Air Frisco indicates that lowering the average one way fare to $480 will increase the average number of passengers per flight to 212. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should Air Frisco lower its fare? Show your calculations.

3. Travel International, a tour operator, approaches Air Frisco with the possibility of chartering its air craft. The terms of charter are as follows:

(a) For each one way flight, Travel International will pay Air Frisco $74,500 to charter the plane and to use its flight crew and ground service staff;

(b) Travel International will pay for fuel costs; and

(c) Travel International will pay for all food costs. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should Air Frisco accept Travel International’s offer? Show your calculations. What other factors should Air Frisco consider in deciding whether to charter its plane to TravelInternational?

dropping a product line selling more units the northern 269412

Dropping a product line, selling more units. The Northern Division of Grossman Corporation makes and sells tables and beds. The following estimated revenue and cost information from the division’s activity based costing system is available for 2008.



Additional information includes:

a. On January 1, 2008, the equipment has a book value of $100,000 and zero disposal value. Any equipment not used will remain idle.

b. Fixed marketing and distribution costs of a product line can be avoided if the line is discontinued.

c. Fixed general administration costs of the division and corporate office costs will not change if sales of individual product lines are increased or decreased or if product lines are added or dropped.

1. On the basis of financial considerations alone, should the Northern Division discontinue the tables product line, assuming the released facilities remain idle? Show your calculations.

2. What would be the effect on Northern Division’s operating income if it were to sell 4,000 more tables? Assume that to do so the division would have to acquire additional equipment costing $42,000 with a one year useful life and zero terminal disposal value. Assume further that the fixed marketing and distribution costs would not change but that the number of shipments would double Show your calculations.

3. Given the Northern Division’s expected operating loss of$1 10,000, should Grossman Corporation shut it down? Assume that shutting down the Northern Division will have no effect on corporate office costs but will lead to savings of all general administration costs of the division. Show your calculations.

4. Suppose Grossman Corporation has the opportunity to open another division, the Southern Division whose revenues and costs are expected to be identical to the Northern Division’s revenues and costs (including a cost of $100,000 to acquire equipment with a one year useful life and zero terminal disposal value). Opening the new division will have no effect on corporate office costs. Should Grossman open the Southern Division? Show yourcalculations.

equipment upgrade versus replacement a spero adapted 269416

Equipment upgrade versus replacement (A. Spero, adapted) The TechMech Company produces sells 6,000 modular computer desks per year at a selling price of $500 each. Its current production equipment, purchased for $1,500,000 and with a five year useful life, is only two years old. It has a terminal disposal value of $0 and is depreciated on a straight line basis. The equipment has a current disposal price of $600,000. However, the emergence of a new molding technology has led TechMech to consider either upgrading or replacing the production equipment. The following table presents data for the two alternatives:



All equipment costs will continue to be depreciated on a straight line basis. For simplicity, ignore income taxes and the time value of money.

1. Should TechMech upgrade its production line or replace it? Show your calculations.

2. Now suppose the one time equipment cost to replace the production equipment is somewhat negotiable. All other data are as given previously. What is the maximum one time equipment cost that TechMech would be willing to pay to replace the old equipment rather than upgrade it?

3. Assume that the capital expenditures to replace and upgrade the production equipment are as given in the original exercise, but that the production and sales quantity is not known. For what production and sales quantity would TechMech (i) upgrade the equipment or (ii) replace the equipment?

4. Assume that all data are as given in the original exercise. Dan Doria is TechMech’s manager, and his bonus is based on operating income. Because he is likely to relocate after about a year, his current bonus is his primary concern. Which alternative would Doria choose?Explain.

for the ages inc produces solid oak umbrella stands each stand 269427

For The Ages Inc. produces solid oak umbrella stands. Each stand is handmade and hand finished using the finest materials available. The firm has been operating at capacity (2,000 stands per year) for the past three years. Based on this capacity of operations, the firm’s costs per stand are as follows:

Material …………………..$ 50

Direct labor ……………… 40

Variable overhead ……….. 10

Fixed overhead ………….. 30

Total cost …………………$130

All selling and administrative expenses incurred by the firm are fixed. The average selling price of stands is $230. Recently, a large retailer approached Bill Wood, the president of For the Ages, about supplying three special stands to give as gifts to CEOs of key suppliers. Wood estimates that the following per unit costs would be incurred to make the three stands:

Material ……………………….$250

Direct labor …………………… 350

Variable overhead ……………. 90

Total direct costs ………………$690

To accept the special order, the firm would have to sacrifice production of 20 regular units.

a. Identify all relevant costs that Wood should consider in deciding whether to accept the special order.

b. Assume the retailer offers to pay For The Ages a total of $3,800 for the three stands.

How would accepting this offer affect For The Ages’ pre tax income?

in november 2005 microsoft introduced its highly anticipated ne 269441

In November 2005, Microsoft introduced its highly anticipated new video game player, the Xbox 360.

In early July 2007, Microsoft announced it was extending the warranty on its Xbox 360 to three years for a certain type of malfunction indicated by three flashing red lights on the game console. The warranty extension would apply to previously sold units; however, the warranty for any other type of failure would not be extended beyond the original one year warranty term. In making this announcement, Microsoft indicated it would take a charge of $1.05 1.15 billion in the quarter ending June 30, 2007, for the costs of the warranty extension.

a. What relevant costs were likely considered by Microsoft management in reaching the decision to extend the warranty on the Xbox 360 and, in so doing, incur in excess of $1 billion of additional costs?

b. Conduct research to determine how Microsoft’s stock price was affected by the announcement of the warranty extension and its associated costs on July 6, 2007.

Explain why the stock price reacted as it did.

c. Assume that one of the rationalizations for Microsoft to extend the warranty on the Xbox 360 was to manage sales mix. How could the extension of the Xbox warranty affect the sales mix of Microsoft’s entertainment and devices division?

d. Comment on whether Microsoft was ethically obligated to extend the warranty on the Xbox 360 to three years.

inventory decision opportunity costs lawnox a manufacturer of 269442

Inventory decision, opportunity costs. Lawnox, a manufacturer of lawn mowers, predicts that it will purchase 240,000 spark plugs next year. Lawnox estimates that 20,000 spark plugs will be required each month. A supplier quotes a price of $9 per spark plug. The supplier also offers a special discount option: If all 240,000 spark plugs are purchased at the start of the year, a discount of 4% off the $9 price will be given. Lawnox can invest its cash at 10% per year. It costs Lawnox $200 to place each purchase order.

1. What is the opportunity cost of interest forgone from purchasing all 240,000 units at the start of the year instead of in 12 monthly purchases of 20,000 units per order?

2. Would this opportunity cost be recorded in the accounting system? Why?

3. Should Lawnox purchase 240,000 units at the start of the year or 20,000 units each month? Show your calculations.

kantrovitz company is a manufacturer of industrial components o 269444

Kantrovitz Company is a manufacturer of industrial components. One of its products that is used as a subcomponent in appliance manufacturing is AP110. This product has the following information per unit:

Selling price ……………………………….$150

Costs:

Direct material ……………………………. $20

Direct labor ………………………………. 15

Variable manufacturing overhead ……….. 12

Fixed manufacturing overhead ………….. 30

Shipping and handling …………………… 3

Fixed selling and administrative …………. 10

Total per unit cost …………………………….. $90

a. Kantrovitz has received a special, one time order for 1,000 AP110 parts. Assuming Kantrovitz has excess capacity, what is the minimum price that is acceptable for beginning negotiations on this order?

b. Kantrovitz has 5,000 units of AP110 in inventory that have some defects. The units cannot be sold through regular channels without a significant price reduction. What per unit cost figure is relevant for setting a minimum selling price on these units?

c. During the next year, sales of AP110 are expected to be 10,000 units. All of the costs will remain the same except that fixed manufacturing overhead will increase by 20 percent and direct material will increase by 10 percent. The selling price per unit for next year will be $160. Based on these data, what will be the total contribution margin generated by part AP110?

d. Refer to (a). Kantrovitz has received a special, one time order for 1,000 AP110 parts. Assume that Kantrovitz is operating at full capacity, and that the contribution of the output would be displaced by the one time special order. Using the original data, compute the minimum acceptable selling price for this order.

recognizing cash flows for capital investment projects ludmilla 269141

Recognizing cash flows for capital investment projects. Ludmilla Quagg owns a fitness center and is thinking of replacing the old Fit 0 Matic machine with a brand new Flab Buster 3000. The old Fit O Matic has a historical cost of $50,000 and accumulated depreciation of $46,000, but has a trade in value of $5,000. It currently costs $1,200 per month in utilities and another $10,000 a year in maintenance to run the Fit O Matic. Ludmilla feels that the Fit O Matic can be used for another 10 years, after which it would have no salvage value.

The Flab Buster 3000 would reduce the utilities costs by30% and cut the maintenance cost in half. The Flab Buster 3000 costs $98,000, has a ten year life, and an expected disposal value of $10,000 at the end of its useful life.

Ludmilla charges customers $10 per hour to use the fitness center. Replacing the fitness machine will not affect the price of service or the number of customers she can serve.

ludmilla also looked at replacing the Fit 0 Matic with a Walk N Pull Series 3, which costs $78,000. However, she prefers the Flab Buster 3000.

1. Ludmilla wants to evaluate the Flab Buster 3000 project using capital budgeting techniques, but does not know how to begin. To help her, read through the problem and separate the cash flows into four groups: (1) net initial investment cash flows, (2) cash flow savings from operations, (3) cash flows from terminal disposal of investment, and (4) cash flows not relevant to the capital budgeting problem.

2. Assuming a tax rate of 40%, a required rate of return of 8%, and straight line depreciation over remaining useful life of machines, should Ludmilla buy the Flab Buster 3000?

sales mix new and upgrade customers zapo 1 2 3 is a 269143

Sales mix, new and upgrade customers. Zapo 1 2 3 is a top selling electronic spreadsheet product. Zapo is about to release version 5.0. It divides its customers into two groups: new customers and upgrade customers (those who previously purchased Zapo 1 2 3, 4.0 or earlier versions). Although the same physical product is provided to each customer group, sizable differences exist in selling prices and variable marketing costs:

?

The fixed costs of Zapo 1 2 3 5.0 are $14,000,000. The planned sales mix in units is 60% new customers and 40% upgrade customers.

1. What is the Zapo 1 2 3 5.0 breakeven point in units, assuming that the planned 60%/40% sales mix is attained?

2. If the sales mix is attained, what is the operating income when 200,000 units are sold?

3. Show how the breakeven point in units changes with the following customer mixes:

a. New 50%/Upgrade 50%

b. New 90%/Upgrade 10%

c. Comment on theresults.

sales mix three products the ronowski company has three produc 269144

Sales mix, three products. The Ronowski Company has three product lines of belts—A, B, and C— with contribution margins of $3, $2, and $1, respectively. The president foresees sales of 200,000 units in the coming period, consisting of 20,000 units of A, 100,000 units of B, and 80,000 units of C. The company’s fixed costs for the period are $255,000.

1. What is the company’s breakeven point in units, assuming that the given sales mix is maintained?

2. If the sales mix is maintained, what is the total contribution margin when 200,000 units are sold? What is the operating income?

3. What would operating income be if 20,000 units of A, 80,000 units of B, and 100,000 units of C were sold? What is the new breakeven point in units if these relationships persist in the next period?

sales mix two products the goldman company retails two product 269147

Sales mix, two products. The Goldman Company retails two products: a standard and a deluxe version of a luggage carrier. The budgeted income statement for next period is as follows:

?

1. Compute the breakeven point in units assuming that the planned sales mix is attained.

2. Compute the breakeven point in units (a) if only standard carriers are sold and (b) if only deluxe carriers are sold.

3. Suppose 200,000 units are sold but only 20,000 of them are deluxe. Compute the operating income. Compute the breakeven point in units. Compare your answer with the answer to requirement 1. What the major lesson of thisproblem?

selling a plant income taxes cma adapted 269154

Selling a plant, income taxes (CMA, adapted) The Crossroad Company is an international clothing manufacturer. Its Santa Monica plant will become idle on December 31, 2011. Peter Laney, the corporate controller, has been asked to look at three options regarding the plant.

Option 1: The plant, which has been fully depreciated for tax purposes, can be sold immediately for $450,000.

Option 2: The plant can be leased to the Austin Corporation, one of Crossroad’s suppliers, for four years.

Under the lease terms, Austin would pay Crossroad $110,000 rent per year (payable at year end) and would grant Crossroad a $20,000 annual discount off the normal price of fabric purchased by Crossroad. (Assume that the discount is received at year end for each of the four years.) Austin would bear all of the plant’s ownership costs. Crossroad expects to sell this plant for $75,000 at the end of the four year lease.

Option 3: The plant could be used for four years to make souvenir jackets for the Olympics. Fixed overhead costs (a cash outflow) before any equipment upgrades are estimated to be $10,000 annually for the four year period. The jackets are expected to sell for $55 each. Variable cost per unit is expected to be $43. The following production and sales of jackets are expected: 2012, 9,000 units; 2013, 13,000 units; 2014, 15,000 units; 2015, 5,000 units. In order to manufacture the jackets, some of the plant equipment would need to be upgraded at an immediate cost of $80,000. The equipment would be depreciated using the straight line depreciation method and zero terminal disposal value over the four years it would be in use. Because of the equipment upgrades, Crossroad could sell the plant for $135,000 at the end of four years. No change in working capital would be required. Crossroad treats all cash flows as if they occur at the end of the year, and it uses an after tax required rate of return of 10%. Crossroad is subject to a 35% tax rate on all income, including capital gains.

Required

1. Calculate net present value of each of the options and determine which option Crossroad should select using the NPV criterion.

2. What non financial factors should Crossroad consider before making its choice?

sensitivity of eoq to changes in relevant ordering 269155

Sensitivity of EOQ to changes in relevant ordering and carrying costs, cost of prediction error. Alpha Company’s annual demand for its only product, XT 590, is 10,000 units. Alpha is currently analyzing possible combinations of relevant carrying cost per unit per year and relevant ordering cost per purchase order, depending on the company’s choice of supplier and average levels of inventory. This table presents three possible combinations of carrying and ordering costs.

Relevant Carrying Cost per Unit per Year Relevant Ordering Cost per Purchase Order

$10…………………………………………………………….$400

$20…………………………………………………………….$200

$40…………………………………………………………….$100

Required

1. For each of the relevant ordering and carrying cost alternatives, determine (a) EOQ and (b) annual relevant total costs.

2. How does your answer to requirement 1 give insight into the impact of changes in relevant ordering and carrying costs on EOQ and annual relevant total costs? Explain briefly.

3. Suppose the relevant carrying cost per unit per year was $20 and the relevant ordering cost per purchase order was $200. Suppose further that Alpha calculates EOQ after incorrectly estimating relevant carrying cost per unit per year to be $10 and relevant ordering cost per purchase order to be $400. Calculate the actual annual relevant total costs of Alpha’s EOQ decision. Compare this cost to the annual relevant total costs that Alpha would have incurred if it had correctly estimated the relevant carrying cost per unit per year of $20 and the relevant ordering cost per purchase order of $200 that you have already calculated in requirement 1. Calculate and comment on the cost of the prediction error.

service industry job costing two direct and two indirect cost 269158

Service industry, job costing, two direct and two indirect cost categories, law firm. Keating has just completed a review of its job costing system. This review included a detailed analysis of how past jobs used the firm’s resources and interviews with personnel about what factors drive the level of indirect costs. Management concluded that a system with two direct cost categories (professional partner labor and professional associate labor) and two indirect cost categories (general support and secretarial support) would yield more accurate job costs. Budgeted information for 2008 related to the two direct cost categories is as follows:



Budgeted information for 2008 relating to the two indirect cost categories is



1. Compute the 2008 budgeted direct cost rates for (a) professional partners and (b) professional associates.

2. Compute the 2008 budgeted indirect cost rates for (a) general support and (b) secretarial support.

3. Compute the budgeted costs for the Richardson and Punch jobs, given the following information:



4. Comment on the results in requirement 3. Why are the job costs different from those computed in Problem4 32?

service industry time period used to compute indirect cost rate 269159

Service industry, time period used to compute indirect cost rates. Printers, Inc. produces annual reports and marketing materials for large companies. There are three categories of costs in its normal job costing system: direct materials, direct labor, and overhead (both variable and fixed), allocated on the basis of direct labor costs. Jill Liu, the controller, is concerned that an increasing number of clients are waiting until the last minute to send in their final orders, causing congestion and an increase in the variable manufacturing overhead rate because of higher overtime and facility and machine maintenance. This spike is during the ?ocrazy?? months of January, February, and March, when many companies are rushing to get out their annual reports and marketing materials. Liu obtains the following budgeted data for 2008:

?

11f you want to use Excel to solve this exercise, go to the Excel Lab at www.prenhall.com/horngren/oost13e and download the template for Exercise 4 22.

1. Consider Job 332, an order for 100,000 sales catalogs for the local mall. Actual direct material costs for this job are $10,000 and actual labor costs are $6,000. Calculate the cost of Job 332 (a) if it is completed in January—March 2008 and if the budgeted overhead rate for that quarter is used to allocate overhead costs, (b) if it is done in July—September 2008 and if the budgeted overhead rate for that quarter is used to allocate overhead costs, and (c) if the average budgeted overhead rate for the year 2008 is used to allocate overhead costs.

2. To cost each job, Printers, Inc. currently uses the budgeted variable overhead rate for the quarter in which the job is completed and a budgeted fixed overhead rate based on budgeted annual fixed overhead costs and budgeted annual direct labor costs. Calculate the cost of Job 332 using this method if it is done in (a) January—March 2008 and (b) July—September 2008.

3. Printers, Inc., prices each job at 125% of costs. Which method of costing jobs for pricing purposes would you recommend? Why? Explainbriefly.

standard costing method ozumo s gardening makes several 269172

Standard costing method. Ozumo’s Gardening makes several different kinds of mulch. Its busy period is in the summer months. In August, the controller suddenly quit due to a stress related disorder He took with him the standard costing results for RoseBark, Ozumo’s highest quality mulch. The controller had already completed the assignment of costs to finished goods and work in process, but Ozumo does not know standard costs or the completion levels of inventory. The following information is available:



1. Completion percentages of beginning work in process with respect to the two inputs

2. Completion percentages of ending work in process with respect to the two inputs

3. Standard costs per unit for the two inputs

4. Cost of beginning work in processinventory

supply chain effects on total relevant inventory cost cow 269177

Supply chain effects on total relevant inventory cost. Cow Spot Computer Co. outsources the production of motherboards for its computers. It has narrowed down its choice of suppliers to two companies: Maji and Induk. Maji is an older company with a good reputation, while Induk is a newer company with cheaper prices. Given the difference in reputation, 5% of the motherboards will be inspected if they are purchased from Maji, but 25% of the motherboards will be inspected if they are purchased from Induk. The following data refers to costs associated with Maji and Induk.



1. What is the relevant cost of purchasing from Maji and Induk?

2. What factors other than cost should Cow Spotconsider?

tasty beverages began business in 2010 selling bottles of a 269179

Tasty Beverages began business in 2010 selling bottles of a thirst quenching drink. Production for the first year was 104,000 bottles, and sales were 98,000 bottles. The selling price per bottle was $3.10. Costs incurred during the year were as follows:

Ingredients used …………………………………………..$56,000

Direct labor ……………………………………………. 26,000

Variable overhead ……………………………………… 48,000

Fixed overhead ………………………………………… 5,200

Variable selling expenses ……………………………….. 10,000

Fixed selling and administrative expenses ………………. 28,000

Total actual cost ……………………………………… $173,200

For 2010:

a. What was the production cost per bottle under variable costing?

b. What was variable cost of goods sold?

c. What was the contribution margin per bottle?

d. What was the contribution margin ratio?

ted tyner owns sixth man hotel a luxury hotel with 269181

Ted Tyner owns Sixth Man Hotel, a luxury hotel with 60 two bedroom suites for coaches and their players. Capacity is 10 coaches and 50 players. Each suite is equipped with extra long king sized beds, super tall and extended shower heads, extra tall bathroom vanities, a laptop, and a printer. Each suite has a Pacific Ocean view. Hotel services include airport limousine pickup and drop off, a daily fruit basket, champagne on the day of arrival, and a Hummer for transportation. Coaches and players are interviewed about their dietary restrictions and room service requirements before arrival. The hotel’s original cost was $1,920,000, and depreciation is $160,000 per year. Other hotel operating costs include:

Labor ……………….…..$320,000 per year plus $5 per suite per day

Utilities …………………$158,000 per year plus $1 per suite per day

Miscellaneous …………..$100,000 per year plus $6 per suite per day

In addition to these costs, costs are also incurred on food and beverage for each guest.

These costs are strictly variable and (on average) are $40 per day for coaches and $15 per day for players.

a. Assuming that the hotel is able to maintain an average annual occupancy of 80 percent in both coach and player suites (based on a 360 day year), determine the minimum daily charge that must be assessed per suite per day to generate $240,000 of income before tax.

b. Assume that the per day price Tyner charges is $240 for coaches and $200 for players. If the sales mix is 12:48 (12 coach days of occupancy for every 48 player days of occupancy), compute the following:

1. The break even point in total occupancy days.

2. Total occupancy days required to generate $400,000 of income before tax.

3. Total occupancy days to generate $400,000 of after tax income. Tyner’s personal tax rate is 35 percent.

c. Tyner is considering adding a massage service for guests to complement current hotel services. He has estimated that the cost of providing such a service would largely be fixed because all necessary facilities already exist. He would, however, need to hire five certified masseurs at a cost of $500,000 per year. If Tyner decides to add this service, how much would he need to increase his daily charges (assume equal dollar increases to coach and player room fees) to maintain the break even point computed in (b)?

would the proposal create a second class of stock and terminate bushong s election e 269186

Bushong, Inc., a calendar year S corporation has a ” tax cash flow” provision in its shareholder agreement. Bushong must make annual distributions by the December 31 following a tax year in which there is an income pass through. Each distribution must be in an amount sufficient to enable shareholders to pay their state and Federal resulting income taxes on the pass through.

The agreement also provide that if an audit adjustment is made to items reported on the schedule K 1, Bushong can make a discretionary distribution to handle the increased taxes resulting from the adjustment.

The shareholders want to change the agreement. Under the proposal, if an audit adjustment is made and Bushong makes a discretionary payment, the payment would be in accordance with the shareholders’ ownership shares during the tax year of the adjustment , rather than as of the distribution date.

Would the proposal create a second class of stock and terminate Bushong’s election? Explain.

Document Preview:

Bushong, Inc., a calendar year S corporation has a ” tax cash flow” provision in its shareholder agreement. Bushong must make annual distributions by the December 31 following a tax year in which there is an income pass through. Each distribution must be in an amount sufficient to enable shareholders to pay their state and Federal resulting income taxes on the pass through. The agreement also provide that if an audit adjustment is made to items reported on the schedule K 1, Bushong can make a discretionary distribution to handle the increased taxes resulting from the adjustment. The shareholders want to change the agreement. Under the proposal, if an audit adjustment is made and Bushong makes a discretionary payment, the payment would be in accordance with the shareholders’ ownership shares during the tax year of the adjustment , rather than as of the distribution date. Would the proposal create a second class of stock and terminate Bushong’s election? Explain.

Attachments:

the brown shoe company produces its famous shoe the divine 269188

The Brown Shoe Company produces its famous shoe, the Divine Loafer that sells for $60 per pair. Operating income for 2011 is as follows:

Sales revenue ($60 per pair) $300,000

Variable cost ($25 per pair) 125,000

Contribution margin 175,000

Fixed cost 100,000

Operating income $ 75,000

Brown Shoe Company would like to increase its profitability over the next year by at least 25%. To do so, the company is considering the following options:

Required

1. Replace a portion of its variable labor with an automated machining process. This would result in a 20% decrease in variable cost per unit, but a 15% increase in fixed costs. Sales would remain the same.

2. Spend $30,000 on a new advertising campaign, which would increase sales by 20%.

3. Increase both selling price by $10 per unit and variable costs by $7 per unit by using a higher quality leather material in the production of its shoes. The higher priced shoe would cause demand to drop by approximately 10%.

4. Add a second manufacturing facility which would double Brown’s fixed costs, but would increase sales by 60%.

Evaluate each of the alternatives considered by Brown Shoes. Do any of the options meet or exceed Brown’s targeted increase in income of 25%? What should Brown do?

the museum of america is preparing for its annual appreciation 269210

The Museum of America is preparing for its annual appreciation dinner for contributing members. Last year, 525 members attended the dinner. Tickets for the dinner were $24 per attendee. The profit report for last year’s dinner follows.

Ticket sales $12,600

Cost of dinner 15,300

Gross margin (2,700)

Invitations and paperwork 2,500

Profit (loss) $(5,200)

This year the dinner committee does not want to lose money on the dinner. To help achieve its goal, the committee analyzed last year’s costs. Of the $15,300 cost of the dinner, $9,000 were fixed costs and $6,300 were variable costs. Of the $2,500 cost of invitations and paperwork, $1,975 were fixed and $525 were variable.

Required

1. Prepare last year’s profit report using the contribution margin format.

2. The committee is considering expanding this year’s dinner invitation list to include volunteer members (in addition to contributing members). If the committee expands the dinner invitation list, it expects attendance to double. Calculate the effect this will have on the profitability of the dinner assuming fixed costs will be the same as last year.

the zwatch company manufactures trendy high quality moderately 269222

The Zwatch Company manufactures trendy, high quality moderately priced watches. As Zwatch’s senior financial analyst, you are asked to recommend a method of inventory costing. The CEO will use your recommendation to prepare Zwatch’s 2009 income statement. The following data are for the year ended December 31, 2009:

?

Assume standard costs per unit are the same for units in beginning inventory and units produced during the year. Also, assume no price, spending, or efficiency variances. Any production volume variance is written off to cost of goods sold in the month in which it occurs.

1. Prepare income statements under variable and absorption costing for the year ended December31, 2009.

2. What is Zwatch’s operating income as percentage of revenues under each costing method?

3. Explain the difference in operating income between the two methods.

4. Which costing method would you recommend to the CEO?Why?

time period used to compute indirect cost rates splash manufact 269227

Time period used to compute indirect cost rates. Splash Manufacturing produces outdoor wading and slide pools. The company uses a normal costing system and allocates manufacturing overhead on the basis of direct manufacturing labor hours. Most of the company’s production and sales occur in the first and second quarters of the year. The company is in danger of losing one of its larger customers, Sotco Wholesale, due to large fluctuations in price. The owner of Splash has requested an analysis of the manufacturing cost per unit in the second and third quarters. You have been provided the following budgeted information for the coming year:

Quarter

1 2 3 4

Pools manufactured and sold 700 500 150 150

It takes 0.5 direct manufacturing labor hour to make each pool. The actual direct material cost is $7.50 per pool. The actual direct manufacturing labor rate is $16 per hour. The budgeted variable manufacturing overhead rate is $12 per direct manufacturing labor hour. Budgeted fixed manufacturing overhead costs are $10,500 each quarter.

Required

1. Calculate the total manufacturing cost per unit for the second and third quarter assuming the company allocates manufacturing overhead costs based on the budgeted manufacturing overhead rate determined for each quarter.

2. Calculate the total manufacturing cost per unit for the second and third quarter assuming the company allocates manufacturing overhead costs based on an annual budgeted manufacturing overhead rate.

3. Splash Manufacturing prices its pools at manufacturing cost plus 30%. Why might Sotco Wholesale be seeing large fluctuations in the prices of pools? Which of the methods described in requirements 1 and 2 would you recommend Splash use? Explain.

transferred in costs weighted average and fifo 269236

Transferred in costs, weighted average and FIFO methods. Frito Lay, Inc., manufactures convenience foods, including potato chips and corn chips. Production of corn chips occurs in four departments: cleaning, mixing, cooking, and drying and packaging. Consider the drying and packaging department, where direct materials (packaging) are added at the end of the process. Conversion costs are added evenly during the process. The accounting records of a Frito Lay plant provide the following information for corn chips in its drying and packaging department during a weekly period (week 37):

?

Required

1. Using the weighted average method, summarize the total drying and packaging department costs for week 37, and assign total costs to units completed (and transferred out) and to units in ending work in process.

2. Assume that the FIFO method is used for the drying and packaging department. Under FIFO, the transferred in costs for work in process beginning inventory in week 37 are $28,920 (instead of $26,750 under the weighted average method), and the transferred in costs during week 37 from the cooking department are $93,660 (instead of $91,510 under the weighted average method). All other data are unchanged. Summarize the total drying and packaging department costs for week 37, and assign total costs to units completed and transferred out and to units in ending work in process using the FIFOmethod.

unused capacity activity based costing activity based manageme 269249

Unused capacity, activity based costing, activity based management. Nivag’s Netballs is a manufacturer of high quality basketballs and volleyballs. Setup costs are driven by the number of batches. Equipment and maintenance costs increase with the number of machine hours, and lease rent is paid per square foot. Capacity of the facility is 12,000squarefeetand Nivag is using only7O% of this capacity. Nivag records the cost of unused capacity as a separate line item, and not as a product cost. Below is the budgeted information for Nivag:



Other information:



1. Calculate the cost per unit of cost driver for each indirect cost pool.

2. What is the cost of unused capacity?

3. What is the total cost and the cost per unit of resources used to produce (a) basketballs and (b) volleyballs?

4. What factors should Nivag consider if it has the opportunity to manufacture a new line of footballs?

variable and absorption costing and breakeven points mega air i 269254

Variable and absorption costing and breakeven points Mega Air, Inc., manufactures a specialized snowboard made for the advanced snowboarder. Mega Air began 2011 with an inventory of 240 snowboards. During the year, it produced 900 boards and sold 995 for $750 each. Fixed production costs were $280,000 and variable production costs were $335 per unit. Fixed advertising, marketing, and other general and administrative expenses were $112,000 and variable shipping costs were $15 per board. Assume that the cost of each unit in beginning inventory is equal to 2011 inventory cost.

Required

1. Prepare an income statement assuming Mega Air uses variable costing.

2. Prepare an income statement assuming Mega Air uses absorption costing. Mega Air uses a denominator level of 1,000 units. Production volume variances are written off to cost of goods sold.

3. Compute the breakeven point in units sold assuming Mega Air uses the following:

a. Variable costing

b. Absorption costing (Production = 900 boards)

4. Provide proof of your preceding breakeven calculations.

5. Assume that $20,000 of fixed administrative costs were reclassified as fixed production costs. Would this change affect breakeven point using variable costing? What if absorption costing were used? Explain.

6. The company that supplies Mega Air with its specialized impact resistant material has announced a price increase of $25 for each board. What effect would this have on the breakeven points previously calculated?

net present value internal rate of return sensitivity analysis 269066

Net present value, Internal Rate of Return, Sensitivity Analysis Sally wants to purchase a Burgers N Fries franchise. She can buy one for $500,000. Burgers N Fries headquarters provides the following information:

Estimated annual cash revenues$280,000

Typical annual cash operating expenses $165,000

Sally will also have to pay Burgers N Fries a franchise fee of 10% of her revenues each year. Sally wants to earn at least 10% on the investment because she has to borrow the $500,000 at a cost of 6%. Use a 10 year window, and ignore taxes.

Required

1. Find the NPV and IRR of Sally’s investment.

2. Sally is nervous about the revenue estimate provided by Burgers N Fries headquarters. Calculate the NPV and IRR under alternative annual revenue estimates of $260,000 and $240,000.

3. Sally estimates that if her revenues are lower, her costs will be lower as well. For each revised level of revenue used in requirement 2, recalculate NPV and IRR with a proportional decrease in annual operating expenses.

4. Suppose Sally also negotiates a lower franchise and has to pay Burgers N Fries only 8% of annual revenues. Redo the calculations in requirement 3.

5. Discuss how the sensitivity analysis will affect Sally’s decision to buy the franchise.

new equipment purchase income taxes anna s bakery plans to purc 269067

New equipment purchase, income taxes Anna’s Bakery plans to purchase a new oven for its store. The oven has an estimated useful life of 4 years. The estimated pretax cash flows for the oven are as shown in the table that follows, with no anticipated change in working capital. Anna’s Bakery has a 12% after tax required rate of return and a 40% income tax rate. Assume depreciation is calculated on a straight line basis for tax purposes using the initial oven investment and estimated terminal disposal value of the oven. Assume all cash flows occur at year end except for initial investment amounts.

1. Calculate

(a) Net present value,

(b) Payback period, and

(c)Internal rate of return.

2. Compare and contrast the capital budgeting methods in requirement1.

niobrara pesticide company s new president has learned that for 269070

Niobrara Pesticide Company’s new president has learned that, for the past four years, the company has been dumping its industrial waste into the local river and falsifying reports to authorities about the levels of suspected carcinogens in that waste. The plant manager says that there is no proof that the waste causes cancer and that only a few fishing villages are within 100 miles downriver. If the company must treat the substance to neutralize its potentially injurious effects and then transport it to a legal dump site, the company’s variable and fixed costs would rise to a level that might make the firm uncompetitive. If the company loses its competitive advantage, 10,000 local employees could become unemployed and the town’s economy could collapse.

a. What specific variable and fixed costs can you identify that would increase (or decrease) if the waste were treated rather than dumped? How would these costs affect product contribution margin?

b. What ethical conflicts does the president face?

c. What rationalizations can you detect that plant employees have devised?

d. What options and suggestions can you offer the president?

normal costing overhead allocation working backward m rajan 269072

Normal costing, overhead allocation, working backward. (M. Rajan, adapted) Gibson Manufacturing uses normal costing for its job costing system, which has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one indirect cost category (manufacturing overhead). The following information is obtained for 2009:

Total manufacturing costs, $8,000,000

Manufacturing overhead allocated, $3,600,000 (allocated at a rate of 200% of direct manufacturing labor costs)

Work in process inventory on January 1, 2009, $320,000

Cost of finished goods manufactured, $7,920,000

1. Use information in the first two bullet points to calculate (a) direct manufacturing labor costs in 2009 and (b) cost of direct materials used in 2009.

2. Calculate the ending work in process inventory on December 31, 2009.

npv and aarr goal congruence issues jack garrett a manager of 269074

NPV and AARR, goal congruence issues Jack Garrett, a manager of the plate division for the Marble Top Manufacturing Company, has the opportunity to expand the division by investing in additional machinery costing $420,000. He would depreciate the equipment using the straight line method, and expects it to have no residual value. It has a useful life of seven years. The firm mandates a required after tax rate of return of 14% on investments. Jack estimates annual net cash inflows for this investment of $125,000 before taxes, and an investment in working capital of $2,500. Tax rate is 35%.

Required

1. Calculate the net present value of this investment.

2. Calculate the accrual accounting rate of return on initial investment for this project.

3. Should Jack accept the project? Will Jack accept the project if his bonus depends on achieving an accrual accounting rate of return of 14%? How can this conflict be resolved?

npv and inflation cost less foods is considering replacing all 269077

NPV and inflation. Cost Less Foods is considering replacing all of its old cash registers with new ones. The old registers are fully depreciated and have no disposal value. The new registers cost$600,000 (in total). Because the new registers are more efficient than the old registers, Cost Less will have annual incremental cash savings from using the new registers in the amount of $140,000 per year. The registers have a six year useful life, and are depreciated using the straight line method with no disposal value. Cost Less requires a 10% real rate of return. Ignore taxes.

1. Given the information above, what is the net present value of the project?

2. Assume the $140,000 cost savings is in current real dollars, and the inflation rate is 5.5%. Find the NPV of the project assuming inflation.

3. Should Cost Less buy the new cash registers?

npv irr and sensitivity analysis crumbly cookie company is con 269083

NPV, IRR, and sensitivity analysis Crumbly Cookie Company is considering expanding by buying a new (additional) machine that costs $62,000, has zero terminal disposal value, and has a 10 year useful life. It expects the annual increase in cash revenues from the expansion to be $28,000 per year. It expects additional annual cash costs to be $18,000 per year. Its cost of capital is 8%. Ignore taxes.

1. Calculate the net present value and internal rate of return for this investment. Required

2. Assume the finance manager of Crumbly Cookie Company is not sure about the cash revenues and costs. The revenues could be anywhere from 10% higher to 10% lower than predicted. Assume cash costs are still $18,000 per year. What are NPV and IRR at the high and low points for revenue?

3. The finance manager thinks that costs will vary with revenues, and if the revenues are 10% higher, the costs will be 7% higher. If the revenues are 10% lower, the costs will be 10% lower. Recalculate the NPV and IRR at the high and low revenue points with this new cost information.

4. The finance manager has decided that the company should earn 2% more than the cost of capital on any project. Recalculate the original NPV in requirement 1 using the new discount rate and evaluate the investment opportunity.

5. Discuss how the changes in assumptions have affected the decision to expand.

npv relevant costs income taxes phish corporation is the large 269086

NPV, Relevant costs, Income taxes Phish Corporation is the largest manufacturer and distributor of novelty ice creams across the East Coast. The company’s products, because of their perishable nature, require careful packaging and transportation. Phish uses a special material called ICI that insulates the core of its boxes, thereby preserving the quality and freshness of the ice creams. Patrick Scott, the newly appointed COO, believed that the company could save money by closing the internal Packaging department and outsourcing the manufacture of boxes to an outside vendor. He requested a report outlining Phish Corporation’s current costs of manufacturing boxes from the company’s controller, Reesa Morris. After conducting some of his own research, he approached a firm that specialized in packaging, Containers Inc., and obtained a quote for the insulated boxes. Containers Inc. quoted a rate of $700,000 for 7,000 boxes annually. The contract would run for five years and if there was a greater demand for boxes the cost would increase proportionately. Patrick compared these numbers to those on the cost report prepared by Reesa. Her analysis of the packaging department’s annual costs is as follows:

Direct material (ICI) $ 80,000

Other direct material 120,000

Direct labor 220,000

Department manager’s salary 85,000

Depreciation of machinery 60,000

Department overhead 65,000

Rent 15,000

Allocation of general administrative overhead 70,000

After consulting with Reesa, Patrick gathers the following additional information:

i. The machinery used for production was purchased two years ago for $430,000 and was expected to last for seven years, with a terminal disposal value of $10,000. Its current salvage value is $280,000.

ii. Phish uses 20 tons of ICI each year. Three years ago, Phish purchased 100 tons of ICI for $400,000. ICI has since gone up in value and new purchases would cost $4,500 a ton. If Phish were to discontinue manufacture of boxes, it could dispose of its stock of ICI for a net amount of $3,800 per ton, after handling and transportation expenses.

iii. Phish has no inventory of other direct materials; it purchases them on an as needed basis.

iv. The rent charge represents an allocation based on the packaging department’s share of the building’s floor space. Phish is currently renting a secondary warehouse for $27,000; this space would no longer be needed if the contract is signed with Containers Inc.

v. If the manufacture of boxes is outsourced, the packaging department’s overhead costs would be avoided. The department manager would be moved to a similar position in another group that the company has been looking to fill with an external hire.

vi. Phish has a marginal tax rate of 40% and an after tax required rate of return of 10%.

Required

1. Sketch the cash inflows and outflows of the two alternatives over a five year time period.

2. Using the NPV criterion, which option should Phish Corporation select?

3. What other factors should Phish Corporation consider in choosing between the alternatives?

operating leverage color rugs is holding a two week carpet sale 269095

Operating leverage Color Rugs is holding a two week carpet sale at Jerry’s Club, a local warehouse store. Color Rugs plans to sell carpets for $500 each. The company will purchase the carpets from a local distributor for $350 each, with the privilege of returning any unsold units for a full refund. Jerry’s Club has offered Color Rugs two payment alternatives for the use of space.

Option 1: A fixed payment of $5,000 for the sale period

Option 2: 10% of total revenues earned during the sale period

Assume Color Rugs will incur no other costs.

1. Calculate the breakeven point in units for (a) option 1 and (b) option 2.

2. At what level of revenues will Color Rugs earn the same operating income under either option?

a. For what range of unit sales will Color Rugs prefer option 1?

b. For what range of unit sales will Color Rugs prefer option 2?

3. Calculate the degree of operating leverage at sales of 100 units for the two rental options.

4. Briefly explain and interpret your answer to requirement 4.

overview of general ledger relationships the blakely company is 269102

Overview of general ledger relationships. The Blakely Company is a small machine shop that uses normal costing in its job costing system. The total debits and credits in certain accounts one day before year end are as follows:



All materials purchased are direct materials. Note that ?ototal debits?? in the inventory accounts would include beginning inventory balances on January 1, 2008, if any.

The total debits and total credits above do not include the following:

a. The manufacturing labor costs for the December31 working day: direct manufacturing labor, $5,000, and indirect manufacturing labor, $1,000.

b. Miscellaneous manufacturing overhead incurred on December 31:$1,000.

Additional Information:

a. Manufacturing overhead has been allocated as a percentage of direct manufacturing labor costs through December 30.

b. Direct materials purchased during 2008 were $85,000.

c. No direct materials were returned to suppliers.

d. Direct manufacturing labor costs during 2008 totaled $150,000, not including the December31 working day described previously.

1. Use I accounts to compute the January 1, 2008 beginning balances for the Materials Control, Work in Process Control, and Finished Goods Control accounts.

2. Prepare all adjusting and closing journal entries for the preceding accounts. Assume that all under or overallocated manufacturing overhead is closed directly to Cost of Goods Sold.

3. Compute the ending inventory balances on December 31, 2008, after adjustments and closing, for Materials Control, Work in Process Control, and Finished Goods Controlaccounts.

payback and npv methods no income taxes cma adapted andrews 269104

Payback and NPV methods, no income taxes. (CMA, adapted) Andrews Construction is analyzing its capital expenditure proposals for the purchase of equipment in the coming year. The capital budget is limited to $6,000,000 for the year. Lori Bart, staff analyst at Andrews, is preparing an analysis of the three projects under consideration by Corey Andrews, the company’s owner.



1. Because the company’s cash is limited, Andrews thinks the payback method should be used to choose between the capital budgeting projects.

a. What are the benefits and limitations of using the payback method to choose between projects?

b. Calculate the payback period for each of the three projects. Ignore income taxes. Using the payback method, which projects should Andrews choose?

2. Bart thinks that projects should be selected based on their NPVs. Assume all cash flows occur at the end of the year except for initial investment amounts. Calculate the NPV for each project. Ignore income taxes.

3. Which projects, if any, would you recommend funding? Briefly explainwhy.

accounting help 410414

Journalize the following entries for Oglala Supplies: 1 Jan Oglala purchases $100,000 of merchandise from Loopy and Co., terms 1/10,net 30 3 Jan Oglala returns $10,000 to Loopy for full credit 4 Jan Oglala sells $40,000 of merchandise to Doody and Co., cost $24,000 terms 2/15, net 45 6 Jan Oglala pays Loopy amount due 10 Jan Oglala receives return of $8,000, cost $4800 of merchandise from Doody from Jan 4. 13 Jan Doody pays amount due transaction 15 Jan Oglala pays freight on Loopy purchase to Fed Ex, $400 16 Jan Oglala pays freight to Fed Ex on Doody sale, $800 Prepare an income statement, statement of owners equity and balance sheet for Green Day Co. as of 12 31 Sales 7,500,000.00 Salary Expense 450,000.00 Cash 700,000.00 Accts Receivable 500,000.00 Equipment 420,000.00 Accumulated Depreciation Equipment 60,000.00 Building 620,000.00 Mortgage Payable 360,000.00 Drawing 50,000.00 Advertising Expense 1,400,000.00 Rent Expense 350,000.00 Accumulated Depreciation Building 90,000.00 Accts Payable 200,000.00 Note Payable ? Capital 1/1 900,000.00 Cost of Mdse Sold 4,600,000.00 Prepaid Rent 80,000.00 Supplies 50,000.00 Land 200,000.00 Depreciation Expense 20,000.00 Supply Expense 100,000.00 Sales Returns, Allowance 37,500.00 Sales Discounts 75,000.00 Prepare closing entries for Happy Dooty Enterprises as of 12/31of the current year based on the following information from selected accounts from the adjusted trial balance. What is the net income and ending capital balance? Supplies 40,000 Prepaid Rent 7,000 Equipment 90,000 Capital 1/1 106,000 Drawing 4,000 Revenue 84,000 Wages Expense 32,000 Rent Expense 5,000 Depreciation Expense 8,000 Supply Expense 4,000 Insurance Expense 7,000 Cash 24,000 Accts Receivable 12,000 Accum Depreciation Equipment 16,000 Accts Payable 5,000 Wages Payable 4,000 Note Payable 18,000 The following information pertains to Jooners on 12/31/10 Sales during year 800,000 cash 1,400,000 credit 2,200,000 Total Accts Receivable 12/31 860,000 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 7,000 credit balance Outstanding Accounts Not due 688,000 1 30 past 86,000 31 60 past 51,600 61 90 past 25,800 Over 90 8,600 % Uncollectible Not due 2% 1 30 past 5% 31 60 past 9% 61 90 past 15% Over 90 25% Prepare the following entries Adjusting entry on 12/31 after doing an aging of accounts receivable assuming the company uses the percentage of receivables approach for bad debt expense Entry to record bad debt of $1200 from Smith Company that has gone bankrupt on 1/30 Assume the company uses % of credit sales and determines that 2% of credit sales are uncollectible prepare the adjusting entry Prepare a bank reconciliation for XYZ on 11/30 Balance per books 11/30 9,920 Balance per bank 11/30 12,170 Deposit in Transit 1,500 Outstanding Checks 1,710 Bank Service Charge 190 Note Collected by bank 2,230

the budget for big chucks 410478

July

August

September

Beginning cash balance

$10,000

$ ?

$ ?

Add: Cash receipts

50,000

63,000

71,000

Deduct: Cash payments

64,000

58,000

64,000

Cash excess (deficiency) before financing

($4,000)

$ ?

$ ?

Financing

Borrowing to maintain minimum balance

?

?

?

Principal repayment

?

?

?

Interest payment

?

?

?

Ending cash balance

$ ?

$ ?

$ ?

Chapter 6 Exercise 5
5. Abbreviated cash budget; financing emphasis

An abbreviated cash budget for Big Chuck Enterprises follows.

accounting 410496

On June 15, 2013, Sanderson Construction entered into a long term construction contract to build a baseball stadium in Washington D.C. for $430 million. The expected completion date is April 1 of 2015, just in time for the 2015 baseball season. Costs incurred and estimated costs to complete at year end for the life of the contract are as follows ($ in millions):

2013

2014

2015

Costs incurred during the year

$

40

$

170

$

60

Estimated costs to complete as of 12/31

210

140

Required:

1.

Determine the amount of gross profit or loss to be recognized in each of the three years using the percentage of completion method. (Do not round intermediate calculations. Enter your answers in millions rounded to 2 decimal places (i.e., 5,500,000 should be entered as 5.50).)

2.

How much revenue will Sanderson report in each of three years using the percentage of completion method? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Enter your answers in millions rounded to 2 decimal places (i.e., 5,500,000 should be entered as 5.50).)

3.

Determine the amount of gross profit or loss to be recognized in each of the three years using the completed contract method. (Enter your answers in millions.)

4.

Determine the amount of revenue, cost, and gross profit or loss to be recognized in each of the three years using the cost recovery method that is required by IFRS. (Enter your answers in millions.)

5.

Suppose the estimated costs to complete at the end of 2014 are $210 million instead of $140 million. Determine the amount of gross profit or loss to be recognized in 2014 using the percentage of completion method. (Enter your answer in millions. Do not round intermediate calculations.)

pc planet has just opened its doors the new retail 269110

PC Planet has just opened its doors. The new retail store sells refurbished computers at a significant discount from market prices. The computers cost PC Planet $100 to purchase and require 10 hours of labor at $15 per hour. Additional variable costs, including wages for sales personnel, are $50 per computer. The newly refurbished computers are resold to customers for $500. Rent on the retail store costs the company $4,000 per month.

Required

1. How many computers does PC Planet have to sell each month to break even?

2. If PC Planet wants to earn $5,000 per month after all expenses, how many computers does the company need to sell?

3. PC Planet can purchase already refurbished computers for $200. This would mean that all labor required to refurbish the computers could be eliminated. What would PC Planet’s new breakeven point be if it decided to purchase the computers already refurbished?

4. Instead of paying the monthly rental fee for the retail space, PC Planet has the option of paying its landlord a 20% commission on sales. Assuming the original facts in the problem, at what sales level would PC Planet be indifferent between paying a fixed amount of monthly rent and paying a 20% commission on sales?

plant wide department and activity cost rates allen s aero toy 269111

Plant wide, department, and activity cost rates Allen’s Aero Toys makes two models of toy airplanes, fighter jets, and cargo planes. The fighter jets are more detailed and require smaller batch sizes. The controller has asked you to compare plant wide, department, and activity based cost allocations.



The budgeted overhead cost for each department is as follows:



Other information follows:

Materials handling and quality inspection costs vary with the number of batches processed in each department. The budgeted number of batches for each product line in each department is as follows:



Utilities costs vary with direct manufacturing labor cost in each department.

Required

1. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes based on a single plant wide overhead rate, if total overhead is allocated based on total direct costs.

2. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes based on departmental overhead rates, where assembly department overhead costs are allocated based on direct manufacturing labor costs of the assembly department and painting department overhead costs are allocated based on total direct costs of the painting department.

3. Calculate the budgeted cost per unit for fighter jets and cargo planes if Allen’s Aero Toys allocates overhead costs using activity based costing.

4. Explain how activity based costing could improve or reduce decisionquality.

plantwide department and abc indirect cost rates automotive pro 269115

Plantwide department and ABC indirect cost rates. Automotive Products (AP) designs and produces automotive parts. In 2009, actual variable manufacturing overhead is $308,600. AP’s simple costing system allocates variable manufacturing overhead to its three customers based on machine hours and prices its contracts based on full costs. One of its customers has regularly complained of being charged noncompetitive prices, so AP’s controller Devon Smith realizes that it is time to examine the consumption of overhead resources more closely. He knows that there are three main departments that consume overhead resources: design, production, and engineering. Interviews with the department personnel and examination of time records yield the following detailed information:br>



If you want to use Excel to solve this exercise, go to the Excel Lab at www.prenhall.com/horngren/cost13e and download the template for Exercise 5 19.

1. Compute the variable manufacturing overhead allocated to each customer in 2009 using the simple costing system that has machine hours as the allocation base.

2. Compute the variable manufacturing overhead allocated to each customer in 2009 using department based variable manufacturing overhead rates.

3. Comment on your answers in requirements 1 and 2. Which customer do you think was complaining about being overcharged in the simple system? If the new department based rates are used to price contracts, which customer (s) will be unhappy? How would you respond to these concerns?

4. How else might AP use the information available from its department by department analysis of variable manufacturing overhead costs?

5. AP’s managers are wondering if they should further refine the department by department costing system into an ABC system by identifying different activities within each department. Under what conditions would it not be worthwhile to further refine the department costing system into an ABCsystem?

plantwide department and activity cost rates tarquin s trophie 269116

Plantwide, department, and activity cost rates Tarquin’s Trophies makes trophies, plaques, and medallions and operates at capacity. Tarquin does large custom orders, for example the participant trophies the Mishawaka Little League. The Controller has asked you to compare plantwide, department, and activity based cost allocation.



The overhead cost for each department is:



Other information:

Materials handling and quality inspection costs vary with the number of batches processed in each department. The number of batches for each product line in each department is as follows:



Utilities costs vary with direct labor costs in each department.

1. Calculate the cost per unit of Trophies, Plaques and Medallions based on a single plantwide overhead rate, if total overhead is allocated based on total direct costs.

2. Calculate the cost per unit of Trophies, Plaques and Medallions based on departmental overhead rates, where forming department overhead costs are allocated based on direct labor costs of the forming department, assembly department overhead costs are allocated based on total direct costs of the assembly department and packaging department overhead costs are allocated based on direct materials costs of the packaging department.

3. Calculate the cost per unit of Trophies, Plaques and Medallions if Tarquin allocates overhead costs in each department using activity based costing.

4. Explain how the disaggregation of information could improve or reduce decision quality.

proration of overhead the ride on wave company row produces a 269133

Proration of overhead. The Ride On Wave Company (ROW) produces a line of non motorized boats. ROW uses a normal costing system and allocates manufacturing overhead using direct manufacturing labor cost. The following data are for 2011:

Budgeted manufacturing overhead cost $125,000

Budgeted direct manufacturing labor cost $250,000

Actual manufacturing overhead cost $117,000

Actual direct manufacturing labor cost $228,000

Inventory balances on December 31, 2011, were as follows



Required

1. Calculate the manufacturing overhead allocation rate.

2. Compute the amount of under or overallocated manufacturing overhead.

3. Calculate the ending balances in work in process, finished goods, and cost of goods sold if underover allocated manufacturing overhead is as follows:

a. Written off to cost of goods sold

b. Prorated based on ending balances (before proration) in each of the three accounts

c. Prorated based on the overhead allocated in 2011 in the ending balances (before proration) in each of the three accounts

4. Which method makes the most sense? Justify youranswer.

recognizing cash flows for capital investment projects npv unbr 269139

Recognizing cash flows for capital investment projects, NPV Unbreakable Manufacturing manufactures over 20,000 different products made from metal, including building materials, tools, and furniture parts. The manager of the furniture parts division has proposed that his division expand into bicycle parts as well. The furniture parts division currently generates cash revenues of $5,000,000 and incurs cash costs of $3,550,000, with an investment in assets of $12,050,000. One fourth of the cash costs are direct labor. The manager estimates that the expansion of the business will require an investment in working capital of $25,000. Because the company already has a facility, there would be no additional rent or purchase costs for a building, but the project would generate an additional $390,000 in annual cash overhead. Moreover, the manager expects annual materials cash costs for bicycle parts to be $1,300,000, and labor for the bicycle parts to be about the same as the labor cash costs for furniture parts. The controller of Unbreakable, working with various managers, estimates that the expansion would require the purchase of equipment with a $2,575,000 cost and an expected disposal value of $370,000 at the end of its seven year useful life. Depreciation would occur on a straight line basis. The CFO of Unbreakable determines the firm’s cost of capital as 14%. The CFO’s salary is $150,000 per year. Adding another division will not change that. The CEO asks for a report on expected revenues for the project, and is told by the marketing department that it might be able to achieve cash revenues of $3,372,500 annually from bicycle parts. Unbreakable Manufacturing has a tax rate of 35%.

Required

1. Separate the cash flows into four groups: (1) net initial investment cash flows, (2) cash flows from operations, (3) cash flows from terminal disposal of investment, and (4) cash flows not relevant to the capital budgeting problem.

2. Calculate the NPV of the expansion project and comment on your analysis.

job costing contracting ethics kingston company manufactures 268986

Job costing, contracting, ethics. Kingston Company manufactures modular homes. The company has two main products that it sells commercially: a 1,000 square foot, one bedroom model and a 1,500 square foot, two bedroom model. The company recently began providing emergency housing (huts) to FEMA. The emergency housing is similar to the 1,000 square foot model. FEMA has requested Kingston to create a bid for 150 emergency huts to be sent for flood victims in the south. Your boss has asked that you prepare this bid. In preparing the bid, you find a recent invoice to FEMA for 200 huts provided after hurricane Katrina. You also have a standard cost sheet for the 1,000 square foot model sold commercially. Both are provided as follows:



Required

1. Calculate the total bid if you base your calculations on the standard cost sheet assuming a cost plus 15% government contract.

2. Calculate the total bid if you base your calculations on the September 15, 2005, invoice assuming a cost plus 15% government contract.

3. What are the main discrepancies between the bids you calculated in #1 and #2?

4. What bid should you present to your boss? What principles from the IMA Standards of Ethical Conduct for Practitioners of Management Accounting and Financial Management should guide yourdecision?

job costing journal entries donnell transport assembles presti 268987

Job costing, journal entries. Donnell Transport assembles prestige manufactured homes. Its job costing system has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one indirect cost pool (manufacturing overhead allocated at a budgeted $30 per machine hour in 2009). The following data (in millions) pertain to operations for 2009:



1. Prepare an overview diagram of Donnell Transport’s job costing system.

2. Prepare journal entries. Number your entries. Post to T accounts. What is the ending balance of Work in Process Control?

3. Show the journal entry for disposing of under or over allocated manufacturing overhead directly as a year end write off to Cost of Goods Sold. Post the entry toT accounts.

job costing journal entries the university of chicago press is 268992

Job costing, journal entries. The University of Chicago Press is wholly owned by the university. It performs the bulk of its work for other university departments, which pay as though the press were an outside business enterprise. The press also publishes and maintains a stock of books for general sale. The Press uses normal costing to cost job. Its job costing system has two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct manufacturing labor) and one indirect cost pool (manufacturing overhead, allocated on the basis of direct manufacturing labor costs).

The following data (in thousands) pertain to 2008.

?

*The term manufacturing overhead is not used uniformly. Other terms that are often encountered in printing companies include lob overhead and shop overhead.

1. Prepare an overview diagram of the job costing system at the University of Chicago Press.

2. Prepare journal entries to summarize the 2009 transactions. As your final entry, dispose of the year end under or over allocated manufacturing overhead as a write off to Cost of Goods Sold. Number your entries. Explanations for each entry may be omitted.

3. Show posted T accounts for all inventories, Cost of Goods Sold, Manufacturing Overhead Control, and Manufacturing OverheadAllocated.

job costing normal and actual costing amesbury construction as 268993

Job costing, normal and actual costing. Amesbury Construction assembles residential houses. It uses a job costing system with two direct cost categories (direct materials and direct labor) and one indirect cost pool (assembly support). Direct labor hours is the allocation base for assembly support costs. In December 2010, Amesbury budgets 2011 assembly support costs to be $8,300,000 and 2011 direct labor hours to be 166,000. At the end of 2011, Amesbury is comparing the costs of several jobs that were started and completed in 2011.

?

Direct materials and direct labor are paid for on a contract basis. The costs of each are known when direct materials are used or when direct labor hours are worked. The 2011 actual assembly support costs were $6,520,000, and the actual direct labor hours were 163,000.

1. Compute the (a) budgeted indirect cost rate and (b) actual indirect cost rate. Why do they differ? Required

2. What are the job costs of the Laguna Model and the Mission Model using (a) normal costing and (b) actual costing?

3. Why might Amesbury Construction prefer normal costing over actualcosting?

job costing unit cost ending work in process rafael company 268997

Job costing, unit cost, ending work in process. Rafael Company produces pipes for concert quality organs. Each job is unique. In April 2011, it completed all outstanding orders, and then, in May 2011, it worked on only two jobs, M1 and M2:



Direct manufacturing labor is paid at the rate of $26 per hour. Manufacturing overhead costs are allocated at a budgeted rate of $20 per direct manufacturing labor hour. Only Job M1 was completed in May.

1. Calculate the total cost for Job M1. Required

2. 1,100 pipes were produced for Job M1. Calculate the cost per pipe.

3. Prepare the journal entry transferring Job M1 to finished goods.

4. What is the ending balance in the Work in Process Controlaccount?

job costing unit cost ending work in process raymond company 268999

Job costing, unit cost, ending work in process. Raymond Company produces pipes for concert quality organs. Each job is unique. In April 2009, it completed all outstanding orders, and then, in May 2009, it worked on only two jobs, Ml and M2:



Direct manufacturing labor is paid at the rate of $25 per hour. Manufacturing overhead costs are allocated at a budgeted rate of $20 per direct manufacturing labor hour. Only Job Ml was completed in May. If you want to use Excel to solve this exercise, go to the Excel Lab at www.prenhall.com/horngren/costl3e and download the template for Exercise 4 27.

1. Compute the total cost for Job Ml.

2. 1,500 pipes were produced for Job Ml. Calculate the cost per pipe.

3. Prepare the journal entry transferring Job Ml to finished goods.

4. What is the ending balance in the Work in Process Controlaccount?

job costing actual normal and variation from normal costing 269002

Job costing; actual, normal and variation from normal costing, Chirac & Partners, a Quebec based public accounting partnership, specializes in audit services, Its job costing system has a single direct cost category (professional labor) and a single indirect cost pool (audit support, which contains all costs of the Audit Support Department). Audit support costs are allocated to individual jobs using actual professional labor hours. Chirac & Partners employs 10 professionals to perform audit services.



If you want to use Excel to solve this exercise, go to the Excel Lab at www.prenhall.com/horngren/cost13e and download the template for Exercise 4 28.

1. Compute the direct cost rate and the indirect cost rate per professional labor hour for 2009 under

(a) actual costing, (b) normal costing, and (c) the variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for direct costs.

2. Chirac’s 2009 audit of Pierre & Co. was budgeted to take 110 hours of professional labor time. The actual professional labor time spent on the audit was 120 hours. Compute the cost of the Pierre & Co audit using (a) actual costing, (b) normal costing, and (c) the variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for direct costs. Explain any differences in the jobcost

job costing actual normal and variation from normal costing 269004

Job costing; actual, normal, and variation from normal costing. Braden Brothers, Inc., is an architecture firm specializing in high rise buildings. Its job costing system has a single direct cost category (architectural labor) and a single indirect cost pool, which contains all costs of supporting the office. Support costs are allocated to individual jobs using architect labor hours. Braden Brothers employs 15 architects.



Budgeted and actual amounts for 2010 are as follows:

Required

1. Compute the direct cost rate and the indirect cost rate per architectural labor hour for 2010 under (a) actual costing, (b) normal costing, and (c) the variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for direct costs.

2. Braden Brother’s architectural sketches for Champ Tower in Houston was budgeted to take 275 hours of architectural labor time. The actual architectural labor time spent on the job was 250 hours. Compute the cost of the Champ Tower sketches using (a) actual costing, (b) normal costing, and (c) the variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for directcosts.

job costing service industry cam cody schedules book signings f 269005

Job costing—service industry. Cam Cody schedules book signings for science fiction authors and creates e books and books on CD to sell at each signing. Cody uses a normal costing system with two direct cost pools, labor and materials, and one indirect cost pool, general overhead. General overhead is allocated to each signing based on 80% of labor cost. Actual overhead equaled allocated overhead in March 2010. Actual overhead in April was $1,980. All costs incurred during the planning stage for a signing and during the signing are gathered in a balance sheet account called ?oSignings in Progress (SIP).?? When a signing is completed, the costs are transferred to an income statement account called ?oCost of Completed Signings (CCS).?? Following is cost information for April 2010:



The following information relates to April 2010.

As of April 1, there were three signings in progress, N. Asher, T. Bucknell, and S. Brown. Signings for

S. King and D. Sherman were started during April. The signings for T. Bucknell and S. King were completed during April.

Required

1. Calculate SIP at the end of April.

2. Calculate CCS for April.

3. Calculate under/overallocated overhead at the end of April.

4. Calculate the ending balances in SIP and CCS if the under/overallocated overhead amount is as follows:

a. Written off to CCS

b. Prorated based on the ending balances (before proration) in SIP and CCS

c. Prorated based on the overhead allocated in April in the ending balances of SIP and CCS (before proration)

5. Which of the methods in requirement 4 would youchoose?

job costing service industry michael scott books tours for new 269006

Job costing—service industry. Michael Scott books tours for new bands and arranges to print T shirts and produce demo CDs to sell on the tour. Scott’s agency uses a normal costing system with two direct cost pools, labor and materials, and one indirect cost pool, general overhead. General overhead is allocated to each tour at 150% of labor cost. The following information relates to the agency for June 2009.

1. As of June 1, there were tours for two bands, Grunge Express and Different Strokes in progress.

2. During June both Grunge Express and Different Strokes finished their tours.

3. New tours were started for three bands: As I Lay Dieing, Ask Me Later and Maybe Tomorrow Of these bands, only Maybe Tomorrow finished its tour by the end of June.

4. All costs incurred during the planning stage for a tour and during the tour are gathered in a balance sheet account called ?oTours in Progress (TIP).?? When a tour is completed, the costs are transferred to an income statement account called ?oCost of Completed Tours (CCT).??

Following is cost information for June 2009:

?

Actual overhead in June was $2,500.

1. Calculate TIP for the end of June.

2. Calculate CCT for June.

3. Calculate under/over allocated overhead at the end of June.

4. Calculate the ending balances in TIP and CCT if the under/over allocated overhead amount is:

a. Written off to CCT

b. Prorated based on the ending balances (before proration) in TIP and CCT

c. Prorated based on the overhead allocated in June in the ending balances of TIP and CCT (before proration).

5. Which of the methods in requirement 4would youchoose?

job order costing actual normal and variation from normal cos 269008

Job order costing: actual, normal, and variation from normal costing. Thanatos & Hades (T&H) is law firm that specializes in writing wills. Its job costing system has one direct cost pool, professional labor and a single indirect cost pool that includes all supporting costs of running the law office. The support cost is allocated to clients on the basis of professional labor hours. In addition to the two senior partners, T&F have six associates who work directly with clients. Each of the eight lawyers is expected to work for approximately 2,500 hours a year



1. Compute the direct cost rate and the indirect cost rate per professional labor hour under

a. actual costing

b. normal costing

c. variation from normal costing that uses budgeted rates for direct costs.

2. The will for a rich tycoon, An Apostolus, was very complex and took four lawyers at the firm, 1,000 hours each to prepare. What would the cost of writing this will be under each of the costing methods in requirement1?

journal entries t accounts and source documents production com 269012

Journal entries, T accounts and source documents. Production Company produces gadgets for the coveted small appliance market. The following data reflects activity for the year 2008.



Production Co. uses a normal cost system and allocates overhead to work in process at a rate of $2.50 per direct manufacturing labor dollar. Indirect materials are insignificant so there is no inventory account for indirect materials.

1. Prepare journal entries to record the transactions for 2008 including an entry to close out over or under allocated overhead to cost of goods sold. For each journal entry indicate the source document that would be used to authorize each entry. Also note which subsidiary ledger, if any, should be referenced as backup for the entry.

2. Post the journal entries to T accounts for all of the inventories, Cost of Goods Sold, the Manufacturing—Overhead Control Account, and the Manufacturing Overhead AllocatedAccount.

lean accounting flexible security devices fsd has introduced 269018

Lean Accounting. Flexible Security Devices (FSD) has introduced a just in time production process and is considering the adoption of lean accounting principles to support its new production philosophy. The company has two product lines: Mechanical Devices and Electronic Devices. Two individual products are made in each line. The company’s traditional cost accounting system allocates all plant level overhead costs to individual products. Product line overhead costs are traced directly to product lines, and then allocated to the two individual products in each line. Equipment costs are directly traced to products. The latest accounting report using traditional cost accounting methods included the following information (in thousands of dollars).



FSD has determined that each of the two product lines represents a distinct value stream. It has also determined that$120,000 of the allocated plant level overhead costs represents occupancy costs. Product A occupies 20% of the plant’s square footage, Product B occupies 20%, Product C occupies 30%, and Product D occupies 15%. The remaining square footage is occupied by plant administrative functions or is not being used. Finally, P50 has decided that direct material should be expensed in the period it is purchased, rather than when the material is used. According to purchasing records, direct material purchase costs during the period were:



1. What are the cost objects in FSD’s lean accounting system? Which of P80’s costs would be excluded when computing operating income for these cost objects?

2. Compute operating income for the cost objects identified in requirement 1 using lean accounting principles. Why does operating income differ from the operating income computed using traditional cost accountingmethods?

mel s male accessories sells wallets and money clips historical 269033

Mel’s Male Accessories sells wallets and money clips. Historically, the firm’s sales have averaged three wallets for every money clip. Each wallet has an $8 contribution margin, and each money clip has a $6 contribution margin. Mel’s incurs fixed cost in the amount of $180,000. The selling prices of wallets and money clips, respectively, are $30 and $15. The corporate wide tax rate is 40 percent.

a. How much revenue is needed to break even? How many wallets and money clips does this represent?

b. How much revenue is needed to earn a pre tax profit of $150,000?

c. How much revenue is needed to earn an after tax profit of $150,000?

d. If Mel’s earns the revenue determined in (b) but does so by selling five wallets for every two money clips, what would be the pre tax profit (or loss)? Why is this amount not $150,000?

mile high foods inc was formed in march 2011 to provide 269036

Mile High Foods, Inc., was formed in March 2011 to provide prepackaged snack boxes for a new low cost regional airline beginning on April 1. The company has just leased warehouse space central to the two airports to store materials. To move packaged materials from the warehouses to the airports, where final assembly will take place, Mile High must choose whether to lease a delivery truck and pay a full time driver at a fixed cost of $5,000 per month, or pay a delivery service a rate equivalent to $0.40 per box. This cost will be included in either fixed manufacturing overhead or variable manufacturing overhead, depending on which option is chosen. The company is hoping for rapid growth, as sales forecasts for the new airline are promising. However, it is essential that Mile High managers carefully control costs in order to be compliant with their sales contract and remain profitable. Ron Spencer, the company’s president, is trying to determine whether to use absorption, variable, or throughput costing to evaluate the performance of company managers. For absorption costing, he intends to use the practical capacity level of the facility, which is 20,000 boxes per month. Production volume variances will be written off to cost of goods sold.

Costs for the three months are expected to remain unchanged. The costs and revenues for April, May, and June are expected to be as follows:

Sales revenue $6.00 per box

Direct material cost $1.20 per box

Direct manufacturing labor cost $0.35 per box

Variable manufacturing overhead cost $0.15 per box

Variable delivery cost (if this option is chosen) $0.40 per box

Fixed delivery cost (if this option is chosen) $5,000 per month

Fixed manufacturing overhead costs $15,000 per month

Fixed administrative costs $28,000 per month

Projected production and sales for each month follow. High production in May is the result of an anticipated surge in June employee vacations.



Required

1. Compute operating income for April, May, and June under absorption costing, assuming that Mile High opts to use

a. the leased truck and salaried driver.

b. the variable delivery service.

2. Compute operating income for April, May, and June under variable costing, assuming that Mile High opts to use

a. the leased truck and salaried driver.

b. the variable delivery service.

3. Compute operating income for April, May, and June under throughput costing, assuming that Mile High opts to use

a. the leased truck and salaried driver.

b. the variable delivery service.

4. Should Mile High choose absorption, variable, or throughput costing for evaluating the performance of managers? Why? What advantages and disadvantages might there be in adopting throughput costing?

5. Should Mile High opt for the leased truck and salaried driver or the variable delivery service? Explainbriefly.

mission electronics manufactures and sells basic dvd players for 269037

Mission Electronics manufactures and sells basic DVD players for sale under various generic store brand names. The cost of one of their models follows:

Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$18.00

Labor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.00

Variable overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.00

Fixed overhead ($2,700,000 per year; 450,000 units per year) . . . 6.00

Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .$41.00

Pacific Cash & Carry, a chain of low price electronic sales and rental outlets, has asked Mission to supply them with 30,000 players for a special promotion Pacific is planning. Pacific has offered to pay Mission a unit price of $42 per DVD player. The regular selling price is $60. The special order would require some modification to the basic model. These modifications would add $4.00 per unit in material cost, $1.50 per unit in labor cost, and $0.50 in variable overhead cost. Although Mission has the capacity to produce the 30,000 units without affecting its regular production of 450,000 units, a one time rental of special testing equipment to meet Pacific’s requirements would be needed. The equipment rental would be $45,000 and would allow Mission to test up to 50,000 units.

Required

a. Prepare a schedule to show the impact of filling the Pacific order on Mission’s profits for the year.

b. Would you recommend that Mission accept the order?

c. Considering only profit, what is the minimum quantity of DVD players in the special order that would make it profitable?

management accounting and control 269038

Management Accounting and Control
Coursework assignment: write a 2,500 word essay on the following topic:
“The budget has historically played center stage in most organizations’ systems of management control (Otley, 1994). However, recently it has been the subject of considerable criticism (Hansen et al., 2003). Budgeting has beendeemed‘broken’ (Jensen, 2001), ‘a thing of the past’ (Gurton, 1999), or an ‘unnecessary evil’ (Wallander, 1999)”
(Libby & Lindsay, 2010: 56).
Required:
Critically assess the arguments and the evidence for the claim thatorganizationsno longer need budgets.
References
You should consult academic journal articles for your coursework. Forget about the internet, other than to seek academic references.
Referencing
Remember to reference your sources using an appropriate citation system, such as Harvard. Essays will lose marks for poor referencing style.
Style guides to referencing are available in the library and online:
http://www.cardiff.ac.uk/schoolsanddivisions/divisions/insrv/help/guides/citingreferences/tutorial/harvardl
Do not use bullet points in your essay.
Unsubstantiated assertions
Do not make unsubstantiated assertions. Essays will lose marks if littered with unsubstantiated assertions. If you are unsure about what an unsubstantiated assertion is, do some research to find out about the issue, and, importantly, how to avoid making unsubstantiated assertions.

Document Preview:

Management Accounting and Control Coursework assignment: write a 2,500 word essay on the following topic: “The budget has historically played center stage in most organizations’ systems of management control (Otley, 1994). However, recently it has been the subject of considerable criticism (Hansen et al., 2003). Budgeting has been deemed ‘broken’ (Jensen, 2001), ‘a thing of the past’ (Gurton, 1999), or an ‘unnecessary evil’ (Wallander, 1999)”  (Libby & Lindsay, 2010: 56). Required: Critically assess the arguments and the evidence for the claim that organizations no longer need budgets.  References You should consult academic journal articles for your coursework. Forget about the internet, other than to seek academic references. Referencing Remember to reference your sources using an appropriate citation system, such as Harvard. Essays will lose marks for poor referencing style. Style guides to referencing are available in the library and online: ? HYPERLINK “http://www.cardiff.ac.uk/schoolsanddivisions/divisions/insrv/help/guides/citingreferences/tutorial/harvardl” ?http://www.cardiff.ac.uk/schoolsanddivisions/divisions/insrv/help/guides/citingreferences/tutorial/harvardl? Do not use bullet points in your essay. Unsubstantiated assertions Do not make unsubstantiated assertions. Essays will lose marks if littered with unsubstantiated assertions. If you are unsure about what an unsubstantiated assertion is, do some research to find out about the issue, and, importantly, how to avoid making unsubstantiated assertions.

Attachments:

mrp eoq and jit global tunes corp produces j pods music 269053

MRP, EOQ, and JIT. Global Tunes Corp. produces J Pods, music players that can download thousands of songs. Global Tunes forecasts that demand in 2011 will be 48,000 J Pods. The variable production cost of each J Pod is $54. Due to the large $10,000 cost per setup, Global Tunes plans to produce J Pods once a month in batches of 4,000 each. The carrying cost of a unit in inventory is $17 per year.

Required

1. Using an MRP system, what is the annual cost of producing and carrying J Pods in inventory? (Assume that, on average, half of the units produced in a month are in inventory.)

2. A new manager at Global Tunes has suggested that the company use the EOQ model to determine the optimal batch size to produce. (To use the EOQ model, Global Tunes needs to treat the setup cost in the same way it would treat ordering cost in a traditional EOQ model.) Determine the optimal batch size and number of batches. Round up the number of batches to the nearest whole number. What would be the annual cost of producing and carrying J Pods in inventory if it uses the optimal batch size? Compare this cost to the cost calculated in requirement 1. Comment briefly.

3. Global Tunes is also considering switching from an MRP system to a JIT system. This will result in producing J Pods in batch sizes of 600 J Pods and will reduce obsolescence, improve quality, and result in a higher selling price. The frequency of production batches will force Global Tunes to reduce setup time and will result in a reduction in setup cost. The new setup cost will be $500 per setup. What is the annual cost of producing and carrying J Pods in inventory under the JIT system?

4. Compare the models analyzed in the previous parts of the problem. What are the advantages and disadvantages of each?

multi product cvp and decision making pure water products produc 269054

Multi product CVP and decision making Pure Water Products produces 2 types of water filters.

One attaches to the faucet and cleans all water that passes through the faucet. The other is a pitcher cum filter that only purifies water meant for drinking.

The unit that attaches to the faucet is sold for $80 and has variable costs of $20.

The pitcher cum filter sells for $90 and has variable costs of $25.

Pure Water sells 2 faucet models for every 3 pitchers sold fixed costs equal $945,000.

1. What is the breakeven point in unit sales and dollars for each type of filter at the current sales mix?

2. Pure Water is considering buying new production equipment. The new equipment will increase fixed cost by $181,400 per year and will decrease the variable cost of the faucet and the pitcher units by $5 and $9 respectively. Assuming the same sales mix, how many of each type of filter does Pure Water need to sell to breakeven?

3. Assuming the same sales mix, at what total sales level would Pure Water be indifferent between using the old equipment and buying the new production equipment? If total sales are expected to be 30,000 units, should Pure Water buy the new production equipment?

nascar motors assembles and sells motor vehicles and uses 269063

Nascar Motors assembles and sells motor vehicles and uses standard costing. Actual data relating to April and May 2008 are:



The selling price per vehicle is $24,000. The budgeted level of production used to calculate the bud; fixed manufacturing cost per unit is 500 units. There are no price efficiency, or spending variances. Any production volume variance is written off to cost of goods sold in the month in which it occurs. If you want to use Excel to solve this exercise, go to the Excel Lab at www.prenhall.com/hornqren/costl3e and download the template for Exercise 9 16.

1. Prepare April and May 2008 income statements for Nascar Motors under

(a) Variable costing and

(b) Absorption costing.

2. Prepare a numerical reconciliation and explanation of the difference between operating income each month under variable costing and absorptioncosting.

financial accounting 410212

On January 1, 2011, Boston Company completed the following transactions (use a 9 percent annual interest rate for all transactions a. Borrowed $103,000 for nine years. Will pay $9,270 interest at the end of each year and repay the $103,000 at the end of the 9th year. b. Established a plant addition fund of $520,000 to be available at the end of year 8. A single sum that will grow to $520,000 will be deposited on January 1, 2011. c. Agreed to pay a severance package to a discharged employee. The company will pay $84,000 at the end of the first year, $122,500 at the end of the second year, and $146,000 at the end of the third year. d. Purchased a $130,000 machine on January 1, 2011, and paid cash, $35,000. A eight year note payable is signed for the balance. The note will be paid in eight equal year end payments starting on December 31, 2011. In transaction (a), determine the present value of the debt. (Round “PV Factors” to 4 decimal places. Round intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount.) In transaction (c), determine the present value of this obligation. (Round “PV Factors” to 4 decimal places. Round intermediate calculations and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount). In transaction (b), what single sum amount must the company deposit on January 1, 2011? (Round “PV Factors” to 4 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole dollar amount.) What is the total amount of interest revenue that will be earned? Use http://lectures.mhhe.com/connect/0078111021/Tables/presentvaluedecimal.jpg and http://lectures.mhhe.com/connect/0078111021/Tables/pvannuitydecimal.jpg

jerry sprayed all of the landscaping around his home how is loss reported a b and c 410337

Jerry sprayed all of the landscaping around his home with a pesticide in June of the current year. Shortly thereafter, all of the trees and shrubs unaccountably died. The FMV and the adjusted basis of the plants were $15,000. Later in the year, the pesticide manufacturer announced a recall of the particular batch of pesticide that Jerry used. It also announced a program whereby consumers would be repaid any damage caused by the improper mixture. Jerry is single and reports $38,000 AGI in the current year and $42,000 in the subsequent year. a. Assume that in the current year Jerry files a claim for his losses and receives notification that payment of $15,000 will be received in the subsequent year; however, Jerry receives full payment for the damage in the current year. How should the loss and the reimbursement be reported? b. How will your answer to Part a change if in the subsequent year the manufacturer files bankruptcy and Jerry receives $1,500 in total and final payment for his claim? c. How will your answer to Part a change if the announcement and the reimbursement do not occur until late in the subsequent year, after Jerry has already filed his tax return for the previous tax year?

jesse company has obtained the following data about a possible planned investment 410342

Jesse Company has obtained the following data about a possible planned investment:

Cost $300,000

Terminal salvage value in 10 years 0

Additional annual revenues for 10 years $250,000

Additional annual cash expenses for 10 years $200,000

Estimated useful life in years 10

Minimum desired rate of return 10%

Present value of ordinary annuity, 10%, 10 periods 6.1446

Present value of one, 10%, 10 periods 0.3855

Income tax rate 40%

The company uses the straight line depreciation method for taxes.

Required:

A) Compute the net present value of the investment.

B) Compute the net present value of the investment if the terminal salvage value is estimated to be $50,000 in 10 years.

accounting question please help 410374

Joe Peterson is the founder and majority shareholder of Zipali, Inc., wholesaler of chemicals. Joe started the business in his home a few years ago. For the most part, Joe has been able to manage his company quite well. For the first few years he grew his company, but cash requirements caused by expansion and increased demand for his product has forced Joe to re think his current day to day planning activities.

More importantly, Joe is considering taking on some investors and/or taking a loan from the bank with which he has been working. He has been somewhat concerned by his lack of cash forecasting. He is convinced that he needs to do some cash budgeting, but has neither the time nor the desire to put serious effort into this project.

The following information was made available to you from the company records:media/168/168e360c 4722 4c64 b454 89

media/a9a/a9ab617c 827f 4fed a76a 1c

Other data:

a) All sales are on credit with 45% collected in the month of the sale and 55% in the month after the sale.

b) Cost of sales is 65% of sales.

c) Variable period costs (other than sales commissions, in item d below) are 4% of sales and are paid in the month incurred.

d) Sales commissions apply to all sales and are paid in the month after sales at a rate of 9% of sales.

e) Inventory is maintained at the sales requirements for the next two months’ budgeted cost of goods sold.

f) Purchases are paid in the month after the purchase (receipt).

g) Total fixed expenses are $140,000 per month of which $80,000 is for depreciation.

Required:

1) Using the above information, prepare a budget worksheet (i.e., the subsidiary budgets).

2) Prepare a budgeted Income Statement for the three month period ending March 31, 2012.

3) Prepare a budgeted Balance Sheet at March 31, 2012 and try to prove Retained Earnings.

managerial accounting 410389

Jonathan Macintosh is a highly successful Pennsylvania orchardman who has formed his own company to produce and package applesauce. Apples can be stored for several months in cold storage, so applesauce production is relatively uniform throughout the year. The recently hired controller for the firm is about to apply the high low method in estimating the company’s energy cost behavior. The following costs were incurred during the past 12 months: Month Pints of Applesauce Produced Energy Cost January 35,000 $ 23,400 February 21,000 22,100 March 22,000 22,000 April 24,000 22,450 May 30,000 22,900 June 32,000 23,350 July 40,000 28,000 August 30,000 22,800 September 30,000 23,000 October 28,000 22,700 November 41,000 24,100 December 39,000 24,950 Required: 1. Use the high low method to estimate the company’s energy cost behavior and express it in equation form. Use the formula Y = a + bX, where Y denotes energy cost for a month and X denotes pints of applesauce produced. Total energy cost = $ + $ X 2. Predict the energy cost for a month in which 26,000 pints of applesauce are produced Energy cost $

jones corporation uses a budgeted factory overhead rate to apply overhead to product 410394

Jones Corporation uses a budgeted factory overhead rate to apply overhead to production.

Direct labor

costs are the cost driver for overhead costs. The following data are available for the year ending December

31, 2010:

Budgeted factory overhead $675,000

Actual factory overhead $726,000

Budgeted direct labor costs $450,000

Actual direct labor costs $482,000

Cost of goods sold $150,000

Direct materials inventory, December 31, 2010 $120,000

Work in process inventory, December 31, 2010 $100,000

Finished goods inventory, December 31, 2010 $250,000

Required:

A) Compute the budgeted factory overhead rate.

B) Compute the applied overhead costs.

C) What is the overhead variance?

D) Prorate the overhead variance to the appropriate accounts.

eoq uncertainty safety stock reorder point clarkson shoe co 268877

EOQ, uncertainty, safety stock, reorder point, Clarkson Shoe Co. produces and sells excellent quality walking shoes. After production, the shoes are distributed to 20 warehouses around the country. Each warehouse services approximately 100 stores in its region. Clarkson uses an EGG model to determine the number of pairs of shoes to order for each warehouse from the factory. Annual demand for Warehouse 0R2 is approximately 120,000 pairs of shoes. The ordering cost is $250 per order. The annual carrying cost of a pair of shoes is $2.40 per pair.

1. Use the EGG model to determine the optimal number of pairs of shoes per order

2. Assume each month consists of approximately 4 weeks. If it takes I week to receive an order, at what point should warehouse 0R2 reorder shoes?

3. Although 0R2’s average monthly demand is 10,000 pairs of shoes (120,000 A? 12 months), demand each month may vary from the average by up to 20%. To handle the variation in demand Clarkson has decided that 082 should maintain enough safety stock to cover any demand level. How much safety stock should Warehouse GR2 hold? How will this affect the reorder point and reorder quantity?

4. What is the total relevant ordering and carrying costs with safety stock and without safety stock?

equipment replacement income taxes continuation of 21 27 ass 268881

Equipment replacement, income taxes (continuation of 21 27). Assume the same facts as in Problem 21 27, except that the plant is located in Austin, Texas. Pro Chips has no special waiver on income taxes. It pays a 30% tax rate on all income. Proceeds from sales of equipment above book value are taxed at the same 30% rate.

1. Sketch the after tax cash in flows and outflows of the modernize and replace alternatives over the 2010 to 2016 period.

2. Calculate net present value of the modernize and replace alternatives.

3. Suppose Pro Chips is planning to build several more plants. It wants to have the most advantageous tax position possible. Pro Chips has been approached by Spain, Malaysia, and Australia to construct plants in their countries. Use the data in Problem 21 27 and this problem to briefly describe in qualitative terms the income tax features that would be advantageous to Pro Chips.

equipment replacement no income taxes pro chips is a 268883

Equipment replacement, no income taxes. Pro Chips is a manufacturer of prototype chips based in Dublin, Ireland. Next year, in 2010, Pro Chips expects to deliver 552 prototype chips at an average price of $80,000. Pro Chips’ marketing vice president forecasts growth of 60 prototype chips per year through 2016. That is, demand will be 552 in 2010, 612 in 2011, 672 in 2012, and so on. The plant cannot produce more than 540 prototype chips annually. To meet future demand, Pro Chips must either modernize the plant or replace it. The old equipment is fully depreciated and can be sold for $3,600,000 if the plant is replaced. If the plant is modernized, the costs to modernize it are to be capitalized and depreciated over the useful life of the updated plant. The old equipment is retained as part of the modernize alternative. The following data on the two options are available:



Pro Chips uses straight line depreciation, assuming zero terminal disposal value. For simplicity, we assume no change in prices or costs in future years. The investment will be made at the beginning of 2010, and all transactions thereafter occur on the last day of the year. Pro Chips’ required rate of return is 12%. There is no difference between the modernize and replace alternatives in terms of required working capital. Pro Chips has a special waiver on income taxes until 2016.

1. Sketch the cash inflows and outflows of the modernize and replace alternatives over the 2010 to 2016 period.

2. Calculate payback period for the modernize and replace alternatives.

3. Calculate net present value of the modernize and replace alternatives.

4. What factors should Pro Chips consider in choosing between thealternatives?

equivalent units zero beginning inventory nihon inc is a man 268887

Equivalent units, zero beginning inventory. Nihon, Inc. is a manufacturer of digital cameras. It has two departments: Assembly and Testing. In January 2009, the company incurred $750,000 on direct materials and $798,000 on conversion costs, for a total manufacturing cost of $1,548,000.

1. Assume there was no beginning inventory of any kind on January 1, 2009. During January, 10,000 cameras were placed into production and all 10,000 were fully completed at the end of the month. What is the unit cost of an assembled camera in January?

2. Assume that during February 10,000 cameras are placed into production. Further assume the same total assembly costs for January are also incurred in February, but only 9,000 cameras are fully completed at the end of the month. All direct materials have been added to the remaining 1,000 cameras. However, on average, these remaining 1,000 cameras are only 50% complete as to conversion costs. (a) What are the equivalent units for direct materials and conversion costs and their respective costs per equivalent unit for February? (b) What is the unit cost of an assembled camera in February 2009?

3. Explain the difference in your answers to requirements 1 and 2.

ethics cvp analysis allen corporation produces a molded plastic 268893

Ethics, CVP analysis Allen Corporation produces a molded plastic casing, LX201, for desktop computers. Summary data from its 2008 income statement are as follows:



Jane Woodall, Allen’s president is very concerned about Allen Corporation’s poor profitability. She asks Max Lemond, production manager, and Lester Bush, controller, to see if there are ways to reduce costs. After two weeks, Max returns with a proposal to reduce variable costs to 52% of revenues by reducing the costs Allen currently incurs for safe disposal of wasted plastic. Lester is concerned that this would expose the company to potential environmental liabilities. He tells Max, ?oWe would need to estimate so of these potential environmental costs and include them in our analysis.?? ?oYou can’t do that?? Max replies ?oWe are not violating any laws. There is some possibility that we may have to incur environmental cost the future, but if we bring it up now, this proposal will not go through because our senior management always assumes these costs to be larger than they turn out to be. The market is very tough, and we are danger of shutting down the company. We don’t want all our colleagues to lose their jobs. The only reason our competitors are making money is because they are doing exactly what I am proposing.??

1. Calculate Allen Corporation’s breakeven revenues for 2008.

2. Calculate Allen Corporation’s breakeven revenues if variable costs are 52% of revenues.

3. Calculate Allen Corporation’s operating income for 2008 if variable costs had been 52% of revenues

4. Given Max Lemond’s comments, what should Lester Bushdo?

the hotel 224 group prepares financial statements on a quarterly basis 268912

The Hotel 224 group prepares financial statements on a quarterly basis (every 3 months). The senior management is reviewing the performance of one of its hotels and making plans for the next year. The managers have in front of them the results for the year 2011 (based on some actual results and some forecasts at the end of the year):

Sales revenue Profit or (loss) Quarter 1 (Jan — March) R400 000 (R280 000) Quarter 2 (April — June) R1 200 000 R360 000 Quarter 3 (July — September) R1 600 000 R680 000 Quarter 4 (October — December) R800000 R40000 Total R4 000 000 R800 000

The total estimated number of guests who spent nights (guest nights) at the hotel for 2011 was 50 000 guests’ nights. The results follow a regular pattern and there are no unexpected cost fluctuations beyond the seasonal trading shown above. For the next year, management expects an increase in the unit variable cost by 10% and a profit target level of R1 000 000. These will be Incorporated Into the hotel’s plans.

Required:

(a) Define the terms fixed costs and variable costs. Explain how an understanding of the difference between fixed costs and variable costs can be useful to managers (Smarks)

(b)

Calculate the total variable and total fixed costs of the hotel for 2011. In your calculation (preferably using a table) show the provisional annual results for this year in total; showing the variable and fixed costs separately. Show also the revenue and cost per guest night. (15marks)

(c) If there is no increase in the guest nights for next year (2012), what will be the revenue rate per guest night be to meet the profit target for the year? (5marks)

(d) If the required revenue rate per guest night is not raised above this year’s level, how many guest nights will be required to meet the profit target for 2012? (Smarks)

a ¦ ¦

Attachments:

global textiles inc is considering three possible countries f 268931

Global Textiles, Inc., is considering three possible countries for the sole manufacturing site of its newest area rug: Singapore, Brazil, and the United States. All area rugs are to be sold to retail outlets in the United States for $250 per unit. These retail outlets add their own markup when selling to final customers. Fixed costs and variable cost per unit (area rug) differ in the three countries.



Required

1. Compute the breakeven point for Global Textiles, Inc., in each country in (a) units sold and (b) revenues.

2. If Global Textiles, Inc., plans to produce and sell 75,000 rugs in 2011, what is the budgeted operating income for each of the three manufacturing locations? Comment on theresults.

green grass incorporated is a distributor of golf balls garry s 268937

Green Grass Incorporated is a distributor of golf balls. Garry’s Golf Supplies is a local retail outlet which sells golf balls. Garry’s purchases the golf balls from Green Grass Incorporated at $0.75 per ball; the golf balls are shipped in cartons of 72. Green Grass Incorporated pays all incoming freight, and Garry’s Golf Supplies does not inspect the balls due to Green Grass’ reputation for high quality. Annual demand is 172,800 golf balls at a rate of 3,322 balls per week. Garry’s Golf Supplies earns 12% on its cash investments. The purchase order lead time is one week. The following cost data are available:

Relevant ordering costs per purchase order $125.00

Carrying costs per carton per year:

Relevant insurance, materials handling, Breakage, etc., per year $ 0.77

(a) What is the economic order quantity?

(b) Purchasing at the EOQ recommended level, what are the relevant total costs?”

(c) If Garry’s make an order (1/12 of annual demand) once per month, what are the revelant total costs?

in its first year of operations utah utility trailers incurred 268967

In its first year of operations, Utah Utility Trailers incurred the following costs:

Variable production cost …………………………. $2,800 per unit

Variable selling and administrative cost …………. 200 per unit

Fixed production cost ……………………………..$200,000

Fixed selling and administrative cost…………….. 80,000

For the year, the company reported the following results:

Sales ($5,000 per unit) ……………………$500,000

Cost of Goods Sold ……………………..(400,000)

Gross Margin …………………………….$100,000

Selling and Administrative Cost …………(100,000)

Operating Income ………………………. $0

a. Using the contribution margin ratio approach, compute the break even point for this company.

b. How many units did the firm produce in its first year of operations?

c. Provide an explanation that reconciles your result in (a) to the income statement provided above.

d. Prepare a variable costing income statement for sales of 100 units.

e. Assume that Utah Utility Trailers is in need of a bank loan. Would it be unethical to use the income statement above, rather than the income statement compiled in (d), to present to the loan officer? Explain.

jit production relevant benefits relevant costs ethics parso 268974

JIT production, relevant benefits, relevant costs, ethics. Parson Container Corporation is considering implementing a JIT production system. The new system would reduce current average inventory levels of $2,000,000 by 75%, but would require a much greater dependency on the company’s core suppliers for on time deliveries and high quality inputs. The company’s operations manager, Jim Ingram, is opposed to the idea of a new JIT system. He is concerned that the new system will be too costly to manage; will result in too many stockouts; and will lead to the layoff of his employees, several of whom are currently managing inventory. He believes that these layoffs will affect the morale of his entire production department. The plant controller, Sue Winston is in favor of the new system, due to the likely cost savings. Jim wants Sue to rework the numbers because he is concerned that top management will give more weight to financial factors and not give due consideration to nonfinancial factors such as employee morale. In addition to the reduction in inventory described previously, Sue has gathered the following information for the upcoming year regarding the JIT system:

Annual insurance and warehousing costs for inventory would be reduced by 60% of current budgeted level of $350,000.

Payroll expenses for current inventory management staff would be reduced by 15% of the budgeted total of $600,000.

Additional annual costs for JIT system implementation and management, including personnel costs, would equal $220,000.

The additional number of stockouts under the new JIT system is estimated to be 5% of the total number of shipments annually. 10,000 shipments are budgeted for the upcoming year. Each stockout would result in an average additional cost of $250.

Parson’s required rate of return on inventory investment is 10% per year.

Required

1. From a financial perspective should Parson adopt the new JIT system?

2. Should Sue Winston rework the numbers?

3. How should she manage Jim Ingram’s concerns?

jit production relevant benefits relevant costs the champion 268975

JIT production, relevant benefits, relevant costs. The Champion Hardware Company manufactures specialty brass door handles at its Lynchburg plant Champion is considering implementing a JIT production system. The following are the estimated costs and benefits of JIT production.

a. Annual additional tooling costs would be $100,000.

b. Average inventory would decline by 80% from the current level of $1,000,000.

c. Insurance, space, materials handling and setup costs, which currently total $300,000 annually, would decline by 25%.

d. The emphasis on quality inherent in JIT production would reduce rework costs by 30%. Champion currently incurs $200,000 in annual rework costs.

e. Improved product quality under JIT production would enable Champion to raise the price of its product by $4 per unit Champion sells 40,000 units each year.

Champion’s required rate of return on inventory investment is 15% per year

1. Calculate the net benefit or cost to Champion if it adopts JIT production at the Lynchburg plant.

2. What non financial and qualitative factors should Champion consider when making the decision to adopt JIT production?

3. Suppose Champion implements JIT production at its Lynchburg plant Give examples of performance measures Champion could use to evaluate and control JIT production. What would be the benefit of Champion implementing an enterprise resource planning (ERP) system?

jit purchasing relevant benefits relevant costs 268976

JIT purchasing, relevant benefits, relevant costs. (CMA, adapted) The Margro Corporation is an automotive supplier that uses automatic turning machines to manufacture precision parts from steel bars. Margro’s inventory of raw steel averages $600,000. John Dates, president of Margro, and Helen Gorman, Margro’s controller, are concerned about the costs of carrying inventory. The steel supplier is willing to supply steel in smaller lots at no additional charge. Gorman identifies the following effects of adopting a JIT inventory program to virtually eliminate steel inventory:

Without scheduling any overtime, lost sales due to stockouts would increase by 35,000 units per year However, by incurring overtime premiums of $40,000 per year, the increase in lost sales could be reduced to 20,000 units per year This would be the maximum amount of overtime that would be feasible for Margro.

Two warehouses currently used for steel bar storage would no longer be needed. Margro rents one warehouse from another company under a cancelable leasing arrangement at an annual cost of $60,000. The other warehouse is owned by Margro and contains 12,000 square feet Three fourths of the space in the owned warehouse could be rented for $1.50 per square foot per year. Insurance and property tax costs totaling $14,000 per year would be eliminated.

Margro’s required rate of return on investment is 20% per year Margro’s budgeted income statement for the year ending December 31, 2008 (in thousands) is as follows:



1. Calculate the estimated dollar savings (loss) for the Margro Corporation that would result in 2008 from the adoption of JIT purchasing.

2. Identify and explain other factors that Margro should consider before deciding whether to adopt JITpurchasing.

job costing with multiple direct cost categories multiple indir 268978

Job costing with multiple direct cost categories, multiple indirect cost pools, law firm. Wigan has two classifications of professional staff: partners and associates. Hanley asks his assistant to examine the relative use of partners and associates on the recent Widnes Coal and St. Helen’s jobs. The Widnes job used 24 partner hours and 80 associate hours. The St. Helen’s job used 56 partner hours and 40 associate hours. Therefore, totals of the two jobs together were 80 partner hours and 120 associate hours. Hanley decides to examine how using separate direct cost rates for partners and associates and using separate indirect cost pools for partners and associates would have affected the costs of the Widnes and St. Helen’s jobs. Indirect costs in each indirect cost pool would be allocated on the basis of total hours of that category of professional labor. From the total indirect cost pool of $7,000, $4,600 is attributable to the activities of partners, and $2,400 is attributable to the activities of associates.

The rates per category of professional labor are as follows:



1. Compute the costs of the Widnes and St. Helen’s cases using Wigan’s further refined system, with multiple direct cost categories and multiple indirect cost pools.

2. For what decisions might Wigan Associates find it more useful to use this job costing approach rather than the approaches in Problem 5 28 or5 29?